soe 
en ate ane 
-¥ oa 

Fes ie τατος τ Ke Fs ve Sect apts 5 αὐ a pe 
Cn Mt Tn Ὁ Feira, Taner πολ Selo ene 

ns et: 

Spans 

ees = 


Sent 
rae 


Pes 


a seactticcen 


iy 
δ 

Ἷ 
ἀκ} ἘΣ] 


ραν 
ro roads 


ou 
- 4 Pair ir fe nln St 
oo . SAD ro Ρ ΡΟΣ ΟΣ Wad 
ao Seen if 4 J Ἂς f Β f ae at 
Sn “δ. - ae es on tale 


ty 
BY 
ΜῊ 


τὴ 
ὃ 
es 
ΟΣ 


yy toe στα 
Ν srl 
aces ον ae 


Ne 
An 


i 


— 
F 


As Orne, 
Ἢ 
aro: 


¥en oe, 


« 


δῇ 


“ Ἂ 
ι os oe 
a ᾿ errs 


tf 


= 


AY 
τῇ 


he 


δ 


" 
ae a 


pra, 
POLLS 


a OL, 


AS. 


" 


~~ μ᾿ - - ΧΑ ᾿ τι - > Poet ane 
A oo = am στ τνς - » » SS 7 ; Σ 
ames ΩΝ _ ~ 

r ~ 


ire tse 
nae 


ee none ae LE ee 


ΟΣ ΩΣ ἐν. 


4 5 2 Γ 

J ? 

=‘ . 
᾿ 4 “ 
a 4 , ΄ 
/ 
. < ‘yg 
r 
i . 
. 2 ' ΠῚ 
΄ 

. * 

J 
7 d 
: 3 P ' 
τ " ᾿ γ Β ᾿ Ψ 
1 5 
᾿ Ἵ 4 : , Ὁ ᾿ 
! ay Σ: ἢ hi 
’ - ~ 
} “s i + ι : 
7 ᾿ ἶ - . » 
᾿ Ἷ 1 be 
= , ee) a Υ οἷ \ : . 
ie " ae . 
δ . ᾿ ) T εῷ 
- + ἢ of y ΕῚ lo . 
‘ 1 Px 


= Lp Tee Oe CRE 


ἔν 


— —* a> 


THE STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR 


A GRAMMAR 


OF THE 


GREEK LANGUAGE 


By DR. GEORGE CURTIUS£ 


PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LEIPZIG 


TRANSLATED UNDER THE REVISION OF THE AUTHOR 


EDITED BY 


WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D. 


CLASSICAL EXAMINER IN THE UNIVERSITY OF LONDON, AND EDITOR OF THE CLASSICAL 
AND LATIN DICTIONARIES 


- «Ὅττον 
\ 4 a κ᾿ κ é 
1 ἈΝ 2 Pe 
»- Ἢ πε 


CONTAINING VERSIFICATION AND LIST OF ὟΣ y ΤΕ me i*« 
By J. B. SEWALL, A.M. a ‘ 


Ἢ = 
PROFESSOR OF ANCIENT LANGUAGES, BOWDOIN ΕΞ 7; 25 AS ie 


---. 


NEW YORK 
HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS 
FRANKLIN SQUARE 


1882 


BOSTON COLLEGE LIBRARY 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS, 


_ 


PA2S8 
og γι 


EDITOR’S PREFACE. 


Tue Greek Grammar of Dr. Curtius is acknowledged 
by the most competent scholars, both in this country and 
in Germany, to be the hest representative of the present 
advanced state of Greek scholarship. It is, indeed, almost 
the only Grammar which exhibits the inflexions of the lan- 
guage in a really scientific form ; while its extensive use 
in the schools of Germany, and the high commendations 
it has received from practical teachers in that country, are 
sufficient proof of its excellence as a school-book. It is 
surprising to find that many of the public and private 
schools in this country continue to.use Grammars which 
ignore all the improvements and discoveries of modern 
philology, and still cling to the division of the substantives 
into ten declensions; the designation of the Second Perfect 
as the Perfect Middle, and similar exploded errors. Dr. 
Curtius has stated so fully in his Preface the principles on 
which this Grammar is constructed, that it is unnecessary 
to say more by way of introduction. It only remains to 
add that the translation has been made from the fifth edi- 
tion of the original work (1862), with the author’s sanction, 
and that the proof-sheets have enjoyed the advantage of 
his final correction and revision. 

An abridgment for the use of the lower forms is pub- 
lished simultaneously with the present work. 


Lonpon, March, 1863. 1 9 9 3 L/ 


VES: 


FROM THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 


Tue fact that within a few years the present Grammar 
has found its way into a large number of schools in various 
countries of Europe seems to me a satisfactory answer to 
the question whether a thorough knowledge of Greek is 
attainable by the method I have adopted. Much, there- 
fore, of what I thought it necessary to state on the first 
appearance of the book does not now require to be repeat- 
ed; but I consider it incumbent upon me to make some 
observations upon the objects and the use of the Grammar, 
and I beg to recommend these to the careful consideration 
of teachers. 

Few sciences have within the last half century been so 
completely reformed as the science of language. Not only 
has our insight into the nature and history of human speech 
been greatly advanced, but—and this is justly regarded as 
a matter of still greater importance — quite a different 
method in treating language in general has been discov- 
ered, after a new era had been opened up by the philo- 
sophical inquiries of William von Humboldt, and the his- 
torical investigations of Francis Bopp and Jacob Grimm. 
No one, unless he desires to exclude schools from the prog- 
ress thus made, and to confine them to the mechanical 
repetition of imperfect and antiquated rules, will probably 
doubt that the new knowledge, the principles of which 
have stood the test of nearly half a century, ought to exer- 
cise its influence on the teaching of language. 

If the teaching of a language in our schools is intended 


vl PREFACE. 


to lead not only to a thorough understanding of the mas- 
ter-works of literature, but at the same time to cultivate 
and stir up the youthful mind by independent exertion, 
and by occupation with a subject so.immensely rich, and so 
harmoniously quickening the most different mental powers 
as language, such teaching can not possibly continue to 
keep aloof from the progress of scientific inquiry, which is, 
unfortunately, still the case in many places. The teaching 
of Greek, however, seems to be specially called upon to 
make a commencement. The modern science of language 
has, indeed, exercised its influence on every part of gram- 
mar, but none has been more affected by it than the first, 
commonly called the accidence. In Latin, scientific in- 
quiry into the structure of the forms has not yet reached 
the same completeness as in Greek. The structure of the 
Latin language is less transparent, and we miss so many 
aids which we possess for the Greek in the high antiquity — 
of its literature and in its dialects. <A scientific treatment 
of the structure of the Latin language in schools is, more- 
over, a matter of great practical difficulty, on account of 
the early age at which the elements must necessarily be 
learned. We ought not, however, on this account, to sep- 
arate the teaching of Latin from all contact with scientific 
inquiry, the influence of which can show itself with adyan- 
tage, at least, in a more suitable arrangement and distribu- 
tion of the matter. Granting, therefore, that our boys, as 
heretofore, must commit to memory a large portion of Latin 
forms; granting that the most important object in learning 
in consists, perhaps, more in the acquisition of fixed 
laws of syntax, which obviously form the principal strength 
f the Latin language, the case of the Greek is different. 
The Greeks are justly called an artistic people, and the 
Greek language i is the most ancient work of art w hich they 


PREFACE. Vil 


haye reared upon a very primitive basis. The student, 
who approaches the Greek after he has already gone 
through a considerable preparation by the study of Latin, 
ought to be impressed with the idea that’ ‘the structure of 
ne language is one of the most mary elous productions of 
the Mellectizal powers acting unconsciously} Every thing 
hes here clear before us: the sources of our knowledge are 
more varied, and the necessity of analyzing the given forms 
is rendered so absolute, even on account of the Homeric 
dialect, that this analysis has, in fact, never been entirely 


wanting, and after the first appearance of Buttmann, in 


>? 
1782, made considerable progress. ‘The attempt, therefore, 
to connect in a still higher degree the practice of the school 
with the spirit of science, can here point to numerous 
precedents; and it is, no doubt, mainly owing to this cir- 
cumstance that it has met with so favorable a reception. 
My object has been to produce a consistent system, a care- 
ful selection, and a clear and precise exposition, rather 
than an entirely new system. 

In selecting and expounding the results of scientific in- 
quiry, | have always kept in view the idea that the book 
was intended for practical use in schools. The first requi- 
site, therefore, was not to admit any thing which is beyond 
the sphere of the school, to explain only that which is nec- 
essary, and to admit only that which is absolutely certain ; 
for a school-book must speak categorically, must exclude 
all matters of mere opinion, and has no space for discussion 
and inquiry. It is, however, perfectly indifferent whether 
a result has been obtained by special researches into the 
Greek language or by the more general inquiries of com- 
parative philology. 

I was farther obliged to admit only those things which 
find their explanation in the Greek language itself, or at 


Vill PREFACE. 


most in a comparison with the Latin; but even within 
these limits I have confined myself to such innovations as 
really afford an important insight into the structure of the 
forms, whereas all that belongs to philological learning and 
many other things have been passed over because they 
seemed unnecessary. Among such superfluous innovations 
I include especially all changes of terminology, and the 
entire alteration of whole parts οἵ grammar which are often 
still less necessary, but to which formerly too much impor- 
tance used to be attached. 

The new technical terms I have introduced haye gen- 
erally been approved of, and the principle stated in my 
Preface to the first edition, though not followed with pe- 
dantic consistency, “if possible, to put significant names in 
the place of dead numbers,” as, for e. g., A Declension, Ὁ 
Declension, instead of First and Second Declension, will 
scarcely be found fault with, for a name with a meaning at 
once gives a piece of information, and therefore facilitates 
learning. Doubts have been raised only about the expres- 
sions strong. and weak, which I have employed to distin- 
guish the two Aorists and Perfects. I am as well aware 
now as I was at the first that, from the point of view of 
scientific inquiry, much may be said against the expressions, 
but I nevertheless feel that I can not give them up. For 
the old designation by numbers is unsatisfactory, unless 
we are prepared for its sake either to sacrifice a more con- 
sistent arrangement of the verb, or to mislead the pupil by 
calling the Aorist which is treated of first the second, and 
first the one with which he is made acquainted afterward. 
But a common name to distinguish the two forms of the 
Aorist Active Middle and Passive, and of the Perfect 
Active, is indispensable in a system of Greek Grammar. 
An innovation had here become necessary, for both neg- 


PREFACE, ix 


ative and positive reasons. The expressions strong and 
weak have this advantage—that, after being introduced by 
Grimm into his German Grammar, they have also been 
adopted by English grammarians; and, though I use them 
not quite in the same sense, they are easily intelligible. 
It will surely not be difficult to make a pupil understand) 
that those forms are called s¢rong which spring from the’ 
root, as it were, by an internal agency, and weak those 
which are formed by syllables added externally, especially | 
as he may easily compare the English take, took, and love, 
loved. I still know of no designation which, with so few 
disadvantages, offers so many advantages as this, and I shall 
retain it until a better one is suggested; and, after all, in 
necessary innovations, it is often more important that men 
agree than on what they agree. 

The fact that the most essential changes I have made in 
the arrangements of the subjects—as, for example, the strict 
adherence to the system of Stems in all the inflexions, and 
especially the division of the verb according to temporal 
Stems—have met with the approval of practical teachers, 
has been to me a source of great gratification, it being a 
clear proof that the demands of scientific inquiry are by no 
means so much opposed to a right system of teaching as 
is still imagined by many. The arrangement of temporal 
Stems is made less upon scientific than upon didactic 
grounds, in such a manner that kindred forms are joined 
together, and due regard is paid to the progress from that 
which is easy to that which is more difficult. 

The chapter on the formation of words, though somewhat 
enlarged, has, for the same reasons, still been kept very brief. 
But, in treating of the verbs, I have directed attention to 
the formation of verbal nouns: in treating of the verbs of 
the different classes, I have “always directed attention, by a 

1* 


Χ PREFACE. 


number of characteristic examples, to the application of the 
different Stems in the formation of words. By this means 
the learner has an opportunity, during the study of his 
grammar, of making himself acquainted with a number of 
words, and I have no doubt that teachers will give their 
sanction to this arrangement. 

In regard to Syntax, the positive results of recent lin- 
guistic inquiries are as yet less numerous. [ἢ this part of 
the Grammar, therefore, I follow the principle of stating 
the essential idioms of the Greek language with the utmost 
possible precision and in the utmost logical order. Only 
in some chapters, especially in that on the use of the tenses, 
does my system present considerable differences from the 
usual one. All minute disquisitions, conjectures, and more 
or less probable theories—among them especially the ever- 
repeated theory about the original local meaning of the 
cases, with which I can not agree at all—have been rigor- 
ously excluded. In this part, also, I have never neglected 
to compare the phenomena of the Greek language with the 
corresponding ones of Latin, and occasionally also of En- 
glish, where this could be done with brevity and adyan- 
tage; for as the usage of a language must be mainly com- 
prehended by a feeling of language, I imagine that every 
appeal to a Latin usage already embodied with our feeling 
of language, or to an English usage familiar to us from 
childhood, advances our knowledge much more than philo- 
sophical definitions or technical terms of vague or various 
meanings. For the same reason, I every where attach 
great importance to an accurate translation of a Greek 
idiom 3 into English or Latin, I need hardly euard myself 

gainst the opinion that I considered such a translation to 
be a philosophical explanation of a linguistic phenomenon. 
A real explanation is beyond the problem of a Grammar. 


PREFACE. ΧΙ 


I scarcely need repeat here that the present book is not 
intended, like an Elementary Grammar, to be committed 
to memory paragraph by paragraph; but, in teaching, a 
suitable selection, according to the degree of the pupil’s 
advancement, should be made by the teacher. By a dif- 
ference in type I have myself, at least partially, indicated 
this. | 

It may be remarked in general that the first business 
every where is that of memory, and only when the actual 
forms, with the aid of the paradigms, have been committed 
to memory, analysis may be added. © First /nowledge, then 
understanding: ithis ought to be the leading principle; 
but, as I have said in another place, “ Memory can neither 
accurately grasp the great variety of Greek forms nor re- 
tain them, unless it be supported by an analyzing and com- 
bining intelligence, which furnishes, as it were, the hooks 
and cement to strengthen that which has been learned, 
and permanently to impress it upon the mind.” If details 
learned at different times and carefully committed to mem- 
ory, during a subsequent repetition variously combine with 
one another and form various groups; if, then, many things, 
at first sight strange, appear to the pupil in the light of a 
law pervading the language, such insight is certainly not a 
mere support of memory, but animates the desire to learn, 
and incites to exercise the power of thought in a variety 
of ways. The present book offers to teachers abundant 
opportunities for such exercises, and acquires its highest 
efficacy under the guidance of thinking teachers who are 
truly familiar with it, and take a delight in its subjects. 
That the book has actually found such teachers has been 
proved to me in various ways, and caused me sincere grat- 


ification. - iC; 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 
THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 
FIRST PART.—ETYMOLOGY. 
I. Letters and Sounds. 


CHAPTER I. 
THE GREEK CHARACTERS. 


ror gun ῖ πτμλυῦπτ . τ τ ee oe § 1-9 
ΝΕ ΕἸ ΟΞ τε στ λον πο πο ee as 10-16 
EL DIS ale rr ae eed 17-22 
AE AE pe el τὰ a i ς 23 


CHAPTER II. 


THE SOUNDS. 
ΝΞ τ ΡΡ το του yt ce τὸς τὴν. 6 ee το 24-29 
Sener ΒΟ. cee ween Pa te Ned ale ged ab Ld 30-34 


CHAPTER III. 
COMBINATIONS AND CHANGES OF SOUNDS. 


mawnwerm im Combination 222550525 ρον οι τον οτος ον 35-89 
ΓΟ ΟΥΠΟΣ kinds Of Vowel Changes :_.:.:......-.-.2.-2.27-- 40-43 
C. Consonants in Combination with one another _.._......-- 44-54 
D. Other Changes in the Middle of a Word._._...-.-..--..-- 55-62 
E. Changes of Sound at the End of a Word _._._..._...---- 63-69 


CHAPTER IV. 
DIVISION OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR QUANTITY. 


INET CUP UUA DIES). 5% eS ere 2 Boy a ee 70-73 
TE ici ee ah ae ae Sate Ὡς See S 74-78 


CHAPTER Y. 
ΔΌΣ y ee Re Ce en a eae 79-99 


X1V CONTENTS. 


II. Infiexion. 
A. INFLEXION oF Nouns AND PRONOUNS, 


CHAPTER VI. 
DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND ADJECTIVES. 


Pode As. 
First ῬΕΙΝΟΙΡΑΙ, (OR VOWEL) DECLENSION. μὰ : 

A. The A Declension ᾿ς. Ὡς τ 43. Lu. oe § 112-113 
(commonly called the First Declension.) 

1, ΘΙ ΠΙΠδΆ. το πὸ τς γεν κε πο 114-119 

2. Masculines ___-. νυ Ὁ 120-123 

B. The © Declension.. ς΄ το το ee 124-131 
(commonly called the Second Declension.) 

Attic Declension __2...0....2°_2.1 3S 132-133 
SECOND PRINCIPAL (OR CONSONANT) DECLENSION ._..__--- 135-143 
(commonly called the Third Declension.) 

1. Consonant Stems : 
a. Guttural and Labial Stems ._._.)_._ τι. 144-145 
b, Derital Stems ¢ τ ΠΝ 146-149 
ὁ, Liquid Βἰοιηβ.. 2. {|| {τ ὉΠ ἘΝ 
2. Vowel Stems: 
a. Soft Vowel Stems /.........-..... ee 154-158 
b. Diphthong Stems’. .....-......... πο 159-161 
c. O Stems 2... 2. iy Soe ee τ 162-168 
3. Stems suffering Elision: 
a. Sigma Stems: 22)... 22. 2 164-167 
b, Stems 7 or 2. LS eS Se 168-169 
Ὁ ΘΒ: ἐς τς του occ en wile eee 170-171 
Irregularities in Declension..-......_..... 030 174-177 
Case-like Terminations .....-...2.22.-.. τυ 178-179 
HAPTER VII. 
OTHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
oY, (EDU Ce ἐπ τον τ ere 180-191 
BACOMPATISON . Ὁ .ὐὖὧδὃὉῳνδ vin wie bo 192-200 
©. 2cdverbs of Adjectives. ..... 2.02. <.- +.+--2<inneee 201-204 
CHAPTER VIII. 
INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS ...--....-. 205-219 


CHAPTER IX. 
THE NUMERALS......... cage 220-224 


CONTENTS. XV 
B. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 


LIST OF PARADIGMS. Table. 


a a a οοορνουννυσς : 
Synopsis of λύω, [loose (exhibiting the meanings ofthe Tenses) I. 


VERBS IN Q. 
A. Vowel Stems: 


πιο Ni oo os oo ee eee τ: III. 
2. Contracted, τιμάω, ποιέω, δουλόω. ....--«-τοςς τν νος IV. 
B. Consonant Stems: 
1. Guttural Stems, πλέκω, φεύγω, τάσσω.. ...-.------- V. 
2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, eopifw ....--------- VIC 
3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, λείπω, καλύπτω.....--------.- VII. 
4, Liquid Stems, déow, ἀγγέλλω, oréipw ..------------ VIII. 
VERBS IN MI. 
SERRE TIGHT, OCOWPiL, ἵστημε 2-2 2c. ον ὡς τὶ τος Σιν ςς ΙΧ. 
ΝΞ ιυρύηα 0. a ποτ τὸ το ΠΣ δι. 


CHAPTER Χ. 
FIRST PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN Q. 
I. The Present-Stem : 


A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem ..............--- § 231-233 
SMRUR UCTS sooo. 2 rol se Seale νον ον i ee 234-242 
rracret VOTOS. τ Ἢ SS Pek oe boo eee ee 243-244 

D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal 
SEE GP St ae fee de ME nae 245-253 
ΕΝ το Εἰτόπο Aorist-Stem. ὐπὸ ων νοῦς 254-257 
πὴ ηητο- PILOT Spas et oe OO co eat 258-266 
πο Weak Aorist-Stem.. 02>... - 0c... eee cee lee 267-271 
ΝΠ ΟΡ ρος co ee cee cc cconclccdes 272 
Pe νοι αι εῖς δεν οτος Ua oe SS Foe CoS 276-282 
BePlUnerioce ACKYE. creo fee erie oT eee eee 283 
8. Perfect Middle and Passive ................-.-- 284-289 
4, Pluperfect Middle and Passive -..............-- 290-291 
VI. Forms of the Strong Passive Stem ᾿ς... Ὁ: τ τος 292-295 
VII. Forms of the Weak Passive Stem................--- 296-299 
ΝΥ ΟΡ Ὁ bane seaes Ss 300 


Verbs which leave their Stem-Vowel short ...........-- 301 


XV1 CONTENTS, 


CHAPTER XI. 

SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, OR VERBS IN MI. 
Preliminary Remarks... 3)... 225-23 2 eee § 302-304 
Li irst: Class. ck Re ec ee eee 305-317 
2. Second Classi ede deci lee es Se 318-319 


CHAPTER XII. 


IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION . 320-327 


Anomalies in Signification .......-.- -..-5-ss>-2s eee 328-330 
Outlines of the Accentuation of Verbal Forms .........--- 331-333 
Peculiar Verbal Forms of the Ionic Dialect.........- 334 D—338 Ὁ. 


III. Derivation. 
CHAPTER XIII. 


A. Simple Derivatives 2.22020. ee 339-340 
1. The most important Suffixes for forming Substan- 
LIVES 2. od ke ee ὦ τ 9... 341-349 
2. The most important Suffixes for forming Adjectives.. 850-352 
8: Derivative Verbs... ᾿ς 353 
B. Compound Derivatives : ; 
1, Form of the Combination _............... ον 304-358 
2. Meaning of Combination...........- έν 309-360 


SECOND PART.—SYNTAX. 


Preliminary Remarks. 0222.7.) Se eee 361 


CHAPTER XIV. 


NUMBER AND GENDER .:......--20 362-867 


CHAPTER XV. 


THE ARTICLE ΣΙ ΤῸ 368-391 


CHAPTER XVI. 


USE OF CASES: 


PIM ONMBAUIV Coc a oso da clnxy Scape eck odes one uae 392-393 
Per Owatlve cers Se ee ee. eee 394 
GCACCIBALIVG. σου ccc ces ook ee et ΘΝ 395-406 
θυ ee ce ee eee 407-428 
BMeDatl ve sow ck oe re ee ae 429-443 


CONTENTS. XVll 


CHAPTER XVII. 


THE PREPOSITIONS ... 24 .2s<esee § 444 

General View of the Prepositions ...............-2...-.- * 448 

1. Prepositions which take only One Case......-....-.-.-- 449-457 

2. Prepositions which take Two Cases ...............-.-- 458-461 

3. Prepositions which take Three Cases -............-.-.- 462-468 
CHAPTER XVIII. 

THE PRONOUNS ....22. ose oes 469-475 


CHAPTER XIX. 
THE KINDS OF VERBS.2 oe 476-483 


CHAPTER XX. 


USE" OF “THE ‘TENSES 2.22. 0003. ss 484 
1. The forms for the Incomplete Action.................- 486-491 
2. The forms for the Indefinite (Aorist) Action...-......-. 492-498 
Ce et eT στ τὺ ee ae 3 ee 499-501 
4, The forms for the Complete Action............-...--.- 502-506 


CHAPTER XXII. 
USE OF THE MOODS. 
A. In Simple Sentences: 


ΝΥ A OE Ba: Ale ολισι ρον en 507 
No th eS ot ad tee 508-513 
in. ae Sap cee een oe 514-517 
I Sen a eo Se ot ae one ee 518 
B. In Compound Sentences: 
Connexion of Sentences with one another.........--- 519-524 
1. Dependent, Declarative, and Interrogative Sentences 525-529 
meeentences expressing ἃ purpose. _.,......--.----en 530-533 
ΠΝ ὐΠΙ 081 MENTCNCES oe oo eco nae oe ace 534-550 
IRC? ODEN es tee ee ee 551-555 
ΠΟΥ ΠΟΤΕ PENLENCES. fie oo se 4g ee ΠΡΟΣ 556-558 


CHAPTER XXII. 
THE INFINITIVE. 


meaee-oc the Infinitive in general .-.... 2. oe eee nnn 559-566 
2. The Case of the Subject and Predicate with the Infinitive 567-572 
oi ne Infinitive with the Article _:...........-.-..----- 573-574 
ME MAYS WALD G4) ho ou conn cece ccceéucucuecees 575-576 


5. The Infinitive instead of the Imperative..............-- 577 


XV1ll CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER XXIII. 


ON PARTICIPLES. 


1;Attributive Use. 2 aces rerar2. πος ee § 578 
2. Appositive Use zs less foci... ΣΕ eee 579-583 
3. The Participle with an Absolute Case._.............-- 584-586 
4, Supplements to Participles. -....2.._.-._. πε 587-588 
5. The Predicative Participles. ..-...2...:2. 05. ee 589-594 
θ. The Participle with ἄν. τς -ξοςς νου τ. 595 
4. Verbal Adjectives. 2... 02... a0. 020 os eee συ 596 


CHAPTER XXIV. 


SOME PECULIARITIES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES... 597-605 


CHAPTER XXYV. 


INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES .....----- 606-611 


CHAPTER XXVI. 


THE NEGATIVES. 


1, Use of Simple Negatives... ............-.35 one 612-618 
2. Several Negatives combined ..—.._....:.-.. 32 619-621 
3; some Negative Phrases. ........-3.+.-2.-. 622 


CHAPTER XXVII. 


THE PARTICLES. 


A. Conjunctions, 2.200.022 52. πεν τς τ ΕΝ 623 
1,/Copulative Conjunctions._~.-... 2... 624-625 
2. Disjunctive OC let ek co Vee τ΄ 626-627 
3. Adversative δε 2 cate wis cece woe 628-630 
4, Comparative Oo SUSE n Se be nine a 631-632 
5. Declarative ται... 633 
6. Temporal Mon Nn eS ee 634-635 
7. Causal (Co AUS SS Ὁ 636 
8. Inferential AO ere τν τον πη... ᾿ς 087 
9. Final Cg. waite Sens LS ee 6388 
10. Hypothetical ns cn a cs ety em 2S ee ee 639 
11. Concessive Cen eee cians eee 640 
Beeaphatic Particles ~..........8eeb se Ν 641-643 
Page 
ΠΝ ΟΥΑΙ ΕΓ ΓΝ ΤΗΣ, πονῶ, ἐμεῖς ca pkebepnacesce ΣΤΉΝ 353 


‘GREE INDEX oo ee ΚΣ ako rc cee eee 307 


i 


THE 


STUDENT'S GREEK GRAMMAR. 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND ITS DIALECTS. 


Tue Greek language is the language of the Ancient 
Hellenes (Ἕλληνες), the inhabitants of Greece, with all 
its islands and numerous colonies. It is related to the 
languages of the Indians, Persians, Romans, Slavonians, 
Lithuanians, Germans, and Celts. These are all sister- 
languages, and together form the Indo-European family. 

The Greeks were early divided into races, each of which 
spoke a different dialect. The chief dialects of the Greek 
language are the Molic, Doric, and Ionic. At first each 
race employed its own dialect both in poetry and in prose. 

1. The Ionic dialect was spoken by the Ionic race, es- 
pecially in Asia Minor and Attica, in numerous islands, 
and in the Ionic colonies. It was the first of the dialects 
developed by poetry, and produced three different but 
nearly related dialects, viz. : 

a) The Old-Lonic or Epic dialect, which is preserved 
in the poems of Homer and Hesiod as well as of their fol- 
lowers. 

ὁ) The New-Tonic dialect, which we know chiefly from 
the history of Herodotus. 

Obs.—The Old and New Tonic dialects are also designated by the 

common name Jonic, as distinguished from the Attic. 

6) The Attic dialect, in which are written the numerous 
works in poetry and prose produced at Athens in the time 


2 INTRODUCTION. 


of her glory. The principal writers of the Attic dialect 
are—the tragedians /Mschylus, Sophocles, Euripides, the 
comic writer Aristophanes, the historians Thucydides and 
Xenophon, the philosopher Plato, the great orators Lysias, 
Demosthenes, and /&schines. Through the importance 
of Athens in Greece, and the excellence of the Attic lit- 
erature, the Attic became the chief dialect of the Greek 
language. 


0bs.—A less important distinction is made between the earlier and 
later Attic writers. The tragedians and Thucydides belong to 
the earlier Attic, and the remaining authors to the later. The 
language of Plato is intermediate between the two: that of the 
tragedians has also many other peculiarities. 


2. The ZEoxic dialect was spoken by the Aolians, par- 
ticularly in Asia Minor, Beeotia, and Thessaly. Alczus and 
Sappho wrote in this dialect. 

3. The Doric dialect was spoken by the Dorians, chief- 
ly in Northern Greece, in the Peloponnesus, in Crete, and 
in the numerous Doric colonies, especially Sicily and Lower 
Italy. Doric is essentially the dialect of Pindar’s lyric 
poems and Theocritus’s bucolics (herdsman’s poetry). The 
choruses in the tragedies also contain some Doric forms. 

4, After Athens ceased to be the leading city in Greece, 
the Attic dialect still remained the language of educated 
Greeks. But it soon began to degenerate from its primi- 
tive purity and excellence, and thus, from the third century 
before Christ, the common Greek dialect (ἡ κοινὴ διάλεκτος) 
was distinguished from the Attic. 

On the boundary-line between the older Attic and the 
common Greek dialect stands the great philosopher A7%s- 
totle. Among later authors, the most important are—the 
historians Polybius, Plutarch, Arrian, Dion Cassius ; the 
geographer Strabo ; the rhetoricians Dionysius of [Tali- 
—carnassus and Lucian. | 


PART FIRST. 


mee Yo M- O-L-O GY. 


I. LETTERS AND SOUNDS. 


Cuap. 1.--- ΤῊ GREEK CHARACTERS. 


A. Letters. 


§ 1. The Greek letters are the following: 


Large Character. Small Character. 


Dees OeRSEFMUVACHAZSPFAM ORNS PUSS 


QDR SOME ER PART OBEN ORDER 


Ne 


Ξ Ε-ὸὸ oc ἡ 


Name. 
Alpha 
Beta 
Gamma 
Delta 
Epsilon 
Zeta 
Eta 
Theta 
Tota 
Kappa 
Lambda 
Mu 
Nu 
Xi 
Omikron 
Pi 
Rho‘ 
Sigma 
Tau 
Upsilon 
Phi 
Chi 
Psi 


Oméga 


Pronunciation. 


a, (short or long). 


(only εἰδῇ t). 


(only fans 


ERI rs ἧς, 


ma t or long). 


(only short). 


acest 2 BS OK BO Pr eek ON Oc BI oF BKC 


i (aor t or long). 
ph. 


ps. 
6 (only long). 


4 LETTERS. | ὃ 2. 


§ 2. For s there is a double sign in the small character: 
σ at the beginning and in the middle, and ¢ at the end of 
a word. Hence σύν, σείω, ἦσαν, but πόνος, κέρας. In 
compound words ¢ may also stand at the end of the first 
word in the compound: προς-ἔέρχομαι, δύς-βατος. 

§ 3. From the names of the first two letters arose the 
expression “ Alphabet.” ‘The characters of the Greek al-— 
phabet do not essentially differ from those of the Latin — 
and of modern languages. All come from the alphabet of 
the Phoenicians. 

In regard to pronunciation, the following points are to 
be observed : 


§ 4. All Greek letters are always pronounced alike. 
But y is an exception, since, before y, x, x, or &, it is 
pronounced ng. Hence in Latin it is represented by n - 
τέγγω is pronounced tengo ; συγκαλῶ, syngkalo ; λόγχη, 
longché; φόρμιγξ, phormina. | 

§ 5. Z is pronounced like the English 2. It is of very 
different origin in different cases. Compare μείζων (for 
μέγιων) from μέγας ; ζυγόν with lace jugum, English 
yoke, etc. 


§ 6. @ we pronounce as f, but orobab Vaal Grecks pro- 
nounced the p and / separately ; hence pA, not f, is used 
in Latin for @: φιλοσοφία, philosophia ; Φιλοκτήτης, Phi- 
toctetes. 

§ 7. 8 we pronounce like the English ¢A. 


§ 8. Of the diphthongs, αὐ and εἰ are both pronounced 
as ev in height ; οἱ, as oy m boy; av, as ow In sour; ov, 
as ow In tour, ul, as τοῦ in wing; ev and nv, as ew in few. 
The iota subseriptum (underwritten) is not pronounced in 


§ 3. Dialects.—The Greek language had in the most ancient times 
another letter, F, which was called Digamma (dityappa—“ double gam- 
ma”) from its form, and Va (Fai) from its pronunciation. It was 
pronounced like the Latin ὦ. Fotvoc, wine —Lat. vinum. At a later 
time it was written only by the Aolians and Dorians. 


ὃ 14, OTHER CHARACTERS. 5 


a, ἢ, ῳ. It is not written under, but after capitals, as Αἱ, 
Hz, Qu, but still remains unpronounced. 


§ 9. When two vowels, usually pronounced together, are 
to be pronounced separately, the latter has over it a diere- 
sis (διαίρεσις =separiiion): thus πάϊς is pronounced pa-zs Ὁ 
ἄϊπνος, U-Upnos. 


B. Other Characters. 


§ 10. Besides the letters, the Greek language has also 
the sign *, which is placed over the initial vowel to which 
it eee and represents the 4: ἕξ is pronounced lez; 
ἅπαξ, hapac. This sign is called spiritus asper, “rough 
breathing.” 


ὃ 11. For more exact distinction, the Greeks also mark 
those initial vowels which have not this breathing with the 
sion ᾿, 2. 6., the spiritus lenis, “ gentle breathing.” This 
sound indicates only the raising of the voice which is nec- 
essary for the pronunciation of a vowel when no consonant 
precedes: ἐκ is pronounced ek ; ἄγω, ago. 


§ 12. In diphthongs the breathing stands over the second 
vowel: ovrog=houtos ; cisov=eidon. But when the first 
yowel is in large character, the breathing stands before it: 


“Αιδης = LTades ; ?Qidh = Ode. 

§ 13. Every initial p -has the spiritus asper over it: 
ῥαψῳδός, ῥεῦμα. In Latin the aspirate is written after 
the p: rhapsodus, rheuma. When two p’s come together 
in a word,’ is usually placed over the first, and ἡ over the 
second: [léppoc=Pyrrhus ; KadXippon= Callirrhoe. 

Obs.—Many write the double » without any breathing: Πύρρος: 

Καλλιρρόη. 


§ 14. As in Latin, so in Greek, the sign ~ over a vowel 
denotes that the vowel is long,™~ that it is short, and = that 
it is sometimes one, sometimes the other. In Greek they 
are used only with the vowels a, ει, v, since ε, ἡ, 0, w, are 
distinguished by their form. 


6 ACCENTS. § 15. 


§ 15. The sign’ at the junction of two words indicates 
the omission of a vowel or diphthong, and is then called 
an apostrophe : map’ ἐκείνῳ for παρὰ ἐκείνῳ, with that one ; 
μὴ yo for μὴ ἐγώ (ne ego). 

§ 16. The same sign has the name coronis (κορωνίς) 
when it stands over the junction of two words contracted 
into one: τοὔνομα for τὸ ὄνομα, the name; κἀγαθός for 
καὶ ἀγαθός, and good. It indicates that a erases (κρᾶσις, 
mixture) or contraction of two words has taken place, and, 
like the breathing, stands over the second vowel of a diph- 
thong: ταὐτό for τὸ αὐτό, the same. 


C. Accents. 


§ 17. The Greeks also indicate the tone or ACCENT 
(προςῳδία) of words. The sign’ over a vowel is called 
the acute accent (ὀξεία προςῳδία), that is, the sharp or 
raised tone: λόγος, τούτων, παρά, ἕτερος. The syllable 
thus marked must be raised above the rest. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last syllable is 
called owytone (ὀξύτονον): παρά, εἰπέ, βασιλεύς. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but one is 
called paroxytone (παροξύτονον) : λέγω, φαίνω. 

A word having the acute accent upon the last but two 
is called proparoxytone (προπαροξύτονον): λέγεται, εἴπετε. 


§ 18. Obs.—A. proparozxytone, having a long vowel or diphthong in 
the second syllable of the word, ought to be pronounced so as to 
give the accent on the third syllable, and yet preserve the length 
of the second syllable: βέβηκα should be pronounced bébeka ; 
ἀπόβαινε, apobaine. 


§ 19. The sign ‘ over a vowel is called the grave accent 
(βαρεῖα προςῳδία). It indicates a dow tone, that is, that 
a syllable is not raised in tone. Thus in ἀπόβαϊνὲ, the 
last two might have the grave accent. The marking of 
them, however, would be superfluous, the absence of the 
acute being a sufficient guide. All words without an 


§ 23. PUNCTUATION. 7 


accent on the final syllable are thereforé cailed barytone 
(Baptrova): λέγω, ἕτερος. 

§ 20. The sign *, however, also denotes a subdued acute, 
and occupies the place of an acute in every oxytone not 
immediately followed by a pause: ἀπό, from, but ἀπὸ 
τούτου, from this , Paoirsbe, a king, but βασιλεὺς ἐγένετο, 
he became king. Oxytones, therefore, retain their accent 
unchanged only at the end of a sentence. 


ὃ 21. The sign~ over a vowel is called the curcumfiex 
accent (περισπωμένη προςῳδία), from its shape. The cir- 
cumflex is a combination of the acute and the grave, “. 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable is called 
perispomenon (περισπώμενον): ἀγαθοῖς, σκιᾶς. 

A word having a circumflex on the last syllable but 
one is called properispomenon SRE  ψρν ΔΩΙΣ φεῦγε, 
βῆτε. 

§ 22. In diphthongs, the accent, like the breathing (§ eae 
is put over the second vowel: φεύγει, τοῦτο. 

When the circumflex accent and the breathing meet upon 
the same vowel, the accent is placed over the breathing : 
οὗτος, ἦθος, Qroc. The acute, in a similar case, stands to 
the right of the breathing: ἄγε, ἔρχομαι, Ἴων. 


Obs.—The acute is placed between the two points of a dieresis (9), 
ἀΐδιος, but the circumflex over.them, πραῦναι. 


D. Punctuation. 


§ 23. For the purpose of dividing sentences and periods, 
the Greeks employ the comma and the full-point. For 
the sign of interrogation they use the semicolon: τί εἶπας ; 
what did you say?> For the colon or semicolon they 
place a point at the upper part of the line: ἐρωτῶ tpac ° 
τί ἐποιήσατε; Lask you: what did you do? ἑσπέρα iv’ 
τότε ἦλθεν ἄγγελος, tt was evening; then ὦ messenger 
came. 


8 VOWELS. § 24, 


Cuap. Il.—THE ΒΟΥΝΌ. 
A. The Vowels. 


§ 24. The Greek language, like the Latin, has five vow- 
els, of which the first four are like the Latin, ὦ, 6, 9, 2. 
But instead of the Latin w, the Greeks have v (pronounced | 
nearly like the French w and the German τ). 


§ 25. The vowels, apart from the distinction of long and 
short, are divided into two classes—the hard and the soft 
vowels: a, εν, ἢ», 0, w, are hard; v, «, soft. 


§ 26. From the union of hard and soft vowels together 
arise diphthongs (δίφθογγοι, ἡ. 6., double-sounds). They 


- are: 
av, from a and v._ ov, from o and v. 
TR Sap als το ΤΥ ol, ΠΡ 
ev, ““ ΠΡῸΣ par ye nu, § .n © wv 
εἰ, T3 py eee 


§ 27. The union of long hard vowels with ὁ produces the 


§ 24. Dialects——The Dialects, in many words and forms, admit dif- 
ferent vowels from those usual in the Attic dialect. Thus: 

1. The Jonie (Epic and New-Ionic) dialect prefers ἡ for Attic 
a: Att. θώραξ, Ion. θώρηξ, breastplate ; Att. ἀγορά, Ion. ἀγορή, market ; 
Att. ναῦς, Ion. νηῦς, ship; but Ion. μεσαμβρίη for Att. μεσημβρία, mid- 
day. 

2. The Doric, on the contrary, prefers ἃ: Att. δῆμος, Dor. δᾶμος, 
people ; Att. μήτηρ, mother, Dor. μάτηρ (comp. Latin mater) ; Dor. ᾿Αθάνα 
for ᾿Αθηνᾶ, goddess Athena, even in Attic poets. 

8. The Ionic dialect often changes ε to εἰ, and o to ov: Att. ξένος, 
Ion. ξεῖνος, foreign ; At. ἕνεκα, Ion. εἵνεκα, on account of ; Att. μόνος, Lon. 
μοῦνος, alone ; Att. ὄνομα, Ion. οὔνομα, name. Rarely o to οι, or a to ac: 
Att. ἠγνόησε, Ion. ἠγνοίησε, he knew not. - 


§ 26. Dialects—The New-Ionic dialect has moreover the diphthong 
wv, which, however, only comes in place of av in the other dialects. 
θωῦμα for θαῦμα, wonder ; ἑωυτοῦ for ἑαυτοῦ, of himself: wv must be 
pronounced as ow, 


§ 33. CONSONANTS. 9 


spurious diphthongs a, ἢ, w, in which the underwritten 
iota is not heard. (Compare § 8.) 


§ 28. The Greek language also combines v with 1, but 
only before vowels: μυῖα, ὦ jly. 

§ 29. We farther distinguish the obscure o-sound (0, w), 
the medium a-sound (a), and the clear e-sound (ε, n), and 
the more obscure v from the clearer ε. 


B. The Consonants. 


§ 30. The consonants are divided: I. According to 
the position in the mouth where they are produced, 
ὦ. @, according to their organ (dpyavov, “ instrument”), 
into : 

1. GUTTURALS (throat-sounds), x, y, x. 
2. DENTALS (teeth-sounds), τ, 0, 0, v, A, Py O- 
8. LABIALS  (lip-sounds), π, β, φ, μ. 


§ 31. II. According to their power, that is, whether they 
can be pronounced with or without a vowel, into: 


8 32. 1. MurEs (mute): 
(a.) hard (tenues), κ, τ, π᾿ 


(ὁ.) soft (mediz), γ, ὃ, β. 
(c.) aspirated (aspirate), χ, θ, φ. 
0bs.—The aspirated consonants contain each a hard consonant 
with the rough breathing, y therefore=«' (kh); @=r' (th); 9¢= 
a (ph). 
ὃ 33. 2. VocALs (semivocales): 
(a.) Liquids (liquide), 2, p. 
(0.) Nasals (nasales), y (y before gutturals, § 4), v, μ. 
(c.) Stbilant (sibilans), o (¢). 


ὃ 32. Dialects—In the Ionic dialect the aspirates often lose the 
breathing: δέκομαι for Attic δέχομαι, accept; αὖτις for Attic αὖϑις, 
again. The New-Ionic sometimes transposes the breathing: κιθών 
for Attic χιτών, tunic ; ἐνθεῦτεν for Attic ἐντεῦθεν. 


Α 2 


10 VOWELS IN ΟΟΜΒΙΝΑΤΊΟΝ. § 34. 


§ 34. The double consonants belong to both kinds: 
ξ, ψ, 0: for E=xo, ψξξε πο, €=6, with a soft sibilant 
(§ 5). 


0bs.—xo only occurs in compounds with ἐκ : ἐκσώζω, I rescue, 


Cuap. III.—ComMBiINATIONS AND CHANGES OF 
SOUNDS. 


A. Vowels in Combination. 


§ 35. In the inner part of a word not all vowels may 


ὃ 34. Dialects—A peculiarity of the Greek language is the want 
of the breathing v The 2, however, was not altogether wanting; 
for— | 

1. The digamma (§ 3, D.) occurred in the Homeric dialect in 
the beginning of the following words: ἄγνυμι, break ; ἅλις, numer- 
Ous ; ἁλίσκομαι, am caught ; ἄναξ, ruler ; ἀνάσσω, rule; avdavw, please ; 
ἀραιός, tender ; ἄστυ, city; tap, spring [ver]; ἔθνος, swarm, people ; 
εἴκοσι, twenty [Doric Fixari, Latin viginti]; εἴκω, yield; εἴλω, press ; 
ἕκητι, willingly ; ἑκυρός, father-in-law ; ἑκών, willing ; ἔλπομαι, hope ; 
the pronominal Stem ἑ (ἕο, sz), ἔοικα, appear; ἔπος, word ; εἶπον, 
spoke ; ἔργον, work; ipyw, close in; ἔῤῥω, go on; ἐρύω, draw ; ἐρέω, 
shall say ; ἐσθής, clothing; εἷμα, dress (Stem Fec, Latin vestis); ἔτης, 
relative ; ἡδύς, agreeable ; Ὕλιος, city Llios ; ἴσος, equal; οἶκος, house ; 
οἶνος, wine (vinum). On the operation of the digamma, see ὃ 63, D., 
Ὡς : 

2. The F in the middle occurred in ὄϊς, sheep, from οἔις (Latin ovis) : 
vn-oc, Of the ship, from vaFoc (Latin navis), Gen. of ναῦ-ς. 

8. The Dorians and Afolians retained the digamma at the begin- 
ning of many words: Kol. Féroc, year, Dor. Fidvoc, own. 3 

4. Τὴ Homer, at the beginning of many words, ε stands for F. ἐξέ; 
him, self; ἐείκοσι, twenty ; tion, equal; ἔεδνον, marriage-gift = ἕδνον. 


| 
: 


§ 85. Dialects.—The Dialects vary much in regard to the combi- 
nations of vowels. The Hpie and New-Jonic leave many syllables 
uncontracted : ti = εὖ, well; ὀΐομαι = οἴομαι, I think; πάϊς = παῖς, 
boy ; νόος = νοῦς, sense ; φιλέητε = φιλῆτε (ametis); ἀέκων = ἄκων, 
unwilling. Some of the forms usually uncontracted are, on the 


§ 37. VOWELS IN COMBINATION. 11 


combine. ‘The dissimilar vowels pair with one another 
best: 

1. The 807 generally remain wnachanged before the hard 
vowels: σοφία, wisdom ; λύω, L loosen ; iabw, 7 slumber ; 
ὕει, ἐξ rains ; εὔνοια, benevolence. 

2. Hard vowels before soft ones become diphthongs: 
ἐύ, εὖ, good ; πάϊς, παΐς, boy; γένεϊ, γένει, to the race. 

Obs.—Diphthongs sometimes lose their second part before vowels: 

βου-ός becomes βο-ός (00-18) ; καί-ω, κάτω, burn. Compare δὴ 160, 
248, Obs. 

§ 36. Similar (§ 25) vowels can not well stand together, 
and hence, when they meet, are often contracted according 
to the following laws: 

1. Two similar vowels melt into one long vowel: Aaae 
becomes λᾶς, stone; ζηλόω, ζηλῶ, 7 am zealous; Xtioc, 
Χῖος, ὦ Chian ; “φιλέητε, φιλῆτε, ametis, 1m which cases ε 
and yn, o and w, are similar. 

Still it must be observed that << usually become εἰ, and 
oo become ov: ποίεε, ποίει, do; πλόος, πλοῦς, passage by 
sed. Vowels before a similar one beginning a diphthong 
disappear: πλόου, πλοῦ, Of a passage ; οἰκέει, οἰκεί, dwells ; 
prey, φιλῇ, amet. 

§ 37. 2. Disstmilar vowels form a compound in which 


contrary, contracted in these dialects: ἱρός = tepdc, holy ; βώσας = 
βοήσας; one who has called. 

2. The abbreviation in the diphthongs ending in v is explained by 
this letter first becoming F, and then being quite dropped (compare 
ἃ 34, D., 2): Bov-de—BoF-édc¢ [bov-is] — βο-ός. 

ἃ 87. Dialects.—1. The Dialects supply many exceptions. Thus, in 
New-lonic especially, εο and eov are contracted into ev, not into ov: 
ποιέομεν, ποιεῦμεν, 106 make ; ποιέουσι, ποιεῦσι, they make. 

2. In the Ionic dialect, do (no) often changes to ew: ᾿Ατρείδαο, ᾿Ατρεί: 
dew, of Atrides ; ἵλαος, ἵλεως, merciful. a before w is often changed 
into the thinner sound ε: Ποσειδέων = Ποσειδάων, Att. ἸΤοσειδῶν, the god 
Poseidon. 

8. In Doric, ao, aw, are contracted into @: ᾿Ατρείδαο =’Arpeida, Mo- 
σειδάων = Moceday, θεάων (dearum) = θεᾶν. 


12 VOWELS IN COMBINATION. § 38. 


a) the obscurer_yowel overpowers the clearer (ὃ 29). 


Thus from 


ao COMES ὦ IN τιμάομεν, τιμῶμεν, we honor. 

no © w # yn-d0uvoe, νώδυνος, painless, 

Od) eat. FLOOR, αἰδῶ, pudorem. 

on “ὦ “ Σἔἕζηλόητε, ζηλῶτε, ye may be jealous, 
co “ ov yéveoc, γένους, of the race. 

oe “ ov “: ζήλόε; ζήλου, be jealous, 

ao “ w Ὁ down, won, song. 

aov “ w “ rimdov, τιμῶ, be honored. 

100s twas “μὴ οὖν, μῶν, surely not. 

cou “ ov “ χρυσέου, χρυσοῦ, of the golden. 

ει “0 ot “' χρύσεοι, χρυσοῖ, the golden. 

οι SOLS ζηλόεις, ζηλοῖς, thou art jealous, 
ον του τς τοίγοεις; οἰνοῦς, abounding in wine. 


Obs.—oer become ov when the εἰ represents the lengthening of ε 


(§ 42). 


§ 38. ὁ) When the medium a-sound and clearer e-sound 
meet, the first in order gains the upper hand: 


ae become ἃ in ἀέκων, ἄκων, unwilling. 
ΜΝ ΠΟ ΠΕ τιμᾶτε, honoretis. 

EL ess a “ἀείδω, dow, I sing. 

Dy ee? ee re τιμᾷς, honores, 

Ea ἦν ῃ “ἔαρ; 7p, spring. 

ears ῃ “ deat, diy, thou art loosened. 
Wale ese ῃ “ λύηαι, λύῃ, solvaris. 


Obs.—In the contractions of ae and eat, sometimes a takes the 
place of a, εἰ that of y. So from ἀεικής, unfit, comes αἰκής ; from 
ἀείρω, I lift wp, comes αἴρω; from λύεαι Comes λύει (With Ady). 
Exceptions, §§ 180, 183, 243 (τιμᾶν), 244. 


§ 39. Another mode of treating vowels which meet to- 


gether is called Synizesis (συνίζησις, Ὁ. é., sinking). It con- 
sists in*the first vowel being written but not pronounced 
as a vowel: @edc—as one syllable. 


§ 39. Dialects.—Synizesis is frequent in Homer, especially after e: 
Πηληϊάδεω, of Pelides ; χρυσέοις, aureis ; via, navem ; also πόλιας, eities ; 
ὄγδοος, the eighth. 


§ 48, OTHER VOWEL CHANGES. 13 


B. Other kinds of Vowel changes. 


§ 40. Another change of the vowels consists in their 
being lengthened. ‘Two kinds of lengthening are distin- 
guished, viz. : 

1. Organic lengthening, ὁ. ὁ.. that which is required by 
inflexion or derivation. By organic lengthening— 


a generally becomes ἡ, τιμάω, 1 honor, Fut. τιμήσω. 
o always “ , ζηλόω, [am jealous, “ ζηλώσω. 
ε ε εἰ n, Tow, I make, “  Tomow. 
it either te i, iw, I honor, “ riow ; 
or τῇ ει, St. rez, Pres. λείπω, 7 leave: 
sometimes “ ot, “ dex, Adj. λοιπός, remaining. 
v either : v, vw, I loose, Fut. λύσω: 
or ες ev, St. φυγ, Pres. φεύγω, I flee. 


ὃ 41. Obs.—After ¢, 1, and p, a is changed to ἃ instead of n: ἐάω, 
1 leave, allow ; fut. ἐάσω; St. ia, heal ; ἰᾷτρός, physician ; St. épa, 
see; ὕρᾶμα, ὦ view. The Attic dialect is altogether averse to the 
combinations en, τη, pn, and frequently puts ea, va, pa in their place. 

ὃ 42. 2. Compensatory lengthening, ὦ. ¢., that which is 
used as a compensation for lost consonants. By it a, even 
when ε, v, or p does not precede, is often changed to a: 
mac, every, from πᾶ-ντ-ς —« generally becomes εἰ: εἰμί 
I wn, from ἐσ-μι (ὃ 315)—o generally becomes ov: διδούς 
for διδο-ντ-ος [Lat. da-n-s]—7% always becomes 1, and 0 
always v: δεικνύ-ς for δεικνυτντ-ς, showing. 


Obs.—Exceptions, in which ε becomes ἡ, and o becomes w, are given 
in ὃ 147, and in which a becomes ἡ in ὃ 270. 


“ 


§ 43. The three short hard vowels often interchange in 
one and the same Stem, when, generally, ε is regarded 
as the Stem-vowel: τρέπω, J turn; ἕτραπον, [ turned ; 


ὃ 40. Dialects—The extension of v to ov appears in εἰλήλουθα, am 
come, from Stem ἐλυθ (δ 327, 2). 

ὃ 41. Dialects —The Old and New-Ionic dialect does not avoid the 
combinations ey, m, and py: ἰτέη = Attic iréa, willow ; ἰητρός = Attic 
ἰατρός, physician ; πειρήσομαι ΞΞΞ Αἰίϊο πειράσομαι, [ will try. 

The Doric dialect, on the contrary, regularly lengthens ἃ into a: 
τιμᾶσω ---τιμήσω, I will honor (δ 24, D., 2). 


14 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 44, 


τρόπος, turning ; Stem yevec, Nom. γένος, race | compare 
Lat. generis, Nom. genus]; φλέγω, L burn ; φλόξ, flame. 
ἢ also is at times changed to w: ἀρήγω, 1 help ; apwyéde, 


helper. 


C. Consonants in combination with one another. 


§ 44. Consonants, in regard to their combination, are 
subject to still greater limitation and change than the 


vowels. Those which are dzss¢milar (comp. §$§ 32, 88). 


agree best with one another, especially the mutes with the 
liquids. 3 

That discordant consonants may continue together, they 
are either made more like one another (assimilated) or more 
unlike (dissimilated). The essential laws for the necessary 
changes of consonants are the following: 


§ 45. 1. Before mute dentals (§§ 30, 31), only conso- 
nants of other organs which are of the same order (that is, 
both hard, both soft, or both aspirated, § 32) can stand; 
consequently, the only allowable combinations of sounds 
ΠΥ ΚΤ» TT, γὸ, (36, x9, φ0. 

When a different mute stands before the dental, through 


inflexion or derivation, it must be asszmelated to the order » 


of the latter. Consequently— 


κὃ and xd become y6. πὸ and ¢0 become Bo. 

κθ hyo x9. 70 “ B80 ἐν τ 

τ ORT: Bre ar (Sate 
Therefore— 

πλεκ-θηναι becomes πλεχθῆναι, from πλέκω, I weave. 

λεγ-τος ον λεκτός, Ὁ λέγω, L say 


[lectus instead of leg-tus]. 


λεγ-θηναι ἐ: λεχθῆναι, “ Réyw, L say. 
δέχ-τος ς δεκτός, Ὁ δέχομαι, T receive 
[tractus instead of trah-tus, from traho}. 
τυπ-θηναι af τυφθῆναι, from τύπτω, ἢ strike. 
γραφ-τος Ἶ γραπτός, “ γράφω, I write. 
γραφ-δὴν « γράβδην, “ « ( 


Obs.—The preposition ἐκ, owt of (Lat. ex), remains unchanged in all 
combinations: ἔκθεσις, casting out; ἔκδρομη, running out. 


§ 48, CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. “272k 


§ 46. 2. Before mute dentals, mute dentals to be audible 
are changed into o (issimilation). 'Therefore— 
tr, 6r, and @r become or. 
70, 00,“ 60 “ . of: hence 
dvur-rog becomes ἀνυστός, accomplished, from ἀνύτω, I accomplish. 
q0-reoy ἐξ «ἰστέον, canendum est, “ ἄδω, 1 sing. 
mev0-Onvaa “ rrevoOijvat, to be persuaded, “πείθω, I persuade. 

§ 47. 3. Before μ a guttural becomes γ, a dental o, a 
labial p. Therefore— 


διωκ-μος becomes διωγμός, persecution, from διώκω, 7 pursue. 
βε-ιβρεχεμαι “ = BéEBpeypar, I have been wetted, from βρέχω, I wet. 


ἰδ-μεν “ ἴσμεν, we know, from οἶδα, 1 know. [ plish. 
ἦνυτ-μαι νι ἤνυσμαι, I have been perfected, from ἀνύτω, I accom- 
πε-πειθ-μενος “ πεπεισμένος, persuaded, from πείθω, I persuade, 

κοπ-μοὸς (Ὁ κρμμός, ὦ striking, from κόπ-τω, 1 strike [summus, from 


sup-mus}. 
τεττριβ-μαὶ “ = rérpepypar, 1 have been rubbed, from τρίβω, 1 rub. 
γραφ-μα ( γράμμα, letter, from γράφω, I write. 


Obs.—Sometimes in derivation the gutturals and dentals remain 
unchanged: ἀκμή, bloom, ῥυθμός, movement, rhythm, ἀριθμός, nun- 
ber. 

The preposition ἐκ leaves its « unchanged: éxpudoow, I wipe out. 


ὃ 48. 4. Before o, as a hard consonant, y and y become 
x, and [3 becomes zw (Assimilation): xo is then written &, 
and ro ~. Therefore— 
ay-ow becomes ἀκ-σω, written dé-w, 1 shall lead, from ἄγω, I lead [revi 

instead of veg-si, from 7eg-o]. 
dex-copar “ δεκ-σομαι, Written δέξομαι, I shall receive, from δέχομαι, 
| I receive [trazxi instead of trah-si, from trah-o}. 
τριβ-σω =“ τριπ-σω, Written τρίψω, I shall rub, from τρίβω, I rub 
[ scrips? instead of serib-si, from scrib-o}. 
γραφ-σω “ ypar-ow, written γράψω, I shall write, from ypag-w, [ 
write. 
Obs.—It is clear from ὃ 34 that every « and z with o must become 


§ 47. Dialects—The changes of dentals and gutturals before p is 
frequently omitted in Ionic: ἴκ-μενος, favorable, from St. ic (ἱκάνω, I 
come); axaxpévoc, pointed, from St. ἀκ (Lat. acuo); airpyy, breath ; ὀδμή, 
smell, from St. οὗ (fw) [od-or], Att. ὀσ-μή ; ἴδ-μεν, we know = Att. ἴσ-μεν; 
κεκορυθμένος, equipped, from St. copv0 (κορύσσω) = Att. κεκορυσμένος. 


16 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. § 49. 


ἕξ and w: hence πλεκ-σω becomes πλέξω, from πλέκω, I weave ; 
λειπ-σω becomes λείψω, from λείπω, I leave. 


§ 49. 5. The dentals, when standing separately before a, 
are dropped without compensation; in like manner ν dis- 
appears before ζ. Therefore— 
ἀνυτ-σις becomes ἄνὕὔσις, accomplishment, from ἀνύτω, I accomplish. 
y0-coma “ ἥσομαι, I shall rejoice, from ἥδομαι, I rejoice [laesi for 

laed-si, from laed-o}. 
κορυθ-σι Ἶ κὀρὔσι, to the helmets, from κόρυς, Gen. κόρυ-θος, helmet. 
δαιμον-σι = δαίμοσι, to the demons, from δαίμων, demon. [ yoke. 
συν-ζυγος “ σύζυγος, yoked together, from σύν, together, and ζυγόν, 

Hence o before another o is lost: τείχεσ-σι becomes τείχε-σι, to walls 
(from τεῖχος; wall) ; ἐσ-σομαι, ἔ-σομαι. 

Obs. 1.—v is not always dropped before o or Z in composition. In 
the preposition ἐν, the ν remains for the sake of clearness: ἐν- 
στάζω, I trickle in; ἐνζεύγνυμι, 1 harness. The ν in πᾶν, all, every, 
and πάλιν, again, either remains unchanged or is assimilated to 
the following o: πάνσοφος, all-wise; παλίσσυτος, from παλιν- 
συτος, starting back. The ν in σύν, with, is dropped before ζ or σ 
with a consonant following: σύζυγος (See above); σύστημα, sys- 
tem ; it is assimilated before a simple o: συσσίτιον, from σὺν-σιτιον, 
common meal. 

2. Sometimes ν remains unchanged before o in the 2d Pers. Sing. 
of the Perf. Mid.: zé-¢av-ca, thou hast appeared. 

3. In exceptional cases, compensatory lengthening (§ 42) takes place 
when a single ν is omitted : for instance— 

a) In some Nominatives Sing. : μελᾶ-ς, black, for pedav-c. 

ὁ) In the 8d Pers. Plur. of the chief tenses, where o has taken 
the place of τ: λύ-ου-σι, they loosen, instead of λυ-ον-σι (orig- 
inally λυ-ον-τι) (ὃ 60). 

ce) Often in derivation: γερουσία, senate, instead of γεροντια, from 
St. yeoovr, Nom. γέρων, old man. 


§ 50. 6. The combinations vr, v6, vd, are likewise omit- 
ted before σ, but cause a compensatory lengthening (ὃ 42): 


παντ-σι becomes πᾶσι, to all, from St. παντ-, Nom. πᾶ-ς. 
τιθεντ-ς ἣν τιθείς, putting, "pert. 
γεροντ-σι “ γέρουσι, to old men, “ “ yepovr, Nom. γέρων. 


§ 49. Dialects——Homer often assimilates a mute to the following o 
xoooi=Att. ποσί for ποῦ-σι (pedibus). He often preserves one o before 
another: ἔσ-σομαι, I shall be. 


§ 61. CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 17 


to those 
δεικγυντ-σι becomes δεικνῦσι, ἧς ee , from St. δεικνυντ, Nom. δεικνῦ-ο. 
L will pour 
‘ 4 , 
σπενῦ-σω - σπείσω, 4 liba ie, , “ omevd, Pres. σπένδω. 
πενθ-σομαι “ reicoua, [shall suffer,“ “ zev0, Pres. πάσχω. 


Obs. 1.—vr disappears, without compensation, in the Dat. Plur. of 
Stems of Adjectives in evr, Nom. e-c: St. χαριεντ, Nom. χαρίεις, 
Dat. Plur. χαρίε-σι for χαριεντ-σι. 

2.—Of v@ before o, ν remains in ἕλμιν-ς, tape-cworm, instead of é- 
μινθ-ς, Stem ἑλμινθ: Tipvy-c, the city Tiryns, instead of Τιρυνθ-ς, 
Stem Τιρυνθ. 

§ 500. In later Attic o is readily assimilated to a preceding p: Old 
Att. χερσόνησος, New Att. χεῤῥόνησος, peninsula ; Old Att. Capos, 
New Att. θαῤῥῶ, I am courageous. 


ὃ 51. 7. ν remains unchanged before mute dentals; it 
becomes the nasal y before gutturals (§ 4), μ᾿ before labials, 
and is assimilated before liquid consonants: 


συν-τίθημι, I put together, is unchanged. 
συν-καλεω; I call together, becomes συγκαλέω. 


συν-χρονος, contemporaneous, ‘ σύγχρονος. 

ἐν-πειρος, experienced, Ὁ ἔμπειρος, from ἐν and πεῖρα, proof [so 
in-peritus becomes im-peritus]. 

ἐν-ψυχος, inspirited, τ ἔμψυχος, from ἐν and ψυχή, soul. 

év-perpoc, metrical, τς ἔμμετρος, from ἐν and μέτρον, measure 
[so in-modicus becomes im-mod- 

‘ icus]. 

συν-ρεω, I flow together, . συῤῥέω, from σύν and péw, I flow [so 
con-ruo becomes cor-ruo]. 

ovy-reyw, I collect, PA συλλέγω, from σύν and λέγω, I gather 


[so con-ligo becomes col-ligo]. 


Obs. 1.—y in the preposition ἐν remains unchanged before p: ἔν- 
ρυθμος, rhythmical. 

2.—yv is combined with p by means of ὃ in ἀν-δ-ρός, Gen. of ἀνήρ, 
man. So is pw with p by B in peonp-B-pia, midday, instead of 
μεσημ(ε)ρια (μέσος and ἡμέρα, compare § 61, ¢). 


§ 51. Dialects—In the Epic dialect 8 is often inserted between μ 
and p, and between p and XA: μέ-μ-β-λωκα, L have gone, from Stem por, 
by metathesis (δ 59). μ᾽ before ἃ or p becomes 6 at the beginning of 
a word: βλώ-σκω, 1 go, Present of the Stem por; βροτός, mortal, for 
μροτος, from the Stem ppo or pop [mor-ior, moriuus sum}. 


18 CONSONANTS IN COMBINATION. 8 δῶ. 


§ 52. 8. Hard mutes (tenues) unite with a following 
rough breathing (spiritus asper) into aspirates (x,0,¢@): 
hence, , 


ix’ (éxi) and ἡμέρα, day, become ἐφήμερος, for a day. ee me 
éex’ (δέκα) “ἡμέρα, ἴα, “ ξεχήμερος, Jor ten days. Eee 
ten ς 
ἀντ᾽ (avri)“ ὕπατος, consul, ἀνξύπατος, proconsul, τ 
§ 53. 9. At the end of a word, when the ΟΒΟΝΟΘ ΣΤᾺΣ ΑΝ 
ina Swath a spiritus asper, the hard mute is changed into | 
an aspirate: 34 
οὐχ οὗτος. not this, for οὐκ οὗτος. 


ἀφ᾽ ἑστίας. from the hearth, “ az (ἀπὸ) ἑστίας. 
καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, by day, “ κατ᾽ (κατὰ) ἡμέραν. 

Obs.—If another hard mute stands before the one to be aspirated, 
the first must also be aspirated (§ 45): ἑπτά and ἡμέρα form 
égOnpepoc, for seven days; νύκτα and ὅλην become νύχθ᾽ mens: 
noctem. ‘ 

§ 535. 10. Two syllables immediately following one an- 

other-can not both begin with aspirates in the followmge 
cases: ; τω 
a) In reduplication the corresponding hard mute takes — 
the place of the aspirate: a 
κε-χώρηκα for χε-χωρηκα, IT have proceeded, from χωρέω, I proceed. * 
τί-θημι “ θέθημι, 1 put. 
πέτφῦκα ““φεῖφυκα, I hare become. 


ὦ) The Aorists Passive of the verbal Stems θὲε (cigs 
LT put), θυ (θύω, 7 sacrifice), adopt the same modification: 
ἐ-τέ-θην, 1 was put, for ἐ-θε-θην ; ἐ-τύ-θην, [was sacri 
for ἐξθυ-θην. (Compare ὃ 298.) oe: μ᾽ 

c) In the Imperative of the First Aorist Pasa ξᾷ 297), —" 
on the contrary, the second aspirate is changed to a ten ᾽ 
σώ-θηττι, be saved, for σω-θη-θι. 

41) Isolated instances are: ἀμπέχω, embrace, for aupexw; 
ἐκεχειρία, for ἐχεχειρια, armistice, from ἔχειν, to hold, at rx 
χείρ, hand. ἽΝ 

§ 52 and 53. Dialects—The aspiration is omitted in New Tonic: © | 


ἐπήμερος, for a hy ἀπίημι, I send away 5 οὐκ οὕτως = οὐχ οὕτος, not $0 : 
ἀπ᾽ ov, from the time when, Att. ag’ οὗ. ΕΥ̓ 


ὃ 55. OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 19 


Obs.—Sometimes the spiritus asper is changed to the lenis, be- 
cause the following ‘syllable begins with an aspirate: é-¢oa, till, 
for 6-¢pa, from the relative Stem ὁ (ὃ 213, 217), ἔχω for ἔχω, from 
St. ἐχ (δ΄ 897, 6). 


§ 54. Some Stems beginning with τ change this letter 
to 9 when an aspirate at the end can not be retained (ὃ 45). 
This happens: 

a) In the Substantive Stem rpry, whose Nominative is 
θρίξ, havr, Dat. Plur. θριξί. The other cases are regu- 
lar, formed from the Siem rpry (Gen. τριχός, Nom. Plur. 
τρίχες). 

ὁ) In ταχύς, guick, whose comparative is θάσσων for 
ταχιων (ὃ 57; compare ὃ 198). 

¢) In the following Verbal Stems: 


rag, Pres. θάπτω, 1 bury, Fut. θάψω, Aor. Pass. tragyyv, Subs. 
ταφός, grave. 

τρεῴ, “ἡ τρέφω, I nourish, «θρέψω, Subs. θρέμμα, cattle. 

τρεχ, “ τρέχω, [ γιίη, “ὁ θρέξομαι 

τρυφ, “ θρύπτω, 1 rub to pieces, “ θρύψω (§ 260). 

tug, “ τύφω, I smoke, “ Cibo 


Obs.—In the Passive First Aorist (§ 296), and in the Infinitive of 
the Perf. Mid., the aspirate of the Stem remains unchanged, yet 
the initial tenuis is aspirated, because the Stem-consonant is 
not felt to be necessarily an original aspirate, as it might have 
been modified by the influence of the 6 after it (ὃ 45): ἐθρέφθην, 
τεθράφθαι. 


D. Other changes of Consonants and Vowels in the 
middle of a Word. 


§ 55. Important changes of sounds are produced by the 
modifications of the soft vowel ὁ in connection with conso- 
nants (compare §§ 186, 198, 199, 250-253). Frequently, 
for instance, 


1.1 after ν or p is put a syllable farther back, where it 
forms a diphthong with the preceding vowel. Hence, 


20 OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. § 56. 
reivw, from rev-w, J stretch, St. rev [tendo]. 
μαίνομαι, “ pay-vopa, 1 rage, (¢ μαν. 
ἀμείνων, “ ἀμεν-ιων, better, Capen. 
κείρω, ¢  Kep-ww, I shear, "RED. a 
δότειρα, ‘ dorep-ta, the giver, fem. “ δοτερ (δοτήρ, giver). 


χείρων, χέρ. 
§ 56. 2.1 is assimilated to a preceding X: 
μᾶλλον, from μαλ-ιον, more, from μάλα, much, 


XEP-LWY, WOrse, 


ἅλλομαι, “ ἀἁλειομαι, 1 spring, St. ad [salio]. 


ἀλλοῦ, “ἢ 


(( 


ἀλ-ιος, another [alius]. 


στέλλω, στελ-ιω, 1 send, St. oven. 


§ 57. 3. Gutturals (τ and @ less frequently) coalesce 
with a following ¢ to oo (New Att. 77): 


ἥσσων, from ἡκτίων, less, St. ἡκ, superl. ἥκιστα. 


Θρᾷσσα, “Θρᾳκίια, Thracian, fem. (masc. Θρᾷξ), St. Θρᾳκ. 
τάσσω, “ ray-w, 1 arrange, St. ray. 

ἐλάσσων, “ ἜΞΞΞ smaller, “ ἔλαχ; Superl. ἐλάχιστος. 
Κρῆσσα, “ Kpnr-ta, Cretan, fem. (masc. Κρῆς), St. Konr. 
κορύσσω, “ . κορυθειω, I arm, St. κορυθ (κόρυς, helmet). 


§ ὅδ, 4. ὃ and sometimes y coalesce with a following ἡ 


to ζ. 
ἕζομαι, from é9-vopar, 1 sit, St. ἐδ (τὸ ἕδος, the seat). 
κράζω, “  xKpay-w,Z cry, “ κραγ (Perf. κἐ-κρᾶγ-α). 


Other changes of Sounds are: 


ὃ 59. 1. Transposition (μετάθεσις), which most freghiene 
ly occurs with X, p, also with μ and ν: 
θράσος, together with θάρσος, boldness, 


θρώσκω, from the St. Oop, [ spring, Second Aorist ἔθορον. 


Bé-BAn-Ka, ἐξ βαλ, I have thrown, = “© ἔβαλον. 
τέ-θνη-κα, ᾿ θαν, [ am dead, Ὁ ἔθαγον. 
τμῆ-σις, ἐξ TE, ὦ cut, Pres. τέμνω, I cut. 


Obs.—In the last four examples the vowel is moreover lengthened. 


§ 59. Dialects—Transposition is more frequent in the Homeri¢ dia- 
lect (compare ὃ 295, D.): καρτερός and κρατερός, strong; κάρτιστος = 
Att. κράτιστος, the strongest, from κράτος, strength ; τραπ-είομεν (compare 


§ 295, D.) for ταρπ-είομεν, we desire to rejoice, St. τερπ (répmopar). So 


also in ἔδρᾶκον, I saw, St. δερκ (δέρκομαι) ; ἔπραθον, I destroyed, St. περθ 
(πέρθω). Homer: ἀταρπός = Att. ἀτρᾶπός, path. 


ee ees 


§ 62, _ OTHER CHANGES OF SOUND. 21 


§ 60. 2. The weakening of single consonants. The most 
important weakenings are: 
a) The very frequent one, especially before 1, of τ to σ: 


ἀναισθησία, want of feeling, for ἀναισθητια, from ἀναίσθητος, without 
JSeeling. ᾿ 

φᾶσί for φαντι, they say. 

On the rejection of ν and the compensation for it, which 
frequently occur in this case, see ὃ 49, Obs. 3, ¢; compare 
ἢ 187. 

ὁ) The weakening of initial σ before vowels to the spir- 
itus asper: 

de, swine, together with σῦς. Compare Lat. su-s. 

t-orn-pe for σι-στη-μι, I place. Compare Lat. si-sto (δὲ 308, 327, 5, 6). 

§ 61. 3. The entire rejection of sounds. The following 
cases are important: 


a) σ is rejected where it would have to stand between 
two consonants in inflexion: 


γεγράφ-θαι for γεγραφ-σθαι, to be written, St. ypad, Pres. γράφω. 
τέτυφ- θεὲ  “ re-rug-o6e, be ye struck, “ rum, “τύπτω. 


ὦ) « between two vowels is very often rejected : 


λέγε-αι, λέγῃ (δ 38), for Aeyeoa, thou art said, St. rey, Pres. λέγω, 
édvva-o, ἐδύνω, for ἐδύνασο, thou couldst, Pres. δύναμαι. 
γένε-ος for γενεσος, of the race, St. yevec (δ 166). 


¢) The rejection of a vowel between consonants in the 
middle of a word is called syncope (συγκοπῆ) : ἐ-πτ-ό-μην 
for é-qer-o-pnv, [ flew, St. wer (ὃ 326, 34). Compare § 51, 
Obs. 2. 


§ 62. 4. The doubling of a consonant. ‘This is rare, 


§ 60. Dialects.—The Dorians retain 7: gavri=¢aoi(r), they say. The 
older Att. less frequently: τήμερον = σήμερον, to-day. 

§ 61. Dialects.—Syncope is more frequent in Homer: τίπτε for τίποτε, 
why ever? why? ἐκέκλετο = é-xe-Kedero, he called, St. ker. 

§ 62. Dialects—In Homer simple consonants are readily doubled ; 
the mutes more rarely: ὅππως = Attic brwe, how; ὁπποῖος = Attic 
ὁποῖος, gualis ; ὅττι = Attic ὅτι, that; the vocal consonants often: 


22 CHANGES AT THE END OF WORDS. § 63. 


when it has not arisen through the assimilations men- 
tioned above (δὲ 47, 50d, 51, 56). The liquid p is the 
most frequently doubled: ἔῤῥιψα for ἔριψα, 7. hurled ; 
ἄῤῥηκτος for d-pynxroc, not breakable. The aspirates can 
be doubled only by the corresponding tenuis: Βάκχος, 
Σαπφώ, ᾿Ατθίς. 


Ki. Changes of Sound at the end of a Word. 


§ 63. When a word ending in a vowel is followed by 
another beginning with a vowel, whether accompanied by 
a spiritus lenis or asper, there is a Azatus. The Greeks 
very often suffer the hiatus in prose; but frequently the 
hiatus is avoided, especially if the first word is a shorter 
one and of itself of little importance. This is done in 
three ways, that is, either by elision (rejection of the final 
vowel), or by crasis (contraction of the two vowels), or by 
synizests (collapse of two syllables into one). 


ἔλλαβε — Attic ἔλαβε, he took; φιλομμειδής = Attic φιλομειδής, readily 
smiling ; ἐύννητος = Attic εὔ-νητος, well-woven ; ὕσσον = Attic ὅσον, how 
great ; νέκυσσι = Attic νέκυσι, to the corpses; ὀπίσσω = Attic ὀπίσω, 
back. On the contrary, Homer sometimes has a single p where 
the Attic has double: ὠκύροος = ὠκύῤῥοος, swift-flowing. Often also 
both forms are usual together: ᾿Αχιλεύς and ᾿Αχιλλεύς, ᾿Οδυσεύς and 
᾽Οδυσσεύς. 


§ 63. Dialects—The Homeric dialect admits the hiatus in many 
cases: the most important are: 

1. The hiatus is only apparent in words with the digamma: κατὰ 
οἶκον for κατὰ Εοῖκον, at home. 

2. It is allowed after weak vowels in forms with which elision is 
not usual: παιδὶ ὄπασσεν, he gave to the son. 

3. It is softened by a pause or a cesura after the first short syllable 
of the third foot: κάθησο, ἐμῷ δ᾽ ἐπιπείθεο μύθῳ, sit down, and obey my 
word ; τῶν ot ἕξ ἐγένοντο ἐνὶ μεγάροισι, of which six were born to him in 
the chambers. 

4. A long vowel or diphthong before another in the thesis be- 
comes short, and causes only an improper or weak hiatus: ᾿Ατρεῖδαί 
re καὶ ἄλλοι siKvnpedec ᾿Αχαιοί, Ye Atridew -and ye other well-greaved 
ALONSO Sie eS . Compare § 75, D., 2 


δ π 


=> “1 ὁ 


§ 65. ELISION.—CRASIS. 23 


8 64. 1. Llision, or the rejection of the final vowel, 
of which the apostrophe (§ 15) is the sign, occurs only 
with short final vowels, but never with v; most frequent- 
ly at the end of dissyllabic prepositions, conjunctions, and 
adverbs: ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, with him, for ἐπὶ αὐτῷ ; οὐδ᾽ ἐδύνατο, 
he could not even, ἀλλ᾽ ἦλθεν, but he came, less fre- 
quently at the end of nouns and verbs: οἱ πάντ᾽ cicay- 
γέλλοντες, @. 6., οἱ πάντα εἰςαγγέλλοντες, who reported the 
«οἠοίο. - 


Obs. 1.—The prepositions περί, round, ἄχρι and μέχρι, till, and the 
conjunction ὅτι, that, never suffer elision. 

2. In compounds also the elision occurs, without, however, being 
indicated by the apostrophe: ἐπ-έρχομαι, from ἐπι-έρχομαι, [ come 
up; but περιέρχομαι, I go round. 

3. On the change of consonants occurring with clision (ἐφ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ); 
see § 52. 


ὃ 65. 2. Crasis (κρᾶσις, mixing) is governed, on the 


ὃ 64. Dialects—Elision is much more frequent with the poets than 
in prose; thus, not only e and ει even in nominal and verbal forms 
are elided, but also the diphthongs a and ou, in the verbal termina- 
tions μαι, cat, rar, σθαι, and in the forms μοι and τοι. In Homer, in 
ort, that, is also sometimes elided. 

A change of the final vowel, occurring only in poets, is the apocope 
(ἀποκοπή). It is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
beginning with-a consonant. 'The apocope is frequent in Homer with 
the prepositions ἀνά, κατά, παρά, and with the conjunction dpa, now, 
seldom with ἀπό and ὑπό: it takes place in compounds as well as 
at the meeting of two separate words. The ν of ἀν(ά) then suffers 
the changes described in ὃ 51; the τ of κατ(ά), the π᾿ of az(6) and 
ὑπίό), are made like the following consonant: ἀνδύεται = ἀναδύεται, 
emerges ; κὰπ πεδίον =Kara πεδίον, on the plain; κάλλιπε = κατέλιπε, left 
behind; πάρθετο = παρέθετο, put before; ἀππέμψει = ἀποπέμψει, will send 
away ; κατθανεῖν = καταθανεῖν, die. 

§ 65. Dialects——Crasis in Homer is very rare, but very frequent in 


the Attic poets: ὁ. 7., οὑξ =6 ἐξ, κὠδύρεται --Ξ- καὶ ὀδύρεται, and laments ; 
ὦναξ = ὦ ἄναξ, O king; χὠπόσοι = καὶ ὁπόσοι, and how many.—Herod. 


_ ᾧλλοιξεοὶ ἄλλοι, the rest. The loss of a short initial vowel is sometimes 


indicated by the apostrophe (§ 15): μὴ ’yé = μὴ ἐγώ, ne 670, ἤδη 
Eipxerar — ἤδη ἐξέρνεται, he is already coming out. 


24 ᾿ SYNIZESIS. § 66. 


whole, by the laws given for contraction (ἢ 36-39). It 
occurs chiefly after forms of the article, of the relative 
pronoun (especially 6, guod, and a, gue), after the prep- 
osition πρό, for, before, Latin pro, and the conjunction 
καί, and. The syllable produced by crasis is necessarily 
long. The sign of crasis is the coronis (δ 16): τἀγαθά, 
bona, from τὰ ἀγαθά; τἄλλα, from ra ἄλλα, the other things ; 
τοὔνομα, the name, from τὸ ὄνομα ; ταὐτό, the same, for τὸ 
auTo. 


Obs. 1.—The rough breathing of the article or relative maintains 
its place in spite of crasis: ἄνήρ, the man, irregular for ὁ ἀνήρ, in 
which case the coronis disappears; in θοἰμάτιον, from τὸ ἱμάτιον, 
the dress, the spiritus asper has changed τ into @ (ὃ 52); so also 
θάτερον, irregular for τὸ ἕτερον, the other. 

2. The new syllable, formed by crasis, has 1 subscript only when + 
is the last of the contracted vowels: καὶ ἐν, and in, becomes ray, 
but καὶ εἶτα, and then, becomes κᾷτα. 

On the accent with crasis, § 89. 


§ 66. 3. Synizesis (sinking, compare § 39) occurs at the 
meeting of two words only after a lon& vowel, especially 
after the conjunctions ἐπεί, as, ἤ, 07, ἦ, NUM, μή, Not, and 
after ἐγώ, 7. ἐπεὶ οὐ, as not; μὴ ἄλλοι, ne alit; ἐγὼ οὐ, 7 
not. Ιῦ 13 perceptible only in the poets, who reckon the 
two syllables as one. | 


§ 67. Wo Greck word endsin any consonant except the 
vocal ones, v, p, and ¢ (&, ψ). The only exceptions are: 
the negative οὐκ (before consonants ov) and the preposition 
ἐκ, out of (before vowels ἐξ), which attach themselves so 
closely to the following word that their « can hardly be 
looked upon as final. 

When any other consonant, except these three, appears 
at the end of a word, it is usually rejected : 


pers, honey (mel), for werer (Gen. péder-oc) compare § 14% 
σῶμα, body, “ cwpar (Gen. cwpar-oc) pe ᾿ 


ἤσαν, they were, “ 


ἦσαντ *compare Lat. eran). ; 


~ 


§ 68. MOVABLE CONSONANTS. 25 


But mute Dentals in this cass are often changed into 
vocal ec: 

πρός for zpor, from προτί, to (Hom.). 

dog.“ 600, 600, give. 
τερατ, Gen, répar-oc, miracle, 


§ 68. Certain words and forms have, after a short vowel 
at the end, ὦ movable v (v ἐφελκυστικόν). This v is used 

before words which begin with a vowel—by which the 
hiatus is avoided —and before longer pauses. Poets em- 
ploy it also before consonants, especially at the end of the 
word, to make it more sonorous. 

The words and forms which have a movable ν are the 
following: 


1. The Dat. Plur.in σι(ν): πᾶσιν ἔδωκα, 7 gave to all; 
but πᾶσι δοκεῖ οὕτως εἶναι, to all ἐξ seems to be so. 


2. The designations of place in σι(ν): ᾿Αθήνησιν ἦν, he 
was at Athens; but ᾿Αθήνησι τόδε ἐγένετο, this happened 
at Athens. 


8. The single words εἴκοσι(ν), twenty; πέρυσι(ν), last 
- ° oi »” 
year; and παντάπασι(ν), entirely; εἴκοσιν ἄνδρες, twenty 
men; but εἴκοσι γυναῖκες, twenty women. 


4. The third person Sing. in ε(ν): ἔσωσεν αὐτούς, he 
saved them; but ἔσωσε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, he saved the 
Athenians. 


5. The third person Plur. as well as Sing. in σι(ν) : λέ- 
youow εὖ, they speak well, but λέγουσι τοῦτο, they say this ; 
δείκνυσιν ἐκεῖσε, he points there, but δείκνυσι τὸν ἄνδρα, he 
points out the man. 


§ 68. Dialects—To the words which have a movable ν there are 
added in Homer the adverbs of place in θε(ν) : dvevOe(v), from afar; 
πάροιθε(υ). from before, formerly ; the particles ré(v), perhaps, and vi(y), 
now. 

The New-lIonic dialect, which admits the immediate succession of 
vowels, omits the movable ν. On the « in οὐκ before a spiritus asper, 
§ 52, D. . 

9 


26 DIVISION OF SYLUABLES. § 69. 


§ 69. Obs. 1.—In like manner, οὐ, not, takes « only before vowels, 
which becomes y before the spiritus asper (ὃ 52): οὔ φησι, he says 
not; obi αὐτός, not he himself; οὐχ οὕτως, not so. The « appears 
also in οὐκέτι and μηκέτι; NO More. 

. ἐκ, out of, is ἐξ before vowels (Lat. ev): ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, out of the 
city; ἐξ ἀκροπόλεως, out of the acropolis or castle; ἐκλέγω, 1 speak 
out; ἐξέλεγον, I spoke out. 

8. Without any definite reason, the words οὕτως, thus (adverb of 

οὗτος, this), ἄχρις, μέχρις, till, very frequently lose their final ¢; but — 
πολλάκις, many times, loses it only in the poets. 


cs) 


Cuar. LV.—DIvIsiIon OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR 
QUANTITY. 


A. Division of Syllables. 3 
§ 70. The Syllables (συλλαβή, collection) in Greek words 


are divided according to the following rules. very vowel 
which stands before another, but does not form a diph- 
thong with it, or collapse with it by synizesis (ὃ 39), is 
reckoned a separate syllable: i-atpéc, physician, trisy!- 
labic. | 


§ 71. A consonant which stands between two vowels 
belongs to the second syllable: ἔ-χει, has 8; οὔττος, this ; 
ἱ-κατ-νός, capable, 

Two or more consonants usually belong to the fol- 
lowing vowel: ἁ-πλοῦς, stneple ; a-pi-ore-pdc, on the left 
hand, ἔ-σχον, 7 had; ἀ-μνός, lamb ; ἐ-χθρός, trimical ; 
likewise double consonants: ὄτψοτμαι, J shall see; ἕ-ζω, 


L place. 


§ 72. Exceptions. 1. Liquids and nasals joi the pre- 
ceding vowel: dp-ua, carriage; ἀδελ-φός, brother ; καγ- 
χάζω, 2 laugh; ἔντδον, within; ἄμ-φω, both, ambo. μν 
only join the following vowel: κάτμνω, 7 suffer. 2. When 
ἃ. consonant is doubled, the first belongs to the preceding, 
the second to the following syllable: ἵπτ-πος, horse ; Bar- 
Aw, 7 throw ; Πύῤρ-ρος. The same takes place when aspi< 


ὃ 76 QUANTITY. 27 


rates follow the corresponding tenues: ’Ar-@ic, Βάκ-χος, 
Σαπ-φώ. 

§ 73. Compounds are divided into the elements out of 
which they are formed: συν-έχω, 7 hold together; ἐξ-άγω, 
L drive out. 


B. Quantity 


§ 74. With regard to the quantity (length or shortness) 
of syllables, the same rules, in general, hold good for the 
Greek as for the Latin. An important exception, how- 
ever, consists in one vowel before the other not needing to 
be short in Greek: θωή, penance ; λαός, people ; Bédriov, 
better. Nor do the special Latin rules for final syllables 
hold good in Greek. 


§ 75. A syllable is long ὁ) by nature when it contains 
a long vowel or diphthong: ὑμεῖς, YOU ; κρίνω, ἡ decide ; 
Gow, be sing. The recognition of quantity in Greek is τὴς 
dered much easier by the characters : δόμος, 700m, house ; 
δῶμα, house; in other cases by the accent (δὲ 83, 84); 
the rest can be learned only by practice and from the 
lexicon. 


Obs.—Every contracted syllable must, of course, be long: ἄκων, un- 
willing = ἀέκων, tpd¢ == ἱερός, holy. 


§ 76. A syllable is long by position when a vowel is fol- 


§ 74. Dialeets.—Diphthongs and long vowels are very seldom short- 
ened before vowels in the same word: Hom. οἷος (qualis ~~), and βέ: 
βληαι, with short η. 

§ 75. Dialects.—1. The quantity of the common vowels is very un 
certain generally, but especially in Hom. ἴωμεν, let us go; Ἄρες, "Avec, 
O Ares, Ares. 

2. A ‘final syliable ending in a long vowel or diphthong i in Homer 
and the tragic choruses is ‘shortened before a following vowel: οἴκοι 
ἔσαν, they were at home (~~~); ἡμένη ἐν, sitting in (- ~ “ἦν Compare 
§ 63, D. 4. But those words which began with digamma (§ 34, D.) 
leave a preceding vowel long in Hom. : κἀλλεϊΐ τε στίλβων Kai εἵμασιν 
πτ-- ---- ), glittering with, beauty and garments. 


28 QUANTITY. § 77. 


lowed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant, 
whether— 


a) both consonants or the double consonant stand in the 
same word: χάρμα, joy ~); ἕξις, mien("~); Κάστωρ( ; or 

ὁ) the first concludes the first word, and the rest begin 
the second: θεὸς δέ, but God (~~); ἐν τούτῳ, meanwhile 
(7: or | 

c) both or the double consonant stand at the beginning 
of the second word: τὰ κτήματα, the goods (~~~); ὁ Gav, 
the living one ("). 

Obs.—When the vowel thus placed is already long by nature, this 
must be indicated in the pronunciation: the a in zpaoow, I act, 
sounds differently from that of τἄσσω, I arrange, though both 
words make a spondee in verse; that in μᾶλλον different from 
that of κἄλλος, beauty, though both form a trochee. 

δ 77. When a vowel short by nature stands before a 
mute with A, p, v, μ following, the syllable ay be long or 
short: τέκνον, child (-~); Bans. blind (=~); τί δρᾷς, he 
art thou doing (=~)? 

The syllable, however, is necessarily long in the follow- 
ing cases : 


§ 78. a) when the mute stands at the end of the first, 
the liquid or nasal at the beginning of the second word: 
ἐκ νηῶν, out of the ships (~~~); and in compounds in which 
the mute belongs to the first element: AC 7 speak out 
(3 

6) when a soft mute (β, y, 6) is followed by A, p, or v: 
βίβλος, book (7); τάγμα, task (7 Ὕ: ἔχιδνα, snake (~~~). 


§ 77. Dialects—In Homer, a mute with Δ, p, ν, μ᾿ following, almost 
regularly makes position: τέκνον τί κλαίεις, child, why weepest thou 
{ois ) ὁ ὕπνος πανδαμάτωρ, all-subduing sleep (~~ ~~~ ). . Nay, even 
A, p, v, μι at the beginning of words, have often the power of length- 
ening the short final vowel of the preceding word: καλήν re μεγάλην 
τε, a beautiful and great ("~~ ~~" ~ ). δ in the Stem de (δεῖσαι), fear, 
and in δήν, long, has the same effect. 


§ 83. ACCENTS. 29 


Cuar. V.— ACCENTS. 


§ 79. The general rules for the accentuation of words 
are the following: 


1. Every word must have one, and can never have more 
than one principal accent, which is called simply the ac- 
cent: πολυπραγμοσύνη, busy occupation ; ἀπαρασκεύαστος, 
unprepared. On the designation of words according to 
the accent, see §$ 17, 19, 21. 


§ 80. 2. There are two kinds of accents, the sharp ac- 
cent or the acute (ὀξεῖα), and the lengthened or the cz- 
cumfplex (περισπωμένη). On the mode of using both, see 


88 17, 21. 


§ 81. 3. The acute may be upon long or short syllables, 
the circumflex only upon such syllables as are long by 
nature: as, λέγω, 1 say; λήγω, 7 cease; καλός, beautiful; 
ἀληθής, true; ἄνθρωπος, Nain; κείμενος, lying ; κεῖται, he 
lies; σῶμα, body; εὖ, well. 


§ 82. 4. The acute accent can be only on one of the last 
three syllables, and on the last but two only when the dasé 
is short : ἄποικος, colonist, but not ἄποικου (Gen.); ἔλεγον, 
L said, but not ἔλεγην, [ was said. 


§ 83. 5. The circumflex can be only on one of the last 
two syllables, and on the last but one only when the ast 
is short by nature: σῦκον, fig, but not σύκου (Gen.); σῶμα, 
body, but not σῶματος (Gen.); mpakic, act, but not πράξεις 
(Nom. Plur.). 


Obs. 1.—When the last syllable is long by position, it does not 
hinder the circumfiex from being on the last syllable but one ; 
αὖλᾶξ, furrow, Gen. αὔλἄκος, but it does when it is long by na- 
ture as well as by position: θώραξ, breast-plate, Gen. θώρᾶκος. Com- 
pare § 145. 


2. Exceptions to 4 and 5 will be adduced separately in the chap- 
ters on inflexions. It is specially to be observed that most of 


80 ACCENTS. § 84, 


the exceptions occur with the final syllables in di and ov: ἄποικοι, 
although οἱ 15 long; γνῶμαι, opinions ; τύπτεται, he is struck, Com- 
pare δὲ 108, 122 Ὁ. ὃ, 138, 157, 229, 268. 


ι § 84. 6. A last syllable but one, when long by nature, 
ean have no other accent but the circumflex if the last is 
short by nature: φεῦγε, fice, not pebye; ἦρχον, L reegned, 
not ἤρχον ; HALE, of the same age, not ἡλιξ (Gen. ἡλίκος); 
Κρατῖνος, not Κρατίνος. It may, however, be without an 
accent: εἰπέ, speak , avOawroc, man. 

Obs. 1.—Apparent exceptions, such as wore, so that, ἥδε, this, are ex- 
plained in § 94. 

2. So fixed is the rule, apart from these cases, that the quantity of 
the final syllable, or of the last but one, may often be inferred 
from the accent: ἴθι (0), go; πρῶτα [ prima, Nom. Plur.] (ἃ) ; y- 
ναῖκας (a), women, Acc. Plur.; γνώμας (a), opinions, Acc. Plur. 

§ 85. 7. Compound words have the accent on the last 
part but one of the word, as far as is possible according to 
ὃ 82, ete.: ἄπιθι, go away; ἄφιλος, friendless ; φιλόγυνος, 
Sriendly to women ; ἀπόδος, give back ; παρένθες, put in 
besides. (Compare § 359, Obs. 2.) 


§ 86. The accent of a word is variously altered by the 
changes which a word undergoes, as well as by the con- 
nexion of a word with others in a sentence. That is: 


.1. Every oxytone subdues its sharp tone when followed 
by another word, so that the grave takes the place of the 
acute. (Compare § 20.) 


§ 87. 2. In a contraction in the middle of a word, the 
syllable produced by contraction acquires no accent if 
none of the syllables to be contracted had it: γένεος, yé- 
νους, of the race ; τίμαε, τίμα, honor. ‘The accent of a con- 
tracted last syllable but one is manifest of itself from the 
general rules on accent; hence τιμῶντες, honoring (Nom. 
Plur.), from τιμάοντες, τιμώντων (Gen. Plur.), from τιμαόν- 
των (according to $$ 83 and 84). A contracted final syl- 
lable has 


§ 91. ACCENTS. at 


ol 


a) the circumflex, when the jirst of the uncontracted 
syllables was accented: τιμάει, τιμᾷ, he honors , χρυσίου, 
χρυσοῦ, of golden ; 

ὁ) the acute, when the /ast was accented: ἑσταώς, ἑστώς, 
standing. 

§ 88. 3. With elision (ὃ 64), oxytone prepositions and 
conjunctions entirely lose their accent; all other kinds of 
words throw it upon the previous syllable as acutes: ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτῷ, On hin’=zmt αὐτῷ ; οὐδ᾽ ἐδυνάμην, L could not even= 
οὐδὲ ἐδυνάμην ; εἴμ᾽ ᾿Οδυσεύς, Lan Odysseus = εἰμὶ ᾿Οδυσεύς; 
ἕπτ᾽ ἦσαν, there were 86) 67,-- ἑπτὰ ἦσαν. 


§ 89. 4. With craszs (§ 65) the accent of the first word 
is lost: τἀγαθά, bona=ra ἀγαθά ; θοἰμάτιον, the dress=rd 
ἱμάτιον. Only when paroxytones change the first sylla- 
ble by crasis into one long by nature, this receives a cir- 
eumflex: τὰ ἄλλα, alia, gives τἄλλα; τὸ ἔργον, the work, 
τοὔργον. 


On the changes of the accent in declension, see §§ 107-109; on the 
accent of verbs, see §§ 229, and 331-333. 


§ 90. The dissyllabic prepositions, with the exception 
of ἀμφί, ἀντί, ava, διά, when placed after the nown or verb 
to which they belong, throw their accent on to the first 
syllable: τούτων πέρι, about those (περὶ τούτων); in like 
manner, when used adverbially, they include the substan- 
tive verb, as πάραΞεπάρεστι, tt vs there, near; ἔνι-Ξεἔνεστι, 
it 28 therein, is possible. 'This drawing back of the accent 
is called anastrophe. Compare § 446. 


§ 91. Some words of one and of two syllables unite so 
closely with the preceding word that they throw their ac- 
cent on to it. Such words are called enclitics (ἐγκλιτικαὶ 


§ 90. Dialects.—Prepositions, whose final syllable is lost by elision, 
haye not the accent even when. they occupy the position indicated 
in ὃ 90. Homeric τῇσι παρ᾽ εἰνάετες χάλκευον, among them I forged nine 
years long. 


ἐνὶ ENCLITICS. § 92. 


λέξεις, ἡ. €., inclining words), and the throwing back of the 
accent is called inclination. 


§ 92. The following are enclitics : 


1. The indefinite pronoun τὶς, τὶ, some one, something, 
through all forms (§ 214). 


2. The three personal pronouns, in the forms μοῦ, μοί, 
μέ, Mer, Mihi, ME; σοῦ, col, σέ, Cuz, tibt, te; ov, οἵ, ἕ, SU2, 
sibi, se; σφωΐν, to them two ; and odiat(1), to them. | 

3. The Indicative Present of εἰμί, J am, and of φημί, 
mmguain, with the exception of the second Pers. Sing. εἴ 
and φής. 


4. The indefinite adverbs πού or ποθί, son eaieeae 3 πῆ, 
somehow ; wot, somewhither , ποθέν, from somewhere ; 
ποτέ, sometime , πώς, somehow ; πώ, yet. 

5. The particles γέ, quidem; τέ, and; τοί, truly; νύν 
or νύ, now ; Hom. κέν or κέ, perhaps, Ll suppose ; pa (apa), 
then ; Hom. θήν, truly; πέρ, very; and δέ (meaning fo- - 
ward, and as a demonstrative appendage). Compare § 212. 


§ 93. These words throw their accent back on the pre- 
ceding word, in the following manner: 


a) A preceding oxytone leaves its sharp tone unsubdued 
(ὃ 20), and this then serves also for the enclitic: ἀγαθόν 
τι, something good , αὐτός φησιν, he himself says. : 

ὁ) After a perispome the accent of the enclitic is entirely 


lost: ὁρῶ τινας, L see some; εὖ ἐστιν, ὦ 28 well; τιμῶ σε, 
LI honor thee. 


c) After a paroxytone, enclitics of one syllable entirely 
lose their accent; but those of two syllables retain their 
accent on the last syllable: φίλος μου, my friend ; λόγος 
τις, ὦ speech» but λόγοι τινές, some speeches, λόγων τινῶν 


(Gen. Plur.). 


§ 92. Dialects—The Ionic additional form of εἴ τε εἷς, is enclitic, so 
also σφέας (Acc. Plur.), them = Att. σφᾶς, and pir, him, her, § 205, D. 


S97. ENCLITICS. 33 


d) Proparoxytones and properispomes retain their ac- 
cent, but receive also from the following enclitic another 
accent as acute on the last syllable, which remains unsub- 
dued: ἄνθρωπός τις, ὦ man ; [βέβαιοί εἰσιν, they are firm ; 
σῶμά ye, the body at least ; παῖδές τινες, some boys. 


e) Atona (§ 97) receive the accent of following enclitics as acutes: 
οὔ φησιν, he says not ; ὥς re, and how. 

ὃ 94. Obs.—Several words of one syllable form one word with en- 
clitics following: thus, deze, so that ; εἴτε, sive ; οὔτε, neque ; μήτε, 
neque ; οἵόςτε, capable ; ὅςτις, whoever ; ἤτοι, truly; καίτοι, and yet ; 
to this also belongs the δέ mentioned in ὃ 92, 5: ὅδε, this one ; 


"οἴκαδε, homewards, These words form partly apparent exceptions 
to §§ 79 and 84. 


§ 95. 232) When several enclitics follow one another, each 
throws its accent upon the preceding: εἴ τίς μοί φησί ποτε, 
if any one ever says to me. 


§ 96. The enclitics in certain cases retain their accent 
(become orthotoned ), viz. : 


1. when an enclitic forms the first word in the sen- 
tence, and therefore has nothing on which to throw its 
accent: τινὲς λέγουσι, some say. ‘This position, however, 
is rare. 


2. when an enclitic is made emphatic: σὲ λέγω, L mean 
you—no one else; εἰ ἔστιν, tf it ἐδ really so. When ἔστι 
denotes exist, be allowed, possible, it retains the accent, 
and that, too, on the last syllable but one: ἔστι θεός, there 
is ὦ God ; οὐκ ἔστιν, it is not allowed, not possible. Com- 
pare § 315, Obs. 2. 


3. After elision: ταῦτ᾽ ἔστι ψευδῆ, this is false=raira 
ἐστι ψευδῆ. 


4. Enclitics of two syllables, in the case mentioned 
& 93, ὁ, 


§ 97. Atona, τ. é., words without accent, also called pro- 
clitics, or inclining forward, are several words of one syl-« 


B2 


34 ATONA. § 98. 


lable, which have so little independence that, in regard to 
accent, they combine with the following word. 

They are the following : 

1. of the article, the forms 6, ἡ, οἱ, ai; 

2. the prepositions, ἐν (γι, with the Dat.), ἐς or εἰς (énto, 
with the Acc.), ἐκ or ἐξ, owt of; 

3. the conjunctions, εἰ, 77, and we, how, that ; the latter 
also in its use as preposition Zo ; 

4. the negative ov or οὐκ (οὐχ). 


Οὐϑ8.----οὐχί, ἃ More emphatic οὐ, is always accented. 


§ 98. Atona receive the accent only in two cases, viz. : 


a) when they are at the end of a sentence, and therefore 
have no following word on which they can rest: φὴς ἢ οὔ ; 
do you say 80 or not? so always we when placed after the 
word with which a comparison is made: θεὸς ὥς, ike a 
god, Hom. ; 

ὁ) when followed by an enclitic, which throws back its 
accent: οὔ φησι, he says not. Compare ἃ 93, ¢. 


§ 99. The following particles are distinguished accord- 
ing to the accent: 7, than, or, and 7, truly, or interroga- 
tive, Lat. nwm ; dpa, then, consequently, and ἄρα as an in- 
terrogative ; νῦν, now, and enclitic vu(v), now, particle of 
transition; we, how, and ὥς, 80; οὐκοῦν, therefore, and 
οὔκουν, not therefore. 


§ 100. DECLENSION. 35 


II. INFLEXION. 
A. INFLEXION OF NOUNS AND PRONOUNS. 


CrHap. VI.—DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES AND 
ADJECTIVES. 


§ 100. Inflexion is the change which nouns, pronouns, 
and verbs undergo to indicate their relation in a sentence. 

A distinction must be made in inflexion between Stem 
and Termination. Stem is the fixed part, Termination 
the changeable part which is appended to the Stem to in- 
dicate the different relations. 

The inflexion of nouns and pronouns is called Declen- 
sion. As the nominal and pronominal Stems are modified 
according to Cases, the terminations added to them are 
called Case-endings. The form which arises from a case- 
ending being added to a Stem is called the Case-form. 
Thus πράγματ-ος is a case-form of the Stem πραγματ, 
formed by means of the case-ending -oc. 

Great care must be taken not to confound the Stem and 
the Nominative case. The Nominative is itself a case- 
form, often quite different from the Stem. Thus the Nom- 
Inative of the Stem T pay Mar is πρᾶγμα, thing. λόγος, 
specch, is the Nominative of the Stem Aoyo, which appears, 
for example, in the compound word Aoyoypago-c, ὦ writer 
of speeches.* 

The Greeks distinguish in the Declension: 

1. Three Numbers: the Singular for one, the Dual for 

two, the Plural for several. 
2. Five Cases : Nominative, Genitive, Dative, Accusa- 
tive, Vocative. The Dual has only two case-forms, one for 
the Nom., Acc., and Voc., the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
In the Plur., the Voc. is always like the Nom. . 

3. Three Genders.; Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. 


* The Stem will always be left unaccented. 


—E | 


36 GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. § 101. 


δ 101. The gender is known: 


1. From certain general characteristics of sex,in which 
the Greek language almost entirely coincides with the 
Latin. ΒΦ ate rule founded in the nature of things, 
that the designations of male persons are masculine, those 
of females feminine, the following rules are to be observed : 


§ 102. a) The names of rivers and winds (gods of rivers 
and winds), and months (ὃ μήν, the month), are masculine : 
ὁ Εὐρώτας, the Liver Lurotas , ὃ Lépvpoc, the west wind ; 


ς 


ὁ “Ἑκατομβαιών, the month LHecatombeon. 


§ 103. ὁ) The names of trees, lands (ἡ γῆ, the land), 
islands (ἡ νῆσος, the zsland), and most cities, are femi- 
nine: ἡ δρῦς, the oak; ἡ ᾿Αρκαδία, Arcadia; ἡ Λέσβος, 
the island of Lesbos ; ἡ Κολοφών, the city of Colophon. 
Most abstract substantives also, ὦ. ¢., those which denote a 
condition, relation, act, or property, are feminine: ἡ ἐλπίς, 
hope; ἡ νίκη, victory ; ἡ δικαιοσύνη, righteousness ; ἡ 
TaXUTIC, GuiCckness. 

§ 104. ὁ) Many names of frwits are neuter . τὸ σῦκον, the 
Jig ; most diminutives also, both of masculine and feminine 
words: τὸ γερόντιον, dimin. of 6 γέρων, the old man; τὸ 
γύναιον, dimin. of ἡ γυνή, the woman. Farther, every name 
and word which is adduced merely as a word: τὸ ἄνθρωπος, 
the name “man ;” τὸ δικαιοσύνη, the idea of “righteous- 
ness ;” and the names of the letters, τὸ ἄλφα, τὸ otypa. 


ὃ 105. 2. From the ending of the Stem the gender is 
known according to δὲ 113, 125, 137-140. 

3. In Declension; the Neuter may be distinguished from 
the Masculine and Feminine, for all Neuters have 

a) no Accusative or Vocative distinct from the Nom. 

ὦ) no ¢ as case-sign of the Nom. Sing. 

6) the ending a in Nom. Ace. and Voe. PI. 

§ 106. The Greek language, like the English, employs 
the definite Article. The forms of the Article are the 
following : 


§ 109. ACCENT IN DECLENSION. 37 


Fem. 

Singular. 

Nom. the. 

Gen. of the. 

Dat. to the. 

Ace, the. 
Dual. 

N. A. τώ τά Or τώ the. 

ie. τοῖν ταῖν or τοῖν of or to the. 
Plural. 

Nom. οἱ αἱ the. 

Gen. τῶν τῶν of the. 

Dat. τοῖς ταῖς to the. 

Ace. τούς τάς 


the. Kd 


The following general rules on accentuation apply to all 
the declensions of substantives. 


§ 107. a) The accent remains unaltered on the syllable 
on which it stood in the Nominative as long as the gen- 
eral laws of accent allow: ἄνθρωπος, man, ἄνθρωπε (Voe.); 
σῦκον, fig, σῦκα (Nom. Plur.). Exceptions, §§ 121 and 142, 
181, 2. 

6) But when the original accentuation becomes impos- 
sible by the length of the final syllable or by increase at 
the end, the accent is shifted only as near to the end of the 
word, and is changed only as much, as is absolutely neces- 
sary: ἄνθρωπος, man, ἀνθρώπου (Gen. Sing.), ἀνθρώποις 
(Dat. Plur.); σῶμα, body, σώματος (Gen. Sing.), σωμάτων 
(Gen. Plur.); τεῖχος, wall, τείχους (Gen. Sing.). 

§ 108. 6) The terminations οἱ and a are not considered 
long in regard to accent; hence ἄνθρωποι, γνῶμαι (γνώμη, 
opinion). | 

§ 109. d) The Genitives and Datives of all numbers, 


if the last syllable is long, can never have the acute upon 
this syllable, but only the circumflex: ποταμοῦ, Gen. Sing. 


98 THE A DECLENSION. § 110. 


of ποταμός, rer ἐν τιμῇ; Dat. Sing. of τιμῇ, honor y ποδῶν, 
Gen. Plur. οἵ πούς, foot ; μηνοῖν, Gen. Dual of μήν, month. 

§ 110. Originally there was only a single declension, for 
which reason much has still remained common, which we 
shall put together below, ὃ 173. But we distinguish 7100 
Principal Declensions according to the ending of the 
Stems: 

1. the Lirst Principal Declension (vowel declension), 
which comprehends the Stems ending in a and 0; and 

2. the Second Principal Declension (consonant declen- 
sion), which comprehends the Stems ending in consonants, 
but also those in the soft vowels ε, v, in diphthongs, and a 
small number of Stems in ο. 


First PRINCIPAL DECLENSION. 
( Vowel-declension.) 


δ 111. The first principal declension is subdivided into 
two, Viz. : 
A. The Α Declension. - 
B. The O Declension. 


What is common to both is put together below, § 134. 


A. THe A DECLENSION 
(commonly called the First Declension). 


§ 112. The A Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems end in a. In certain cases, however, this a 
becomes η. Hence the A Declension of the Greeks cor- 
responds both to the A, or first, and to the E, or fifth, De- 
clension of the Latin language. 


δ 113. The A Declension contains only Masculines and 
Feminines. The two genders are most easily distinguished 
in the Nom. Sing., in which the masculines take e, the 
feminines no case-ending. Hence the terminations of 


ὃ 115. THE A DECLENSION. 39 


the Nom. Sing. are in the feminine a, ἡ, in the masculine 
ac, nC. 


§ 114. 1. Keminines. 


χώρα, land, γλῶσσα, tongue. τιμή, honor. 
xopa [terra] γλωσσα Tipa 
| χώρα [terra] γλῶσσᾶἄ ἷ τιμή 
χώρᾶς γλώσσης τιμῆς 
χώρᾳ [terre] γλώσσῃ τιμῇ [τ6-1]} 
χώρᾶ-ν [terra-m | γλῶσσᾶ-ν τιμή-ν [re-m] 
χώρα [terra] γλῶσσᾶ τιμή 
χώρᾷ γλώσσα τιμᾶ 
χώραιν chy SEL tas ah ged τιμαῖν 
Plural. | 
Nom. | χῶραι [terre] γλῶσσαι τιμαί 
᾿ς Gen, χωρῶν γλωσσῶν τιμῶυ 
ee | χώραις γλώσσαις τιμαῖς 
χώρᾶς [terras] γλώσσᾶς τιμᾶς 
[Pos χῶραι [ἐπ] λῦσαι  πμί ὁ χῶραι [terre] γλῶσσαι τιμαί 
Examples fcr Declensicn. 
θεά, goddess. δόξα, opinion. γῆ, earth. 
σκιά, shadow. Ἐ πύλη, gate. γνώμη, opinion. 
Bia, force. f 


δ 115. In certain cases in the Singular, but never in the 
Dual and Plural, a becomes yn. Hence the following rules: 

1. In order to form the Nom. Sing. from the Stem, or 
from a given case-form of the Dual or Plural: 


δὲ 112-117. Dialects.—1. The Doric dialect never changes a into n: 
τιμᾶ, τιμᾶς ; γλῶσσα, γλώσσᾶς. 

2. The Ionic dialect changes every long a in the Singular into ἡ: 
σοφίη, πέτρη, βασιλείης, μοίρῃ. Short a is generally unchanged, as βασί- 
λειᾶ, μοϊρᾶν :. but in abstract substantives in -ειᾶ, -οιᾶ, a is likewise 
changed into ἡ: ἀληθείη, truth, Att. ἀλήθεια ; εὐπλοίη, good passage ; and 
also in κγίσση, steam from fat, Σκύλλη. The ἃ remains in θεά and some 
proper names. 

3. The Voc, of νύμφη, young woman, is in Homer vipa. 


40 THE A DECLENSION, § 116, 


a) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after ε, 1, or p (ὃ 41): 
St. copia, Nom. Sing. σοφία, wisdom ; Dat. Plur. πέτραις, 
Nom. Sing. πέτρα, rock. 

b) a remains in the Nom. Sing. after o, and after the 
double consonants ζ, ἕ, ψ, oo (or τ τὴ; AA, as well as in the 
feminine designations in -arva: St.auaéa, Nom. Sing. 
ἅμαξα, carriage y Gen. Plur. Acavov, Nom. Sing. λέαινα, 
Moness. 

c) After other vowels and consonants a is generally 
changed into ἡ in the Nom. Sing.: St. Boa, Nom. Sing. 
Bon, cry; Acc. Plur. γνώμας, Nom. Sing. γνώμη (opinion). 

Moye important exceptions are: to a) κόρη, girl; κόῤῥη, temple ; 

deion, neck—to ὃ) toon, dew—to ¢) στοά, hall; χρόα, color; τόλμα, 
boldness ; δίαιτα, mode of life. 

§ 116. 2. In order to form the other cases in the Singu- 
lar according to a given Nom. Sing. : 

a) If the Nom. Sing. ends in ἢ, this letter remains 


throughout the Sing. : δίκη, justice, ὃ δίκης, δίκῃ, δίκην, δίκη. 


δ) If the Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains always 
in the Ace. and Voe.: ἅμαξα, ἅμαξαν. 

c) If the Nom. Sing. ends in a, this letter remains a@/so in 
the Gen. and Dat. when preceded by a vowel or p (ὃ 41): 
Nom. Sing. σοφία, wisdom, Gen. σοφίας ; Nom. Sing. στοά, 
colonnade, Dat. στοᾷ : also in some proper names with long 
a: Nom. Sing. Λήδα, Gen. Λήδας ; and in μνᾶ (contracted 
from pvaa), Gen. μνᾶς. 

d) Otherwise a of Nom. Sing. becomes ἡ in Gen. and 
Dat.: Nom. Sing. μοῦσα, Gen. μούσης ; Nom. Sing. δίαιτα, 
Dat. διαίτῃ. 

δ᾽ 117. For the quantity of ain the Nom. and Ace. Sing., 
the general rule is: a purwim (after vowels) and a after p is 
long, every other a is short: θεά, goddess; ἅμιλλα, fight. 

The exceptions are generally shown by the accent (§ 84, Obs. 2). 

The most important are the fem. designations in -rpra and -ea: 
ψάλτριᾶ, female player ; Bacirerd, queen (but βασιλείᾳ, dominion) ; 
and several words with diphthongs in the last syllable but one, 
as opaipa, ball; ebvout, good will; poipa, fate. 


OO ςπ τ λα τ δι 


§ 120. THE A DECLENSION. 41 


§ 118. The Gen. Plur. has the ending wv, which com- 
bines with the Stem a to form dwy, contr. ὧν. This is the 
reason that the Gen. Plur. of all words in this declension 
has the circumflez : χώρα, χωρῶν ; λέαινα, λεαινῶν (xcep- 
tions, ὃ 181. Compare § 123). 


§ 119. The Dat. Plur. originally ended in σι, before 
which ὁ is added to the a of the Stem. The accu thus 
formed is usually shortened into ace, but the original form 
is found even in Attic writers in poetry and prose. (Com- 
pare § 128, D.) 


§ 120. 2. Masculines. 


vedvidc, youth. | πολίτης, citizen. | ‘Epic, god Hermes. 


Examples. 


Stems. VEaVLa πολῖτα Ἕρμη (from ‘Eppea) 
Singular. 
Nom. veadvid-c _ πολίτη-ς ἹῬρμῆτς 
Gen. vedviov πολίτου Ἑρμοῦ 
Dat. veavia πολίτῃ. ἝἙρμῃ 
Ace. veavia-v πολίτη-ν Ἑρμῆ-ν 
Του. vedvia πολῖτα Ἑρμῆ 


Dual. 
N. A. V. 


πολίτα ‘Eppa, statues of 
Hermes. 


veavia 


G. D. vedviay πολίταιν ‘Lppaiy 


Plural. 
Nom. vedviat πολῖται 
Gen. VEAVLOV πολιτῶν Ἑρμῶν 
Dat. γεᾶνία!:ς πολίταις Ἑρμαῖς 
Ace, veavias πολίτας ‘Eppae 


Voe. 


VEAVIAL πολῖται 


§ 118. Dialects—4. The -awy of the Gen. Plur. is preserved in the 
Hom. dialect: κλισιάων (κλισία, tent), ἀγοράων (ἀγορά, speech) ; but -¢ w v 
also occurs, in which case ε is generally lost by synizesis (δ 89): πα- 
σέων, of all, fem. 

The Dorians contract -awy into ay (§ 37, D.3): θεᾶν, dearum. 


ὃ 119. Dialects —5. The Dat. Plur. in Ionic ends in -y o1(v), -y¢ (but 
also in the Attic -aic): κλισιῴσι, πέτρῳς. 


42 THE A DECLENSION. § 121. 


Examples for Geclensicn. 


ταμίας, treasurer. στρατιώτης, warrior. ἀδολέσχης, babbler, 
Νικίας, Nicias. παιδοτρίβης, wrestling- ᾿Αλκιβιάδης. 
κριτής, judge. master, 


§ 121. In the Masculines, as well as in the Feminines, 
when a vowel or p precedes, the a of the Stem remains 
and is long; after every other letter it becomes ἡ in the 
Nom. Dat. and Acc. Sing. 

Those words which in the Nom. Sing. Bs in τη-ς, 
names of peoples, and compound words, fe: a short in the 
Voe. Sing.: πολῖτα, Πέρσα (Nom. Sing. Πέρση-ς, Persian); 
yswpétpa (Nom. Sing. γεωμέτρη-ς, land-measurer). The 
Voc. δέσποτά (Nom. Sing. δεσπότη-ς, lord) draws back the 
accent, contrary to ὃ 107, a, to the first syllable. All oth- 
ers have ἡ in the Vocative: Kpovidén (Nom. Sing. Kpo- 
vidn-c). 


§ 122. The Declension of the d/asculines 15 distinguished 
from that of the eminines : 


1. in the Nom. Sing. by ¢ being added to the Stem ; 
2. by the Gen. Sing. ending in ov. 


Obs.—The termination of the Gen. Sing. of the masculines is prop- 
erly -o, which, with the a of the Stem, forms -ao (see the Homeric 
dialect); by weakening a to ε (δ 118, D.) and contraction (ὃ 37) 


arises ov: πολίτᾶο (πολιτεο), πολίτου. 


§§ 121 and 122. Dialects.—1.The Epic dialect in some words omits 
the ¢ of the Nom. Sing., in which cases the a remains short: ἱππότα, 
horseman ; vepednyepira, cloud-gatherer. (Compare Lat. poéta, scriba.) 

2. The Dorians also in the masculines put ἃ for 1; and contract do 
into ἃ. (δὲ 24, D.; 37, Ὁ. 3.) 

3. Homer has three forms 3 in the Gen. Sing. : 

a) the original -do: ’Arpeiddo ; 

b) -ew with the quantity transposed (where ε is lost by synizesis, 
δὲ 37, D., 39, D.): ’Arpeidew. The accent remains unchanged, in spite 
of the ὦ in the final syllable. The New-Ionic form is the same. 

_ Ὁ τῷ by contraction : Ἑρμείω (Nom. Sing. ‘Eppeia-¢ = Attic “Eppije), 
βορέω (Nom. Sing. βορέας). Compare § 37, a. 


§ 125. THE O DECLENSION. 43 


βοῤῥᾶς (contracted from βορέᾶ-ς, north wind), contracts the original 
ao in the Gen. Sing., after Doric fashion, into ἃ: βοῤῥᾶ. The 
same takes place with some Doric and Roman proper names, 
and a few other words: Σύλλας, Sulla; ὀρνιθοθήρας, fowler, Gen. 
Sing. a. 

ὃ 123. In the Dual and Plural the Declension of the 

Masculines is the same as that of the Feminines. 
Exceptions to the accentuation prescribed in ὃ 118 are ypijorn-c, 


usurer ; ἐτησίαι, trade-winds, Gen. Plur. χρήστων (χρηστῶν in the O 
declension, from χρηστός, good) and ἐτησίων. 
* 


B. THE O DECLENSION 
(commonly called the Second Declension). 


§ 124. The O Declension comprehends those words 
whose Stems end in o, together with a few whose Stems 
end in ὦ (ὃ 132). It answers to the o- or Second Declen- 
sion in Latin. 


§ 125. The O Declension is the complement of the A 
Declension in regard to gender. It contains d/asculines 
and Weuters, but only few Leminines. 

The termination of the Masculines and Feminines in the 
Nom. Sing. is o-¢, that of Neuters o-v [ Lat. u-s, u-m). 

The Masculines and Feminines are declined alike; the 
Neuters are distinguished from them (compare § 105) only 
by— 

1. The Nom. and Voce. Sing. taking the Accusative end- 
ing v: δῶρο-ν (gift) [donu-n70}. 

2. The Nom. Acc. and Voc. Plur. ending in a: δῶρα 
[dona]. 


4 THE O DECLENSION. § 126. 
8. 126. 
Examples, | 6 ἄνθρωπο-ς, man ἡ 606-¢, way.| τὸ δῶρο-ν, gift. 
Stems. ἀνθρωπὸο 000 | Owpo 
Singular. 
Nom. ἄνθρωπο-ς [dominu-s] | ὁδό-ς δῶρο-ν [donu-m] 
Gen. ἀνθρώπου ὁδοῦ δώρου 
Dat. ἀνθρώπῳ [domino] ὁδῷ δώρῳ [dono] 
Ace. ἄνθρωπο-ν [dominu-m]  ὁδό-ν δῶρο-ν {donu-m] 
Voe. ἄνθρωπε [domine] ὁδέ δῶρο-ν [donum-] 
Dual. : τ 
N. A.V. | ἀνθρώπω ὁδώ δώρω 
G. 2. ἀνθρώποιν ὁδοῖν δώροιν 
Plural. | 
Nom. | ἄνθρωποι [domini] ὁδοί δῶρα [dona] 
Gen. ἀνθρώπων ὁδῶν δώρων 
Dat. ἀνθρώποις Coorg δώροις 
Ace. ἀνθρώπους [domino-s] | ὁδούς δῶρα [dona] 
Voe. ἄνθρωποι [domini] ὁδοί δῶρα [dona] 


Ezamples for Declensicn. 


θεός, God. ποταμός, Tiver. σῦκον, fig. 
vopmoc, law. πόνος, trouble. μέτρον, MeEASUTe. 
κίνδυνος, danger. βίος, life. ἱμάτιον, dress, 
ταῦρος, bull. θάνατος, death. 


§ 127. Obs—The Feminines are partly known by the general rules 
already given (δὴ 101, 108) : ἡ φηγός, esculent oak ; ἡ ἄμπεχος, vine ; 
ἡ νῆσος, island ; ἡ ἜΒΗ continent ; Κόρινθος. 

The following also are feminine: 

1. The names of different kinds of earth and stones: ψάμμος, sand ; 
κόπρος, dung; γύψος, chalk ; πλίνθος, brick , σποδός, ashes; ψῆφος, 
pebble ; βάσανος, touch-stone. 

2. Different words for way: ὁδός, κέλευθος, ἀτραπός, path ; ἁμαξιτός, 
carriage-road. In the same manner, ἡ τάφρος, dike, but ὁ στενωπός; 
narrow way. 

3. Words conveying the idea of a cavity: χηλός, chest of drawers ; 
γνάθος, jaw ; κιβωτός, chest ; copdc, coffin ; ληνός, wine-vat ; κάρδο- 
πος, kneading-trough ; κάμινος, oven. 

4, Several adjectives used as substantives: 1) διάμετρος (supply 

γραμμή, line), diameter; σύγκλητος (supply βουλή, One) ae 
of the council. 


§ 130. THE O DECLENSION. 48 


5. Single words: βίβλος, book ; ῥάβδος, staff; διάλεκτος, dialect ; 
γόσος, disease ; δρόσος, dew ; δοκός, beam. Many designations of 
personal beings are common, that is, with the same form they 
are masculine when they denote a male, feminine when they 
denote a female: ὁ θεός, god ; ἡ θεός, goddess ; ὁ ἄνθρωπος and ἡ 
ἄνθρωπος. 


§ 128. The ending of the Gen. Sing. is -o, which, with 
the o of the Stem, is contracted into ov (compare ὃ 122): 
avOpwro-0 = ἀνθρώπου. 


§ 129. The Nominative form is sometimes used instead 
of the Vocative form: the Vocative of θεός is always the 
same as the Nom.: ὦ θεός [ Lat. deus]: ἀδελφός, brother, 
has ἄδελφε in the Vocative with the accent thrown back. 


Contracted Declension. 


§ 130. Several words which have ε or o before the last 
letter of the Stem may contract these vowels with the o. 
The rules of §§ 36 and 37 are here applied: ea, however, 
contrary to ὃ 38, is contracted into a. 


§ 128. Dialects —The Epic dialect in the Gen. Sing. has the older 
form co for the ending; co with o of the St. produces oo: ἀνθρώποιο, 
πεδίοιο (redio-v), field. We also, however, find the Attic ov. 

Other Epic peculiarities are: -cw»—=ow in the Gen. and Dat. Dual: 
ὦμοιιν (ὦμος, shoulder) :----οισι(ν) = orc in the Dat. Plur.: ἀνθρώποισι(υ), 
which is also New-Ionic, and is found even in Attic writers (compare 
§ 119). 


§ 180. Dialectz.—The Ionic dialect leaves the forms uncontracted. 


40 CONTRACTED O DECLENSION. ὃ 131. 
Examples. ὁ νοῦ-ς, 867,86. τὸ ὀστοῦν, bone. 
Stems. v00 ὀστεο 
Singular. 
Nom. V60-C γοῦς ὀστέο-ν ὀστοῦ-ν 
Gen. γόου vou ὀστέου ὀστοῦ 
Dat. vow νῷ ὀστέῳ ὀστῷ 
Ace. νόο-ν γοῦ-ν ὀστέο-ν᾿ ὀστοῦ-ν 
Voe. γόε vou ὀστέο-ν ὀστοῦ-ν 
Dual. 
ἮΝ. Α. ΤΥ. vow vo ὀστέω ὀστώ 
 G. Ὁ. voow voi ὀστέοιν ὀστοῖν 
Plural. 
Nom. voot vot 
Gen. γόων γῶν 
Dat. γόοις γοῖς 
Ace, γόους γοῦς 
Voe. γόοι vot 


Examples for Declenzion. 


πλοῦς, Toyage. ῥοῦς, stream. ἀδελφιδοῦς, brother's son. 


§ 131. Some irregularities of accentuation occur in the 
contraction, Viz. : 

1. the Nom. Dual is made oxytone, contrary to § 87. 

2. compound words leave the accent on the last syllable 
but one, also contrary to ὃ 87: περίπλῳ, Dat. of περίπλους, 
circumnarigation, for περιπλῷ, from -dw. 

3. the word κάνεον, basket, is contracted into κανοῦν, con- 
trary to § 87. 3 

On contracted adjectives, see § 183. 


Attic Declension. 


§ 132. A small number of words, instead of the short 
Q-sound (0), have the long (w). This w at the end of the 


§ 181. Dielects—A Gen. ending τὸ appears in Homer in Πετεῶτο, 
Gen. Sing. from the Nominative Mered-e. 


§ 134, ATTIC O DECLENSION. 47 


Stem goes through all the cases, but at the same time takes 
the case-endings as far as possible. Most of these words 
have « before w, and for -ew there also occurs the additional 
form -ao: vew-c, tenrple, together with vad-¢; λεώ-ς, people, 
together with Aad-¢ (compare ὃ 37, D.). This Declension 
is called the Atéze. | 

On adjectives in w-¢, see § 184; on some words which 
fluctuate between this and the second principal declension, 
see ὃ 174. 


Examples. ὁ vew-c, temple. TO ἀνώγεω-ν, Upper TOM. 
Stems. VEW ἀνωγεω 
Singular. 
Nom. VEW-C ἀνώγεω-ν 
Gen. γνεώ ἀνώγεω 
Dat. γεῴ ἀνώγεῳ 
Ace, VEW-V ἀνώγεω-ν 
Dual. 
ea, V. νεώ ἀνώγεω 
G. D. νεῶν ἀνώγεῳν 
Plural. 
Nom. ve ἀνώγεω 
Gen. νεών ἀνώγεων 
Dat. vEewe ἀνώγεῳς 
Ace, VEWE ἀνώγεω 


Another example: κάλως, rope. 


§ 133. The accentuation in these words has a twofold 
irecularity, viz. : 

1. ew passes always for only one syllable in regard to ac- 
cent: Mevédswe, apparently contrary to ὃ 82; 

2. even upon the Genitives and Datives, when they are 
accented, the accent is put, not as a circumflex, but as an 
acute, contrary to ὃ 109. 


ἢ 134. The A and O Declensions, that is, the Vowel or 
First. Principal Declension, have the following points in 
common : 


48 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 135. 


1. the masculines have in the Nom. Sing. the ending -ς. 

2. the masculines have in the Gen. Sing. ($§ 122, 128) 
the ending -ov. 

3. all three genders have « subscriptum with a long vowel 
in the Dat. Sing. 

4. all three senders have -ν in the Ace. Sing. 

5. all three ‘genders have the Stem vowel lengthened i in 
the Nom. Ace. τ γοο. Dual. 

6. all three genders affix -ἰν to the Stem vowel in the 
Gen. and Dat. Dual. 

7. all three genders have -wy in the Gen. Plur. 

8. all three genders affix -ow or ¢ with preceding ¢ to the 
Stem vowel in the Dat. Plur. 

9. the masculines and feminines affix -: to the Stem vowel 
in the Nom. Plur. 

10. the masculines and feminines affix -¢ (for ve) in the 
Acc. Plur., lengthening the Stem vowel to compensate for 
the ν dropped (ἢ 42). 

The difference, therefore, is only in the formation of the 
Gen. Sing. of the feminines and in the accentuation of the 


Gen. Plur. 


SECOND PRINCIPAL DECLENSION. 


CONSONANT-DECLENSION 
(commonly called the Third Declension). 


§ 135. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 
all the Stems which end in consonants, the soft vowels 1 
and v, or diphthongs, and a small number of Stems in o 
(Nom. w). The Stem is best recognized in the Gen. Sing., 
where what remains after rejecting the termination o ¢ may 
generally be considered as the Stem: Gen. λέονττος, St. 
Acovr (Nom. λέων, Lion); Gen. φύλακ-ος, St. φυλακ (Nom. 
φύλαξ, guard ). 


§ 139. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 49 


Hence, for the exact recognition of a word of this declension, not 
only the Nominative, but also the Stem or the Genitive is neces- 
sary: as, Nom. daic, St. dair, or Gen. δαιτός, meal [ Lat. rea, St. reg, 
or Gen. regis]. 

To the second principal declension correspond in Latin the third 
and fourth declensions. In it the case-endings usually appear 
pure, ὁ. ¢., not mixed up with the end of the Stem. 

The Stems ending in the soft vowels follow the third declension, 
because the soft vowels (δ 35, 1) can be used together with the 
vowels of the terminations: Gen. πίτυ-ος (Stem πιτυ, Nom. πίτυ-ς, 
pine-tree). In the Stems ending in diphthongs, the v is some- 
times resolved into F: for example, the Stem βου (Nom. βοῦ-ς, 
ox) was originally in some forms Sof (Latin δου), as Gen. BoF-d¢ 
(=bov-is). See ὃ 35, Obs, The O Stems have probably lost a 
final consonant. 

§ 136. The Second Principal Declension comprehends 

all three genders. 

The Weuters may be recognized by the inflexion, accord- 
ing to ὃ 105, from their having the Nom. and Ace. alike, 
and these cases in the Plur. always with the ending -a: 
σώματ-α (St. cwuar, Nom. Sing. σῶμα, body). 

§ 137. For determining the gender from the Stent the 
following are the most important rules: 


a) Masculine are the Stems in ev (Nom. et-c), rnp 
(Nom. TN )s TOP (Nom. τωρ): ντ (with Nom. ς or v pre- 
ceded by a long vowel), as well as most Stems in v (of 
various Nominatives) with a preceding long vowel: St. 
γραῴφευ, Nom. γραφεύς, writer; St. and Nom. σωτήρ, sa- 
vior; St.pnrop, Nom. ῥήτωρ, orator; St.Xeovr, Nom. 
λέων, lion, leo; St. and Nom. ἀγών, contest. 

§ 138. ὁ) Leminine are all Stems in ὃ (Nom. -te, -ae), 
most in ¢ (Nom. -ἰ- Ὁ), those in o (Nom. -w or -w-c¢), and the 
names of qualities in τητ (Nom. -rn-¢): St. ἐλπιδ, Nom. ἐλ- 
mic, hope; St.7oAt, Nom. πόλις, city; St. πειθο, Nom. 
πειθώ, persuasion ; St.icornr, Nom. ἰσύτης, equality. 

§ 139. c) Weuter are the Stems in par (Nom. pa), the 
substantive Stems in ς with Nom. oc or ac, those in ¢ or v 
which append no ¢ in the Nominative, and those in p pre- 


C 


50 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 140. 


ceded by a short vowel in the Nom.: St. σωματ, Nom. 
σῶμα, body; St. γεν ες, Nom. γένος, genus ; St. and Nom. 
γῆρας, age; St.and Nom. σίναπι, mustard ; St. and Nom. 
ἄστυ, city; St. and Nom. jjrop, heart. 

§ 140. The following words must be noticed separately : 
ἡ γαστήρ (St. yaorep), belly; ὃ πούς (δ. πο δ), foot; ἡ 
χείρ (St. y erp), hand ; τὸ οὖς (St. ὦ τὴ, ear; ὃ πῆχυς (δύ. 
TnXv), forearm ; ἡ φρήν (δ. φ ps v), diaphragm, mind ; 
ὁ πέλεκυς (St. πελεκ υ) axe; ὃ βότρυς (St. βοτρ om 
bunch of grapes; ὃ στάχυς (St. στα χυ): ear of corn, ὃ 
σφήξ (St.ogdnk), wasp; ὃ μῦς (St. wuc), mouse ΔΜ]: 
ὁ ἰχθύς (St. iy Ov), fish , 6 ἀήρ (St. aep), air ; τὸ πῦρ (δῖ. 
TUp), fire; τὸ ὕδωρ (St. vdar), water. | 


Of two genders (common) are several names of animals, as: 6 and 
ἡ ἀλεκτρυών (St. ddhexrpvoyr), cock and hen; ὁ and ἡ d¢ or σῦς 
(St. ὑ or συ), swine [sus]; ὁ and ἡ αἴξ (St. aiy), goat ; ὁ and ἡ βοῦς 
(St. Bov), ov; and many names of persons: ὁ and ἡ παῖς (St- 
az ato), boy and girl; 6 and ἡ δαίμων (St. dacporv), gok and god- 
dess ; ὁ and ἡ μάντις, prophet and prophetess. 


§ 141. The endings of the consonant declension are the 


following : 


Neuters. 


Masculines and Feminines. 

Singular. 
Nom. c, or compensation by lengthening 
Gen. oc 


no ending. 


Dat. : ἵ ; en 
Ace. a ory no ending. 
Voce. no ending, or as in the Nam. rie 
Dual. 
WA. ε 
G. 2. οιν 
ες ἃ 
ων 
σι(νῈ 
ac a 
ες a 


§ 141. Dialects——The Hom. dialect has occ for ocv in Gen. and 
Dat. Dual (compare ὃ 129, D.), ποδ-οῖιν, and in Dat. Plur. frequently 
ἐσσι(νν) for ot(v): πόδ-εσσι(ν), seldom ¢ac(v): aty-eor(y). 


§ 143. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 51 


§ 142. The accent in the Second Principal Declension 
deviates from the rules laid down in § 107 in the following 
point : 

Words of one syllable accentuate the Gen. and Dat. of 
all numbers on the case-ending (circumflex if the vowel 
be long, ὃ 109): zod-d¢, rod-i (but πόδ-α), ποδοῖν, ποδῶν, 
ποσί. 

Exceptions.—1. Participles, as: ὦν, being, ὄντος ; Bac, going, βάντος 
—accentuate the Genitive and Dative of all numbers on the last 
syllable but one. 

2. πᾶς, omnis, has παντός, παντί, but πάντων, waor(v). 

3. The words παῖς, boy; ὃμώς, slave; θώς, jackal ; Towe, Trojan ; τὸ 
φῶς, light ; ἡ φῷς, blister ; ἡ δᾷς, torch; τὸ οὖς, ear; ὁ onc, moth, 
are paroxytones in Gen. Plur. and Dual: zaid-wy, δμώτ-ων, θώτ-ων, 
Tow-wy, φώτ-ων, oyd-wy, δᾷάδ-ων, wr-ow, oé-wy (compare farther 
§ 177, 9). 

4, The words which have become monosyllables by contraction: 
ἣρ =tap, spring (ver), ἦρος, ἦρι. 

§ 142 ὃ. In regard to the quantity, it must be observed that several 
monosyllables, in spite of the short Stem-vowel, are lengthened : 
St. πο ὃ. Nom. Sing. πού-ς, foot ; St. παντ, Nom. Sing. Neut. πᾶν, 


every thing; St. zip, Nom. Sing. πῦρ, fire; St. ov, Nom. Sing. σῦς, 
boar. 


§ 143. The Stems of the Second Principal Declension 
are divided into three Classes with different subdivisions: 


I. CONSONANT STEMS. 
1. Guttural and Labial Stems. 
2. Dental Stems. 
3. Liquid Stems. 


II. VoweEt STEMS. 
1. Soft-vowel Stems. 
2. Diphthong Stems. 
3. o Stems. 


III. ELipep STEMs. 
1. ¢ Stems. 
2. 7 Stems. 
3. v Stems. 


52 CONSONANT DECLENSION, ὃ 144. 


I. CONSONANT STEMS. 


§ 144. 1. Guttural and Labial Stems, 
ὦ. é., Stems in k, x, y, 7, φ, P. 


Examples. ὁ φύλαξ, guard, | ἡ φλέψ, VEIN. 
Stems. φυλᾶκ φλεβ 

Singular. 

Nom. V. φύλαξ = [ux] φλέψ [Ρ]160-8] 
Gen. φύλᾶκ-ος [duc-is] φλεβ-ός [pléb-is] 
Dat. gv\ac-it — [ duc-i] φλεβ-ἰ [pléb-i] 
Ace, φύλακ-ἃ [duc-e-m]| φλέβ-ἃ [pléb-e-m] 
Dual. 

A.V. φύλᾶἄκ-ε φλέβ-ε 
G. D. φυλᾶκ-οιν φλεβ-οῖν 

Plural. 

Nom. V. φύλἄκ-ες [duc-es] φλέβ-ες 
Gen. φυλάκ-ων [duc-um | φλεβ-ῶν 
Dat. φύλαξι() φλεψί(ν) 

Ace. φύλακ-ἄς [duc-es] φλεβ-ἄς 


Examples for Declenzicn. 


ἡ φόρμιγξ, lyre, St. φορμιγγ. 
ὁ Αἰθίοψ, Athiopian, St. Αἰθιοπ. 


Ὁ μύρμηξ, ant, St. μυρμη κ. 
ἡ μάστιξ, whip, St. μαστῖτγ. 
ἡ βήξ, cough, St. Bx. 


§ 145. All these Stems are Mase. or Fem. The Nom. 
Sing. 1s formed by affixing ¢ to the Stem: the ς with the 
final consonant of the Stem forms &, ψ, as in the Dat. Plur. 
(§ 48). The Voc. is always the same as the Nom. 


Obs.—The Stem a4 w vex has the vowel irregularly lengthened in 
the Nom. Sing.: ἀλώπηξ, for; while, on the contrary, the long 
vowel in the Stems κηρῦκ, φοινῖκ, is shortened in the Nom.: 
κῆρυξ, herald ; φοῖνιξ, palm-tree, where the accent shows that the 
v and are short by nature (compare § 83, Οὐδ. 1). τριχ has*Nom. 
Sing. 0p ié, hat, Dat. Plur. 01 & i(v) (compare § 54, a). 


§ 147. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 53 


ὃ 146. 2. Dental Stems, ἡ. e., Stems in τ, 6, ὃ, v. 


Examples. | 1) λαμπάς τὸ σῶμα ὁ γέρων ὁ ἡγεμών 
Stems. λαμπὰδ σωμᾶτ γεροντ ἡγεμον 
lamp. body. . old man. leader. 
Singular. 
Nom. λαμπᾶ-ς σῶμα γέρων | ἡγεμών 
Gen. λαμπάδ-ος σώμᾶτ-ος γέροντ-ος ἡγεμόν-ος 
Dat. λαμπὰδ-ϊ σὠμᾶτ-ϊ γεροντ- i ἡγεμόν-ἴ 
Ace, λαμπάδ-ἃ σῶμα γέροντ-α ἡγεμόν-ἃ 
‘oe, λαμπᾶ-ς σῶμα γέρον ἡγεμών 
Dual. 2p ee 
NV. A.V. | λαμπάδ-ε σώὠμᾶτ-ἕ γέροντ-ε ἡγεμόν-ε 


σ. }. γερόντ-οιν ἡγεμόν-οιν 


Aaprad-ow | σωμάτ-οιν 


Plural. 


dV: Τ. λαμπάξδ-ες σώὠμᾶτ-ἃ γέροντ-ες ἡγεμόν-ες 
Gen. || λαμπάδ-ων | σωμάτ-ων γερόντ-ων ἡγεμόν-ων 
Dat. λαμπά-σι(ν) | σώμᾶ-σι(ν) | yépov-or(v) | ἡγεμό-σι(ν) 
Ace. λαμπάδ-ἄς σώμᾶτ-ἄ γέροντ-ἂς ἡγεμόν-ἄς 


Examples for Declension. 
ἡ πατρί-ς, native country, St. πατρι ὃ. 
τὸ ὄνομα, Name, St. ὀνοματ. 
ἡ νύξ, night [nox for ποοί8], St. vv κτ [noct]. 
ἡ Kaxorn-c, badness, St. κακοτητ. 
τὸ μέλι, honey [mel], St. pede. 
ὁ sert, tooth |den-s for dent-s}, Bt. ὀδοντ [dent]. 
δελφίς, dolphin, St. ded oty. 
ii ποιμήν, shepherd, St. ποιμεν. ς 
ὁ Ἕλλην, Hellen, δι. Ἕλλη ν. 
ὁ ἀγών, contest, δ. ἀ γω ν. 
Adjectives : 
πένη-ς, poor, St. πενη τ. 
ἄκων, neut. ἄκον, unwilling, δῦ. ἀ κον τ. 
ἀπράγμων, neut. ἄπραγμον, inactive, δύ. ἀπραγμον. 

§ 147. In the dental Stems, as in the Stems to be no- 
ticed below, the Nom. Sing. Mase. and Fem. may be formed 
in two ways, Viz. : 

1. With Sigma affixed to the Stem. Before this sigma 


δά CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 147. 


the consonants τ, ὃ, 8, when they stand alone, disappear 
altogether (ὃ 49): Aaurad-c, λαμπᾶ-ς ; κορυθ-ς, κόρῦ-ς, 
helmet ; but v and vz have the short vowels of the Stem 
lengthened by way of compensation (ὃ 42), so that a, 1, ὕ 
become a, 1, v; but ε becomes εἰ, and 0, ov: παντ-ς, πᾶ-ς, 
Every , ἕν-ς, ti-c, ONE; ὀδοντ-ς, ὀδού-ς, tooth. : 


Excreptions.—The monosyllabic Stem πο [ ped] (ὃ 142 ὃ) has the 
vowel lengthened exceptionally: πού-ς [Lat. pé-s, ὃ, €., ped-s] ; 
dapapr has Nom. Sing. ἡ δάμαρ, spouse, for δαμαρς, because of its 
harshness. | 


2. Without Sigma being affixed to the Stem; but in its 
stead the Stem-vowel, in case it is short, 7s lengthened, so 
that by this lengthening (ὃ 42, Obs.) « becomes n, and 
o becomes w: St. ποιμεν, Nom. ποιμήν, shepherd; St. 
ἡγεμον, Nom. ἡγεμών. If the Stem-vowel 15 long of 
itself, the Nom. Sing. is like the Stem: ὁ ἀγών, contest. 

The τ of the Stems in ντ in this formation is rejected, 
according to ὃ 67: yepovr, Nom. γέρων (for γερωντῚ). 
The simple τ of the Participial Stems in o7 is changed 
into ς: St.XeAvKor, Nom. Sing. λελυκώς (for λελυκωτ), 
having loosened. 


Obs. 1. The vowel w shows that ¢ is not a mere affix in λελικώς, one 
who has loosened. Compare χάρϊ-ς, favor, St. χαριτ. 


Obs. 2. The Stems in 6, 0, as well as those in avr, ἐν τ, always 
form the Nom. Singswith sigma; but Stems of substantives in 
ov7 and the Stems in ν generally without c. 


§ 147 ὁ. The Neuter has the pure Stem in the Nom. 
Acc. and Voce. Sing. (δ 136), as far as the laws of sound in 
regard to final consonants (§ 67) admit it: λυθέν(τ), loosened 
(see ὃ 187), λελυκός (for AeXUKOT); γάλα, milk, from the 
Stem γάλακτ (Gen. γάλακτ-ος = Lat. dact-is). On πᾶν 
(Stem zavr), see ὃ 142 ὁ. | 


Obs.—On the Acc. Sing. in ν, belonging to some Stems in tr, 1, cd, 
v0, vd, see ὃ 156. 


§ 149. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 55 


§ 148. The Vocative of masculines and feminines some- 
times has the pure Stem, as far as is possible: Apres (St. 
“A prepmco), Aiav (St. Aiavr), γέρον (St. yepovr); some- 
times it is like the Nom. (necessarily so when the accent 
is on the last syllable): ἡγεμών ; and in ald participles even 
when the accent is not on the last syllable: λέγων (St. 
λεγον τ); speaking. 

The Voce. wat, boy, from the St. παι δ, is specially to be 
observed. 

Obs.—The Stems ᾿Απόλλων, Ποσειδῶν, which are like the Nom., 

shorten the vowel and draw back the accent in the Vocative: 


Λλπολλον, Πόσειδον. The accent is also drawn back in many 
compound words: ᾿Αγάμεμνον, ᾿Αριστόγειτον (§ 85). 


§ 149. The formation of the Dat. Plur. results from the 
laws of sound (δὲ 49, 50). τ, δ, 6, and simple ν, are 
dropped before o1(v) without leaving any trace; but vr 
is dropped with the previous vowel lengthened by way of 
compensation. 

ExcEeptTion.— The adjectives (not participles) in evr admit no 

lengthening of the vowel by way of compensation: St. χαριεντ 


(Nom. Sing. χαρίεις, graceful, Dat. Plur. χαρίεσι(ν). See Inflexion, 
§ 187). 


ὃ 148. Dialects—The Vocative of the Stem ἀνακτ (Nom. Sing. 
ἄναξ, ruler) is in Homer ava (shortened from dyvaxcr: compare the 
neuter γάλα, ὃ 147 6); some Stems in v7 lose the ν in the Voc.: ᾿Ατλᾶ 
for ᾿Ατλαν(τ). 


§ 149. Dialects—Homer forms the Dat. Plur. ποσσί(ν) instead of 
ποὃδ-σι(ν), Att. ποσίν (πούς, foot); the δ being assimilated instead of 
being rejected, 


56 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 150. 
§ 150. 3. Liquid Stems, ὃ. e., Stems in A and p. 
Examples. ὁ ἅλς ὁ ῥήτωρ ἡ μήτηρ ὁ θήρ 
Stems. ‘aX ῥητορ μητερ One 

salt. orator. mother. game. 
Singular. Ὁ 
Vom. ἅλ-ς [sal] ῥήτωρ μήτηρ [mater] 
Gen. ἁλ-ός [sal-is] | pyrop-o¢ μητρ-ός [matr-is] 
Dat. ἁλ-ί [sal-i] ῥήτορ-ι μητρ-ί [matr-i] 
Ace. ἅλ-α [sal-e-m]} ῥήτορ-α μητέρ-α [matr-e-m | 
Voc. ἅλ-ς ῥῆτορ μῆτερ 
Dual. 
N. A.V. | did-e ῥήτορ-ε μητέρ-ε 
σ. D. ἁλ-οῖν ῥητόρ-οιν | μητέρ-οιν 
Plural. 
N. Vz ὥλ-ες [sal-es] | pyrop-ec μητέρ-ες [matr-es] θῆρ-ες 
Gen. ἁλ-ῶν [sal-um]} ῥητόρτων | pnrép-wy | matr-um || θηρ-ῶν 
Dat. ἁλ-σί(ν) ῥήτορ-σι(ν)) μητρά-σι(») θηρ-σί(ν) 
Ace. ἅλ-ας ῥήτορτας | μητέρ-ας θῆρ-ας 


Examples for Declensicn. 
ὁ κρατήρ, mixing-jug, St. κρα τη ρ. 
ὁ φώρ, thief (fur), St. ow ρ. 

§ 151. The only Stem in ἃ which forms the Nom. Sing. with sigma 
is a\; all Masc. and Fem. Stems in p form the Nom. Sing. with- 
out sigma (§ 147, 2); hence with long Stem-vowels the Nom. 
Sing. is like the Stem; short Stem-vowels, however, are length- 
ened, 2. é., ε into n, o inte ω. 

The netiter has the pure Stem in the Nom. Sing. : 
Only the monosyllabic Stem πὔ ρ lengthens the v: 
(§ 142, 2). : 

§ 152. The Voc. Sing. has the pure Stem: pirop. The 

Stem σωτηρ (Nom. σωτήρ, savior) shortens ἡ into ε, and 
draws back the accent (compare § 148): Voc. σῶτερ. 


τὸ νέκταρ, nectar. 
ὁ αἰθήρ, ether, St. aidep. 


τὸ ἧτορ, heart. 
τὸ πῦρ, fire 


§ 153. The Stems πατερ, μητερ, Ovyarep, γαστερ, 


§ 150. Dialects. —1) ἅλς, poet., the sea. 

§ 153. Dialects—The ε is often retained in the Gen. and Dat. by 
poets: μητέρος: while it is rejected in other cases: θύγατρα. Instead 
of ασι(ν) in the Dat. Plur., there may be the ἐσσι() mentioned, 
§ 141, D.: Ovyarépecot(y). 


ma. 


ὃ 1δ4 CONSONANT DECLENSION. 57 


Anunrep (Noms. πατήρ, father; μήτηρ, mothers θυγάτη,», 
daughter ; γαστήρ, belly ; Δημήτηρ). reject ¢ in the Gen. 
and Dat. Sing. (ὃ 61,¢). The first four throw the accent 
on the case-ending ; the last draws it back (πατρός, Δήμη- 
τρος). The ε is accented where it appears: μητέρα, in spite 
of μήτηρ, except in the Voc., where the accent is drawn 
back: πάτερ, in spite of πατήρ, but Acc. Sing. Δήμητρα. 
In the Dat. Plur. the syllable τὲ ρ becomes by metathesis 
(δ 59) rpa: μητρά-σι(ν). 


Obs—The Stem dorep (Nom. Sing. ἀστήρ, star) belongs to these 
words only in the formation of the Dat. Plur.: ἀστράσι(ν). For 
ἀνήρ (St. dv ep), see, under the irregular words, ὃ 177, 1. 


II. γόον ει, STEms. 
ὃ 154. 1. Soft-vowel Stems, ἡ. e., Stems in εἰ and v. 


Examples. ἡ πόλις, city. ἡ σῦς, 80W. | τὸ ἄστυ (aord), city. | 
Stems. woXrt ov 


Nom. πόλι-ς ov-c ἄστυ 


Singular. 

Gen. πόλε-ως σῦ-ός ἄστε-ος OY ἄστε-ως 
Dat. (πόλε-) πόλει σὔτί (ἄστε-) ἄστει 

Ace. πόλι-ν σῦ-ν ἄστυ 

Voe. πόλι σῦ-ς ἄστυ 

Dual. 

Ν. Α.γΥ. πόλε-ε σὔ-ε (ἄστε-ε) ἄστη 
G. D. πολέ-οιν ἡ σὔ-οἵν ἀστέ-οιν 
Plural. 

NV. V. (πόλε-ες) πόλεις | σὕ-ες (ἄστε-α) ἄστη 
Gen. πόλε-ων σὔ-ῶὥν ἄστε-ων 

Dat. πόλε-σι(ν) σῦ-σί(ν) ἄστε-σι(ν) 
Ace. (πόλε-ας) πόλεις | σὕ-ας OF σῦς (ἄστε-α) ἄστη 


Examples for Declension. 
ὁ βότρυ-ς, bunch of grapes, 
ἡ πίτυ-ς, pine-tree, according to § 157. 
ὁ πῆχυ-ς, fore-arm, 
ἡ δύναμι-ς, power, 
ἡ στάσι-ς, party, faction, 
Adjectives, ὃ 185. 


t both according to § 157. 


C 2 


δ8 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 155. 


§ 155. The Nom. Sing. Masc. and Fem. is always formed 
by Sigma. The Neuter Sing. as well as the Vocative 
Sing. of all genders has the pure Stem. Yet sometimes 
the Nom. form is used for the Vocative, and this is the case 
in all monosyllables. In the Acc. Sing. Masc. and Fem. ν 
is affixed to the Stem. 

On the lengthening of monosyllabic Stems, ὃ 142 ὁ. 
But this lengthening takes place also in the Nom. and Ace. 
Sing. of some polysyllabic words. 


§ 156. Barytones in tr, 16, (0, vd, v9 (Nom. te, υ ¢), form 
the Acc. Sing. generally by affixing ν after rejecting the 
Stem-consonant: St. 2018 (Nom. ἔρι-ς, strife), Acc. ἔρι-ν ; 


St. κορυθ (Nom. κόρυ-ς, helmet), Ace. képu-v3 St. dp v8 


(Nom. dpvi-c, bird), Acc. dpvi-v. The Oxytones, on the 
contrary, always have a: ἐλπί-ς, hope, Acc. ἐλπίδα ; κλείς, 
key, stands alone; St. «Ard, Acc. κλεῖν (seldom κλεῖδ-α), 
Acc. Plur. κλεῖς or κλεῖδας. 


Examples. ἡ ἔρι-ς, strife. ἡ ἐλπί-ς, hope. 
Stems. ἐρι δ. ἐλπι δ. 
Singular. épv-c. ἐλπί-ς. 

ἔριδ-ος. ἐλπίδ-ος. 

ἔριδει. ἐλπίδ-ι. 

ἔρι-ν. ἐλπίδ-α. 


§ 157. Most Stems in ει, as well as adjective and some 
substantive Stems in v, change their final vowel to ε in 
Gen. and Dat. Sing., and in all the cases of the Dual and 


§ 156. Dialects——The Acc. Sing. in a of dental Stems is more fre- 
quent in Homer: γλαυκώπιδ-α (γλαυκῶπις, bright-eyed), ἔριδ-α ; κλείς is 
κληΐς, Acc. κληϊδ-α. 

§ 157. Dialects.—The Ionic dialect leaves « unchanged: Gen. πόλι-ος, 
Dat. πόλι (from πόλι-ι), Nom. Plur. πόλι-ες, Gen. πολίων, Dat. in Herod. 
πόλι-σι(ν), Homer πολί-εσσι(ν), Acc. πόλι-ας (Herod. also πόλις). Other 
additional forms of the Homeric dialect are: Gen. Sing. πόλη-ος, Dat. 
Sing. πόλε-ὶ and πόλη-ϊ, Nom. Plur. πόλη-ες, Acc. Plur. πόλη-ας. 

The Stems in v have always ος in the Gen. Sing. The Dat. Sing. 
only is contracted: πήχει. εὐρύ-ς, broad, has the additional form εὐρέα 
in the Acc, Sing. 


§ 158. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 59 


Plur. Before the ending of the Gen. Sing. this ε remains 
unchanged ; in the Stems, however, in :, and in some sub- 
stantive Stems in v, ε is followed by we (instead of oc), 
called the Aztic termination, which does not prevent the 
accent from being on the antepenult: πόλετως, πελέκετως 
(πέλεκυ-ς, ave). 

In the Dat. Sing. εἰ is contracted into εἰ, in the Nom. 
Plur. e¢¢ and Acc. εας into εἰς, and εα of neuter substan- 
tives into ἡ. Adjectives maintain the uncontracted form 
ea: ἄστη, but γλυκέα. 


ἢ 158. The contraction of << to ἡ in the Nom. Acc. and 
Voc. Dual is rare. The Gen. Plur. of Stems in . follows 
the accent of the Gen. Sing.: πόλετων like πόλε-ως. 

Most substantive Stems in v leave this vowel unchanged ; 
but others, like ἄστυ, follow the analogy of Stems in ε, and 
change v into «. ve are sometimes contracted into v in the 
Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual; in the Acc. Plur. also we find 
ἰχθῦς, with ἰχθύ-ας (ἰχθύ-ς, fish), and ὀφρῦς, Acc. Plur. of 
ὀφρύ-ς, eyebrow. 

ἔγχελυ-ς, cel, retains v in the Sing.: Gen. ἐγχέλυτος ; 
but changes it in the Dual and Plur. into «: Nom. Plur. 
ἐγχίλεις. 

The adjective ἴδρι-ς, acquainted with, St. idpr, keeps 
its e unchanged through all the cases. 


: § 158. Dialects—The Dat. ἰχθύϊ is in Homer contracted into ἰχθυῖ. 
In the Dat. Plur. σ is sometimes doubled: νέκυ-σσι(ν) with γεκύ-εσσι(ν) 
(νέκυ-ς, corpse). 


60 CONSONANT DECLENSION. ὃ 159. 


8. 159. 2. Diphthong Stems, ἡ. ὃς Stems in εὐ, av, ov. 


Examples. ὁ βασιλεύς ἡ γραῦς 6 and ἡ βοῦς 
Stems. βασιλευ γραυ βου 
king. old woman. 0x OY Cow. 


Singular. 
Nom. βασιλεύ-ς γραῦ-ς βοῦ-ς [bo-s] 
Gen. βασιλέ-ως γρᾶ-ός βο-ός [Ὀογ-18] 
Dat. (βασιλέ-) βασιλεῖ ypa-t Bo-t [bov-i] 
Ace. βασιλέ-ἃ γραῦ-ν βοῦ-ν [boy-e-m] 
Voe. βασιλεῦ γραῦ βοῦ 
Dual. 
ΝΑΟΥ͂. ασιλέ-ε γρᾶ-ε βό-ε 
σ. Ὁ. βασιλέ-οιν γρᾶ-οῖν βο-οῖν 
Plural. 
Ne. (βασιλέ-ες) βασιλῆς | ypa-ec βό-ες [bovy-es]} 
or βασιλεῖς 
Gen. βασιλέ-ων γρα-ῶν Bo-éy [bo-um] 
Dat. βασιλεῦ-σι(ν) γραυ-σί(ν) βου-σί(ν) 
Ace. Baowré-ac ypav-¢ βοῦ-ς 


Examples for Declensicn. 
ὁ yoved-c, parent. ὁ ἱερεύ-ς, priest. ᾿Οδυσσεύ-ς, ᾿Αχιλλεύ-ς. 


§ 160. 42 diphthong Stems affix ¢ in the Nom. Sing. 
and σι(ν) in the Dat. Plur.; those in av and ov affix ν in 
the Acc. Sing. to the full Stem. In the Voc. Sing. the 
Stem appears pure. 

Before vowel case-endings, 2. ¢.,in all other forms, the v 

of the Stem was changed into F (§ 34, D.): BoF-éc | bov-ts], 
and then was entirely lost: βο-ός [o-dv=bo-um] (ὃ 35, 
1.0) 


Obs.—An isolated diphthong Stem is οἱ, Nom. οἷ-ς, sheep [ovi-s] : 
olde, oti, οἷν ; Plur. οἷες, οἰῶν, οἰσί(ν), οἷς. Compare § 34, 10, 


§ 159. Dialects.—Homer has γρηῦς for γραῦ-ς, Dat. γρηΐ, Voc. γρηῦ or 
yonv; from βοῦ-ς, Acc. Plur. βό-ἄς, Dat. βό-εσσι(ν). The forms βῶς, 
Nom., βῶν, Acc. Sing., are Doric. 

§ 160. Dialects.—Ionic ὄϊς (ovis) for οἷς, Gen. dioc, Dat. Plur. ὀΐ-εσσι or 
decor, ACC. dic. 


a 
ι ὯΝ 


§ 162. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 61 


Some compounds of πού-ς, foot, form the Acc. Sing. 
like Stems in ov: τρίπους, three-footed, Acc. τρίπουν. For 
vav-c, see among the irregular words, ὃ 177, 11. 


§ 161. The Stems in ¢ v, moreover, have in the 

a) Gen. Sing., we for oc. Compare ὃ 157. 

ὁ) Dat. Sing., εἰ always contracted for <i. 

ΘΟ) Acc. Sing. and Plur., a is long and not contracted. 

d) Nom. and Voce. Plur., εες contracted by older Attic 
writers into ἡ ς, by the later into εἰς. 

6) Words which have a vowel before εὖ may be’ con- 
tracted also in the Gen. and Ace. Sing., and in the Ace. 
Ἐπ: pt. Πει paler, Nom. τ ΘΕ ΤΣ port of Athens, 
Gen. Πειραιῶς, Acc. Πειραιᾶ ; χοεύ-ς, measure, Acc. Plur. 
χοᾶς. 

Obs.—The Gen. in -εως has arisen by transmutation of quantity 

(ὃ 37, Ὁ. 2) out of the Hom. 7 0¢. \ Hence the length of the final 
syllable. In the same manner, the Acc. Sing. εᾶ has arisen out 


of na: still εἃ is also found, like ede in the Acc. Plural; εας is 
contracted by later writers into εἰς. 


§ 162. 3. O Stems, ὦ. ¢., Stems in o and w. 


Examples. | ἡ πειθώ, persuasion. ὁ ἥρως, hero. 
Stems. πειθο ἡρω 

Singular. 
Nom. πειθώ ἥρω--ς Plur. ἥρω-ες 
Gen. (πειθό-οε) πειθοῦς ἥρω-ος ἡρώτ-ων 
Dat. (πειθό-ὃ πειθοῖ ἥρω-ι ἥρω-σι(ν) 
Ace. (πειθό-α) πειθώ ἥρωτ-α ἥρω ἥρω-ας Or 
Voe. πειθοῖ ἥρω-ς ἥρως 
Dual and Plural of πειθώ are Dual jjow-e 
formed as in the o declension. ἡρώ-οιν 


§ 161. Dialects—The Epic dialect lengthens the ε of Stems in ev 
into η before vowels: βασιλῆ-ος, βασιλῆτ-ι, βασιλῆ-α, βασιλῆ-ες, βασιλήτ-ων, 


62 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 163. 


Examples for Declension. 
ἡ ἠχώ (St. ἡ χ 0), echo. 
Καλυψώ, Λητώ, δμώ-ς (St. ὃ uw), slave. 
μήτρω-ς (St. μη rp w), avunculus. 


§ 163. The Stems in ο, all feminine, form the Nom. Sing. 
without sigma, except the Stem aido, Nom. Sing. αἰδώ-ς, 
shame, Acc. αἰδῶ. The Acc., which is like the Nom., is 
oxytone (contrary to ὃ 87): πειθώ, not rade. 

The Vocative ends in οἱ ; all other cases are contracted. 
The Acc. of Stems in w usually remains uncontracted. 
The Stem Ew, Nom. ἡ ἕω-ς, dawn, has Gen. Sing. ἕω, Dat. 
ἕῳ (according to ὃ 132), Acc. ἕω (from ἕωα). 


Obs.—Several Stems in ον follow the above declension in some of 
their forms: ἀηδών, nightingale, Gen. ἀηδοῦς, with anddvog; εἰκών, 
image, Gen. εἰκοῦς (compare ὃ 171). 


ἀριστή-εσσι(ν) (aptored-c, prince); still there are Genitives also in eo¢ 
and εὖς (‘Odvoeic), Datives in εἴ, εἰ, and Accusatives in ea, ἡ: Τυδῆ. 
The New-Ionic dialect leaves ε frequently uncontracted: βασιλέ-ες. 


§ 163. Dialects—Homer contracts ἥρωϊ into ἥρῳ, Μίνωα into Μίνω. 
The old and poetic form for éw-c¢ is ἠώ-ς (St. ἡ 0), declined like aidw-c. 
Some proper names in ὦ in the Nom. Sing. have in the New-Ionic 
dialect an Acc. in οὖν : Λητοῦν, ᾿Ιοῦν. 


§ 165. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 63 


ΠῚ. ΤῈ STEMS, ὃ. ¢., Stems which reject the final 
consonant in certain forms. 


§ 164. 1. & Stems, 2. e., Stems which elide sigma. 


Examples. 
Stems. 


τὸ γένος, race. | M. εὐγενής, N. εὐγενές, of good family. 
YEVEC EVYEVEC 


Singular. 


Nom. yévoc [genus] M. εὐγενής N. εὐγενές 
Gen. (yéve-oc) γένους | (evyevé-oc) εὐγενοῦς 

Dat. (yéve-i) γένει (ebyevé-i) εὐγενεῖ 

Ace. γένος (ebyevé-d) εὐγενῆ Ν. εὐγενές 
Voe. γένος εὐγενές N. εὐγενές 


Dual. 
NV. A.V. | (yéve-e) γένη (ebyevé-e) εὐγενῆ 
G. 2. (yevé-ow) yevoiy (εὐγενέ-οιν) ebyevoiv 


N. V. 
| Gen. 


(γένε-ἃ) γένη (εὐγενέ-ες) εὐγενεῖς N. (εὐγενέα) εὐγενῆ 
(γενέ-ων) γενῶν | (εὐγενέ-ων) εὐγενῶν 
γένε-σι(ν) εὐγενέ-σι(ν) 

(yéve-d) γένη (εὐγενέ-ἄς) εὐγενεῖς N. 


Ace. 


(ebyevia) εὐγενῆ 


Examples for Declension. 


τὸ εἶδος, form. κάλλος, beauty. ὀ μέλος, song. ἄχθος, burden. 
Adjectives : 
σαφής, Neut. σαφές, clear. ἀκριβής, Neut. ἀκριβές, exact. 


εὐήθης, Neut. εὔηθες, simple. 


§ 165. The sigma Stems retain their final consonant only 
when it stands at the end, 7. ¢.,in the Nom. Acc. and Voe. 
Sing. Neuter, and in the Nom. and Voce. Sing. Masc. and 
Fem. 

The Neuter substantives change the Stem-vowel ε into 
o in the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Sing.: St. yevec, γένος. 


§ 165. Dialects——The Epic dialect frequently, the New-Ionic always, 
leaves the vowels of the sigma Stems uncontracted: γένεος, γένεϊ. 
Hom. sometimes has the Gen. Sing. eve (from εο ς, ὃ 37, Ὁ. 1): θάρ- 
seve (θάρσος, courage). 

In the Dative Plur. Homer has three endings: ἐ-εσσι(ν), eo-or(r), 
and the usual ε-σ ι(ν) : βελέ-εσσι(ν), βέλεσ-σι(ν), βέλε-σι(ν), (βέλος, dart). 


θά CONSONANT DECLENSION. δ 166. 


Neuter adjectives leave ε unchanged: εὐγενές. Masculines 
and Feminines form the Nom. Sing. by lengthening ες 
into n¢ (ὃ 147, 2), as ¢ can not be affixed: εὐγενής from 
evyevec, like ποιμήν from ποιμεν. 

Masculines and Feminines have the pure Stem in the 
Voe. Sing., and in compound words which are not oxytone 
in Nom. Sing. the accent is on the last syllable but two 
(compare δὲ 148, 85): Nom. Σωκράτης, Voc. Σώκρατες ; 
Nom. Δημοσθένης, Voc. Δημόσθενες. 


Obs.—The Neuter ἀληθὲς (Mase. aXnBne, true) draws back the accent 
in interrogations: ἄληθες ; really ὃ 


§ 166. In all other forms ¢ is rejected (δὲ 61 and 49): 
yéve-i for γένεσ-ι [gener-2]. Wherever two vowels meet 
they are contracted: ee in the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Dual 
become ἡ; ea generally »; but when another vowel stands 
before ε they sometimes become a, according to ὃ 41: St. 
évdeec, Nom. ἐνδεής, defective, Acc. étvdca; St. vyrec, Nom. 
ὑγιής, healthy, Acc. ὑγιᾶ, but also ὑγιῆ; St. χρεες, Nom. | 
τὸ xptoc, debt, Neut. Plur. χρέα. The adjectives in -φυής 
(St. φυες) have φυῆ and φυᾶ : εὐφυής, well-disposed, εὐφυῆ 
and εὐφυᾶ. 

Obs.—Barytone adjectives have the accent in the Gen. Plur. on the 
last syllable but one, contrary to ὃ 87: αὐτάρκων (Nom. αὐτάρκης, 
self-sufficient). So also τριήρης, trireme, used as a substantive, 
Gen. Plur. τριήρων. 

§ 167. Proper names in -κλεης, compounded with κλέος, glory (St. 
κλεες), have a double contraction in the Dat. Sing., and a single 
one in all the other cases: Nom. (Περικλεης) Περικλῆς, Gen. (Περι- 
κλεεος) Περικλέους, Dat. (Περικλεεῖ, ἹΠερικλέει) Περικλεῖ, Acc. (Περικλεεα) 
Περικλέα, Voc, (Περικλεες) Περίκλεις. 


§ 166. Dialects—A vowel before ε is often contracted with it in 
Homer : σπέος or σπεῖος, cave, Gen. σπείους, Dat. σπῆτι (from σπέεϊ), Dat. 
Plur. σπήεσσι(») and σπέσσι(ν) ; εὐκλεής, glorious, Acc. εὐκλεῖας (from 
εὐκλέεας), but ἀκληεῖς (from ἀκλεής, inglorious). Herodotus ἐνδεέες (ἐνδεής, 
defective), ἀνθρωποφυέας (ἀνθρωποφυής, human). 

§ 167. Dialects.— The Epic dialect forms Ἡρακλῆς, Ἡρακλῆ-ος, 
Ἡρακλῆτι, Ἡρακλῆ-α ; the New-Ionic, Ἡρακλέης, Ἡρακλέ-ος, Ηρακλέεϊ, 
Ἡρακλέ-α. ; 


§ 1609. CONSONANT DECLENSION. 65 


§ 168. 2. T Stems, {. ¢., Stems which elide τ. 


Examples, τὸ κέρας, horn. τὸ κρέας, meat. 


Stems. κερᾶτ κρεατ 


Singular. 

WV. A.V. Képdc κρέας 
Gen. κέρᾶττος (κέραος) κέρως (κρέαος) 
Dat. Képar-t (κέραϊ) κέρᾳ (kpéai) 
Dual. 

eA: V’. κέρᾶτ-ε (κέραε) κέρᾶ 
σ. }. κεράᾶτ-οιν (κεράοιν) κερῷν 

Plural. 

NV. A. V. Képar-a (kipaa) κέρᾶ (κρέαα) 
Gen. κεράττων (κεράων) κερῶν (κρεάων) κρεῶν 
Dat. Képd-ou(v) Kpéd-ou(v) 


§ 169. τ᾿ becomes ¢ in Nom. Ace. and Voc. Sing., accord- 
ing to ὃ 67. In the other cases some words always reject 
1: 6. 4.5. κρέας, σέλας, splendor ; γῆρας, age; κνέφας, gloom. 
Others, like κέρας, retain both forms together, with and 
without τ The vowels which meet are regularly contract- 
ed. The quantity of a is very fluctuating. The Dat. Sing. 
is written also αἱ : oéAat. 

In prose, only a few Neuters (Nom. ac) have a mova- 


ble τ. 


§ 169. Dialects—Homer has δέπα-εσσι(ν) or δέπασ-σι(ν), Dat. Plur. 
of δέπας, goblet. In Ionic a often becomes ε: Homer οὖδας, ground, 
Gen. οὔδε-ος, κῶας, fleece, Nom. Plur. κώε-α ; κέρας, New-Ionic Gen. 
κέρεος. 

A movable τ appears also in the Stems idpwr, γελωτ, xpwr (Nom. 
ἱδρώς, sweat ; γέλως, laughter ; χρώς, skin), Dat. ἱδρῷ, Acc. ἱδρῶ, together 
with Gen. ἱδρῶτος ; γέλω ; and regularly in Homer χρο-ός, ypo-t (poet. 
χρῷ), xpd-a. Compare αἰδώς, ἠώς, § 163. 


66 CONSONANT DECLENSION. § 170. 
δ 170. 3. N Stems, 2. e., Stems which elide v. 


Examples. M. F. μείζων, greater. N. μεῖζον 
Stems. μειζον 


Singular. 
N. V. μείζων Ν, μεῖζον 
Gen. μείζον-ος 
Dat. μείζον-ι 
Ace. μείζον-α [peZoa] μείζω N. μεῖζον 


Dual. 
NV. A. V. peiZov-e 
G. D. μειζόν-οιν 


Plural. 

AV: μείζον-ες [peZoec] μείζους Ν, μείζονα [μειζοα] μείζω 
Gen. μειζόν-ων 

Dat. μείζο-σι(ν) : 
Ace. peiZov-ac [peoac] μείζους Ν, μείζονα [μεεζοα] μείζω 


Examples for Declension. — 
βελτίων, better. αἰσχίων, more hateful. ἀλγίων, more painful. 


§ 171. The full and the contracted forms are equally in 
use. But the open ones (μειζοα) never occur. Compara- 
tives of more than two syllables throw back the accent in 
the Nom. Acc. and Voc. Sing. Neuter upon the last syllable 
but two: βέλτιον, αἴσχιον. 

Besides the comparatives (Nom. ὦ v, ov), there are only 
the two proper names, ᾿Απόλλων (Stem. and Nom.) and Πο- 
σειδῶν (Stem and Nom.), Acc. ᾿Απόλλω (also ᾿Απόλλων-α), 
Ποσειδῶ (also Ποσειδῶν-α). On the Vocative, see ὃ 148, 
Obs. We may compare several Stems which fluctuate be- 
tween ov and o (§ 163). 


§ 171. Dialects.—Homer forms the Acc. κυκεῶ or kuxer from κυκεών, 
minture. 


8 172. 


§ 172. Synopsis of terminations in the Second Principal 
Declension. 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


τὸ σῶμα, body. 


Part. 
Adj. 


Part. 
Adj. 


Adj. 


ὁ παῖς, boy. 
ἡ δαίς, meal, 


Πάν, Pan. 
τὸ πᾶν, the whole. 


τὸ ἔαρ, spring. 
ἡ δάμαρ, Wife. 
τὸ φρέαρ, fountain. 


ἡ λαμπάς, lamp. 
τὸ κρέας, meat. 


ὁ γίγᾶς, giant. 


1. μέλας, black. 


ἡ γραῦς, old woman. 


ἡ χείρ, hand. 
λυθείς, loosed, 
εἷς, One. 


ἡ κλείς, key. 


λυθέν, loosed. 
ἄῤῥεν, male. 


σαφές, clear. 
ὁ φονεύς, murderer. 


ὁ λιμήν, harbor. 
ὁ Ἕλλην, Greek. 


ὁ αἰθήρ, ether. 
ὁ Onp, game. 


Gen. 
σώματος 


παιδός 
δαιτός 


Πανός 
παντός 


ἔαρος 
δάμαρτος 
φρέατος 


eS 5.1 ΄Π΄΄ἷ΄ἷἿἷἿἷ΄ἷ΄΄΄΄΄ἷ΄΄΄΄ῬῬῬῬοςἘςςς...:..ς-ς-.ΞςΞ.ς.ςΚ--.:: 


λαμπάδος 
κρξως 


γίγαντος 
μέλἄνος 


γρᾶός 
χειρός 
λυθέντος 
ἑνός 
κλειδός 


λυθέντος 
ἄῤῥενος 


σαφοῦς 
φονέως 


λιμένος 
Ἕλληνος 


αἰϑέρος 
θηρός 


68 CONSONANT 


Stem. 


nT 
-€(¢) 


ἡ βαρύτης, weight. 
ὁ, ἡ τριήρης, trireme, 


j. tpt, acquainted with. 


τὸ μέλι, honey. 
ὁ δελφίν, dolphin. 


ἡ πόλις, city. 

ἡ ἐλπίς, hope. 

ἡ χάρις, favor. 

ὁ, ἡ ὄρνις, bird. 

ἡ Σαλαμίς, Salamis. 


εὔδαιμον, fortunate, 
λῦον, loosing. 


τὸ γένος, γα(6. 


? 


ὁ ὀδούς, tooth. 
ὁ πούς, foot. 
ὁ, ἡ βοῦς, 0x, cow, 


τὸ ἄστυ, city. 


ῬΕΟΙΕΝΒΙΟΝ.. 


πεφῦκός, having become. 


§ 172." 


Gen. 


βαρύτητος 
τριήρους 


ἴδριος ἡ 
μέλιτος 


δελφῖνος 


πόλεως 
ἐλπίδος 
χάριτος 
ὄρνιθος 
Σαλαμῖνος 


εὐδαίμονος 
λύοντος 


γένους 
πεφυκότος 


ὀδόντος 
πόδος 


βοός 


ἄστεος 


ὁ μόσῦν, wooden tower. 


δεικνύν, showing. 


δεικνύς, showing. 
ὁ ἰχθύς, fish. 
ὁ πῆχυς, ell. 
ἡ χλαμύς, cloak. 


ἡ πειθώ, Persuasion. 


« > 


ἡ ἀηδών, nightingale. 
ὁ ἀγών, contest, 
ὁ λέων, lion. 


ὁ ῥήτωρ, orator. 


μόσῦνος 
δεικνύντος 


δεικνύντος 
ἰχθύος 
πήχεως 
χλαμύδος 


πειϑοῦς © 


ἀηδόνος 
ἀγῶνος 


λέοντος 


ῥήτορος 


a ΠΠ.ι.ιι .ς-Ἀ 


CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


ὁ Howe, hero, 
ἡ αἰδώς, shame. 


. πεφυκώς, having become. 


ὁ ἔρως, love. 


69 


Gen. 


ἥρωος 


αἰδοῦς 
πεφυκότος 
ἔρωτος 


ὁ yo, vulture. 
ὁ χάλυψ, steel. 
ἡ κατῆλιψ, upper story. 


ὁ φύλαξ, guard. 
ἡ φλόξ, flame. 
ὁ ὄνυξ, nail, 

ἡ νύξ, night. 


yuroc 
χάλυβος 
κατήλϊφος 
φύλακος 
φλογός 
ὄνῦχος 
VUKTOC 


§ 173. The Second Principal Declension agrees with the 
First in the following particulars : 


1. Masculines have ¢ for the Nom. Sing. (or compensa- 


tion for it); feminines are less consistent in this. 


2. The Dat. Sing. affixes ¢ (subscribed in the First Prin- 
cipal Declension). 
3. Vowel, and in part diphthongal, Stems take ν in the 
Ace. Sing. 


Obs.—The original ending of the Acc. Sing. was also in the Second 


Principal Declension every where ν. 


This consonant was, how- 


eyer, connected with consonant-Stems by the connecting vowel 


a: ddovr-a-v—Lat. dent-e-m. 


left, generally as the only sign: ὀδόντ-α. 


4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual have ἐν (av, ow). 
5. The Gen. Plur. w v. 


Subsequently ν was dropped, and a 


6. The Dat. Plur. o:(v) originally every where. 
7. The Acc. Plur. ¢ every where. 


Obs.—The original ending of all Acc. Plur. was νῷ, but » was 
dropped after vowels of the First Principal Declension, and was 
compensated for by the lengthened ἃς, ove. 


Lat. dent-é-s for dent-em-s. 


After consonants 
there was the same process as in the Acc. Sing. : 


d0dvr-a(r)-c, 


8. Neuters all have ἅ in Nom. Acc. and Voe. Plur. 


70 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 174. 


The principal differences in the endings are: 
1. In the Gen. Sing., where the Second Principal De- 
clension always has o¢ (ie). 


2. In the Nom. Plur., where Masc. and Fem. of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension always have ες. 


Irregularities ἐγ) Declension. 


§ 174. The mixing of two Stems which may have one 
Nom. is called Heteroctizing (ἑτεροκλισία, different inflex- 
ton): Nom. σκότος, darkness, Gen. σκότου (O-Declension), 
and σκότους (Second Principal Declension); λαγώς, hare, 
according to the Attic declension, but Acc. Aayo. 

An important irregularity of this kind occurs with proper 
names in n¢: Σωκράτης (St. Swxparec), but Acc. Σωκρά- 
τὴν (as if from Stem Ywxpara of the A-Declension) with 
Σωκράτη. But those in -κλῆς (ὃ 167) follow the Second 
Principal Declension exclusively. 


§ 175. The formation of some cases from a Stem which 
can not be that of the Nom. is called Metaplasm (usra- 
πλασμός, change of formation): Nom. Sing. τό dévépov,- 
tree, Dat. Plur. δένδρεσι(ν), as if from Stem devdpec; Nom. 
Sing. τὸ δάκρυον, tear, Dat. Plur. daxpvor(v), from St. δακρυ 
(poet. Noin. δάκρυ) ; τὸ πῦρ, fire, Plur. τὰ πὺῦρά, Dat. τοῖς 
mupoic (O- Declension) ; Nom. Sing. ὄνειρο-ς, dream, Gen. 
ὀνείρατος, Nom. Plur. ὀνείρατα. 


§ 176. A peculiar irregularity appears in several Neuter 


§ 174. Dialects —Several Masc. Stems in a, Nom. ἡ ς in Herodotus, 
have ea for nv in the Acc. Sing.: δεσπότη-ς, master, δεσπότεα. ὁ ὄχο-ς; 
carriage, in Homer has Plur. τὰ ὄχεα, ὄὕχεσφι(ν), from the St. dyec. 
Οἰδίπους has poet. forms from a St. Οὐδιπο δα, Gen. Sing. Οἰδιπόδαο, 
trag. Οἰδιπόδᾶ. Homeric Σαρπηδών, Stems Σαρπηδον and Σαρπης- 
δοντ. Μίνως, Acc. Sing. Μίνωα (δ 163) and Mivwr. 


§ 175. Dialects—Hom. metaplasms are: Dat. Plur. ἀνδραπόδεσσι(ν), 
Nom. Sing. ἀνδράποδον, slave ; Nom. Acc. Plur. προσώπατα, Nom. Sing. 
πρόσωπον, countenance ; δέσματα, bonds, Sing. ὁ δεσμός ; ἐρίηρο-ς, trusty, 
Nom. Plur. ἐρίηρες ; ἀλκή, strength, Dat. Sing. ἀλκ-ί ; ὑσμίνη, battle, ὑσμῖνι; 
ἰχώρ, divine blood, Acc. Sing. ἰχῶ. 


ὦ Δ. 


§ 177. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. 71 


Stems in apt,as φρεαρτ. They reject τ in the Nom. Ace. 
and Voc. Sing. and p in the other cases: τὸ φρέαρ, well, 
Gen. φρέατος (also φρητός) 3 τὸ ἧπαρ, liver, Gen. ἥπᾶτος ; 
τὸ ἄλειφαρ and ἀλειφᾶ, salve, Gen. ἀλείφᾶτος. 

To these correspond the Stems σκα(ρ)τ and ὑδα(ρ)τ: 
Nom. σκώρ, dirt, Gen. σκᾶτός ; ὕδωρ, Gen. ὕδατος. 


§ 177. Special irregularities in alphabetical order: 


1. ἀνήρ, man (compare ὃ 153), rejects ε of the Stem 
avep, and inserts ὃ in its place (ὃ 51, Obs. 2): ἀν-δ-ρ-ός, 
ἀνδρί, ἄνδρα; Voc. ἄνερ; Dual, ἄνδρε, ἀνδροῖν ; Plur. ἄνδρες, 
ἀνδρῶν, ἀνδρἄσι(ν), ἀνδρᾶς. 

2. Ἄρης (the god Ares): St.’Apec, Gen.” Apewe and 
"Apeoc, Acc.” Apnv, together with “Apn ; Voc. regul. Αρες. 

3. ap v, Without Nom.: Gen. τοῦ and τῆς apv-0c, of the 
lamb, ἀρνί, ἄρνα, Dat. Plur. apvior(v). 

4.70 γόνυ, knee (genw), Nom. Acc. Voc. All the rest 
from St. yo var, Gen. γόνατος. 

5. ἡ γυν ἡ, woman. All the rest from St. yuvack-, 
Gen. γυναικός, Dat. γυναικί, Acc. γυναῖκα, Voc. γύναι ; Dual 
YUVALKE, γυναικοῖν 5 Plur. γυναῖκ-ες, -WV, -Ev(v), -ac. 

6. τὸ δόρυ, wood, spear: St.dSopar (comp. 4.). Gen. 
δόρατος, poet. dop 6c, Dat. δορί and δόρει. 

7. Ζεύς (the god Zeus), Gen. Διός, Dat. Διί, Ace. Δία, 
Voe. Zev. 

8.6 and ἡ κύω Vy dog, with Voce. κύον, from. St. kvov. 
All the rest from civ: Gen. xivdc, Dat. κῦνί, Acc. κύνα; 
Plur. κύνες, κυνῶν, xvai(v), κύνας. 

9. ὁ Xa-c, stone, from Hom. λᾶα-ς, Gen. λᾶ-ος, Dat. Aa-i, 


§ 177. Dialects—The following forms are peculiar to dialects: 

1. ἀνήρ, poet. ’avip-oc, ᾿ἄνέρ-ι, ’avép-a; Dat. Plur. ἄνδρεσσι(ν). 

2.” Apnc, Homer "Apnoc, “Apni, “Apna. 

4. γόνυ, Ion. and poet. γούνἄτ-ος, γούνατ-ἄ, yobvaor(v) ; Ep. Gen. Sing. 
youvéc, Plur. yoiva, γούνων, γούν-εσσι(ν). 

6. δόρυ, dovparoc, Ep. δουρός, δουρί, δοῦρε, δοῦρα, δούρων, Sodpecor(y). 

ἢ. “εύς, poet. St. Ζην : Ζηντ-ός, Znrv-t, 'δῆν-α (also Ζῆν, from Zn). 


12 IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION. § 177. 


Ace. Aaa-v, Aav; Plur. λᾶ-ες, Ad-wv, λά-:σσι(ν) or λά-εσι(ν), 
Aa-ac. 

10. ὁ paprv-e, witness, with Dat. Plur. μάρτυσι(ν), from 
St.uaprv. The rest from the St. uaprup: μάρτυρος, 
μάρτυρι, etc. 5 

11. ἡ ναῦ-ς, ship, νετώς, vn-l, vav-v ; Plur. νῆτες, νετῶν, 
yav-ol(v), ναῦς. Compare § 159. 

Obs.—The Nom. Acc. Sing. and Dat. Acc. Plur. rest on the St. vav. 


Before vowels vav becomes (according to § 35, D. 2) νη, vn; ve-we 
is for νη-ός (ὃ 37, Ὁ. 2). 


12. 6 and ἡ dpvi-c, bird, St. ὀρνιθ and ὀρνι: ὄρνιθ-ος, 
ὄρνιθι, ὄρνιθα, and ὄρνιν ; Plur. ὄρνιθες and ὄρνεις, dpvewv. 

13. τὸ οὖς, ear. All the rest from St. ὧτ: ὠτύς, wri; 
Plur. ὦτα, ὥτων, ὠ-σί(ν). (On the accent, ὃ 142, 3.) 

14. ἡ Πνύξ (the Pnyx), St. πυκν, Πυκντ-ός, Πυκντ-ί, 
Πύκν-α. 

15. 6 πρέσβυ-ς, the aged, has in the Gen. and Dat. Sing., 
and throughout the Plur., its forms from πρεσίθυτα (Nom. 
Sing. rpeo[3itne): πρέσβεις, πρέσβεων, πρέσβεσι(ν), signifies 
embassadors, to which the Sing. is πρεσβευτής. 

16.rav. Only Voc. ὦ τάν or ὦ τᾶν, friend or friends, 
a defective Stem. 

17. 6 υἱός, son, St. vio, vi, viev, Gen. υἱέος, Dat. υἱεῖ, 
Ace. viéa (rare), Plur. υἱεῖς, υἱέων, υἱέσι(ν), υἱεῖς. But alse 
regularly υἱοῦ, ete. 

18. ἡ χεῖρ, hand, St. χεῖρ, Dual χεροῖν, Dat. Pl. χερσίᾳ(υ). 


Dialects.—11. vai-c, from St. νη υ, Ion. νηῦ-ς, Hom. Acc. Sing. νῆτα, 
Dat. Plur. νήεσσι(ν), νηυσί(ν), Acc. νῆας. 
from St. vev, Ion. νε-ός, ve-t, vé-a, vé-ec, νετῶν, vé-eoot, νέ-ας. 
from St. vav, Dor. νᾶτ-ός, va-i (navi), va-eoor(v). 
13. οὖς, Ion. ovac, οὔατ-ος ; Plur. οὔατ-α, Dor. we, wr-de. 
17. vid-c, Ep. Gen. vi-oc, vi-t, vi-a, vi-ec, υἱ-ἀσι(νὺ, vi-ac. 
18. χείρ, poet. and New-Ion. χερ-ός, yep-i, Ep. Dat. Plur. χείρ-εσι or 
χείρ-εσσι(ν). 
To these add the words which are anomalous only in dialects: 
19. Homer ᾿Αἰδη-ς (Att."Acdyc), St. ᾽Α δι Gen. "Αἴδ-ος, “Aid-t, also ᾿ΑΥ- 
dwved-c, With regular inflexion, according to § 159. 


Joke a 78. CASE-LIKE TERMINATIONS. 73 


Case-like Terminations. 

§ 178. Besides the case-endings, there occur certain suf- 
Jixes or appendages, which in meaning very nearly resem- 
ble case-endings. ΤῸ these belong: 

1. -θι, answering to the question where: ἄλλο-θι, else- 

where ; 

2. -θεν, answering to the question whence: οἴκο-θεν, 

Jrom home ; 

8. -Se, answering to the question whither : οἴκα-δε, home- 

wards. 

Dialects—20. ὁ ἔρως, love, Stems épwr and épo, poet. Acc. ἔρο-ν. 

21. θέμις, justice, St. θὲμι and θεμιστ, Plur. θέμιστ-ες, θέμιστ-ας. 

22. τὸ κάρα, head, Hom. St. καρητι, kapnat, κρᾶατ, κρᾶτ, καρ. 

Hom. Wom. Sing. κάρη. 

6c 


Gen. κάρητ-ος, καρήατ-ος, κρἄάατ-ος, κρᾶτ-ός. 

Dat. “ κάρητε-ι, καρήατ-ι, κράατ-ι, κρᾶτ-ί (trag. κάρᾳ). 
Ace. “κάρη, τὸν κρᾶτ-α, τὸ Kap. 

Nom, Plur. κάρα, καρήατ-α, κράατ-α, secondary form κάρηνα. 
Gen. γο κράτων, καρήνων. 

Dat. “ κρᾶσί(ν). 

Ace. ‘“ =WNom. (also τοὺς xpar-ac). 


23. ἡ μάστιξ, whip, Hom. Dat. μάστι, Acc. μάστι-ν. 

24. ὁ pic, month, Ion. = Att. μήν. 

25. ὄσσε, eyes. Nom. Acc. Dual, Neut.in Homer. The trag. have 
Gen. Plur. ὄσσων, Dat. ὄσσοις or docor(y). 

§ 178. Dialects.—The three local suffixes are very frequent in Hom. : 
οἴκοθι, at home; ᾿Ιλιόθι πρό, in front of Ilios ; οὐρανόθεν, from heaven ; 
ἀγορῆθεν, from the assembly. θεν also supplies the place of the Gen.- 
ending: κατὰ κρῆθεν, down from the head, entirely; ἐξ ἁλόθεν, out of the 
sea, -de is generally affixed to the Acc.: οἴκόνδε, homewards ; κλισίηνδε, 
into the tent; πόλινδε, into the city; φόβονδε, into flight. φύγαδε, into 
light, and ἔραζε, to the earth, are peculiar. 

A suffix peculiar to the Hom. language is ¢1(v); it is added to the 
Stem of nouns, and supplies the place of the Gen. or Dat. termination 
in both Sing. and Plur., as: 

1. A- decl.: βίη-φι, with force ; κλισίητφι, ir the tent ; ἀπὸ vevph-ou, 
Srom the bow-siring. 

2. O- decl.: θεότ-φιν, from the gods ; ᾿Ιλιότφιν, from Ilios. 

3. Oons.-decl. : κοτυληδονυ-ότφιν, with the suckers (on the feelers of the 
polypus) ; ἀπ᾽ ὄχεσ-φι(ν), from the carriage; παρὰ ναῦ-φι(ν), alongside 
the ships ; ἀπὸ κράτεσ-φιν, from the head. (δ 177, Ὁ). 22. 


oe Ὑ a 


74 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 179. 


These suffixes are joined to the Stem of the noun: 
᾿Αθήνηθεν, from Athens (with Ion. ἢ); κυκλόθεν, From the 
circle (kukAd-c). Sometimes o comes in place of the A- 
sound: ῥιζόθεν (radicitus), from ῥίζα (radix) ; it also serves 
as a connecting vowel with consonant-stems: πάνττο-τθεν, 
Jrom all sides. ‘The o is sometimes accented, contrary to 


§ 107, ὦ. κυκλ-ό-θεν, Μαραθων-ό-θεν, from Marathon. 
The enclitic suffix ὃ ε (§ 92, 5) is often also combined with | 


the Acc. form: Μέγαρά-δε, to Megara ; ᾿Ἐλευσῖν-ά-δε, to 
Lleusis. οἴκ-τα-δε, home, from Stem o ix o, is irregular. 

For δὲ we find σε, ζ ε, with the same meaning: ἄλλοσε, 
elsewhather ; ᾿Αθήναζε, to Athens ; Θήβαζε, to Thebes ; 
θύραζε (foras). 


δ΄ 179. Moreover, a few words have an old Locative in 
« for the Sing., and σιε(ν) (without a preceding 2) for the 
Plur., answering the question where: οἴκοι, at home ; Πυ- 
Bot, at Pytho ; ᾿Ισθμοῖ, on the Lsthmus ; ᾿Αθήνησι(ν), m7 
Athens ; TiXaraac(v),in Platea; θύρασι(ν), at the door 
(forts); ὡρασι(), at the right time. | 


Cuap. VII.—OrHER INFLEXIONS OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
A. Inflexion according to Genders. 
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSION. 


δ᾽ 180. The most numerous class of adjectives is that 


which m the Mase. and Neut. follows the O-Declension, . 


and in the Fem. the A-Declension; which, consequently, 
has in the Nom. Sing. oe, ἡ (or a), ον | Lat. us, a wir). 


§ 180. Dialects—The Ionians have frequently here also » for Att, 
The aisypn. 


be 


§ 182. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 75 


Singular, | Masc. Fem. Neut. | Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. ἀγαθός ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν | φίλιις φιλίᾷ φίλιον 
Gen. ἀγαθοῦ ἀγαθῆς ἀγαθοῦ | φιλίονυ φιλίᾶς φιλίου 
Dat. ἀγαθῷ ἀγαθῇ ἀγαθῷ φιλίῳ φιλίᾳ φιλίῳ 
Ace, ἀγαθύόν ἀγαθήν ἀγαθόν | φίλιον φιλίᾶν φίλιον 
Voe. ἀγαθὲ ἀγαθή ἀγαθόν φίλιε φιλία φίλιον 
Dual. 

N. A.V. | ἀγαθώ ἀγαθά ἀγαθώ φιλίω φιλίᾷ φιλίω 
G. D. ἀγαθοῖν ἀγαθαῖν ἀγαθοῖν | φιλίοιν φιλίαιν φιλίοιν 

Plural. 
Non. ἀγαθοί ἀγαθαί ἀγαθά φίλιοι φίλιαι φίλιὰ 
Gen. ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀγαθῶν | φιλίων φιλίων φιλίων 
Dat. ἀγαθοῖς ἀγαθαῖς ἀγαθοῖς | φιλίοις φιλίαις φιλίοις 
Ace, ἀγαθούς ἀγαθάς ἀγαθά φιλίους φιλίας φίλιᾶ 


In the Nom. Sing. Fem. a stands after a vowel or p, else- 
where ἡ: δίκαιος, δικαία, δίκαιον, Just ; αἰσχρός, αἰσχρά, 
αἰσχρόν, hateful ; σοφός, σοφή, σοφόν, τοἴ8ο. 

Exception : ἡ stands after ο, except when p precedes o: 

ἁπλόος, ἁπλόη, ἁπλόον, simple, ἷ 
ἀθρόος, ἀθρόᾳ, ἀθρόον, assembled. 


§ 181. Though the declension of these adjectives con- 
forms to δὲ 114, 126, the following points must be ob- 
served : 

1. a in the Nom. Sing. is always long. 

2. In the accent of the Nom. and Gen. Plur. the Fem. 
follows the Masc.: βέβαιος, firm, Nom. Plur. Mase. βέ- 
βαιοι, Fem. βέβαιαι (ἢ 108 would require βεβαῖαι, from 
Nom. Sing. βεβαία) ; Gen. of all genders, βεβαίων (not even 
in the Fem. βεβαιῶν, as would be required by ὃ 118). 


§ 182. Many adjectives of this class have only ¢wo end- 


ὃ 181. Dialects.—dia, Fem. of δῖος, heavenly, has in Hom. &: δῖα θεάων, 
the heavenly one among the goddesses. 

§ 182. Dialects.—The poets form a peculiar Fem. from many com- 
pound adjectives: aBpdrn (Masc. ἄμβροτος, immortal), ἀντιθέη (Mase. 
ἀντίθεος, godlike), . 


76 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. § 183. 


éngs, the Mase. being used for the Fem.: Mase. and Fem. 
ἥσυχος, Neut. ἥσυχον, guiet. Compound adjectives espe- 
cially are all of only two endings: ἄτεκνος, childless ; 
KapTopopoc, Fruitful. 

§ 183. Adjectives ending in eo¢ and oog in the Nom. 
Mase. are generally contracted (ὃ 130): χρύσεος, golden, 
and ἁπλύος, simple, are thus contracted : 


Singular. Mase. . Fem. Neut. | Masc. Fem. WNeut. 
Nom. χρυσοῦς χρυσῆ χρυσοῦν | ἁπλοῦς ἁπλῆ ἁπλοῦν 
Gen. χρυσοῦ χρυσῆς χρυσοῦ | ἁπλοῦ ἁπλῆς ἁπλοῦ 
Dat. Xpvop χρυσῇ χρυσῷ amp ἁπλῇ ἁπλῷ 
Ace, χρυσοῦν χρυσὴν χρυσοῦν | ἁπλοῦν ἁπλῆν ἁπλοῦν 
Voe. χρυσοῦς χρυσὴ χρυσοῦν | ἁπλοῦς ἁπλῆ ἁπλοῦν 
Dual. 

N. A.V. ᾿χρυώ χρυσᾶ χρυσώ ἁπλώ ἁπλᾶ ἁπλώ 
G. D. χρυσον xpvoaiy ypucoiy | amoivy ἁπλαῖν ἁπλοῖν 

Plural. 3 
Nom. χρυσὸ χρυσαῖ χρυσᾶ ἁπλοῖ ἁπλαῖ ἁπλᾶ 
Gen. χρυσῶν χρυσῶν χρυσῶν | ἁπλῶν ἁπλῶν ἁπλῶν 
Dat. χρυσοῖς χρυσαῖς χρυσοῖς ἁπλοῖς ἁπλαῖς ἁπλοῖς 
Ace, χρυσοῦς χρυσᾶς χρυσᾶ ἁπλοῦς ἁπλᾶς ἁπλᾶ 


The Fem. <a is contracted to n, except when preceded 
by a vowel or p; it is then contracted to a: apyupéa, 
ἀργυρᾶ (argentea). ‘The Nom. Plur. oa, oat, produce a: 
αι: ἅπλα, ἁπλαῖ. 

The contracted final syllable also receives the circumflex, 
contrary to ὃ 87: χρύσεος, χρυσοῦς. But compound adjec- 
tives retain the accent on the last syllable but one: εὔνους, 
well-disposed, Gen. εὔνου, Dat. εὔνῳ, Nom. Plur. εὖνοι. 


§ 184. A few adjectives in ὡς in the Nom. follow the 


§ 183. Dialects—The adjectives in coc, ooc, often remain uncon- 
_tracted: Hom. χρυσέῳ (where ε disappears by synizesis), καλλίῤῥοος, 
beautifully-flowing. | 
§ 184. Dialects—Hom. ἵλᾶος, πλεῖος, πλείη, πλεῖον ; New-Ion. coc = 
Att.ewe; for Att. σῶς (salvus), Hom. σόος, ἡ, ov, comparative cawrepoc. 


ΟΝ INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. v7 


Attic O-Declension (δ 132): ἵλεως, Neut. ἵλεων, gracious ; 
ἀξιόχρεως, Neut. -wv, considerable ; πλέως, πλέα, πλέων, 
full. σῶς (from σάος, salvus) has in the Nom. Sing. Fem. 
and Neut. Plur.ca; but also the forms σῶος, σώα, Plur. 


σῶοι, WAL. 


ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 


§ 185. Other adjectives in the Masc. and Neut. follow 
the Consonant Declension, and form from the Stem a pe- 
culiar Fem. with the ending ca, which, however, undergoes 
various changes in combination with the Stem. Such ad- 
jective-stems of three denominations are: 


1. Stems im v (Mase. and Neut., ὃ 154). The Fem. is 
formed from the Stem as it appears in the Gen. (82); ε 
and ca are contracted, and the accent remains on the last 


syllable of the Stem: hence— 


Nom. 
Singular. 
Nom. ἡδύ-ς, sweet, ἡδεῖα ἡδύ 
Gen. ἡδέος ἡδείας ἡδέος 
Dat. ἡδεῖ ἡδείᾳ ἡδεῖ 
Ace. ἡδύν ἡδεῖαν 100 
Dual. 
Nom. Ace. ἡδέε ἡδείᾳ ἡδέε 
Gen. Dat. ἡδέοιν ἡδείαιν ἡδέοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. ἡδεῖς ἡδεῖαι ἡδέα 
Gen. ἡδέων ἡδειῶν ἡδέων 
Dat. ἡδέσι(ν) ἡδείαις ἡδέσι(ν) 
Ace. ἡδεῖς ἡδείας ἡδέα 


§ 185. Dialects—Hom. sometimes has en for Att. eva: βαθέη (βαϑεῖα, 


deep); the Ion. ea for eva: Hom. ὠκέα Ἶρις, swift Iris. 


Besides θῆλυς, 


feminine, we find also ἡδύς, πουλύς (πολύς, much), as Fem. Sometimes 
ea is used for vy in the Acc, Sing. Masc.: εὐρέα πόντον, the wide sea. 


78 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. * § 186. 


Examples for Declension. 
γλυκύς, seeet. βραχύς, short. ebpic, broad. 
βραδύς, slow. ταχύς, swift. 
Οὐ8.----θῆλυς, female, differing also in accent, occurs as a Feminine. 
ἢ 186. 2. Stems in v. The c in ca is transferred to the 


preceding syllable (ὃ ὅδ): St. weXav, Nom. Mase. μέλας, 
Fem. μέλαινα (from pedav-ia), Neut. μέλαν, black. 


Singular, | Mase. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. μέλας μέλαινα μέλᾶν 
Gen. μέλᾶνος μελαίνης μέλᾶνος 
Dat. μέλανι μελαίνῃ μέλανι 
Ace. μέλανα μέλαιναν μέλαν 
Voe. μέλαν μέλαινα μέλαν 


Dual. 
Ve AV: μέλανε μελαίνα μέλανε 
6. D. μελαίναιν μελάνοιν 


μελάνοιν 


Plural. 


Nom. μέλανες μέλαιναι μέλανα 
Gen. μελάνων μελαινῶν μελάνων 
Dat. μέλασι μελαίναις μέλασι 
Ace, μέλανας μελαίνας μέλανα 


Examples for Declension. 


St. ταλαν, τάλᾶς, τάλαινα, τἀλᾶἄν, unfortunate, 
St. reper, τέρην, τέρεινα, τέρεν, tender. 


§ 187. 3. Stems in vr. To these belong especially the 
numerous participial forms. In the Fem. the ντ combines 
with the ending ca to form oa, the previous vowel being 
lengthened by compensation (ὃ 50): λεγοντ-ία becoming 
λέγουσα. 

The adjectives in evr have eooa in the Fem.: χαρίεις, 
χαρίεσσα, χαρίεν, pleasing, St. yaprevr. For the Dat. 
Plur., see § 149. 


§ 187. Dialects—Adjectives in evr (Nom. Mase. ec) are sometimes 
contracted : Hom. τιμῆς Ξετιμήεις, honorable ; \wreivra—=wréevra, dbound- 
ing in lotuses ; poet. πτεροῦσσα---πτερύεσσα, winged. 


Plural. 
Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace, 


Dual 


Plural. 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 


Dual. 
G. D. 


΄ 


INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 


N. A. ν΄ λυθέντε 


NV. A. Τ. χαρίεντε 


Plural. 
Nom. 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace, 


χαρίεντας χαριέσσας χαρίεντα 


79 


Mase. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
loosing. loosing. 
λύσας λύσαᾶσα hooky λύων λύουσα λῦον 
λύσαντος λυσάσης λύσαντος | λύοντος λυούσης λύοντος 
λύσαντι λυσάσῃ λύσαντι | AdovTt λυούσῃ λύοντι 
λύσαντα λύσασαν λῦσαν λύοντα λύουσαν λῦον 
λύσας λύσασα λῦσαν λύων λύουσα λῦον 
᾿ς λύσαντε λυσάσα λύσαντε | λύοντε λυούσα λύοντε 
λυσάντοιν λυσάσαιν λυσάντοιν͵ λυόντοι»ν λυούσαιν λυόντοιν 
λύσαντες λύσασαι λύσαντα | λύοντες λύουσαι λύοντα 
λυσάντων λυσασῶν λυσάντων λυόντων λυουσῶν᾽ λυόντων 
λύσᾶσι λυσάσαις λύσᾶσι λύουσι λυούσαις λύουσι 
λύσαντας λυσάσας λύσαντα λύοντας λυούσας λύοντα 
loosed. giving. 
λύθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν διδούς διδοῦσα δδιδόν 
λυθέντος λυθείσης λυθέντος | διδόντος διδούσης διδόντος 
λυθέντι λυθείσῃ λυθέντι διδόντι διδούσῃ διδόντι 
λυθέντα λυϑθεῖσαν λυθέν διδόντα διδοῦσαν διδόν 
λυθείς λυθεῖσα λυθέν διδούς διδοῦσα διδόν 
λυθείσα AvOEvTE  διδόντε διδούσα δδιδόντε 
G. D. ᾿ χυθέντοιν λυθείσαιν λυθέντοιν  διδόντοιν διδούσαιν διδόώντοιν 
λυθέντες λυθεῖσαι λυθέντα διδόντες διδοῦσαι διδόντα 
λυθέντων λυθεισῶν λυθέντων | διδόντων διδουσῶν διδόντων 
λυθεῖσι λυθείσαις λυθεῖσι διδοῦσι διδούσαις διδοῦσι 
λυθέντας λυθείσας λυθέντα διδόντας διδούσας διδόντα 
pleasing. showing. ᾿ 
χαρίεις χαρίεσσα χαρίεν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
χαρίεντος χαριέσσης χαρίεντος | δεικνύντος δεικνύσης δεικνύντος 
χαρίεντι χαριέσσῃ χαρίεντι δεικνύντι δεικνύσῃ- δεικνύντι 
χαρίεντα χαρίεσσαν χαρίεν δεικνύντα δεικνῦσαν δεικνύν 
χαρίεν χαρίεσσα χαρίεν δεικνύς δεικνῦσα δεικνύν 
χαριέσσα χαρίεντε δεικνύντε δεικνύσα δεικνύντε 
χαριέντοιν χαριέσσαιν χαριέντοιν δεικνύντοιν δεικνύσαιν δεικνύντοιν 
χαρίεντες χαρίεσσαι χαρίεντα δεικνύντες δεικνῦσαι δεικνύντα 
χαριέντων χαριεσσῶν χαριέντων δεικνύντων δεικνυσῶν δεικνύντων 
χαρίεσι χαριέσσαις χαρίεσι ᾿ δεικνῦσι δεικνύσαις δεικνῦσι 
δεικνύντας δεικνύσας δεικνύντα 


ΨΩ δ΄. ane AE EL μα πα νσνοπσν τὰ τ 


80 INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. ὃ 188. 


Obs.—The form of the Fem. is explained from τ before « becoming 
o, according to § 60,1 being dropped after σ, and ν before o being 
thrown out and compensated for by a lengthening of the vowel: 
TAVTLA, TAVOLA, TAVOA, πᾶσα 3 AvovTia, λυονσια, λυονσα, λύουσα. 

ὃ 188, 4. Stems in or. The participles of the Perfect 
Active in o7 (Nom. Sing. Mase. ὡς, Neut. o¢) have via 
in the Fem.: λελυκώς, λελυκυΐῖα, λελυκός, one who has 
Sreed. See §§ 146, 147. 


| Singular. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
Nom. AEATKWC λελυκυῖα λελυκός 
Gen. λελυκότος λελυπυίας λελυκότος 
Dat. λελυκότι λελυκυίᾳ λελυκότι 
Ace, λελυκότα λελυκυῖαν λελυκός 
Voe. λελυκώς λελυκυῖα λελυκός 
Dual. 
NV. A. Υ. λελυκύτε λελυκυία λελυκότε 
G. }. λελυκότοιν λελυκυίαιν λελυκότοιν 
Plural. 
Nom. λελυκότες λελυκυῖαι λελυκότα 
Gen. λελυκότων λελυκυιῶν λελυκότων 
Dat. λελυκόσι λελυκυία!:ς λελυκόσι 
aes Ace. λελυκότας λελυκυίας λελυκότα 


Obs.—The strange difference of the Fem. from the Stem of the 
Mase. and Neut. is explained by the F which was originally before 


the o. From For-va came first Foo-ca (ὃ 60), then by a peculiar 
contraction (Fo becoming v) vo-ca, finally (σ being dropped, ὃ 61, 
b) v-ia and vea. 
§ 189. The most important adjectives of two endings with 
Stems according to the Second Principal Declension are: 
1. Stems wm ¢ (Inflexion given under §$§ 164, 165), as: 


Gen. σαφοῦς. 
ἀληθοῦς. 


σαφής σαφές, clear. 

ἀληθής ἀληθὲς, true. 

Other Examples for Declensicn. 

πλήρης, full. ψευδής, false. ἀσφαλής, 8678. 


2. Stems in ν (Inflexion given under δὴ 146, 147), as: 
Gen. πέπον-ος. 

« εὐδαίμον-ος 
σώφρον-ος. 


δυσμενῆς, hostile 


πέπων πέπον, Tipe. 
εὐδαίμων εὔδαιμον, happy. 


σώφρων σῶφρον, reasonable. ἐς 


§ 189. Dialects. —Herod. ἔρσην for ἄρσην. 


§ 191. INFLEXIONS OF ADJECTIVES. 81 


Other Examples for Declension. 


μνήμων, mindful of. ἐπιλήσμων, forgetful of. 
πολυπράγμων, νιον occupied, 


3. Isolated forms, as: 


ἴδρις ἴδρι, acquainted with. Gen. idpc-oc. 
(Inflexion according to ὃ 157, D.} 
ἄῤῥην (ἄρσην), ἄῤῥεν, male, Gen. ἄῤῥεν-ος. 


Compounds of substantives, such as ἀπάτωρ, Neut. ἄπατορ, St. πατερ 
(Nom. πατήρ), fatherless ; δυσμήτωρ, μήτηρ, unmotherly ; φιλόπολις, -ἰ, 
Gen. -1d-oc, loving the city; εὔελπις (Gen. εὐέλπιδ-ος), hopeful. 

§ 190. 4. Besides these, there is a large number of ad- 
jectives which have only one ending, because either their 
meaning or form excludes a Neuter: ἅρπαξ, rapacious, St. 
ἁρπαγ; φυγάς, fugitive, St. puyad; ἀγνώς, wnacquaint- 
ed, St.ayvwr; ἄπαις, childless, St. award; μακρόχειρ, 
long-handed ; πένης, poor, St. πενητὶ γυμνής, light- 
armed, St. yuuvnt. Some adjectives of one ending fol- 
low the A-Declension, and are almost substantives, as: 
ἐθελοντής, Gen. ἐθελοντοῦ, voluntary; they occur only in 
the Mase. 

δ 191. The following adjectives are irregular: μέγας, 
great ; πολύς, much; and πρᾷος, gentle, the forms of each 
being derived from different Stems, viz., in péyac, from 


§ 190. Dialects——Hom. has also many adjectives in the Fem. only: 
καλλιγύναικα, Acc. Sing. 6. g., Σπάρτην, abounding in beautiful women ; 
βωτιάνειρα, 6. J. Φθίη, men nourishing. 

§ 191. Dialects—In Hom. both Stems, πολυ and πολλὰ ο, in Mase. 
and Neut., are almost completely declined; the Fem. is regularly 


πολλή. 


Sing. WV. πολύς πουλύς OY πολλός NN. πολύ πουλύ πολλόν 
G. πολλοῦ ΟΙΣ πολέος : 
D. πολλῷ 
A. πολύν πουλύν πολλόν N. πολύ πουλύ πολλόν 
Plur. WV. πολέες (πολεῖς) πολλοί πολλά 


G. πολλῶν OY πολέων 
D. πολέεσσι("ν) πολέσσι(ν)Ὶ πολέσι(ν) OY πολλοῖς 
A, πολέας πολλούς NV. πολλά 
Herod. has scarcely any forms except from the Stem πολλο: ποὰ- 
Adv, πολλοί. 


12 


82 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 8.192, 


the Stems μεγα and μεγαλο; in πολύς, from πολὺ and 
πολλο; in πρᾷος, from πρᾳο and zpav. 


Sing. | Masc. Fem. Neut. | Masc. Fem. WNeut. | 
Nom. | μέγας μεγάλη μέγα πολύς πολλή πολύ 

Gen. μεγάλου μεγάλης μεγάλου πολλοῦ πολλῆς πολλοῦ 
Dat. μεγάλῳ μεγάλῃ μεγάλῳ πολλῷ πολλῇ πολλῷ 


Ace. μέγαν μεγάλην μέγα πολύν πολλήν πολύ 
Voc. | μέγα μεγάλη μέγα πολύ * πολλή πολύ 


G. D. | μεγάλοιν μεγάλαιν μεγάλοιν 


Dual. 
Ba Vi) μεγάλω μεγάλα μεγάλω 


Plural. 
Nom, | μεγάλοι μεγάλαι μεγάλα | πολλοί πολλαί πολλά 


Gen. | μεγάλων “μεγάλων μεγάλων | πολλῶν πολλῶν πολλῶν 
Dat. μεγάλοις μεγάλαις μεγάλοις πολλοῖς πολλαῖς πολλοῖς 
Ace. μεγάλους μεγάλας μεγάλα πολλούς πολλάς πολλά 


Sing. Plural. 

Nom. | xpgoc πραεῖα mpav mpgor, OF πραεῖαι πραΐξα 
πραεῖς 

Gen. ᾿πρᾷου πραείας πρᾷου |πραξων πραειῶν πραέων 

Dat. ᾿πρᾷῴῳ πραείᾳ πρᾷῴῳ πρᾷοις, OY πραείαις πρᾷοις, ΟΥ̓ 
πραξσι(ν) πραέσι(ν) 

Ace. ᾿πρᾷον πραεῖαν πρᾷον Ἰπρᾷους πραείας πραξα 


B. Comparison. 


§ 192. The jirst and most frequent ending of the Com- 
parative is repo (Nom. τερος, τερα, τερον): of the Super- 
lative raro (Nom. τατος, τατη, τατον), with the usual in- 
flexion of adjectives (δ 180). These endings are affixed to 
the pure Stem of the Masc., as: 


Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative. 
κοῦφος, light. ~ Kovgo κουφότερος, a, ον κουφότατος, ἡ ον 
γλυκύς, sweet. γλυκυ γλυκύτερος γλυκύτατος 
μέλας, black. μελαν μελάντερος μελάντατος 
χαρίεις, graceful. χαριεντ χαριέστερος χαριέστατος 

(from χαριεντ-τερος, according to §§ 46 and 49). 
σαφής, clear, σαφες σαφέστερος σαφέστατος 
μάκαρ, happy. μακαρ μακάρτερος μακάρτατος 
πένης, Poor. πενητ πεγέστερος πενέστατος 


(for πενητ-τερος, τατος, according to § 40, » being shortened). 


8. 197. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 83 


§ 193. The following points are to be observed : 


1 The Stems in o leave o unchanged only when the 
preceding syllable is long (ὃ 74, etc.), but lengthen it to 
w when that is short: πονηρό-τερος, WOPSE αὶ πικρό-τατον, 
most bitter; σοφώ-τερος, Wiser, ἀξιω-τάτη, most worthy. 
Livery syllable with a vowel followed by two consonants 
or a double consonant is here considered long (δὴ 76, 


77). 


ὃ 104. 2. The o is always rejected after a: in the adjective γεραιός, 

senex, sometimes in παλαιός, antiquus, and σχολαῖος, at leisure: ye- 
_ pairepoc, παλαίτατος. 

§ 195. 3. The o or ὦ is changed to ac in μέσος, medius ; ἴσος, like ; 
εὔδιος, clear; mowioc, early; ὄψιος, late: μεσαίτατος, πρωϊαίτερον. 
ἥσυχος, peaceful, has ἡσυχαίτερος, and ἡσυχώτερος ; φίλος, dear, be- 
sides φιλώτερος, -raroc, also φίλτερος, -raroc, ANd φιλαίτερος, -TaTOC ; 
πλησιαίτερος, πλησιαίτατος, belong to πλησίον, near, and παραπλη- 
σιαίτερος, more like, to the same; προὐργιαίτερος to προὔργου, from 
πρὸ ἔργου, advantageously. 

§ 196. 4. The endings earepo-c, εστατο-ς, are inorganically ap- 
plied: 

a) to Stems in ov: σωφρογνέστερος (St.cwgpov, Nom. σώφρων, reason= 
able), εὐδαιμονέστερος (St. εὐδαιμον, Nom. εὐδαίμων, fortunate). 
πιότερος, -raroc, from πίων, fat, and πεπαίτερος, -raroc, from πέπων, 
ripe, are exceptional. 

ὁ) to the Stems of ἄκρᾶτος, unmixed ; ἐῤῥωμένος, strong ; ἄσμενος, will- 
ing: ἀκρατέστερος, ἐῤῥωμενέστερος. More seldom to others. 

ce) to some Stems in oo contracted: εὐνούστερος for εὐνοέστερος, from 
εὔνους, well-disposed. 


§ 197. 5. caorepoc, caorarog, occur with λάλος, talkative ; πτωχός, 
beggarly  ὀψοφάγος, epicure ; μονοφάγος, eating alone; and some 
adjectives of one ending, as κλέπτη-ς, thievish: λαλίστερος, πτω- 
χίστατος, κλεπτίστερος. 

Others of one gender in ἡ-Ὸ follow the rule of those in 0: ὑβριστό- 
τερος, from ὑβριστής, haughty. 


§ 193. Dialects——The quantity of the O-sownd in poets is rather 
doubtful: Hom. ὀϊζυρώτατος, the most wretched. 

Hom. has ἰθύντατα, from ἰθύς, straight ; φαάντατος, from φαεινός, glit- 
tering ; ἀχαρίστερος (for ἀχαριτ-τερος, according to ὃ 46), from ἄχαρις, 
graceless. 


84 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. § 198. 


The compounds of χάρις, grace, favor, form their Comparative and 
Superlative as if they ended in yapiro-c: ἐπιχαριτώτερος, more 
obliging. 

§ 198. The second and rarer termination of the Com- 
parative is cov (Nom., Masc., and Fem. cw v, Neut. cov); 
of the Superlative, στὸ (Nom. toroc, tory, worov). The 
Stem-vowel is rejected before +. The accent is placed as 
far as possible from the end in the Comp. and Superl. In- 
flexion of the Comp., ὃ 170. So is formed from: 


Positive. Stem. Comparative. Superlative. 
ἡδύς, agreeable, 7 OU ἡδίων, -ον ἥδιστος, -n, τον 
ταχύς, swift. ταχυ θάσσων, -ον τάχιστος, τη; τον 

(from raywy, according to §§ 54, 57). 
μέγας, large. μεγα μείζων, -ον μέγιστος » 


(from μεγιων, according to ὃ 58). 


Obs.—The length of a in θᾶσσον (compare μᾶλλον, ὃ 202), and the 
diphthong of μείζων, is explained from the ¢ passing into the pre- 
ceding syllable, as in ἀμείνων (compare ὃ ὅδ). * 


Farther with suppression of p: 


ἐχθρό, -c, hostile. ἐχθίων, -ov Superl. ἔχθιστος. 
αἰσχρό, -c, shameful. αἰσχίων, -ov ‘f 
οἰκτρό, -c, pitiable. οἴκτιστος. 
ἐχθρ-ός and οἰκτρ-ός also have the forms in repo-¢ and τατο-ς. 


αἴσχιστος. 
(( 


§ 199. This comparison occurs also in connection with 


§ 198. Dialects—The endings tw v,co70¢, are more frequent. in the 
poets: Hom. φιλίων (φίλος, dear); γλυκίων (γλυκύς, sweet); ὥκιστος (ὠκύς, 
swift) ; βάθιστος (βαθύς, deep); βράσσων = βραχίων (βραχύς, short), Sup. 
poet. βράχιστος, Hom. Superl. βάρδιστος (βραδύς, slow, ὃ 59, D.); πάσσων 
=rayiwy (παχύς, thick); μάσσων = μᾶκίων (μᾶκρός, long), Sup. μήκιστος 
(Dor. μάκιστος) ; κυδίων (κυδρός, famous) ; μέζων, New-Ion. for μείζων. 


§ 199. Dialects—1. Hom. Comp. ἀρείων, Positive xparé-c, Superl. 
κάρτιστος ; Comp. λωΐτερος ; New-Ion. κρέσσων = κρείσσων ; poet, βέλ- 
τερος, βέλτατος, φέρτερος, φέρτατος, OY φέριστος, more excellent, most excel- 
lent. 

2. Hom. κακώτερος ; χέρης, χερείων, χερειότερος, χειρότερος ; New.-Ion. 
ἕσσων --- ἥσσων. (Compare κρέσσων, μέζων, § 198, Obs.) 

4. Hom. ὑπ-ολίζων. 


§ 199. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85 


other peculiarities in the following adjectives, where the 
changes of sound of δὲ 55-58 are often applied: 


1. For the idea of good : 


Positive Comparative. Superlative. 
ἀγαθός 
[St. ἀμεν] ἀμείνων, ἄμεινον 
[St. ἀρες] [ἀρείων, Hom. | ἄριστος, ἡ, ον 
[St. βελτο] βελτίων, βέλτιον βέλτιστος, ἡ, ον 
[St. cparv] κρείσσων (κρείττων) κράτιστος, ἢ; ον 
ἮΝ. κρεῖσσον (κρεῖττον) 

[St. λὼυ] λωΐων OY λῴων λῷστος, ἡ; ον 


NV. λώϊον or λῷον 


Obs.—apeivwy and ἄριστος rather express excellence, capacity ; κρεὶσ- 
σων, κράτιστος, strength, preponderance (Lat. superior) ; ἥσσων 1s ΟΡ- 
posed to κρείσσων. 


2. For the idea of bad: 


Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
κακός κακίων NV. κάκιον κάκιστος 
[St. yep] χείρων (deterior), N. χεῖρον χείριστος 
[St. ἡ κα] ἥσσων (inferior), N. ἧσσον Ν. Pl. ἥκιστα, least of all. 
3. μικρὸς, small, besides μικρότερος μικρότατος 
μείων, smaller, NV. μεῖον 
4, ὀλίγος, Little, ὀλίγιστος 
[5᾽.ἐχαχυ], ἐλάσσων N. ἔλασσον ἐλάχιστος 
5. πολύς, much, πλείων (πλέων) πλεῖστος 


NV. πλέον (also πλεῖν) 
6. κἄλός, beautiful, as if from® 


κάλλος, beauty καλλίων NV. κάλλιον κάλλιστος 
7. ῥᾷδιος, easy, 
[St. pa], pdwy NV. ῥᾷον ῥᾷστος | 
8. ἀλγεινός, painful, as if from 
ἄλγος, pain, aryiwy NV. ἄλγιον ἄλγιστος 


Dialects.—5. Homer contracts πλέον to πλεῦν, πλέονες to πλεῦνες ; 
Plur. also πλέες, πλέας, πλέα. 

7. Ion. ῥηΐδιος ; Hom. ῥηΐτερος, ῥήϊστος, ῥηΐτατος. Hom. forms single 
degrees from substantives: κύντερος, more doggish (κύων, dog); ῥίγιον, 
worse ; ῥῖγος, cold, shudder. 

Defectives : évéprepor, also tragic νέρτεροι (infert, for which Positive 
ἔνεροι) ; Hom. πύματος and λοῖσθος, λοίσθιος, last ; ὑστάτιος = ὕστατος, 
δεύτατος, in a like sense, πρώτιστος = πρῶτος, the first. 


86 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES. § 200. 


§ 200. Finally observe farther the Defectives : 


ὕστερος, later, ὕστατος, wltimus, 
ἔσχατος, extremus, 
(νέος, new), γέατος, NOvissimus, 
(ὑπέρ, over), ὕπατος, summus, 
(πρό, before), πρότερος, Prior, πρῶτος, primus. 


(πέραν, on the other side), wepairepoc. 


C. Adverbs of Adjectives. 

§ 201. Adverbs are derived from the Adjective Stem by 
affixing to it the syllable we. The o of the Stem is en- 
tirely dropped: φίλος, adv. φίλως. The Stems of the Sec- 
ond Principal Declension have the same form as in the 
Genitive: ταχύς, swift, ταχέως ; σαφῆς, clear, σαφέως, 
contr. σαφῶς ; σώφρων, reasonable, σωφρόνως. Contrac- 
tion occurs only where the Genitive also has it. The ac- 
cent of the adverb is always the same as that of the Geni- 
tive Plural of the corresponding adjective: ψυχρός, cold, 
ψυχρῶς ; δίκαιος, Just, δικαίως ; πᾶς (St. παν τ); πάντως, 
every Way. 

The Neuter Accusative, both of the Singular and the 
Plural, is moreover very often used as an adverb. 


§ 202. An older adverbial form is that in a, as: raya, 
from ταχύς, guick (meaning, in Att. prose, perhaps); ἅμα, 
at the same tume; μάλα, very. The Comp. of μάλα is 
μᾶλλον (potius) =parvov (ὃ 56);*Superl. μάλιστα ( potessi- 
mum). εὖ, well, as an adverb to ἀγαθός, good, stands alone. 

§ 203. Adverbs in we are also formed from Comparatives 
and Superlatives: βεβαιοτέρως, more firmly ; καλλιόνως, 
more beautifully. But, as a rule, the comparative has the 


§ 202. Dialects—The adverbs in a are more numerous in Homer: 
ὦκα (quickly, ὠκύς) ; λίγα, aloud, λιγύς ; κάρτα, strongly, very, to κρατύς, 
compare § ὅ9, D.; σάφα (clearly, σαφής). 

Homer has for εὖ or 2é the adjective ἐύς or nic, good. 

δὲ 203, 204. Dialects—Homeric ἑκαστέρω, ἑκαστάτω (from ἑκάς, far) ; 
ἄσσον (ΞΞ ἀγχιον), ἀσσοτέρω (ἄγχι, Near), ἄγχιστα; New-Ion. ἀγχοτάτω, 
ἀγχότατα. In addition to this, there is the Hom. ἐπασσύτεροι, crowded 


? 
with v instead of o. 


§ 205. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 87 


Neut. Ace. Sing., the superlative the Neut. Acc. Plur., as 
an adverb: βεβαιάτερον, κάλλιον ; βεβαιότατα, κάλλιστα. 


§ 204. Adverbs in w, like ἄνω, above ; κάτω, below ; tow, inside ; ἔξω, 
outside, have no ¢ in. Compar. and Superl.: ἀνωτέρω, κατωτέρω, 
likewise ἀπωτέρω, farther (from ἀπό) ; ἐγγυτέρω (or ἐγγύτερον), 
ἐγγυτάτω (or ἐγγύτατα), from ἐγγύς; near, and some others. 


¥ Cuap. VIII.—INFLEXION OF PRONOUNS. 
§ 205. The Personal Pronouns are: 


Singular. 


Nom. ἐγώ, 1 [ego] σύ, thou [τα] 

Gen. ἐμοῦ, μοῦ σοῦ οὗ, of him. 
Dat. ἐμοί, μοί σοί οἵ 

Ace. ἐμέ, μέ [me] σέ [16] ἕ [se] 
Dual. 


NV. A. (νῶι) νώ, we. 
G. D. (νῶιν) νῷν 


(cow), they. 
(σφωΐϊν) 


(σφῶι) σφώ, Ye. 
(σφῶιν) σφῷν 


Plural. 

Nom. ἡμεῖς, WE. ὑμεῖς, YOu. σφεῖς, they. WN. σφέα 
Gen. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν σφῶν 

Dat. ἡμῖν ὑμῖν σφί-σι(ν) 

Ace, ἡμᾶς ὑμᾶς σφᾶς NV. σφέα 


i 


ὃ 205. Dialects—The following are special additional forms of the 
Ion. Dialect. (Those in brackets are merely New-Ion.) 


Sing. Wom. ἐγών τύνη [tu] 
-- G ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μεῦ σέο, σεῦ ἕο, εὖ 
τ oi ἐμέ-θεν (δ 178, D.) ἰσεῖο, σέ-θεν ἕ-θεν 

Dat. Tol, TEV at compare § 34, 
Ace, éé D. 4. 

Plur. Nom. (ἡμέες) ἄμμες (ipsec) bupec 
Gen. ἡμέων, ἡμείων ὑμέων, ὑμείων σφέων, σφείων 
Dat. ἄμμι(ν) ὕμμι(ν) σφί(ω) 
Acc, ἡμέας, ἄμμε ὑμέας, ὕμμε σφάς, σφέας, 


σφεῖας, σφέ 
An isolated Ionic form for the Accusative Sing. of the third person is 
piv, trag. viv, both enclitic; in a like sense o¢é occurs in the poets. 
viv seldom stands for the Plural. 


58 PERSONAL AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. § 206. 


§ 206. The Stems of the Sing. are: ἐμε, for the first 
person; σε, for the second; é, for the third. The Nom- 
inative, however, is formed differently from them: ἐγώ, σύ, 
and that of the third person is entirely wanting, 


Obs.—The o of the Stem ce has arisen from τ (δ 60, a) [te], which 
remains in many dialect-forms. The Stem é goes back to Fe, 
and this to a still older form, σ Ξε [Lat. se for sve]. (ὃ 60,0.) In 
the form σφε, the F is hardened into φ. 


The Stems of the Dual are: νὼ [no-s], opw, σφω. The 
Dual of the third person does not occur in prose. 

The Stems of the Plural are: ἡμε, bus, σφε (€ 15 gen- 
erally contracted with the ending, hence the circumflex : 
see Dialects). 


§ 207. When there is no emphasis on the Personal Pro- 
nouns, it becomes enclitic in the forms mentioned in § 92, 
2; in that case the first person has the forms beginning 
with ». But when emphatic, as well as generally after 
prepositions, it retains its accent, and the first person has — 
the fuller forms: δοκεῖ μοι, it seems to me; ἐμοὶ οὐ σοὶ 
τοῦτο ἀρέσκει, this pleases me, not you. 

The Gen., Dat., and Acc. Plur. of the first and second persons, when 

not emphatic, sometimes have the accent on the first syllable: 
ἥμων, ὑμιν, and in this case the final syllable of the Dat. and 


Acc. is usually shortened : ἧμιν, ἦμας (Hom.). When emphatic, 
with the final syllable shortened, they are written ἡμίν, ὑμίν. 


ἢ 208. The Possessive Pronouns are formed from the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns: 


St. ἐμ ε, ἐμός, my. St. ἡ με, ἡμέτερος, our. 
“oe, σός, thy. “ ὁ με, ὑμέτερος, YOU. 
ὁ ἐς τὸς, aS ener. “ oe, σφέτερος, their. 


Obs.—The ending repoc is that of the comparative (δ 192). 


§ 208. Dialects—Hom. additional forms of the Possessives: rede 
[tuus], ἑός [suus], dude (properly Dor.), vudc, σφός. From the Dual 
Stems vw, σφω : vwirepoc, nos-ter ; opwirepoc, belonging to you two; ἃμός 
(also adc) often means my, ὅς sometimes means own, without any ref- 
erence to a particular person. 


§ 211. REFLEXIVE AND OTHER PRONOUNS. 89 


ὃ 209. αὐτό-ς, αὐτή, αὐτό, self, is declined like a com- 
mon adjective, except that the Neuter in the Nom. Ace. 
Voe. Sing. has no ν (compare the article τό). 

Le > , ς ’ 2 , i 7 Q > , δ ’ , la 

6 αὐτός (αὑτός), ἡ αὐτή (αὑτή). τὸ αὐτό (ταὐτό Or ταὐτόν), 
the same, Lat. idem. 

§ 210. The Stems of the Personal Pronouns, combined 
with αὐτός, produce the Leflexive Pronouns. 


Singular. Gen. M.N. F. Dat. M.N. F. Acc.M. F. N. 
Ist person, ἐμαυτοῦ -ῆς ἐμαυτῷ τῇ ἐμαυτόν -yv, myself. 
2d person, σεαυτοῦ -ῆς σεαυτῷ τῇ σεαυτόν -ήν, thyself. 
ΟΥ σαυτοῦ -ῆς σαυτῷ τῇ σαυτόν -ἦν . 
éd person, ἑαυτοῦ -τῆς ἑαυτῷ τῇ ἑαυτόν τήν -ό, himself, her- 
Or αὑτοῦ -ῆς αὑτῷ τῇ αὑτόν -ἤν -ό, self, itself. 


In the plural, both Stems are declined together : 
Plural. Gen. M. F. N. Dat. M. N. F. Acc. M. F. 
Ist person, ἡμῶν αὐτῶν ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς -αἴς ἡμᾶς αὐτούς -άς, ourselves. 
2d person, ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς -aic ὑμᾶς αὐτούς -άς, yourselves. 
8d person, σφῶν αὐτῶν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς -αῖς σφᾶς αὐτούς -ac, themselves. 
Neut. σφέα αὐτά 


Yet the 3d person plural has also the compound form : 
ἑαυτῶν ἑαυτοῖς -aic ἑαυτούς -ἀς -a 
OY αὑτῶν αὑτοῖς -aic αὑτούς -ἄς -a 


§ 211. ἄλλο-ς, ἄλλη, ἄλλο, another (alius), is declined 


like αὐτός. 


The Stem aAAo combined with itself produces the /2e- 
ciprocal Pronoun aXX-nXo (for aA A-aXdX 0), occurring 
only in the Dual and Plural. 


§ 209. Dialects—New-Ionic wirdc, with, τωὐτό; Homeric ωὐτός = ὁ 
αὐτός. 

§ 210. Dialects—The Epic dialect declines both Stems together 
eyen in the sing. : ἐμὲ αὐτόν = ἐμαυτόν, οἵ αὐτῷ = ἑαυτῷ, etc. 

New-Ionic ἐμεωυτοῦ, σεωυτοῦ, ἑωυτοῦ, stand for the forms with av. 


90 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. S282. 

Dual. | Masc. Fem. Neut. 

G. D. ἀλλήλοιν ἀλλήλαιν ἀλλήλοιν 

Ace. ἀλλήλω ἀλλήλα ἀλλήλω 
Plural. 

Gen. ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων ἀλλήλων 

Dat. ἀλλήλοις ἀλλήλαις ἀλλήλοις 

Ace. ἀλλήλους ἀλλήλας ἄλληλα 


§ 212. The two most important Demonstrative Pro- 
NOUNS are: 


oe, ἥδε, τόδε, that. οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, this, 


ς 


ὅδε consists of the article ὁ and the demonstrative enclitic 
δέ, and is therefore declined entirely like the article with 
δὲ affixed. οὗτος corresponds to the article with regard to 
the rough breathing and the 7 at the beginning; it also has 
the diphthong av in the last syllable but one where the 
article has a or ἡ (A-sound), and ov where the article has 
0, ὦ, or ov (O-sound). 


Singular. Plural. 
ὁ ἡ τό ot αἱ Ta 
Nom. < ὅδε ἥδε τόδε οἵδε aide τάδε 
οὗτος αὕτη τοῦτο οὗτοι αὗται ταῦτα 
τοῦ τῆς τοῦ ς τῶν 
Gen. τοῦδε τῆσδε τοῦδε τῶνδε 
τούτου ταύτης τούτου ; τούτων 
τῷ Τῇ τῷ τοῖο ταῖς τοῖς 
Dat. \ τῇδε τῷδε τοῖςδε ταῖςδε TOICOE 
τούτῳ ταύτῃ τούτῳ τούτοις ταύταις τούτοις 
᾿ τόν THY τό τούς τάς τά 
Ace. τόνδε τήνδε τόδε τούςδε racce τάδε 
τοῦτον ταύτην τοῦτο τούτους ταύτας ταῦτα 


§ 212. Dialects —In Homer, the article itself is a demonstrative pro- 
noun, with these special forms: Nom. 6; Gen. τοῖο; Gen. Dat. Dual 
τοῖιν ; Nom. Plur. roi, rai; Gen. Plur. Fem. τάων ; Dat. Plur. roiou(y), 
τῇσι(ν), OF τῇς. 

From ὅδε we have Dat. Plur. roicd:o1 or τοϊσδεσσι(»), and κεῖνος, poet. 
for ἐκεῖνος. 


Α. 


‘ 


i 


§ 214. RELATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. - 91 
Dual. 
τώ τά τώ τοῖν ταῖν τοῖν 
N. A.V. ride τάδε τώδε (ἡ. 12. « τοῖνδε ταῖνδε τοῖνδε 


τούτω ταὐτᾷ τούτω τούτοιν ταύταιν τούτοιν 
he adverb of ὅδε is ὧδε ; that of οὗτος, οὕτως OF οὕτω, in this way. 
Like οὗτος are declined : 
τοσοῦτος τοσαύτη τοσοῦτο ΟΥ̓ τοσοῦτον, so great (tantus) ; 
τοιοῦτος τοιαύτη τοιοῦτο ΟΥ̓ τοιοῦτον, such (talis) ; 


τηλικοῦτος τηλικαύτη τηλικοῦτο OF τηλικοῦτον, 80 Old ; 


in which, however, the τ of the forms beginning with τ is 
dropped ; ταῦτα, but τοσ-αὕτα ; by affixing the enclitic δέ, we have 
the forms τοσόσδε, 80 large; roidcde, of such quality; τηλικός-δε, of 
such an age, with a regular adjective declension before the syl- 
lable δε. 

ἐκεῖνο-ς, ἐκείνη, ἐκεῖνο, that, is declined like αὐτός. 


A long accented ε is often affixed to the Demonstrative Pronouns 
to strengthen the meaning without affecting the declension, but 
the ε of δὲ is lost: οὑτοςί, ὁδί, ἐκεινωνί, αὑτηΐ͵ τοιοδί, Compare the 

Lat. ce in his-ce, has-ce. 


§ 213. The Ltelative Pronoun has the rough breathing 
in all cases, as: 


Singular. Plural. Dual. 


Masc. Fem. Neut. |Masc. Fem. WNeut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 


Nom. o¢,who ἥ Oy tt OF αἵ dt NAS, th Gee 
Gen. οὗ ἧς οὗ ὧν G.D. οἷν αἷν οἷν 
Dat. ᾧ ἢ @ | oi aic τ οἷς 
Ace. ὅν ἥν ὕ otc ἃς ri 


Obs.—In the phrases καὶ ὃς ἔφη, and he said, and ἢ δ᾽ bc, but he said, 
ὕς is used as a Demonstrative (compare the Dialects). 


§ 214. The Jnterrogative Pronoun has the same Stem 
as the Jndefinite Pronoun, from which it is distinguished 


§ 213. Dialects —Hom. 6 = ὅς, ὕου = οὗ, Enc = ἧς, and signifies he. 
Ion. oio = οὗ, and the forms of the Article which begin with 7, are used 
instead of those of the Relative: τοῦ = οὗ, cujus; τῷ = ᾧ, cui; rote = 
οἷς, quibus. 

ὃ 214. Dialects—Hom., partly also New-Ion. forms are: Gen. τέο, 
rev; Dat. τέῳ, τῷ ; Gen. Plur. τέων ; Dat. Plur. τέοισι(ν) ; Neut. Plur. 
ἄσσα. The 


4 


92 INTERROG. AND INDEF, PRONOUNS. § 215. 


only by the accent. The Interrogative Pronoun has the 
accent always on the Stem syllable; the Indefinite is en- 
clitic: hence ric, who ? τὶς, enclitic, some one. 


Interrogative. | Indefinite. Ἅ 
Singular. Singular. 
Nom. ric τί τὶς τὶ 
Gen. τίνος τινός 
Dat. τίνι τινί 
Ace. τίνα τί τινά τὶ 
Dual, Dual. 
Nom. Ace. TIVE τινέ 
Gen. Dat. Tivo | τινοῖν 
Plural, Plural. 
Nom. τίνες τίνα τινές τινά (ἄττα) 
Gen. τίνων τινῶν 
Dat. τίσι(ν) τισί(ν) 
Ace. τίνας τίνα τινάς τινά (ἄττα) 


Obs.—1. τοῦ, τῷ, Which as indefinites are enclitic, are often used for 
τίνος, τίνι, and for τινός, τινί. 

Obs.—2. The Relative and Indefinite combine to form ὕστις, ἥτις, 
ὅ τι, who. Both Stems are declined together: οὗτινος, ἧστινος, 
ᾧτινι, οἵντινοιν (δ 93,5). A space is left between o and τι in 6 τι, 
which, to distinguish it from the conjunction ὅτι, that. 

The shorter forms of τὶς are also used with bc; but the Stem ὁ is 
not declined: Gen. ὕτου ; Dat. ὅτῳ ; more rarely Gen. Plur. ὅτων, 
Dat. ὕτοισι(ν). ἅττα is an additional form for ἅτινα, not to be 
confounded with ἄττα for τινά. 


§ 215. Another Indefinite Pronoun 15 δεῖνα, of three gen- 
ders, guidam, sometimes undeclined, sometimes declined as 
follows: 

Sing. ὁ, ἡ, τὸ δεῖνα, δεῖνος, δεῖνι, δεῖνα. Ὁ 
Plur. οἱ, ai, δεῖνες, δείνων, δεῖνας. 


The following are special forms of the compound Relative in Hom. 
and also in New-Ion. : 
Sing. ὕτις, N. ὅττι; ὕτευ, ὕττεο, ὕττευ : brew; ὅὕτινα, Ν. ὅττι 
Plur. N. ἅσσα; ὕτεων ὁτέοισι; ὕτινας, N. ἅσσα 
(for aria, according to ὃ 67). 
The Stem of the Relative thus often remains unchanged. 


§ 217. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS. 93 


§ 216. The following are called Correlative Pronouns : 


Demonstrative. Relative. 


Interrogative. | Indefinite. 


τίς, who ὃ ric, some one. | 00€, οὗτος, this. | ὅς, ὕςτις, who. 


ὁπότερος, which 
of two. 


πότερος, uter ὃ πότερος, one of ἕτερος, the one of 
which of two? two (alteruter).| two (alter). 


πόσος, how great? ποσός, of some| récoc, τόσοςδε, το-  ὕσος, ὁπόσος, 

how much ? size or number.| σοῦτος, so great,| how great, how 

(quantus, quot). so much (tantus,| much (quan- 
tot). tus, quot). 


ποῖος, Of what ποιός, of some} τοῖος, τοιόςδε, τοι- οἷος, ὁποῖος, Of 
quality ? (qualis).| quality. ovroc, of such α΄ what quality 
quality (talis). | (qualis). 


πηλίκος, how old ? | πηλίκος, of some| τηλίκος, τηλίκοςδε, ἡλίκος, ὁπηλίκος, 
age. τηλικοῦτος, of | of what age. 
such age. 


Obs.—On the ending repoc, see §§ 192, 208, Ods. 


In Attic prose of the Demonstratives generally only 
those in -ὃὲ and -ouvro-c are used. 


§ 217. Correlative Adverbs are formed from the same 
Pronominal Stems. 


ὃ 216. Dialects. —scooe (add. form ὁσσάτιος), τόσσος, are Epic for 
ὕσος, τόσος. For every Interrogative πὶ the New-Ion. dialect has x: 
κόσος, κοῖος, κότε, κοῦ. 


§ 217. Dialects—d0 is Epic = ποῦ ; ποθί --- πού ; dem. τόθι, there, 
rel. ὅθι, where. In poetry, τόθεν is dem. to πόθεν, New-Ion. ἐνθαῦτα for 
ἐνταῦθα, ἐνθεῦτεν for ἐντεῦθεν. 

ὥς in the Poets, like οὕτως, means so, to be distinguished from ὡς 
(without accent), how ; it is written also ὡς, with the meaning yet : 
καὶ wc, and yet. With the meaning 80, τώς also occurs. yy is an ad- 
ditional form of 7. The z is doubled: ὕππως, ὕπποτε (ὃ 62, D.). 


94 CORRELATIVE ADVERBS. § 218. 


Interrogative.| Indefinite. Demonstrative. Relative. 


πού ἔνθα 
ποῦ, where ὃ (αἰΐ-. Some | Odd ib a 
(ubi ὃ) cubi) sphere. ἐνταῦθα 0) ν τ. 
ποθέν Jrom ἔνθεν rom 
πόθεν, whence ?| (ali- some- [ἐνθένδε 
(unde ?)| cunde) ) where. ἐντεῦθεν 


Trot 


there οὗ ἰ where 


(ubdi). 


ὅθεν ἰ whence 
(unde). 


ὁπόθεν 


ἔνθα : 
J ~ An ᾿ 9 τῇ ) some- ; ΠῚ οἵ whither 
ποῖ, whither? | (ali ( whither. ἐνθάδε 


yen uo). 
(quo ?) quo) ἐνταῦθα (qua) 
πότε, when? ποτέ, sometime. τότε, then. ὅτε, ὁπότε, when. 
αὐ. τηνίκα me 
y ἡνίκα ἰ at what 
time. 


ὕποι 


πηνίκα ᾿ what τηνικάδε eke 
τ᾿ ὁπηνίκα 
time ὃ 


πῶς, how? πώς, somehow. ius. |wc, ὕπως, as. 


whither ? thither, whither, 
rin what \ry 4 ; in this |, ox in what 
mp ym wha ITY) sy some way. , ὁπτῷ 
way ? way. way. 


: some whither, 


Obs.—ivea and ἔνθεν, in their original demonstrative sense, occur 
only in a few combinations in Attic prose (ἔνθα δή, just then ; 
ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα, here and there); but they are regularly used in a 
relative sense: where, whence. 

To the Correlative Adverbs there belong also ἕως, guamdiu (Rela- 
tive, as long); τέως, tamdiu (Demonstrative, so long), as well as 
the poetic ὄφρα (for dpa, ὃ 53, ¢, Obs.) used in the same meaning 
as ἕως, and τόφρα AS τέως. 

To the simple ἐκεῖνος (that, ὃ 212) correspond among the Adverbs 
of place ἐκεῖ, there; ἐκεῖθεν, from there ; ἐκεῖσε, thither. The De- 
monstrative ὥς occurs in Attic prose only in καὶ we, even thus, and 
οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even thus. Itis also written ὡς in these combinations. 

§ 218. The conjunctions δή, δήποτε, and οὖν (meaning ever, Latin 
cunque), and the enclitic περ, may be joined to any relative pro- 
noun or adverb to give prominence: ὕστις δή wore, whosoever ; 
ὕπως οὖν (utcunque), ὥσπερ, just as. 

Sometimes ἢ is affixed to the interrog. τί in the sense of why? and 
to the corresponding indirect interrogative 6 ru: rin, ὁτίη, why ? 

§ 219. There are also negative pronouns and adverbs to be noticed : 
οὔτις, μήτις, NO one; οὐδέτερος, μηδέτερος, neither, neuter ; οὐδαμοῦ, 
μηδαμοῦ, nowhere ; οὐδαμῶς, μηδαμῶς, in no way. 


= 


§ 220. 


THE NUMERALS. 


95 


Cuap. IX.— THE NuUMERALS. 


§ 220. The Cardinal, Ordinal, and Adverbial Numer- 
als, with their value and signs, are: 


a εἷς, μία, Ev, One. 

Δ΄ δύο 

Υ̓ τρεῖς, τρία 
τέσσἄρες, τέσ- 

δ΄ σᾶρα, OY τέττᾶἄ- 


pec, τέεττἄρα 


Φ Ο -ξ σὺ οι He Wwe 


11} ta ἕνδεκα 

12 | ιβ΄] δώδεκα 

13 | ιγ΄ τριςκαίδεκα 

14 ιδ΄ ᾿ τεσσαρεφκαίδεκα , 

τεσσαρακαίδεκα 

15] ιέ πεντεκαίδεκα 

16 | ι΄ ἑκκαίδεκα 

VEZ ἑπτακαίδεκα 

18 | u/ ὀκτωκαίδεκα 

19] ιθ΄ ἐννεακαίδεκα 

20 κ΄ εἴκοσι(ν) 

30 | Xx τριάκοντα 

40 μ΄ τεσσαρᾶκοντα 

50 | ν΄ πεντήκοντα 

60 ἔξ ἑξήκοντα 

70 | 6 ἑβδομήκοντα 

80 π΄ ὀγδοήκοντα 

90. G! ἐνενήκοντα 
100 | ρ΄ ἑκατόν 
200 | σ’ διᾷκόσιοι, at, a 
300 | 7’ TPLAKOOLOL, αι, a 
400 | v TETPAKOGLOL, AL, a 
500 | ¢’ TEVTAKOOLOL, αἱ, a 
600 | x’ ἑξακόσιοι, αι, a 
700 | ψ' ETTAKOCLOL, αι, a 
800 OKTAKOOLOL, αι, a 


ἐνᾶκόσιοι, AL, a 

EVVAKOOLOL, αἰ, a 
χίλιοι, at, α΄ 
δισχίλιοι, at, a 
TPLCXIALOL, at, a 
μύριοι, αι, a 


mR yy & 


Dy ¢ 
δεύτερος 


τρίτος 


ὁ πρῶτος, the first. 


ἅπαξ, once, 
δίς 
τρίς 


τέταρτος 


πέμπτος 

ἕκτος 

ἕβδομος 

ὄγδοος 

ἔνατος (ἔννατος) 
δέκατος 
ἑνδέκατος 
δωδέκατος 
TPLCKALOEKATOC 


τεσσαρακαιδέκατος 


πεντεκαιδέκατος 
ἑκκαιδέκατος 
ἑπτακαιδέκατος 
ὀκτωκαιδέκατος 
ἐννεακαιδέκατος 
εἰκοστός 
τριᾶκοστός 
τεσσαρᾶκοστός 
πεντηκοστός 
ἑξηκοστός 
ἑβδομηκοστός 
ὀγδοηκοστός 
ἐνενηκοστός 
ἑκατοστός 
διακοσιοστός 
τριακοσιοστός 
τετρακοσιοστός 
πεντακοσιοστός 
ἑξακοσιοστός 
ἑπτακοσιοστός 
ὀκτακοσιοστός 
ἐνακοσιοστός OF 
ἐννακοσιοστός 
χιλιοστός 
διοχιλιοστός 
τριοχιλιοστός 
μυριοστός 


τετράκις 


πεντάκις 

« 2 

ἑξάκις 
ἑπτάκις 
ὀκτάκις 

> , ’ , 
ἐνάκις (ἐννάκις) 
δεκάκις 

« ’, 
ἑνδεκάκιο 
δωδεκάκις 


εἰκοσάκις 
TPLAKOVTAKLC 
TECOAPAKOVTAKIC 
πεντηκοντάκις 
ἑξηκοντάκις 
ἑβδομηκοντάκις 
ὀγδοηκοντάκις 
ἐνενηκοντάκις 
ἑκατοντάκις 
διακοσιάκις 


χιλιάκις 


| μυριάκις 


pee 3 re) 
~ Sor 
a “ 
‘. 
‘<a 
. 


96 THE NUMERALS. § 221. 
Obs.—The letters of the alphabet are used in numbers also in un 
interrupted succession, In the most frequent designation, given 
above, stigma (s’) is inserted after é for the number 6: ἀ to θ΄ 
are therefore units; i is 10, x’ 20; after π' (ΞΞ 80), G’ (koppa=90) ~ 
is inserted; and after ὦ (=800) 4 (sampi=900). The alphabet 
begins again at 1000, but here each letter has the accent under 
it; hence Brpd' = 2344, αωξβ'ΞΞ 1862. 


§ 221. The Cardinal Numbers 1 to 4 are declined: 


τρεῖς Lap 4, τέσσαρες NV. τέσσαρα 
τριῶν τεσσάρων 

τρισί(ν) τἐσσαρσι(ν) 

τρεῖς . τρί τέσσαρας ΕΝ. τέσσαρα 


οὐδείς, οὐδεμία, οὐδέν, and μηδείς, nO one, are declined 
like εἴς. δύο is also used without inflexion. δυεῖν is an- 
other form for δυοῖν. rr occurs for oo in all forms and 
derivations of τέσσαρες. ἄμφω (ambo, both), Gen. Dat. au- 
φοῖν, 15 sometimes represented by the Plur. ἀμφότεροι, at, a, 
of which the Singular ἀμφύτερον, both, is also in use. 


δὲ 220-223. Dialects—1, Homer has the fem. (a, ἰῆς, ig: also Neut. 
Dat. ty. 

2, δύω for all cases: dow, δοιοί, δοιαί, dora; Dat. δοιοῖς ; Acc. δοιούς, 
ἄς, ἀ. 

3, τρίτατος = τρίτος. 

4, Hom. Aol. πίσυρες, New-Ion. τέσσερες, Hom. τέτρατος (ὃ 59, D.). 

7, ἑβδόματος. 8, dyddaroc. 9, εἴνατος. 

12, Hom. δυώδεκα, and δύο καὶ δέκα, δυοδέκατος. 

20, Hom. ἐείκοσι, ἐεικοστός. 30, Hom. τριήκοντα. 80, ὀγδώκοντα. 90, 
ἐγνήκοντα. 200, etc., also διηκόσιοι; Herod. πεντηκόσιοι, εἰνακόσιοι. 

9000, Hom. ἐνεάχιλοι. 10,000, δεκάχτλοι. 

δίχα, Hom. διχθά ; likewise τριχθά, τετραχθά, threefold, fourfold ; also 
τριπλῷ, τετραπλῇ. 


ΝΣ, “a 


§ 224, NUMERALS. 97 


§ 222. The numerals 5 to 199 are indeclinable. 


We also find τρεῖς, τρία καὶ δέκα, τέσσαρες, τέσσαρα καὶ δέκα, for 13 
and 14. The units and tens are united by καὶ, in any order: 
εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε and πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι; or without καὶ when the 
tens are first: εἴκοσι πέντε, 25; So also ἑκατὸν δέκα. For twenty- 
Jirst we have εἷς καὶ εἰκοστός, OF πρῶτος Kai εἰκοστός, aNd εἰκοστὸς 
πρῶτος, etc. 


The Cardinal numerals from 200 are, like the Ordinal, 
regular adjectives of three terminations: διακόσιοι, at, a. 
The Ordinal numerals have the endings of the superlative, 
except δεύτερος, which has that of the comparative (compare 
§ 192). 


§ 223. By combination with σύν, the numeral Stems form Distribu- 
tives: σύνδυο, two and two; σύντρεις, three and three; Multipli- 
catives, by the syllable πλοῦς (from πλόος, Lat. plex): ἁπλοῦς, 
simple ; διπλοῦς, τριπλοῦς, πενταπλοῦς, etc. Observe also δισσός, 
twofold ; τρισσός, threefold ; διπλάσιος, twice as much ; τριπλάσιος, 
etc., πολλαπλάσιος, many times as much.. Adverbs: povayy, sim- 
ply (μόνος, alone); διχῇ or δίχα, doubly. Substantives: μονάς (St. 
μονα ὃ), unity; δυάς, τριάς, τετράς, πεμπάς, ἑξάς, ἑβδομάς, dydode, 
ἐννεάς, δεκάς, εἰκάς, ἑκατοντάς, χιλιάς, μυριάς ; hence τρεῖς μυριάδες 


— 30,000. 


§ 224. The most important general Adjectives of quan- 
tity are: ἕκαστος, cach; ἑκάτερος, either; πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν 
(St. παν τὴ, all; ποστός, ὁπόστος [ quotus]; and the ad- 
verbs: πολλάκις, many times, often; ἑκαστάκις, every 
time ; ὁσάκις, as often as; τοσαυτάκις, so often? ~~ 
στάκις, very often; ὀλιγάκις, seldom. 

i 


98 THE VERB. § 225, 


B. INFLEXION OF VERBS. 


General Remarks. 
§ 225. The Greeks distinguish in the Verb— 


1. Three Numbers: Singular, Dual, and Plurat. 
2. Three Vovces : 
Active: ἔλυσα, 7 loosed ; 
Middle: ἐλυσάμην, L loosed for myself ; 
Passive : ἐλύθην, 7 was loosed. 
Verbs which occur only in the Middle or Passive are called 
Deponents : δέχομαι, L receive. 
Obs.—Only the Aorist and the Future have special torms for the 
Passive; and only the Aorist special forms for the Middle: in 
all other tenses the Middle forms have also a Passive meaning. 
3. Two classes of Tenses: 
A. Principal, viz. : 
1. Present: λύω, L loose ; 
2. Perfect: λέλυκα, 7 have loosed 5 
3. Future: dbow, 7 shall loose. 


B. [Tistorical, viz. : 
1. Imperfect: ἔλυον, [ was loosing ; 
2. Pluperfect : ἐλελύκειν, [ had loosed ; 
3. Aorist : ἔλυσα, L loosed. 
4. kour Moods, viz. : 
1. Indicative: bw, 7 loose ; 
Finite | 2. Subjunctive: λύω, 7 may loose ; 
Verb. | 3. Optatie: λύοιμι, [ would loose ; 
4. Imperative: Xie, loose. 


5. Three Verbal Nouns, viz.: 
1. Infinitive: λύειν, Loose ; : 
2. Participle : λύων, loosing ; 


3. Verbal Adjective: λυτέος, to be loosed, sol- 
vendus. 


8 227. THE PERSONAL ENDINGS.—TENSE-STEMS. 99 


§ 226. The Personal tae gat had originally the follow- 


ing forms : 


Active. Middle. 


Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. | Principal Tenses. Hist. Tenses. 

Sing. 1. «μι -ν -μαι -μην 

2. «σι -ς -σαι -σο 

3 -τι -- -ται -TO 
Dual 1 -μεν ᾿ -μεθον 

2. -TOV -σθον 

3. -TOV -τὴν -σθον -σθην 
Plur. 1 -μὲν -μεθα 

2 -TE -σθε 

3 -ντι -ν -νται -ντὸ 


The Active personal endings of the principal tenses are 
most easily observed in the verb: 


εἰ-μί, 1 am. ἐσ-μέν ἐσ-μέν. 
ἐσ-σί (contr. εὖ) ἐσ-τόν éo-Té. 
éo-ri(v) ἐσ-τόν εἰ-σί(ν) (σι ΞΞΞ- ντι, § 60). 


_ The endings of the three persons in the Sing. are really the per- 
sonal pronouns affixed, J, thou, he, and to be compared with the 
Stems of the Personal Pronouns: μι (St. we), σι (σ €), τι (the Stem 
of the article,70). The 1 Dual in the Active is always iden- 
tical with the 1 Plur. The ending ofthe 1 Sing. of the Historical 
Tenses was originally yp (Lat. era-m), which at the end of the 
word was changed into ν, according to ὃ 67, Obs. The ending of 
the 3 Sing. was originally 7, which, however, could not continue 
at the end according to ὃ 67 (compare ὃ 233, 2); and that of the 
3 Plur. vr (Lat. era-nt); but the τ was dropped (§ 67). 


§ 227. The tenses, moods, and verbal nouns are classified 
according to the Stems (Tense-Stems) from which they are 
formed. The Tense-Stems are the following : 

1. The Present Stem, from which the Present and Im- 
perfect are formed. 


_ ὃ 226. Dialects.—Instead of νται, vro, the Ion. (especially New-Ion.) 
often has ara, aro, in 3 Plur. Mid. The vowel a is here properly a 
connecting vowel, as in the Acc. Sing. of the Second Principal Declens. 
(δ 178, 3, Obs.); and ν is dropped in both alike; hence a-rat, a-ro, for 
ἄ-νται, a-vro (compare δὲ 287, 302, 3). 


100 TENSE-STEMS. — § 228. 


2. The Strong Aorist Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 

3. The Future Stem, from which the Future Act. and 
Mid. are formed. 

4. The Weak Aorist Stem, from which the First or Weak 
Aorist Act. and Mid. are formed. 

5. The Perfect Stem, from which the Perfect, Pluper- 
fect, and Future-Perfect are formed. 

These five Stems belong to the Active and Middle. There 
are added to them, for the special forms of the Passive : 

6. The Strong Passive Stem, from which the Second or 
Strong Aorist Passive and Second Future Passive are 
formed. 

7. The Weak Passive Stem, from which the First or Weak 
Aorist Passive and First Future Passive are formed. 

The form from which all the Tense-Stems of a verb may 
be derived is called the Verbal Stem. 


§ 228. The Subjunctive is indicated between the Stem 


and the ending. Long vowels are peculiar to it: λύτωτ-μεν, 
solv-d-mus ; λύτη-τε, solv-d-tis. 

The vowel ¢ is characteristic of the Optative, which gen- 
erally becomes ‘a diphthong with other vowels: λύτοι-μεν, 
we would loose. The Subjunctive has the endings of the 
principal tenses ; the Optative (except 1 Sing. Act.) those 
of the hestorical tenses. 

The /inperative has the following peculiar endings : 


.- 


Active. Middle. 
Sing. 2. -@ -σο 
3. -τω -σθω 
Dual 2. -τὸν . -σθον 
8. -των -σθων 
Plur. 2. -τε -σθε 
3. -yTwy OY -τωσαν -σθων Or -σθωσαν 


§ 229. The general law for the accentuation of the verb 
is that the accent 1s placed as far back as possible from 


§ 228. Dialects—The Hom. dialect often shortens the long vowel 
of the Subjunctive in the Dual and Plural. 


π᾿, 


§ 230. CONJUGATIONS. 101 


the end, final at not being considered long except in the 
optative: λύω, λύετε, λύομαι. 

Obs.—An exception is formed by the Participles, which in declen- 
sion (chap. vii.), if possible (δὲ 79~87), always keep the accent 
on the same syllable as in the Nom. Sing. Masc.: Part. Pres. Act. 
βασιλεύων, regnans, Neut. βασιλεῦον (not βασίλευον, according to 
§ 84), Part. Fut. Act. βασιλεύσων, regnaturus, Neut. βασιλεῦσον. 
(The special exceptions, see §§ 331-333.) 

§ 230. We distinguish Zwo Principal Conjugations : 

1. The /7rst—the far more frequent—connects the per- 
sonal endings with the first two Tense-Stems by a connect- 
ing vowel: λύτο-μεν. The verbs belonging to it are called 
verbs in w because the first Person Sing. Pres. Act. ends 
in w: λύω. 

2. The Second—the less frequent, but older—affixes the 
personal endings to the first two Tense-Stems without a 
connecting vowel: ἐσ-μέν. They are called verbs in pe 
because the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. preserves the original end- 
Ing we: εἰ-μί. 

The forms of the other five Tense-Stems are common to 
both Conjugations. 


The Paradigms of the verbs are given first: the forma- 
tion of each Tense-Stem is then explained in order. 


List OF THE PARADIGMS. 


ΕΠ ἘΠ σὺ oe ΤΕΣ ee wie Se won ene cee Table I. 
Synopsis of λύω, I loose (exhibiting the meanings of the 
ee ee as Cone Soke ae pee as Τρ", 


VERBS IN Q. 
A. Vowel Stems. 


ΠΕ ΠΟ τ οὐρα Atel no oo. τος ok SSE OE pe le a i: 
2. Contracted, τιμάω, wow, dov6w...-.---------- igs LN 
B. Consonant Stems. 
1. Guttural Stems, πλέκω, φεύγω, τάσσω.......----- pa Ns 
2. Dental Stems, ψεύδομαι, πείθω, κομίζω......----- ee Ve 
3. Labial Stems, πέμπω, λείπω, eadim7TwW .....------ Ve 
4, Liquid Stems, δέρω, ἀγγέλλω, ortipw..---------- ὉΤῈ 
VERBS IN MI. ° 
First Class, τίθημι, δίδωμι, tornu.....2--.-.2.-2--+---- noe 
Rn ORGS, Deierni le ek τ os tee aid wisi Swe wees Ree: 2 


102 PARADIGMS OF VERBS. Table I. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Biwi, Lam. Stem ἐς. 


Moods. Present. Imperfect. Future. 


Indicative. : 
i, 


™ | Numbers. 


ἣν OY ἢ ἔσομαι 
ἦσθα ἔσῃ OF ἔσει 
ἣν ἔσται 

D ἐσόμεθον 
ἦστον ΟΥ̓ ἦτον  ἔσεσθον 
ἤστην OY ἤτην | ἔσεσθον 
ev ἐσόμεθα 
Hore ΟΥ̓́ΐτε ἔσεσθε 


ἦσαν ἔσονται 


Subjunctive. 


Optative. 


ἐσοίμην 
ἔσοιο 


ἔσοιτο 
D. ἐσοίμεθον 
εἴητον ΟΥ̓ εἶτον ἔσοισθον 
εἰήτην OY εἴτην ἐσοίσθη 
Ts. εἴημεν OF εἶμεν ἐσοίμεθα 
εἴητε OF εἶτε ἔσοισθε 


WOE WOH WWE δὸ ὃ μὶ Φὸ ὃ δὸ ὃ μα οὺ ὃ μὶ WWE οὐ wr |Persons. 


εἴησαν ΟΥ̓ εἶεν - ἔσοιντο 


Imperative. | 8. 2 | ἴσθι 
3 | ἔστω 
2 | ἔστον 
3 | ἔστων 
P. 2 | gore 
3 


ἔστωσαν OY ἔστων 


Infinitive. 
Participle. 


εἶναι ἔσεσθαι 


ὧν 
οὖσα 
ὃν (Stem ovr) 


ἐσόμενος 
ἐσομένη 
ἐσόμενον 


Notr.—The formation of the tenses of this verb is explained in 
§ 315, but they are inserted in this place because some of them are re- 
quired'i in conjugating the Middle and Passive Voices of ordinary verbs, 


VERBS. 


OF 


MS 


PARADIG 


Table 11. 


“pasoo) aq 02 (SutAMbal) ‘50220y £ a7qnvasoo) 10 pasoop ‘5020X ‘qoalpy [eqia A ! 
"Soasrooayay “1B q ‘10903090V3X ΤΠ] ‘alerhooay3y 460 


“pasoo) u29q aany qynys 7 ‘seg fjashus «0 pasoo) oapy pyoys 7 “PUN ‘Mroonyay *puy Ἡποα “NT 


“pasoo) Uaag poy T | o[pplul 9yy 951| aluinlay3x? "p2soo)] poy T| “3xay3ayz| “pup dng 

“pasoo) uaag burany ἐπὶ SoagMayay “pas00) Hurapy| Soxay3ax 04 

“pasoo) Uaag θωρῃ 0} as ΔΕ “p2s0o) aany 92) Ἰρα3ιαχθχ  ἼΠ] 

"9800) UAAQ aUDY NOY? Op heen 09a\3X "P2800) BaDY NOY} Op avay3sy | “duay 

“pasoo) uaag any “ayo ‘Qybrvut T © aluz Soazayay “pasoo) aany “40 “gybrut T| mhoray3y | dQ 
“pasoo) uaaq aany “ayo ‘hou 7 ΕΒ, @ δο 3" αγϑυ Ἴ9800) aany ‘oy ‘hou T mmenay | [ang (780,A\) 
“pasoo) uaag any T Gs mrlay3x P2800) CODY T | ae POG ΟΣ ΠΟ ΤΙΝ 

“pasoo) uaag burany 10 pasoo) FI3QQY Soasvoay “pasoo) Buravy 10 bursooy IVORY | 4 

“Ppasoo) aq 02 mmaligay MAODOAN *2800) 07 mony} "TUT 

"pasoo) NOY? aq 14llQQy MORY |'28007 | "NOY} 9500) aooay | ‘duly 

“pasoo) ag ‘aya ‘gybru T aluzgay alirlmoay \pynoys 10 ‘pynon‘pynoo yybruy| wmmoay | do 
“pasoo) aq “ayo ‘hus 7 POX milenoay 2800] Ud 10 ἤριι 7 mony | “fang (00 ΔΑ) 
"paso? spn T aligan? aliripoay? "pasoo) 7 poy? | ‘put “IOV T 

“pa8o0) 2Q 02 Ynogv Soasnlooligay Soasnooay "a800) 02 qnogn AMOAY 4 

“(aayfeasay) 9800) θη 07 mgozoligay 1 9.03.90X *(daqyyearoy) 9800) 07 a300X ἡ ἼΠ] 

-9191}} pasoo) 92. “Ὅ70 “γδλι 7 alirhooligay alirhooay "(192}00.01]} 9500) “oxo “Qybru | amooay | 40 
[4921] ..,)2800) 9 )DY8 7 mrnooligay moony “a800) 1)0Y8 7 moox| ‘put ‘ny 
‘(panutzuod) pasoo7 spa 7 ὉΠΤΌΌΤΕΟΙ 911 OAT] alinoay3 "Bursoo) spn Υ aoay2 | *puy ‘jaoduy 

Ἢ pasoo) Burag =r Soa3snoay “ursoo) AMON | 184 

3 paseo) θῳ 07 a TB REA ᾿διι1800) 29 04 pales Gl ae 3 6 

Ἢ pasoo) Noy? aq aN noay |"hu2s00) 9] “Hursoo) aq 3ay | ‘duit 

5) P9800) ag “Ὃ79 “gy brur T Ω alihoay \pynoys τὸ “Ῥγηοου ‘pnoa ‘gy brut T mony | 4dQ 

55 pasoo) aq “ayo ‘hnw T ΕἸ mnemay "ursoo) a9 upo 10 hin 7 max | fqng 
‘(ponurjuod) pasoo) WY Ὁ Ξ. mroay|  “(9800) T 10) Δη(1800) wn 7 mx | ‘pur ‘sag 
ΠΣ... τ aa POO, Odseea . | "810A ΦΙΏΡΗ͂Σ ΠΌΟΙΟΛ “OW | POOW “esta, 


‘(sosuar, 91} fo shuruvow oy, Gurgrgryxa) 2800) 07 “Ο-αγ glad ay) fo sisdoulig 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN QO. Table III. 


104 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 
ACTIVE 

| δ 

Subjunctive. | 


Tenses. Indicative. 


_| Persons. 


Imperfect. 


ἔλυον 


Present. 


Present. vw 


| Future, 


Ὁ 


Wor ὡς ὦ ὁθ τὸ μὶ 


λύεις 
λύει 
λύετον 
λύετον 
λύομεν 
λύετε 
λύουσι(ν) 
λύσω 
λύσεις 
λύσει 
λύσετον 
λύσετον 
λύσομεν 
λύσετε 
λύσουσι(ν) 


a 
CO 0% μὶ Φὸ CO WR WWF ϑ Ὁ οὐ ὁ μὶ 


sf 


Woe 
W wr cD CO wore 


ἔλυσα 
wy 
ἔλυσας 


ἔλυσε(ν) 
ἐλύσατον 
ἐλυσάτην 
ἐλύσαμεν 
ἐλύσατε 
ἔλυσαν 
Perfect. 

λέλυκα 
λέλυκας 


λέλυκε(ν) 
λελύκατον 
λελύκατον 
λελύκαμεν 
λελύκατε 


λελύκασι(ν) 


ἔλυες 
ἔλυε(ν) 
? , 
ἐλύετον 
? , 
ἐλυέτην 
? , 
ἐλύομεν 
? , 
ἐλύετε 

»Ἅ 

ἔλυον 


Plupertect. 


ἐλελύκειν 
ἐλελύκεις 


ἐλελύκει 
ἐλελύκειτον 
ἐλελυκείτην 
ἐλελύκειμεν 
ἐλελύκειτε 
ἐλελύκεσαν 


λύωσι(ν) 


λύσω: 
λύσῃς 


λύσῃ 
λύσητον 
λύσητον 
λύσωμεν 
λύσητε 
λύσωσι(ν) 


λελύκω 
λελύκῳῃς 


λελύκῃ 
λελύκητον 
λελύκητον 
λελύκωμεν 
λελύκητε 
λελύκωσι(ν) 


or ἐλελύκεισαν 
Wanting. 


2 Aorist 
(Strong). 

2 Perfect and Wanting. 

Pluperf.(Strong). 


Examples for 
Oiw, I sacrifice ; θεραπεύω, I serve ; βουλεύω, I advise ; χορεύω, I dance ; 
ἐπαύσθην ; 


\ 


ΨΎΎΣ ΨῈ 
ς 


Table II]. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 105 


1. UNCONTRACTED. 
VOICE. 


a 


Infinitive. 


Imperative. Participle, 


Optative. 


λύοιμι λύων 

λύοις λῦε λύουσα 

λύοι λυέτω λῦον 

λύοιτον λύετον 

λυοίτην λυέτων Gen. λύοντος 

λύοιμεν λυούσης 

λύοιτε λύετε λύοντος 

λύοιεν λυόντων OF λυέτωσαν St. λυοντ 

λύσοιμι λύσειν λύσων 

λύσοις 

λύσοι λύσουσα 

λύσοιτον᾽ λῦσον 

λυσοίτην Gen. λύσοντος 

λύσοιμεν λυσούσης 

λύσοιτε λύσοντος 

λύσοιεν St. λυσοντ 

λύσαιμι : λῦσαι λύσας 

λύσαις OF λύσειας | λῦσον λύσασα 
λῦσαν 

λύσαι OF λύσειε(ν) | λυσάτω Gen. λύσαντος 

λύσαιτον λύσατον λυσάσης 

λυσαίτην λυσάτων λύσαντος 

λύσαιμεν St. λυσαντ 

λύσαιτε λύσατε͵ [σαν 

λύσαιεν OY λύσειαν λυσάντων ΟΥ̓ λυσάτω- 


λελύκοιμι λελυκέναι | λελυκώς 
λελύκοις λέλυκε λελυκυῖα 
λελυκός 
λελύκοι λελυκέτω Gen. λελυκότος 
λελύκοιτον λελυκυίας 
λελυκοίτην λελύκετον λελυκότος 
λελύκοιμεν λελυκέτων St. λελυκοτ 
λελύκοιτε λελύκετε 
λελύκοιεν λελυκόντων OF 


λελυκέτωσαν 


Conjugation. 
δακρύω, I weep; παύω, I make to cease (Mid., I cease). [1 Aor. Pass, 
Verbal, παυστέος. 


Or Ὑ ΡῸ 
] bs 
: 


106 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table ΠῚ---- 


: A. VOWEL STEMS: 
MIDDLE AND 
Tenses common to 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 


Per- 
sons. 


Present. λύομαι λύωμαι 


λύῃ ΟΥ λύει λύῃ 


woe 


λύεται λύηται 
λυόμεθον λυώμεθον 
λύεσθον λύησθον 
λύεσθον λύησθον 
λυόμεθα λυώμεθα 
λύεσθε λύησθε 
λύονται λύωνται 


ζὐ μι wr cd 


Impertect. ἐλυόμην 
ἐλύου 
ἐλύετο 
ἐλυόμεθον 
ἐλύεσθον 
ἐλυέσθην 
ἐλυόμεθα 
ἐλύεσθε 
ἐλύοντο 


μι) δ μα μα ὧὐ ὦ μὰ 


λύσομαι [ομαι 
etc., as in the Pres. λύ- 


Future. 


Perfect. 


λέλυμαι λελυμένος ὦ 
λέλυσαι ; 


λέλυται 
λελύμεθον 
λέλυσθον 
λέλυσθον 
λελύμεθα 
λέλυσθε 
λέλυνται 


OOO RH Wr CO or 


Plupertect. ἐλελύμην 
ἐλέλυσο 
ἐλέλυτο 
ἐλελύμεθον 
ἐλέλυσθον 
ἐλελύσθην 
ἐλέλύμεθα 
ἐλέλυσθε 


ἐλέλυντο 


μι ὦ ὦ μὶ Οὐ ὃ μὶ Οὐ ὃὸ μὶ 


Future Per- ; λελύσομαι [ομαι 
fect. : etc., as in the Pres. λύ- 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 107 


I. UNCONTRACTED. 
PASsIVE Voices. (§ 225, Obs. 2.) 
both Voices. 


Optative. Imperative. | Infinitive. Participle. 
λυοίμην λύεσθαι λυόμενος 
λύοιο λύου λυομένη 
λυόμενον 
λύοιτο λυέσθω 
λυοίμεθον 
λύοισθον λύεσθον 
λυοίσθην λυέσθων 
λυοίμεθα 
λύοισθε λύεσθε 
λύοιντο ; λυέσθων OF 
λυέσθωσαν 
λυσοίμην [οίμην λύσεσθαι λυσόμενος 
etc., as in the Pres. λυ- λυσομένη 
] λυσόμενον 
λελυμένος εἴην λελύσθαι λελυμένος | 
λέλυσο. ᾿ λελυμένη 
λελυμένον 
λελύσθω ] 
| 
λέλυσθον | 
λελύσθων 
λέλυσθε 
λελύσθων OF 
λελύσθωσαν 
λελυσοίμην [οίμην λελύσεσθαι | λελυσόμενος 
etc., as in the Pres. λυ- λελυσομένη 


λελυσόμενον 


108 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table III.— 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 
MIDDLE AND 
Tenses peculiar to 


Bog 
a = | 
Tenses. aq ἃ Indicative. Subjunctive. 
we 
1 Aorist 8. 1 | ἐλυσάμην λύσωμαι 
(Weak). 2 | ἐλύσω λύσῃ 
9 ἐλύσατο λύσηται 
D. 1 ᾿Ξ; ἐλυσάμεθον λυσώμεθον 
2 ἐλύσασθον λύσησθον 
3 ἐλυσάσθην λύσησθον 
P. 1 | ἐλυσάμεθα λυσώμεθα 
2 ἐλύσασθε λύσησθε 
3 ἐλύσαντο λύσωνται 


Wanting. 


Tenses peculiar to 


1 Aorist = oa | ἐλύθην λυθῶ 
(Weak). 2 | ἐλύθης λυθῇς 
3 | λύθη λυθῇ 
2 ἐλύθητον λυθῆτον 
3 ἐλυθήτην λυθῆτον 
P. 1 | ἐλύθημεν λυθῶμεν 
2 ἐλύθητε λυθῆτε 
8. | ἐλύθησαν λυθῶσι(ν) 


λυθήσομαι 
λυθήσῃ ΟΥ λυθήσει 
λυθήσεται 
λυθησόμεθον 
λυθήσεσθον 
λυθήσεσθον 
λυθησόμεθα 
λυθήσεσθε 
λυθήσονται 


Ομ ον ϑ μὰ 


2 Aorist 
(Strong). 


2 Future 
(Strong). 


Verbal Adjectives: λυτός, ἡ, dv. 2. λυτέος, a, ον. 


Wanting. 


Wanting. 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ὡ. 109 


I. UNCONTRACTED. 


PASSIVE VOICE. 
the Middle Voice. 


Optative. 


Avoaipny 
λύσαιο 


λύσαιτο 
λυσαίμεθον 
λύσαισθον 
λυσαίσθην 
λυσαίμεθα 
λύσαισθε 
λύσαιντο 


the Passive Voice. 


λυθείην 
λυθείης 


λυθείη 
λυθείητον OY λυθεῖτον 
λυθειήτην OY λυθείτην 
λυθείημεν ΟΥ λυθεῖμεν 
λυθείητε ΟΥ̓ λυθεῖτε 
λυθείησαν OY λυθεῖεν 


λυθησοίμην 
λυθήσοιο 
λυθήσοιτο 
λυθησοίμεθον 
λυθήσοισθον 
λυθησοίσθην 
λυθησοίμεθα 
λυθήσοισθε 
λυθήσοιντο 


Imperative. | Infinitive. 


λύσασθαι 
λῦσαι 


λυσάσθω 


λύσασθον 
λυσάσθων 


λύσασθε 
λυσάσθων ΟΥ̓ 
λυσάσθωσαν 


ΓΝ 


λυθῆναι 
λύθητι 


λυθήτω 


λύθητον 
λυθήτων 
λύθητε 
λυθήτωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
λυθέντων 


λυθήσεσθαι 


Participle. 


Avoapevoc 
λυσαμένη 
λυσάμεγνον 


λυθείς 
λυθεῖσα 

λυθέν 

Gen. λυθέντος 
λυθείσης 
λυθέντος 


St. λυθεντ 


λυθησόμενος 


λυθησομένη 
λυθησόμενον 


110 PARADIGMS OF 


τιμάω, I honor 
[compare Lat. am/(a)o]. 


VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. ‘Table IV. 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 
Present and 


ποιέω, LT make δουλόω, I subjugate. 


[comp. Lat. moneo]. 


Stems: rupa TOLE δουλο 
Active. 
15:1 τιμάω τιμῶ Tow ποιῶ δουλόω δουλῶ ) 
τιμάεις τιμᾷς ποιέεις ποιεῖς δουλόες Oovroic ὲ 
5 θ᾽, τιμάει. τιμᾷ ποιέι ποιεῖ δουλόι δουλοῖ 
oo iD. 1 
Ὁ Ὁ [ἰτιμάετον τιμᾶτον) ποιέετον ποιεῖτον δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
a θ᾽. τιμάετον TLLATOY| ποιέετον ToLEtToY| δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
2) Ῥῇ 1 |᾿τιμάομεν τιμῶμεν; ποιέομεν ποιοῦμεν δουλόομεν δουλοῦμεν 
a ὦ τιμάετε τιμᾶτε | ποιέετε ποιεῖτε |dovddere δουλοῦτε 
θ᾽ ,τιμά-ου- τιμῶ- ποιέου- ποιοῦ- δουλόου- δουλοῦ- 
σι(νῈ) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σιτ(ν) 
S. 1) τιμάω τιμῶ Tow ποιῶ δουλόω δουλῶ 
Ὁ) τιμάῆς τιμᾷς ποιξῆς ποιῇς δουλύῆς δουλοῖς 
4 3 | Tay τιμᾷ ποιῃ ποιῇ δουλόῃ δουλοῖ 
gpa | 
© ; ᾿ 
Ξ 2) τιμάητον τιμᾶτον! ποιέητον ποιῆτον | dovAdnroy δουλῶτον ; 
‘= ᾿ ϑ᾽]τιμάητον τιμᾶτον ποιέξητον ποιῆτον δουλόητον δουλῶτον 
BP. 1 τιμάωμεν τιμῶμεν ποιέωμεν ποιῶμεν δουλόωμεν δουλῶμεν ᾿ 
Ὁ) τιμάητε τιμᾶτε Ιποιέητε ποιῆτε δουλόητε δουλῶτε 4 
θ᾽)τιμάω- τιμῶ- ποιέω- ποιῶ- δουλόω- δουλῶ- 
σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) σι(ν) 
S. 1 ττιμάοιμι τιμῷμι ποιέοιμι ποιοῖμι δουλόοιμι δουλοῖμι 
(-aoiny -wnv)* (εοίην -οίη ν) (-ooinv -οίην) 
Ὁ τιμάοις τιμῷς ποιέοις ποιοῖς δουλόοις δουλοῖς 
(-aoing -ῴηῷ (-εοίης -οίη (-οοίης -oine) 
S| τιμάοι τιμῷ ποιέοι ποιοῖ δουλόοι δουλοῖ 
| (-aoin -ῴη) (-coin -τοίη) (-οοίη -oin) 
D.1 
2 
ἘΞ 2 τιμάοιτον τιμῷτον) ποιέοιτον ποιοῖτον δουλόοιτον δουλοῖτον 
= Σ (-αοίητον -ῴητον) (τεοίητον -οίητον) (ςοοίητον -οίητον) 
= Ὁ τιμαοίτην τιμῴ την] ποιεοίτην TOLOLTHY | OovrooiTny δουλοίτην 
(-αοιήτην -ῳήτην) | (-εοιήτην -οιήτην) (-οοιήτην -οιήτη») 
P. 1 τιμάοιμεν rep μεν) ποιέοιμεν ποιοῖμεν δουλόοιμεν δουλοῖμεν 
(-aoinpey -ῴημεν) | (-εοίημεν -οίημεν) (-οοίημεν -οίημεν) 
2|rysdowre τιμῷτε ᾿ποιέοιτε ποιοῖτε |δουλόοιτε δουλοῖτε 
(-αοίητε -ᾧῴητε) (-εοίητε -οίητε) (-οοίητε ο-οίητε) 
Θ᾽] τιμάοιεν τιμῷεν ᾿ποιέοιεν ποιοῖεν δουλόοιεν δουλοῖεν 


SS . 


* Obs.—The more usual forms are those printed in spaced type. 


(-εοίησαν -οἰησαν) 


Table IV. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 


II. CONTRACTED. 
Imperfect Tenses. 


Middle and Passive. 


τιμάομαι τιμῶμαι | ποιέομαι 


τιμάῃ, εἰ 
τιμάεται 
τιμαόμεθον 


τιμάεσθον 
τιμάεσθον 
τιμαόμεθα 
τιμάεσθε 

τιμάονται 


τιμάωμαι 
τιμάῃ 
τιμάηται 
τιμαώμε- 
θον 
τιμάησθον 
τιμάησθον 
τιμαώμεθα 
τιμάησθε 
τιμάωνται 


τιμαοίμην 

’ 
τιμάοιο 
τιμάοιτο 
τιμαοίμε- 

θον 

’ 
τιμάοισθον 
τιμαοίσθον 
τιμαοίμεθα 

, 
τιμάοισθε 


τιμάοιντο 


ed i 
τιμᾶται 
τιμώμε- 
θον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμώμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμῶνται 


τιμῶμαι 
τιμᾷ 
τιμᾶται 
τιμώμε- 
θον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμώμεθα 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμῶνται 


τιμῴμην 
τιμῷο 
τιμῷτο 
τιμῴμε- 
θον 
τιμῷσθον 
τιμῷῴῷσθον 
τιμῴμεθα 
τιμῷσθε 


τιμῷντο 


ποιέῃ, εἰ 

; 
ποιέεται 
ποιεόμεθον 
ποιέεσθον 
ποιέεσθον 
ποιεόμεθα 


ποιέξεσθε 
ποιέονται 


ποιέωμαι 

: 
ποιξῃ 

: 
ποιέηται 
ποιεώμεθον 
ποιξησθον 
ποιξησθον 
ποιεώμεθα 
ποιέξησθε 
ποιξωνται 


ποιεοίμην 
[2 
ποιέξοιο 
ποιέοιτο 
ποιεοίμεθον 
’ 
ποιξοισθον 
ποιεοίσθην 
ποιεοίμεθα 
ποιέοισθε 


ποιξοιντο 


ποιοῦμαι ᾿δουλόομαι δουλοῦμαι 


ποιῇ, εἴ 
ποιεῖται 
ποιούμε- 
θον 

ποιεῖσθον 
ποιεῖσθον 
ποιούμεθα 
ποιεῖσθε 
ποιοῦνται 


ποιῶμαι 
ποιῇ 
ποιῆται 
ποιώμε- 
θον 


ποιῆσθον  δουλόησθον δουλῶσθον 
δουλόησθον δουλῶσθον 
ποιώμεθα; δουλοώμεθα δουλώμεθα 


ποιῆσθον 


ποιῆσθε 
ποιῶνται 


ποιοίμην ,δουλοοίμην δουλοίμην 


ποιοῖο 


ποιοῖτο 


ποιοίμε- 
θον 
ποιοῖσθον 


/ 
ποιοίσθην 


ποιοίμεθα 


ποιοῖσθε 


ποιοῖντο 


» 


δουλόῃ, εἰ 
δουλόεται 
δουλοόμε- 
θον 
δουλόεσθον 
δουλόεσθον 
δουλοόμεθα 
δουλόεσθε 
δουλόονται 


δουλόωμαι 

δουλόῃ 

δουλόηται 

δουλοώμε- 
θον 


δουλόησθε 


δουλόωνται δουλῶνται 


δουλόοιο 
δουλόοιτο 


δουλοοίμε- 
θον 

δουλόοι- 
σθον 

δουλοοί- 
σθην 

δουλοοίμε- 
θα 


δουλόοισθε 


δουλόοιντο 


111 


δουλοῖ 
δουλοῦται 
δουλούμε- 
θον 
δουλοῦσθον 
δουλοῦσθον 
δουλούμεθα 
δουλοῦσθε 
δουλοῦνται 


δουλῶμαι 
δουλοῖ 
δουλῶται 
δουλώμε- 
θον 


δουλῶσθε 


δουλοῖο 


δουλοῖτο 


δουλοίμε- 
θον 
δουλοῖσθον 
δουλοίσθην 
δουλοίμεθα 
δουλοῖσθε 


δουλοῖντο 


112 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table 1V.— 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 
Present and Imperfect Tenses, 


τιμάω, IT honor ποιέω, I make δουλόω, L subjugate. 
[compare Lat. am(a)o]. | [comp. Lat. moneo]. 


Stems: rupa TOLE δουλο 


Active. 


S. 2 rivae τίμᾶ | ποίεε ποίει δούλοε δούλου 
Ὁ ᾿τιμαέτω τιμάτω | ποιεέτω ποιείτω δουλοέτω δουλούτω 
Ὁ Τὴ. 2 Ιἰτιμάετον τιμᾶτον ποιέετον ποιεῖτον δουλόετον δουλοῦτον 
᾿Ξ 8, τιμαέτων τιμάτων; ποιεέτων ποιείτων δουλοέτων δουλούτων 
ἘΠ, 9) ιτιμάετε τιμᾶτε ποιξετε ποιεῖτε δουλόετε δουλοῦτε 
= τιμαόν- τιμών- |ποιεόν-. ποιούν- | doviodyv- δουλούν- 
ἘΞ 9) των των των των των των 
τιμαέτω- τιμάτω-] ποιεέίτω- ποιείτω- δουλοέτω- δουλούτω- 


σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν σαν 


=I ᾿ 
Ἑ τιμάειν τιμᾶν ποιέειν ποιεῖν δουλόειν δουλοῦν 
— 
(ὦ τιμάων τιμῶν Ιποιξων. ποιῶν δουλύόων δουλῶν 
or 
ort 
2) ’ ~ , ~ , ~ 
Ne τιμάουσα τιμῶσα ποιξουσα ποιοῦσα | δουλόουσα δουλοῦσα 
tal ~ ~ ~ 
cs τιμάον τιμῶν |ποιξν ποιοῦν δουλόον δουλοῦν 
β΄ aan 
S. 1 ἐτίμαον ἐτίμων |éroicov ἐποίουν Ιἐδούλοον ἐδούλουν 
2) ἐτίμας ἐτίμᾶς ,ἐποίες ἐποίεις |ἐδούλοες ἐδούλους 
3 | ἐτίμαε(ν) ἐτίμᾶ ἐποίεε(ν) ἐποίει ἐδούλοε(ν) ἐδούλου 
2.1 : 
8 
q QR ἐτιμάε- ἐτιμᾶ- |ἐποιέετον ἐποιεῖ- ἐδουλοέ- ἐδουλοῦ- 
2 TOV TOV TOV τον τον 
Ω. > , > , 4 , , , εἰ , > U 
Ω͂ 8. ἐτιμαέ- ἐτιμά- ἐποιεέ- ἐποιεί- |ἐδουλοέ- ἐδουλού- 
τ τὴν THY τὴν τὴν τὴν την 
P 1 ? , ? ~ ? , ? ~ ? , ? Σ ~ 
. 1 ἐτιμάο- ἐτιμῶ- |ἐποιέομεν ἐποιοῦ- ἐδουλόο- ἐδουλοῦ- 
μεν μεν μεν μεν μεν 
Ὁ ἐτιμάετε ἐτιμᾶτε ᾿ἐποιέετε ἐποιεῖτε | ἐδουλόετε ἐδουλοῦτε 
θ᾽, ἐτίμαον ἐτίμων ἐποίεον ἐποίουν ἐδούλοον ἐδούλουν 


The other Tenses are conjugated like the same Tenses in λύω. 


Examples for 
τολμάω, I dare. ἑάω, I let (§ 236). } 
σιγάω, 1 am silent. ἀσκέω, I practise. 
Boaw, I call out. κοσμέω, I adorn. 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 


1. CONTRACTED. 
Indicative Mood. 


τιμάου 
τιμαέσθω 
τιμάεσίζυν 
τιμαέσθων 
τιμάεσθε 
τιμαέσθων 


A 
τιμαέσθω- 
σαν 


a 
τιμάεσδαι 
, 
τιμαόμε- 
γος 
τιμαομένη 
τιμαόμε- 
vov 


ἐτιμαόμην 
ἐτιμάου 
ἐτιμάετο 
ἐτιμαόμε- 
θον 
? , 
ἐτιμάε- 
σθον 
ἐτιμαέ- 
σθην 
ἐτιμαόμε- 
θα 
᾽ , 
ἐτιμάεσθε 
ἐτιμάοντο 


"τιμῶ 


τιμάσθω 
τιμᾶσθον 
τιμάσθων 
τιμᾶσθε 
τιμάσθων 


, 
τιμάσθω- 
σαν 


τιμᾶσθαι 
τιμώμε- 
νος 
τιμωμένη 
τιμώμε- 
νον 


ἐτιμώμην 
ἐτιμῶ 
ἐτιμᾶτο 
ἐτιμώμε- 
θον 
ἐτιμᾶ- 
σθον 
ἐτιμά- 
σθην 
ἐτιμώμε- 
θα 
ἐτιμᾶσθε 
ἐτιμῶντο 


= 


113 


Middle and Passive. 


ποιέου ποιοῦ δουλόου δουλοῦ 
ποιεέσθω ποιείσθω | δουλοέσθω δουλούσθω 
ποιέεσθον ποιεῖσθον δουλόεσθον δουλοῦσθον 
ποιεέσθων ποιείσθων δουλοέσθων δουλούσθων 
ποιέεσθε ποιεῖσθε ᾿δουλόεσθε δουλοῦσθε 
ποιεέσθων ποιείσθων δουλοέσθων δουλούσθων 
ποιεέσθω- ποιείσθω-  δουλοέσθω- δουλούσθω- 
σαν σαν σαν σαν 
ποιέεσθαι ποιεῖσθαι | δουλόεσθαι δουλοῦσθαι 
ποιεόμε- ποιούμε- | δουλοόμε- δουλούμε- 
voc voc voc voc 
ποιεομένη ποιουμένη δουλοομένη δουλουμένη 
ποιεόύμε- ποιούμε- δουλοόμε- δουλούμε- 
γον γον vor γον 
ἐποιεόμην ἐποιούμην ἐδουλοόμην ἐδουλούμην 
ἐποιου ἐποιοῦ ἐδουλόου ἐδουλοῦ 
ἐποιέετο ἐποιεῖτο ἐδουλόετο ἐδουλοῦτο 
ἐποιεόμε- ἐποιούμε- ἐδουλοόμε- ἐδουλούμε- 
θον θον θον θον 
ἐποιέεσθον ἐποιεῖ- ἐδουλόε- ἐδουλοῦ- 
σθον σθον σθον 
ἐποιεέσθην ἐποιεί- ἐδουλοέ- ἐδουλού- 
σθην σθην σθην 
ἐποιεόμε- ἐποιούμε- | ἐδουλοόμε- ἐδουλούμε- 
θα θα θα θα 
ἐποιέεσθε ἐποιεῖσθε Ιἐδουλόεσθε ἐδουλοῦσθε 
ἐποιέοντο ἐποιοῦντο ἐδουλόοντο ἐδουλοῦντο 


A Synopsis of these Tenses is given in the following Table. 


Conjugation. 


ἀριθμέω, I count. 
δηλόω, I make clear. 
στεφανόω, I crown. 


ζημιόω, I punish. 
xpvobw, I gild. 


» 


114 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table 1V.— 


A. VOWEL STEMS. 


( Uncontracted 
Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. Optative. 
Active Voice. 
Future. τιμήσω τιμήσοιμι 


ποιήσω ποιήσοιμι 
δουλώσω δουλώσοιμι 

1 Aorist ἐτίμησα τιμήσω τιμήσαιμι 

(Weak). ἐποίησα ποιήσω ποιήσαιμι 
_ | ἐδούλωσα δουλώσω δουλώσαιμι 
1 Pertect τετίμηκα τετιμήκω τετιμήκοιμι 
(Weak). πεποίηκα πεποιήκω πεποιήκοιμι 
δεδούλωκα δεδουλώκω δεδουλώκοιμι 
1 Pluperfect ἐτετιμήκειν 
(Weak). ἐπεποιήκειν 
ἐδεδουλώκειν 
Middle and Passive Voices. 

Future, τιμήσομαι τιμησοίμην 
ποιήσομαι ποιησοίμην 
δουλώσομαι δουλωσοίμην 

Perfect. τετίμημαι τετιμημένος ὦ τετιμημένος εἴην 
πεποίημαι πεποιημένος ὦ πεποιημένος εἴην 
δεδούλωμαι δεδουλωμένος ὦ | δεδουλωμένος εἴην 

Pluperfect. ἐτετιμήμην 
ἐπεποιήμην 
ἐδεδουλώμην 

Future Perfect.  τετιμήσομαι τετιμησοίμην 
πεποιήσομαι πεποιησοίμην 
δεδουλώσομαι δεδουλωσοίμην 

1 Aorist Pas- ἐτιμήθην τιμηθῶ τιμηθείην 

sive (Weak). ἐποιήθην ποιηθῶ ποιηθείην 
ἐδουλώθην δουλωθῶ δουλωθείην 

2 Future Pas- | τιμηθήσομαι τιμηθησοίμην 

sive Weak). | ποιηθήσομαι ποιηθησοίμην 
δουλωθήσομαι δουλωθησοίμην 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. τιμητός 
ποιητός 
δουλωτός 


2. τιμητέος 
ποιητέος 
δουλωτέος 


yt ΟΝ 
Ψ 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 115 


1. UNCONTRACTED. 
Tenses.) 


τίμησον 
ποίησον 
δούλωσον 


τετίμηκε 
πεποίηκε 
δεδούλωκε 


τετίμησο 
πεποίησο 
᾿δεδούλωσο 


τιμήθητι 
ποιήθητι 
δουλώθητι 


Imperative. 


Infinitive. 


Active. Voice. 


τιμήσειν 
ποιήσειν 
δουλώσειν 


τιμῆσαι 
ποιῆσαι 
δουλῶσαι 


τετιμηκέναι 


πεποιηκέναι 
δεδουλωκέναι 


Middle and Passive Voices. 


τιμήσεσθαι 
ποιήσεσθαι 
δουλώσεσθαι 


τετιμῆσθαι 
πεποιῆσθαι 
δεδουλῶσθαι 


τετιμήσεσθαι 
πεποιήσεσθαι 
δεδουλώσεσθαι 
τιμηθῆναι 
ποιηθῆναι 
δουλωθῆναι 
τιμηθήσεσθαι 
ποιηθήσεσθαι 
δουλωθήσεσθαι 


Participle. 


τιμήσων 
ποιήσων 
δουλώσων 


τιμήσας 
ποιήσας 
δουλώσας 


τετιμηκώς 
πεποιηκώς 
δεδουλωκώς 


τιμησόμενος 
ποιησόμενος 
δουλωσόμενος 
τετιμημένος 
πεποιημένος 
δεδουλωμένος 


τετιμησόμενος 
πεποιησόμενος 
δεδουλωσόμενος 


τιμηθείς 
ποιηθείς 
δουλωθείς 


τιμηθησόμενος 
ποιηθησόμενος 
δουλωθησόμενος 


110 


oe ee aia 
- is ὟΝ ᾿ = 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. Table Υ. 


B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
πλέκω, IT plait (Class 1); φεύγω, I flee (Class 2); 


Present. 


Future. | 


1 Aorist Middle Sees 


Perfect. 


Future Pertect. 


2 Aorist Pass, (Strong). 
1 Aorist Pass. (Weak). 

2 Future Pass. (Strong). 
1 Future Pass. (Weak). 


Present. 
πλέκομαι 
τάσσομαι 
πλέξομαι 
τάξομαι 


ἐπλεξάμην 


ἐταξάμην 


Pertect. 


2 
πέπλεγμαι 
τέταγμαι 


πεπλέξομαι 
τετάξομαι 


ἐπλάκην 
ἐτάχθην 


πλακήσομαι 
ταχθήσομαι 


Middle and Passive. 


Imperfect. 


? , 
ἐπλεκόμην 
ἐτασσόμην 


Pluperfect. 


ἐπεπλέγμην 
ἐτετάγμην 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. 
Present. Imperfect. 
Present. πλέκω ἔπλεκον 
φεύγω ἔφευγον 
τάσσω ἔτασσον 
suture, πλέξω 
φεύξομαι 
τάξω 
1 Aorist (Weak). ἔπλεξα πλέξω 
2 Aorist (Strong). ἔφυγον φύγω 
1 Aorist (Weak). ἔταξα τάξω 
Pertect. Plupertect. 
1 Perfect (Weak). πέπλεχα ἐπεπλέχειν πεπλέχω 
2 Perfect (Strong). πέφευγα ἐπεφεύγειν πεφεύγω 
1 Perfect (Weak). τέταχα ἐτετάχειν τετάχω 


“ 
πλέκωμαι 
τάσσωμαι 


πλέξωμαι 
τάξωμαι 
πεπλεγμένος ὦ 


τεταγμένος ὦ 


πλακῶ 


ταχθῶ 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. πλεκτός, φευκτός, τακτός. 


Examples for 


ἄγω, 1 drive (Aor. ἤγαγον, Perf. Act. ya); doyw, I rule, both of Class Ὶ 
(Pres. -σσω, rarely -ξἕω), see ὃ 250. Nouns are formed from the Pure 


ἡ apx-n, the government. 


Table V. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Ὡ. 117 


I. GUTTURAL STEMS. 


τάσσω, 1 arrange (Class 4). Verbal Stems: πλεκ, φυγ, ray. 


πεπλέχοιμι 
πεφεύγοιμι 
τετάχοιμι 


πέπλεχε 


Middle and Passive. 


Optative. | Imperative. Infinitive. 
Active. 

πλέκοιμι πλέκε πλέκειν 
φεύγοιμι φεῦγε φεύγειν 
τάσσοιμι τάσσε τάσσειν 
πλέξοιμι πλέξειν 
φευξοίμην φεύξεσθαι 
τάξοιμι τάξειν 
πλέξαιμι πλέξον πλέξαι 
φύγοιμι φύγε φυγεῖν 
τάξαιμι τάξον τάξαι 


, 
πεπλεχέναι 
πεφευγέναι 
τεταχέναι 


δ , , 
2. πλεκτέος, PEVKTEOC, TAKTEOC. 


Conjugation. 


Participle. 


πλέκων 
φεύγων 
τάσσων 
πλέξων 
φευξόμενος 
τάξων 
πλέξας 
φυγών 


raéac 


πεπλεχώς 
πεφευγώς 
τεταχώς 


πλεκοίμην πλέκου πλέκεσθαι πλεκόμενος 
τασσοίμην τάσσου τάσσεσθαι τασσόμενος | 
πλεξοίμην πλέξεσθαι πλεξόμενος 
ταξοίμην τάἀξεσθαι ταξόμενος 3 
πλεξαίμην πλέξαι πλέξασθαι πλεξάμενος 
ταξαίμην τάξαι τάξασθαι ταξάμενος 
πεπλεγμένος εἴην | πέπλεξο πεπλέχθαι πεπλεγμένος 
τεταγμένος εἴην τέταξο τετάχθαι τεταγμένος 
πεπλεξοίμην πεπλέξεσθαι πεπλεξόμενος 
τεταξοίμην τετάξεσθαι τεταξόμενος 
πλακείην πλάκηθι πλακῆναι πλακείς 

ταχθείην τάχθητι ταχθῆναι ταχθείς 
πλακησοίμην πλακήσεσθαι πλακησόμενος 
ταχθησοίμην ταχθήσεσθαι ταχθησόμενος 


ἐ ὀρύσσω, I dig, Stem ὀρυχ, Class 4, a; for other guttural Stems 
Verbal Stems, as τὸ πλέγ-μα, the wreath (δ 47); ἡ τάξι-ς, arrangement ; 


118 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. ‘Table VI. 


Tenses. 


Present. 


Future. 


1 Aorist (Weak). 


B. CONSONANT STEMS. 


Indicative. 


Active. 


Present. 
πείθω 

, 
κομίζω 
πείσω 
κομιῷ 
ἔπεισα 
ἐκόμισα 


Imperfect. 


» 
ἔπειθον 
ἐκόμιζον 


2 Perfect (Strong). 
1 Perfect (Weak). 


Present. 


Perfect. 
πέποιθα 
κεκόμικα 


Plupertect. 


> ,ὔ 
ἐπεποίθειν 
ἐκεκομίκειν 


Middle and Passive. 


Present. 
ψεύδομαι 
πείθομαι 
κομίζομαι 


Future. 


ψεύσομαι 
πείσομαι 
κομιοῦμαι 


1 Aorist Middle) 


(Weak). 


Perfect. 


1 Aorist Passive 


(Weak). 


1 Future Passive 


(Weak). 


? ’ 
ἐψευσάμην 
ἐπεισάμην 
ἐκομισάμην 


Perfect. 
ἔψευσμαι 
πέπεισμαι 
κεκόμισμαι 
ἐψεύσθην 
ἐπείσθην 
ἐκομίσθην 
ψευσθήσομαι 
πεισθήσομαι 
κομισθήσομαι 


Imperfect. 


ἐψευδόμην 
ἐπειθόμην 
ἐκομιζόμην 


Pluperfect. 


? , 
ἐψεύσμην 
ἐπεπείσμην 
ἐκεκομίσμην 


ψεύδομαι, I lie (Class 1); πείθω, I persuade (Class 2) ; 


Subjunctive. 


πείθω 
κομίζω 


πείσω 
κομίσω 


πεποίθω 
κεκομίκω 


ψεύδωμαι 
πείθωμαι 


κομίζωμαι 


ψεύσωμαι 
πείσωμαι 
κομίσωμαι 


ἐψευσμένος 
πεπεισμένος 
κεκομισμένος ὦ 
ψευσθῶ 

πεισθῶ 
κομισθῶ 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. ψευστός, πειστός, κομιστός. 


Examples for 


σπένδω, libo, Fut. σπείσω, Perf. ἔσπεικα, Perf. Mid. ἔσπεισμαι, Aor. Pass. 
For verbs, of a Dental Stem, with the Present ending in -σσω, see ὃ 250, 
the lie; ἡ πίσ-τι-ς, the faith ; ἡ σπονδ-ή, the libation ; ὁ κλύδ-ων, Gen. 


poe 


ὮΝ 
) 


Table VI. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN Q. 119 


II. DENTAL STEMS. 
κομίζω I carry (Class 1,0). Verbal Stems: ψεὺ δ, 118, coped. 


Optative. 


, 
πείθοιμι 
κομίζοιμι 
πείσοιμι 
κομιοῖμι 
πείσαιμι 
κομίσαιμι 


πεποίθοιμι 
κεκομίκοιμι 


ψευδοίμην 
πειθοίμην 
κομιζοίμην 
ψευσοίμην 
πεισοίμην 
κομιοίμην 
ψευσαίμην 
πεισαίμην 
κομισαίμην 


bl , ” 
ἐψευσμένος εἴην 
πεπεισμένος εἴην 


κεκομισμένος εἴην | κεκόμισο 


ψευσθείην 
πεισθείην 
κομισθείην 


ψευσθησοίμην 
πεισθησοίμην 
κομισθησοίμην 


Conjugation. 


Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
Active. 
πεῖθε πείθειν πείθων 
κόμιζε κομίζειν κομίζων 
πείσειν πείσων 
κομιεῖν κομιῶν 
πεῖσον πεῖσαι πείσας 
κόμισον κομίσαι κομίσας 
πέποιθε πεποιθέναι πεποιθώς: 
κεκόμικε κεκομικέναι κεκομικώς 
Middle and Passive. 
ψεύδου ψεύδεσθαι ψευδόμενος 
πείθου πείθεσθαι πειθόμενος 
κομίζου κομίζεσθαι κομιζόμενος 
ψεύσεσθαι ψευσόμενος 
πείσεσθαι πεισόμενος 
κομιεῖσθαι κομιούμενος 
ψεῦσαι ψεύσασθαι ψευσάμενος 
πεῖσαι . πείσασθαι πεισάμενος 
κόμισαι κομίσασθαι κομισάμενος 
ἔψευσο ἐψεῦσθαι ἐψευσμένος 
πέπεισο πεπεῖσθαι πεπεισμένος 
κεκομίσθαι κεκομισμένος 
ψεύσθητι ψευσθῆναι ψευσθείς 
πείσθητι πεισθῆναι πεισθείς 
κομίσθητι κομισθῆναι κομισθείς 
ψευσθήσεσθαι ψευσθησόμενος 
πεισθήσεσθαι πεισθησόμενος 
κομισθήσεσθαι κομισθησόμενος 


2. ψευστέος, πειστέος, κομιστέος. 


ἐσπείσθην ; κλύζω, I wash against ; ἁρπάζω, I snatch; ἐλπίζω, I hope. 
Obs. Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stem, as: τὸ ψεῦδ-ος, 


« ε 


κλύδων-ος, the wave ; ἡ ἁρπαγτ-ῆ. plunder. 


120 


Tenses. 


A 


PARADIGMS 


OF VERBS. 


Table VII. 


B. CONSONANT STEMS, 
πέμπω, I send (Class 1); λείπω, I leave (Class 2) ; 


Indicative. 


Active. 


Present. 


Imperfect. 


Subjunctive. 


Verbal Adjectives : 


1. πεμπτός, 


λειπτός, KaduTTOC. 


Present πέμπω ἔπεμπον πέμπω 
λείπω ἔλειπον λείπω 
καλύπτω ἐκάλυπτον ᾿καλύπ᾿᾽ 

Future. πέμψω 
λείψω 
καλύψω 

Aorist 1 (Weak). | ἔπεμψα 

2 (Strong). | ἔλιπον 
1 (Weak). | ἐκάλυψα 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 
2 Perfect (Strong).| πέπομφα ἐπεπόμφειν πεπόμφω 
_ | 2 Perfect (Strong).| λέλοιπα ἐλελοίπειν λελοίπω 
| Middle and Passive. 
Present. Imperfect. 

Present. πέμπομαι ἐπεμπόμην πέμπωμαι 
λείπομαι ἐλειπόμην λείπωμαι 
καλύπτομαι ἐκαλυπτόμην καλύπτωμαι 

Future. πέμψομαι 

: λείψομαι 

- καλύψομαι 

ΗΝ 1 (68 Κ). ἐπεμψάμην  πέμψωμαι 

Middle 2 (Str’ng).| ἐλιπόμην λίπωμαι 

1 (Weak).| ἐκαλυψάμην καλύψωμαι 
Perfect. Pluperfect. 
Perfect. πέπεμμαι ἐπεπέμμην πεπεμμένος ὦ 
᾿ λέλειμμαι ἐλελείμμην λελειμμένος ὦ 
κεκάλυμμαι ἐκεκαλύμμην κεκαλυμμένος ὦ | 

Future Periect. λελείψομαι 
κεκαλύψομαι 

1 Aorist Passive ἐπέμφθην πεμφθῶ 

(Weak). ἐλείφθην λειφθῶ 
ἐκαλύφθην καλυφθῶ 

1 Future Passive πεμφθήσομαι 

(Weak). λειφθήσομαι 
καλυφθήσομαι 


Examples for 


τρέπω, IT turn (Class 1); ἀλείφω, 1 anoint (Class 2); τρίβω, I rub 


(ἢ 249). Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal Stems, as ὁ πομπ-ό-ς, 
ing, manner ; τὸ ἄλειφ-αρ, the ointment ; 


ὁ τάφ-ο-ς, the tomb, 


Table VIL. PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 121 


‘Il. LABIAL STEMS. 
καλύπτω, I cover (Class 3). Verbal Stems: wep, λιπ, καλυβ. 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. | Participle. | 


Active. 

; 
πέμποιμι πέμπε πέμπειν πέμπων | 
λείποιμι λεῖπε λείπειν λείπων ' 
καλύπτοιμι κάλυπτε καλύπτειν καλύπτων ' 
πέμψοιμι πέμψειν πέμψων | 
λείψοιμι ἡ λείψειν λείψων 
καλύψοιμι καλύψειν καλύψων | 
πέμψαιμι πέμψον πέμψαι πέμψας 
λίποιμι λίπε λιπεῖν λιπών | 
καλύψαιμι κάλυψον καλύψαι καλύψας 
πεπόμφοιμι πέπομφε πεπομφέναι πεπομφώς 
λελοίποιμι λέλοιπε λελοιπέναι λελοιπώς 

Middle and Passive. 
πεμποίμην πέμπου πέμπεσθαι πεμπόμενος | 
λειποίμην λείπου λείπεσθαι λειπόμενος 
καλυπτοίμην καλύπτου καλύπτεσθαι ᾿καλυπτόμενος 
πεμψοίμην πέμψει. ᾿πεμψόμενος 
λειψοίμην λείψεσθαι λειψόμενος 
καλυψοίμην ᾿καλύψεσθαι.  καλυψύμενος 
πεμψαίμην πέμψαι ᾿πέμψασθι. πεμψάμενος 
λιποίμην λιποῦ λιπέσθαι λιπόμενος 
καλυψαίμην κάλυψαι καλύψασθι. | kadvpapevog 
πεπεμμένος εἴην | πέπεμψο πεπέμφθαι - πεπεμμένος Ι 
λελειμμένος εἴην | λέλειψο λελεῖφθαι λελειμμένος 
κεκαλυμμένος εἴην κεκάλυψο κεκαλύφθαι κεκαλυμμένος 
λελειψοίμην λελείψεσθαι λελειψόμενος 
κεκαλυψοίμην κεκαλύψεσθαι | κεκαλυψόμενος 
πεμφθείην πέμφθητι πεμφθῆναι πεμφθείς | 
λειφθείην λείφθητι λειφθῆναι λειφθείς Ι 
καλυφθείην καλύφθητι καλυφθῆναι καλυφθείς ' 
πεμφθησοίμην πεμφθήσεσθαι πεμφθησόμενος 
λειφθησοίμην λειφθήσεσθαι λειφθησόμενος 
καλυφθησοίμην καλυφθήσεσθαι καλυφθησόμενος 


2. πεμπτέος, λειπτέος, καλυπτέος. 


Conjugation. 
(Class 2), as to its Perf., see ὃ 279; θάπτω, I bury (Class 3), Stem rag 
the escort ; λοιπ-ό-ς, remaining ; ἡ καλύβ-η, the hut ; ὁ τρόπ-ο-ς, the turn- 


5" 


122 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 


Table VIII. 


B. CONSONANT STEMS. 
δέρω, I skin (Class 1) ; ἀγγέλλω, Tannounce (Class 4, 6) ; σπείρω, [sow (Class 


Tenses. Indicative. Subjunctive. 
Active. Present. Imperfect. 

Present. δέρω ἔδερον δέρω 
ἀγγέλλω ἤγγελλον ἀγγέλλω 
σπείρω ἔσπειρον σπείρω 
μιαίνω ἐμίαινον μιαίνω 

Future. δερῶ 
ἀγγελῶ 
σπερῶ 
μιανῶ 

1 Aorist (Weak). | ἔδειρα 
ἤγγειλα > 
ἔσπειρα 
ἐμίανα 

Perfect. Pluperfect. 

1 Perfect (Weak).  ἤγγελκα | ἠγγέλκειν ἠγγέλκω 
ἔσπαρκα ἐσπάρκειν ἐσπάρκω 
μεμίαγκα ἐμεμιάγκειν μεμιάγκω 

Mid. and Passive. Present. Imperfect. 

Present. δέρομαι ἐδερόμην δέρωμαι 

| ἀγγέλλομαι ἠγγελλόμην ἀγγέλλωμαι 
| σπείρομαιε ἐσπειρόμην σπείρωμαι 
᾿μιαίνομαι | ἐμιαινόμην μιαίνωμαι 

Future. δεροῦμαι 
ἀγγελοῦμαι 
σπεροῦμαι 
μιανοῦμαι 

1 Aorist Middle | ἐδειράμην δείρωμαι 

(Weak). ἠγγειλάμην ἀγγείλωμαι 
tome (μὴν σπείρωμαι , 

ἐμιανάμην μιάνωμαι. Ἱ 

Perfect. Pluperfect. . 

Perfect. δέδαρμαι ἐδεδάρμην δεδαρμένος ὦ 
ἤγγελμαι ἠγγέλμην ἠγγελμένος ὦ 
ἔσπαρμαι ἐσπάρμην ἐσπαρμένος ὦ 
μεμίασμαι ᾿ἐμεμιάσμην μεμιασμένος ὦ 

2 Strong.| ἐδάρην ape 
Aorist }1 Weak.  ἠγγέλθην ἀγγελθῶ 
Passive ) 2 Strong. | ἐσπᾶρην σπαρῶ 
1 Weak.  ἐμιάνθην μιανθῶ 
2 Strong. δαρήσομαι 

Future 11 Weak. ἀγγελθήσομαι 

Passive ) 2 Strong.| oxaphoopa 
1 Weak. | μιανθήδομαι 


Verbal Adjectives: 1. dapréc, ἀγγελτός, σπαρτός, pravréc. © 


‘Table ὙΠ. 


IV. LIQUID STEMS (,, μ; », ρ). 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS. 123 


4. d); puaivw, I soil (Class 4, d). Verbal Stems: dep, ἀγγελ, σπερ, pear. 


Optative. Imperative. Infinitive. Participle. 
δέροιμι δέρε δέρειν δέρων 
ἀγγέλλοιμι ἄγγελλε ἀγγέλλειν ἀγγέλλων 
σπείροιμι σπεῖρε σπείρειν σπείρων 
μιαίνοιμι μίαινε μιαίνειν μιαίνων 
δεροῖμι δερεῖν δερῶν 
ἀγγελοῖμι ἀγγελεῖν ἀγγελῶν 
σπεροῖμι σπερεῖν σπερῶν 
μιανοῖμι μιανεῖν μιανῶν 
δείραιμι δεῖρον δεῖραι δείρας 
ἀγγείλαιμι ἄγγειλον ἀγγεῖλαι ἀγγείλας 
σπείραιμι σπεῖρον σπεῖραι σπείρας 
μιάναιμι μίανον μιᾶναι μιάνας 
ἠγγέλκοιμι ἤγγελκε ἠγγελκέναι ἠγγελκώς 
ἐσπάρκοιμι ἔσπαρκε ἐσπαρκέναι ἐσπαρκώς 
μεμιάγκοιμι μεμίαγκε μεμιαγκέναι μεμιαγκώς 
δεροίμην δέρου δέρεσθαι δερόμενος 
ἀγγελλοίμην ἀγγέλλου ἀγγέλλεσθαι ἀγγελλόμενος 
σπειροίμην σπείρου σπείρεσθαι σπειρόμενος 
μιαινοίμην μιαίνου μιαίνεσθαι μιαινόμενος 
δεροίμην δερεῖσθαι δερούμενος 
ἀγγελοίμην ἀγγελεῖσθαι ἀγγελούμενος 
σπεροίμην σπερεῖσθαι σπερούμενος 
μιανοίμην μιανεῖσθαι μιανούμενος 
δειραίμην δεῖραι δείρασθαι δειράμενος 
ἀγγειλαίμην ἄγγειλαι ἀγγείλασθαι. ἀγγειλάμενος 
σπειραίμην σπεῖραι σπείρασθαι * σπειράμενος 
μιαναίμην μίαναι μιάνασθαι μιανάμενος 
δεδαρμένος εἴην δέδαρσο δεδάρθαι δεδαρμένος 
ἠγγελμένος εἴην | ἤγγελσο ἠγγέλθαι ἠγγελμένος 
ἐσπαρμένος εἴην ἔσπαρσο ἐσπάρθαι ἐσπαρμένος 
μεμιασμένος εἴην | μεμίασο μεμιάνθαι μεμιασμένος 
δαρείην δάρηθι δαρῆναι δαρείς 
ἀγγελθείην ἀγγέλθητι ἀγγελθῆναι ἀγγελθείς 
σπαρείην σπάρηθι σπαρῆναι σπαρείς 
μιανθείην μιάνθητι μιανθῆναι μιανθείς 
δαρησοίμην δαρήσεσθαι δαρησόμενος 
ἀγγελθησοίμην ἀγγελθήσεσθαι ἀγγελθησόμενος 
σπαρησοίμην σπαρήσεσθαι σπαρησόμεγος 
μιανθησοίμην μιανθήσεσθαι μιανθησόμῳνος : 


2. δαρτέος, ἀγγελτέος, σπαρτέος, μιαντέος. 


| 


124 


τί-θη-μι, L put. 


Pure Stems θε 
Present Stems τι- θὲ 


Ss. 1 
2 
αἱ 3 
isd). <1 
2 2 
a 3 
ye ee 
2 
3 
S. 1 
2 
S 3 
S eet 
= 2 
Bl pes 
M na 
8 
S. 1 
9 
8 
D. 1 
Q 
2 
Ἔ 3 
Ξ 
ἘΠ ῬΟῚ 
Q 
3 
font <a SUL se) 
S. 2 
J 3 
Θ D. 2 
δ 8 
en 1 P38 
= ae 
“Tnfin. 
Part. 


PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 


Oo 
δι-δὸ 
Present. Active. 

τί-θη-μι δί- δω-μι 
τί-θη-ς δί-δω-ς 
τί- θη-σι(ν) δί-δω-σι(ν) 
τί-θε-τον δί-δο-τον 
τί-θε-τον δί-δο-τον 
τί-θε-μεν δί-δο-μὲν 
τί-θε-τε δί-δο-τε 


τι-θέ-ἀ-σι(ν) 


τι-θῷῶ 
τι-θῇ -ς 
τι-θῇὴ 


τι-θῆ-τον 
τι-θῇῆ-τον 
τι-θῶ-μεν 
τι-θῆ-τε 
τι-ϑῶ-σι(ν) 
τι-θείη-ν 
τι-θείη-ς 
τι-θείη 


τι-θείη-τον ΟΥ̓ 
τιθεῖτον 
τι-θειή-την OY 
τιθείτην 
τι-θείη-μεν ΟΥ̓ 
τιθεῖμεν 
τι-θείη-τε ΟΥ̓ 
τιθεῖτε 
τι-θείη-σαν Or 
τιθεῖεν 


τί-θει 
τι-θέ-τω 
τί-θε-τον 
τι-θέ-των 

’ 
τί-θε-τε 
τι-θέ-ντων OY 
τι-θέ-τωσαν 


τι-θέ-ναι 


δι-δό-ἀ-σι(ν) 
δι-δῶ 
δι-δῷ-ς 
δι-δῷ 


δι-δῶ-τον 
δι-δῶ-τον 
δι-δῶ-μεν 
δι-δῶ-τε 
δι-δῶ-σι(ν) 
δι-δοίη-ν 
δι-δοίη-ς 
δι- δοίη 


δι-δοίη-τον OF 
διδοῖτον 
δι-δοιή-τὴν OY 
διδοίτην 
δι-δοίη-μεν ΟΥ 
διδοῖμεν 
δι-δοίη-τε OF 
διδοῖτε 
δι-δοίη-σαν ΟΥ̓ 
διδοῖεν 


δί- δου 
δι-δό-τω 
δί-δο-τον 
δι-δό-των 
δί-δο-τε 
δι-δό-ντων ΟΥ 
δι-δό-τωσαν 


δι-δό-ναι 


τι-θεί-ς, τι-θεῖ-σα, 
τιθέν G. τιθέντ-ος 


δι-δού-ς, δι-δοῦ-σα, 
διδόν G. δι-δόντ-ος 


δί-δω-μι, 1 give. 


Table IX. 


VERBS IN μι. 
t-orn-pu, I place, 


στα 
ἱ-στα 


ἵ-στη-μι 
ἵ-στη-ς 
Ἱ-στη-σι(ν) 


Ἱ-στᾶ-τον 
ἱ-στᾶ-τον 
Ἱ-στᾶ-μεν 
(-OTA-TE 
ἱ-στᾶ-σι(ν) 
ἱ-στῶ 
ἱ-στῇ-ς 
ἱ-στῇ 


ἱ-στῆ-τον 
ἱ-στῆ-τον 
ἱ-στῶ-μεν 
ἱ-στῆ-τε 
ἱ-στῶ-σι(ν) 
ἱ-σταίη-ν 
ἱ-σταίη-ς 
ἱ-σταίη 


ἱ-σταίη-τον ΟΥ̓ 
ἱσταῖτον 
ἱ-σταιή-την OF 
ἱσταίτην 
ἱ-σταίη-μεν OY 
ἱσταῖμεν 
ἱ-σταίη-τε ΟΥ 
ἱσταῖτε 
i-orain-oay OY 
ἱσταῖεν ' 
t-OTN 

i-OTa-TW 
(-OTa-TOV 
ἱ-στά-των 
ἵ-στα-τε 
ἱ-στά-ντων ΟΥ̓ 
ἱ-στά-τωσαν 


ἱ-στά-ναι 


« Ld « ~ 
ἱ-στά-ς, ἱ-στᾶ-σα, 
ε ΄ 


ε ’ 
ἱστάν Οὐ, ἱ-στάντ-ος 


ΠΝ pa Ys < > ΕΣ ΡΨ ᾿ 
- a δὰ Μ ἊΣ ᾿ 4 ΤῸ ͵ ΤΩΣ “ 
Ων —_ " “- 
oe og a . . Ξ 
ταὶ = FAs +, a --- ᾿ 
5 ‘ Ἢ 


ΤΗΒΤ' CLASS. 


This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
directly to the Stem. a 


~ Present. Middle and Passive. © 


1 τί-θε-μαι δί-δο-μαι | Ἱ-στᾶ-μαι 
΄, ΄ “ y < 
 τί-θε-σαι δί-δο-σαι ἱ-στᾶ-σαι ἘΣ 
, , “ v 
| τί-θε-ται. δί-δο-ται ἱ-στᾶἄ-ται 
| τι-θέ-μεθον δι-δό-μεθον ἱ-στά-μεθον 
| τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον t-ora-o0ov 


τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον t-ora-o0ov 
τι-θέ-μεθα δι-δό-μεθα ἱ-στά-μεθα 
| τί-θε-σθε δί-δο-σθε t-ora-o0e 
| τί-θε-νται δί-δο-νται ἵ-στα-νται 
τι-θῶ-μαι δι-δῶ-μαι ἱ-στῶ-μαι. 
τι-θῇ : δι-δῷ _ | tory 
τι-θῆ-ται A δι-δῶ-ται ἱ-στῆ-ται 
| τι-θώ-μεθον δι-δώ-μεθον ἱ-στώ-μεθον 
| τι-θῆ-σθον ᾿ δι-δῶ-σθον ἱ-στῆ-σθον 
| τιτθῆ-σθον δι-δῶ-σθον ἱ-στῆ-σθον 
| τι-θώ-μεθα δι-δώ-μεθα ἱ-στώ-μεθα 
τι-θῆ-σθε ὁ δι-δῶ-σθε ἱ-στῆ-σθε 
τι-θῶ-νται δι-δῶ-νται | ἱ-στῶ-νται 
τι-θεί- μην δι-δοί- μην ἱ-σταί-μην 
τι-θεῖ-ο : δι-δοῖτ-ο : ἱ-σταῖ-ο 
τι-θεῖ-το δι-δοῖ-το ἱ-σταῖ-το 
Ἰ τι-θεί-μεθον δι-δοί-μεθον ἱ-σταί-μεθον 
τι-θεῖ-σθον δι-δοῖ-σθον ἱ-σταῖ-σθον 
| τι-θεί-σθην δι-δοί-σθην ἱ-σταί-σθην 
| τι-θεί-μεθα δι-δοί- μεθα ἱ-σταί-μεθα 
τι-θεῖ-σθε δι-δοῖ-σθε ἱ-σταῖ-σθε 
τι-θεῖ-ντο δι-δοῖ-ντο ἱ-σταῖ-ντο 
ΠΣ el  ἰικἰἰ τ 
τί-θε-σο δί-δο-σο Ἱ-στᾶ-σο 
τι-θέ-σθω δι-δό-σθω ἱ-στά-σθω 
τί-θε-σθον δί-δο-σθον t-ora-o0ov 
— t-0é-c0wy δι-δό-σθων ἱ-στά-σθων 
 τί-θε-σθε δί-δο-σθε ἵ-στα-σθε 
| τι-θέ-σθων ΟΥ̓ δι-δό-σθων ΟΥ̓ ἱ-στά-σθων OY 
| τι-θέ-σθωσαν δι-δό-σθωσαν ἱ-στά-σθωσαν 
τί-θε-σθαι δί-δο-σθαι t-ora-o0au 
- ———— oer 
᾿τι-θέ-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν δι-δό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-ν ἱ-στά-μενο-ς, ἡ, ὁ-ν | 


᾿ 
, 
' 


126 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. Table ΙΧ .--- 


First or Weak 
Aorist. 


Verbals. 


Perfect. 
Plupertect. 


ἔθηκα 


τέθεικα 


ἐτεθείκειν 


ἔδωκα 


δέδωκα 


ἐδεδώκειν 


| 


VERBS IN μι. 
τί-θη-μι, 1 put. δί-δω-μι, 1 give. | ἵ-στη-μι, 1 place. 
Pure Stems θε do στα 
Present Stems τι- θὲ δι-δὸ ἱ- στη 
S. 1 ἐ-τί-θη-ν é-0i-dw-y Ἱ-στη-ν 
2 | é-ri-On-c ἐ-δί-δω-ς 1-OTN-C 
fs 3 | é-ri-On ἐ-δί-δὼ Ἱ-στη 
so | Ὁ. 1 
Ἑ 2 ἐ-τί-θε-τον ἐ-δί-δο-τοὸν Ἱ-στἄ-τον 
Ε' 3 | ἐ-τι-θέ-την ἐ-δι-δό-την ἱ-στά-την 
a P. 1 | ἐ-τί-θε-μεν é-di-do-pev Ἱ-στἄ-μεν 
2 ἐ-τί-θε-τε ἐ-δί-δο-τε Ἱ-στἄ-τε 
9 ἐ-τί-θε-σαν ἐ-δί-δο-σαν Ἱ-στᾶ-σαν 
Second or Strong Aorist. Active. 
S. 1 | [ἔ-θη-»]} [é-dw-v | ἔ-στη-ν 
2 |[ἔςθη-ς] [ἔ-δω-ς] ἔ-στη-ς 
oJ 3 | [é-0n] [é-dw | ἔ-στη 
a iD eet 
Ὁ 2 | ἔ-θε-τον ἔ-δο-τον ἔ-στη-τον 
= 3 | ἐ-θέ-την ἐ-δό-την ἐ-στή-την 
ΕΞ P. 1 | é-Oe-per ἔ-δο-μεν ἔ-στη-μεν 
2 ἔ-θε-τε ἔ-δο-τε ἔ-στη-τε 
3 | ἔ-θε-σαν ἔ-δο-σαν ἔ-στη-σαν 
Subj. θῶ @ στῶ 
θῇ-ς δῷ-ς στῇ-ς 
etc., as in the 
Opt. | | θείη-ν δοίη-ν | σταίη-ν 
etc., as in the 
S. 2 | 0é-c δό-ς στῆ-θι 
ῷ 3 | θέ-τω 06-Tw στή-τω 
ae . 2 | θέ-τον δό-τον στῆτ-τον 
Ξ 3 | θέ-των δό-των στή-των 
o , , ~ 
a | P. 2 | 0é-re δό-τε στῆ-τε , 
Ξ 9. θέ-ντων or δό-ντων ΟΥ̓ στά-ντων ΟΥ̓ 
θέ-τωσαν δό-τωσαν στή-τωσαν 
Infin. θεῖ-ναι δοῦ-ναι στῆ-ναι 
Part. Cei-c, θεῖ-σα, θέ-ν | δού-ς, δοῦ-σα, στά-ς, στᾶ-σα,. 
G. θέντ-ος δό-ν G. δόντ-ος | στάν ΕΑ: στάντ-ος 
The following Tenses are formed 
Active. 
Future. θήσω δώσω στήσω 


ἔστησα 


ἕστηκα. 
ἑστήκειν OF 
εἱστήκειν 


Continued. PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 127 


FIRST CLASS. 


This First Class consists of Verbs which affix their terminations 
directly to the Stem. 


ἐ-τι-θέ-μην ἐ-δι-δό-μην ἱ-στἄ-μην 

ἐ-τί-θε-σο ἐ-δί- δο-σο ἵ-στα-σο 

ἐ-τί-θε-τὸ ἐ-δί-δο-το {-OTa-TO 

ἐ-τι-θέ-μεθον ἐ-δι-δό-μεθον ἱ-στά-μεθον 

ἐ-τί-θε-σθον ἐ-δί-δο-σθον ἵ-στα-σθον 

ἐ-τι-θέ-σθην ἐ-δι-δό-σθην ἱ-στά-σθην 

ἐ-τι-θέ-μεθα ἐ-δι-δό-μεθα ἱ-στά-μεθα 

ἐ-τί-θε-σθε ἐ-δί-δο-σθε t-oTa-o0e 

ἐ-τί-θε-ντο ἐ-δί-δο-ντο ἵ-στα-ντο 
Second or Strong Aorist. Middle and Passive. 

ἐ-θέ-μην ἐ-δό-μην Wanting. 

ἔ-θου ἔ-δου 

ἔ-θε-το ἔ-δο-το 

ἐ-θέ-μεθον ἐ-δό-μεθον 

ἔ-θε-σθον ἔ-δο-σθον 

ἐ-θέ-σθην ἐ-δό-σθην 

ἐ-θέ-μεθα ἐ-δό-μεθα 

ἔ-θε-σθε ἔ-δο-σθε 

ἔ-θε-ντο ἔ-δο-ντὸ 


θῶ-μαι δῶ-μαι | Wanting. 


Ὥ 
Pres. Subjunctive. 


[ θεί-μην | δοί-μην | Wanting. 


Pres. Optative. 


Wanting. 
θέ-σθω δό-σθω 
θέ-σθον δό-σθον 
θέ-σθων δό-σθων 
θέ-σθε δό-σθε 
θέ-σθων or θέ-σθωσαν δό-σθων ΟΥ δό-σθωσαν 
θέ-σθαι δό-σθαι Wanting. 
θέ-μενο-ς, ἡ, O-V δό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-» Wanting. 


“on the analogy of Verbs in Q. 
Middle and Passive. 


θήσομαι δώσομαι στήσομαι 
PASSIVE. τεθήσομαι δοθήσομαι σταθήσομαι 
Mippie. Wanting Wanting ἐστήσαμην 
PASSIVE. ἐτέθην ἐδόθην ἐστάθην 
τέθειμαι δέδομαι ἕσταμαι 
ἐτεθείμην ἐδεδόμην | ἑστάμην 
θετός δοτός στατός 


θετέος δοτέος στατέος 


ἡ 


Table Χ, 


128 PARADIGMS OF VERBS.—VERBS IN μι. 


VERBS IN ju. SECOND CLASS. 


This Second Class consists of Verbs which form the Present-Sitem by 
adding νυ to the Pure Stem. 


| δείκνυμι, 1 show. Pure Stem dere. Present Stem deck-yv. 


Present Active. 


Middle and Passive. 


Indicative. |S. 1 δείκ-νὕ-μι δείκ-νῦὕ-μαι 
2 | δείκ-νῦ-ς δείκ-νὔ-σαι 
3 | δείκ-νῦ-σι(ν) δείκ-νῦ-ται 
2.1 δεικ-νὔ-μεθον 
2 | δείκ-νῦ-τον δείκ-νυ-σθον 
3 | δείκ-νῦ-τον δείκ-νυ-σθον 
PI. 1 δείκ-νῦ-μεν δεικ-νύ-μεθα 
2 | δείκ-νῦ-τε δείκ-νυ-σθε 
9 δεικ-νύ-ἄσι(ν) δείκ-νυ-νται 
Subjunctive. δεικνύω, yc, ῃ, ete. δεικνύωμαι, y, yTat, etc, 
| Optative. δεικνύοιμι, orc, or, etc. δεικνυοίμην, oto, o1ro, ete. 
Imperative. |S. 2 | δείκ-νῦ δείκ-νῦ-σο 
3 | δεικ-νὕύ-τω δεικ-νύ-σθω 
D. 2 | δείκ-νῦ-τον δείκ-νυ-σθον 
8 | δεικ-νύ-των δεικ-νύ-σθων 
Pl. 2  δείκ-νῦ-τε δείκ-νυ-σθε 
3 | δεικ-νύτντων OY δεικ-νύ-σθων Or 
δεικ-νὕτ-τωσαν | δεικ-νύ-σθωσαν 
i Infinitive. δεικ-νύ-ναι δείκ-νυ-σθαι 
Participle. δεικ-νύς, δεικ-νῦσα, Oex-viy| δεικ-νὕ-μενος, ἡ, ov 
| Stem δεικ-νυ-ντ 
Imperfect S. 1 | ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-ν ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μην 
Indicative. 2 | ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-ς ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-σο 
3 | ἐ-δείκ-νῦ ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-το 
2.1 ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μεθον 
2 ἐ-δείκ-νυ-τον ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σθον 
3 ἐ- δὲ ικ-νὕ-την ἐ-δεικ-νύ-σθην 
Pl. 1 ἐ-δείκ-νῦ-μεν ἐ-δεικ-νύ-μεθα 
2 | ἐ-δείκ-νυ-τε ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σθε 
3 | ἐ-δείκ-νυ-σαν ἐ-δείκ-νυ-ντο 
Future. δείξω δείξομαι 


PASSIVE. δειχθήσομαι 


First or ἔδειξα MIDDLE. ἐδειξάμην 
Weak Aorist. PASSIVE. ἐδείχθην 
Perfect. | eae δέδειχα δέδειγμαι 
Pluperfect. | ἐδεδείχειν ἐδεδείγμην 


§ 232. I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 129 


CHaAp. X.—First PrINcIPAL CONJUGATION, 
or Verbs in w. 
I. THe PRESENT-STEM. 
A. Inflexion of the Present-Stem. 


ἢ 231. The Present-Stem is the form which remains 
after rejecting w in the 1 Sing. Pres. Act. 

On the distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- 
Stem, see ὃ 245, ete. 

The following Table exhibits the way in which the Per- 
sonal Endings are affixed to the Present-Stem by means 
of the ee ommecting vowels. 


§ 232. a Active. mere 
Present 1 Sing. | Ad-w [soly-o] λύ-ο-μαι 
Indicative. 9 “ λύ-ει-ς [5ο]γ-1-5] λύτ-ῃ OF λύ-ει | 

day λύ-ει [soly-i-t] | λύ-ε-ται 
1 Dual ᾿λυ-ό-μεθον 
any λύ-ε-τον | λύ-ε-σθον 
es λύ-ε-τον ᾿λύ-ε-σθον 
1 Plur. λύ-ο-μεν [5ο]γ-1-τὴ 3] λυ-ό-μεθα 
ΕΙΣ λύ-ε-τε [soly-i-tis] | λύ-ε-σθε 
tg λύ-ου-σι(ν) [soly-u-nt] ᾿ λύτο-νται 

' Present 1 Sing. a ee λύ-ω [soly-a-m | λύ-ω-μαι 

Subjunctive. 19. “ λύ-ῃ-ς [501γ-ἃ-5] i-y 
οὐ aire λύ-ῃ [soly-a-t] λύ-η-ται 
1 Dual λυ-ώ-μεθον 
ae λύ-η-τον λύ-η-σθον 
ον ΕΣ λύ-η-τον λύ-η-σθον 
1 Plur. | λύτω-μεν = [Soly-a-mus] | λυ-ώ-μεθα 
at λύ-η-τε [3οἷγ-ἃ-{15] λύ-η-σθε 
ὌΝ ας λύ-ω-σι(») [soly-a-nt] λύ-ω-νται 
Saez 


130 


Present 
Optative. 


Present 


Imperative. 


Present 
Infinitive. 


Present 


Participle. 


Imperfect. 


I. THE PRESENT-STEM. 


1 Sing 
9 (75 
8 (( 
1 Dual 
2) cc 
8 ({ 
1 Plur 
9 6c 


2 Sing 
9 {ς 
2 Dual 
3 {( 
2 Plur. 
9 ({ 
1 Sing. 
9 73 
8 (74 
1 Dual 
9 (74 
8 (ς 
1 Plur 
9 (74 


Active. 


λύ-οι-μι 
λύ-οι-ς 
λύ-οι 


λύ-οι-τον 
λυ-οί-την 
λύ-οι-μεν 
λύ-οι-τε 
λύ-οι-εν 


λῦ-ε [solv-e] 
dv-é-rw ~—_—[Solv-i-to] 
λύ-ε-τον 

λυ-ἐ-των 

λύ-ε-τε _— [soly-i-te] 


λυ-ό-ντων [soly-u-nto] or 
du-é-TWOaY 


λύ-ειν 


Stem )v-o-v7 [501γ-6-}0] 

λύ-ων 

λύ-ουσα 

λῦ-ον 

Gen. λύ-ο-ντ-ος 
[soly-e-nt-is] 


ἔ-λυ-ο-ν 
é-\v-E-C 
ἔ-λυ-ε(ν) 


ἐ-λύ-ε-τον 
ἐ-λυ-ἐ-τὴν 
ἐ-λύ-ο-μεν 
ἐ-λύ-ε-τε 
é-\v-0-V 


§ 232, 


Middle and 
Passive. 


λυ-οί-μην 
λύ-οι-ο 
λύ-οι-το 
λυ-οί-μεθον 
λύ-οι-σθον 
λυ-οί-σθην 
λυ-οί-μεθα 
λύ-οι-σθε 


λύ-οι-ντο 


λύ-ου 
λυ-ἐ-σθω 
λύ-ε-σθον 
λυ-ἐ-σθων 
λύ-ε-σθε 
λυ-ἐ-σθων or 
λυ-ἐ-σθωσαν 


λύ-ε-σθαι 


λυ-ό-μενο-ς 
λυ-ο-μένη 
λυ-ό-μενο-»ν 


ἐ-λυ-ό-μην 
ἐ-λύ-ου 
ἐ-λύ-ε-τὸ 
ἐ-λυ-ό-μεθον 
ἐ-λύ-ε-σθον 
ἐ-λυ-ἐ-σθὴην 
ἐ-λυ-ό-μεθα 
ἐ-λύ-ε-σθε 
ἐ-λύ-ο-ντο 


§ 233. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 131 


ὃ 233. Obs.—1. The E-sound (ε, ἡ, ει) is used as ἃ connecting vowel 
except before nasals, where the O-sound (0, w, ov) is used. 


2. In 1 Sing. Ind. Act, w is the connecting vowel lengthened, the 
ending μι being dropped. In the 2 Sing. eve is for ἐστι. In the 
3 Sing. ec for ere: λύ-ει-ς for λυ-ε-σι, λύ-ει for du-e-7e [COMpare 
solv-i-t]. The ov of the 3 Plur. has arisen out of o by compensa- 
tive lengthening (ὃ 42): λύ-ου-σι, from dv-o-vo1, for the original 
and Doric λύ-ο-ντι [compare solv-u-nt]. In the 8. Sing. Imperf. 
e(v) stands for original e-r—compare solveba-t—as 7 at the end 
could not maintain its ground (§ 67). 

3. In the 2 Sing. Indic. Pres. Mid. y or εἰ arose from ¢(c)ac (δὺ 61, 
38): Avy, from λυε(σ)αι; the ending εἰ is the Old Attic one ex- 
clusively used in οἴει, thou thinkest ; βούλει, thou wishest; y is the 
one later in general use. Compare the Fut. ὄψει (δ 259). 


4, The Subjunctive has always ὦ, ἡ, ἢ, for o (ov), ε, εἰ; the y of the 
2 Sing. Mid. is contracted from ἡ (c) at (compare ὃ 228). 

5. In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Act. the termination after the connecting 
vowel is quite lost. ov in the 2 Sing. Imperat. and Imperf. Mid. 
has arisen from ¢(c) 0, €0 : Avov—dXve(c)o, ἐλύου = ἐλυε(σ)ο (δ 61, 
37); oco in the 2 Sing. Opt. Mid. arose from ot (σ) o. 


§ 233. Dialects—1. The Epic dialect sometimes has the original 
ending pc of the 1 Sing. in the subjunctive: ἐθέλω-μι, velim ; the 2 Sing. 
Subj. and Opt. often has the fuller ending oa (for ¢): ἐθέλη-σθα ΞΞ-Ξ- 
ἐθέλῃς, κλαίοι-σθα -ΞΞ κλαίοις (κλαίω, 1 weep); the 3 Sing. Subj. has the 
old ending στ(ν), from re: ἐθέλη-σι(ν) = ἐθέλῃ. 

2. The long vowels of the subjunctive are often shortened in Homer: 
ἰθύνετε for ἰθύνητε (ἰθύνω, 1 put straight) (compare ὃ 228, D.). 

3. The Epic dialect often has μεναι or μὲν in the Inf. Act. con- 
nected with the Stem by an accented €: ἀμῦν-ἔ-μεναι OY ἀμῦν-ἔ-μεν = 
ἀμύνειν, to defend. 

4. The 2 Sing. Mid. often remains uncontracted in the Ion. dialect : 
λιλαίεαι, thou wishest ; Subj. ἔχηαι (habearis), also shortened, μίσγεαι 
(miscearis) ; Imperat. ἕπεο, follow ; Imperf. ἐδεύεο, thou wast in want of. 
€0 is also contracted to ev (ὃ 37, D.): ἕπευ. 


! §. The 1 Dual and 1 Plur. Mid. in poetry often has σθ for 0: Bov- 
λόμεσθον, -μεσθα, we wish, 
6. aro (ὃ 226, D.) occurs in the Ion. dialect regularly for ντὸ in 
ὃ Plur. Opt.: payoiaro (= μάχοιντο), they may fight. In New-Ion. αται, 
aro, are also sometimes found in other forms where « is the connect- 
ing vowel instead of 0: κηδ-έ-αται = κηδ-ο-νται, they care: éBovd-é-aro 
= ἐβούλοντο. 


152 I, THE PRESENT-STEM. § 234. 


B. The Auginent. 


§ 234. The Augment (Augmentum, increase) is the 
sion of the past in the Indicative of all the historical 
tenses (ὃ 225, 3. B.). It has two forms; that is, it appears 
either— 

a) As a Syllabic Augment, in the syllable ε prefixed, or 

ὁ) As a Temporal Augment, in the lengthening of the 
initial vowel. 

All verbs beginning with a consonant have the Sylla- 
bic Augment: ἔ-λυτο-ν, ἐττυπτ-ό-μην, 7 was struck. ρ is 
doubled after ε: ἔῤῥιπτον, from ῥίπτω, J hurl. 


Obs.—The Syllabic Augment appears in the stronger form of ἡ 
instead of ε in ἤ-μελλ-ο-ν, [was about to, from μέλλω 3; ἠ-βουλ-ό-μην, 
I wished, from βούλομαι ; ἠ-δυνά-μην, I could, from δύναμαι. 


§ 235. The Zemporal Augment is used in all verbs which 
begin with a vowel, whether aspirated or not. The Tem- 
poral Augment changes 


a to ἡ: ἄγω͵ T lead. inp ee ἤγ-ο-ν 

e “ n: ἐλαύνω, 1 drive. ἤλαυν-ο-ν 
ο “ ω: ὀνειδίζω͵ I reproach. i ὠνείδιζ-ο-ν 
i “τ; “Ἱκετεύω, I beseech. “1 ‘TkETEV-0-Y 


ἡ. Homer, quite peculiarly, has in the 3 Dual Imperf. roy, σθον, 
for την, σθην : ἐτεύχετον, the two made; and Attic writers have τὴν 
for the 2 Dual of an historic sense: εἰχέτην, ye two had ; εὑρέτην, ye 
two found. 


§ 234. Dialects—In Homer, and also in other poets, the Augment 
may be entirely omitted: τεῦχε, he made; ἔχεν, he had. δ, p, v, o are 
also sometimes doubled after the Syllabic Augment: ἐλλίσσετο (from 
λίσσομαι, I beseech) ; δ only in the Stem dc: ἔδδεισα ( feared, ὃ 317, 5). 
On the contrary, p is sometimes left single: ἐράπτομεν (ῥάπτω, I sew, 


spin). 
§ 235. Dialects——By the Temporal Augment & becomes ἃ in Doric: 


ἄγον. The Temporal Augment is very often wanting in Herodotus, 
especially in the case of diphthongs. 


§ 238. THE AUGMENT. 133 
ὕ to 0: ὉὉβρίζω, I insult. Imperfect Ὁβριζ-ο-ν 
a“ y: αἰσθάνομαι, I percewe. ἐς ησθαν-ό-μην 
αὖ “ὁ nu: αὐξάνω, I increase. " ηὔξαν-ο-ν 
οἱ “ w: οἰκτείρω, I pity. ~ ᾧκτειρ-ο-ν 


Before vowels, a becomes a, not n: ᾿αίω, 7 hear, ᾽ἄϊον. 
The long vowels ἡ, w, τ, v, and usually the diphthongs 
εἰ, εὐ, ov, remain without Augment. 
εἰκάζω, I conjecture, εἴκαζ-ο-ν (also ῥκαζον) ; 
εὑρίσκω, I find, εὕρισκ-ο-ν (Seldom Aorist ηὗρον) ; 
also av and οἱ immediately before a vowel: αὐαίνω, J dry, 
αὔαινον ; οἰακίζω, J steer, οἰάκιζον ; and other diphthongs 
in isolated instances. 


Obs.— The rough breathing precedes the augmented 
form when the verb in its unaugmented form had tt. 


§ 236. « becomes εἰ (instead of n) in some verbs, viz., in 
ἐάω, 7 leave; ἐθίζω, 1 accustom; ἑλίσσω, L[ roll; kw oF 
ἑλκύω, 7 draw ; ἕπομαι, 1 follow; ἐργάζομαι, [work , ἕρπω 
or ἑρπύζω, [creep , ἑστιάω, 7 entertain hospitably , ἔχω, 1 
have. Compare below the Aorists: εἵμην (§ 313), εἷλον (αἱ- 
péw, 7 take, ὃ 327, 1), εἴσα, L placed (ἢ 269, D.,.and ὃ 275). 


Obs.—These verbs originally began with a consonant, and therefore 
had the Syllabic Augment: FepyaZ-o-war (ὃ 34, D.), ¢-FepyaZ-o-pny ; 
oex-w (ὃ 327, 6), é-cey-o-y. Then the consonant was dropped : 
é-epyal-o-pny, é-ex-o-v ; finally ce was regularly contracted to εἰ 
(δ 36): εἰργαζ-ό-μην, εἶχ-ο-ν. 

ὃ 237. ἑορτάζω͵ I celebrate, has the Augment in the second vowel : 
ἑώρταζον for ἡόρταζον (compare § 37, Ὁ. 3). Verbs which origin- 
ally began with a digamma (§ 34, D.), consequently with a con- 
sonant, have the Syllabic Augment in spite of their initial vowel : 
ἁνδάνω, I please, ἑ-άνδανον ; οὐρέω, I make water; ὠθέω, I push; 
ὠνέομαι, I buy (δ 275). Both Augments, Syllabic and Temporal, 
are combined in ὁράω, I see, ἑώραον (ἑώρων) ; ἀν-οίγ-ω, I open, 
ἀν-ἔῳγ-ο-ν. 


§ 238. Verbs compounded with a preposition have the 
§ 237. Dialects—Homer forms ἐῳνοχόει from οἰνοχοέω, I pour out 


wine ; ἑήνδανον (Herod. ἑάνδανον) and ἥνδανον from ἁνδάνω, I please. 
Compare § 34, D., 1 and 4. 


134 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 239. 


Auginent immediately after the preposition : εἰς-φέρτω, 1 
carry in, sic-é-pep-o-v 3 tpoc-ay-w, L lead to, rpoc-iy-0-v 5 
ἐκ, out of, becomes ἐξ before the Augment: 2-jy-o-v, 7 
ted out. The true forms of év,2n, and σύν, with, altered 
by assimilation (§ 51) in the Present, appear again before 
e: συλ-λέγτ-ω, L collect, συν-ἔ-λεγ-ο-ν 3 ἐμ-[)άλλ-ω, 2 invade, 
év-é-[SadA-o-v. 

The final vowel of a preposition is elided: az-é-dep-o-v, 
“7 carried away, from ἀπο-φέρ-ω ; only περί and πρό never 
lose their final vowel; but πρό is often contracted with ε: 
πρού-[βαινον, from mpo-é-aw-o-v, 1 marched on. 


§ 239. Exceptions.—Some verbs, which are not merely compound- 
ed with prepositions, but derived from already compound nouns 
(Decomposita), have the Augment at the beginning: ἐναντιόομαι 
(from ἐναντίος, against), ἠναντιούμην (from oopny), I was against ; 
poet. ἤναρον, from ἐναίρω, I slay; παῤῥησιάζομαι (from παῤῥησία, 
Sreedom of speech), ἐπαῤῥησιαζόμην, I spoke freely ; but the majority 
nevertheless have it in the middle: ἐκκλησιάζω, 1 assemble, from 
ἐκκλησία, assembly, ἐξεκλησίαζον ; ὑποπτεύω, I suspect, from ὕποπτος, 
suspicious, ὑπώπτευον ; Karnyopéw, I accuse, κατηγόρουν (from soy). 
παρανομέω, I act contrary to law (from παρά-νομος, contrary to law), 
has irregularly παρηνόμουν (cor). 


§ 240. Many prepositions have in some compounds so far lost their 
distinctive meanings that the verbs are treated as simple: καθεύδω, 
I sleep, ἐκάθευδον, yet καθηῦδον also; καθίζω, I sit, ἐκάθιζον. Com- 
pare the verbs wpe (ἀφίημι, § 3138), ἕννυμι (ἀμφιέννυμι, § 819, 5), 
ἡμαι (κάθημαι, § 315, 2). Some verbs also have a double Aug- 
ment: ἀνέχομαι, I endure, ἠνειχόμην ; ἀνορθόω, I raise up, ἠνώρθουν 
(oov); ἐνοχλέω, I encumber, ἠνώχλουν (cov); παροινέω, I act as a 
drunkard, ἐπαρῴνουν. So also διαιτάω, 1 live (from δίαιτα, mode of 
life), ἐδιήτων (aov); διάκονέω, I serve, ἐδιηκόνουν (cor). 

§ 241. duc, bad, ill, in composition is preceded by the Augment 
when the second word begins with a consonant or long yowel: 
δυοτυχέω, 1 am unfortunate, ἐδυςτύχουν (cov); δυοωπέω, I make a 
sour face, ἐδυςώπουν (cov); but short vowels receive the Temporal 
Augment after dic: dvedpeoriw, I displease, δυςηρέστουν (ov). 


Compounds with εὖ generally have no Augment: εὐτύχουν (cor), 
I was fortunate ; but short vowels occasionally receive the Tem- 
poral Augment after ed : εὐηργέτουν (cov), together with εὐεργέτουν, 
from evepyeréw, I do good. 


ε΄. 


§ 248, CONTRACTED VERBS. 135 
§ 242. All other compounds have the Augment at the beginning : 


ἠθύμουν, from ἀθυμέω, I am without courage. 


C. Contracted Verbs 


§ 243. Verbs whose Present-Stem ends in a, ε, or 0, reg- 
ularly contract these vowels in all forms of the Present- 
Stem with the connecting vowel, and hence are called Con- 
tracted Verbs. ‘The laws of contraction given in $§ 36-38 


ὃ 243. Dialects—The Ion. dialect very often does not contract; but 
the three kinds of contracted verbs are treated differently. | 

A. Homer inflects the a-Stems in three ways: 

1. The syllables regularly contracted by the Attic writers remain 
open and unchanged: ἀοιδιά-ει, he sings; ναιετά-ουσι, they dwell; and 
the Fem. Part. ναιετάωσα for ναιετάουσα, with a remarkable change of 
ov tO w. 

2. Contraction takes place: dperd = ἀρετά-ει, he thrives, from ἀρετάω ; 
mpoc-nvia = προς-ηύδα-ε, from προς-αυδάω, I address. Sometimes ae 
becomes ἡ (not a): προς-αυδήτην (8 Dual Imperf.), dojna:—also with 
regular accent—(from ὁρά-εαι) — Att. ὁρᾷ (2 Sing. Pres. Ind. Mid.). 

3. Extension instead of contraction takes place when a vowel of the 
same kind is inserted before the long one which results from con- 
traction: ὁράω, I sce, contracted ὁρῶ, extended ὁρόω. 

a) This inserted vowel is usually short. Hence ὁράω is thus in- 


flected : 

Act. Pr.Ind. ὁρά-ω Att. ὁρῶ Hom. ὁρόω 
ὁρά-εις “ὁρᾷς ἐν τ ράφς 
ὁρά-ει Ὁ ὁρᾷ OMe 
ὁρά-ουσι “ὁρῶσι “ ῥρόωσι 

Subj. ὁρά-ω Ὁ ὁρῶ “ ὁρόω 
ὁρά-ῃς ἐρᾷς “',. Op aac, etc, 
Opt. ὁρά-οιμει “ dpppe “ ὁρόῳμι 
Inf. ὁρά-ειν “Ὁ ὁρᾶν “  épaav 
Part. ὁρά-ων “Ὁ ὁρῶν “ὁρόων 
dpa-ovsa “ ὁρῶδαι “ὁρόωσα 
Gen. ὁρά-οντος “ὁρῶντος “ ὁρόωντος 
Mid. 2. Sing. Ind. ὁρά-ῃ “Ope “ δράᾳ 

3. Plur. ὁρά-ονται “ὁρῶνται “ ὁρόωνται 

Opt. 8. Plur. ὁρά-οιντο “ ὁρῷντο “ ὁρόφῳντο 

Inf. ὁρά-εσθαι “ὁρᾶσθαι “ dpadacbat 

8. Plur. Impf. éwod-ovro “ἑωρῶντο “ ὁρόωντο 


136 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. ἢ 243. 


are observed. Paradigms of the three verbs τιμάω, ποιέω, 
δουλόω, are given on p. 110-113. 


Obs.—As the εἰ in the Infinitive εἰν is not original, aecv, ofr do 
not become ἄν, ory, but ἄν, ovr (ὃ 87, Obs.). 


Dialects. 
b) sometimes long, 6. g., 
ἡβά-ουσα Att. ἡβῶσα Hom. ἡβώωσα 
from ἡβάω, I am youthful ; so also from δράω, I do ; 
δρά-ουσι Att. dodo. Hom. δρώωσι 
and from μνάομαι, [ remember ; 
μνά-εσθαι Att. μνᾶσθαι Hom. pyadacOar. 


After long vowels, the one following is sometimes shortened: 


μνα-όμενος Att. μνώμενος Hom. μνωόμενος 


ἡβά-οντες “ ἡβῶντες “ ἡβώοντες 


The metre chiefly determines which of the vowels should be long 
or short. Such forms, for instance, as ἀρετάᾳ (“~~”), ἡβόωντες (~~~), 
are inadmissible. 

In Herod., the Stems in a often pass over into the conjugation of 
the Stems in ε: dpéw (but ὁρᾷς, ὁρᾷ), ὁρέομεν, ὁρέουσι, ὁρέοντες. Instead 
of eo we also find ew: ὁρέωντες. Homer also has ἤντεον = Att. ἤντων 
(from ἀντά-ω, 1 meet); χρεώμενος = Att. χρώμενος, making use of. 


B. Stems in « fluctuate between the open and contracted forms. 
εο is often monosyllabic by synizesis (δ 39): ἐθρήνεον, I complained ; 
often also in Ionic contracted to ev: Hom. νεῦμαι = Att. véopar, I 
return home. eov rarely becomes ev: γεικεῦσι = νεικοῦσι, they quarrel. 
ee becomes ἡ irregularly in Hom.: ὁμαρτήτην (ὁμαρτέω, I meet with), 
ἀπειλήτην (ἀπειλέω, 1 threaten), δορπήτην (δορπέω, I sup), Inf. pophpevar = 
Att. φορεῖν, to carry. An utterly anomalous Infinitive is φορῆναι. 

The second ε in the 2 Sing. Mid. is sometimes dropped: μυθέαι for 
μυθέεαι (Att. μυθῇ, μυθεῖ, thou sayest); πωλέο = Att. ἐπωλοῦ, thou hadst 
intercourse ; sometimes ee are contracted to εἰ: μυθεῖαι. The first 
way is usual in Herod. Homer also prolongs « to εἰ without con- 
traction: νεικείω = Att. vend; ἐτελείετο = Att. ἐτελεῖτο (τελῶ, T complete). 


C. Stems in o are mostly contracted: γουνοῦμαι, I supplicate. Some 
have an extension like those in a: ἀρόωσι(ν) = Att. ἀροῦσι(ν), they 
plow ; δηϊόφεν = Att. δηϊοῖεν, they would destroy; ὑπνώοντας = Att. ὑπ- 
vouvrac, the sleepers. 

~In Herod. ὁ sometimes changes to ¢, and with o is contracted to 
εὖ : ἐδικαίευν = Att. ἐδικαίουν, deemed right. 


— - 


9 


§ 245. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 137 


§ 244. Obs.—1. Monosyllabic Stems in ε admit only the contraction 
et. <All syllables which, contracted, would produce another 
sound, remain uncontracted. 


Stem wX<« (Pres. πλέω, L sail, Inf. πλεῖν) 


πλέεις πλεῖς, but πλέω 
πλέει πλεῖ, " πλέουσι 
ἔπλεες ἔπλεις, “ ἔπλεον 


δέω, I bind, forms an exception, having τὸ δοῦν (δέον), δοῦμαε, etc., 
to distinguish them from forms of δέω, [am in want of; dei, it is 
necessary ; τὸ δέον, duty. 

2. Some Stems in a have a preference for ἡ, which they admit in 
the place of ἃ: ζά-ω, I live, ζῇς, ζῇ, ζῆτε, ζῆν ; πεινά-ω, 1 am hun- 
gry, πεινῆν ; Ovba-w, 1 thirst, διψῆν ; so also κνά-ω, I scratch ; σμά-ω, 
I stroke ; ψά-ω, I scrape ; and χρά-ομαι, 1 make use of. 

3. ῥιγό-ω, I frecze, has w and ῳ for ov and oc: Inf. ῥιγῶν, Opt. ῥι- 
γῴην. 

4, λούω, I wash, lav-o, has a peculiar contraction; that is, the con- 
necting vowel after ov disappears: ἔςλου for é-ov-e; λοῦ-μαι for 
λού-ο-μαι, etc. In like manner, οἴ-ο-μαι is often contracted to 
oi-pa, 1 think, and the Imperf. ᾧ-ό-μην to @-pnyy. 


D. Distinction of the Present-Stem from the Verbal- 
Stem. τ 


§ 245. We call that part of a verb the Verbal Stem 
from the combination of which with the terminations of 
persons, tenses, moods, infinitives, and participles, consist- 
ently with the laws of euphony, all the forms of the verb 
may be explained: Av, Pres. λύω, Perf. λέλυκα, Fut. λύσω ; 
TLa, Pres. τιμάω, Perf. τετίμηκα; Fut. τιμήσω. 

Obs.—From the Verbal-Stem also nouns are formed by means of 
the nominal suffixes: λύ-σι-ς, loosing; λυ-τήρ, looser ; λύ-τρο-ν, 76- 
demption fee ; τί- μη-σι-ς, valuation ; τιμη-τή-ς, censor. 

When the Verbal-Stem can not be traced farther back, 

it is called a Root : Xv, and a verb formed from it, a /2oo¢- 
Verb: bw. But when the Verbal-Stem is itself a Nom- 


§ 244. Dialects—2. For χρῆται Herod. has χρᾶται. 
4, Hom. 3 Sing. Imperf. Xe (for AoFe, ὃ 35, Obs.) = ode, trove. 


138 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. § 246. 


inal-Stem formed by means of a nominal suffix, it is said 
to be derived s τι μα is at once the Nominal-Stem of τιμή, 
honor, formed by the nominal suffix wa from the root τι, 
and ie verb formed from it is a derivative one: τιμάω. 


Obs.—Lioots are almost all of one syllable; derived Stems are of 
two or more syllables. 


§ 246. The Verbal-Stem is not always like the Present- 
Sten, but the Present-Stem is frequently an extension 
of the Verbal-Stem: Pres. λείπτω, 7 leave, Present-Stem 
λειπ, Verbal-Stem Atm (Aorist ἔλιπον). 

Such additions are called enlargements of the Present ; 
the Verbal-Stem divested of them is uh pure Verbal 
Stem. 

Obs.—Where the Verbal-Stem differs from the Present-Stem, nouns 


are usually formed from the former, not from the latter: Verbal- 
Stem φυγ, Present-Stem gevy, substantive φυγ-ή (fug-a), adj. 


φυγ-ἀ(δ)-ς, fugitive. 

§ 247. The relation of the Present-Stem to the Verbal- 
Stem produces four classes of verbs with some subdi- 
visions. 

1. First Cuass (unenlarged). 

The Present-Stem is like the Verbal-Stem. 

This comprises, first of all, the pure verbs, ὃ. e., verbs 
whose stem ends in a vowel (with the exception of a small 
number in ew, ὃ 248, and many others besides: τιμάτω, 
δουλό-ω, παιδεύ-ω, 7 educate ; λύ-ω, 7 loose, τί-ω, 1 honor ; 
ἄρχ-ω, 7 rule; wy-w, 7 lead , λέγ-ω, L say. 


§ 248. 2. Seconp Crass (lengthened class). 
The Stem vowel ts lengthened in the Present-Stem. 


This comprises several verbs whose Stem ends in a- 


mute, and which in the Present have a diphthong or a ba 
vowel, as: 


§ 248. Dialects—To these belongs the Hom. σεύω, I hurry, from the 
Stem ov. 


§ 249. PRESENT AND VERBAL-STEMS. 139 
geby-w, I flee, Pure Stem gv y (gv y-h, flight, Lat. fuga). 
λείπ-ω, I leave, 4 ee, eg 
πείθ-ω, I persuade, * (70 (πιθ-ανό-ς, persuasive). 
τήκ-ω, I melt, Ὡς ae Peek 
τρίβ-ω, 1 rub, es ΤΡῚΣ 

But, besides these, there are also six verbs in εω, viz. : 
πλέω, I sail, Pure Stem πλυ 
πνέω, I blow, τ EYE 
véw, 11 sail, γι τ γνὺ 
ῥέω, I flow, Seine ce (FU 
θέω, 1 run, ὡς πον 
χέω, [ pour, = Ne a: 


0bs.—The v of these Stems was lengthened to ev, but resolved to 
ef before vowels (compare ὃ 35, D. 2); finally the F was dropped: 
πλυ-πλευω-πλεξω-πλέω. The diphthong appears in the substan- 
tives unresolved: πνεῦ-μα, breath ; ῥεῦ-μα, stream. Compare 
§ 260, 2. 


. 8. 249. 3. THirp CLAss (T-class). 
The Present-Stem affixes τ to the Verbal-Stem. 


This comprises only verbs whose Pure Stems end in 
Labials, as: 


τύπτ-ω,͵ 1 strike, Pure Stem τὺ π᾿ (τύπος, stroke). 
βλάπτ-ω, I injure, “ βλαβ (BrAaBH, jury). 
βάπτ-ω, 1 dip, ss Bad (Bagn, a dip). 


and, besides— | 
τίκτ-ω, 1 bring forth, Ξ rex (τέκος, child). 
The final consonant of the Pure Stem is called here, as 


in the verbs of the following class, the character. On the 
changes of sound, see § 45. 


Other Examples. 


κόπτω, I cut, Stem cor 
κλέπτω, I steal, eA gen 
κρύπτω, I hide, “ κρυφ or κρυβ 


θάπτω, I bury, “rag (ὃ 54, ὦ. 


§ 249. Dialects——The Stem βλαβ in Hom. has a Pres. βλάβεται, like 
class 1. 


δι τιν ων, 


140 I. THE PRESENT-STEM. Se oe. 


§ 250. 4. FourTH CLass (I-class). 

The Present-Stem adds « to the Verbal-Stem {Latin 
Jug-i-0, Pure Stem fug]. The c is here subject to the 
various changes and transpositions discussed in δὲ 55— 
58, VIZ. : 

a) The Gutturals x, y, x form, with co, the group oo 
(New-Att. τ τὴ (δ 57): 


φυλάσσω, I guard, instead of φυλακιω, Pure Stem φυλακ (φυλακή, ὦ 


guard). 
τάσσω, I arrange, δ ταγιω, τ “ray (ταγὺδ ar- 
ranger). 
ταράσσω, I confuse, 4 Tapayw, “ Ὁ ταραχ (ταραχή, 
confusion). 
Other Examples. 
ἑλίσσω(κ), I roll. mpasow(y), I do. ὀρύσσω(χ), 1 dig. 
knpvoow(k), I proclaim. oparrw(y), L slay. 


Obs.—The character of the Presents ἁρμόττω, 1 jit ; racow, I scatter ; 
πλάσσω, I shape; βράσσω, I seethe ; ἐρέσσω, I row ; πτίσσω, I stamp; 
βλίττω, I abstract honey, is a dental; πέσσω, I boil, has Stem wea 
irregularly. 


§ 251. 6) 6, and more rarely y, with c, form ζ (ὃ 58): 
ἕζομαι, 7 sit, instead of ἑδίομαι, Pure Stem ἑ ὃ (£0-0¢, seat, 
Latin sedes); κράζω, 7 cry, instead of κραγιω, Pure Stem 


KkKpay. 
Other Examples. 


φράζω(δ), I say. bZw(6), I smell. σχίζω(δ), 1 split. 


Obs.—Present-Stems in which express a sound have the Verbal- 
Stem in y: στενάζω, 1 sigh; οἰμώζω, I wail; οἰμωγ-ή, ὦ wailing; 
moreover, στάζω, I trickle ; στίζω, I prick, Lat. in-stig-o ; μαστίζωῳ, 


§ 250. Dialects—The Stems of the Presents ἱμάσσω, I whip; Xio- 
σομαι, I beseech ; κορύσσω, I arm; Herod. ἀφάσσω, I touch, end in Den- 
tals (Aur, κορυ θ); Hom. évioow, I blame, has irregularly the Stem 
ἐνιπ. 


§ 251. Dialects—In all dialects, Presents in -ζ ὦ much more fre- 
quently have a Guttural for their character, in Hom. especially in 
ἀλαπάζω, I conquer; δαΐζω, I divide ; μερμηρίζω, I ponder; worepivo, IL 
war, στυφελίζω, I strike, etc. 


Saad 


ψν Ν 


4 
1 = . 
» 


§ 253. PRESENT AND VERBAL STEMS. 141 


I whyp,and some others. κλάζω, 7 call, Stem eX ayy, κλαγγ-ῆ, ὦ 
call; πλάζω, I mislead ; σαλπίζω, I blow a trumpet, have a Pure 
Stem in yy; viZw, I wash, has irregularly the Stem νι β. 


§ 252. ὁ) X with « forms AA (ὃ 56): 


βάλλω, I throw, for Baw, Pure Stem B.ar (βέλ-ος, ὦ shot). 
ἅλλομαι, I leap, “ ἁλιομαι, “ Ὁ ἁλ [sal-i-o]. 
τίλλω, 1 pluck, “τιλι, “ Ὁ ΤΙΝ 


Other Examples. 
θάλχω, I bloom. σφάλλω, I cause to stagger. στέλλω, I send. 
πάλλω, I wield. ἀγγέλλω, I announce. ψάλλω, 1 play on the lyre. 


δ᾽ 253. α΄) v and p throw the « into the preceding syllable 
of the Stem (§ 55): 


τείνω, 1 stretch, for revw, Pure Stem rev (rév-o-c, a stretching, Latin 
tendo). 

φθείρω, I corrupt, “ φθεριω, “ “ φθὲερ (φθορ-ά, corruption). 

gaivw,I show, “ φανιω, “ “ gar (ἀ-φᾶν-ής, invisible). 


Other Examples. 


μαίνομαι, 1 rage. σπείρω, I sow. éyeiow, I awaken. 
αἴρω, I raise. ἀγείρω, I collect. ὑφαίνω, I weave. 


Obs.—If the Stem syllable has c or v for its vowel, this is length- 
ened by the retreating ¢: κρίνω, I sever, gudge, from rpiv-w ; σύρω, 
I drag, from ciip-w. 

A single Stem in ἃ also follows this formation, viz.: ὁφ ελ, Pres. 
ὀφείλω, I owe, for ὀφελιω, to distinguish it from ὀφέλλω, L increase, 
with the same Stem. 

The ὁ unites immediately with the final vowels of the Stems καὺ 
and «dav, which then sacrifice their v (F): κα-ίω, I burn; κλα-ίω, 
I weep. Additional forms in Attic are caw, craw (ὃ 35, Obs.). 


N.B.—The other less usual classes of verbs are given below. 


ὃ 253. Dialects—Homer joins « immediately with Vowel Stems: 
da-iw, 1 burn, Stem da: pa-iopa, I seek, Stem pa; va-iw, I dwell, Stem 
va; and he uses ὀφέλλω in the sense of the Att. ὀφείλω ; but, on the 
other hand, he has εἴλω, 7 press, from the Stem ἐλ for which one 
might expect ἔλλω (Class 4, ὦ. 


τι δ. 
οι, τ Sp 
».δ " δι 


142 II. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM. ὃ 264, 


11. THe STRONG oR SECOND AORIST-STEM. 


§ 254. The Strong or Second Aorist Active and Middle 
is formed from the Strong Aorist-Stem, which is like the 
Pure Verbal-Stem, except the few cases named in § 257. 


Bard-w, 1 throw. 
Bar 


Pres. 
Stem 


λείπ-ω, I leave. 
iw 


rint-w, I strike. 
TUT 


Active. 


Aorist 
Ind. 


ἔ-λίπ-ο-ν, I left. ἔ-τύπ-ο-ν, L struck, | ἔ-βἄλ-ο-ν, I threw. 
€-ALTr-E-C ἔ-τυπ-ε-ς ἔ-βαλ-ε-ς 
etc., like the Imperfects ἔλειπον, ἔτυπτον, ἔβαλλον 


Subj λίπ-ω τύπ-ω βάλ-ω 
ΤΥ λίπ-ῃ-ς τύπ-ῃ-ς βάλ-ῃ-ς 
etc., like the Pres, Subjunctive λείπω, τύπτω, βάλλω 
Opt. See ee βάλεθεια 
λίπ-οι-ς TUT-OL-C βάλ-οι-ς 
etc., like the Pres. Optative λείποιμι, τύπτοιμι, βάλλοιμι 
Imper. Sides etch: ibe 
AuTr-E-TW TUT-E-TW Bad-é-Tw 
etc., like the Pres. Imper. λεῖπε, τύπτε, βάλλε 
Infin. | λιπ-εῖν τυπ-εῖν | βαλ-εῖν 


Part. λιπ-ών, λιπ-οῦσα, | τυπ-ών, τυπ-οῦσα, | Bad-wy, βαλε-οῦσα, 
λιπ-όν, Gen. \ux- | τυπ-όν, Gen. τυπ- | βαλ-όν, Gen, Bar- 


ὄντος 


ὄντος ὄντος 


Middle. 


ἐ-τυπ-ό-μην 


Indic pee ἐβαλ-ό-μην 


ἐ-λίπ-ου ἐ-τύπ-ου ἐ-βάλ-ου 
etc., like the Imperf. ἐλειπόμην, ἐτυπτόμην, ἐβαλλόμην 
βάλ-ω-μαι 


: λίπ-ω-μαι 
Subj. | B 
J hee τύπ-ῃ βάλ-ῃ 


etc., like the Pres. Subj. λείπωμαι, τύπτωμαι, βάλλωμαι 


Opt. | alae βαλ-οί-μην 
λίπ-οι-ο τύπ-οι-ο βάλ-οι-ο 
etc., like the Pres. Opt. λειποίμην. τυπτοίμην, βαλλοίμην 
λιπ-οῦ βαλ-οῦ 
Aa 1a TuT-é-00w βαλ-ἔ-σθω 
etc., like the Pres. Imper. λείπου, τύπτου, βάλλου 


τύπ-ω-μαι 


τυπ-οί- μην 


τυπ-οῦ 
Imper. 


Infin. | λιπ-έ-σθαι  τυπ-έ-σθαι | βαλ-ἔ-σθαι 
Part. 


| λιπ-ό-μενο-ο, ἡ, ο-ν | τυπ-ό-μενο-ς, ἡ, O-V βαλ-ό-μενο-ς, ἡ, ο-»ν 


§ 257. 11. THE STRONG OR SECOND AORIST-STEM, 148 


§ 255.1. The /nflexion of the Strong Aorist-Stem dif- 
fers from that of the Present-Stem (Imperfect and Present 
tenses) only in the accent of the following forms: the In- 
fin. Act. is perispome (λιπεῖν), the Infin. Mid. paroxytone 
(λιπέσθαι), the Part. Act. accents the O-sound (λιπών, λι- 
ποῦσα), the 2 Sing. Imper. Mid. is perispome (λιποῦ). 

2. The Aorist Middle has not, like the Present Middle, 
the meaning also of the Passive: thus ἐβαλόμην means only 
L threw for myself, but not L was thrown. 

On the Augment of the Indicative, §§ 234-242. 


NE a ag 


Verbal- Stan “ene not fon he at of the Lirst 
(unenlarged) Class (ὃ 247). Also it is not usually formed 
from many verbs of other classes, and scarcely occurs at all 


from any but /oot-Verbs (ὃ 245). 


Obs.—On the Aorists of the verbs δύτω and φύ-ω (class 1), see §§ 316, 
16, 17. 


§ 257. In a few verbs the Strong Aorist Stem is distinguished from 
the Pure Verbal Stem; viz., instead of ε of the latter, the Strong 
Aor. sometimes has & by which τρέπ-ω, I turn, though belonging 
to the first class, has a Strong Aor.: ἔ-τρᾶπ-ο-ν (Impf. ἔ-τρεπ-ο- ve) 
ἐ-τραπ-ό-μην. An isolated formation is Pres. τρώγ-ω, I gnaw, Aor. 
é-rpay-o-v. ἄγ-ω, 1 drive, likewise belonging to the first class, by 
doubling the Verbal-Stem forms the Aorist-Stem day-ay, whence 
Ind. : #y-dy-o-v, Subj. ἀγ-άγ-ω, Inf. ἀγ-αγ-εῖν. 


§ 255. Dialects.—1. All the peculiarities enumerated ὃ 233, D., ex- 
tend likewise to the Strong Aorist: 2 Sing. Subj. βάλησθα, 3 Sing. 
βάλησι, etc. The Inf. Aor. Act. ends in Hom. also in éey instead of 
εἴν (βαλέειν). 


2. The Middle Aorist forms of the Stems cra (ὃ 316, 4), Brn (δ 816, 
19), od ra (§ 316, 20), exceptionally have a Passive meaning. 


a 
+7 


144 111. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 258. 


11. Toe FutTrure-Srem. 


§ 258. Frem the Future-Stem are formed the Fut. Act- 
ive and Middle. 


First Future Second Future 
(The o Future). (Contracted Future). 

Pres. | λύω, Stem Av Pres. φαίνω, I show, Stem ¢ av 

Fut. Stem Avo | Fut. Stem gave 

Active. 

Indie. | λύσ-ω, I shall loose. paviw, &, I shall show. 

λύσ-εις, ete. φᾶνέ-εις, εἴς, etc. 

like the Pres. λύω like the Present ποιῶ 
Opt. | λύσ-οι-μι φανε-οίην, οίην 
Infin. | λύσ-ειν pavi-ey, civ 
Part. | Masc. λύσ-ων φανέ-ων, ὧν 

Fem. λύσ-ουσα φανέ-ουσα, ovca 

Neut. λῦσ-ον φανέ-ον, οὖν 

Gen. λύσ-οντος φανέ-οντος, οὔντος 

Middle. 
Indic. | λύσ-ο-μαι, I shall loose for | ¢avé-o-par, οὔμαι, 1 shall ap- 
myself. pear. 

like the Present λύομαι like the Present ποιοῖμαι 
Opt. | λυσ-οί-μην φανε-οί-μην, οίμην 
Infin. | λύσ-ε-σθαι φανέ-ε-σθαι, εἶσθαι 
Part. | λυσ-ό-μενος, n, ον φανε-ο-μενος, obpevoc, ἡ; ον 


§ 257. Dialects—Hom., in the case of several Stems with p, forms 
the Strong Aorist by metathesis (δ 59), and by changing ε into a: 
δέρκ-ο-μαι, I see, ἔ-δρακ-ον ; πέρθ-ω, I destroy, ἔ-πρᾶθ-ο-ν ; in others by 
the syncope of ε (ὃ 61, ¢): ἐ-πτ-ό-μην (πέτ-ομαι, I fly), t-yp-e-ro (Stem 
ἐγερ, Pres. class 4, d, ἐγείρω, 1 awake); Part. ἀγρ-ό-μενοι, assembled ; 
Inf. ἀγερ-ἔσθαι (Pres. class 4, d, ἀγείρω). 

Reduplication occurs in Homer in a great many Aorists: ἐ-πέ-φρᾶδ- 
ο-ν (Stem φρα ὃ, Pres. class 4, ὃ, φράζω, I indicate) ; πέ-πῖθ-ο-ν (Stem 
tO, Pres. class 2, πείθω, I persuade) ; πε-πᾶλ-ών (Pres. class 4, ¢, πάλλω, 
1 brandish); Aor. Mid..3 Sing. : τε-τάρπ-ε-το (τέρπ-ο-μαι, .1 rejoice) ; 


§ 260. Ill. THE FUTURE-STEM. 145 


ἢ 259. 1. The Inflexion of the Future-Stem is the same 
as that of the Present-Stem, 7. ¢., that of the o Future is 
the ordinary Inflexion, that of the contracted future is the 
Inflexion of the contracted Present of « Stems (§§ 231, 
232, and 243). 


§ 260. The o Future forms the Future-Stem by adding 
o to the Verbal-Stem: Av, Avo. All Stems ending in a 
vowel or a mute have the o Future. The o, according to 
ἢ 48, with gutturals makes €, with labials ψ, and admits 
of no dentals before it (ὃ 49): ay-w, L drive, Fut. aé-w ; 
ypag-w, 7 write, Fut. ypal-w; ad-w, L sing, Fut. do-w ; 
oréve-w, libo, Fut. σπείστω for orevd-ow (ὃ 50). About 
θρέψω, Stem 7 p<, θύψω, Stem rv 4, and others, see § 54. 


2. Verbs of the second or extended class (§ 248) retain 
the extended Stem also in the Future: λείπτω, λείψτω ; the 
six verbs in ew mentioned in § 248 show their strengthened 
form in the Fut., though it is not seen in the Present: πλέω, 
πλεύσομαι ; in like manner, κλαίω brings out its Pure Stem 
kA av in κλαύσω, and καίω in καύσω (ὃ 253). About yéw, 
see § 265. 


3. Of verbs of the third or T class, and of those of the 
fourth or I class (ὃ 249, etc.), the Pure Stem must be 
found in order to form the Future: τύπτω (class 4), Pure 
Stem tu7z, Fut. τύψω ; φυλάσσω, Pure Stem φυλακ, Fut. 


Stem Φ ε ὃ (class 2), φείδομαι, Inf. Aor. πε-φιδ-έ-σθαι, also Fut. πε-φιδ-ή- 
copa. Isolated Aorists are: ἐ-κέ-κ(ε)λ-ε-το, he called, from κέλομαι ; πέ- 
gv-o-v, I killed (Stem ev); τέ-τμ-ο-ν (1 hit, Stem rep); τε-ταγ-ών 
(seizing, Stem ray, Lat. tango). ἠν-ίπ-ἅπ-ο-ν (I scolded, Pres, ἐνίπτω), 
along with év-éviz-o-v, and ἠρύκ-ἄκ-ο-»ν (I kept back, Pres. ἐρύκω), have 
the reduplication in the middle of the word. The reduplication in 
this case every where belongs to the Tense-Stem, and, as in the Per- 
fect-Stem (§ 273), is preserved in all the moods, in the Infin., and the 
Participle. The Indic. may add the Augment or omit it before the 
reduplication. (§ 234, Ὁ.) 


§ 259. Dialects.—About the contraction, see ὃ 243, Ὁ. 


G 


146 11. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 261. 


φυλάξω ; φράζω, Pure Stem φρα ὃ, Fut. φράσω. Accord- 
ingly, verbs ending in the Present in -σσω or -ττῳ gener- 
ally make the But in -£w, and those having the Present 
in Cw generally have their Future in -ow. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
ἑλίσσω, [ roll; κηρύσσω, L proclaim; πράσσω, L do ; 
σχίζω, L split; δικάζω, “ judge; ὁπλίζω, 7 arm ; and 
let the Presents be found to the Futures ὀρύξω, σφάξω, 
βιἄάσομαι, Aoyicouat. 

Verbs with a dental character ending in the Present 
in -σσω or -ττω, naturally (ὃ 250, Obs.) make the Future 
in -ow: wAdow (Pres. πλάσσω, 7 shape), ἁρμόσω (Pres. 
ἁρμόττω, L fit); and, on the other hand, those with the 
character y, which have the Present in -Zw (ὃ 251, Ods.), 
make their Future in -Ew : στενάξω (Pres. στενάζω, L sigh); 
στίξω (Pres. στίζω, 7 prick). 

§ 261. Vowel-Stems have their vowels long before o; 
a becomes a if preceded by ε, x, or p (ὃ 41), m all other. 
cases it becomes ἡ. very other short vowel is changed 
into the corresponding long one: id-w, J leave, tao-w ; 
ἰά-ομαι, L heal, ido-opar; dpa-w, 7 do, δράστω ; but τιμάτω, 
τιμήσ-ω 3 βοά-ω, L cry out, βοήστομαι ; ἐγγυάτ-ω, L hand 
OVEr, ἐγγυήσ-ω 3 ποιέ-ω, TOLho-w, δουλόω, SovAWG-w. 

The Stem y pa(ypaw, 7 give an oracle ; χράομαι, L use) 
exceptionally has ἡ in the Future: χρήσω, χρήσομαι ; 
whereas ἀκροάομαι, L lasten, has ἀκροάσομαι. 

Respecting the Future with a short vowel, see § 301. 


§ 262. The contracted Future forms the Future-Stem 


§ 261. Dialects.—The Ion. dialect has ἡ even after ¢, 1,0: πειρήσομαι, 
I shall endeavor, 'The Ep. dialect sometimes doubles the σ when the 
vowel is short: αἰδέσσομαι (αἰδέομαι; I feel shame). The Hom. Futures 
ἀλαπάξω, πολεμίξω, στυφελίξω, and others, with their Presents in Zw, 
are explained in § 251, D. 

§ 262. Dialects. —Stem θὲρ has in Hom. the Fut. θέρσομαι, Pres. 
θέρομαι, I grow warm ; Stem κερ (Pres. class 4, d, κείρω, I a ΘΟΝ 
kipow; Stem ¢ vo, Pres, φύρω, L mia, Fut. φύρσω. 


Te ὁ ἃ 


§ 264. 111. THE FUTURE-STEM. 147 


by adding « to the Verbal-Stem: φᾶν, φᾶνε. This form 
of the Future occurs in Stems ending in A, u,v, p3 and 
the Stem vowel is short: νέμω, 1 distribute, Fut. νεμῶ ; 
ἀμύνω, L defend, anove. Verbs of the seventh class here 
show their Pure Stem (§§ 252, 253): βάλλω, 7 throw, 
βαλῶ; φαίνω, φανῶ ; κτείνω, L hill, crevd; φθείρω, φθερῶ ; 
ἀγγέλλω, ἀγγελῶ. 

According to this rule, let the Future be formed of 
σφάλλω, 7 cause to fall; στέλλω, 7 send; μαίνομαι, Lrave ; 
αἴρω, 1 lift ; and the Present (class 4) of σπερῶ, ποικιλῶ, 


σημανῶ, ἡδυνῶ. 


Fixceptions.—The Stems cer (κέλλω, class 4, c, I knock against) and 
kup (κυρέω, 1 meet) have the o form of the Future: κέλσω, κύρσω. 


Obs.—The contracted Future is properly a peculiar form of the o 
Future, for ¢gavé-w has arisen from gav-é-o-w (ὃ 61,0), in which ε 
is the connecting vowel. 


§ 263. Several Stems in ε (Pres. ew), ad (Pres. αζω), and 
6 (Pres. Zw), throw out the σ in the Future. Those in Ἢ 
and aé then contract the vowels ε and a with the connect- 
ing vowel: τελέ-ω, 7 complete, τελέσ-ω, redéw, τελῶ; 1 Plur. 
τελέομεν,τελοῦ μεν (as in the Present); βιβάζω, L bring, 
BiBac-w, βιβάω, βιβῶ; 1 Plur. βιβάομεν, βιβῶμεν. To 
these also belongs éAdw, ἐλῶ, 2 Sing. ἐλᾷς, 3 Sing. ἐλᾷ, from 
the irregular Present ἐλαύνω, 7 drive ; compare § 321, 2. 

Stems in 16 after dropping the o insert ε, which is con- 
tracted with the connecting vowel: κομίζω, 7 carry, Fut. 
Act. κομΐσ-ω, κομιτέτω, κομιῶ, 1 Plur. κομιέομεν, κομιοῦμεν; ; 
Fut. Mid. κομιοῦμαι. 

This form of the Future is called the Atéze. 


§ 264. Some verbs take an « after the o of the Future, 
which is contracted with the connecting vowel: πνέω, 7 
breathe, Stem πνυ, rvevoovpar; πλέω, L sail, Stem wAv, 


§ 263. Dialects —The Futures in aw in the Hom. dialect are treated 
exactly like the Presents (ὃ 243, D. A.), hence ἐλόω, ἐλάᾳς, ἐλάᾳ. 


i, 2 -. “* 
se 
ea 


148 111. THE FUTURE-STEM. § 265. 


πλευσοῦμαι along with πλεύσομαι ; φεύγω, 7. flee, Stem ovy, 
φευξοῦμαι and φεύξομαι. This kind of Future, which oc- 
curs only in the Middle voice with an Active meaning, is 
called the Dorze. 


§ 265. Few verbs form their Future without any tense 
sien: χέω, 7 pour, Fut. Act. yéw, Mid. χέομαι, and so also 
among the irregular verbs ἔδομαι, 7 shall eat (ὃ 327, 4), 
and πίομαι, 7 shall drink (ὃ 321, 4). 


§ 266. The Future Middle generally has a Middle sense, 
but in many verbs it has a Passive, and in not a few an 
Active meaning; the last is the case especially in verbs 
denoting a bodily activity: ἄδω, Z sing; ἀκούω, L hear ; 
ἀπαντάω, 7 meet; ἀπολαύω, 7 enjoy; βαδίζω, L walk 
(βαδιοῦμαι) ; βοάω, ] call out; γελάω, 72 laugh ; οἰμώζω, 
L bewail , σιγάω and midi Δ ΤΣ silent ; σπουδάζω, L 
am zealous. Irregular verbs (§ 320, etc.) very frequently 
have a Middle Future with Active meaning. 


§ 265. Dialects —The Hom. βείομαι or Béopar, I shall live, akin to 
Gidw, L live, is likewise formed without a tense sign. 


§ 267. 


IV. THE WEAK OR 


FIRST AORIST-STEM. 


149 


LTV. Toe WEAK or First Aorist-STEM. 


§ 267. From the Stem of the Weak or First Aorist are 
formed the Weak (or First) Aorist Active and Middle. 


λύ-ω 


λυ 


Active. 


ἔ-λυσα-ς 


ἔ-λυσε(ν) 


1. σ Form. 
| Stem of Weak Aorist Xtc d& 


Middle. 


é-hvoa, I loosed.| ἐ-ςλυσά-μην, I 
loosed for myself. 


ἐ-λύσω 
? , 
ἐ-λύσα-το 


? 


ἐ-λυσά-με-θον 


φαίν-ω 
Pure Stem φᾶν 


2. Supplementary Form. 


φην ἃ 

Active. | Middle. 
é-onva, I ἐ-φηνά-μην 

showed. 
ἔ-φηνα-ς ἐ-φήνω 
ἔ-φηνε(»») ἐ ἐ-φήνα- TO 
ἐ- -φηνά-με-θον 

ἐ-φήνα-τον ἐ-φήνα- σθον 
ἐ-φηνά-την ἐ-φηνά- -σθην 
ἐ-φήνα-μεν ἐ-φηνά-με-θα 
ἐτφήνα-τε ἐφήνα-σθε 
é-pnva-v -φήνα-ντο 
φήνω φήνω-μαι 
φήνῃς nya 


φήναι-μι φηναί-μην 


ἐ-λύσα-τον ἐ-λύσα-σθον 
ἐ-λυσά-την ἐ-λυσά-σθην 

Nee. poy ἐ-λυσά-μεθα 
ἐ-λύσα-τε ἐ-λύσα-σθε 
ἔ-λυσα-ν ἐ-λύσα-ντο 

Subjunct. λύσω λύσω-μαι 
λύσῃς λύσῃ 

ete., like the Pres. Act. and Mid. 

Optative. λύσαι-μι λυσαί-μην 
λύσαι-ς ΟΥ̓ λύσαι-ο 
λύσειας 
λύσαι OY λύσαι-το 
λύσειε(ν) λυσαί-μεθον 
λύσαι-τον λύσαι-σθον 
λυσαί-την λυσαί-σθην 
λύσαι-μεν λυσαί-μεθα 
λύσαι-τε λύσαι-σθε 
λύσαι-εν ΟΥ λύσαι-ντο 
λύσει-αν 

Imperat. λῦσο-ν λῦσαι 
λυσά-τω λυσά-σθω 
λύσα-τον λύσα-σθον 
λυσά-των λυσά-σθων 
λύσα-τε λύσα-σθε 


λυσά-ντων ΟΥ̓ 
λυσά-τωσαν 


Infinitive. λῦσαι 


....... 


λύσᾶ-ς, doa, αν 
Gen. λύσαντ-ος 


λυσά-σθων ΟΥ 
λυσά-σθωσαν 


λύσα-σθαι 


λυσά-μενο-ς, ἢ; 
ο-ν 


φηνά-σθων ΟΥ̓ 
φηνά-σθωσαν 


φηνά-ντων or 
φηνά-τωσαν 


φῆναι φήνα-σθαι 


φηνά-μενο-ς, 
n, O-v 


φήνᾶ- ς, doa, αν 
φήναντ- ος 


φήναι-ς or φήναι-ο 
φήνειας 

φήναι ΟΥ̓ φήναι-το 
pnvere(v) φηναί-μεθον 
φήναι-τον φήναι-σθον 
φηναί-την φηναί-σθην 
φήναι-μεν φηναί-μεθα 
φήναι-τε φήναι-σθε 
φήναι-εν OF φήναι-ντο 
φήνει-αν 

φῆνο-ν φῆναι 
φηνά-τω φηνά-σθω 
φήνα-τον φήνα-σθον 
φηνά-των φηνά-σθων 
φήνα-τε φήνα-σθε 


150 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. § 268. 


§ 268. The characteristic vowel in the inflexion of the 
Weak Aorist isa, which in the 3 Sing. Ind. Act. becomes 
εν but every where else remains unchanged before the per- 
sonal and modal signs. In the Subj. a is lengthened to 
w and ny, whereby the endings become the same as those 
of the Present. In the Optat. Act., the forms with εἰ in 
the 2 and 3 Sing. and 3 Plur. are more common than those 
with ar: λύσειας, λύσειε(ν), λύσειαν. In the 2 Sing. Im- 
perat. Act. ν is added, by which the a is rendered so ob- 
scure as to become o: Avoo-v; and in 2 Imp. Mid. 2 is 
added, which, with the a, makes a. In the 2 Sing. Ind. 
Mid. o is thrown out, as in the Pres. and Fut., so that 
ἐ-λύσα(σ)ο becomes ἐλύσω, according to ὃ 37. 


Obs. 1.—Three forms of the Weak Aorist are the same, the 3 Sing. 
Opt. Act., the Infin. Active, and the 2 Imperat. Mid.; but in ac- 
cent they differ; for,as the a of the Optat. is regarded as long 
(ὃ 229), the first of these three forms is always paroxytone: 
ica, γράψαι (γράφω, I write), παιδεύσαι (παιδεύω, I educate); the 
Infin. always has the accent on the penultima: λῦσαι, παιδεῦσαι, 
γράψαι; the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid., where possible, has the accent 
on the antepenultima: παίδευσαι, λῦσαι, γράψαι. 


Obs. 2.—The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Weak Aor. Act. is the same in 
form as the Neut. Partic. Fut. λῦσον, but in Verbal-Stems of more 
than one syllable it differs from it by the accent: παίδευσον, but 
the Neut. Part. Fut. is παιδεῦσον (δ 229). 


§ 269. The o form of the Aorist differs from the Stem 


§ 268. Dialects.—In the Ion. dialect, the 2 Sing. Indic, Mid. fre- 
quently leaves the vowels uncontracted : ἐλύσαο. 

Some Aorists in Hom. take the vowels o and ε instead of a: ior, 
1 came, ἵξες ; ἐβήσετο (Baivw, [ walk) ; δύσετο (he set or went down, δύω) ; 
so also the Imperatives ὄρσεο, arise; ἄξετε, bring; οἷσε, bring; λέξεο, lie 
down ; πελάσσετον = πελάσατον, from πελάζω,͵ 7 approach. 

§ 269. Dialects.—dgicow, 1 draw water, has in Hom. the Fut. ἀφύξω, 
but the Aor. ἄφυσσα. Irregular Hom. forms without o- are: éyeva for 
ἔχευσα, from Pres. yéw, J pour; tena, 1 Plur. Subj. κήομεν or κείομεν, 
Imperat. κῆον or κεῖον, Infin. κῆαι or κεῖαι, from Pres. καίω, J burn ; Stem 
cav (Att. ἔκαυσα) ; ἔσσευα, Pres. σεύω, 1 drive away; the Infinitives 
ἀλεύασθαι or ἀλέασθαι, to avoid ; δατέασθαι, from δατέομαι, 1 distribute, 


§ 270. IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. 151 


of the Future only by the addition of the a: λῦσ, Avoa; 
γραψ, γραψα ; φυλαξ, φυλαξα. Respecting the change of 
vowels and consonants before o, compare $$ 260, 261. 
The irregular yéw (δ 265) has the Aorist ἔχεα for ἔχευσα. 
Compare the irregularity in εἶπα, 7 spoke ; ἤνεγκα, 7 bore, 
§ 327,12 and 13. 


§ 270. The Stems in X, p, v, p, forming their Future 
without oc, reject this consonant also in the Weak Aorist, 
which gives rise to the supplementary form, for the vowel 
of the Stem is lengthened by compensation for the loss of 
the o. 


a after « and p becomes ἃ: Pres. περαίνω (class 4, d), I penetrate, Stem 
περαν, Fut. περᾶνῶ, Aor, é-zépava (ὃ 41); 


otherwise. n: Pres. gaivw (class 4, d), Stem dav, Fut. 
pave, Aor. &-nva. 
ε becomes ει : Pres. ἀγγέλλω (class 4, ¢), [ announce, Stem 
ἀγγελ, Fut. ἀγγελῶ, Aor. ἤγγειλα. 
τ “Pres. νέμω (class 1),.1 distribute, Fut. νεμῶ, 


Aor, ἔ-νειμα. 
: Pres. κρίνω (class 4, εἰ), 1 judge, Stem κριν, 
Fut. κρινῶ, Aor. ἔ-κρινα. 
ὕ ° o: Pres. ἀμύνω (class 4, d), I defend, Stem 
ἀμυν, Fut. apive, Aor. ἤμυνα. 


ος 
δὶ 


Obs.—The Stems ἀρ (αἴρω, I lift) and ad (ἄλλομαι, I leap) have in 
the Indic. » because of the Augment: ἦρα, ἡλάμην, but in the 
other forms a: ἄρας, ἁλάμενος. ἃ instead of ἡ occurs in some 


eica, I placed, is a defective poet. Aorist; the Hom. Infin. is ἕσσαι, 
Part. εἴσας and ἕσσας (ἀνέσας), 3 Sing. Mid. ἑέσσατο. On the doubling 
of the a, see ὃ 261, D:: λόεσσα (A0F-€-ooa) = ἔλουσα (λούω, 1 wash), with 
e inserted, (Compare § 35, Obs.) 

§ 270. Dialects-—1. Homer makes the Aorist of several Stems in 
A, μιν, p With o: ἔλσα, from εἴλω, I press ; the defective ἀπόερσα, I 
tore away. 

_ 2. In the 220]. dialect, σ is assimilated to preceding X, μι ν, p; an 
example of it in Hom. is ὥφελλα for ὦφελ-σα = Att. ὥφειλα, Pres. ὀφέλλω, 
1 inerease, 

3. The Augment of the Hom. Aor. ἤειρα, Pres. εἴρω, I join, is quite 

irregular. Compare § 275, D. 2. 


152 IV. THE WEAK OR FIRST AORIST-STEM. ὃ 271. 


few verbs: κερδαίνω, I gain; dpyaivw, I cause anger; σημαίνω, I 
indicate — ionpava along with ἐσήμηνα. On the other hand, ἡ 
instead of ἃ, in spite of the p, occurs in rerpaivw, L bore, ἐτέ- 
'τρηγα. 


§ 271. The Weak Aorist is the usual form in all verbs 
which, according to § 256, can not form the Strong Aorist, 
that is, in all derivative verbs and in verbs of the first 
class; but radical verbs of other classes, especially those 
with Stems in A, μ, v, p, also have the Weak Aorist. 

The Weak Aorist Middle, like the Strong one, has only 
a Middle sense, and is never Passive (§ 477, etc.). 


V. THe PERFECT-STEM. 


§ 272. From the Perfect-Stem are formed the Perfect 
and Pluperfect Active and Middle, and the third Future 
(Futurum exactum), which occurs only in the Middle. 


§ 273. The essential characteristic of the Perfect-Stem 
is the reduplication (compare πέ-πηγτα with Lat. pe-prg-2), 
which generally takes the first place; but in verbs com- 
pounded with prepositions is put, like the Augment, after 
the preposition (§ 238): dé-Au-Ka, but éx-Aé-Au-Ka. 

The reduplication belongs to the Perfect-Stem, and is 
therefore, unlike the Augment, preserved in all the moods, 
infinitives, and participles (compare 258, D..). 

In verbs beginning with a consonant, it consists in the 
initial consonant with ¢ being placed before the Stem: 
Stem λυ, Perfect-Stem AerAv, 1 Sing. Perf. Ind. Act. 
λέ-λυ-κα. 


§ 273. Dialects—-The reduplication can not, like the Augment, be 
omitted in the Epic dialect; δέγ-μαι forms an exception (8 Plur. 
déx-ara), though we also find δέ-δεγ-μαι, 1 expect or receive, Part. 
de-dey-pévoc, from Pres. δέχ-ο-μαι (compare ὃ 316, 34). Some verbs 
beginning with a vowel do not lengthen it in the Perfect in the New- 
Tonic dialect. 


Present λύ-ω 
Stem λυ 


V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 153 
I. Active. 
paiv-w 
Pure Stem φᾶν 
Perfect Stem λελυ πεφην 


Perfect: 1. Weak form 


Indic. 


λέ-λῦ-κ-α, 1 have loosed. 
Né-AU-K-a-C 
λέ-λυ-κ-ε-() 


λε-λύ-κ-α-τον 


λε-λύ-κ-α-τον 
λε-λύ-κ-α-μεὲν 
λε-λύ-κ-α-τε 


λε-λύ-κ-ἂ-σι(ν) 


2. Strong form 


πέ-φην-α, 1 have appeared. 
πέ-φην-α-ς 

πέ-φην-ε(ν) 

πε-φήν-α-τον 

πε-φήν-α-τον 

πε-φήν-α-μεν 

πε-φήν-α-τε 

πε-φήν-ἄ-σι(ν) 


ent, § 232. 


πε-φήν-ω 
πε-φήν-ῃ-ς 


πε-φήντοι-μι OY πεφηνοίην 


sent, § 232. 


Subj. λε-λύ-κτ-ω 
λε-λύ-κ-ῃ-ς 
etc., like the Subj. Pres 
Optat. | λε-λύ-κ-οι-μι OF λελυκοίην 
etc., like the Optat. Pre 
Imperat.| λέ-λυ-κ-ε | 
etc., like the Imperat. Present, § 232. 
Infin. λε-λυ-κ-ἕέναι 
Partic. [|Μ. λε-λυ-κ-ώς 
Ἐ΄,. λε-λυ-κ-υῖα 
Ν, λε-λυ-κ-ός 
Gen. λε-λυ-κ-ότ-ος 
(Inflexion, ὃ 147, 2.) 
Pluperfect. 
Indic. ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-ν, 1. had loosed, 


πέ-φην-ε 


ἙἉ 
πε-φήντ-εναι 


TE-QNV-WC 
πε-φην-υῖα 
πε-φην-ὁς 
πε-φην-ότ-ος 


ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-Ο 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-τον 
ἐ-λε-λυ-κ-εί-τὴν 
ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-μὲν 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ει-τε 

ἐ-λε-λύ-κ-ε-σαν OY ἐλελύκεισαν 


ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-ν, I had appeared. 


, 
ἐ-πε-φήν-ει- Ὁ 
᾽ , 
ἐ-πε-ῴην-ξι 
? , 
&-7E-GHV-EL-7 OY 
ἐ-πε-φην-εί-τὴν 
ἐ-πε-φήν-ει-μεν 
: la 
€-TE-DYV-EL-TE 
ἐἰ-πε-φήν-ε-σαν OY irediveccay 


G 2 


154 Vv. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 274. 


II. Middle and Passive. 


Perfect. 


Indic. λέ-λῦ-μαι, 1 have loosed | λε-λύ-μεθον λε-λύ-μεθα 
Sor myself, or have 
been loosed. 
λέ-λυ-σαι λέ-λυ-σθον λέ-λυ-σθε 
λέ-λυ-ται λέ-λυ-σθον λέ-λυ-νται 


Subj. | λε-λυ-μένος, ὦ, He, ἡ, etc., § 315. 


Optat. | λε-λυ-μένος, εἴην, εἴης, εἴη, etc., ὃ 315. 


1 mpert. λέ-λυ-σο λέ-λυ-σθον 
λε-λύ-σθω λε-λύ-σθων 


λέ-λυ-σθε 
λε-λύ-σθων OF 
λε-λύ-σθωσαν 


Infin. | λε-λύ-σθαι 


Partic. | λε-λυ-μένο-ς, ἡ, O-V 


Pluperfect. 


Indic. é-e-b-pnyv, 1 had 
loosed for myself, 
or had been loosed. 

ἐ-λέ-λυ-σο 
ἐ-λέ-λυ-το 


ἐ-λε-λύ-μεθον ἐ-λε-λύ-μεθα 


ἐ-λέ-λυ-σθε 
᾽ 


ἐ-λέ-λυ-ντο 


ἐ-λέ-λυ-σθον 
ἐ-λε-λύ-σθην 


Future Perfect. 


Indic. λε-λύ-σ-ο-μαι, 1 shall have been loosed. 
λε-λύ-σ-ῃ, etc., like the usual Fut. Mid. (ὃ 258). 


Opt. λε-λυ-σ-οί- μην | Inf. λε-λύ-σ-ε-σθαι | Part. λε-λυ-σ-ό-μενο-ς 


§ 274. The following points, however, are to be ob- 
served : 


1. An aspirate, according to ὃ 53, a, is represented by the 


§ 274. Dialects——The full reduplication, in spite of the initial p, 
occurs in the Hom. ῥε-ρυπω-μένο-ς, soiled ; on the other hand, the Per- 
fects ἔμ-μορ-α (Pres. μείρομαι, class 4, d, I obtain) and ἔσ-σὕ-μαι (Pres. 
σεύω, Class 2, J hasten), instead of μέμορα, σέσυμαι, are treated like Stems 
with p. 


270. V. THE PERFECT-STEM. 155 


corresponding tenuis: Stem ywpe, χωρῶ, 7 retreat, κε- 
χώρητκα ; Stem θυ, θύω, 7 sacrifice, τέ-θυ-κα; Stem φαν, 
πέ-φην-α. 

2. When a verb begins with two consonants, only the 
first appears in the reduplication, and even this only when 
it is a mute followed by A, μι v, or p: Stem y pad, γράφω, 
I write, yé-ypap-a; Stem rAay, πλήσσω, 7 strike, πέ- 
mwAny-a; Stem rvv, πνέω, L breathe, πέ-πνευ-κα. 

3. In every other case a Stem beginning with two con- 
sonants takes only ε for its reduplication: Stem κτεν, 
κτείνω, L kill, t-xrov-a; Stem ζ η τ ε, ζητῶ, 7 seek, ἐ-ζήτητκα. 

4. Stems beginning with p likewise have only «, after 
which the pis doubled: Stem pr ¢, ῥίπτω, L throw, tp-pip-a 
(compare δὲ 62, 234). 


ExceptTions.—Verbs beginning with yy, yA, and sometimes those 
beginning with AX, have a simple « for their reduplication, Stem 
γνω, ἔ-γνω-κα, 1 have come to know; Stem βλαστε (βλαστῶ, 1 
germinate), ἐ-βλάστη-κα. The Stems cra (κτῶμαι, [ acquire) and 
prva,on the other hand, have κέ-κτη-μαι and μέ-μνη-μαι, [ remem- 
ber, me-min-i, Compare πέ-πτω-κα, 1 have fallen, and πέ-πτα-μαι, 
Lam spread out, §§ 319, 3, 3827, 15. 

Instead of the reduplication εἰ appears in εἴ-ληφ-α, 1 have taken (δ 
322, 25); et-Any-a, 1 have obtained (δ 822, 27); ci-Aoya (from λέγω, 1 
gather) ; δι-εἰ-λεγ-μαι (from διαλέγομαι, I converse) ; εἴ-ρη-κα, I have 
said (δ 327,13); and in the aspirated ¢i-pap-rat, it ts fated, Stem 
fle. 


§ 275. Initial vowels are lengthened as in the case of the . 


§ 275. Dialects —1. The Attic reduplication is more frequent in Ho- 
mer, as: ἀρ-ήρο-ται, from ἀρόω, I plough ; ἀλ-άλη-μαι, from ἀλά-ο-μαι, I 
wander ; ἄρ-ηρ-α, I am joined, Stem ἀρ; 60-wd-a, 1 smell, ὄζω, compare 
od-or ; ὄπ-ωπ-α, I have seen, from the Stem 67; and with a ν inserted : 
ἐμν-ήμυ-κα, from the Pres. ἠμύ-ω, I droop the head. Terod. has ἀρ-αίρη- 
κα, from αἱρέω, 1 take. 

2. Instead of εἴ-ωθα, Hom. also has ἔ é-w0a, Which is the only form 
used by Herod. From the Stem {rz (originally Fer) t-orr-a 1 
hope; from Stem ipy (Fepy), ἔ-οργ-α, I have done. From the Stem 
ép (Lat. sero), Pres. εἴρω, 3 Sing. Pluperf. Mid. ἔερτο, Part. Perf. Mid. 


156 Vv. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 276. 


Temporal Augment (ὃ 235): Stem 6p 00, 6980, 7 raise 
up, ὥρθω-κα. The verbs mentioned in ὃ 236 have εἰ here 
also: εἵλιγμαι, Pres. ἑλίσσω, 7 roll. 


1. Some Stems beginning with a, ε, or o exceptionally take what is 
called the Attic reduplication instead of the mere lengthening of 
the vowel. This reduplication consists in the initial vowel with 
its following consonant being repeated, and the vowel of the sec- 
ond syllable being lengthened: Stem ar i¢@ (ἀλείφω, Class 2, 1 
anoint), ἀλ-ήλιφ-α ; Stem ἀ κο, ἀκούω, I hear, ἀκ-ήκοτ-α (for ἀκήκοξα, 
§ 35, Obs.), but Mid. ἤκουσμαι; Stem ὀρυχ (ὀρύσσω, class 4, I dig) 
ép-wpdx-a; Stem ayep (ἀγείρω, class 4, ὦ, I collect), ἀγ-ήγερ-κα; 
Stem ra (Pres. ἐλαύνω, I drive, ὃ 321, 2), ἐλ-ηλᾶ-κα, Mid. ἐλ-ήλα- 
μαι; Stem ἐλεγχ, Pres. 2ré; YX, I refute (class 1), Perf. Mid. ἐλ-ήλεγ- 
μαι (compare ὃ 286, Obs.) ; ἐγρ-ήγορ-α, I am awake, from the Stem 
é yep, Pres. ἐγείρω, I awaken (class 4 d),i is irregular. 

2. The Stems ἅλω (ἁλίσκομαι, ὃ 324, 17,1 am made prisoner), ay 
(ἄγνυμι, ὃ 319, 13, I break), εἰκ (not used in the Pres., ὃ 317, 7), 
and ὠνε (ὠνέομαι, I buy) are likewise irregular; but originally 
they had an initial consonant (ὃ 34, D.): ἑ-άλω-κα, ¢-Gy-a, ἔ-οικ-α, 
ἐτώνη-μαι; the Stem ἀνοιγ (ἀνοίγω, 1 open) has av-iwy-a. To 
these may be added ¢i-w6-a, I am accustomed, from the Stem 28, 
originally Fe 9 (compare δὲ 236, 237). 


1. The Perfect Active. 

§ 276. The terminations of the principal tenses are ap- 
pended to the Perfect-Stem in the Indicative by means of 
the connecting vowel a. ‘The first person has no personal 
ending at all; in the third, a is changed into «. The Sub- 
junctive, Optative, and the Imperative (which rarely oc- 
curs) have the vowels of the Present; the Infinitive ends 
in -ἔναι (always paroxytone), and the Participle in -de, 
-via, -ός, Gen. -ότος (Stem o7, ὃ 188). 


ἱερμένος (compare ὃ 270, D., 3). The following two are defective 
Perfects in Hom.: ἀν-ήνοθ-ε(ν), it gushes forth ; iv-yvob-e(v), it 13 upon. 
Both also occur as Pluperfects. 

§ 276. Dialects—In the Hom. dialect, the Part. Perf. Act. sometimes 


has w instead of 0: τεθνηῶτος = Att. doncks ος (from θνήσκω, I die); 
κεκληγῶτες for κεκληγότες, calling, from Pres. κλάζω. ; 


§ 278. THE PERFECT ACTIVE. 157 


Obs.—The Subjunctive and Optative are not unfrequently formed 
periphrastically by the Participle with the corresponding forms 
of εἰμί, 1 am. 

§ 277. The Perfect Active is formed in two different 


Ways: 
1. THe StronG PERFEcT (SECOND PERFECT) 


is formed, like the Strong Aorist, directly from the Stem : 
Stem πραγ, Pres. (Class 4, a) πράσσω, “ do, Perf. πέ- 
moay-a. The Strong Perfect, like the Strong Aorist, oc- 
curs almost exclusively in the case of radical verbs (§ 245), 
and is generally the older and rarer form. 


§ 278. The following changes of vowels are to be ob- 
served in its formation: 


“ 


a after p becomes a@: Stem cp dy, Pres. κράζω, I ) 
scream, Perf. κἐ-κρᾶγ-α. 
a otherwise becomes 7: Stem 7d ἄγ, Pres. πλήσσω,͵ 
1 strike, Perf. πέ-πληγ-α. 
Stem φ ἄν, Pres. gaivw, I 


show, Perf. πέ-φην-α. | Compare 
ε becomes o: Stem orped, Pres. στρέφω, | § 40 to § 43. 
I turn, Perf. ἔ-στροφ-α. 
ι 7 oc: Stem’ Ai, Pres. λείπω, I 
leave, Perf. λέ-λοιπ-α. 
v pd ev: Stem guy, Pres. φεύγω, I 


flee, Perf. πέ-φευγ-α. 


The change of a into w is quite isolated: Stem pay, 
Perf. ἔῤ-ῥωγα, 1 am torn, Pres. ῥήγνυ-μι (δ 319, 24), and 


§ 277-280. Dialects —The Hom. dialect is partial to the Strong Per- 
fect ; the aspiration does not occur in it: Stem «oz (κόπτω), κεκοπώς. 
The Part. ze-gvé-6r-ec, from Stem guy (φεύγω), is quite an isolated 
Hom. form. Hom. forms the Weak Perfect only from Vowel-Stems, 
and even here he has sometimes strong secondary forms: Stem ¢ »v, 
3 Plur. Perf. Act. πεφύᾶσι = Att. πεφύκᾶσι, from φύω, 1 beget ; Stem κοτε 
(κοτέω, [ am angry), Part. Perf. κεκοτηώς, ὃ 317, D. In the Fem. Part. 
Perf. shortenings of vowels often occur: Stem ἀρ, Masc. Part. Perf. 
ἀρ-ηρ-ώς, joined, Fem. ap-ap-via; Stem θαλ (θάλλω, I bloom), Mase. 
Part. Perf. τε-θηλ-ώς, Fem. re-0ad-via. The Perf. τέ-τρηχ-α, am restless, 
Pres. rapdcow, I disturb, Stem τ α7ρ ax, is irregular. 


a 5. ὦ 
——* = a3. 
é: 2 es: 


158 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 279. 


so also that of ε into w: Stem 20, Perf. εἴτωθ-α, J am ac- 
customed (§ 275). With the Attic reduplication, and in 
some other cases also, there is no lengthening of the vowel: 
Stem dpvy, dp-wpvy-a, Pres. ὀρύσσω, 7 dig; yé-ypao-a, 
from γράφω, 7 write. 

§ 279. Some Stems ending in the consonants x, y, 7, β, 
change these into the corresponding aspirates, generally 
without any lengthening of the vowels: 


Stem cypux, Pres. κηρύσσω, I proclain, Perf. κε-κήρυχ-α. 


rey ay, “ayo, I lead, “axa (ayhox-a). 
eek O77, ““ κόπτω͵ IT hew, ‘* κέ-κοφ-α. 
« BrAaB, “ βχάπτω, I hurt, Ὁ βέ-βλᾶφ-α. 


In spite of the aspiration, the vowels are changed in 
ké-kAog-a, Stem κλεπ, Pres. κλέπτω, 7 steal; πέ-πομφ-α, 
Stem πεμπ, Pres. πέμπω, 7 send; ré-rpop-a, Stem τρεπ, 
τρέπω, J turn, which is in form the same as the Perf. of 
the Stem rpc¢@ (Pres. τρέφω, 7 nourish); εἴτλοχτα (com- 
pare ὃ 274), Stem λεγ, Pres. λέγω, 7 gather. 

Obs. 1.—Few verbs have both forms with and without the aspirate: 
the Stem πραγ (Pres. πράσσω, I do) has both πέ-πρᾶγ-α (intran- 
sitive, I have fared) and πέ-πρᾶχ-α (transitive, I have done); Stem 
avory, Pres. ἀνοίγω, I open, Perf. ἀν-έῳγ-α (intrans., J stand open) 
and ἀν-έῳχ-α (transit., 7 have opened). 

2. The aspirated form of the Perfect, contrary to § 277, occurs also 
in a number of derivative verbs: Stem ἀλᾷλαγ, ἀλλάσσω, I 
change, from ἄλλος, Perf. ἤλλαχ-α. 


§ 280. 2. THe WEAK PERFECT (First PERFECT) 
is formed from the Stem by the insertion of «: Stem λυ, 
Aé-Av-x-a. The Weak Perfect is the more recent form, 
and with all Vowel-Stems it is the only one in use, while 
it is the more common with Stems ending in τ, ὃ, 0, and 
those in X, p, v, p. 

Obs.—The only complete Strong Perfect of a Vowel-Stem in Attic 

prose is ἀκήκοα (ὃ 275, 1); but compare ὃ 317. 

§ 281. In regard to the vowel, the Weak Perfect follows ᾿ 

the σ Future (δὲ 260, 261): Stem dpa, δράσω, dé-dpa-xa ; i 


ὃ 289, THE PLUPERFECT ACTIVE. 159 


Stem Tima, τιμήσω, τετίμηκα 9 Stem τ λ Uy πλεύσω. πέ- 
πλευκα ; Stem πιθ (πείθω, 7 persuade), πείσω, πέπεικα. 
χέω, 7 pour, Perf. κέχῦκα, is an exception (§ 265). For 
other exceptions, see § 301. 

Stems in 7, ὃ, 8 throw out these consonants before a, 
without any other change: Stem κομι ὃ, κομίζω, 7 carry, 
κεκόμϊκα. 

§ 282. The monosyllabic Stems in X, v, ρ, having ε in the Stem 
syllable, change this « in the Weak Perf. into a: Stem στελ, 
στέλλω, 1 send, Perf. é-cra\-ca; Stem 9 θερ, φθείρω, I destroy, Perf. 
ἔςφθαρ-κα. Several in ν throw out the v: Stem κρῖν, κρίνω, J 
judge, Perf. κέ-κρί-κα; Stem cri v, κλίνω, I incline, Perf. é-«d-Ka: 
Stem πλῦὔ ν, πλύνω, J wash, Perf. πέ-πλύ-κα ; Stem rev, reivw, I 
stretch, Perf. ré-ra-ea. Wherever ν is not thrown out before κα it 
becomes, according to ὃ 51, a nasal y: Stem gay, φαίνω, I show, 
Perf. πέ-φαγ-κα. 

Other Stems of this kind, and some in μ, admit of metathesis (δ 59): 
Stem 6 aX, βάλλω, 7 throw, Perf. βέ-βλη-κ-α; Stem cap, κάμνω, I 
grow tired, Perf. κέ-κμη-κ-α (δ 321, 9). 


2. The Pluperfect Active. 

§ 283. The Pluperfect takes the Augment before the 
Perfect-Stem ; its terminations are those of the historical 
tenses. Between the Stem and the termination the diph- 
thong εἰ steps in, which in the 3 Plur. is reduced to «. 


Obs.—The 3 Plur. in ecay is rare and more modern. 


The Temporal Augment of verbs beginning with a vowel 
is not recognizable, because their Perfect-Stem has already 


§ 282. Dialects —The Hom. μέ-μβλω-κα for μέ-μλω-κα, from the Stem 
μολ (Aor. ἔμολον, I went), is explained by metathesis. Compare §§ 51, 
D., 324, 12. ἡ 

§ 283. Dialects—The Ionic dialect has the antiquated endings of 
the Pluperf.: 1 Sing. ea, 2 Sing. eac, 3 Sing. ee(v), contracted εἰ, εἰν, 
or 7; the 2 Plur. New-lon. ea-re. Hom. ἐτε-θήπ-εα, I was astonished ; 
3 Sing. δεδειπνήκ-ειν, from δειπνέω, I dine. 

ἐ-μέμηκ-ον (Perf. μέμηκα, 1 bleat) and ἤνωγον, along with ἠνώγεα (Perf. 
ἄνωγα, I compel), are formed quite irregularly, according to the man- 
ner of Imperfects. 


; 
. 
aq 
ἢ 4 
~ 


160 Vv. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 284, 


a long vowel: Verbal-Stem ay, ἄγω, 7 drive, Perfect- 
Stem ἡ x, #x-«-v. The Syllabic Augment is often omit-_ 
ted. The 1 and 3 Sing. in the older Attic dialect have ἢ 
instead of εἰ and ev, as ἐ-τλελύκ-η. 

The formation of the Pluperfect is exactly the same as 
that of the Perfect, and, like it, it is either strong or weak, 
and has the vowel long or short, or unchanged. 


§ 284. 3. The Perfect Middle and Passive 


can be formed only in one way, that is, by appending the 
personal endings of the principal tenses of the Middle, with- 
out any connecting vowel, to the Perfect-Stem, ὁ, e., to the 
reduplicated Verbal-Stem: Stem Av, Perf. Mid. λέελυ-μαι. 

The Infinitive and the Participle always have the accent 
on the penultima: λελύσθαι, λελυμένος ; Stem’ wade, 
πεπαιδεῦσθαι, from παιδεύω, L educate. 


§ 285. The vowels are treated in the same way as in the 
Weak Perfect: Stem τιμα, τετίμηκα, τετίμημαι ; Stem rt 0, 
πέπεικα, πέπεισμαι ; Stem φ θερ, ἔφθαρκα, ἔφθαρμαι : Stem 
βαλ, βέβληκα, βέβλημαι. The verbs τρέφω, Ἢ nourish, 
τρέπω, I turn, and στρέφω, I turn, also take a instead of ε: 
τέ- θραμ- fal, τέ τρᾶμ- Mat, ξ: στραμ-μαι. 

§ 286. The final Consonants of Consonantal-Stems chauen 
according to the general laws of sound ($$ 45-49) : 


§ 284. Dialects——In the Hom. dialect, the o of the 2 Sing. Perf. and 
Pluperf. Mid. is sometimes thrown out between two vow els: μέμνηαι 
Ξε μέμνησαι (meministi), contracted μέμνῳ; so also in the New-Ionic 
the Imperat. μέμνεο for μέμνησο. 

§ 285. Dialects—The Hom. πέ-πρω-ται, Stem zop (Strong Aorist 
ἔπορον, I gave), is explained by metathesis. The following have a 
short vowel: τέτυγμαι, from τεύχω, J prepare, 8 Plur. τετεύχαται ; πε- 
φυγμένος, from φεύγω, I flee; ἔδσῦμαι, from σεύω, I hasten ; ὃ instead of 
éu: πε-πνῦ-μαι, from πνέω, ὃ 248. 

§ 286. Dialects.—The 6 of the Stem κορὺυ θ (κορύσσω, J arm) remains 
unchanged in Homer: κε-κορυθ-μένο:. αἰσχύνω, IT put to shame, has 
ἤσχυμμαι. 


ie ‘ 


§ 287. THE PERFECT MIDDLE. 161 


1. Before ail terminations beginning with pu 


every guttural becomes y: Stem πλεκ, πλέκω, 7] twist, πέ-πλεγ-μαι; 

“dental : o: Stem 710, πείθω, 1 persuade, πε-πείσ-μεθα 5 

« Jabial = pe: Stem ypadg, γράφω, I write, ye-ypap-pévoc. 

Obs.—When a guttural or labial is preceded by a nasal, the latter 
is thrown out before wp: Stem cap, κάμπτω, I bend, κέκαμμαι; 
Stem éeyy, ἐλέγχω, 1 refute, ἐλέλεγμαι (δ 275, 1). Some Stems 
in ν, by way of exception, do not change the ν before p into o, 
but into w: ὦξυμμαι, from ὀξύνω, I sharpen; those which throw 
out the ν in the Perf. Active do the same here (ὃ 282): κέκριμαι 
‘(compare πέ-φασ-μαι, from the Stem ¢ av): σπένδω, I offer a liba- 
tion, Fut. σπείσω, has ἔσπεισμαι. 


. Before σ 
every guttural becomes x, and this with o becomes &: πέ-πλεξαι ; 
*  Jabial Phin Wy ἐξ 3 “Ws yé-ypapa; 


“ dental is thrown out: πέ-πεισαι. 


9. Before τ 
every guttural becomes rc: πέ-πλεκται; Stem rey, λέ-λεκ-ται; 

 Jabial “mt γέ-γραπται; 

“dental (exe. v) “σ: πέ-πεισ-ται (Stem ¢ av, πέ-φαν-ται). 

4. The o of of after consonants (ὃ 61) is dropped, and 
then 
every guttural becomes y: πέ-πλεχ-θον for πε-πλεκ-σθον ; 

“ 12.018] Ὁ ὁ: γέ-γραφ-θε for γε-γραφ-σθε; 

“ dental (exe. ν) “oo: πε-πεῖσ-θαι for πε-πειθ-σθαι. 

v, XA, and p remain unchanged before the @ which has 
arisen from of: Stem φαν, πεφάνθαι; Stem ayyed, 
ἠγγέλθαι. 


§ 287. The ending νταῖ of the 3 Plur. is irreconcilable 
with Consonantal-Stems. Sometimes the Ionic ara: takes 


§ 287. Dialects——In the Ion. dialect, the forms ara and aro for the 
3 Plur. are common: Hom. has βε-βλή-αται (βάλλω, 7 throw), πεποτήατο 
(rordopa, 1 flutter), dedaiara (daiw, 1 divide), ἔρχαται, tépyaro (eipyw, I 
shut in, § 319, 15); in New-Ionic, παρεσκευάδατο (παρασκευάζω, I pre- 
pare), κεκοσμξαται (κοσμέω, 1 adorn). Three Homeric forms insert ὃ : 
ippa-d-arar (paivw, I besprinkle), axnyé-d-aro (ἄχνυμαι, I am grieved), 
ἐληλά-δ- ατο (Stem ἐλα, ἐλαύνω, I drive); ἐρηρέδαται, from ἐρείδω, I sup- 
port, is irregular. 


l= 
- 


162 V. THE PERFECT-STEM. § 288. 


its place (ὃ 226, D.), before which y, κ, (3, and π᾿ are aspi- 


rated : γε-γράφ-αται, τεττάχ-αται (Stem TAY, τάσσω, 7 ar- 
range), τε-τρίφ-αται (Stem τριβ, τρίβω, 7 rub). But the 
common practice is to use the periphrasis by means of the 
Participle with ci-ci(v): γεγραμμένοι εἰσίν. Compare Lat. 
scripta sunt and ὃ 276, Obs. 

The following paradigms supply examples of the above- 
mentioned changes. 


Perfect Middle and Passive. 


Guttural Stems. | Dental Stems. Labial Stems. 
πέ-πλεγ-μαι πέ-πεισ-μαι γέ-γραμ-μαι 
πέ-πλεξαι πέ-πεισαι γέ-γραψαι 
πέ-πλεκ-ται πέ-πεισ-ται γέ-γραπ-ται 
πε-πλέγ-μεθα πε-πείσ-μεθα γε-γράμ-μεθα 
πέ-πλεχ-θε πέ-πεισ-θε γέ-γραφ-θε 
πε-πλεγ-μένοι εὖσί πε-πεισ-μένοι εἰσί ᾿, γε-γραμ-μένοι εἰσί 


§ 288. After Vowel-Stems, σ is frequently inserted before the ter- 
minations beginning with p and 7, but more especially when the 
Stems have the vowel short: Stem rede, τελῶ, 7 complete, Pert. 
τε-τέλε-στμαι ; Stem oa, σπάω, I draw, ὃ Sing. ἔ-σπα-σ-ται ; but 
it also occurs in not a few Stems with long vowels and diph- 
thongs: ἀκούω, I hear, ἤκουσμαι ; κελεύω, 1 order ; κυλίω, [roll ; λεύω, 
1 stone to death ; ξύω, I polish ; παίω, I strike; πλέω (πέπλευσται), 
I sail; xpiw, I saw; σείω, I shake ; xpiw, I anoint ; ψαύω, I touch. 
Others fluctuate: κλείω or κλύω, I close ; κρούω, I push. 


§ 289. The Subjunctive and Optative are generally formed by peri- 
phrasis with the Participle and the corresponding forms of εἰμί. 
(Compare Lat. solutus sim, essem.) These moods are but rarely 
evolved out of Vowel-Stems themselves: κτάομαι, J acquire, κέ- 
κτη-μαι, Subj. κε-κτῶ-μαι, κε-κτῇ, κέ-κτη-ται, Opt. κε-κτῴ-μην (from 
κε-κταοί- μην), κε-κτῷ-το; besides these, we also have κεκτύμην, yo, 
70. 


§ 289. Dialects—The Hom. Subj. from Stem pv a (μέμνημαι, memini), 
1 Plur. μεμνώμεθα (New-Ion, μεμνεώμεθα), Opt. peuryuny ; ὃ Sing. λελῦτο, 
3 Plur. λελῦντο, instead of Aedv-1-70, AeAv-t-v70, § 28. 


ate pes νας 


oe sees 
oar 


i he 


$291. THE FUTURE PERFECT. 163 


§ 290. 4. The Pluperfect Middle and Passive 


differs in every verb from the corresponding Perfect only 
by the addition of the Augment and the personal endings, 
which are those of the historical tenses. Respecting the 
3 Plur. in vro and aro, and their places being supplied by 
periphrasis, see § 287, which is here applicable also. 


§ 291. 5. The Future Perfect or Futurum Hxactum 


adds o to the Perfect-Stem with the Inflexion of the Fu- 
ture-Middle; the o produces the same changes in the pre- 
ceding consonants as in the ordinary Future Middle: πε- 
πράξεται (Stem πραγ, πράσσω, [ do), it will have been 
done ; γεγράψεται (Stem ypad, γράφω, L write), ἐέ will 
have been written. } 

There are two isolated Future Perfects with Active 
endings: ἑστήξω (§ 311), 7 shall stand, and τεθνήξω (ὃ 324, 
4), I shall be dead, from the Perf. ἕστηκα, τέθνηκα. 

Otherwise its place in the Active is supplied by the Part. 
of the Perf. with the Fut. of εἰμί, 7 wm (ἔσομαι) : λελυκὼς 
ἔσομαι, 1 shall have loosed (solvero). 


frat + 


ors. 


τα OCR line tate 
Guna MART «Tis 


164 VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. § 292. 


VI. Tue Strrone Passive STEM. 


§ 292. From the Strong Passive Stem are formed the 
Strong οὐ Second Aorist, and the 8 trong or Seca Future 
Passive. 


Present: φαίνω, Pure Stem ¢ ἅ ν, Strong Passive Stem ὁ ave. 


1. Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 


ἐ-φἄνη-ν, I ap- paves pavein-v 
peared. 
3 |* ae” ς ς φανῃ-ξ τὸ pee 
Ξ ἐφάνη | gary = | pavein 
S ἐ-φάνη-τον = | pavij-rov 8 pavein-rov OF φανεῖτον 
alee γ 5 ~ , , 
= ἐ-φανή-την ‘=> | pavij-rov δ' φαγειη-ΤτΤὴν OY φαγνειτὴν 
μ᾿ BS , ow ~ ae ri ~ 
Figs μεν an wie μεν lees μεν O ba bed oo 
ἐ-φάνη-τε φαν))-τε φανείη-τε OF φανγεῖτε 
ἐτφάνη-σαν φανῶ-σι(ν) φανείη-σαν ΟΥ̓́φανεῖεν 
φάνη-θι Inf. φανῆ-ναι Part.) gaveic, φανεῖσα, φανέν 
αὖ | φανή-τω Gen. φανέ-ντ-ος | 
3 φάνη-τον 
Ξ ανήττω E 
5 φ ed των 
Ξ φανη-τε 
ΕἼ | φανή-τωσαν ΟΥ̓ 
φανέ-ντων 


2. Strong or Second Future Passive. 


Ind. | φανή-σομαι 
Opt. | φανη-σοίμην | ‘: ε΄. 
; r ete., the samevas the Future Middle. 
Inf. φανή-σεσθαι - 
Part. | φανη-σόμενος, ἡ, ov 


§ 293. The personal endings of the Aorist Passive are 
of an Active nature, those bf the Future Passive of the 
nature of the Middle. They are appended, as in the See- 


§ 293. Dialects—The Hom. dialect has the shorter ending ey in the 
3 Plur. Ind. Aor. Pass.: é-pave-v or φάνε-ν ; τράφε-ν -Ξ-Ξ ἐτράφησαν, from 
τρέφω. The Ion. dialect leaves the ε in the Subj. uncontracted : piyé-w 
(μίσγω, 1 mix). Homer often lengthens the ¢ in the Subj., sometimes 
to εἰ: δᾶμεί- = δαμῶ, Stem ὃ ἅμ, Pres. δάμνημι, 1 tame; and some- 


~ 


§ 295. VI. THE STRONG PASSIVE STEM. 165 


ond Principal Conjugation (ὃ 302), to the Stem without a 
connecting vowel, and the ε of the Stem is lengthened in 
the Indicative and Imperative to ἡ. In the Subjunctive, 
the ε is contracted with the vowels of the Subjunctive: 
pavé-w, φανῶ ; in the Optative, the ε, combined with the 
modal sign m, becomes «en: gave-in-v. ‘The Infinitive al- 
ways has the circumflex on the penultima, and the Par- 
ticiple in the Nom. Sing. Mase. the acute on the last. 


§ 294. The Strong Passive Stem, just like the Strong 
Aorist Active and Middle (ὃ 256),is formed very rarely 
from derivative Stems; but it occurs in verbs of all class- 
es, even the first (ὃ 247), ε being added to the pure Verbal- 
Stem: Pres. ῥάπττω (class 3,7 sew), Pure Stem pad, 
Strong Passive Stem pags, Aor. Pass. ἐῤῥάφη-ν ; σφάττω 
(class 4, Z slaughter), Pure Stem ogay, Strong Passive 
Stem o gaye, Aor. Pass. ἐσφάγη-ν, Fut. Pass. σφάγη-σομαι ; 
Pres. γράφ-ω (class 1), Strong Pass. Stem y pas, Aor. 
Pass. éypagn-v. The Strong Passive Aor. occurs only in 
such verbs as have no Strong Active Aorist. The only 
exception is τρέπω, 7 turn, Aor. Act. &rpam-o-v, Pass. 
ἐστράπη-ν. 

Obs.—By way of exception, ἠλλάγην is formed from the derivative 

Stem dr ay, Pres. ἀλλάσσω, I change. 


§ 295. As in the Strong Aorist Active (ὃ 257), the ε is 
sometimes changed into a: κλέπ-ττω, 7 steal, ἐκκλάπηον 5 
στέλλω, 7 send, ἐ-στάλη-ν ; τρέφ-ω, 1] nourish, é-rpagn-v 3 
πλέκ-ω, 7 twist, ἐ-πλέκητν and ἐ-πλἄκη-ν ; πλήσσω, L strike, 


times to n: φᾶἄνή-ῃ = φἄνῇ. In the Dual and Plur., the modal vowel 
is shortened where this lengthening of the ε occurs: dapet-ere (for 
Oapénre, Att. δαμῆτε). In the Infinitive we find the Hom. μεναι or μεν : 
μιγήμεναι, Capper. 

. ὃ 295. Dialects——Homer here also employs metathesis (§ 59), as in 
the Strong Aor. Act. and Mid. (ὃ 357, D.): Pres. τέρπ-ω, I delight, Aor. 
Pass. ἐ-τάρπη-ν, Subj. rpdzé-w, 1 Plur. τρἄπείομεν (gaudeamus), Inf. 
τρᾶἄπή-μεναι. 


166 VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. § 296. 


has ἐ-πλήγη-ν, πληγήτσομαι, but in composition 2&-e-7Aayn-v, 
ἐκ-πλαγή-σομαι; the Pure Stem of verbs of the second 
class here reappears: σήπτω (Stem σᾶπ, 7 corrupt), 
ἐσσάπη-ν ; τήκ-ω (Stem rak, 72 met), ἐ-τάκη-ν 3 péw (Stem 
pv; I flow), é-ppvn-v, ῥυή-σομαι. 


VII. Toe WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 


§ 296. From the Weak Passive Stem are formed the 
Weak or First Aorist and the Weak or First Future 
Passive. 


| Pres. λύω, Stem Av, Weak Passive Stem λῦθε. 


| 1. Weak or First Aorist Passive. 


a 


Ind. ἐ-λύθη-ν, 1 | Subj. λυθῶ Opt. λυθείη-ν 
was loosed. 
ἐ-λύθη-ς λυθῇ-ς λυθείη-ς 


| 


etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. - 
2. Weal or First Future Passive. 


Opt. λυθη-σοίμην | Inf. λυθή-σεσθαι 
Part. λυθη-σόμενο-ς, ἡ, o-v 


etc., like the Strong or Second Aorist Passive. 

Imp. λύθη-τι Inf. λυθῆ-ναι Part. λυθεί-ς, λυθεῖσα, λυθέν 
λυθή-τω Gen. λυθέντ-ος 

Ind. Ne hoopat 


§ 297. The inflexion of the Weak Passive Stem is en- 
tirely like that of the Strong. Respecting the τ of λύθηττι, 
instead of λυθη-θι, see ὃ 53, ὁ. 


§ 296. Dialects—The Weak Fut. Pass. is wanting in the Homeric 
dialect. 


§ 297. Dialects—Respecting the inflexion, see ὃ 293, Ὁ. 

§ 298. Dialects—The Hom. dialect after some Vowel-Stems inserts 
ν before 0: ἀμπνύ-ν-θη (Stem πνυ, πνέω, I breathe), ἱδρύ-ν-θη (ἱδρύω, 
I set firm), and changes the ε of the Stem ¢aev (φαείνω, φαίνω, I make 
appear) into a, φαάνθην. 


a” et hee ae 
sailed ἈΦ “" 
rr. τ 
. . ᾿ 
7% 
' 


§ 299. VII. THE WEAK PASSIVE STEM. 167 


§ 298. The Weak Passive Stem is formed from the 
Verbal-Stem by appending the syllable θεὲ. Before this 
syllable the vowels of Vowel-Stems are lengthened as in 
the Future, the Weak Aorist Active, and the Perfect: 
Tima, ἐτιμήθην ; wecpa, ἐπειράθην, 7 tried. As to the ex- 
ceptions, see ὃ 301. Asin the Perfect Middle, o is inserted 
before @, especially after short vowels, but often also after 
long ones: é-reAé-o-Onv, from τελέω, 7 complete , ἐ-κελεύ-σ- 
θην, from κελεύω, 7 order ; and this is the case in the verbs 
mentioned in ὃ 288, and especially in γελάω, L laugh, ἐγε- 
λάσθην ; δράω, 7 do, ἐδράσθην ; παύω, 1 cause to cease, 
ἐπαύσθην, but also ἐπαύθην. The Aor. Passive of σώζω, 
7 save, on the other hand, is formed from the shorter Stem 
ow Without the o: ἐσώθην. 

As in the Weak Perfect Active and the Perfect Middle, 
the « before X, v, p is sometimes changed into a: Stem rev 
(τείνω, L stretch), ἐ-τάθη-ν (compare ὃ 282). 

The changes of the consonants before @ are explained 
by the laws of sound (8 45): Stem πραγ, πράσσω, L do, 
ἐ-πράχ-θη-ν ; Stem Pevd, ψεύδω, L deceive, ἐ-ψεύσ-θηον ; 
Stem πεμπ, πέμπω, 7 send, ἐ-πέμφ-τθητν. Respecting 
ἐθρέφθην (Pres. τρέφω), ἐθάφθην (Pres. θάπτω), see ὃ 54, 
Obs., and respecting ἐτέθην, ἐτύθην (Stems θε, θυ), see 


ὃ 53, ὁὦ. 
§ 299. The Weak Aorist Passive and the Weak Future 


Passive are, on the whole, more common than the Strong, 
and in the case of derivative verbs, as of nearly all Vowel- 
Stems, they are the only customary forms of the Aorist 
and Future Passive. 

There are some primitive verbs of which both Passive 
Stems are in use: Stem βλαβ, Pres. βλάπτω, L hurt, Aor. 
Pass. ἐβλάβην and ἐβλάφθην. 


ὡς a ry 
Re 


168 VERBAL ADJECTIVES. § 300. 


VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 


§ 300. The Verbal Adjectives are a kind of Passive Par- 
ticiples. Ὁ ἐν 

Pres. λύω, Stem λυ, 1. λῦ-τός, ἡ, dv, loosed, capable of 

being loosed. 
2. λυ-τέο-ς, a, ov, to be loosened, 
solvendu-s, a, wm. 3 

The First Verbal Adjective is formed by means of the 
syllable ro (Nom. το-ς, τη, ro-v) from the Verbal-Stem, and 
has the meaning either of a Participle Perfect Passive, 
λυ-τό-ς = solu-tu-s, or of possibility, capable of being loos- 
ened. 

The Second Verbal Adjective is formed by means of 
the syllable τέο (Nom. réo-c, réa, réo-v), which is never con- 
tracted, from the Verbal-Stem, and has the meaning of 
necessity, like the Latin gerundive: Av-réo-¢, one who ἐδ 
to be loosened ; λυτέον ἐστί, loosening nvust take place, 
solvendum est. 

The vowels preceding the τ are in general treated ex- 
actly in the same manner as in the Weak Passive Aorist; 
o is inserted in the same cases as in the Aor. Pass.: τελε- 
σ-τός, κελευ-σ-τέον. The consonants before τ are treated in 
accordance with the laws of sound: πρακ-τό-ς (Stem 7 pay, 
Pres. πράσσω); γραπ-τό-ς(γράφω); κομισ-τέο-ν( Stem coped, 
κομίζω, ih Carry ). 


Verbs which leave their Stem Vowel short in the forma- 
tion of their Tenses. 


§ 301. The Vowel remains short throughout in: 


§ 800. Dialects.x—doa-7d-¢ 1s derived by metathesis (δ 59) from the 
Stem dep (dépw, I flay). | . 

§ 301. Dialects—The Hom. dialect ἐράω, I love, Aor. Mid. ἠρᾶσάμην ; 
ἀρκέω, I ward off, ἤρκεσα ; κορέω, I satisfy, ἐκόρεσα ; κοτέω, I grudge, 
κοτέσσατο; ἐρύω, I draw, eiptoa, On the usual doubling of the o after 
short yowels (ἐράσσατο, ἐρύσσατο), see ὃ 261, Ὁ. 


8 301. 


γελάω, IL laugh, 
θλάω, TL squeeze, 
kaw, ‘break, 


σπάω, 1 draw, 


χαλάω, I slacken, 
αἰδέομαι, I dread, 


ἀκέομαι, I heal, 


ἀλέω, IL grind, 
ἀρκέω, IT satisfy, 
ἐμέω, L vomit, 
ζέω, LT seethe, 
Ew, I scrape, 


τελέω, IL finish, 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 
Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 
Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


Fut. 


apéw, I plow, 

apiw, I drav, 
addit. form ἀρύτω. 

ἑλκύω, 1 drav, 

πτύω, I spit, 


VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. 


ΕΣ 
γελἄσομαι, 


θλᾶσω, 
κλάσω, 


ψ, 
σπάσω, 


169 


Aor. Act. ἐγέλᾶσα, 

Aor. Pass, ἐγελάσθην, 
Fut. Pass. γελασθήσομαι. 
Aor. Act. ἔθλἄσα, 

Verb. Adj. θλαστός. 
Aor. Pass. ἐκλάσθην, 
Perf. Mid. κέκλασμαι. 
Aor. Act. ἔσπᾶσα, 


Aor. Pass. ἐσπάσθην, Perf. Act. ἔσπᾶκα, 
Perf. Mid. ἔσπασμαι, Verb. Adj. σπαστός. 


χαλἄᾶσω, 
αἰδέσομαι, 


ἀκέσομαι, 
ἀλέσω (6), 


ἀρκέσω, 
ζέσω, 


ξέσω, 
τελέσω (ὦ), 


᾽ , 
apoow, 


ἀρὕσω, 


Pass. ἑλκυσθήσομαι, 


Aor. Pass, ἐχαλάσθην. 
Aor. Pass. ἡδέσθην (828), 
Perf. ἤδεσμαι. 

Aor. ἠκεσάμην. 

Perf. Act. ἀλήλεκα, 
Perf. Mid. ἀλήλεσμαι. 
Aor. Act. ἤρκεσα. 
Aor. Act. ἤμεσα. 

Aor. Act. ἔζεσα, 
Verb. Adj. ζεστός. 
Verb. Adj. ἕεστός. 
Aor. Act. ἐτέλεσα, 
Aor. Pass. ἐτελέσθην, 
Verb, Adj. τελεστός, 
Perf. Act. τετέλεκα, 
Perf. Mid τετέλεσμαι. 
Aor. Act. ἤροσα, 

Aor. Pass. ἠρόθην. 
Aor. Act. ἠρῦσα. 


Aor. Act. εἵλκῦσα. 
Perf. Act. εἱλκῦκα, 
Perf. Mid. εἵλκυσμαι. 
Aor. Act. ἔπτῦσα. 
Verb. Adj. πτυστός. 


2. The vowel +s long in the Weak Aor. Act., and short 
in the Perf., the Aor. Pass., and the Verbal Adjective in 


I bind, 


ΚΕ 
Oe, 


Fut. 


δήσω, 


Aor. Act. ἔδησα, 
Perf. Act. δέδεκα, 
Aor. Pass. ἐδέθην, 
Verb. Adj. δετός, 
Perf. Mid. δέδεμαι, 


3 Fut. δεδήσομαι. 


170 VERBS WITH A SHORT VOWEL. § 302. 


1 sacrifice, Fut. θύσω, Aor. Act. ἔθῦσα, 
Perf. Act. τέθύκα, Aor. Pass. ἐτυθην, 
Perf. Mid. τέθῦὕμαι. 
λύω, 11 loose, Fut. λύσω, Aor, Act. ἔλῦσα, . 
Perf. Act. λέλύὔκα, Aor. Pass. ἐλύθην, 
Verb. Adj. λῦτός, Perf. Mid. λέλῦμαι. 


3. The Vowel zs short in the Future and Weak Aorist 
Active and Middle, but dong in the Perfect, Aorist Pas-_ 
sive, and Verbal Adjective of καλέω, Ζ7 call, καλέσω, κέκληκα, 
ἐκλήθην, κλητός ; αἰνέω, 2 praise, has αἰνέσω, ἤνεκα, ἠνέθην, 
αἰνετός, but Perf. Mid. ἤνημαι. 

4. ποθέω, 7 long for; πονέω, 7 toil; and δύω, I sink, 
fluctuate between the short and long vowels: ποθέσομαι 
and ποθήσω ; πονέσω, ἐπονησάμην ; dvow, Aor. Pass. ἐδύθην. 


Cuap. XI.—SEconp PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION, 
or Verbs in μι. 
PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. 


§ 302. The Second Principal Conjugation differs from 
the First only in the inflexion of the Present and Strong 
Aorist-Stems, and in the case of a few verbs also in the 
Perfect and Pluperfect Active. 

The special terminations of this conjugation are: 


1. The 1 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient pu: φη-μί, 1 say 
(δ 226). 

2. The 3 Sing. Pres. Ind. Act. retains the ancient σι(ν) (for τῷ : 
φησί(ν) (ὃ 226). | 

3. The 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. inserts the vowel a before the termi- 


§ 302. Dialects—The Hom. dialect often has the ending σθα in the 
2 Sing. Ind. Act.: τίθη-σθα, thou puttest ; ἔ-φη-σθα; and μεναι Or μεν 
instead of ναι in the Inf. : φά-μεναι, φά-μεν ; and a short ν instead of 
the cay of the 3 Plur. of the Preterite: ἔ-φἄ-ν. 

The Hom, dialect sometimes lengthens the Stem-vowel in the Subj. 
and shortens the Modal-yowel as in the Aor. Pass. (§ 298): ἴομεν Ξξ 
ἴωμεν (eUmus). 


ee os ieee. ae 
" , 


8. 304. SECOND PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 171 


nation σι (for ντι) (ὃ 226, compare Dialects), and this a is lengthened 
by compensation (i-doi(v), they go, from the Stem i), and unites with 
the a.of the Stem: φασί(ν). 
4. In the Optative, ™ («, ὁ), the Modal-sign attaches itself directly 
to the Stem: ¢a-in-v; compare ὃ 293. 
5. The 2 Sing. Imperat. has the ending θὲ: φά-θι. ) , ¢300 = 
6 The Infinit hasthe ending va: φάναι. 5 ComPare § 202. 
7. The 3 Plur. of the Preterite has σαν : ἔ-φἄ-σαν (3 Plur. Imperf.). 


All terminations of these two tenses are appended to 
the Stem without a connecting vowel: φἄ-μέν (compare 
τιμά-ο-μεν)ὴ, φά-τω (compare τιμα-έ-τω) ; in the Participle, 
also, vr attaches itself directly to the Stem: φα-ντ, of 
which the Nom. is formed by the addition of σ: ¢ac; 
Stem do, δούς (compare ὃ 147,1). In the Subjunctive 
alone the final vowels of the Stems are contracted with 
the long connecting vowels, as in the ordinary contracted 
verbs (ὃ 243): φά-ω, φῶ 3 τι-θέ-ω, τι-θῶ ; δό-ω-μαι, ξῶμαι. 


§ 303. In the vowel-Stems of this conjugation a change 
of quantity takes place in such a manner that vowels in 
themselves short are lengthened in the Singular Indicative 
Active, a and ε becoming ἡ, 0 w, and 0 uv: φη-μί, 1 say, 
Plur. ga-pév, &gn-v, Dual ἔτφα-τον ; [ἔ-θητν, 1 placed), 
Plur. ἔτθε-μεν ; δείκνυ-μι, 7 show, Plur. δείκνύ-μεν. 

0Obs.—Those forms which always have the vowel long are specially 
noticed below. 


§ 304. All yerbs in μι are divided into 2 classes: 

1. Those which in the Present join their terminations 
directly to the Stem: φη-μί ; 

2. Those which form the Present-Stem by adding vv to 


the Pure Stem: δείκ-νῦ-μι, 1 show, Os Stem Ser, Pres- 
ent-Stem deck vv. 


172 


are inserted on p. 124, fol. sgq. 


IRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 


§ 305. 


I. First Cuass oF VERBS IN μι. 
δὲ 305 and 306. The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs 


ὃ 307. Some few forms of the Verbs in μὲ are formed 


δὲ 305, 306. Dialects—The following are Ionic secondary forms, 
those inclosed in brackets being the New-Ionic. 
Active. 
δι-δοῖ-σθα, also δι-δοῖ-ς 


2 Sing. Pres. Ind. τί-θη-σθα 


 rt-Ost 


( χιρθεϊσι(ν) 


also (προ)θέουσι(ν) 


2 Sing. Pres. Imperat. 


8 (74 Ge 
ΠΣ ἡ" 
Inf. Pres. 


Imperf. 1 Sing. 


9 Plur. Pres. Ind. 


8 6c 


Pres. Part. 


3 


τι-θή-μεναι 


[ἐ-τί-θε-αἹ 
Ὁ [ἐ-τί-θε-ε] 


δι-δοῖ 


δι-δοῦσι(ν) 


δί-δω-θι 
δι-δό-μεν 
δι-δοῦ-ναι 


[ é-di-dov-v | 


Middle. 


[τι-θέ-αται 


Imperf. “ 


τι-θή-μενος 


δι-δό-αται 


Active. 


2 Aor. Ind. 8 Plur. 


74 


a4 


(( 


Subj. 1 Sing. θείω [θέω] 
[1 66 


δῷς 
δῶσι(ν) or 
δώῃσι(ν) 


δώομεν 


δώωσι(ν) 


δόμεναι, δόμεν 


Middle. 


2 θείῃς Or θήῃς 
(( 9 6 θείῃ 
ἔπ Ὁ LD, 
“1 Plur. θέωμεν or 
θείομεν 
({ 8 74 
Inf. θέμεναι, θέμεν 
Ind. ἔθεο, ἔθευ (δ 37, D., 1) 
[Herod. προεθήκαντο]) 
Subj. [θέωμαι] θείομαι 


θέο, θεῦ. 


[-στᾷ] 
[ἱ-στέ-ἃσι(ν) ] 


(καθ)-ί-στα 


[i-cra] 


€ , 
ἱ-στέ-αται] 
[ἱ-στέ-ατο] 


» v 
ἔσταν 
ἔστἄσαν 


στήῃς 


στήετον (§ 302, Ὠ,) 
στέωμεν ΟΥ̓ 
στείομεν 

[στέωσι] 

στήμεναι 


τε 


§ 308. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 173 


after the First Principal Conjugation, as, 6. g., the 2 Sing. 
Imperf. ἐτίθεις, the 3. Sing. ἐτίθει, as if from the Stem 71. 
In the Imperf., the forms ἐδίδουν, ἐδίδους, ἐδίδου are the 
only ones in use from the Stem δεδο; they are formed 
in the same manner as those of contracted verbs (§ 243). 
Other similar forms will be noticed in treating of the sep- 
arate verbs. 

In the 3 Plur. Pres: Ind. contraction is sometimes em-" 
ployed: τιθεῖσι, διδοῦσι. 

In the 2 Sing. Imperat. Pres. Act. the real ending θὲ is 
dropped, and the Stem-vowel is lengthened to compensate 
for it: δίδου for δίδοθι. 

In the same person of the Aorist after a short vowel ¢ 
only is dropped, and the remaining @, according to ὃ 67, 15 
changed to ¢: δο-θι, δός, but στῆ-θι, which only in com 
pounds sometimes appears as ora, 6. g., κατάστα. 

In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Present and Imperfect the 
o between the two vowels is preserved: τίθε-σαι, τίθε-σο, 
ἐτίθε-σο 3 only the 2 Sing. of the Subj. is treated entirely 
like the contracted verbs of the First Principal Conjuga- 
tion. In the 2 Sing. Mid. of the Strong Aorist, on the 
other hand, the o is thrown out, which gives rise to a con- 
traction: ἔ-θε-σο, ἔ-θε-ο, ἔτθου ; Imper. θέ-σο, 0&0, θοῦ. 

Obs.—The forms of the 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. compounded with 

monosyllabic prepositions, after contraction, throw the accent as 


a circumflex upon the last syllable: προ-Θοῦ; but Homer has 
σύν-θεο and περί-θου. 


§ 308. The three verbs conjugated above (p. 124) distin- 
guish the Present-Stem from the Pure Stem by redupli- 
cation, that is, the initial consonant with ὁ is prefixed be- 
fore the Stem: do, διδο; Oe, τιθε (ὃ 530); i-ora for 
at-ora, according to § 60, 6 (compare Latin s7-sto). In 
like manner, the Stem ypa in the Pres. becomes xi-y pa 
(κέχρη-μι, [ lend); wXa and wpa, with the insertion of 
a nasal, become πίι-μ-πλα, πι-μ-πιρα (πίμπλημι, 7 fill ; 
πίμπρημι, L burn); but συμ-πί-πλη-μι, ἐμ-πί-πλη-μι ; the 


174 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 309. 


Stem ἑ becomes ἵ-η-μι, 7 send ; and, with the reduplication 


within the Stem itself, 6 νὰ becomes 6-vi-vy-m, L benefit. 


§ 809. The Deponents δύναμαι, I can; ἐπίσταμαι, I understand ; κρέ- 
papa, I hang; together with the Aorists ἐπριάμην, I bought ; ὠνή- 
μην, 1 benefited, withdraw the accent, even in the Subjunctive 
and Optative, as far as possible from the end: δύνωμαι, ἐπίσταιντο 
(compare ἱστῶμαι, ἱσταῖντο). 


Other peculiarities of verbs of this class are: 

§ 310. The three Stems θε (τίθημι), do (δίδωμι), and é 
(nut) form an irregular Weak Aorist in ka: ἔθηκα, ἔδωκα, 
ἧκα, but in the Middle we find only ἡκάμην.. In the Sing. 
of the Indicative the Active forms are customary instead 
of those of the Strong Aorist, but in the Dual and Plural 
of the Indicative they are rare. The other moods and the 
Participles have the strong forms exclusively. 

The really customary forms of the Aorist, therefore, are 
these : 


Ind. Subj. 06 Mid. ἐθέμην 
ἔθηκα Opt. θείην Subj. θῶμαι 
ἔθηκας Imp. θές etc. 
ἔθηκε(ν) Inf. θεῖναι 

ἔθετον Part. θείς 

ἐθέτην 

ἔθεμεν (Seldom ἐθήκαμεν) 

ἔθετε ( “ὀἘἐθήκατε) 

ἔθεσανί “ ἔθηκαν). 


§ 311. 2. The rough breathing instead of the σ of the 
Stem στα is also used in the Perf. (δ 60, δ): &orn-ca for 
os-oTn-ka. On the shorter forms, ἕστᾶμεν, etc., see § 317, 4. 
ἑστήξω, L shall stand, is a Third Future Active. The Per- 
fects of 0 < and é are τέθεικα, εἴκα ; the same vowel also re- 
mains in the Perf. Mid. τέθειμαι, εἶμαι. The Stems do and 
στα leave their vowel short in the Perf. Mid. and Aor. 


§ 810. Dialects—From the Stem Oo Hom. has sometimes Fut. δὲς 
δώ-σω instead of δώσω. 


§:312. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 175 


Pass., and @< in the Aor. Pass.: δέ-δο-μαι, ἐδόθην, ἐστάθην. 
ἐτέθην, τεθήσομαι. On the meaning of the different forms 
of ἵστημι, see ὃ 329, 1. 


§ 312. To the /zrst Class of the Verbs in μὲ there also 
belong : 

A) Verbs whose Stem ends in a (compare torn): 

1. ἠ-μί (compare Lat. d-2o), Z say, only in the Imperf. ἦν, 
3 Sing. (compare ὃ 213, Ods.). 

2. 6-vi-vy- (Stem ova, S$ 308), L benefit, Mid. ὀνίναᾶμαι 
(8 309), Z have advantage, Strong Aor. Mid. ὠνήμην, ὥνησο, 
ὥνητο ; Opt. ὀναίμην, Imperat. ὄνησο, Inf. ὄνασθαι, Fut. 
ὀνήσω, ὀνήσομαι; Aor. Pass. ὠνήθην. 

8. πί-μ-πλη-μι (Stem πλα, ὃ 308). Additional form, 
πλήθω, 7 fill | Lat. ple-o}, Fut. πλήσω, Perf. Mid. πέπλη- 
σμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐπλήσθην. 

4. πί-μ-πρη-μι (Stem wpa). Additional form, πρήθω 
(quite like 3). 

5. φη-μί (Stem ga), 7 say, 2 Sing. Imperf. ἔφησθα (enclitic 
in Pres. Ind. except 2 Sing., compare § 92,3). Imperat. 
pai or φάθι; compare φάσκω, 324, 8. 

6. χρή (Stem ypa, ype), one must, Subj. χρῇ, Opt. 
x pein, Inf. χρῆν αι, Part. χρεών (only Neut. from x pao v 
according to ὃ 37, D.). Imperf. ἐχρῆν or χρῆν, Fut. χρή- 
σει; ἀπόχρη, dt suffices, also ὃ Plur.arox poct(r), ete., 
as above ἀποχράω. : 

7. κί-χρη-μι (Stem y pa, ὃ 308), 7 lend, Inf. κιχρᾶναι, 
Fut. χρήσω, Aor.?xpnoa. Farther the deponents : 

8. ἄγα-μαι (Stem ’aya), Ll admire, Fut. ἀγάσομαι, Aor. 
Pass. ἠγάσθην, Verb. Adj. ἀγαστός. 

9. δύνα-μαι (Stem duva), 2 can, 2 Sing. Ind. δύνῃ is rare 
(§$ 309), Imperf. ἐδυνάμην, 2 Sing. ἐδύνω, Fut. δυνήσομαι, 


ὃ 312. Dialects —3. Hom. has the Aor. πλῆτο, ἐξ was filled, 3 Plur. 
πλῆντο, Opt. πλύμην or πλείμην, Imper. [ἔμ]πλησο. 

6. Herod. ἀπέχρα. 

8. Hom. ἀγάομαι, ἀγαίομαι. 


176 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. ὃ 312. 


Aor. ἐδυνήθην, seldom ἐδυνάσθην. The Augment ts fre- 
guently ἡ (ὃ 234, Obs.), Perf. δεδύνημαι, Verb. Adj. δυνᾶτός, 
capable, possible. | 

10. ἐπίστα-μαι (Stem éxiora), 7 understand, 2 Sing. 
ἐπίστασαι, Imperf. ἠπιστάμην, ἠπίστω, Fut. ἐπιστήσομαι, 
Aor. ἠπιστήθην, Verb. Adj. ἐπιστητός. 

11. ἔρα-μαι (Stem ? pa), poetic, £ dove (commonly zpaw), 
Aor. Pass. ἠράσθην. 

12. κρέμα-μαι (Stem κρεμ δ), 7 hang (ὃ 309). Fut. κρε- 
μήσομαι, Aor. ἐκρεμάσθην. Additional forms, ὃ 319, 2. 


O0bs.—The following may serve 25. examples of the formation of 
words: τὸ θέ-μα, the position; ὁ do-rnp, the giver; ἡ στά-σι-ς, the 
rise ; ἡ ὄνη-σι-ς, the benefit, from the Pure Verbal-Stem, differing 
from the Present-Stem ; ἡ $7-nn, fa-ma, talk ; ἡ δύναμι-ς, power ; 
ἡ ἐπιστή-μη, knowledge, from the Verbal-Stem, which is the same 
as that of the Present. 


Dialects.—13. Hom. ἄμενα:, satiatc, Stem a, Subj. ἔωμεν. 

14, Stem Ba, Part. βιβάς, stepping. 

14. ὃ. Stem dea, 3 Sing. Imperf. déaro, seemed, Aor. δοά-σσατο. 

15. Stem ira, ἱλάσκομαι, ἱλάομαι, [am gracious, Hom. Imperat. ἵληθι. 

16. Stem cepa (compare κεράννυμι, J mix), Hom. 3 Plur. Subj. Mid. 
κέρωνται. To these belong’ also, in regard to the inflexion of the 
Present-Stem, those Hom. verbs which either are used only in the 
Present- Stem, or form the Present-Stem from the Verbal Stem by 
affixing the syllable -γαὶ 

a) δάμ-νη-μι (also δαμ-νά-ω), I tame, Mid. δάμ-νᾶ-μαι, Fut. δαμόω, 
δαμάᾳς, Weak Aor. Inf. δαμάσαι, δαμάσασθαι, Perf. δέδμημαι, Aor. Pass. 
ἐδμήθην, δαμάσθην, and Strong Aor, Pass. ἐδάμην (Subj. dapeiw). 

b) κίρνημι (also κεράννυμι, ὃ 319, 1), ZL miz, Part. κιρνάς, 3 Sing. 
Imperf. ixiova. . Compare ὃ 319, 1. 

Ὁ κρήμνἅμαι, poetic additional form of κρέμα-μαι (12). Compare 
also ὃ 319, 2. 

d) μάρνᾶἄμαι, 1 contend, 2 Sing. Imperf. ἐμάρνᾶο. 

δ) πέρνημι, 1 sell, Part. repvac, περνἄμενος. 

7) πίλναμαι, 1 approach, Stem πελ, Aor. 3 Sing. ἔ-πλη-το. 

g) πίτνημι, 1 spread, Part. πιτνάς, Imperf. πίτναντο. Compare 
319, 3. 

δ) σκίδνημι, 1 scatter, cxidvara. Compare ὃ 319, 4. 


§ 313. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 177 


§ 313. B) Verbs whose Stem ends in ε (compare τίθημι) : 
1. i-n- (Stem é, Present-Stem i-e, ἡ, ¢., i-é, according to 
§ 308), 7 send. 
Act. Pres. 3 Plur. Ind. ἱασι(ν), Opt. ἑείην (secondary forms 
ἵοιμι, 3 Plur. ἵοιεν). | 
Imperf. in-v (secondary forms [tour], tae, te), Plur. 
ἵεμεν, 3 Plur. te-cav, ἀφίει and ἠφίει (ἀφίημι, 
I send away). Compare ὃ 240. 
Aor. ij-x-a, ἧκας, ἧκε(ν), εἴτον, εἵτην, εἶμεν, εἴτε, εἴ- 
σαν. 
Subj. ὦ, Opt. εἴην, Imperat. ἕς, Inf. εἶναι, Part. εἷς 
(Stem ἑν τ). On this Aor., compare ὃ 810," 
Fut. iow, Perf. ci-k-a. 
Mid. Pres. ἵσεσμαι, 7 hasten, strive, Subj. iépat, in, ete. 
Opt. ts‘unv (additional form ἱοίμην), Imperat. teco 
or tov, Imperf. ἱ-έμην. 
Aor. εἵμην, εἶσο, εἶτο, Subj. ὦμαι, Opt. εἵμην (addi- 
tional form οἵμην). 


Obs.—The εἰ of the Ind. εἴ-μην is caused by the Augment (δ 236), 
that of the Opt. by the Mood-sign (§ 302, 4). 


Fut. ἥτσομαι, Perf. εἴτμαι, Plup. εἵ-μην. 


§ 313. Dialects —1. Hom. 2 and 8 Sing. Pres. ‘ere, ἵει ; 3 Plur. tetor(v) 3 
1 Sing. Imperf. teu, ἵεις, ἵει; 38 Plur. tev, 3 Sing. Subj. tjor(y); Inf. 
ἱέμεναι ; Aor. Act. ἕηκα ; ὃ Plur. ἕσαν ; Subj. εἴω ; Aor. Mid. 3 Plur. ἕντο... 

2. Fut. ἥσω and (ἀν)έσω | Herod. μεμετιμένος, as a Part. Perf. of με- 
τίημι = μεθίημι, ὃ 52, D., as if from periw, with irregular reduplica- 
tion]. 

Moreover : 

3. Stem a(F)e, Pres. ἄημι, I blow, 2 Dual ἄητον, ὃ Sing. Imperf. ἄη and 
dt, Inf. ἀῆναι and ἀήμεναι, Part. Aor. Nom. Plur. ἀέντες, Mid. ἀήμενος. 

4. Stem διε, (ἐν) δίεσαν, they frightened ; δίενται, they flee; Opt. di- 
OLTO. 

5. Stem dre, δίζημαι, additional form, diZw, I seek ; 2 Sing. dinar, 
Inf. δίζησθαι, Fut. διζήσομαι. 

6. Pres. κίχημι (compare ὃ 322, 18), I obtain , Subj. κιχείω, Opt. κι- 
xeinv, Inf. κιχῆναι, Part. κιχείς, Mid. κιχήμενος. 

Imperf. 2 Sing. éciyere, 8 Dual κιχήτην. 


Ty 2 


de 


178 FIRST CLASS. OF VERBS IN yp. § 314, 


Aor. Pass. εἴθην, Subj. io. Fut. @jooua. 
Verb. Adj. ἑτός, éréoc. | 
2. δί-δη-μι (Stem ὃ ε), 7 bind, a rare additional form’ of 
δέ-ω (ὃ 244, 1). 
§ 314. C) Verbs whose Stem ends inc: 
1. εἴ-μι (Stem ἰ, Lat. ¢-re), I go. 


Pres. Ind. εἴ-μι ἴ-μεν Subj. t-w i-ye, ete. 
εἴ ἴττον ἵἴ-τε Opt. i-oinv ἴστοις, ete. 
ei-ol(v) ἴττον ἴ-ἄσι(ν) Imperat. ἴ-θι ἴ-τω, ete. 

3 Plur. ἐπόντων or ἴ-τωσαν 

Inf, i-é-vat Part. i-wv, ἰ-οὔσα, t-év (Gen. i-dy7-oc, compare Lat. 

é-unt-is) 

Imperf. yew or ya ἤειμεν OF ypev 


» (a4 » a » » pfs 7 
ELC WELGVA, WELTOV, ἤτον, YELTE ητε 
» (a4 » xy » » 

WEL HEY, ῳῃείτην, YTHV, YEcav 


Verbal Adj. iréc, ἱτέος (additional form iryréov, ἐξ 8 
necessary to god. 


Obs.—The Present, especially in the Indicative, has a Future mean- 
ing; the Imperfect has the endings of a Pluperfect; κ᾽ is pro- 
duced by the Augment preceding εἰ. 


2. κεῖ-μαι (Stem κει), / lie, has the Inflexion of a Per- 
fect. 2 Sing. xcei-oa, 3 Plur. κεῖνται, Subj. 3 Sing. κέηται, 
Opt. κέοιτο, Imperat. κεῖσο, Inf. κεῖσθαι, Part. κείμενος ; the 


compound παράκειμαι, Inf. παρακεῖσθαι. (Compare quar, 
§ 315, 2). 


§ 314. Dialects.—1. Stem (, 2 Sing. Pres. Ind. εἶσθα, Subj. ἴησθα, ἴησιν, 
1 Plur. ἴομεν, ἴομεν, and ἴωμεν, Opt. ἴοι, ἰείη or εἴη, Inf. ἴμεναι, ἴμεν. 

Imperf. jjia and ἤϊον, ὃ Sing. ἤϊε(ν) or ie(v), 1 Plur. ἤομεν, 3 Plur. 
ἤϊον, ἤϊσαν, With irny, ἴμεν, ἴσαν. 

Fut. εἴσομαι, Aor. εἰσάμην and ἐεισάμην. 

2. Stem κει, 8 Plur. κείαται, κέαται, κέονται, Imperf. κείατο, κέατο 
[κέεται Ξ-Ξ- κεῖται], Part. Fut. κέων, cubiturus, Inf. κειέμεν. 

ὀνο is an Hom. Stem in ο, Pres. ὄνομαι, I vituperate, ὄνοσαι, 3 Sing. 
Opt. ὄνοιτο (δ 809), Fut. ὀνόσσομαι, Aor. ὠνοσάμην, and, from the Stem 
ὀ v, yen. 

6v or épv is an Hom. Stem in υ, 3 Plur. εἰρύαται, they rescue, protect, 
Inf. ῥῦσθαι, ἔρυσθαι, εἰρύμενος, Imperf. 2 2 Sing. ἔρῦσο, 3 Plur. pvaro, ἐρύατο, 
_sipvvro ; moreover, Inf. Act. εἰρύμεναι, to draw; Aor. Mid. picaro, he 
rescued ; ἐρύσσατο, he drew, 


§ 315. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN wm, 179 


Obs.—When compounded with prepositions, κεῖμαι is almost iden- 
tical in meaning with the Perf. Pass. of the corresponding com- 
pounds of τίθημι : ὑποτίθημι, I lay as a foundation ; ὑπόκειται, it is 
laid as a foundation. 


§ 315. D) Verbs whose Stem ends in a consonant (a): 
1. εἰμί (Stem éc, Lat. es-se), [ am. 


Pres, Ind. εἰ-μέ (for éop:) ἐσ-μὲν 
εἶ (for éo-or) ἐσ-ττόν ἐσ-τέ (68- 15) 
ἐσ-τί(ν) (Lat. ¢3-t) ἐσ-τόν εἰ-σί(ν) 

Subj. ὦ ὦμεν ΟΡ. εἴην εἴημεν OF εἶμεν 
YO ἦτον ἦτε εἴης εἴητον OY εἶτον εἴητε OF εἶτε 
ἢ ἦτον ὦσι(ν) εἴη εἰήτην OY εἴτην εἴησαν ΟΥ̓ εἶεν 
Imperat. ἴσθι ἔστον ἔστε Inf. εἶναι 
ἔστω ἔστων ἔστωσαν Part. ὦν οὖσα ὄν (Stem ovr) 
(Lat. esto) ἔστων, ὄντων 
Imperf. ἦν or ἢ TEV 


ἦσθα ἧστον OY Toy ἧτε OF ἦστε 
ἣν ἤστην OY ἤτην ἧσαν 
Imperf. Mid. ἤμην (rare) 
Fut. ἔσομαι, 3 Sing. ἔσται 


Verb. Adj. éoréov. 


Obs.—1. The loss of the o of the Stem is compensated for by the 
vowel being lengthened in the 1 Sing. (δ 42): εἰμί for ἐσμι, in the 
2 Sing. εἶ for éo., which has arisen from the ἐσσί preserved in 
Homer (compare δὲ 49, 61, ὃ). In the 8 Sing. the original end- 
ing rc is retained: éori(v), the 3 Plur. has εἰσί(ν), from ἐσ-ντι. 
The Subj. ὦ stands for ἔω (Hom.), from iow; the Opt. εἴην for 


ὃ 315. Dialects.—Jlonic additional forms: 2 Sing. ἐσ-σί or εἷς, 1 Plur. 
εἰμέν, 3 Plur. éaor(v) ; ἐσσί is also enclitic, but not éaor(v). ; 
Subj. 1 Sing. ἔω, εἴω, 2 Sing. ἔῃς, 3 Sing. ἔησι(ν), ἡσι(ν), ἔῃ, 3 Plur. 
ἔωσι(»ν). 
Opt. also ἔοις, ἔοι, 2 Sing. Imperat. Mid. ἔσσο, 3 Act. ἔστω, 3 Plur. 
ἔστων. 
Inf. ἔμμεναι (for to-pevar), ἔμμεν, ἔμεναι, ἔμεν. 
Part. ἐών, ἐοῦσα, ἐόν (Stem ἐο ν τ). 
Imperf. 1 Sing. ja, ἔα, ἔον ; 2 Sing. ἔησθα [Zac], 3 Sing. yey, ἔην, ἤην 
(2 Plur. gare], 3 Plur. ἔσαν ; 3 Plur. Mid. eiaro (ἦντο). 
Fut. ἔσσομαι, ὃ Sing. ἔσεται, ἔσσεται, ἐσσεῖται (δ 264). 
2. From ἦμαι, 3 Plur. ἕαται, εἵαται, Imperf. taro, εἵατο. 
8. Inf. ἔδμεναι, to eat, Pres. ἔσθω, ἐσθίω, ἔδω [Lat. es-tis = editis]. Com- 
pare ὃ 827, 4. 
4, 2 Plur. Imperf. φέρτε = φέρετε, bring (Lat. ferte]. 


κτλ 


180 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 316. 


ἐσ-ιην, as the Inf. εἶναι for éo-var; ὦν for twy (Hom.), from ée-ws 
In the Imperf. the Dual has most fully preserved the σ. 

Obs. 2.----εἰμί is enclitic in the Pres. Ind. except the 2 Sing. εἶ (com- 
pare ὃ 92, 3); ἔστι is paroxytone when it denotes existence, or 
means the same, as ἔξεστι, “ it is possible,” as well as at the begin- 
ning of a sentence and after the particles οὐ, μή, εἰ, ὡς, καί : ἔστι 
θεός, there is a God ; οὐκ tort, it is not possible. When merely ex- 
ternal causes prevent it from being enclitic (ὃ 93, δ), ἐστί(ν) is 
oxytone: φίλος ἐστὶν ἐμοῦ, he is my friend. 

Cbs. 3.—In the compounds of εἰμί the accent remains on the Stem- 
syllable; e.g., in the Imperf. παρῆν, in the Subj. and Opt. azé, 
ἀπεῖεν, in the Inf. and Part. ἀπεῖναι, παρών, in the 3 Sing. Fut. 
παρέσται. 


2. Hua (St em 7 ¢)s List, has, like κεῖμαι, the Inflexion of 
a Perfect. 


Pres. ἦμαι ἥμεθον ἥμεθα Imperat. ἦσο. 
ἤἥσαι ἦσθον ἧσθε noGw, ete. 
ἧσται ἦσθον ἦνται Inf. ἧσθαι. 


Part. ἥμενος. 
Impf. ἥμην ἦσο, etc. 


In Attic prose we find almost exclusively the compound 
κάθημαι, of which 3 Sing. κάθηται, Subj. καθῶμαι, Opt. κα- 
θοίμην, 3 Plur. SaOniwton Imperat. κάθησο or κάθου (from 
καθεσο), Inf. καθῆσθαι, Part. καθήμενος, Imperf. ἐκαθήμην 
(ὃ 240) or καθήμην, 3 Sing. ἐκάθητο or καθῆστο, 8 Plur. 
ἐκάθηντο or καθῆντο. 


§ 316. The following Strong Aorists, formed without a 
connecting vowel from verbs whose Present-Stem mostly 
follows the First Principal Conjugation, likewise belong to 


the First Class of Verbs in pe: 


Stems tin a. 


1. ἔτβη-ν (Stem a), Pres. βαίνω, J go, Imperat. Binh ; 
in Be pounds also (a (κατάβα). Inf. βῆναι, P art. Bac. 


§ 316. Dialects.—1. 3 Plur. ἔβᾶν, Subj. βείω » Bing or Beiy, βείομεν | Her, 
Béwper], Inf. eds 


§ 316. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN ju. 181 


2. ynpa-vae (Stem ynpa), Inf. to the Pres. γηρά-σκω, 1 
grow old, ὃ 324, 1. 

3. &-dpa-v (Stem Spa), Pres. δι-τδρά-σκω, ὃ 324, 2, 7 run, 
Inf. dpa-var, Part. δράς. 

4. i-cra-v (Stem κ τ ἃ), Pres. κτείνω, I kill, Part. κτά-ς, 
Part. Mid. κτά-μενος (Killed). 

5. t-arn-v (Stem πτα, wre), Pres. πέτομαι, 7 ἥν, Part. 
πτάς, Mid. πτάμενος, Inf. πτέσθαι. 

6. ἔ-τλη-ν (Stem τὰ a), L endured, Subj. τλῶ, Opt. τλαίην, 
Imperat. τλῆθι, Inf. τλῆναι, Fut. τλήσομαι, Perf. τέτληκα 
($ 317, D., 10). ; 

7. ἔτφθη-ν (Stem φ θα), Pres. φθάνω, 7 anticipate, Inf. 
φθῆναι. 

8. ἐ-πριά-μην (Stem πρίι αλ),; 7 bought, Imperat. πρίω. 


Stems ζ)ν ε. 


9. ἔ-σβη-ν (Stem σβ ε), Pres. σβέννυμι, L quench, ὃ 319, 
7, Inf. σ[βῆναι. 

10. ἔσσκλητν (Stem oxAs), Pres. σκέλλω, 7 dry, Inf. 
σκλῆναι. 

11. Imperat. σχέ-ς, from σχέ-θι (Stem σ χε); Pres. ἔχω, 
§ 327, 6,1 Sing. Ind. ἔ-σχτ-οτν. 


Stens in w. 


12. ἑκάλω-ν (Stem arw), 7 was caught, Pres. ἁλίσκομαι 
(8 324,17), Opt. ἁλοίην, Inf. ἁλῶναι, Part. ἁλούς. 

13. é-Siw-v (Stem 3c), Pres. βιόω, L live, Opt. βιῴην, 
Inf. βιῶναι, Part. βιούς. 


Dialects.—2. Part. γηράς. 

3. [ Her. ἔδρην.] 

4, 3 Sing. tera, 3 Plur. ἔκτᾶν, Subj. κτέωμεν, Inf. κτάμεναι, Mid. éxraro 
(he was killed, ὃ 225, D., 2), Pass. Aor., 3 Plur. ἔκτᾶθεν. 

5. Mid. ἔπτἄτο, Subj. πτῆται, Dor. 1 Sing. Act. ἔπτᾶν. 

6. 8 Plur. ἔσλᾶν. 

7. Subj. 3 Sing. φθήῃ or φθῆσι(ν), (παρα)φθαίησι(ν), 1 Plur. φθέωμεν. 

12. ἥλων, Subj. ἁλώω, Opt. 3 Sing. ἁλοίη, Inf. ἁλώμεναι. 


182 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN pe. ὃ 316. 


14. ἔ-γνω-ν (Stem yuo), Pres. γι-γνώ- πσκω, LI come to 
know (ὃ 324, 14), Opt. γνοίην, Imperat. γνῶθι, Inf. γνῶναι, 
Part. γνούς. 

᾿ Stems mM ι. 

15. Imperat. wi-fi (Stem 7), Pres. πίνω, 7 drink, 1 Sing. 

Aor. Ind. ἔπιον (ὃ 321, 4). 


Stems in v. 
16. ἔ-δυ-ν (Stem dv), Pres. δύω, 7 dive, Imperat. dvb, 
Inf. δῦναι, Part. dve. As to its meaning, see ὃ 329, 4. 
17. ἔτφυ-ν (Stem gv), 7 became, Pres. φύω, L produce, 
Inf. φῦναι. 


Dialects.—14. Subj. γνώω, Inf. γνώμεναι. 

15. Imperat. πίε. 

16. 3 Plur. ἔδῦ-ν, Subj. δύω, ddyc, 8 Sing. Opt. δύη (from δυ-ίη), Inf. 
δῦμεν 

17. 8 Plur. ἔφῦν. 

- Besides these, the following are peculiar to the Ep. Dialect: 

18. Part. azotpdac, Pres. ἀπαυράω, [ take away. 

19. Stem Brn, Pres. βάλλω, I throw, ὃ Dual ξυμβλήτην (met togethae 
Fat. ξυμβλήσομαι, Mid. ἔβλητο (was hit, § 255, D. 2), Subj. βλή-ε-ται, 2 
Sing. Opt. βλεῖο, Inf. βλῆσθαι, Part. ΧΥΜΟΙ͂Σ (hit), 

20. Stem οὐτα, Pres. οὐτάω, J wound, ὃ Sing. οὐτᾶ, Inf. οὐτάμεναι, 
Part. Mid. οὐτάμενος (wounded), Verb. Adj. οὔτᾶτος. 

21. Stem πτα, Pres. πτήσσω, 1 stoop, 2 Dual ἐ-πτή-την, Part. Perf. 
πεπτηώο. 

22. Stem wa, Pres. πελάζω, I approach, Aor. Mid. πλῆτο. 

23. Stem Bp w, Pres. βι-βρώ-σκω, 1 eat (δ 324, 18), Aor. ἔβρων. 

24, Stem πλω, Pres. πλώω, I sail, 2 Sing. Aor. ἔπλως, Part. πλώ-ς. 

25. Stem «re, Pres. κτίζω, 1 found, Part. Aor. Mid. tu-«ri-pevog (well- 
founded). 

26. Stem 41, Pres. φθίνω, 1 waste away, y Bub. Aor. Mid. φθίεται, Opt. 
φθίμην, φθῖτο, Inf. φθίσθαι, Part. φθίμενος. 

27. Stem κλυ, Pres. κλύω, 1 hear, Imperat. Aor. κλῦθι OF κέἐκλῦθι, κλῦτε 
Or κέκλυτε. 

28. Stem Av, Pres. λύω, I loose, Aor. Mid. λύμην, λύτο OF λῦτο. 

29. Stem wv v, Pres. rviw, I breathe, Aor. Mid. ἄμπνῦτο (he recovered 
breath). 

30. Stem ov, Pres. σεύω, I scare, Aor. Mid. otro, Part. σύμενος. 

31. Stem yv, Pres. yéw, [ pour (§ 248), Aor. Mia. ἔχυτο, xuro, Part. 


χύυμενος. 


§ 317. FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 183 


§ 317. Several Perfects also have some forms without a 
connecting vowel: 7 

A) Vowel Stems. 

A number of Vowel-Stems form the Sing. Perf. Ind. 
Act. regularly, but in the Dual and Plural of the Perfect 
and Pluperf. Ind.,in the other moods, and in the Infinitive 
and Participle, may connect the endings immediately with 
the Perfect-Stem. 

1. Stem Ba, Pres. βαίνω, 7 go (ὃ 321, 1). 

Perf. Ind. βέβηκ-α B 
BéBne-ac βέβα-τον βέβα-τε 
βίβηκ-ε βέβα-τον βεβα-σι(ν) 
3 Plur. Subj. βεβῶσι(ν), Part. βεβώς, ase. Gen. 
εβῶτος. 

2. = ya (for γεν) Pres. γίγνομαι, I become, Perf. 
yé-you-a, Plur. also yé-ya-pev (ὃ 327, 14), Part. γεγώς, 
Gen. yeywroc. 


Dialects.—32. Stem ar Wines 1 spring), Aor. Mid. doo, ἄλτο, Subj. 
ἅλεται, Part. ἄλμενος. 

98. Stem γεν, only in γέντο, he took. 

34. Stem dey (Pres. δέχομαι, I accept), Aor. ἐδέγμην, 3 Sing. δέκτο, Im- 
perat. δέξο, Inf. δέχθαι (compare ὃ 273, D.). 

35. Stem Aey (λέγω, L collect), Aor. Mid. λέκτο, he counted. 

36. Stem Aex (no Pres.), Aor. Mid. λέκτο (he laid himself), Imperat. 
λέξο, Inf. λέχθαι, Part. (κατα)λέγμενος, Aor. Act. ἔλεξα, Mid. ἐλέξατο, Fut. 
λέξομαι. 

87. Stem pry, Pres. μίσγω, I mix, Aor. Mid. ἔμϊκτο, μῖκτο. 

38. Stem ὀρ, ὄρνυμι, 1 excite, Aor. Mid. ὦρτο, Imperat. ὄρσο or ὄρσεο 
(époev), Inf. ὄρθαι, Part. ὄρμενος. 

39. Stem ray (πήγνυμι, I fix), Aor. Mid. ἔπηκτο, it was fixed. 

40. Stem παλ (πάλλω, 7 wield), Aor. Mid. πάλτο. 

41. Stem wep (πέρθω, I destroy), Inf. Aor. Mid. πέρθαι (to be de- 
-_stroyed). 

To these are to be added the Participles which have become Ad- 
jectives, ἄσμενος, glad (Stem ἁ ὃ, avddvw, I please); ixpevoc, favorable 
(Stem ix, ἱκνέομαι, I come). 

ὃ 317. Dialects—1. Hom. 3 Plur. βεβαασι(ν), Part. βεβαώς, Dual βε- 
βαῶτε. 

2. Hom. ὃ Plur. γεγαᾶσι(ν), Part. γεγαώς, yeyavia, Gen. γεγαῶτος, 3 
Dual Plup. (é«)yeyarnv. 


ig “a Sa ee 
ἐς, φὰς ΤΑ on 


184 FIRST CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 317. 


3. Stem Ova, Pres. θνήτσκω, T die, Perf. ré-Ovn-xa, Plur. 
τέ-θνᾶ-μεν, ete., Inf. τεθνάναι, Part. τεθνεώς, τεθνεῶσα, 
τεθνεός, Pluperf. 3 Plur. ἐτέθν σαν (ὃ 324, 4). 

4. Stem στα, Pres. ἵπστητμι, Perf. ἕτστη-κα, 7 stand, Plur. 
é-oTa-pev, Subj. ἑστῶμεν, ἑστῶσι(ν), Opt. ἑσταίην, Imperat. 
er v ς J 6 ἂν e ad € J ς ’ Ὶ 
ἕσταβι, ἑστἄτω, ἕστάτον, ἕστατε, Inf. ἑστἄναι, Part. ἑστώς, 
éatwod,iatdc,Gen. ἑστῶτος, 3 Plur. Pluperf. ἕστᾶσαν 


(ὃ 306, etc.). 


5. Stem δὲ, Perf. 8é-di-a or δέ-δοι-κα, 7 fear, Plur. δέδι- 
μεν, δεδίασι(ν), Subj. δεδίω, Opt. δεδιείην, Imperat. δέδιθι, 
Inf. δεδιέναι, Part. δεδιώς, Pluperf. ἐδεδίειν, 3 Dual ἐδεδίτην, 
3 Plur. ἐδέδισαν, also. Aor. ἔδεισα, Fut. δείσομαι. 


Obs.—The regular and irregular forms are mostly both in use. 


B) Consonant Stems. 


In these the peculiar changes of the vowels (δ 303) and 
consonants (δὲ 45-49) must be observed. 


6. Stem io (Aor. εἶδον, 1 saw, ὃ 327, 8). 


Perf. Ind. οἵδ-α,. know, ἴσ-μεν, Subj. εἰδῶ εἰδῶμεν 
οἷσθα ἴσ-τον ἴσ-τε εἰδῇς εἰδῆτον εἰδῆτε 
οἷδ-ε(ν) ἴσ-τον ἴσ-ἄσι(ν) εἰδῇ εἰδῆτον εἰδῶσι(ν) 

Opt. εἰδείην, Imp. ἴστθι ἴσ-τον ἴσ-τε Inf. εἰδέναι 


ἴσττω ἴσ-των ἴσ-ττωσαν Part, εἰδώς, εἰδυῖα, 
εἰδός, Gen. εἰδότ-ος 


Plup. ἤδειν οἵ ἤδη (1 knew) ἡ δειμεν OF ἧσμεν 
ἠδεισθα “ ἤδησθα ἤδειτον OY ὥστον ἤδειτε “ gore 
yoer(v) “ἤδη ἠδείτην “ἤστην ἤδεσαν “ ὅσαν 


Ἐπί. εἴσομαι, Verb. Adj. ἰστέον. 


Dialects.—3. Imperat. τέθνᾶθι, Inf. τεθνάμεν(αι), Gen. Part. τεθνεῶτος, 
τεθνηῶτος, τεθνειῶτος, τεθνηότος, PEVELOT OS; Fem. τεθνηυῖα. 

4.2 Plur. Ind. also ἕστητε, Part. ἑσταώς, Gen. ἑσταότος [Hen ‘re 
ἑστεῶσα]. 

5. δείδια, δείδιμεν, Imperat. δείδιθι, 1 Sing. Perr. also δείδοικα, Age ἔδ- 
δεισα (compare § 77, D.). 

6. 1 Plur. id-pey [Herod. and sometimes also in Att. writers οἴδαμεν, 


3 Plur. οἴδασι], Subj. εἰδέω or ἰδέω, Plur. εἴδομεν, εἴδετε, Inf. iduer(ac), 


Fem. Part. ἰδυῖα, Plup. [goea] ἠείδης, gdee(v) or ἠείδη [2 Plur. ydéare], 8 
Plur. ἔσαν, Fut. εἰδήσω. 


tit 


§ 318. SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 185 


Obs.—Besides οἶσθα, we rarely have oidac, more frequently dec, 
pone, t together mitt + ἤδεισθα, and gdeueyv, ydere, Instead of ἤδειμεν; 
ἤδειτε, ° 

7. Stem ix, only in the Perf. ἔοικα, Z resemble, appear, 

1 Plur. poet. ἔοιγμεν, 3 Plur. quite irregularly εἴ ξα στ(ν) 
(compare ἴσασι), Inf. εἰκέναι (poet. with ἐοικέναι), Part. εἰκ we 
(with ἐοικώς); εἰκυΐα, εἰκός, Plur. ἐῴκειν. 

8. Stem κραγΎ, Pres. κράζω, 7 cry, Perf. κέκραγα, Im- 

perat. κέσκραχ-θι. 


II. Szeconp ΟἸΑΒΒ. OF VERBS IN uu. . 


ὃ 318. 1. The Second Class of the Verbs in μὲ belongs 
to this conjugation only in regard to the inflexion of the 


Dialects.—7. Imperf. εἶκε, Perf. [Her. οἴκα, οἰκώς], Dual ἔϊκτον, 3 Dual 
Plup. ἐΐκτην, 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ἤϊκτο or ἔϊκτο. 

Besides : 

9. Stem pa, 2 Dual Perf. μέμᾶτον, strive, μέμᾶμεν, μέμᾶτε, μεμάᾶσι, Im- 
perat. peparw, Part. μεμαώς, via, 6c, Gen. ὥτος, ὃ Plur. Plup. μέμᾶσαν. 

10. Stem τλα, Perf. τέτληκα, 1 am patient, 1 Plur. τέἐτλᾶμεν, Opt. τε- 
τλαίην, Imperat. τέτλᾶθι, Inf. τετλαμεν(αι), Part. rerAnwe, nvia, Gen. re- 
TANOTOC. 

11: Stem ἀνωγ, Perf. ἄνωγα, I command, 1 Plur. dvwyper, met 
ἄνωχθι, 3 Sing. ἀνώχθω, 2 Plur. ἄνωχθε, Plup. ἠνώγεα. 

12. Stem ἐγερ, Perf. ἐγρ-ήγορ-α, I am awake, 2 Plur. ne ἐγρή- 
γορθε, 8 Plur. Ind. ἐγρηγόρθασι(). 

13. Stem ἐλυθ, Perf. εἰλήλουθα, 1 have come, 1 Plur. εἰλήλουθμεν. 

14. Stem πενθ, Perf. πέπονθα (Pres. racy, I suffer, ἃ 327, 9), 2 Plur. 
πέποσθε (for πεπονθ-τε), Fem. Part. πεπᾶθυϊα. 

15. Stem 710, Perf. πέποιθα (Pres. πείθω, I persuade), 1 Plur. Plup. 
ἐπέπιθμεν, Imperat. πέπεισθι. 

Farther the Participles : 

16. Stem Bow (βιβρώσκω, I eat, ὃ 324, 13), Part. Perf. βεβρώς, Gen. 
βεβρῶτος. ᾿ 

17. Stem wre, πτω (πίπτω, I fall, ὃ 327, 15), Perf. πέπτωκα, Part. 
Gen. πεπτεῶτος, Nom. πεπτώς. 


§ 318. Dialects——Ion. 3 Plur. Pres. Ind. Act. -ῦ σι (), together with 
-bador(y). Hom. 2 Sing. Imperat. -ῦ and -ὅθι (daivd, ὄμνζθι), Inf. 
Hom. -ὑμεναι, ipev (ζευγνυμεν). Hom. forms from daivipa, 1 feast, 
the Opt. éawiro, for δαινυ-ι-το. Similar cases see below, ὃ 319, 32. In 


186 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 319. 


Present-Stem. The Present-Stem of this Second Class is 
formed by adding the syllable vv to the Pure Stem. — 

2. The quantity of the v is determined by the rules in 
§ 303, hence δείκνυμι, but edeikvoper. 

3. Vowel-Stems double ν in the Present-Stem: Stem 
kK epa, κερά-ννυμι, L 127. | 

4. Here also numerous additional forms are in use ac- 
cording to the First Principal Conjugation (δεικνύω), espe- 
cially in the 3 Plur. Pres. Ind.: δεικνύουσι(ν) ; and these 
forms are exclusively used in the. Pres. Subj. and Opt. 

5. Most of the Verbs of this class have the Weak Aor- 
ist; only σβέννυμι, L quench (Stem o [3 ε). forms the 2 Aor- 
ast ἔσβην, Inf. σβῆναι. Compare §§ 316,9; 319, 7. 

The Paradigms of this Class of Verbs are inserted on 
p- 128. 


§ 319. The following verbs belong to the Second Class 
of Verbs in pe: 


Stems in a. 


1. κεράννυμι (Stem cepa, cpa), 1 miz. 
Aor. ἐκέρᾶσα toe Act. κἐκρᾶκα ‘Nor eae ἐκράθην 
Mid. κέκρᾶμαι ἐκεράσθην 
2. κρεμάννυμι (Stem κρεμα), 1 hang, trans. Mid. κρέμαμαι, 1 hang, 
intrans. (§ 312, 12) 
Fut. κρεμῶ (§ 263) ἐκρεμάσθην 
Aor, ἐκρέμᾶσα 
ὃ. πετάννυμι (Stem wera), 1 spread. 
πετῶ (§ 209) ἐπετάσθην 
ἐπέτᾶσα πεπ(ε)τᾶμαι | pate-o| 
4. σκεδάννυμι (Stem creda), I scatter; additional form σκίδνημι 
(δ 812, Ὁ. 16, h) 
σκεδῶ (δ 909) ἐσκεδάσθην 
ἐσκέδᾶσα ἐσκέδασμαι. 


the New-Ion. Dialect the « of the Stem dere is lost in δέξω, ἔδεξα, δέ- 
δεγμαι, ἐδέχθην ; Hom. Pf. (δείδεγμαι, 1 salute) 3 Plur. δειδέχαται. 

§ 319. Dialects—1. Compare ὃ 312, D. 16, and ὃ 312, D. 16,0. Other. 
forms: κεράω, κεραίω, Aor. ἔκρησα. 

2. Fut. κρεμόω, κρεμάᾳς (§ 2438, D.). 


§ 319, SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. 187 


Stems i ε. 

O0bs.—Several of these Stems originally ended in ς. 

5. ἕννυμι (Stem originally Fec, compare Lat. ves-tis), 1 clothe (only 
ἀμφι-ἔννυμι 1S In use). 

ἀμφι-ὦ (δ 263) 
Fut, Mid. ἀμφι-ἔσομαι ἠμφίεσμαι 
Aor. ἠμφί-εσα (§ 240) 
Inf. Aor. Mid. ἐπιέσασθαι 
6. κορέννυμι (Stem cope), L satisfy. 


ἐκόρεσα ἐκορέσθην 
᾿ κεκόρεσμαι 
7. σβέννυμι (Stem σβ ε), J quench. 
σβέσω ἰ π  ἧτὴ ἔσβεσμαι ἐσβέσθην 
ἔσβεσα 
ἔσβην ἔσβηκα 
(δ 316, 9) intransitive (§ 529, 5) 


Fut. σβήσομαι 
8.cropévyvpe (Stem orope) (compare 11 and 25), I spread 
(compare Lat. ster-n-o) 


στορῶ (ὃ 263). ἐστόρεσμαι 
ἐστόρεσα. 
Stems im w. 
9. ζώννυμι (Stem Zw), 1 gird. 
ζώσω ἔζωσμαι 
ἔζωσα (Mid.) ἐζωσάμην 
10. ῥώννυμι (Stem pw), I strengthen. 
pwow ἔῤῥωμαι (1 am strong) ἐῤῥώσθην 
11. στρώννυμι (Stem orpw). Compare No. 8. 
στρώσω ἔστρωμαι ἐστρώθην 
ἔστρωσα 
12. χρώννυμι (Stem ypw), I color. 
ἔχρωσα κέχρωσμαι ἐχρώσθην. 
Consonant-Stems. 
13. ἄγνυμι (Stem ay, originally Fay, § 34, D.), I break. 
ἄξω iadya (I am broken) ἐάγην 
ἔαξα (§ 237) (δ 275, 2) 


Dialects.—5. Imperf. εἴνυον for to-vvoy [Inf. Pres. εἴνυσθαι], Fut. ἀμ- 
φιέσω, toow, Aor. ἕσσα, Mid. ἑέσσατο, Perf. Mid. εἶμαι, ἕσσαι, Part. εἱμένος, 
2 Sing. Plup. ἕσσο, 3 Sing. ἕστο, ἕεστο, ὃ Plur. εἵατο. 

6. Aor. Mid. κορέσσατο, Part. Perf. Act. κεκορηώς, satiated, Mid. κεκό- 


ρημαι. 
18, ἥξα with ἔαξα [Her. Perf. ἔηγα]. 


188 SECOND CLASS OF VERBS IN μι. § 319. 


14. δείκνυμι, see ὃ 318. 
15. eipyvvpe (Stem eipy), J shut in (addit. form eipyw) 
εἵρξω εἵρχθην 
εἷρξα Part. ἕρξας, εἵργμαι 
10. ζεύγνυμι (Stem vy), L bind. 
ζεύξω ἐζύγην 
ἔζευξα ᾿ς ἔζευγμαι [ἐζεύχθην] 
17. κτίννυμι (Stem κτεν), 1 hill, with κτείνω (§ 258) 
18. μίγνυμι (Stem pry), £ miz, with μίσγω (ὃ 327, 7) 


μίξω μέμιχα Ϊ ἐμίχθην 
ἔμιξα μέμιγμαι ἐμίγην 
19. οἴγνυμι (Stem ofy), 1 open (with οἴγω) 
οἴξω ἔῳχα and ἔῳγα (ὃ 279) ἐῴχθην 
ἔῳξα (δ 287) ἔῳγμαι 
20. ὀλλυμι (Stem 6X and ὀλε), for ὀλνυμι, I destroy. 
ὀλῶ (ὃ 262) ὀλώλεκα (ὃ 275, 1) 
ὦλεσα 
τ τα. ee uta intrans., I perish. 
ὠλόμην 
21. ὄμνυμι (Stem 6p, 6p0), I swear. 
ὀμοῦμαι (Act.) ὀμώμοκα (δ 275, 1) ὠμόσθην 
ὦμοσα 9 Sing. Perf. Mid. ὀμώμοται Verb. Adj. (ἀνγώμοτος ἡ 
ὀμώμοσται 
22. ὀμόργνυμι (Stem dpopy), L wipe out. 
wpopga (Mid.) ὠμόρχθην 
23. πήγνυμι (Stem way), I fix [compare Lat. pango} 
ἔπηξα πέπηγα (I am sired) ἐπήχθην 
ἐπάγην 
24. ῥήγνυμι (Stem pay), L tear. 
ἔῤῥηξα (Mid.) ἔῤῥωγα (I am torn) ἐῤῥάγην 
(§ 278) ῥαγήσομαι 


25. στόρνυμι (Stem crop), with στορέννυμι (8) and στρώννυμι (11) 
26. φράγνυμι (Stem ¢gpay), also φάργνυμι, and, according to 
Class 4, a, φράσσω, I shut in, lock in. 


Dialects. —15. Imperf. ἐέργνῦ, with ἐέργω [ἔργω], ὃ Plur. Perf. Mid. 
ἔρχαται, Plup. épyaro (δ 287), Part. Perf. teoypévoc, Aor. Pass. ἐρχθείς, 
with Imperf. ἔργαθον. 

18. Aor. Mid., § 316, 37. 

19. wita, ῴξα [ἀνοιξα], Imperf. ὠΐγνυντο. 

20. ὀλέσσω [ὀλέω], Part. Aor. οὐλόμενος (destructive), with ὀλέιω. 

21. wpooca OY ὄμοσσα. 

To these also belong: 

27. aivupat, ἀποαίνυμαι, I take away, used only in the Pres. 


§ 320. IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 


᾿ Obs.—Nouns are formed from the Pure Verbal-Stems, as: ἡ δεῖξι-ς, 
the announcement ; ὁ κρᾶ-τήρ, the mixing bowl ; τὸ εἴ-μα, the clothing 
—for ἔεσ-μα ; ἡ ζώ-νη, the girdle ; ἡ ῥώ-μη, the strength ; τὸ στρῶ-μα, 
the carpet; τὸ ζυγ-ό-ν, the yoke ; ὁ ὄλε-θρο-ς, the ruin; ὁ συν-ωμό- 
τη-ς, the conspirator; ὁ way-o-c, the frost, hoar-frost. 


CuHaAp. XII.—IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST 
PRINCIPAL CONJUGATION. 


§ 320. The irregularities of the Greek Verb chiefly con- 
sist in the Present-Stem differing from the Verbal-Stem in 
a way different from that which has been pointed out above, 
§ 245, ete. To the four classes there enumerated the fol- 
lowing four classes are to be added. 


Obs.—In these as well as in the following lists, the principal forms 
only are given, from which the rest are easily formed. (Mid.), 
added to a tense, denotes that,in addition to the Active, the 


Dialects.—28. ἄνυμι (and aviw), I complete, only Imperf. Mid. ἤνῦτο. 

29. ἄρνυμαι, 1 acquire, Aor. ἠρόμην, Inf. ἀρέσθαι, 1 Aor. 2 Sing. ἤραο, 
3 Sing. ἤρατο. 

30. ἄχνυμαι, 1 grieve, Aor. ἀκάχοντο (δ 257, D.), Perf. ἀκάχημαι (δ 275, 
1), 3 Plur. ἀκηχέδαται (ὃ 287, D.), 3 Plur. Plup. ἀκαχείατο, Part. ἀκαχή- 
μενος and ἀκηχέμενος. Moreover, the Active ἀκαχίζω (I grieve), Aor. 
ἤκαχον and ἀκάχησα (compare ὃ 326). 

81. γάνυμαι, I rejoice, Fut. γανύσσεται. 

32. δαίνυμι, 1 entertain, Opt. Pres. Mid. 3 Sing. δαινῦτο (δ 318, D.), 3 
Plur. δαινύατ᾽, Fut. daiow (Mid.), Aor. ἔδαισα (Mid.). 

33. καίνυμαι (Stem κα δ), I surpass, Perf. κέκασμαι (I am distin- 
guished). : 

34. κίνυμαι, [ move, additional form of κινέω, Preterite ἔ-κι-ο-ν, I went, 
Subj. ci-w, Opt. κί-οι-μι, Part. κι-ών. 

35. τίνῦμι, τίνῦμαι, additional form of rivw, ὃ 321, Ὁ. 5. 

36. ὀρέγνυμι, additional form of dpéyw, L stretch out, 3 Plur. Perf. Mid. 
ὀρωρέχαται (§ 287). 

37. ὄρνυμι (Stem 6p), I excite, Fut. ὄρσω, Aor. ὥρορον (ὃ 257, D.), 
Perf. ὄρωρα (ὃ 275, 1), I have arisen | Lat. or-cor], Aor. Mid. 3 Sing. ὦρτο, 
arose (§ 316, 38), Perf. Mid. 3 Sing. Ind. ὀρώρ-ε-ται, Subj. ὀρώρηται, with 
Imperf. Mid. dpéovro. 

98, τάνυμαι, With τανύω, reivw, I extend, stretch. 


‘a Δι 
190 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. § 521, 
corresponding Middle form is also in use; 6. g.,in addition to 
ἔτισα (No. 5) ἐτισάμην also is used. 
: Lifth, or Nasal Class. 

§ 321. The Verbal-Stem is strengthened by the addition 
of v, or of a syllable containing v, to form the Present- 
Stem. 

a) v alone, often united with lengthening of the vowel, 
is added to the following Stems: 

1. Stem Ba, Pres. Baivw, I go. 

Aor. Act. Fut. Perf. Pass. 
ἔ-βη-ν (δ 816, 1) βήσομαι βέβηκα (ὃ 317, 1) 
ἔβη-σα βήσω (§ 829, 2) Verb. Adj. Barée 

2. Stem ἐλα, Pres. 2X advo, drive. 
ἤλᾶ-σα ἐλῶ (§ 263) ἐλήλακα (δ 275, 1) ἠλάθην 

ἐλήλαμαι Verb, Adj. ἐλατέος 

3. Stem Ca, Pres. φθ ἅν ὦ, 1 anticipate. 
ἔ-φθη-ν (δ 810,7) φθήσομαι ἔφθᾶκα 

ἔ-φθᾶ-σα 

4. Stem wt, Pres. tivw, 1 drink (additional Stem πο). Compare — 
§ 327, 10. : 
ἔ-πι-ο-ν (δ 816,15) πώσρμαι (δ 265) / 

5. Stem τι, Pres. τ ν ὦ, pay penalty. 
é-ri-ca (Mid.) τίσω τέτικα ἐτίσϑην 

τέτισμαι 

6. Stem φθι, Dres. φθν ὦ, 1 perish, waste away. ; 
ἔ-φθι-σα φθίσομαι ἔφθιμαι ἐφθίθην 

7. Stem dv, Pres. δύν ὦ (with δύω, Class 1)),,.1 immerge. 
ἐ-δῦ-ν (δ 316, 16) δύσω δέδῦκα ἐξύθην 
ἔδυσα, I dipped. 

8. Stem dadx, Pres. ὃ ἀ κν ὦ, 1 hte. 
ἔ-δᾶκ-ο-ν δήξομαι δέδηχα ἐδήχθην 

§ 891. Dialects —1. Aor. Mid. ἐβήσετο, ὃ 268, Ὁ. 

2. Pres. ἐλάω, Fut. dow, age, ὃ 243, D., Aor. ἔλασσα, Mid, ἠλᾶσάμην. 
3 Plup. Mid. ἐληλάδατο (δ 287, D.) [ἠλάσθην]. 

3. Ep. φθάνω, Part. Aor. Mid. φθάμενος. 

5. Ep. rive, with ri-w and τίνυμι, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 35. 

6. Ep. φθίνω, φθίω, Aor. ἐφθίμην, ἔφθιτο, ὃ 316, D. 26; with Pres. φθι- 
νύθω. 

7. Aor. Mid. ἐδύσετο, ὃ 268, D. [Pres. ἐνδυνέω, I put on. Compare 
§ 823). | 


8 322. FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 191 


9. Stem κἄμ, Pres. κ ἁ μν ὦ, I weary. Ξ 


ἔ-καμ-ο-ν καμοῦμαι κέκμηκα (§ 282) 
10. Stem rep, Pres. τέ μν ὦ, 1 cut. 
ἔ-τεμ-ο-ν (ἔτἄμον) τεμῶ τέτμηκα (§ 282) ἐτμήθην 


§ 322. 6) The syllable av is added to the following 
Stems : 
11. Stem αἰσθ, Pres. αἰσθ-άν-ο-μαι, LI perceive. 


ησθ-ό-μην : αἰσθ-ή-σομαι ἤσθ-η-μαι 
12. Stem ἁμαρτ, Pres. ἁμαρτ-άν-ω, 1 err, sin. 
ἥμαρτ-ο-ν ἁμαρτ-οή-σομαι ἡμάρτ-η-κα ἡμαρτή-θην 
13. Stem αὐ ἕ, Pres. αὐξ-ἄν-ω and αὔξω, I increase [aug-eo| 
nvé-n-oa αὐξήσω ηὔξηκα ηὐξήθην 


αὐξήσομαι (Passive) 
14, Stem βλαστ, Pres. βλαστάνω, 1 bud. 


ἔ-βλαστ-ο-ν βλαστ-ή-σω ἐβλάστηκα (§ 274 exc.) 

15. Stem dapd, Pres. δαρθάν ω, I sleep. 
é-Oap0-o-v | δαρθ-ή-σόμαι δεδάρθηκα 

16. Stem ἐχθ, Pres. (amex O advopat, I am hated. 
(ἀπ)ηχθ-ό-μην (ἀπ)εχθ-ή-σομαι (ἀπ)ήχθημαι 

17. Stem iZ, Pres. ἱζάνω and ἵζω, 7 seat myself. 

18. Stem κιχ, Pres. etx ἅ ὦ, 1 meet (compare ὃ 313, Ὁ. 6) 
ἔ-κιχ-ο-ν κχ-ή-σομαι 

19. Stem οἱ ὃ, Pres. οἰδάνω and oidéo, L swell, 

οἰδή-σω ῴδηκα 

20. Stem ὀλισθ, ~Pres. ὀλισθάν ω, L slip. 
ὦλισθο-ν ὀλισθ-ή-σω 

21. Stem dcop, Pres. ὀσφραίνομαι, I smell, 
wopp-d-pnv ὀσφρ-ή-σομαι 


22. Stem ὀφλ, Pres. 6¢A-ton-av-w (compare ὃ 324) and 
ὀφείλω, I owe, 
ὦφλ-ο-ν ὀφλ-ή-σω ὥφληκα 


Dialects —9. Part. Perf. κεκμηώς, Gen. κεκμηῶτος. 

10. With τμήγω, Aor. Pass. 3 Plur, ἔπμαγεν, with Pres. τέμει. 

Peculiar to the Hom. dialect are: Aor. ¢d-e(v), dluait, Fut. πε-φή- 
copa, from Stem φ α; Pres, gaivw (φαείνω), 1 shine, show, Aor. Pass. 


φαάνθην. 
§ 322. Dialects.—12. Aor. ἤμβροτον for ἡμρᾶτον (§ 957, Ὁ. Com- 
pare ὃ δὅ1,.0)).΄ 


19. ἀ(θίξω. 

15. Aor. ἔδρᾶθον ( 257, D.). 
18. Ep. κίχάνω. 

21. [Herod, ὀσφράμην, 1 Aor. 


192 FIFTH, OR NASAL CLASS. 


23. Stem ad, Pres. avdavw, I please, 
24. Stem Oiy, Pres. θιγγάνω, I touch. 


é-Qiy-0-v θίξομαι 
25. Stem λ ἃ β, Pres. λαμβάνω, I take. 
ἐ-λὰβ-ο-ν λήψομαι εἴληφα (δ 274) ἐλήφθην 


εἴλημμαι (Seldom λέλημμαι) 
26. Stem λᾶθ, Pres. λανθάν ω, I am hidden, with Ow (Class 3), 
Mid., 7 forget. 


ἐ-λᾶθ-ο-ν λήσω λέληθα 

Mid. ἐλαθόμην λήσομαι λέλησμαι 

27. Stem Aa yx, Pres. λαγχάνω, I attain. 
ἐ-λᾶχ-ο-ν λήξομαι εἴληχα (ὃ 274) 

εἴληγμαι 

28. Stem pad, Pres. μανθάν ω, I learn. 
ἔ-μᾶθ-ο-ν μαθ-ή-σομαι μεμάθηκα 

29. Stem πῦὔθ, Pres. πυνθάνομαι, I learn, with πεύθομαι, Class 9, 
ἐ-πῦθ-ό-μην πεύσομαι πέπυσμαι 

80. Stem roy, Pres. τυγχάνω, I meet, with τεύχω, I prepare, Cl. 2. 
ἔ-τυχ-ο-ν τεύξομαι τε-τύχ-η-κα 


seldom τέτευχα 

31. Stem guy, Pres. φυγγάνω, L flee, with φεύγω (Class 2). 

Obs. 1.—The verbs in 23-31, whose Stem forms a short syllable, 
insert another nasal in addition to the affix αν. In βαίνω (1) 
and ὀσφραίνομαι (21) c has crept in (ὃ 253), as well as in κερδαίνω, 
I gain, which forms only the Perf. κεκέρδηκα, from the Stem cep da; 
all the other forms. are regular, according to Class 4. A large 
part of the verbs (No. 11-16; 18-22, 28, and 30) form either some 
or all the tenses, except those of the Present-Stem, free a Stem 
in ε (compare below, § 826). 

Obs, 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns: τὸ βῆ-μα, the step ; ἡ φθί-σι-ς, the consumption ; ὁ κάμ-ατο-ς, 


Dialects —23. Imperf., ὃ 237, D., Aor. [ἕαδον] εὔαδον (δ 237), [δήσω] 
ἕαδα. 

20. [Hler. Fut. λάμψομαι, Perf. λελάβηκα, Aor. Pass. AndupOny. 

λέλαμμαι, Verb. Adj. λαμπτός.] 

Hom. Inf. Aor. Mid. λελαβέσθαι (ὃ 257, D.). 

26. Pres., with ἐκληθάνω, cause to forget, Aor. ἔλησα and λέλᾶθον 
(ὃ 257, D.), λελαθόμην (1 forgot), Perf. Mid. λέλασμαι. 

27. Aor. λέλαχον, L shared with [Fut. λάξομαι], Perf. beat 

29. Aor. Opt. πεπύθοιτο (§ 257, D.). 

30. Also τεύχω, Aor. τετυκεῖν, ‘Mid. τετύκοντο, Perf. τέτυγμαι, 3 Plur. 
τετεύχαται, Aor. ἐτύχθην, with the Pres. τιτύσκομαι (δ 824, D. 37), T aim 
at, Aor. ἐτύχησα, I met (δ 828). 


§ 824, SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 193 


the exhaustion ; τὸ λῆμ-μα, the assumption ; ἡ λήθ-η, the forgetting ; 
ἡ τύχ-η, the chance, accident ; and from Stems which are length- 
ened by ε: ἡ αἴσθ-η-σι-ς, the sensation ; τὸ ἁμάρτ-η-μα, the error ; 
ὁ μαθ-η-τή-ς, the scholar. 


§ 323. c) The syllable ve is added to the following 


Stems : 
32. Stem Bv, Pres. Buys, I stop up. 
ἔ-βῦ-σα βύσω Mid. βέβυσμαι 
88. Stemix, Pres. ἱκνοῦμαι, 1 come, with ἱκάνω, according to 
§ 322 
ἱκ-ό-μην ἵξομαι ἵγμαι 
84. Stem κὔ Pres. κυνέω, I hiss. 
ἔ-κυ-σα 


35. Stem wer, Pres. rervéw, I fall (compare πίπτω, ὃ 327, 15) 
ἔ-πεσ-ο-ν (for é-rer-o-v), together with ἔ-πιτν-ο-ν 
36. Stem ὑπεχ, Pres. ὑπισχνοῦμαι, 1 promise (compare ἔχω, 


§ 327, 6) 
ὑπεσχόμην ὑποσχήσομαι ὑπέσχημαι 
so likewise ἀμπισχνοῦμαι, I wear (also ἀμπέχομαι), Aor. ἤμπισχον, Inf. 


ἀμπισχεῖν. 


§ 324. Siath Class, or Inchoative Verbs. 


The Verbal-Stem is enlarged by affixing ox to form the 
Present-Stem. This ox is added to Vowel-Stems (exc. 21) 
at once, but to Consonant-Stems after the insertion of the 
connecting vowel... Several of the verbs belonging to this 
class (Nos. 2, 6, 7, 13, 14, 16, 20) farther strengthen the 
Present-Stem by means of a reduplication with the vowel 
ι: γι-γνώ-σκ-ω | Lat. (y)-n0-sc-o |. 


§ 323. Dialects.—32. [Herod. Bivw.] 

33. ἵκω, Aor. ἴξον (δ 268, D.), Part. ἴκμενος, favorable (§ 316, D.). 

34. κύσσα. 

Moreover (to a—c), the Verbs: 

87. Stem ἀλειτ, Pres. ἀλιταίνω, I sin, Aor. ἤλιτον, Mid. ἀλίτοντο, Part. 
Perf. ἀλιτήμενος, sinful. 

38. Stem ad 9, Pres. ἀλφάνω, I acquire, Aor. ἦλφον. 

39. ἀγινέω, Only in Pres., [ lead, with ἄγω. 

40. ἐρυγγάνω, I roar, Aor. ἤρυγον, Pres. also ἐρεύγομαι. 

41. Stem χ ὃ, Pres, χανδάνω, I embrace, Aor, ἔχἄδον, Fut. xe 
Perf. κέχανδα. ; 


194 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. ὃ 324. 


As many of these verbs denote a beginning or coming 
into being, all of them are usually called Inchoatives. 


Stems im a. | 
1. Stem ynpa, Pres. yn pa-ox-w,I grow old (seldom γηρά-ω). Com- 
pare sene-sc-o 
é-ynpa-oa ynpa-copat γε-γήρα-κα 
Inf. γηρᾶ-ναι (§ 810, 2) 4% 
2. Stem dpa, Pres. δι-δρά-σκ-ω, 1 run (used only in coni- 


pounds) 
ἔ-δρᾶ-ν δρά-σομαι δέ-δρᾶ-κα (δ 316, 8) 
3. Stem ἡβα, Pres. ἡ β ά-σκ-ω, I become marriageable (compare 
pube-sc-0) 
ἥβη-σα 
4. Stem Ova (from θ av), Pres. θν ἡ - σκ-ω, Idie(usually ἀποθνήσκω, 
ἔ-θᾶν-ον θᾶν-οῦμαι τέ-θνη-κα (δ 817, 8) 
Fut. 8, τεθνήξω, ὃ 2391 θνη-τό-ς 
(mortal) 
5. Stem tra, Pres. ἱλά-σκ-ομαι, I conciliate. 
Mid. ἱλᾶ-σά-μην ἱλά-σ-ο-μαι ἱλά-σθη-ν 
6. Stem μνα, Pres. μι-μνή-σκτ-ω, T remember. 
ἔ-μνη-σα μνήτ-σω ἐ-μνή-σθη-ν 
μέ-μνη-μαι μνη-σθήσομαι 
[memini | 
7. Stem roa, Pres. re-rpa-ox-w, ἴ sell. 
(for the Aor. and Fut. ἀπεδόμην πὲ-πρᾶ-κα ἐ-πρά-θην 
ἀποδώσομα) πέ-πρᾶ-μαι πρα-θήσομαε 


πε-πρά-σομαι 
8. Stem ga, Pres. φά-σκ-ω, 18αῃ. Compare φη-μί, ὃ 312, 5. 
9. Stem ya and y dy, Pres. χά-σκ-ω, [open the mouth. 
ἔ-χἄν-ον Xav-ovpat κέ-χην-α. 


Stem in ε. 
10. Stem ape, Pres. ἀρέ-σκ-ω, I please. 
ἤρε-σα ἀρέ-σω ἠρέ-σθην, 


Stems ἦγ) w. 
11. Stem βιω, Pres. (ἀν α)βιώ-σκ-ομαι, I revive. 
(ἀν)ε-βίω-ν (δ 316, 13) 
(ἀνγεβιωσάμην, 1 revived. Compare § 329. 


ὃ 824, SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. 195 


12. Stem BrAw (from por, ὃ 51, D.), Pres: BA G-oK-w, L go. 
ἔ-μολ-ον μολ-οῦμαι | 
18. Stem B po, Pres. βι-βρώ-σκ-ω, I consume. 
βέ-βρω-κα (Part. BeBpwe, ὃ 317, 
. 16) 


Let 
βέ-βρω-μαι 
14. Stem γνω, Pres. γε-γνὦ-σκ-ω, L recognize [Lat. (7)no-sc-o] 
é-yvw-y (δ 910, 14) γνώ-σομαι ἔ-γνω-κα ἐ-γνώ-σθην 


ἔ-γνω-σ-μαι 


15. Stem Op (from @0p), Pres. θρώ-σκ-ω, I leap. 


ἔ-θορ-ον 
16. Stem τρω, Pres. τι-τρώ-σκ-ω, I wound. 
ἔ-τρω-σα τρώ-σω τέ-τρω-μαι ἐ-τρώ-θην 
17. Stem aX and ἅλω, Pres. ἁλ-ί-σκτ-ομαι, [am taken. 
ἑ-ἄλω-ν ἁλώ-σομαι ἑ-ἄάλω-κα OF ἥλω-κα 
ἥλων (§ 316, 12) (compare § 237) 
18. Stem ἀμβλ and dp Bra, Pres. ἀμβλ-ί-σκ-ω, 1 miscarry. 
ἤμβλω-σα ἤμβλω-κα 
19. Stem advaX and ἀναλω, Pres. ἀνᾶλ-ί-σκ-ω, 1 expend. 
ἀνάλω-σα OY ἀνήλωσα ἀνᾶλώ-σω ᾿ ἀνάλω-κα 1 ἀναλώ-θην 
also ἠνάλω-σα ἀνήλω-κα ἀνηλώ-θην. 


Stem in ι. | 
20. Stem πι, Pres. πι-πί-σκ-ω, 1 give to drink. Compare πί-ντ-ω, 
§ 321, 4. 


ἔ-πι-σα πί-σω 


Stems in v. 
21. Stem κυ, Pres. cv-i-ox-w, 1 fructify. 

22. Stem pe Ov, Pres. μεθύ-σκ-ω, 1 make drunk, Mid., I become drunk. 
ἐ-μεθῦ-σα ἐ-μεθύ-σθην. 
Consonant-Stems. 

23. Stem ἀμπλἄκ, Pres. ἀμπλᾶκ-ί-σκ-ω, I fail. 
ἠμπλᾶκ-ον ἀμπλᾶκ-ή-σω 
24, Stem (ἐπ)α ὑ ρ, Pres. (ἐπ)α ὑρ-ί-σκ-ομαι, I enjoy. 
ἐπηυρ-όμην 
Inf. ἐπαυρ-έσθαι 
§ 324. Dialects. —12. Perf. μέ-μ-β-λω-κα (compare § 51, D., and 
§ 282, D.). 
13. Aor. ἔ-βρω-ν (ὃ 316, D. 23), with the Pres. βεβρώθω. 
15. 3 Plur. Fut. θορέονται [with θόρ-νυ-μαι, according to ὃ 319]. 
16. With τρώ-ω. 


24. Aor, ἐπηῦρον, Inf. ἐπαυρεῖν. 


196 SIXTH CLASS, OR INCHOATIVE VERBS. ὃ 322. 
25. Stem evp, Pres. et p-i-ox-w, L find. 
evp-ov (Mid.) εὑρ-ή-σω εὕρ-η-κ-α εὑρ-ἐ-θην 
εὕρ-η-μαι εὑρ-ε-θή-σομαι 


26. Stem orep, Pres. στερ-ί-σκ-ω, I deprive (with στερῶ, ΜΊΑ, 
στέρομαι, . am deprived) 
ἐ-στέρ-η-σα στερ-ή-σω ἐ-στέρ-η-κα ἐ-στερ-ή-θην 
ο΄ ἐ-στέρτ-η-μαι 
27. Stem ἀλυκ, Pres. ἀλύ-σκ-ω, I shun. 


ἤλυξα - ἀλύξω 
28. Stem duday, Pres. δι ὃ ἀ -σκ-ω͵ I teach. 
ἐ-δίδαξα διδάξω δε-δίδαχ-α - ἐ-τδι-δάχθην 
: δε-δίδαγμαι 
29. Stem Adx, Pres. \Xa-oK-w, (1 utter, speak. 
ἐ-λᾶκ-ον λακ-ή-σομαι ᾿ λέ-ληκ-α 
ἐ-λάκ-η-σα λέ-λᾶκ-α. 


Obs. 1.—The last three Stems suppress a Guttural before ox. Sey- 
eral of the Stems quoted form a part of the tenses by affixing ε 
to the Stem (compare § 322, Obs., and § 326), especially Nos. 28, 
25, 26, 29. 

Obs. 2.—The following may serve as examples of the formation of 
nouns: ὁ θάν-α-το-ς, death ; τὸ μνη-μεῖο-ν, the memorial ; ὁ αὐτό- 
μολ-ο-ς, the deserter ; ἡ γνώ-μη, the opinion ; ἡ ἅλω-σι-ς, the capture ; 
ὁ διδάσκ-αλο-ς- (from the Present-Stem), the teacher; ἡ διδαχ-ὴ 
(from the Verbal-Stem), the instruction ; and from Stems which 
are enlarged by ε: τὸ εὕρ-η-μα, the discovery; % orép-n-ot-c, Uke 
deprivation. 


Dialects.—26. Aor. στερέσαι, Part. Pass. Aor. στερείς. 

28. [διδασκῆσαι] a secondary Stem is da, Aor. δέδαον, I taught (δ 896, 
Ὦ, 40). 

29. Ion. form ληκέω (ὃ 325), Fem. Part. Perf. λελἄκυϊα. 

And the Special Verbs: 

30. Stem adda, Pres. ἀλδήσκω, I become great, Aor. ἤλδανον, I made 
great. 

31. Stem κὰ ε, Pres. κικλήσκω, with καλέω, I call. 

32. Stem ¢ av, Pres. [gat-ox-w] πι-φαύ-σκ-ω, L call. 

33. Stem ἀ πα φ (from ἀφ), Pres. ἀπ-αφ-ί-σκ-ω, I deceive, Aor. ἤπαφον, 
Subj. ἀπάφω. 

34, Stem ἀρ, Pres. dp-ap-i-ox-w, 1 fit, Aor. ἤραρον, I fitted, Perf. ἄρηρα, 
1 suit, Fem. Part. ἀρᾶρυϊα, Part. Mid. dppevoc, suitable, Weak Aor. ἧρσα, 
I fitted, Aor. Pass. ἄρθην. 

30. Stem ἐκ, Pres. -i-cx-w, 7 make equal (compare ὃ 817, B. 7). 

36. Imperf. ἴσκε(ν), he spoke. 

37. Stem rv y (compare ὃ 322, 80), Pres. τιτύσκομαι, 7 aim at. 


§ 325. SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 197 


ὃ 325. Seventh, or E-class. 
A short Stem alternates with one enlarged by «. 


A) The enlarged Stem in ε is the Present-Stem; the 
shorter serves to form the other tenses. 


1. Stem yap, Pres. yapé-w, 1 marry (Act. uxorem duco, Mid. nubo) 
ἔ-γημ-α γᾶμ-ὦ (Mid.) γε-γάμ-η-κα 
Ὡς ἡ γετγάμτ-η-μαι 
2. Stem γηθ, Pres. γηθέ-ω, I rejoice. 
γέ-γηθ-α, I am rejoiced. 
3. Stem dor, Pres. don é-w, I seem. 


ἔ-δοξα δόξω Mid. δέδογ-μαι 
4. Stem κυρ, Pres. evpé-w and κύρω, I meet. 
ἔ-κυρ-σα κύρσω 


5. Stem μαρτυρ, Pres. papripé-w, [am witness, 
Mid. μαρτύρομαι, I call to witness. 
6. Stem ἕυρ, Pres. Evpéw,L shave. Mid. ξἕόρομαι 


é-Evp-apnv ἐξύρ-η-μαι 
7. Stem war, Pres. πατέ-ομαι, [ eat. 

ἐ-πᾶσάμην πέπασμαι 
8, Stem ῥιφ, Pres. ῥιπτ-έτ-ω and pizr-w (according to ὃ 249), ἢ 

throw. | 
ἔῤῥιψα ῥίψω ἔῤῥιφα {iow 
ἔῤῥιμμαι ἐῤῥίφθην — 

9. Stem ὦθ, Pres. ὦ θέ-ω, 1 push. 

ἔτωσα (§ 237) wow (ὠθήσω Mid.) ἔ-ωσ-μαι ἐ-ὠσθην 


ὃ 325. ΤιΙαΙοοίβ.--1 Fut. γαμ-έω, 3 Sing. Fut. Mid. γαμέσσεται, she will 
marry. 

3. [δοκήσω, ἐδόκησα. | 

8. 3 Sing. Plup. Mid. ἐρέριπτο. 

Besides : 

a) Stem yeywy, Pres. γεγωνέ-ω, I call, Perf. yéywva, Fut. γεγωνήσω. 

b) Stem ὃ ἅ τ, Pres. daré-opar, I distribute, Fut. δάσομαι, Aor. δάσσατο, 
Perf. δέδασται. 

ce) Stem δου π, Pres. δουπέ-ω, I make a sound, Aor. ἰ(γ)δούπη-σα, Perf. 
δέ-δουπ-α. ᾿ 

d) Stem εἰλ, ἐλ, Pres. εἰςλέ-ω, I press, Imperf. ἐείλεον (§ 237), Aor. 3 
Plur. ἔλσαν, Perf. Mid. ἔελμαι, Aor. Pass. ἐάλην (§ 295), 3 Plur. dey, Inf. 
ἀλήμεναι. 

6) Stem κελα ὃ, Pres. κελαδέ-ω, I resound, Part. κελάδ-ων. 

J) Stem κεν τ, Pres, κεντέ-ω, I sting, Aor, Inf. κέν-σαι. 


-" 


198 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 826, 


Obs.—In some verbs the Stem with ¢ extends even farther than the 
Present-Stem. Examples of the formation of nouns: ὁ ydp-o-c, 
the wedding ; ἡ δόξα, the appearance ; τὸ μαρτύρ-ιο- y, the testimony ; 
ἡ ὦ-σι-ς OF ὦθη-σις, pushing. 


§ 326. B) The shorter Stem is the Present-Stem; the 
enlarged one in « serves to form the other tenses. 


10. Stem aid(e), Pres. αἴδ-ομαι and αἰδέ-ομαι, 1 am ashamed. 
11. Stem are (ce), Pres. dX EE-w, [ ward off. 


ἠλεξ-ἄμην ἀλεξ-ή-σομαι 
12. Stem ἀ χθίε), Pres. ἄχθ-ομαι, 1 am vered. 
ἀχθέ-σομαι ἠχθέ-σθην 


ἀχθε-σθήσομαι 
13. Stem Booxk(e), Pres. β ὁ σκ-ω, I pasture. 
βοσκή-σω ; from the Stem Bo the Verb. Adj. βο-τός 
14. Stem βουλί(ε), Pres. BotrA-opat, LI will. 


(Augment, § 234) βουλή-σομαι βε-βουλή-μαι ἐ-βουλή-θην 

15. Stem ὃ ε(ε), Pres. dé-w, I need (δεῖ, it is necessary), Mid. δέομαι, 
1] require. 

ἐ-δέη-σα δεή-σω de-dén-ka ἐ-δεή-θην (§ 328, 2) 
16. Stem ép(e), Pres. not usual (δ 327, 13) : 

ἠρ-όμην, I asked. ἐρή-σομαι, Inf. ἐρέσθαι 
17. Stem ἐῤῥ(ε), Pres. ἔῤ ῥ΄-ω, [ go away. 

ἤῤῥη-σα ἐῤῥή-σω ἤῤῥη-κα 


Dialects.—g) Stem cruz, Pres. κτυπέ-ω, 1 ring, Aor. ἔκτύπ-ον. 

h) Pres. πιέζω and πιεζέ-ω, 1 press, Aor. ἐπίεσα. 

ἢ) Stem pry, Pres. pryé-w, 1 shudder, Perf. ἔῤῥτγα. 

k) Stem orvy, Pres. orvyé-w, 1 hate, shun, Aor. torvyoy and στυγῆσαι, 
ἔστυξα, I made dreadful. 

ἢ Stem 1A, Pres. φιλέω, 7 love, Aor. ἐ-φτιλ- ά- μην. 

m) Pres. χραισμέω,͵ [ help, Aor. ἔχραισμον. 

Three Verbs in aw with a movable a are here to be noticed: 

n) Stem yo, Pres. yoa-w, I wail, Imperf. é-yo-ov. 

0) Stem p dx, Pres. μηκά- ο-μαι͵, Tio, Perf. μέτμηκ-α, Aor. ἐςμᾶκ-ον. 

p) Stem pic, Pres. μῦκά-ο-μαι, I roar, Perf. μέμῦκ-α, Aor. ἔμῦκ-ον. 


§ 326. Dialects.—10. ydécaro, Imperat. αἴδεσσαι, Fut. αἰδέ-σομαι, Aor. 
Pass. 3 Plur. αἴδεσθεν. 

11. ἄλαλκον (ὃ 257). 

14, Pres. βόλεται, Imperf. ἐβόλοντο, Perf. βέβουλα. 

15. Aor. ἐδεύησα, once δῆσα, I was in want of, also Pres. δεύομαι. 

16. Pres. εἴρομαι, Fut. εἰρήσομαι. 


§ 826, SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. 199 


18. Stem εὑ ὃ (ε), Pres. e¥ dw, I sleep (generally καθεύδων 
Augment, ὃ 240 (xad)ebdn-ow 
19. Stem ἑ ψ(ε), Pres. ἕψ -, I cook. 
ἥψη-σα ἑψή-σομαι ἥψη-μαι ἡψή-θην 
Verb. Adj. ἑφθός 
20. Stem @eXA(e) or ἐθελᾷ(ε), Pres. OEA-w OF ἐθέλ-ω, 1 will. 
ἠθέλη-σα (ἐ)λθελή-σω ἠθέλη-κα 
21. Stem ἱ ζ(ε), Pure Stem ἑ δ, Pres. ἵζομαι, I seat myself; also 
iZavw, Class 5. Compare ἕζομαι. 
ἐκαθισάμην (§ 240) καθιζήσομαι and καθεδοῦμαι (δ 263) 
22, Stem κλαὺυ and κλαιε, Pres. cXaiw (κλάω), 1 weep. Com- 


pare § 253. 
ἔκλαυ-σα κλαιήσω with κλαύσομαι 
23. Stem pay(e), Pres. μάχομαι, 1 fight. 
ἐ-μαχε-σάμην μαχοῦμαι (ὃ 263) με-μάχη -μαι 


24, Stem μελίε), Pres. μέλει μοι, 7s a@ care to me; Mid. μέλο- 
pa, I care for, take care of. 


ἐ-μέλη-σε μελή-σει με- Sy ge ἐ-μελή-θην 
(ἐπι)μελήσομαι 
25. Stem μελλίε), Pres. μέλλ-ω, Lam on the point, hesitate. 
ἠ-μέλλη-σα μελλή-σω 


(§ 234, Ods.) 
26. Stem μενᾷ(ε), Pres. μέν-ω, IT remain [mane-o, man-si], Verbal 
Adj. μεν-ε-τός 


ἔ-μεινα μεν-ὦ με-μένη-κα 
27. Stem μὺυ ζ(ε), Pres. μύ ζ ὦ, 1 suck. 
ἐ-μύζη-σα μυζή-σω 
28. Stem vep(e), Pres. ν ἐμ -ω, 1 assign. 
ἔ-νειμα γεμ-ῶ νε-νέμη-κα (Mid.) é-veun-Ony 
29. Stem ὁ ζ(ε), Pure Stem ὁ ὃ, Pres. 62-w, L smell. 
ὥζη-σα ὀζή-σω ὄδ- δ-α(δ 275, D.) [ Lat. od-or]} 
30. Stem oi(e), Pres. oi-o pau, I think (compare § 244) 
οἰή-σομαι φή-θην 
31. Stem οἰ χίῴε), Pres. οἴχ-ομαι, 1 am off. 
οἰχή-σομαι οἴχ-ωκ-α 


Dialects.—19. [Imperf. ec. | 

23. μαχέ-ομαι, Part. μαχειόμενος Or μαχεούμενος, Fut. μαχήσομαι and 
μαχέσομαι. 

24. Perf. μέμηλε, Plup. μεμήλει, Perf. Mid. μέ-μ-β-λε-ται (Plup. -ro), 
§ 51, D. 

26. Perf. μέμονα, I am disposed, strive. 

30. Pres. ὀΐ-ομαι, di-w, Aor. Mid. dicaro, Aor. Pass. ὠΐσθην. 

31. Perf. οἴχηκα (οἴχημαι), with the Pres. ofy-vé-w, according to ὃ 323. 


200 SEVENTH, OR E-CLASS. § 326. 


(οἴχ-ωκ-α, with irreg. Reduplication [§ 275] for oiy-wx-a. Com- 


pare § 35, a) 
32. Stem ΟΝ Pure Stem 696), Pres, ὀφείλω, I owe (δ 253, 
Obs.) 
,ὥφελ-ον [utinam]  ὀφειλή-σω ὠφείλη-κα 
ὠφείλη-σα 
33. Stem περ δ(ε), Pres. πέρδω 
ἔ-παρδ-ον παρδή-σομαι πέ-πορδ-α 
34, Stem π (ε) τ (ε), Pres. πέττομαι, 1 fly. 
ἐ-π(:)τ-ό-μην π(ε)τή-σομαι 
(§ 61, ¢) 
30. Stem pu(e), Pres. péw, [ flow (§ 248). 
ἔῤῥευ-σα (rare, § 260, 2) ῥυή-σομαι ἐῤῥύη-κα ἐῤῥύην 


(with ῥεύσομαι) 
36. Stem στι β(ε), Pres. στείβ-ω, L tread. 
ἐ-στίβη-μαι 

37. Stem rv are, Pure Stem rv π (ὃ 249), Pres. ri πτω, J strike, 

ἔ-τυπ-ον τυπτή-σω Mid, ré-rup-pae ἐ-τύπ-ην 

38. Stem χαιρε, Pure Stem yap, Pres. χαίρω, I rejoice (δ 258) 

χαιρή-σω κε-χάρη-κα ἐ-χάρ-ην 

κε-χάρη-μαι 

Obs.—The ε sometimes appears in all the tenses except the Present, 
sometimes only in some of them; sometimes it is added to the 
pure, sometimes to the strengthened Stem: pev-e, ort B-e, iZe, 
ὀζειτυπτε. The formation of nouns shows the same varieties: 
αἰδή-μων, shame-faced , ἡ βούλη-σι-ς, voluntas ; ἐθελή-μων, voluntary ; 


Dialects.—38. Part. Perf. κεχαρηώς, Fut. κεχαρήσω, Aor. ἐχήρατο, and 
3 Plur. κεχάροντο, ὃ 257, Ὁ. 
᾿ Besides : 

39. Stem adr O(c), Pres: ἄλθ-ομαι, J become well, Fut. ἀλθή-σομαι. 

40. Stem da, Aor. δέδαον (ὃ 257, D.), I taught, Aor. Mid. Inf. δεδάα- 
σθαι (to get to know), Aor, Pass. ἐδάην (I learned), besides Fut. δαήσομαι, 
Perf. δεδάηκα, Part. Perf. δεδαώς. 

41. Stem κη δ(ε), Pres. κήδ-ω, 1 grieve, Fut. κηδή-σω, Pert. κέκηδ-α (I 
am concerned), Fut. κεκἄδήσομαι. 

42. Stem με δ(ε), Pres. péd-w, T rule, Mid., I reflect, Fut. μεδή-σομαι. 

43, Stem vO, Pres. πείθω, I persuade, Fut. also πιθήσω, Part. Aor. 
πιθήσας. 

44, Stem rop(e), Aor. ἔ-τορ-ον and ἐ-τόρη-σα, I bored throngs Fut. 
τετορή-σω. 

45. Stem φι ὃ, Pres. φείδομαι, I spare, Aor. Mid. πεφιδέσθαι (§ 257, D.), 
Fut. πεφιδή-σομαι. 


ae 


§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 201 


ὁ μαχη-τή-ς, the warrior ; ἡ μέλλη-σι-ς, the delay; μόν-ιμο-ς, remain- 
ing ; ὁ vop-o-c, the law; ἡ ὀδ-μή, the smell ; ἡ χαρ-ά, the joy. 


§ 327. Lighth, or Mixed Class. 


Several essentially different Stems unite to form one 


verb: 

1. Present aipé-w, [take ; Mid., 1 choose; Stems atpe and éX. 
εἷλ-ον (δ 236) αἱρή-σω ἡρη-κα φρέ-θην 
Inf. ἑλεῖν 
εἱλόμην αἱρή-σομαι ἡρη-μαι 

2. Pres. ἔρχ-ομαι, I go, come; Stems ἐρχ and irA(v) 4 
ἤλ[υ]θ-ον ἐλεύ-σομαι ἐλ-ηλῦθ-α (ὃ 275) 


Imperat. ἐλθέ (ὃ 333, 12) 
Inf. ἐλθεῖν, The place of the Fut. is generally supplied by εἶμι. 
3. Pres. ἔρ d-w and péi¢-w, 1 do; Stems ἐρ ὃ, ipy, pey 
ἔ-ρεξα ἔρξω ἐρέχθην 


0bs.—The original Verbal-Stem is Fepy, hence τὸ Fépy-o-y (ἢ 34, 
D.), Att. ἔργ-ο-ν, work ; from (F)ipy, by the addition of the en- 
largement of the Present ε (Class 4), arose (F)épy-c-w, and from 
this ἔρδτ-ω. But by metathesis Fepy became Fpey, and, with 
loss of the F, p< y, whence the regular Present, according to Class 
4, is pél-w, 7. €., pey-t-w (δ 251). 


4, Pres. ἐσθί-ω, 1 eat; Stem io At, ἐδ (ce) [ed-o], and ᾧ ἄγ 


ἔ-φᾶἄγ-ον Fut. ἔδ-ομαι ἐδ-ήδοκα (δ 210) ἠδέ-σθην 
(§ 265) ἐδ-ήδεσμαι 
5. Pres. ἕπτομαι, 1 follow (Imperf. εἱπόμην, ὃ 236); Stems éx and 
o(€) 7 
ἑ-σπ-όμην ἕψομαι Subj. σπῶ-μαι Inf. σπέσθαι 


Obs.—The original Stem is cez, from which éz has arisen by weak- 
? ening o to the rough breathing (ὃ 60, δ). In the Aor. Ind. the 
rough breathing is not organic, ε being properly only the Aug- 

ment. Besides this there is a syncope (δ 61, c). 


ὃ 327. Dialects.—1. [ἀραίρηκα, ἀραίρημαι, ὃ 275. } 

2. Aor. ἤλῦθον, Perf. εἰλήλουθα (δ 817, Ὁ. 13), Part. ἐληλουθώς. 

8. [Pres. ἕρδ-ω] Perf. ἔοργα (§ 275, D. 2), Plup. ἐώργειν, Aor. ἔρξα and 
ἔρεξα. δὲ 
A. Pres. ἔσθω and ἔδω, Inf. ἔδ- μεναι, Perf. ἔδ-ηδ-α, Mid. ἐδήδοται. 

5. Pres. Act. ἕπω, I am occupied, Aor. ἔ-σπ-ον, Inf. σπεῖν, Part. σπών, 
Fut. ἕψω, Subj. Aor. Mid. ἕσπωμαι, ἑσποίμην, ἑσπέσθαι, ἑσπόμενος. 


-_ 


202 EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. § 327. 


6. Pres. ἔχ- ὦ, [ have, hold Imperf. εἶχον, ὃ 236); Stems éy and σχί(ε) 


é-ox-ov, I seized. 1. &w (Mid.) 
Subj. σχῶ, Opt. σχοίην 
Inf. σχεῖν, Part. σχών =... σχή-σω ἔ-σχη-κα ἐ-σχέ-θην 
Imperat. σχέ-ς (δ 316, 11) ἔ-σχη-μαι ἑκτός σχετός 


Mid. ἐ-σχ-όμην, σχῶμαι, οἷο. 
Ind. σχ-ἔσθαι 

Obs.—The original Stem is σεχ, from which éy has arisen by weak- 
ening o to the rough breathing (δ 60,6). From cex by syncope 
came é-cy-o-v, by metathesis oye, from which. σχέ-ς, ἔ-σχη-κα. 
From éy came the Future ἕξω and the Verbal Adj. ἑκ-τό-ς, while 
in the Present-Stem the rough breathing was changed into the 
soft breathing, because of the aspirate in the following syllable 
(ὃ 53, ὁ, Obs.): éy-w for éy-w. Compare also ὑπισχνέομαι and ἀμ- 
πισχνέομαι, ὃ 323, 36. All the Stem forms also appear in the 
formation of nouns: τὸ σχῆ-μα, the form ; ἡ ἕξι-ς, the bearing ; ἐχ- 
υρό-ς, firm, tenable. 


7. Pres. picy-w, I mix, mise-eo; Stems proy and pry, additional 
form μίγνυμι (δ 319, 18). 


8. Pres. 6p a-w,T see; Stems dpa, id, ὁπ - 
. εἶδ-ον (Mid.) ὄψομαι ἑ-ὠρᾶ-κα wpOny 3 
ὄπ-ωπ-α (δ 275) 
Imperat. (dé Mid. ἰδοῦ (599,12). 
Inf. ἰδ- εἴν ἑώρᾶ-μαι ὁρᾶτός 
ὧμ-μαι ὀπτός 


Obs.—On the irregular Augment of the Stem ὁρα (Imperf. ἑώρων), 
§ 237. The Stem id was originally F.1d (δ 34, D.). Compare 
vid-e-o ; the Aor. Ind. therefore, é-F.d-ov, with Syllabic Augment, 
contracted to εἶδ-ο-ν, but Subj. id-w, Opt. ἴδ-οι-μιε. The Perf. of 
this Stem is oida, I know (δ 317, 6). All three Stems appear also 
in the formation of nouns: τὸ dpa-pa, the spectacle ; τὸ εἶδ-ος, the 
Sorm, appearance ; ἡ ὕψι-ς, the sight ; τὸ bp-pa, the eye, look. 

9. Pres. tadax-w, I suffer; Stem racy, raO(c), πενθ 
ἔ-πᾶθ-ον πεί-σομαι πέ-πονθ-α παθη-τός 

(for πενθ-σομαι, § 50) 


Dialects.—6. Perf. ὄχτωκ-α (§ 826, 31), Perf. Mid. ὦγμαι, 3 Plur. Plup. 
ὦχατο. 

8. Aor. ἴδον, Weak Aor. Mid. ἐείσατο and εἴσατο, Part. ἐεισάμενος to 
the Pres, εἴδομαι, I appear, resemble (compare § 34, D.4). As a shorter 
additional form of the Stem 6pa, we find in Homer the Stem ὁρ (Fop), 
thence. 3 Plur. Pres. ἐπὶ ὄρ-ο-νται, they overlook. 

9. 2 Plur, πέποσθε (ὃ 317, Ὁ. 14), Part. πεπαθυῖα. 


§ 327. EIGHTH, OR MIXED CLASS. 203 


Obs.—From the shorter Stems we have the nouns: τὸ πάθεος, the 
suffering ; τὸ πένθ-ος, the mourning. 
10. πίν-ω, I drink ; Stems πεν, rt, πὸ [Latin po-tus]. Compare 


§ 321, 4. 
ἔ-πι-ον Fut. πέςομαι (§ 265) πέ-πω-κα ἐ-πό-θην 
Imperat. πῖ-θι (δ 316, 15) πέ-πο-μαι πο-τός 


Obs.—From the Stem zo we have the nouns: ὁ πό-τη-ς, po-tor; ἡ 
πό-σι-ς, po-tio ; τὸ πο-τήριο-ν, po-culu-m. 
11. Pres. τρέχ-ω, 1 run; Stems rpex and δρεμ 
é-Opap-ov Opapovp-at δε-δράμη-κα θρεκτέον 
θρέξομαι (§ 54, ὁ) 
Obs.—Nouns from both Stems: ὁ τροχ-ό-ς, the wheel; ὁ δρομ-εύ-ς, 


the runner. 
12. Pres. ¢ép-w, I carry | fero]; Stems dep, ἐν ε(γ)κ, of 
ἤνεγκ-ον οἴ-σω ἐν-ήνοχ-α (δ 275) οἰ-σ-θήσομαι 
οἰ-σ-τός 
ἤνεγκ-α (§ 269) ἠνέχ-θην 
ἠνεγκ-ἀ-μην οἴσομαι ἐν-ήνεγ-μαι ἐνεχ-θήσομαε 


Obs.—From the Stem ¢ep we have the nouns: τὸ φέρ-ε-τρο-ν, the 
bier ; ὁ φόρ-ο-ς, the contribution, tax; ὁ φόρ-το-ς, the burden. 


13. Aorist εἶπον, I spoke; Stems ciz, ip, and pe 


εἶπ-ον 
εἶπ-α (§ 269) ép-@ εἴ-ρη-κα (δ 274, Ods.) ἐῤῥήθην 
Imperat. εἰπτέ Inf. εἰπ-εῖν εἴ-ρη-μαι ῥη-θήσομαι 


(§ 333, 12) 
εἰ-ρή-σ-ομαι ῥη-τό-ς 
Obs.—The Stem eiz has arisen by contraction from ἐ-επ, and é-er 
from Fe-Fez, the reduplicated Aorist-Stem of the Verbal-Stem Fer 
(ἔπος, word, ὃ 34, D. 1). This is the reason why the diphthong 
ei belongs not to the Indicative alone (§ 257, D.). The Stem ép 
(Fut. ἐρῶ), to which the Mid. ἐρέσθαι, to ask (δ 326, 16) belongs, 
has likewise lost F, it being originally Fep (compare Lat. ver-bu-m). 
From Fep, by metathesis (δ 59), arose Fpe, after the loss of the F, pe, 


Dialects.—11. ἔθρεξα [δραμέομαι], dédpopa. 

12. 2 Plur. Imperat. Pres. gép-re [Lat. ferte], Aor. ἤνεικα, 3 Sing. 
Opt. ἐνείκαι (ἐνείκοι) (Perf. ἐνήνειγμαι), Imperat. Aor. oie, Inf. οἰσέμεναι 
(§ 268, D.). 

13. Pres. εἴρῳ (Class 4, d), Aor. ἔσπ-ον (Stem oez, compare 5), 7 
spoke, Imperat. ἔσπ-ετε, Pres. év-éx-w, Imperat. ἔννεπε (δ 62, D.), Aor. 
ἔνισπον, Subj. ἐνίσπω, Opt. 2 Sing, ἐνίσποις, Imperat. ἔνισπε and ἔνισπες, 
Fut. ἐνίψω and ἐνισπήσω. 


204 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. § 328. 


hence εἴ-ρη-κα for Fe-Fon-ca, ἐῤῥή-θη-ν for ε-Ερή-θη-ν, ῥη-τό-ς for 
Fon-ro-c. As Present forms, φημί, λέγω, and, especially in com- 
pounds, ἀγορεύω may be used, 6, g., ἀπαγορεύω, I forbid; Aor. 
ἀπεῖπον, Fut. ἀπερῶ, Perf. ἀπείρηκα. Nouns from the Stems ἐπ 
and pe: ἡ dW, the voice; rd pij-pa, the word ; ὁ ῥή-τωρ, the orator. 

In addition to these, there are three verbs which redu- 

plicate the Stem in the Present: 

14. Present yi-yv-opat (also yiv-opat), I become. 
Stem ye-y(e)v and γεν (ε) (Lat. gi-g(e)n-o, Perf. gen-ui) 

ἐ-γεν-ό-μην γενή-σομαι γέ-γον-α 

γε-γένη-μαι 

Οἵ.--- το the Stem γεν we have τὸ yév-oc, the race, genus; οἱ 

yov-eic, the parents, from yeve, ἡ γένε-σι-ς, the origin. 

15. Pres. πί- πτ-ὼ (from we-zer-w),[ fall; Stem πῖπτ, wer, rrw 


ἔ-πεσ-ον, from é-zer-ov (§ 60, a), πεσ-οὔμαι (δ 264), πέ-πτω-κα (Com-~ 
pare ὃ 323, 35). 

Obs.—F rom the Stem rrw: ἡ πτῶ-σι-ς, τὸ πτῶ-μα, the fall. 

16. Pres. τι- τρά-ω, 1 bore; Stems rirpa and rpa 


ἔ-τρη-σα τρή-σω 


( 270, Obs.). 


IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 


§ 328. The most important irregularities of meaning cor 
sist in the fluctuation between the Active, Middle, ana 
Passive, as well as, on the other hand, between the transi- 
tive and intransitive meaning. 


A) Active, Middle, and Passive Meaning. 

1. Very many Active verbs have a Middle Future with 
Actwe meaning (ἢ 266). This is the case with most verbs 
of Classes 5 to 8. 

2. The Deponent verbs are to be regarded as Middle, 


Dialects.—14. Perf. 1 Plur. γέ-γἄ-μεν, ὃ 317, D. 2. Compare § 329, 8. 

15. Perf. Part. πε-πτε-ώς, ὃ 317, Ὁ. 17. 

Besides : 

17. i-atw, Stem αὐ, ἀξ, 1 sleep (i as Reduplication, compare ὃ 308), 
Aor, ἄεσα. 


4 ae 
Ἐν 


§ 329. IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. 205 


and also make most of their tenses in the A/ddle form. 
Those are called Passive Deponents whose Aorist has a 
Passive form: ὁ. ¢., [ούλομαι, 7 wish, ἐβουλήθην, L wished. 
The most important Passive Deponents are the following, 
of which those marked * have a Passive Future, which is 
used along with the Middle: 


ἄγαμαι, I admire (δ 312, 8). εὐλαβέομαι, [am on my guard. 
*aidéopat, 1 dread (δ 301, 1). ἑἥδομαι, I rejoice. 
ἀλάομαι, I ramble. τον Be I take to heart. 
ἁμιλλάομαι, I rival. προ SJ PBSSP LT am inclined. 
*apveomar, I deny. are I am anzious. 
*ayOopar, 1 am indignant (ὃ 326, μέλομαι 
12). pera 1 repent. 
βούλομαι, I wish (§ 326, 14). ἀπὸ 1 despair. 
δέομαι, I need (§ 326, 15). Ἔδια ΚΝ εν 
δέρκομαι, I look. ἐν {4 ponder. 
Ἐδιαλέγομαι, I converse. προ 1 anticipate. 
δύναμαι, I can (§ 312, 9). οἴομαι, I am of opinion (δ 890, 30). 
ἐναντιόομαι, Tam opposed. σέβομαι, I reverence. 
ἐπίσταμαι, I know (δ 312, 10). φιλοτιμέομαι; T am ambitious. 
Obs.—Several of these verbs have the Middle Aorist as well as the 
Passive. 


3. The Passive Aorists of several Active verbs have a 
Middle meaning: εὐφραίνω, 7 rejoice, εὐφράνθην, 7 re- 
joiwed ; στρέφω, 7 cause to turn, ἐστράφην, L turned — 
myself; φαίνω, 2 show, ἐφάνην, 7 appeared, ete. 

4. The Passive forms of several Deponents have also a 
Passive meaning: idoua, 7 heal, ἰάθην, 7 was healed ; 
δέχομαι, 1 receive, ἐδέχθην, 1 was received ; in some even 
the Middle forms have both Active and Passive meaning: 
μιμέομαι, L imitate, μεμίμημαι, 7 have imitated or have been 
imitated. 

§ 329. B) Transitive and Intransitive Meaning. 

When the meaning of a verb fluctuates between Trans- 

§ 329. Dialects—The Strong Aor. érpagoy (τρέφω, I nourish) in Hom, 
has an intransitive meaning, J grew up. In Herod., ἀνέγνων (ἀναγι- 
γνώσκω) means J read, ἀνέγνωσα, I persuaded ; Hom. ἤριπον, I fell, Aor. 


to ἐρείπω (Class 2), I throw ecege ἔνασσα, I caused to dwell, Aor. to 
ναίω, I dwell, 


206 IRREGULARITIES OF MEANING. § 329. 


sitive and Intransitive, the Strong Aorist has the ¢ntran- 
sitive, and the Weak Aorist and Future Active the tran- 
sitive meaning ; when there are two Perfects, the Strong 
likewise has the zntransitive and the Weak the transitive 
meaning; if there is only one Perfect, it is ¢ntransitive. 
The most important cases of this kind are: 


1. Stem στα, Pres. ἵστημι, 7. place, Weak Aor. ἔστησα, 
L placed, Fut. στήσω, L shall place, Pres. Mid. ἵσταμαι, “1 
place myself, Strong Aor. ἔστην, L placed myself—stood, 
Perf. ἕστηκα, 7 have placed nyself, or stand (ὃ 503), Plup. 
ἑστήκειν, L stood, Fut. ἑστήξω (δ 291), 7 shall stand. 


Obs.—This same important distinction appears in the numerous 
compounds: ἀφίστημι, I cause to revolt, to separate, ἀπέστην, I re- 
colied — separated, ἀφέστηκα, I have revolted ; ἐφίστημι, I put over, 
ἐπέστην, I put myself over, ἐφέστηκα, I am put over; καθίστημι, I put 
down, κατέστην, I put myself forward, καθέστηκα, I stand there or 
Jorward. The Aor. Mid. has a specially Middle meaning, 6. g., 
κατεστήσατο, he determined for himself (compare ὃ 479). 


2. Stem a, Pres. Baivw, Z go,is commonly intransitive 
with the Fut. βήσομαι; but in the poets, 7 cause to go, 
also in the Weak Aor. ἔβησα, Fut. βήσω ; but intransitive 
in the Strong Aor. ἔβην, Z went, βέβηκα, L have advanced, 
stand firm (βέβα-ιο-ς, firm). | 

8. Stem gu, Pres. φύω, 7 beget, Weak Aor. ἔφῦσα, φύσω ; 
but the Strong Aor. ἔφῦν, 7 was begotten, πέφυκα, 1 am by 
nature, to which the Pres. is φύομαι. 


4. Stem Sv, Pres. δύω, 7 sink, hide, often transitive ; 
καταδύω, L cause to sink, also ἔδυσα, Siow; but ἔδυν, 7 
sunk myself, I dived ; ἐνέδυν, I put on; ἐξέδυν, L put 
off. 

5. Stem ofe(c), Pres. σβέννῦμι, 7 quench, Weak Aor. 
t-of3e-ca, [ quenched, Strong Aor. ἔσβην, 1 was quenched, 
ἔσβηκα, 7 am quenched. 'The Pres. to it is σβέννυμαι. 

6. Stem σκελ, Pres. σκέλλω, J dry, but Aor. ἔσκλην, L 
grew dry, with the Pres. σκέλλομαι. 


§ 331. | ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. 207 


7. Stem wu, Aor. ἔπιον, 7 drank, ἔπισα (πιπίσκω), 1] 
caused to drink. 

8. Stem γεν, Pres. yelvoua (compare ὃ 327, 14), l am 
born, Aor. ἐγεινάμην, L begat. 

9. Stem 6A, Pres. ὄλλῦμι, 7 ruin, strong Perf. ὄλωλα, 
7 am ruined, peri, Weak Perf. ὀλώλεκα, 1 have ruimed, 
perdidi. 


§ 330. In a number of verbs the Strong Perfect alone 
has only an intransitive meaning, as: 


1. ἄγνυμι, 7 break, Perf. gaya, 1 am broken (§ 275, 2). 

2. ἐγείρω, 1 awake, “ ἐγρήγορα, Lam awake(§ 275,1). 

3. πείθω, 7 persuade, “ πέποιθα, L trust (πείθομαι, L fol- 
low, obey). 

4. πήγνυμι, 7 fasten, “ πέπηγα, L stick fast. 

5. ῥήγνυμι, 7 tear, =~ ἔῤῥωγα, L am torn (ὃ 278). 

6. σήπω, /causetorot,“ σέσηπα, [ am rotten. 

7. τήκω, 7 melt, “ς χτέτηκα, 7 am melted. 

8. φαίνω, [ show (rarely shine), Perf. πέφηνα, 7 have ap- 
peared (φαίνομαι, 7 appear). 

On the distinction between avéwya and ἀνέῳχα, and be- 

tween πέπραγα and πέπραχα, see ὃ 279. 


§ 331. GENERAL VIEW OF THE ACCENTUATION 
OF VERBAL ForMS. 


The general rule given in § 229, that in the verb the 
accent is removed as far back as possible from the end, is 
subject to the following exceptions: 

For all «contracted syllables the accentuation is seen 
from ὃ 87. Hence δοκῶ, ἐλῶμεν (ὃ 263), πεσοῦμαι (πίπτω, 
§ 327, 15), τιθῶμαι (ὃ 302), λυθῶ, λυθῆς (§ 296). Compare, 
however, ὃ 307, Obs. 


§ 330. Dialects.—9. Hom. δαίω, I set 7176 to, Perf. dédna, I have caught 


Jive. 
10. Hom. ἔλπω, I give hope, Perf. ἔολπα, I hope. 


11. Hom. φθείρω, 1 destroy, Perf. (διλέφθορα, I am destroyed. 


aa Oe Ae 
oie eae 
ae 


208 ACCENTUATION OF VERBAL FORMS. ἃ 332. 


§ 332. Compound Verbal forms follow the general rule 
laid down in § 85, with the following limitations : 


1. The accent never goes back beyond the syllable on 
which the first word had it before the composition: ἀπό- 
δος, give back (ἀπό), not ἄποδος ; ἐπίσχες, hold wm (ἐπί), 
not ἔπισχες. 

2. In double compounds the accent never goes back be- 
yond the first: συνέκδος, give out with ; παρένθες, put m 
besides. : 

3. The accent never passes beyond the Augment or Ζ6- 
duplication : ἀπῆλθε, he went away; ἀφῖκται, he has ar- 
rived. This is the case even when the Augment or Re- 
duplication is not expressed: ὑπεῖκον, 7 gave way; ἀνεῦρε, 
he found again; σύνοιδα, 7 know along with, from οἶδα, 
I know, forms an exception. 


§ 333. The other exceptions are: 


1. All Infinitives in ya have the accent on the penult- 
ima: τιθέναι, θεῖναι, λελυκέναι, λυθῆναι. 

2. the Infinitive of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs in 
w is perispome: λαβεῖν. 

8. the same form in the Middle is paroxytone: λαβέ- 
σθαι. 

4, the Infinitive of the Weak Aorist Active has the 
accent on the penultima: παιδεῦσαι, ἐπαινέσαι (ὃ 268, Obs. 
1). 

5. so likewise the Infinitive of the Perfect Middle: πε- 

παιδεῦσθαι, κεκομίσθαι. . 

6. the Participle of the Strong Aorist Active of verbs 
in ὦ is oxytone: λαβών. 

7. the Participle of the Present and of the Strong Aor- 
ist Active of verbs in we is oxytone: τιθείς, ἀποδούς. 

8. so likewise the Participle of the Perfect Active: λε- 
λυκώς (via, dc, Gen. droc); and, 

9. that of both Aorists Passive: λυθείς, γραφείς. 


§ 337. FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. 209 


10. the Participle of the Perfect Middle is paroxytone : 
λελυμένος. 

11. the contracted 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aor- 
ist Middle is perispome: λαβοῦ. Only the compounds of 
monosyllabic forms with dissyllabic prepositions form an 
exception: περίθου (repitiOnu). Compare ὃ 307, Obs. 

12. The 2 Sing. Imperat. of the Strong Aorist Active 
in the following verbs is oxytone: εἰπέ, speak; ἐλθέ, 
come ; εὑρέ, find ; ἰδέ, see; λαβέ, take. But ἄπειπε, etc., 
Ε΄ τς to § 85. 


Siethe: accentuation, of the three equal forms of the 
Weak Aorist, see ὃ 268, Obs. 1. 


Prcutiarn Forms OF VERBS IN THE JONIC DIALECT. 


ὃ 334. Dialects.—The Iterative form, denoting the repetition of an 
act, is frequent in Homer and Herodotus, though foreign to Attic 
prose. Its characteristic sign is the letters ox affixed to the histor- 
ical person-endings, in the Active as well as in the Middle, by means 
of the connecting vowels o and «; hence 1 Sing. Act. σκον, Mid. 
σκομην. The Augment is generally wanting, in Herod. always. 
The inflexion is quite the same as that of the Imperfect. 


ὃ 335. Dialects.—The Iterative ox may be affixed to the Present as 
well as to both the Strong and Weak Aorist-Stems; hence we distin- 
guish Iterative Imperfects, as: ἔχ-ε-σκο-ν, I used to have, and Iterative 
Aorists, as: ἴδ-ε-σκ-ο-ν, I used to see; ἐλάσα-σκ-ε-ν, he used to drive ; the 
former denote the repetition of continuance, the latter the repetition 
of the occurrence of an action (§ 492). 


§ 336. Dialects.—In verbs of the First Principal Conjugation, « is 
the constant connecting vowel for the Iterative Imperfects and the 
Iteratives of the Strong Aorist: μέν-ε-σκον (μένω, I remain), Boox-é- 
σκοντο (βόσκω, I pasture), φύγ-ε-σκε (φεύγω, I flee); a occurs rarely in its 
stead : ῥίπτ-α-σκον (ῥίπτω, I hurl), κρύπτ-α-σκον (κρύπτω, I hide). Con- 
tracted verbs in the Iteratives either leave the two vowels uncon- 
tracted : καλέεσκον (καλέω, I call), or reject one of them: ὥθεσκον (whew, 
I push), εἴασκον (ἐάω, I leave); the Stems in a sometimes change ae 
to aa: ναιετάασκον (ναιετάω, I inhabit), Compare ναιετάᾳ, ὃ 243, Ὁ. 


§ 337. Dialects.—In verbs of the Second Principal Conjugation ox 
is affixed immediately to the Stem: ἔ-τφα-σκον (Stem ¢ a, φημί, I say), 


210 FORMS OF VERBS IN THE IONIC DIALECT. § 398, 


στά-σκον (ἔστην, I placed myself), ἔσκον instead of ἐσ-σκον (Stem ἐς, 
εἰμί͵, 1 am), κέ-σκετο (Stem κει, κεῖμαι, 1 lie), τί-θε-σκον (τίθημι, 1 put), 
ῥήγνυ-σκον (ῥήγνυμι, I tear). For the Stem ὀλ, as in other formations 
(ώλεσα, ὀλέσω), ε 15 the connecting vowel : ὀλ-έ-σκετο. 

ox is farther appended directly to the Weak Aorist-Stem : ἐρητύσα- 
oxe (ἐρητύω, 1 pacify), μνησά-σκετο (μνάομαι, I remember). 


§ 338. Dialects——Many Stems of the Present and Strong Aorist in 
poetry (seldom in Attic prose) have θ added without any particular 
modification of meaning. The Preterite is the most frequent of the 
Stems thus strengthened. The @ is connected with the Stems some- 
times by a, sometimes by «. The most important forms of this kind 
are : 


διώκω, additional form διωκάθω, I pursue. 


εἴκω, rs “Ὁ εἰκάθω, 1 yield. 

ἀμύνω͵ Ψ Ὁ ἡμύναθον, I warded off. 

εἴργω, τ ( ἔργἄᾶθον (ἐέργαθον), I separated, shut off. 
Kio, 7 « ἐκίαθον, I went. 

ἀείρομαι, “ ‘¢ ἠερέθονται, they hover. 

ἀγείρω, τ ( ἠγερέθοντο, they were assembled. 


φθίνω, #1 9058. 
ἔχω, > “  oxebée, Aor. Inf., to hold. 


§ 340. SIMPLE DERIVATION. 211 


II. DERIVATION. . 


παν. XIII. 


§ 339. A word is either s¢mple, ὁ. e., sprung from a single 
Stem: Ady-oc, speech (Stem λ εγ); ypag-w, L write (Stem 
y pa), or compound, ὁ. 6., formed from two or more Stems: 
λογο-γράφο-ς, specch-writer. 

A) SmwpeLe DERIVATION. 

Simple words are either premztive (Verbalia), ὦ. e., are 
formed directly from a Verbal-Stem (§ 245): apy-h, begin- 
ning, from the Verbal-Stem ap x (ἄρχω, L begin), or de- 
rived (Denominativa), ὁ. é., formed from a Mominal-Stem 
(δ 100): ἀρχα-ῖο-ς, incipient, ancient, from the Nominal- 
Stem ap xa, Nom. ἀρχή, beginning. 


§ 340. Vouns are usually formed—whether from a Ver- 
bal or from a Nominal-Stem—by means of a termination. 
This termination, added to the Stem, is called a derivative- 
ending or suffix. Thus Adyo-¢ is formed by means of the 
suffix o from the Verbal-Stem Δ εγ, apya-to-c by means 
of the suffix co from the Nominal-Stem apya. The suf- 
fixes serve more clearly to define the idea of the noun, or 
to mark the different relations in which the general idea 
of the Stem is to be conceived: Verbal-Stem z ove (ποιῶ, 
L produce, compose), tom-ri-¢, compos-e7 ; ποίη-σι-ς, com- 
posi-tion ; ποίη-μα(τ), composition, poem; Verbal-Stem 
ypad (γράφω, 7 write), γραφ-εύ-ς, writers γραφ-ί-ς, writ- 
ing wmstrument ; γράμ-μα, writeng; γραμ-μή, ὦ line; 
Nom.-Stem δὲκα (δίκη, right), δίκατιο-ς, right, just; δι- 
καιο-σύνη, righteousness ; Nom.-Stem βασιλεῦ (βασιλεύ-ς, 
king), Bacirs-1a, queen , βασιλε-ία, kingdom ; βασιλικό-ς, 
kingly. 

Obs. 1.—Only few primitive nouns are formed without a suffix: 


φύλαξ, guard, Nominal and Verbal-Stem φυλακ (φυλάσσω; Class 4, 
a, I guard); ow, voice, Stem 67, Verb.-Stem ἐπ᾿ (εἰπεῖν). 


212 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. ὃ 341. 


Obs. 2.—The Consonant-Stems undergo the necessary changes be- 
fore suffixes beginning with a consonant (ὃ 44, etc.): ypaq, 
ypap-pa, rey, λέξις, Word ; δικα ὃ (δικάζω), δικασ-τῆς, Judge. Vow- 
el-Stems readily lengthen the vowel and sometimes insert o be- 
fore several suffixes, as in the Perf. Mid. (§ 288), and in the Weak 
Passive-Stem (§ 298) : ποίη-μα (Compare πε-ποίη-μαι), σει-σ-μό- ς) 
shaking (compare σέ-σει-σ- μαι). 

Obs. 8.---Τὴ many primitive words the Stem undergoes a change 
in its vowel, which generally is like that of the Strong Perfect 
(ὃ 278): Stem AGO, λήθ-η, forgetfulness, compare λέ-ληθ-α ; Stem 
WET, πομπ-ή, escort, compare πέ-πομφ-α; Stem Az, λοιπό-ς, 76- 
maining, compare λέ-λοιπτα. The most frequent vowel-change is 
that of e to o: Stem wep (πέμπω, I escort), πομπ-ή, escort ; Stem 
φλεγ (φλέγω, I burn), φλόξ, flame; Stem rpew (τρέπω, 1 turn), 
τρόπ-ος, turning, manner. 

Obs. 4.—A general rule for the accent of nouns is that the Neuters 
are almost all barytone (ὃ 19): τὸ γέν-ος, the race ; δῶ-ρο-ν, gift; 
λείψανο-ν, remains ; πνεῦ-μα, breath. 


§ 341. 1. The most tmportant Suffixes for Re 
Substantives. 


A) Substantives denoting an agent are called nomina 
agentis. 'The person acting or occupied in and belonging 
to something is indicated by the following suffixes : 


1. ev, Nom. ev-¢ (always oxytone), Mase. (§ 137). 
Examples of Primitive words are: 


γραφ-εύ-ς, writ-ER, Verb.-Stem ypad¢, Pres. γράφω (Class 1). 
γον-εύ-ς, begett-ER, = γεν, “γίγνομαι (Class 8). 
κουρ-εύ-ς, barb-ER, 4 KEp, ‘* κείρω (Class 4, d). 


An example of the not very numerous Denominatives 
is: ; | 
πορθμ-εύ-ς, ferry-MAN, Nom.-Stem 7 0p 00, Nom. πορθμός, passage. ᾿ 


Obs.—Several Masculines in ev-¢ have Feminines in eva (proparox- 
ytones) : βασιλεύς, king; βασίλεια, queen. 


2. Typ, Nom. rnp τειρα, Nom. τειρα 
τορ, “τωρ »Masc Tpta, “~- Toa Fem 
τα, ‘<  orn-¢ T pd, ¢  rpi-¢ 


TU, “Tic 


§ 848, SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 213 


Examples of Primitive nouns are: 


Stem and Nomin. ow-77p, deliver-ER, Masc. Verb.-Stem ow (σώζω) 


ee “ σῴ-τειρα, “ Fem. (§ 298). 

“on-rop, “ ῥή-τωρ, ora-TOR, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ἐρῶ (δ 327, 18). 

“«pt-ra, “ — xpt-rn-c, gudge, cpt, Pres. κρίνω (δ 2538, 
Obs.). 


(( 


Toin-Ta, ποιη-τή-ς, poet = move, Pres, ποιέω (Cl. 1). 


Stem and Nomin. ποιή-τρια, poetess 
“ αὐλη-τα, “ adbdnrh-c, flute-play-ER, Masc. Verbal-Stem αὐλε, 

“ addn-T p10, αὐλητρί-ς, - Fem. Pres. αὐλέω (Cl. 1). 
Examples of Derived words are: 

Stem πολῖ-τα, Nom. πολίτη-ς, citizen, Nom.-Stem πολι, Nom. πόλι-ς. 
“ οἰκε-τα, ‘“  oixérn-c, domestic, Masc. Stem οἰκο, Nom. 

 oixe-rtd0) “ΓΟ οἰκέτι-ς, a Fem. oiKo-c. 


§ 342. B) Substantives expressing an action are called 
nomina actionis ; the following suffixes are the most com- 
mon for them : 

1. τι, Nom. τι-ς 

σι, “ σι-ς, from ri-c, according to ὃ 60, a [com- | Feminine, 
pare Lat. tio] Barytones. 


old, τ ola 


All nouns of this kind are Primitives, as: 
πίσ-τι-ς, faith, Verb.-Stem 710, Pres. Mid. πείθομαι (Class 2). 


μίμη-σι-ς, imitation, ἐξ pepe, Pres. (Dep.) μιμέομαι (Class 1). 
σκέψι-ς, contemplation, “ σκεπ, 3.“ ‘¢ σκέπτομαι (Class 8). 
πρᾶξι-ς, action, τ πρᾶγ, Pres. Act. πράσσω (Class 4, a). 
γένε-σι-ς, origin, εἶ γεν (ε), Pres. Mid. γίγνομαι (ὃ 827, 14). 
δοκιμα-σί-α, examination, “ Soxtpad, Pres, δοκιμάζω (Class 4, b). 


2. xo, Nom. μό-ς (always oxytone), Masc. 
σπα-σ-μό-ς, cramp, Verb.-Stem oa, Pres. σπάω (Class 1), J draw. 
δε-σ-μό-ς, bond, ᾿ δε, “ δέω, ἐ 1 bind. 
ὀδυρ-μό-ς, wailing, τ ὀδυρ, “ὀδύρομαι (Class 4, d, Ods.). 
Obs.—F rom verbs in evw substantives in εἰᾶ are derived, which de- 
note the action, and are all paroxytone: παιδεύω, I educate, παι- 


deia, education; βασιλεύω, I am king, βασιλεία, king’s rule. Com- 
pare ὃ 341, 1, Obs. 


§ 343. C) The result of an action is indicated by: 


oat ive ll or, 
ὧν ia 


214 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. § 344, 


1. par, Nom. pa, Neuter (accent, ὃ 340, Obs. 4). 
apay-palr], the thing done, Verb.-Stem ap ay, Pres. πράσσω (Class 4, a) 
(almost the same as τὸ πεπραγμένον, Lat. factum). 
ῥῆ-μα[τΊ, word, Verb.-Stem pe, Fut. ἐρῶ (ὃ 827, 13) (compare τὸ εἰρημέ- 
voy, Lat. dictum). 
τμῆ-μα[τ], cut, Verb.-Stem rep, Pres. τέμνω (ὃ 321, 10) ΜΈΝ τὸ 
ees the piece cut off’). 


2. ec, Nom. oc, Neuter (accent, § 340, Obs, 4). [27). 
Stem Aay-ec, Nom. λάχος, lot, Verb.-Stem Aax, Pres. λαγχάνω (§ 322, 

“  20-€¢, ( ἔθος, custom, “ é0, Perf. εἴωθα (ὃ 275). 

 rex-ec, “* τέκος, child, “ rex, Pres. τίκτω (Class 8). 


Obs.—The same suffix in derived words denotes a quality : 


βάρος; weight, Adjective-Stem Bapv, Nom. βαρύ-ς. 
βάθος, depth, 2 βαθυ, “ Babd-c. 


(( 


μῆκος, length, μακρο, “μακρό-ς. 


§ 344. D) The cnstrwment or means for an action is 
expressed by: 


7p 0, Nom. rpo-y [Lat. tru-m] (accent, ὃ 340, Obs. 4). 
ἄρο-τρο-ν, plow, Verb.-Stem apo, Pres. ἀρόω (Cl. 1) [ara- πέπον. 
λύ-τρο-ν, redemption money, “ λυ, ‘dw {Class 1). 
didax-r po-v, a teacher's fee, “ διδα x, “διδάσκω (§ 324, 28). 


Obs.—The meaning of the kindred feminine suffix rp a is less fixed: 
ξύ-σ-τρα (Ew, I scrape), scraper, instrument Sor rubbing ; ὀρχή-σ-τρα 
(ὀρχέομαι, 1 dance), dancing place ; παλαί-σ-τρα (radaiw, I wrestle), 
wrestling school. 


ὃ 345. E) Place is indicated by : 


1. rn pro, Nom. τηριο-ν, Neuter proparoxytone. 
ἀκροα-τήριο-ν, audi-toriu-m, Verb.-Stem ἀκροα, Pres. ἀκροάομαι (Cl. 1). 
δικασ-τήριο-ν, judgment hall, A ducad, “δικάζω (Cl. 4, b). 


2. eco, Nom. εἰο-ν, Neuter properispome. 
λογ-εῖο - ν, speaking place, from the Nom.-Stem Xo yo, Nom. λόγο-ς. 
koup-eio-v, barbers shop, « 3 κουρεῦυ, “ Kouped-¢. 
Movo-eio-v, seat of the Muses, “ αι Μουσα, “ Μοῦσα. 


3. wv, Nom. wy, Masc. oxytone, 
denotes a place where any thing is in abundance: ἀμπελών, vineyard ; 
ἀνδρών, men’s room ; οἰνών, wine vault. 


τῷ Me δ να 


‘ 
§ 348. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. 215 


§ 346. F) Substantives of quality are derived from Ad- 
jective-Stems by means of the following suffixes: 


1. rnr, Nom. rn-c, Fem. [Lat. tat, tut, Nom. tds, tis]. 
Stem παχυ-τητ, Nom. παχύτης, thickness, Adj.-Stem waxv, Nom. 


παχύ-ς. 
“Ὁ γερ-τῆτ, ‘¢  vedrne, youth, veo, Nom. véo-c. 
“  igo-rnT, “ἰσότης, equality, ἣν iso, “ἴσο-ς. 


2. συνα, Nom. σύνη, Fem. paroxytone. 
δικαιο-σύνη, justice, Adj.-Stem δέκαιο, Nom. dicato-c. 
σωφρο-σύνη, soberness, “ σωφρον, “σώφρων. 


3. ca, Nom. ca, Fem. paroxytone. 
σοφ-ία, wisdom, Adj.-Stem cogo, Nom. oo¢é-c. 


εὐδαιμον-ί a, bliss, εὐδαιμον, “εὐδαίμων. 


The suffix ca, with the vowel ε of the Adjective-Stems 
in -ec, Nom. -ne, becomes eva; and when the final o of an 
Adjective-Stem is preceded by another o, it becomes oa, 
οι (proparoxytone). 
ἀλήθε-ια, truth, Adj.-Stem ἀληθεῖς], Nom. ἀληθής (ὃ 165). 
εὔνο-ι α, benevolence, “ “Ὁ εὔγου-ς. 

4. ec, Nom. ος, Neuter, § 343, 2. 


EUV 00, 


§ 347. G) Diminutives are formed from Nominal-Stems 

by the suffixes: 

1. το, Nom. ιο-ν, Neuter. 

παιδ-ίο-ν, little boy, Nom.-Stem παι δ, Nom. παῖ-ς. 
κηπ-ίο-ν, little garden, “ κῆπο, “Σκῆπο-ς. 

Obs.—Other forms of co are ἐδεο (Nom. ἐδιο-»), αριο (Nom. ἀριο-ν), 
υδριο. (Nom. υδριο-»), vAAco (Nom. vdduw-v): οἰκίδιο-ν, ὦ little 
house (oico-c); παιδάριο-ν, a little boy (rai-c); μελύ δριο-ν, ὦ little 
song (μέλος) ; εἰδύλλιεο-ν, ὦ Little picture (εἶδος). 

2. Mase. ἐσκο, Fem. ἐσκα, Nom. toxo-c, ἰσκη, paroxytone. 

veav-ioxo-c, adolescentulus, Nom.-Stem veavia, Nom. veavia-c. 
παιδ-ίσκη, girl, “i παιδ, ‘¢ παῖ-ς. 


στεφαν-ίσκο-ς, a little garland, “ στεφανο, “* orépavo-c. 


§ 348. H) Patronymics or substantives which denote 
descent from a father (or ancestor)—more rarely the de- 
scent from a mother—are most frequently formed by the 
suffix da (Nom. én-c) for the Masculine, and only ὃ (Nom. 


210 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING SUBSTANTIVES. ὃ 949, 


-c) for the Feminine. The Masculines are paroxytone, 
the Feminines oxytone. This suffix is added to Stems in 
a without any connecting vowel : 


Masc. Boped-dn-c, Fem. Bopea-c, ἜΡΙΝ eee Bopea, Nom. Bopéa-c. 
“  Aiverad-0n-c, Aiveca, “ Aiveid-c. 


The same is affixed to Consonant-Stems by means of 
the vowel ε: 


Masc. Kexpoz-i-dn-c, Fem. Kexpoz-i-c, Nom.-Stem Kexpoz, Nom. Ké- 
κροψ. 


Stems in εὖ and ο of the Second Principal Declension 
also adopt the connecting vowel ει, before which the v of ev 
is dropped : 


TInXe-i-6 n-c, from the Nom.-Stem Πηλευ, Nom. Πηλεύ-ς. Homeric ad- 
ditional form ἸΤηληϊάδη-ς (compare ὃ 161, D.). 
Anro-i-6y-c, from the Nom.-Stem Anzo, Nom. Λητώ, son of Leto. 


The Stems of the O-Declension substitute « for o: 


Mase. Τανταλ-ἴ- δ n-c, Fem. Tayrad-i-c, Nom.-Stem Tavrado, Nom. Tav-— 
Trado-c. 
Κρον-ί-δη-ς, 


79 be 


K povo, Nom. Κρόνο-ς. 


Only those in to (Nom. to-¢) change these letters to ia: 


Masc. Θεστιά-δ n-c, Fem. Θεστιά-ς, Nom.-Stem Θεστιο, Nom. Θέστιο-ς. 
‘“  Mevouria-0 n-c, ἐς Μενοιτιο, Nom. Mevoi- 
τιο-ς. 


Obs.—A more rare suffix for Patronymics is ἴον or ἴων, Nom. wr: 
Κρονίων, son of Kpdvo-c. The Pocts take many liberties with re- 
gard to the metre. 


§ 349. I) Gentile names, or substantives describing per- 
sons as natives of certain towns or countries, have the suf- 
fixes : 

1. ev, Nom. eve (compare § 341), oxytone. 

Meyap-ev-¢, Nom.-Stem Me yapo, Nom. ra Μέγαρα. 
᾿᾽Ερετρι-εύ-ς, ᾿ Ἔρετριο, “ἜἘρέτρια. 

2. ra, Nom. rn-c, paroxytone. 

Τεγεά-τη-ς (Teyéa), Αἰγινή-τη-ς (Alyivn), ᾿Ηπειρώ-τη-ς ("“H7reipo-c), Sue 
λιώ-τη-ς (Σικελία). 


§ 351. SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. 217 


Obs.—The feminine gentile names end in ὃ (Nom. -c): Μεγαριδ, 
Nom. Meyapic; Teyearid, Nom. Τεγεᾶτις ; Σικελιωτι δ, Nom. Σι- 
κελιῶτις. 


§ 350. Il. Zhe most ὠηρογέαγι Suffixes for forming 
Adjectives. 


1.1.0, Nom. wo-¢ (proparoxytone), 

expresses the most general relation to the idea of the swd- 
stantive from which the adjective is formed: οὐράν-ι ο-ς, 
heayen-ly (οὐρανός) ; ἑσπέρ-ι o-c, belonging to evening (ἐσ- 
πέρα). ‘The « sometimes combines with the final vowels of 
Vowel-Stems to diphthongs, which then frequently receive 
the circumflex: ayopa-io-c, forensis (ἀγορά) 3 αἰδο-ἴ ο-ς, 
modest, from the Stem aido (Nom. aidwe); but δίκατ-ιο-ς, 
just, from the Stem δέκα (Nom. δίκη, justice); so also, 
after rejecting the ¢,we have from the Stem θερες (τὸ 
θέρος, summer), θέρε-ι ο-ς, summer-like. By the suffix vo, 
adjectives are also formed from Adjective-Stems: ἐλευθέρ-- 
ιο-ς, liber-alis (ἐλεύθερο-ς, Leber), and gentile adjectives 
(ὃ 349) from names of places, which, however, are also used 
substantively : Μιλήσ-ι ο-ς (for Μιλητ-ὶ ο-ς, from MiAnro-e, 
according to § 60), ᾿Αθηνα-ῖ ο-ς (Αθῆναϊ).. 


§ 351. 2. κο, Nom. κό-ς (always oxytone), 
is mostly affixed to the Stem by the connecting vowel ε, 
and, in words derived from Verbal-Stems, denotes fitness ¢ 
ἀρχ-ει-κό-ς, suited for governing ; γραφικός, suited for writ- 
ing or painting (picturesque). Many Verbal-Stems insert 
the syllable τὶ before the suffix ko (ὃ 342): αἰσθη-τι-κό-ς, 
capable of perceiving ; πρα-κτι-κό-ς, suited for acting. 
From Nominal-Stems the suffix xo, Nom. xo-c, forms ad- 
jectives denoting what is peculiar, belonging or referable 
to the thing expressed by the noun: βθασιλικός, kingly ; 
φυσικός, natural ; πολεμικός, warlike. 
Obs.—By means of this suffix are formed the names of many arts 
and sciences, the Feminine being used substantively, originally 
with the addition of τέχνη, art, science ; ἡ μουσ-ι-κή, Music ; ἡ» 


K 


218 SUFFIXES FOR FORMING ADJECTIVES. ὃ 352. 


γραμματ-ι-κῆ, from τὰ γράμματα, littere, grammar, the art of writ- 
ing; ἡ τακτ-ι-κή, tactics, The corresponding Masculine denotes 
one who is experienced in such art or science: ὁ μουσικό-ς, mu- 
sician ; ὁ γραμματικό-ς, grammarian ; ὁ τακτικό-ς, tactician. 


§ 352. 3. ἐν ο, Nom. wo-c, proparoxytone, and 
4. <0, Nom. co-¢ [ Lat. eu-s], proparoxytone (ove peri- 
spome, ὃ 183), denote the material of which any thing 
consists: λίθ-ιν ο-ς, of stone (λίθο-ς) ; ξύλ-ιν ο-ς, Wood-en. 
(ξύλο-ν) ; χρύσ-ε ο-ς, χρυσοῦς, gold-en | aur-eu-s | (xpuad-¢). 
Οὗὐ8.----ἰν 0, Nom. ἐνό-ς, oxytone, forms adjectives of time: χθεσ-ιν 6-c, 
yesterday's, from χθές, yesterday ; ἐαρ-ιν d-c, vernus ; with enlarged — 
suffix : νυκτ-ερ-ιν 6-¢, Noct-ur-nu-s. 


S. EVT, Nom. Mase. et-c, Hem. ἐσσα, Neut. EV, 
denotes abundance: χαρί-ει-ς, grace-ful (xapt-¢); ὑλήτει-ς, 
wood-y (ὕλη) ; ἠμαθό-ε ι-ς, sand-y (GuaBo-c). Compare Lat. 
osu-s: gratiosus, silvosus, arenosus. 
6. μον, Nom. Mase. μων, Neut. μον, 
denotes the dent or inclination to something: μνήτμω v, 
mindful ἡ τλήτμων, patient ᾿ ἐπιλήσ-μων, Jorgeatful. 
Obs.—Adjective suffixes of less defined meanings are: 
vo, Nom. vo-c, oxytone, mostly passive: de-y 6-c, terrible; σεμ-ν ό-ς (σέβ- 
ο-μαι); venerable, 
ho, “ Xo-c, mostly oxytone and active: δει-ὰ ό-ς, fearful ; ἀπατη- 
λ ό-ς, deceitful. “ 
yo, ‘“* io-g, proparoxytone, partly active: pay-t-po-c, warlike» and 
partly passive : ἀοίδ-ι-μ ο-ς, capable of being sung; akin 
to it is 
σιμο, “σιμο-ς, proparoxytone : χρήσιμο-ς, useful ; φύξιμο-ς, eapable of 
being fled from, avoidable. 
ec, “ ne, Neut. ες : ψευδ-ής, false, almost exclusively in compound 
words (§ 355). 


§ 353. IIT. Derived Verbs 
are formed in various ways from Vominal-Stems. The 
most important endings of derived verbs, differing little 


from ove another in meaning, are the following, arranged 
according to their forms of the Present : 


7. aw-w : 


8. υγν-ω: 


DERIVED VERBS. 


μισθό-ω, I hire 
χρυσό-ω, 1 gild 
ζημιό-ω, I punish 
τιμά-ω, 1 honor 
αἰτιά-ομαι, I blame 
yoa-w, I wail 
ἀριθμέ-ω, I number 


εὐτυχέ-ω, 1 am fortunate 


ἱστορέ-ω, 1 search 


βασιλεύ-ω, 1 am king 


Bovred-w, I advise 
ἐλπίζ-ω, I hope 


ἑλληνίζ-ω, I speak Greek 
φιλιππίζοω, I am inclined 


to Philip 
δικάζ-ω, I judge 
ἐργάζ-ομαι, 1 work 


βιάζ-ομαι, I use violence 


onpaiv-w, I sign 
λευκαίν-ω, L whiten 


ADVERBS. 


(μισθό-ς, hire). 
(χρυσό-ς, gold). 


(ζημία, punishment). 


(τιμή, honor). 
(αἰτία, blame). 
(γόο-ς, wailing). 
(ἀριθμό-ς, number). 


(εὐτυχής, fortunate). 


(iorwp, searcher). 
(βασιλεύ-ς, king). 
(βουλή, advice). 
(ἐλπί-ς, hope). 
(Ἑλλην). 


ἰ (Φίλιππο-). 


(δίκη, justice). 
(ἔργο-ν, work). 


(βία, violence). 


(σῆμα, sgn). 
(λευκό-ς, White). 


219 


χαλεπαίν-ω, I am indignant (χαλεπό-ς, severe, indignant). 


(ἡδύ-ς, sweet). 
(λαμπρό-ς, bright). 


n0vv-w, 1 sweeten 
λαμπρύν-ω͵ 1 brighten 


Obs. 1.—From a few Nominal-Stems verbs are derived with differ- 
ent endings and with different meanings; thus from dovXo, 
Nom. δοῦλο-ς, slave: δουλό-ω, I enslave, δουλεύ-ω, I am ὦ slave ; from 
πόλεμο, Nom. πόλεμο-ς, War, πολεμέ-ω and πολεμίζ-ω, 1 make war, 
πολεμύ-ω, 1 make hostile. 


Obs. 2.—A desiderative meaning belongs to verbs in sew, as well as 
to several in aw and taw: γελασείω, I am inclined to laugh ; dpa- 
σείω, I desire to do; φονάω, I want to murder; κλαυσιάω, I want to 
weep. The verbs of the last two terminations frequently indicate 
a bodily weakness or illness: ὠχριάω, 1 am pale; ὀφθαλμιάω, 1 
suffer in the eyes. 


TV. Adverbs. 


§ 353, ὁ. On the Adverbs formed from Adjectives, com- 
pare §§ 201-204. 
From Verbal and Substantive-Stems adverbs are formed 
by the suffixes: 


220 FORM OF COMPOSITION. ὃ 304. 


δόν, oxytone: ἀνα-φαν-ὃ dv, openly; ἀγελη-δόν, gregatim. 

δην (adnyv), paroxytone: κρύβ-δην, clam ; συλλήβ-δην, collectively, 
briefly (Stem AaB); σπορ-άδη ν, scatteredly (Stem om ep), σπείρω, 
1] sow. 

ri, oxytone: dvopas-r i, by name (ὀνομάζω) ; ἑλληνισ-τί, Grace (éAAnvizw). 


B) Composition. 
§ 354. L. Form of Composition. 

A noun, standing jirst in a compound, appears in the 
form of its Stem: ἀστυ-γείτων, neighbor to the city; xopo- 
διδάσκαλο-ς, teacher of the chorus; σακές-παλος, shaker 
of the shield (τὸ σάκος). 

Consonant-Stems are usually united to the second part 
by the connecting-vowel 0: ἀνδριαντ-ο-ποιό-ς (6 ἀνδριά-ς), 
maker of statues, statuary; πατρ-ο-κτόνο-ς, murderer of 
a father. This o, farther, is frequently inserted after weak | 
vowels: φυσι-ο-λόγο-ς, acquainted with nature; ixOv-o- 
payo-c, jish-eating ; and regularly stands in place of a in | 
‘the Stem: ἡμερο-δρόμο-ς, ὦ runner by day ; χωρο-γράφο-ς, 
describer of a country. The o is dropped before vowels: 
xop-nyo-c, leader of the chorus ; πατρ-άδελφο-ς, ὦ, father’s — 
brother ; it remains, however, where the word originally 
began with digamma (δ 34, D.): Hom. δημιοεργό-ς, Att. 
δημιουργός, artisan. : 


es oO 


Obs.—Exceptions to these rules are frequent. Thus Stems in o 
often appear in an abbreviated form in compounds: ξιφο-κτόνος, 
killing with the sword (Stem Ecdec); τειχο-μαχία, a contest at the 
wall (Stem recyec); the final vowel of A-Stems is sometimes 
preserved as ἃ or ἡ : dpera-Adyoc, ὦ speaker about virtue ; χοη-φόρος, 
bearer of funeral offerings. A case-form seldom occurs instead of 
the Stem-form: νεώς-οικος; shed for ships ; dpecot-Barne, wandering 
on the hills. 


§ 355. The ending of a word is often somewhat altered 
in composition, especially when the compound word is an 
adjective : τιμή, φιλό-τιμο-ς, ambitious ; πρᾶγμα, πολυ- 
πράγμων, much occupied. The ending »¢ Masculine and 


§ 358. FORM OF COMPOSITION. 221 


Feminine, ες Neuter, deserves special notice; this ending 
occurs : 

@) in many adjectives formed directly from Verbal- 
Stems: ἀ-βλαβ-ής, uninjured (βλαβ, Pres. BAdwrw) 5 ad- 
rapk-ne, self-sufficient (abré-¢ and ἀρκέω). 

ὁ) in adjectives, whose second part comes from a sub- 
stantive in e¢ (Nom. oc): δεκα-ετής, ten years old (roc); 
κακοτήθης, of a bad nature (ἦθος). 

Obs.—Observe also the compound adverbs in ec or ¢, oxytone: 


αὐτο-χειρ-ί, with one’s own hand ; ἀ-μισθ-ί, without pay ; παν-δημ-εί, 
with the whole people. 


§ 356. A verb—without changing its nature—can only 
be compounded with a preposition. The looseness of the 
connection in such compounds is the reason for the posi- 
tion of the Augment mentioned in ὃ 238: ἀποβάλλω, 7 
throw away; ἀπέβαλον, L threw away. For the same 
reason, prepositions are frequently separated from their 
verbs in the poets and in Herodotus, and in some cases 
even in Attic prose (compare ὃ 446). This separation 18 
called tiesis. 

When any other word is to be compounded with a Ver- 
bal-Stem, a noun is first formed of the two, 6. g., from 
λίθο-ς and Stem aX, AGo-Bdro-c, throwing stones, and 
thence λιθοβολέ-ω, 7 throw stones ; so likewise from vav-¢ 
and μάχομαι comes first ναυ-μάχο-ς, fighting at sea, and 
thence ναυμαχέω ; from εὖ and Stem épy, εὐεργέτης, bene- 
Juctor, εὐεργετέω, 1 do good. | 


§ 357. A substantive of an abstract meaning can only 
be compounded with a preposition without changing its 
termination: πρό and βουλή make προβουλή, previous 
consultation. In every other compound the abstract sub- 
stantive must take a derivative ending: λίθος and βολή 
make λιθοβολία, throwing stones; ναῦς and μάχη, vav- 
μαχία, sea-fight ; εὖ and πρᾶξις, εὐπραξία, well-being. 


§ 358. Compounds having the first part formed directly 


ἦγ; MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 359. 


from a Verbal-Stem are rarely met with except in the 
poets. ‘They are formed in two ways, viz. : 3 


1. the Verbal or the Present-Stem is joined directly to 
Stems beginning with a vowel, and to those beginning 
with a consonant by means of the connecting-vowels ε, 1, 
oro: ax-é-Quuo-¢ (Pres. δάκντω, Class 5), heart-gnawig ; 
ml9-apyo-c, obedient to order (πείθομαι and ἀρχή); apy-t- 
τέκτων, master-builder ; μιστ-ό-γυνο-ς, hater of women (μι- 
σέω). 

2. A form strengthened by o, and resembling the Weak 
Aorist-Stem, is joined in the same way to the second part 
of the word: Avo-i-rovo-c, freeing from trouble ; πλήξ- 
ιππο-ς (πτλήσσω, Class 4, a), whipping horses; στρεψί-δικο-ς 
(στρέφω, Class 1), perverter of right. 


§ 359. IL. Meaning of Compounds. 


In regard to their meaning, compound Adjectives and 
Substantives are divided into ¢Arce principal classes : 


1. Determinative compounds. In them the second word 
is the principal, which, without in any way altering its 
meaning, is merely defined by the first. These compounds 
may be paraphrased by changing the first part either into 
an Adjective or an Adverb: ἀκρό-πολι-ς, high town, castle, 
2. 6., ἄκρα πόλις (Hom. πόλις ἄκρη): μεσ-ημβρία, midday, 
ὃ, 6.. μέση ἡμέρα ; ψευδο-κῆρυξ, 2. 6., ψευδὴς κῆρυξ, false her- 
ald , ὁμό-δουλο-ς, fellow-slave, ὁ. ὁ., ὁμοῦ δουλεύων ; μεγα- 
λοπρεπής, grand, properly, appearing as great ; dpi-yovee, 
late born, ὦ. 6., ὀψὲ γενόμενος. This class is the least nu- 
merous. 

2. Attributive compounds. In them the second word is 
indeed also defined by the first, yet so that the latter alters 
its meaning, and, together with the first, forms a new idea, 
which is attributed as a quality to another word. These 
compounds can generally be paraphrased by employing 
the Participle of ἔχω, or a verb akin to it in meaning, and 
adding to this the second word as an object, the first be- 


- 


§ 909, MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. 223 


coming an attribute to the object: μακρό-χειρ, Zongi-manus, 
iong-handed, ὁ. ¢., μακρὰς χεῖρας ἔχων (not the long hand 
itself’) 5 ἀργυρό-τοξο-ς ς, provided with a silver bees 1. es 
ἀργυροῦν τόξον φέρων: ὁμό- TPOTO-C, of the same kind, b. ery 
ὅμοιον τρόπον ἔχων ; γλαυκ-ῶπι-ς, bright-cycd, ὁ. ¢., a 
κοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς ἔχουσα ; πικρό-γαμο-ς, having a bitter 
wedding ,. κουφό-νου-ς, frivolous, trifling ; σώ-φρων, of 
sound sense, sober; δεκα-ετής, ten years old, ὁ. ὁ. 5 heii or 
lasting ten years, αὐτό-χειρ, making use of one’s own 


hands. 


Obs.—To these belong the numerous adjectives in -wdne and osdne: 
BS) ? ” 
γυναικώδης = γυναικο-είδης (εἶδος), Womanlike, womanish. 


3. Objective compounds, or those of dependency. In 
them, either the first word is grammatically governed by 
the second or the second by the first, so that in the para- 
phrase one of the two must be put in an oblique case: 
nvi-oxo-c=Ta ἡνία ἔχων, guiding the reins, driver; λογο- 
ypago-c, speech-writer, 2. 6ὁ., λόγους γράφων ; ἀξιό-λογο-ς, 
worth speaking, t. 6.. λόγου ἄξιος ; φιλό-μουσο-ς, loving the 
Muses, ὦ. 6., φιλῶν τὰς Μούσας ; δεισι-δαίμων, fearing the 
gods, 2. 6.) δεδιὼς τοὺς δαίμονας : χειροποίητος, made by 
hand, ὁ. 6., χερσὶ ποιητός ; θεοϊλαβής, injured by God, 2. é., 
ὑπὸ θεοῦ βεβλαμμένος ; οἰκογενής, born in the house, 2. é., 
ἐν οἴκῳ γενόμενος. 


Obs. 1.—Prepositions may he joined with substantives in any of the 
three principal classes—(1) Determinative : ἀμφι-θέατρον, a round 
theatre, ἡ. ¢., a theatre extending itself round in a circle; ἀπ- 
ἐλεύθερος, one who has been freed by another, not by himself, ὁ. e., 
a freedman (ὁ ἀπό τινος, ἐλεύθερος ὦν); (2) Attributive: ἔν-θεος, 
ἢ. €., ἐν ἑαυτῷ θεὸν ἔχων, carrying a god in himself, god-inspired ; 
ἀμφικίων, ViZ., νεώς, ἡ. 6., κίονας ἀμφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἔχων, a temple encom- 
passed around with pillars ; (8) Objective: ἐγχώριος, Ἵ. 6., ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ 
ὦν, at home ; ἐφίππιος, ἡ. 6., ἐφ᾽ ἵππῳ ὦν, being on a horse, belonging 
to ὦ horse. 

Obs, 2.—Against the general rule (δ 85), according to which com- 
pound words draw back the accent as far as possible from the 
end, those compounds in -o-¢ in the Nominative, whose second 
part comes directly from a Verbal-Stem (ὃ 356), usually accent 


224 MEANING OF COMPOUNDS. § 3690. 


this Stem if it has an active meaning. They are paroxytone 
when the last syllable but one is short, oxytone when it is long: 
hoyo-ypago-c, speech-writer ; μητρ-ο-κτόνος, mother-murderer ; παιδ- 
aywy6-c, boy-leader ; μελο-ποιός, composer of songs. When the mean- 
ing is passive, the second word remains unaccented : αὐτό-γραφο-ς, 
written by one’s self; pnrp-6-Krovo-c, murdered by the mother ; δυσ- 
aywyoc, hard to guide. 


§ 360. The prefix av [compare ἄνευ, without, Lat. in-, 
Enel. wn-], before consonants a [compare Lat. 2- in 7-gna- 
ru-s|, called alpha prwative on account of its meaning, is 
found in a very large number of compounds, which belong 
to the determinative class if the second part has arisen from 
a verb or an adjective, but chiefly to the attrzbutive if from 
a substantive: d-ypapoe, wwritten, ὁ. 6., οὐ γεγραμμένος : 
ἀν-ελεύθερος, unfree, ἡ. 6.. ovk ἐλεύθερος ; ἀν-αιδήῆς, shame- 
less, ὁ. 6.. αἰδῶ οὐκ ἔχων ; ἄπαι-ς, childless, ὁ. 6., παΐδας οὐκ 
ἔχων. Determinatives with ἀν (a) from substantives are 
rare and poetic: μήτηρ ἀμήτωρ, an unmotherly mother, 
@. 6.. μήτηρ OV μήτηρ οὖσα. 

Obs.—W ords originally beginning with digamma (ὃ 34, D.) have ἀ, 
not ἀν: ἀ-ἕκων, contracted ἄκων, unwilling ; ἀ-εικ-ής, contracted 
αἰκ-ής, reproachful (Stem eix, ἔοικα) ; ἀ-εργό-ς, contracted dpyéd-c, 
inactive (ἔργο-ν, work). 


The prefix éu¢ corresponds to the English zs, and, as 
the opposite to εὖ, denotes something unfortunate, awk- 
ward, difficult: δυςάρεστος (ὃ 324, 10), displeased ; δύς- 
βουλος, tl advised, 2. €., κακὰς βουλὰς ἔχων (attributive) ; 
δυφράλωτος, hard to capture (§ 324,17). Here, too, de- 
terminative compounds from substantives are rare: Hom. 
Δύςπαρις, unfortunate Paris. 


͵ PART SECOND. 
peer Ne ΤΑ XxX. 


Preliminary Remarks. 

§ 361. 1. Syntax (σύνταξις, arrangement) teaches the 
use of the forms discussed in the first part of the grammar, 
and the way in which words are arranged into sentences, 
and sentences are combined together. 

2. A sentence is either simple or compound. Every 
sentence is simple in which the necessary parts of a sen- 
tence occur only once. 

3. The necessary parts of a sentence are: 

a) the Subject, ὁ. e., the person or thing about which 
something is stated ; 

b) the Predicate, z. e., that which is stated. 

Obs. 1.—Every form of the finite verb (§ 225, 4) contains a com- 
plete sentence in itself,in which the personal ending contains 
the Subject and the Verbal-Stem the Predicate: φημί, I say; 
ἔφαμεν, we said, 

Obs, 2.—In many cases the Subject remains wndefined: φασί, they 
say, people say; or it is not defined, because readily understood 
by the Greeks: we, he rains, 7. e., Zeus, for he alone can cause 
rain; ἐσάλπιγξε, he blew the trumpet, i. e., the trumpeter, for it is 

- his business. The Subject of the impersonal verbs δεῖ, χρή, zt is 
necessary, is also undefined. 


4. The Predicate is either Verbal or Nominal; it is 
Verbal when expressed in the form of a finite verb: Κῦρος 
ἐβασίλευσε, Cyrus ruled ; it is Nominal when expressed 
in the form of a nown (substantive or adjective): Κῦρος 
βασιλεὺς ἦν, Cyrus was king. 

5. The Predicate must agree with the Subject, viz., the 
Verbal Predicate in number, the Nominal in number and 
case, and, when it is an adjective, in gender also: οἱ πολέ- 

K 2 


220 PRELIMINARY REMARKS. § 361. 


jot eviknoar, the enemies conquered y ἡ μάχη μεγάλη ἦν, 
the battle was great. 


Exceptions, §§ 362-366. - : 


6. In many cases this agreement alone is sufficient toex- 
press the relation of a Nominal Predicate to the Subject: 
ὁ μέγας ὄλβος οὐ μόνιμος, great prosperity ἐδ not lasting ; 
Λέριοι κακοί, the Lerians (inhabitants of the island of Le- 
ros) are bad. But mostly the Nominal Predicate is more 
clearly connected with its Subject by the verb to be (sub- 
stantive verb): 6 μέγας ὄλβος οὐ μόνιμός ἐστιν, Λέριοι κακοί 
εἰσιν. This verb, thus used, is called the Copuda. 

7. The intransitive and passive verbs, which denote to 
become, be made, appear, be named, designated, chosen, and. 
the like, in order to produce a complete sentence, often re- 
quire a Nominal Predicate along with the Verbal one. In 
this case also the Nominal Predicate must agree with the 
Subject: Κῦρος ἐγένετο [βασιλεύς, Cyrus became king, Cy- 
rus rex factus est. Compare ὃ 392. 

8. The Greek language expresses many definitions of 
time, order, and kind, less frequently of place, by adjec- 
tives, which are expressed in English by adverbs or prepo- 
sitions with substantives. These adjectives, which must 
agree with the Subject, are to be considered as swpple- 
mentary Predicates : τριταῖοι ἀπῆλθον, they went away on 
the third day; Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὕστεροι ἀφίκοντο, the Lace- 
demonians arrived later, posteriores advenerunt ; ὅρκιός 
σοι λέγω, L tell you on oath. 


On the similar use of the participle as a supplementary Predicate, 
see § 589, etc. 


9. A simple sentence is enlarged by an Odject being add- | 
ed to the verb. The Object is that to which the action of 
the verb extends: of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπέκτειναν τὸν Σωκράτην, ἱ 
the Athenians killed Socrates. 


On the different kinds of Objects and the manner in which they 4 
are indicated, see §§ 395-402. . 


§ 961. PRELIMINARY REMARKS. 227 


10. The Active verbs, which correspond in meaning to 
the Intransitive and Passive ones mentioned in 7, ὁ. é., the 
verbs which denote to make, name, designate, choose, and 
the like, frequently also require a Wominal Predicate. 
But, as this belongs to the Object, it must agree with it: 
ot Πέρσαι τὸν Κῦρον εἵλοντο acidéa, the Persians chose 
Cyrus king | Perse Cyrum regem elegerunt|. Compare 
ἢ 404. This kind of Predicate is called a Dependent Pred- 
weate. As the Dependent Predicate here appears in the 
Accusative, so it may in other cases appear in the Genitive 
or Dative. Compare ὃ 438; Obs. ὃ 589, ete. | 

11. Another enlargement of the sentence is the Atérc- 
bute, ὁ. c., any nominal definition added to a substantive as 
essentially belonging to it and forming with it one idea: 
καλὸς ἵππος, ὦ jine horse; ὃ παρὼν καιρός, the present tume 
(the present). 


Obs.—The Greek language in many cases adds an Attribute to the 
designation of a person, expressive of a generic idea: Hom. ἥρωες 
Δαναοί, ye heroes Danai (ye warring Danai); ἄνδρες δικασταί, ye 
judges, gudices. 


12. Different from the Attribute is the Apposztion. 
Apposition is such a subordinate definition added to a sub- 
stantive as does not exactly form one idea with it, but is 
superadded rather for describing or illustrating it, and 
hence might generally be expressed in the form of a de- 
scriptive clause: Παρύσατις, ἡ τοῦ Κύρου μήτηρ, τοῦτον 
μᾶλλον ἐφίλει ἢ τὸν ᾿Αρταξέρξην, Parysatis, the mother of 
Cyrus—who was Cyrus’s mother—loved him more than 
Artaxerxes , ἐντεῦθεν Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει διὰ Φρυγίας εἰς Ko- 
λοσσούς, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, εὐδαίμονα καὶ μεγάλην, from 
there Cyrus marches through Phrygia to Colossi, a popu- 
lous, prosperous, and large city (which wasa.. . city). 

The Attribute and Apposition must agree with the sub- 
stantive to which they belong, in the same way as the 
Predicate (5,7). 


228 NUMBER AND GENDER. 


Cuarp. XIV.—NuMBER AND GENDER. 


§ 362. The singular sometimes has a collective sense, de- 
noting a plurality: ἐσθής, clothing, clothes; πλίνθος, 
bricks ; ἡ ἵππος, cavalry; ἡ ἀσπίς, the heavy-armed. 

Sometimes a Predicate or Apposition in the Plural re- 
fers to collective substantives in the Singular: ᾿Αθηναίων 
τὸ πλῆθος οἴονται Ἵππαρχον τύραννον ὄντα ἀποθανεῖν, 
the mass of the Athenians believe Hipparchus died as 
ruler; τὸ στράτευμα ἐπορίζετο σῖτον κόπτοντες τοὺς 
βοῦς καὶ ὄνους, the army obtained food by killing the oxen 
and asses. 

A Plural is formed in Greek from many words, especial- 
ly abstracts, which have no plural in English, especially 
when the repetition of an idea is to be expressed: ai ἐπι- 
φάνειαι καὶ λαμπρότητες ἐκ τῶν ἀγώνων γίγνεσθαι 
φιλοῦσιν, celebrity and glory usually arise from the 607:- 
tests , ἐμοὶ ai σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι οὐκ ἀρέσκουσιν, YOUP 
(repeated) great success does not please me; Hom. πάντες 
θάνατοι στυγεροί, all kinds of death are hateful. 


Obs. 1.—Poets frequently use the Plural in a generic sense where 
we employ the Singular with the indefinite article: οὐκ ἂν yuvat- 
κῶν ἥσσονες καλοίμεθ᾽ ἄν, 1 should not like to be called inferior to a 
woman ; φίλοι, a friend. 

Obs. 2.—The speaker often uses the first person Plural of himself 
[compare Lat. os]. In this case the Masculine is used even 
when a woman is the speaker. Thus Electra says: πεσούμεθ᾽, 
εἰ χρή, πατρὶ τιμωρούμενοι, I will fall, if i must be,as my father's 
avenger. 

Obs. 3.—In Homer there are many Plurals of abstract ideas, which 
we express in the Singular; the Plural, however, properly de- 
notes the various manifestations of such ideas: ἱπποσύνῃς 
ἐκέκαστο, by horsemanship he was distinguished ; ἀφραδίῃσι νόοιο, 
in the foolishness (the foolish thoughts) ef his mind. 


§ 363. The Neuter Plural comes very near in its mean- 
ing to the Singular. This explains the peculiar Greek 
custom, that the Neuter Plural has the verb in the Sin- 


§ 366. NUMBER AND GENDER. 229 


guar: πῶς ταῦτα παύσεται; how ws this to end? τὰ 
πράγματα ταῦτα δεινά ἐστιν, these things are terrible. 


Obs. 1.—Some Plural Neuters, which denote a plurality of persons, 
sometimes have the verb in the Plural, as: ra τέλη, in the sense 
of the authorities ; ra ἔθνη, the peoples. 

Obs. 2.—The Homeric and the Common Greek Dialects (Introduc- 
tion, 4) generally allow the Plural Verb with the Neuter Plural: 
Hom. σπάρτα λέλυνται, the ropes are loosed. 


§ 364. With an indefinite Neuter Subject Gn English, 
it) the Adjective Predicate is frequently in the Plural: 
ἀδύνατά ἐστιν ἀποφυγεῖν, it is umpossible to escape , this 
is the case especially with the Verbal Adjective in rso-¢: 
ἐπιχειρητέα iy, it was to be attempted. 


§ 365. When two persons or things are spoken of, the 
Plural is always admissible as well as the Dual, and both 
numbers may be used in referring to the same thing: 
ἐγελασάτην ἄμφω, βλέψαντες cic ἀλλήλους, they 
both laughed after looking at one another, δότε παρά- 
δειγμα, ὦ Λάχης te καὶ Νικία, give an example, Laches and 
Nicias ; ὦ Λάχης τε καὶ Νικία, εἴπατον, O Laches and 
Nicias say. 


§ 366. The Neuter of an adjective in the Singular as 
well as in the Plural easily becomes a substantive: ἐν 
μέσῳ, ὧν medio, in the midst; ἐν τῷ ταρόντι, at the 
present moment, for the present; ἐκ πολλοῦ, for ὦ 
long time; Serva, terrible things. 

Hence a Weuter Adjective often stands as Predicate to 
one or more Masculine or Feminine substantives to ex- 
press a class or genus in general: Hom. οὐκ ἀγαθὸν 
πολυκοιρανίη, the government of many is not a good thing; 
ὀρθὸν ἁλήθει᾽ ἀεί, truth is always the right thing ; δεινὸν 
οἱ πολλοί, κακούργους ὅταν ἔχωσι προστάτας, ὦ bad thing 
is the many when they have base leaders; ταραχαὶ καὶ 
στάσεις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσιν, disturbance and discord 
are ruinous to states. 


230 THE ARTICLE. . 8 367. : 


§ 367. The demonstrative pronoun, instead of being in 
the Neuter as in German, frequently agrees in gender and 
number with the Predicate to which it refers, just as in 
Latin: οὗτοί εἰσιν ἄνδρες, those are men; οὗτος ὕρος 
ἐστὶ δικαιοσύνης ἀληθῆ τε λέγειν καὶ ἃ ἂν λάβῃ τις ἀποδιδό- 
ναι, this is the idea of justice, ἐο speak the truth, and to 
give back what we have recewed |hec notio justitie est]. 

The relative pronoun also often agrees in Gender and 
Number, not with the preceding substantive to which it 
refers, but with the substantive following, which is added 
as a Predicate: φίλου, ὃ μέγιστον ἀγαθόν ἐστιν, οὐ ppov- 
τίζουσιν, they do not care for ὦ friend, which is the great- 
est good. 


CHap. XV.—THE ARTICLE. 


ὃ 368. The Article ὁ, ἡ, τό is originally a demonstrative 
pronoun, and still employed as such in Homer, both in a 
substantive and adjective sense, and frequently also in the 
language of the other poets: Hom. τὴν ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω, 
HER / will not give up; poet. τὸν, ὦ Ζεῦ πάτερ, φθίσον, 
HIM, father Zeus, destroy; Hom. φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος, 
this thy courage will be thy ruin. 


§ 369. The Article in this demonstrative sense is also 
employed in the following cases in Attic prose : 

1. In connection with μέν and δέ: ὁ μέν, the one; ὃ δέ,. 
the other. 


Obs.—Used adverbially, τὸ (ra) μὲν --- τὸ (τὰ) δέ, mean partly — 
partly. 
2. Sometimes also with καί and dé: καὶ τὸν κελεῦσαι» 
and that he ordered τὸν καὶ τόν, the one and the other. 
3. In πρὸ τοῦ, before that, formerly. 


§ 370. The real Article generally corresponds to the 
English defincte article. It serves to set forth an object, 


§ 374. THLE ARTICLE. 231 


either as a single one (the individualizing article) or as a 
class (the generic article). 

Obs.—5, ἡ, τό in Homer almost always has a demonstrative power. 
Yet in many cases—compare especially ὃ 379—the use of these 
forms approaches very near to that of the Attic Article. The 
Article, however, in Homer is scarcely ever necessary, and is fre- 
quently omitted also in the Tragic writers. 

ὃ 371.1. The Zndividualizing Article sets forth a sin- 

gle object above others of the same kind, and that: 

a) as known or having been pointed out before: Herod. 
Χαλκιδέες τὰς ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμισίῳ εἴκοσι νῆας παρείχοντο, the 
Chalcideans furnished the (before mentioned) twenty ships 
at Artemision ; "Ξέρξης ἀγείρας τὴν ἀναρίθμητον στρατιὰν 
Ψ > ¢€ . 
ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, after having collected the (well- 
known) innumerable army, Xerxes marched against 
Greece. 


Obs.—In this sense proper names also, which in general do not 
need it, may take the Article: ὁ Σοκράτης, Socrates, whom you 
know, or who was mentioned before. 


-§ 372. ὁὺ) A thing as distinguished from others by the 
addition of distinguishing circumstances: ὃ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
δῆμος, the Athenian people (no other); ἡ πόλις ἣν πολιορ- 


κοῦμεν, the city which we are besieging (just this). 


§ 373. The distinguishing circumstance expressed by 
the Article is often indicated in English by the possessive 
pronoun: ἕκαστος τῶν δημιουργῶν τὴν τέχνην καλῶς ἐξ- 
εἰργάζετο, cach of the artisans practised his art well. 


§ 374. In connexion with numerals, the Article some- 
times denotes that the number to which it is added stands 
in a defined relation to another number: τὰ δύο μέρη, two 
thirds ; τῶν τριήρων τριακοσίων οὐσῶν τῶν πασῶν τὰς 
διακοσίας ἡ πόλις παρέσχετο, of the triremes, of which there 
were three hundred in all, the city furnished two hun- 
dred. The Article has a similar effect with quantitative 
adjectives of a more general kind: πολλοί, many—oi πολ’ 


232 THE ARTICLE. OR SFOs 


Aoi, most , πλέονες, more—oi πλέονες, the greater part ; 
ἄλλοι, alii—oi ἄλλοι, cetert , ὀλίγοι, ὦ few—ot ὀλίγοι, the 
oligarchs. 

§ 375. 2. The Ceneree.. Article indicates a whole class of 
homogeneous objects: οἱ πολῖται, all the citizens ; ὃ ῥήτωρ, 
the orator (by profession) ; δὲῖ τὸν στρατιώτην τὸν ἄρχοντα 
μᾶλλον ἢ τοὺς πολεμίους φοβεῖσθαι, the soldier must fear 
his superior rather than the enemy. 

Obs.—Hence the Article may also be used with proper names in 


the plural when a whole class is to be described: οἱ Δημοσθένεις, 
orators like Demosthenes (a Demosthenes, compare § 362, Obs. 1). 


§ 376. The Article is not used when a substantive only 
expresses an idea in general: ἀνθρώπου ψυχὴ τοῦ θείου 
μετέχει, mans soul partakes of the divine; so θεός de- 
notes the deity; ὁ θεός, a particular god ; so likewise, in 
many other current expressions, the more ancient method 
of not using the Article has been preserved: νυκτός, by 
night; ἡμέρας, by day, ἐπὶ ᾿θαλάσσῃ, at sea; πρὸς ἄστυ, 
to town; κατ᾽ ἀγρόν, in the country; κατὰ γῆς, under the 
earth » ἐν δεξιᾷ, on the right y ἐξαιρῶ λόγου, 7 exempt. 


§ 377. The Article is omitted with a number of sub- 
stantives, which by custom have almost acquired the force 
of proper names: βασιλεύς, the king (of the Persians); 
mputavac, the presidents (as officials); ἐν ἀκροπόλει, tn the 
Acropolis (Athens). 


§ 378. The Lredicate (§ 361, 3, 10) generally has 22 

Article: Κῦρος ἐγένετο βασιλεὺς τῶν Περσῶν, Cyrus Ν 
became king of the Persians; πόνος εὐκλείας πατῆ Ps 
labor is father of fame ; οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Περικλέα εἵλοντο. 
στρατηγόν, the Athenians chose Pericles general (com- 
pare δὲ 387, 392, 403, and 438, Obs. 


ὃ 379. By means of the Article, any adjective, partici- 
ple, or adverb, as well as the infinitive, ἜΣ be made @ 
substantive : Hom. 6 γέῤων; the old man; οἱ πλούσιοι, 
the rich; ὃ λέγων, the speaker ; ὁ πίλας, the neighbor , ot 


§ 385. : THE ARTICLE. 233 


παρόντες, those present ; τὰ κάτω, the under (part); οἱ πά- 
Aa, the ancients , τὸ μισεῖν, hating or hatred. 
0bs.—With the Neuter Article, any word, or even a whole sentence, 
may be represented as one object: τὸ ἀνήρ, the word ἀνήρ or the 
idea “man;” τὸ Τνῶθι σεαυτόν, the saying or rule “ Know thy- 
self.” 

§ 380. The Generic Article (§ 375) generalizes the idea 
of a participle, which then is to be translated by a relative 
phrase: ποιείτω τοῦτο 6 βουλόμενος, do that, who will , μὴ 
ζητεῖτε τὸν ταῦτα λέξοντα, 866) not (one) who will say this 
(compare § 500). 

§ 381. By the Article, many adverbs, placed between it and a sub- 
stantive, become attributive adjectives: οἱ τότε ἄνθρωποι, the people of 
that time; ἡ παραυτίκα ἡδονή, the momentary pleasure; αἱ ἐνθάδε 
γυναῖκες, the women of this place; ἡ ἄγαν ἐλευθερία, the excessive free- 
dom. 

§ 382. In the same way, a genitive, or a preposition with a substan- 
tive, placed between the Article and another substantive, becomes 
an attributive clause: ra τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πράγματα, the affairs of the 
Athenians ; οἱ iv τῇ πόλει ἄνθρωποι, the people in the city , ἡ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν 
τροφή, the daily nourishment; αἱ ἄνευ λυπῶν ἡδοναί, the painless pleas- 
ures. 

§ 383. The Article often stands alone, sometimes with 
the Genitive of a substantive (compare δὲ 409, 410), some- 
times with a preposition followed by a substantive; in 
such a construction the Article has the force of @ substan- 
twe (ὃ 379): τὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the affairs (possessions, 
interests) of the Athenians ; οἱ ἐν τῇ πόλει, the (people) a 
the city; τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα, what follows, the later (events). 

§ 384. When a substantive with an attributive (§ 361, 
11) adjective has the Article, the adjective stands between 
the substantive and the article: ὃ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ, the good 
NGN. 

§ 385. If the substantive alone is to be prominent, and 
the adjective to be added as apposition (§ 361, 12), the 
substantive stands first, and the adjective with the article 
Jollows, thus: 


234 THE ARTICLE. δ 986, 


a) The substantive without Article, when the case is 
such that the substantive, if put alone, would have no arti- 
cle: τί διαφέρει ἄνθρωπος ἀκρατὴς θηρίου τοῦ ἀκρατε- 
στάτου; in what does an ungovernable man differ from 
the most ungovernable beast ? for if θηρίον stood alone it 
would be without Article, θηρίου, from ὦ beast. 

b) The substantive has the Article when by itself, even 
without an adjective, it must have the Article: οἱ Χῖοι τὸ 
τεῖχος περιεῖλον τὸ καινόν, the Chians pulled down (their) 
wall—the new one (which they themselves had built); for, 
even without the adjective, it would have to be τὸ τεῖχος 
περιεῖλον (ὃ 373). 


§ 386. The same rule holds good with regard to the po- 
sition of the attributive additions mentioned in δὴ 381 and 
382: 6 ᾿Αθηναίων δῆμος, the Athenian people; ὃ δῆμος, 
ὁ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, the people, that is, the Athenian ; ὁ μετὰ 
ταῦτα χρόνος, the after time; ὃ χρόνος ὃ μετὰ ταῦτα, the 
time which followed this. } 


§ 387. An adjective which, without the Article, either 
precedes or follows a substantive having the Article, is pre- 
dicative, ὁ. é., the character is assigned to the substantive 
only by this word (ὃ 361, 4, 8, and 10): ἀγαθὸς ὁ ἀνὴρ or ὃ 
ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός (viz., ἐστίν), the man is good ; ἅπαντες ἔχομεν 
τὸ σῶμα θνητόν, we all have a body (which is) mortal. 
The translation may often be effected by a relative clause: 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἡγοῦντο αὐτονόμων τὸ πρῶτον συμμάχων, the 
Athenians had the lead of allies (who) at jirst (were) inde- 
pendent , φαίνομαι μεγάλας τὴς ὑποσχέσεις ποιούμενος, L 
seem to make promises which are great. Compare ὃ 378. 

Obs.—With proper names, the use of the Article is very uncertain 

when the class is added to which they belong: ὁ Εὐφράτης ποτα- 
μός OY ὁ ποταμὸς ὁ Eigparne, the river Euphrates ; ἡ Αἴτνη τὸ ὄρος, 
Mount Etna ; Σικελία ἡ νῆσος, the island of Sicily ; ἡ πόλις οἱ Ταρ- 
σοί, the city of Tarsi. 

§ 388. The possessive pronoun is preceded by the Arti- 
cle when a single definite object is referred to: 6 ἐμὸς 


| Mel 


— a 


§ 391. THE ARTICLE. 235 


éraipoc, my (particular) frend , ἐμὸς ἑταῖρος, a friend of 
mune. 

§ 389. αὐτός, as a predicate, put before or after a sub- 
stantive with the Article, means self; αὐτὸς 6 πατήρ or ὃ 
πατὴρ αὐτός, the father himself, ipse pater; but as an at- 
tribute it is put between the Article and the substantive, 
and means same: 6 αὐτὸς ἀνήρ, the same man, idem vir. 

With the demonstrative pronouns οὗτος, ὅδε, ἐκεῖνος, a 
substantive, not being a predicate, has regularly the Article: 
οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ OY ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος, this man; ἐκεῖνο τὸ δῶρον, 
that gift. But when the substantive is a predicate the 
Article is wanting: ἐν Πέρσαις νόμος ἐστὶν οὗτος, among 
the Persians this vs law. Compare § 367. 


§ 390. πᾶς without the Article before a substantive with- 
out the Article means in the Singular every: πᾶσα πόλις, 
every city. The Article before πᾶς gives it the meaning 
of whole: ἡ πᾶσα πόλις, the whole city; τοὺς πάντας ὁπλί- 
τας, the whole of the heavy-armed. Most generally πᾶς 
as well as ὅλος without the Article precedes or follows a 
substantive provided with the Article: πᾶσαν ὑμῖν τὴν 
ἀλήθειαν ἐρῶ, [ will tell you the whole truth ; τὸν ἀριθμὸν 
πάντα δίχα διελάβομεν, we divided the whole number into 
two parts ; τῆς ἡμέρας ὕλης διῆλθον ov πλέον πέντε Kal 
εἴκοσι σταδίων, during the whole day they proceeded no 
more than twenty-five stadia. 


Obs.—zxac, with the Article added to a numeral, may often be 
translated by “altogether” or “in all:” Δαρεῖος ἐβασίλευσε τὰ 
πάντα ἐξ καὶ τριάκοντα ἔτη, Darius ruled altogether thirty-six years. 


§ 391. Expressions for measures are to be understood differently, 
according to the position of the Article: ἔσχατον τὸ ὄρος, the extreme 
end of the mountain ; τὸ ἔσχατον dpoe, the farthest mountain (in contrast 
to other mountains); ἡ ἀγορὰ μέση, the middle (of the) market-place ; 
ἡ μέση ἀγορά, the middle market, that placed in the middle of several 
others. In Latin, forwm medium means both. 


236 THE NOMINATIVE. $392. 


CHap. X VI.—USE oF THE CASES. 
A) The Nominative. 


§ 392. The Vominative is the case of the subject and of 
the predicate belonging to the subject (ὃ 361, 3, 4). 

Hence, as in Latin with fio, dicor, videor, creor, etc., so 
in Greek with verbs of the same meaning, the predicative 
noun referring to the subject is in the Nominative: καθί- 
σταται βασιλεύς, he is appointed king ; ᾿Αλέξανδρος θεὸς 
ὠνομάζετο, Alexander deus appellabatur. Compare ὃ 361, 
73 88 378, 403. 

Obs.—axotw, I hear, in the sense of I am called [Lat. audio], also be- 
longs to these verbs: ot ἐν ᾿Αθήναις φιλιππίζοντες κόλακες καὶ 
θεοῖς ἐχθροὶ ἤκουον, the Philippizers in Athens were called flat- 
terers and objects of the gods’ hatred. 

§ 393. The Nominative is frequently used instead of the Vocative 
in addressing.a person, especially in connection with οὗτος : ὁ ᾿Απολ- 
λόδωρος οὗτος, οὐ περιμενεῖς ; You! Apollodorus, wovt you stop? and 
also in exclamations: νήπιος, the fool ! 


B) The Vocative. 


§ 394. The person or thing addressed is in the Vocative. 
In Attic prose ὦ is generally put before it, except some- 
times in animated discourse: μὴ θορυβεῖτε, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι, dowt make a disturbance, Athenians ; ἀκούεις Ai- 
σχίνη; do you hear, Aischines ἢ 

Obs. —The Vocative, like interjections, does not belong to the 


structure of a sentence, whence a word in the Vocative is in- 
closed by commas. 


C) The Accusative. 


ὃ 806. The Accusative, Genitive, and Dative mark an 
object as dependent, whence they are called cases of de- 
pendence (casus obliqut, oblique cases). 

The Accusative is the case of the Olject, and therefore 
denotes generally the person or thing to which an action 
is directed. 


§ 398. THE EXTERNAL OBJECT. 237 


The Object is either external to the action by which it 
is affected: τύπτω τὸν δοῦλον, 7 strike the slave, or inter- 
nal, ὦ. ¢., already contained in the action itself: τύπτω πεν- 
τήκοντα πληγάς, L strike fifty blows. 

Obs.—The Accusative, therefore, in the great majority of cases, is 
dependent on a ver>. Only in a very few cases does it happen 
that a substantive after the manner of a verb is followed by an 
Accusative : οἱ σύμμαχοι τεθνᾶσι τῷ δέει τοὺς τοιούτους ἀποστόλους, 
the allies are dead (beside themselves) from fear of such embassa- 
dors. 


§ 396. 1. The Hicternal Object 


is expressed by the Accusative with transitive verbs as in 
other languages. Several verbs, however, are treated in 
Greek as transitive which in other languages are intransi- 
tive. Such verbs are: 


a) Those which signify to benefit or injure, whether it 
be by act or speech: εὖ or ἀγαθὸν ποιέω, evepyetéw, L ben- 
efit (rove εὐεργετήσαντας, my benefactors); ὀνίνημι, ὠφελέω, 
L am useful; κακῶς or κακὸν ποιέω, κακόω, L do al; 
ἀδικέω, 7 do wrong; ὑβρίζω, 7 insult; βλάπτω, 7 hurt, 
etce.; also κολακεύω, J flatter, and τιμωρέομαι, 1 avenge my- 
self (τὸν ἐχθρόν, on my enemy); ὃ Σωκράτης οὐδένα τῶν 
πολιτῶν ἠδίκησεν, Socrates acted unjustly to none of his 
Jellow-citizens. 

§ 397. Not unfrequently the verb of a principal clause takes as its 
object what should properly be the subject of a subordinate clause : 
καί μοι τὸν υἱὸν εἰπέ, εἰ μεμάθηκε THY τέχνην, MOre animated than καί μοι 
εἰπέ, εἰ ὁ υἱὸς μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην, and tell me about my son, whether he 
has learned his trade. Compare § 519, 5, Obs. 2. 

§ 398. 6) The Accusative of the external Object is used 
with the verbs: φεύγω (compare fugio), ἀποδιδράσκω, 7 
run away From " φθάνω, L get before y θηράω, θηρεύω, ᾽: 
hunt after; μιμέομαι (compare imitor), ζηλόω, L rival ; 
ἀμείβομαι, L repay, 1 respond to; λανθάνω (compare lateo), 
ἐκλείπω (compare deficio); ἐκλείπει μὲ ἡ ἐλπίς, Spes Me 


deficit. 


238 THE INTERNAL OBJECT. § 399. 


§ 399. 6) This Accusative is farther used with verbs of 
emotion : αἰδέομαι, αἰσχύνομαι, Lam ashamed (τὸν πατέρα, 
before my father); φυλάττομαι, evrAaéoua, “ am on my 
guard against ; θαῤῥέω, 1 have confidence (τὴν ἰσχύν, in 
my strength); ἐκπλήττομαι, καταπλήττομαι, Lam amazed 
at; similarly with ὄμνυμι, 7 swear by (rove θεούς, the 
gods). 

Obs.—As with ὄμνυμι, so in exclamations, the Accusative is used 

even without a governing verb: vai pa τὸν Δία, Yes, by Zeus / 
(ἢ 643, 16). 

§ 3996. The Space and Time over which an action ex- 
tends are often expressed by the Accusative: κοινὴν ὁδὸν 
ἤλθομεν, we came by ὦ common road ; Hom. κλίμακα 
ὑψηλὴν κατε[βήσετο, she came down the high ladder ; 
πλεῖν θάλασσαν, to navigate the sea; ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος ἔμεινε 
ἡμέρας πέντε, there Cyrus remained five days. Compare 
8 405. : 

On the’ Accusative of the azn, see ὃ 406. 


§ 400. 2. The Internal Object 


is expressed by the Accusative not only with transitive, 
but also with intransitive and passive verbs. 
The internal Object is: 


4) a word of cognate oregin with the verb: Hom. ἄλλοι 
© ἀμφ᾽ ἄλλῃσι μάχην ἐμάχοντο πύλῃσιν, alit circa alias 
portas pugnam pugnabant ; τεΐχος τειχίζονται, they 
wall (build) a@ wall; πομπὴν πέμπειν, to send an escort, 
make a solemn procession ; κακίστην δουλείαν ἐδούλευσεν, 
he served the worst service (endured the worst slavery) ; 
Hom. τῷ πείσεαι ὅς Kev ἀρίστην βουλὴν BovAcboy, you will 
obey him who advises (gives) the best advice ; τὴν ἐναντίαν 
νόσον νοσοῦμεν, we suffer (sicken) from the opposite sick- 
ness ; μεγάλην τινὰ κρίσιν κρίνεται, he is judged (tried) in 
a great trial ; 

ὁ) or a word akin to the verb in meaning ; πληγὴν τύπ- 
tera Papurarny, he is struck a very severe blow ; πάσας 


— ee © 
A ω ν" ἡ 
ον 


§ 402. DOUBLE OBJECT. 239 


νόσους κάμνει, he suffers from all diseases ; poet. ὀδύρματα 
γοᾶσθαι, to moan lamentations ; πόλεμον ἐστράτευσαν τὸν 
ἱερὸν καλούμενον, they marched out to the so-called holy 
war; γραφὴν διώκειν, to pursue with a writ (compare 
γραφὴν γράφεσθαι) ; 

ce) or a substantive defining the verb: ᾿Ολύμπια νικᾶν, 
to conquer in the Olympic games; γάμους ἑστιᾶν, to give 
a marriage-feast ; Hom. νύστον ὀδυρόμενοι, weeping for 
the return ; μένεα πνείοντες ᾿Αχαιοί, the cowrage-breathing 
Achwans ; ἀγγελίην ἐλθεῖν, to go a message; πῦρ ὀφθαλ- 
μοῖσι δεδορκώς, looking fire with the eyes Sree fiery 
looks) ; 


d) or the result of the action expressed by the verb: 
ἕλκος οὐτάσαι, to strike a wound (produce by blows); ὅρ- 
Kia τάμνειν, fedus ferire, 1. €., fedus hostiam feriendo ef- 
jicere ; poet. ἧδε (ἡ ἀναρχία) τροπὰς καταῤῥήγνυσι, τέ (an- 
archy) breaks flight, 2. e., produces flight by breaking through 
the ranks. 


§ 401. Often, especially in the poets, a neuter adjective 
or pronoun in the Accusative is added to a verb as a 
special qualification, almost like an adverb (ὃ 400, c): 
ὀλίγον ἀπεῖναι, to be a little way off; μέγα ψεύδεται, 
he tells a great lie (compare μέγα Ψεῦ δος ψεύδεται); τοῦ - 
το χαίρω, at this 7 rejoice; τί χρήσομαι τούτῳ; what 
use shall 1 make of this? πάντα πείσομαι, 7 will obey ir 
all things. 


§ 402. 3. Double Object. 


Many verbs have a double object, consequently a double 
Accusative ; the following, which most frequently occur 
with this construction, may serve as examples: διδάσκω 
(ἐδίδαξαν τὸν παῖδα τὴν μουσικήν, docuerunt puerum mu- 
sicam); κρύπτω, LT hide ; tpwraw, 7 ask ; αἰτέω, 7 demand ; 
πράττομαι, 7 acquire (ἀργύριον τοὺς παρόντας, money from 
those who are present); κακὸν λέγω τοὺς ἐχθρούς, 7 speak 


~ δ ιν ἢ 
"έν 
᾿ Ὁ 
ν Fo 


240 | DOUBLE OBJECT. ᾿ 8 403. 


all of m Ly enemies , ἀφαιρέομαι, ἀποστερέω, I deprive of ; 
ἀναμιμνήσκω, at retin of; ἐνδύω, ἀμφιέννυμι, 7 put on 
(τινὰ χιτῶνα, a coat on some one); περιβάλλομαι,. 7 encircle 
(τείχη τὴν πόλιν, the city with wails). Hom.: ἡ δὲ μέγαν 
ἱστὸν ὕφαινεν δίπλακα, she wove a double garment at the 
loom (ὃ 399, ὁ). 


Obs. 1.—In the passive construction the thing remains in the Accu- 
sative: διδάσκομαι τὴν μουσικήν; ἀφήρημαι τὸν ἵππον, . am 
robbed of the horse. ‘ 


Obs. 2.—Many other verbs besides these have a double: Accusative, 
by an external object being added to the internal one: Hom. 
ov Ζεὺς φίλει παντοίην φιλότητα, whom Zeus loved with multiform 
love, i. e.,to whom Zeus manifested love in various ways (ὃ 400, 
a); Αἰσχίνης Κτησιφῶντα γραφὴν παρανόμων ἐδίωκεν, Aischines pros- 
ecuted Ktesiphon with a charge of violating the law (§ 400, δ); poet. 
πολλά σε ὀδύρματα κατεῖδον τὴν Ἡράκλειον ἔξοδον γοωμένην, many 
wailings I saw you give vent to about the departure of Heracles 
(§ 400, ὁ); Hom. ἕλκος ὅ pe βροτὸς οὔτασεν ἀνήρ, the wound which 
a mortal man struck me (δ 400, d). 


§ 404. 4. The Accusative as a Predicate. 

A dependent Predicate relating to an Object is in the 
Accusative. Hence the verbs mentioned in §§ 361, 10, 
and 392, which signify naming, deeming, making, appoint- 
ing, choosing, representing, and the like, have a doudle 
Accusative in the Active—one of the external Object, and 
one of the Predicate: οἱ κόλακες ᾿Αλέξανδρον θεὸν ὠνό- 
μαζον, the flattercrs used to call Alexander a god ; αἱρεῖ- 
ofai τινα στρατηγόν, eligere aliquem ducem; οὐ τοὺς 
πλεῖστα ἔχοντας εὐδαιμονεστάτους νομίζω, 7 do not 
deem those possessing most the happiest ; παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν 
εὐπειθῆ, 7 show myself obedient; ἔλαβε τοῦτο δῶρον, 
he received this (as) a gift. 

Obs.—The want of the Article often of itself distinguishes the pre- 

dicative accusative from the objective (§ 378). In the passive 


construction both Accusatives must become Nominatiyes, accord- 
ing to § 392. 


ὃ 404. 5. In a freer way the Accusative is joined te 


~~ νυν, 


§ 405. DOUBLE OBJECT. 241 


verbs and adjectives, to point out to what the idea of 
these words refers, in reference to what they are to be 
understood: κάμνω τὴν κεφαλήν, 7) suffer in the head 
(compare § 400, ὁ); ἄδικος πᾶσαν ἀδικίαν, unjust im 
every (kind of) cnjustice (in every way, compare § 400, 
a); Ἕλληνές εἰσι τὸ γένος, they are Greeks wm race; 


εὖ ἔχομεν τὰ σώματα, we are well in body; Hom. 6 μ- 


ματα καὶ κεφαλὴν ἴκελος Att τερπικεραύνῳ, tn eyes and 
head like thunder-loving Zeus ; παρθένος καλὴ τὸ εἶδος, 
a maiden beautiful in form, or of beautiful form (facie 
pulchra) ; ; οὐδεὶς ἄνθρωπος αὐτὸς πάντα σοφός, NO Man 
as fameself wise in ever y thing ; y ὃ Μαρσύας ποταμὸς εἴκοσι 
καὶ πέντε πόδας εἶχε τὸ evpoe, the Liver Marsyas Was 
twenty-five feet in breadth. This Accusative is called the 
Accusative of reference. 

Obs.—Hence a great number of independent, almost adverbial, Ac- 
cusatives: τὸ ὄνομα, in name, by name ; τὸ πλῆθος, in number ; τὸν 
τρόπον, in character ; τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this way; τὴν φύσιν, by 
nature ; mpopaow, on the pretext, ostensibly ; δίκην, like; χάριν, for 
the sake of (gratia); τὸ πᾶν, altogether, on the whole; πολύ, by far ; 


τί, quid, what? why? τί κλαίεις ; why weepest thou? αὐτὰ ταῦτα 
ἥκω, for this very reason I have come. 


§ 405. In regard to the ideas of space and time, the 
Accusative expresses extension (compare ὃ 399, 6): Hom. 
πᾶν ἧμαρ φερόμην, ὦ whole day [ was borne along, to- 
twm diem Serebar a βασιλεὺς καὶ “Ελληνες ἀπεῖχον ἀλ- 
λήλων τριάκοντα στάδια, the king and the Hellenes 
were thirty stadia distant from each other ; Hom. λείπετο 
δουρὸς ἔρω ἡ ν, he remained a spear’s throw behind , τὸν 
μὲν εὖ παθόντα δεῖ μεμνῆσθαι τὸν πάντα χρόνον, τὸν 
δὲ ποιήσαντα εὐθὺς ἐπιλελῆσθαι, he who has received kind- 
nesses ought to remember them throughout all time, but he 
who has done them immediately to forget them. 


Obs. 1.—An Accusative used with ordinal numerals, in regard to 
time, is to be translated by since before or ago: ἑβδόμην ἡμέραν 
ἡ Ovydrno αὐτῷ ἰτετελευτήκει, his daughter had died seven days be- 
Sore. 


242 THE GENITIVE. § 406. 


Obs. 2.—F reer Accusatives, referable chiefly to time, are: τοῦτον 
τὸν χρόνον, at this time ; τὸ λοιπόν, for the future, henceforth ; τέλος, 
at last; πρότερον, formerly ; ἀρχήν, up to the beginning, hence en- 
tirely ; τὴν ταχίστην, supply ὁδόν, the quickest (way); μακράν, far, 
distant. 


§ 406. In. the poets, the Accusative joined to verbs of 


motion also denotes the place toward which an action 15. 


directed: Hom. τοῦ δὲ κλέος οὐρανὸν ἵκει, his fame 


reaches up to heaven ; πῶς ἦλθες "A pyoe; quomodo Ar- 


gos venistt? On the absolute Accusative of participles, 
see § 586. 


| D) The Genitive. 
8. 407. The Genitive generally denotes a thing belong- 
eng to another. 


Obs.—Hence the Genitive is most commonly dependent on a noun, 
and, even where it is governed by a verb, its use resembles that 
with a noun. 


§ 408. 1. The Genitive with Substantives. 


One Substantive may be joined to another in various 
ways; the most common are: 


1. Σωκράτης ὁ Σωφρονίσκου vide, Socrates son of 
Sophroniscus : Origin. 
2. ἡ οἰκία τοῦ πατρός, the father’s house: Possession. 
3. νόμισμα ἀργυρίου, ὦ silver coin: Materval. 
Hom. δέπας οἴνου, ὦ cup of wine: Contents. 
4. οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν Ἑλλήνων, most of the LHellenes: 
Partitive Genrtwe. 
5.6 φόβος τῶν πολεμίων, metus hostium, ἡ. é., either 
a) the fear of the enemy, ὁ. 6., the fear which the 
enemy feels (Subjective Genitive), or, 
ὦ) the fear about the enemy, ὁ: 6.. the fear of which 
the enemy is the object (Objective Genitive). 
6. δοῦλος πέντε μνῶν, ὦ slave worth five mine: Value. 
7. γραφὴ κλοπῆς, an accusation of theft : Cause. 
8. πολίτου ἀρετή, ὦ citizen’s virtue : Quality. 


“- 


§ 412. THE GENITIVE. 243 


9. Hom. Τροίης πτολίεθρον, the city of (called) Troy: 
Designation. 

Which of.the two substantives in any particular case 
has to be expressed by the Genitive is generally quite as 
clear from their meaning as in English. 


But the following special peculiarities in the use of the 
different kinds of Genitives deserve to be noticed: 


§ 409. a) The Genitive denotes descent from a father, 
even without the addition of a Substantive: Σωκράτης ὃ 
Σωφρονίσκου, Socrates, the son of Sophroniscus » Μιλτιά- 
én¢ Κίμωνος, Miltiades, son of Kimon,; poct., Διὸς "Δρ- 
τεμις, Artemis, daughter of Leus. 


§ 410. 6) The Neuter of the Article with a Genitive has 
very different meanings (compare ὃ 383): τὰ τῶν ᾿Ἑλλή- 
νων, the affairs, interests, possessions of the EHellenes (com- 
pare τὰ Ἑλληνικά); τὸ τῆς ὀλιγαρχίας, the nature of the 
oligarchy; on the other hand, τὸ τοῦ Δημοσθένους, the 
word of Demosthenes ; τὰ τῶν φίλων κοινά, the property 
of friends is common. 


§ 411. c) The idea of abode is to be supplied in the ex~ 
pressions: εἰς διδασκάλου φοιτᾶν, to go to the masters 
(house), ἡ. ¢., to go to school; ἐν or εἰς “Αἰδου (Homer, εἰν 
᾿Αἴδαο δόμοις, 7n Lades’ dwelling, dominion), in or tinto 
the lower world. 


ὃ 412. d) The Partitive Genitive (4), denoting a whole 
to be divided, is most common with numerals and superla- 
tives: πολλοὶ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, multe Atheniensium ; x 6- 
τερος τῶν ἀδελφῶν ; which of the two brothers? πάντων 
ἄριστος, omnium optimus; but also with various adjec- 
tives: οἱ σπουδαΐοι τῶν πολιτῶν, the assiduous among 
the citizens. So, more freely in the Homeric poems: δῖα 
θεάων, the divine one among goddesses; δήμου ἀνήρ, ὦ 
man of the people; and similarly, ἀνὴρ τῶν ῥητόρων, ὦ 
man from the number of the orators. 


244 THE GENITIVE. § 413. 


The Partitive Genitive with names of places denotes the — 


whole territory:. Θῆβαι τῆς Βοιωτίας, Thebes im Beotia; 
with Neuter pronouns it sometimes denotes a whole which 
is attained by degrees: εἰς τοῦτο ἀνοίας ἦλθον, 60 Sg 
insanie progress sunt. 

Obs.— Adjectives which have a Partitive Genitive sometimes follow 
the gender of the Genitive dependent upon them: ὁ ἥμισυς τοῦ 
χρόνου, the half of the time (instead of τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ χρόνου); ἡ 
πλείστη τῆς χώρας, most of the land. 


§ 413. ὁ) The Objective Genitive (5, ¢) may be translated 
by various prepositions: εὔνοια τῶν φίλων, benevolence 
toward friends ; ἀπορία σίτου, want of food ; Hom.., ἔρος 
Ἂ , ᾿ Ν ~ ς , 
ἐδητύος ἠδὲ ποτῆτο ς, eagerness for food and drink ; ἡσυχία 
ἐχθρῶν, peace Jrom enemies s ἀγῶνες λόγω v, Contests in 
speeches , ἀφορμὴ ἔργων, stimulus to deeds ; ἀπόστασις τῶν 
᾿Αθηναίων, defection from the Athenians ; λύσις θανάτου, 


deliverance from death ; Bia πολιτῶν, with violence agaist 


the citizens, in spite of the citizens. 


2. Gemtive with Adjectives and Adverbs. 

§ 414. The Genitive is joined to many relative adjec- 
tives and their adverbs, 7. ¢., to such adjectives and adverbs 
as are conceivable only in reference to something, and 
points out the person or thing they refer to. The most 
important adjectives of this kind are: 


1. κοινός, common ; ἴδιος, οἰκεῖος, Own, peculiar, and oth- 
ers which imply property or belonging to, as: ναὸς ἱερὸς 
tov ᾿Απόλλωνος, ὦ temple sacred to Apollo (possession, 
compare § 408, 2). : 

2. Adjectives denoting plenty and want (contents, § 408, 
3), as: μεστός, ἔμπλεως, πλήρης, 7 εἰ, πλούσιος, Vich; ἐν- 
δεής, πένης, necessitous , farther, the adverb ἅλις, enough: 
πάντα εὐφροσύνης πλέα ἦν, all was full of joy. 

3. Those signifying acquainted or unacquainted with: 
ἔμπειρος, peritus ; ἄπειρος, tmperitus ; ἐπιστήμων, skilled 


ὃ 410. THE GENITIVE. 245 


(τέχνης, tn an art); μνήμων, ἀμνήμων, mindful and un- 
mindful. 

4. ἄξιος, worthy; ἀνάξιος, unworthy ; πλείστου ἄξιον, 
worth most, the worthiest thing (ὃ 408, 6). 

5. Adjectives implying particepation (ὃ 408, 4), whether 
it be positive or negative: μέτοχος τοῦ πόνου, particeps 
laboris ; ἄμοιρος, without a share, αἴτιος, author, guilty, 
reus. 

Obs.—To these belong many adjectives compounded with ἀν (a, 

§ 360) privative, which, especially in poets, are joined with the 


genitive: poet. αἰὼν κακῶν ἄγευστος, a life which has not tasted of 
misfortunes ; φίλων ἄκλαυτος, unwept by Friends. 


6. Adjectives in -ἰκός (ὃ 351) denoting capability or fit- 
ness for (compare 3) something: διδασκαλικὸς γραμματικῆς, 
capable of teaching grammar ; παρασκευαστικὸς τῶν εἰς TOV 
πόλεμον, skilled in obtaining the necessaries for war. 

§ 415. Many Adverbs of Place are joined with a Geni- 
tive, which is mostly of a Partitive nature (compare § 412): 
ποῦ γῆς; where on earth? so with ἐντός, within; εἴσω, 
inside; ἐκτός, without; ἔξω, outside; ἄγχι, ἐγγύς, πλη- 
σίον, 7160)" πρόσω or πόῤῥω, forward ; πέρα, beyond ; 
εὐθύ, straight towards ; πρόσθεν, ἔμπροσθεν, in front , ὄπι- 
σθεν, behind; ἀμφοτέρωθεν, on both sides; ἄνω, upward 
(ποταμῶν, wp-stream); and corresponding with these also 
some adverbs of tame and manner: πηνίκα τῆς ἡμέρας ; 
at what time of the day? πώς ἔχεις τῆς γνώμης ; what do 
you think? λάθρα τῶν γονέων, secretly from the parents. 

§$ 416. The Comparative may have the object with which 
any thing is compared in the Genitive (as in the Abla- 
tive in Latin): μείζων τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ, major fratre, ὁ. ὁ., ἢ 
6 ἀδελφός, than the brother; οὐ προφήκει TOV ἄρχοντα 
τῶν ἀρχομένων πονηρότερον εἶναι, 1. 6., ἢ τοὺς ἀρχομένους, 
it is not becoming that the governor should be worse than 
the governed. 


Obs. 1.—This Genitive is used most frequently where it represents 


246 THE GENITIVE. § 417. 


ἤ with the Nominative or Accusative; yet it may also more 
freely represent ἤ with the Dative: poet. πλείων χρόνος, ὃν δεῖ. μ᾽ 
ἀρέσκειν τοῖς κάτω τῶν ἐνθάδε (ἢ τοῖς ἐνθάδε), longer is the time that 
I must please those below than that I must please those here. 

Obs. 2.—Like the Comparative, the Superlative is sometimes joined 
with the Genitive of the things with which any thing is com- 
pared: poet. φάος κάλλιστον τῶν προτέρων, a light most beautiful 
in comparison with the former ones, where we might have expected 
φάος κάλλιον τῶν προτέρων, lux prioribus pulchrior, or φάος κάλλι- 
στον πάντων, oOmniMm pulcherrima. β 

Obs. 3.—All adjectives expressive of a comparison follow che rule 
of Comparatives: διπλάσιος, doubly (as great as); δεύτερος (οὐδενός), 
second (to none); ὕστερος, later than ; ἕτερος, another than. 


3. The Genitive with Verbs. 


Very many verbs are e joined with the Genitive on the 
general principles mentioned in § 408. 


§ 417. 1. The Genitive represents a Predicate (ὃ 361, 7 
and 10) with verbs which denote bezng, becoming, making, 
deeming, in order to predicate something of a substantive, 
as originating from, possessing, consisting of, or in any 
other way Ἐπ Ἐπ: it, ὃ 408 :- Σωκράτης Σωφρονίσκου ἦν, 
Socrates was Sophroniscus’s son (ἢ 408, 1); ἡ οἰκία τοῦ 
πατρὸς ἐγένετο, the house became the father’s property 
(ὃ 408, 2); τὸ retyoe λίθου πεποίηται, the wall has been 
made of stone (§ 408, 3); οἱ Θεσσαλοὶ τῶν “Ἑλλήνων ἦσαν, 
the Thessalians belonged to the Hellenes (ἢ 408, 4); πολί- 
του ἀγαθοῦ νομίζεται θαῤῥεῖν, to be courageous is deemed a 
good citizen's quality (§ 408, 8). . 


Obs.—The Genitive often occurs with verbs of perception and ob- 
servation in such a way that it is properly dependent on a noun 
or pronoun : τοῦτο ὑμῶν μάλιστα θαυμάζομεν, this we most admire in 
you (properly: this of you we most admire). 


§ 418. 2. The Genitive of d/laterial (§ 408, 3) is also 
used with verbs of plenty and want (compare § 414, 2): 
πίμπλημι, πληρόω, L fill; πλήθω, γέμω, L an full , δεόμαι 
(det μοι), L needy τὰ ὦτα ἐνέπλησαν δαιμονίας σοφίας, they 
jilled the ears with wondrous wisdom; ὃ παρὼν καιρὸς 


ΟΝ 
a= 


§ 419. THE GENITIVE. 247 


πολλῆς φροντίδος καὶ βουλῆς δεῖται, the present tyme 18 in 
need of much reflection and advice. 


ὃ 419. 3. The Partitive Genitive (ὃ 408, 4) is used with 
many verbs which only partially affect the object of the 
action : 


a) With all-verbs which contain the idea of sharing : 
μετέχω (μέτεστί por), L have ὦ share wm, μεταλαμβάνω, L 
take ὦ share in; μεταδίδωμι, 7 give a share (τῆς λείας, of 
the booty); xowwviw, [ share (compare § 414, 5); Hom. 
σῖτον © αἰδοίη ταμίη παρέθηκε χαριζομένη παρεόντων, the 
modest stewardess brought bread supplying from the store. 

0b3s.— zw, I smell, also belongs to these: μύρων ὄζει, he smells of 

myrrh, 

6) With verbs which denote touching, laying hold of, 
seizing: ἅπτομαι, ψαύω, 7 touch; ἔχομαι, L hold by, border 
(τινός) on something; ἀντέχομαι, ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, 7 lay 
hold Of; λαμβάνω τινὰ τῆς χειρός, I seize one by the 
hand ; ἄρχομαι, L begin (τῆς παιδείας, with the educa- 
tion); poet. θανόντων οὐδὲν ἄλγος ἅπτεται, NO pain 
touches the dead. 

ce) With verbs which denote striving, aiming at: στο- 
χάζομαι τοῦ σκοποῦ, 7 aim at the goal ; ὀρέγομαι, 7 strive ; 
διψάω, 7 thirst; τυγχάνω, 1 hit, attain (ἔτυχε τῶν ἄθλων, 
he won the prizes); ἐφικνοῦμαι, 1 reach, attain; ἥκω, 1 
have attained (Herod. δυνάμιος, power). 

d) With verbs which denote enjoying: ἐσθίω, 7 eat ; 
πίνω, 1 drink; γεύω, I give a taste; ἑστιάω, 7 entertain; 
ἀπολαύω, 7) enjoy (μεγίστων ἀγαθῶν, the greatest blessings); 
ἑνὸς ἀνδρὸς εὖ φρονήσαντος πολλοὶ av ἀπολαύσειαν, 
many would enjoy a man who has thought sensibly. 

6) With verbs denoting the opposites of the ideas enu- 
merated under a—d, that is, the exclusion from a share in 
something: ἀπέχομαι, L refrain (σίτου, abstineo cibo); χω- 
ρίζω, 7 separate; εἴργω, 1 keep off; στερίσκω, 1 depres 
παύομαι, 7 cease; εἴκω, παραχωρέω, 7) yield; λύω, 7 loose; 


248 THE GENITIVE. § 420. 


ἐλευθερόω, 7 free; φείδομαι, 7 spare; ἁμαρτάνω, ἀποτυγ- 
χάνω, 7 miss; ψεύδομαι, σφάλλομαι, L win deceived (τῆς 
ἐλπίδος, in my hope). 

Obs.—Many of these verbs are also joined with an Accusative’ 
when an object is to be expressed as wholly encompassed by the 
action: πλεῖστον μέρος τινὸς μετέχειν, to have the greatest part ir 
any thing; πίνω οἶνον, I drink wine ; οἴνου, some wine ; λαγχάνω 
τι, L attain something ; τινός, a share in something. 

§ 420. 4. The Genitive is joined with many verbs de- 

noting a sensuous or moral perception or emotion (com- 
pare ὃ 414, 3), as: ἀκούω, axpodoua, 7 hear; αἰσθάνομαι, 
L perceive; μιμνήσκομαι, [remember (τοῦ φίλου, momint 
_amicr); ἐπιλανθάνομαι, [ forget ; μέλει μοί τινος, ἐπιμελέ- 
ομαι, [am concerned about something, I care; ἐντρέπομαι, 
Hom. ἀλέγω, ἀλεγίζω, 7 concern myself; ἀμελέω, 7 neg- 
lect; ὀλιγωρέω, [care little about; ἐράω, L love (§ 419, ὁ); 
ἐπιθυμέω, 7 desire; πυνθάνομαι τί τινος, L learn something 
about one. 

Obs.—The Accusative also is admissible with several of these 


verbs: with ἀκούω, 1 the object is directly audible: φθόγγον, ὦ 
sound, but τοῦ διδασκάλου, the teacher. 


§ 421. 5. With verbs of estumating, buying, selling, ete., 
the Genitive denotes the value or price (compare § 408, 6, 
and § 417): 6 δοῦλος πέντε μνῶν τιμᾶται, the slave is valued 
at five mine; πολλοῦ ὠνεΐσθαι, magni emere; ταλάντου 
ἀποδόσθαι, to sell for a talent. 


§ 422. 6. With verbs of judicial proceedings the Geni- 
tive denotes the cause (ὃ 408, 7, ὃ 414, 5): κλοπῆς γράφε- 
σθαι αἰσχρόν, furte accusari turpe est; φόνου διώκειν, to 
prosecute for murder; φεύγει παρανόμων, he is charged 
with violating the law; ἀπέφυγε κακηγορίας, he was ac- 
quitted of libel; ἑάλωσαν προδοσίας, proditionis condem- 
nate sunt. 

0bs.— With verbs of emotion the Genitive likewise expresses the 


cause, as: θαυμάζω σε τῆς σωφροσύνης, I admire thee for thy mod- 
eration ; Hom. χωόμενος γυναικός, angry about the woman. 


8 425. _ THE GENITIVE. 249 


§ 423. 7. The Genitive is also joined with verbs which 
imply the meaning of a Comparative (ὃ 416), as: kparéw 
(κρείττων εἰμί). ἄρχω (Κροῖσος Λυδῶν ἦρχεν, Cresus ruled 
over the Lydians); βασιλεύω, L rule, περίειμι, περιγίγνο- 
μαι, 1 ain superior ; ἡττάομαι (ἥττων εἰμί), 7 am inferior ; 
λείπομαι, ὑστερέω, Lam behind; διαφέρω τινός, differo ab 
aliquo; βαρβάρων Ἕλληνας ἄρχειν εἰκός, tt 18 reasonable 
that L[Tellenes should rule over barbarians. 


§ 424. 8. The Genitive is joined with verbs compounded 
with prepositions, which either always, or in the sense 
which they have in the compound verb, require the Gen- 
itive (compare Chapter XVIL.): ἐκβάλλω τινὰ τιμῆς, 7 
eject some one from office ; προστατεύει τῆς πόλεως, he pre- 
sides over the state; ἰσχὺν τοῦ δικαίου προτίθησιν, he pre- 
fers might before right ; καταφρονεῖν τινος, to despise any 
one; κατηγορεῖν τί τινος, to accuse one of a thing ; πάτριον 
ἣν τῇ ᾿Αθηναίων πόλει προεστάναι τῶν ᾿Βλλήνων, it was ὦ 
hereditary custom for the city of the Athenians to be at 
the head of the Hellenes. 


4, Ireer use of the Genitive. 
§ 425. The Genitive, without immediate connection with 
a noun or verb, expresses: 


1. Place (local Genitive), almost exclusively in the lan- 
guage of poetry, and that either the place from which 
something is removed: ἵστασθε βάθρων, get up from the 
steps; ὑπάγειν τῆς ὁδοῦ, to go out of the way (compare 
§ 419, e);—or the space within which something takes 
place (compare S$ 412, 415): τῆς ᾿Ιωνίας τοῦτο αἰσχρὸν 
νενόμισται, within Lonia that is considerea disgraceful ; 
Hom. νέφος οὐ φαίνετο πάσης γαίης, no cloud appeared 
within the compass of the whole earths ἔρχονται πεδίοιο, 
they go through or within the plain (compare the German 
ich gehe des Weges). 

On another local Genitive, see § 412. 

L 2 


250 THE DATIVE. § 426. 


§ 426. 2. Time (temporal Genitive), in which case it is 
a Partitive Genitive expressing the whole of a space of 
teme (ὃ 412) within which something takes place: τρὶς 
τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, thrice in the year; ἡμέρας, by day; νυκτός, 
by night; τοῦ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος, in the same winter; rod 
λοιποῦ, for the future; χρόνον συχνοῦ, for some tyme; 
ἑκάστου ETouc, cach year. 


§ 427. 3. Cause (causal Genitive, compare § 408, 7, 
ἢ 422), in exclamations: οἴμοι τῆς τύχης, alas / jor my 
Jortune (compare the German O des Leides); and in In- 
finitives with the Genitive of the Article (in order to). 
§ 574, 3, Obs. 


§ 428. 4. Occasion, time, c:zcumstances, ete., as an a@bso- 
lute Genitive, in connection with participles, just like the 
absolute Ablative in Latin: Κύρου βασιλεύοντος, Cyro reg- 
nante, ὃ 584 (compare the German: stehenden Lusses). 


Obs.—The absolute Genitive very rarely occurs, like the absolute 
Ablative of the Latins, without a participle; when the verb to be 
occurs in the clause the participle ὧν is to be used: te puero, σοῦ 
παιδὸς ὑντος. 


KE) The Datwe. 
§ 429. The Dative denotes, in general, the person or 
thing more remotely connected with an action. 


Obvs.—The Dative, therefore, depends just as often on verbs as on 
adjectives (adverbs), but very rarely on a substantive. 
§ 430. 1. Dative of the person concerned. 


As in Latin and English, so in Greek, the person more 
remotely affected by something is in the Dative, and: 


@) with transitive verbs it is the so-called ¢ndirect ob- 


ject: Hom. ἑπτὰ δέ οἱ δώσω εὐναιόμενα πτολίεθρα, and 7 
will give him seven flourishing cities. 

b) with intransitive verbs it expresses the person or a 
thing conceived as a person to which the action refers: 


Ἢ 
| 
᾿ 
i 
‘ 
_ 
¢ 
' 
‘ 


§ 435. THE DATIVE. 251 


πρέπει μοί τι, ὦ thing becomes me; δεῖ μοί τινος, L need 
something ; ἐμοὶ οὕτω δοκεῖ ἔχειν, ἐξ scems to me to be so; 
βοηθῶ τοῖς συμμάχοις, SUCCUPLO socis ; πείθου τοῖς νόμοις, 
obey the laws; εὔχεσθε τοῖς θεοῖς, pray to the gods; μέμ- 
φομαι τοῖς μαθηταῖς, 7 reproach the scholars. 
Obs.—Substantives derived from such verbs are sometimes followed 


by the Dative: ἡ ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ τοῖς συμμάχοις βοήθεια, the help to 
the allies in the war. 


¢) with Adjectives: 6 ἀγαθὸς τῷ ἀγαθῷ μόνος φίλος, the 
good alone ts dear to the good. 
431. 2. Dative of interest. 
The Dative denotes the person for whom—for whose 
interest—something is or takes place; hence 
a) the person benefited or injured (dat. commodi, incom- 
modi): πᾶς ἀνὴρ αὑτῷ πονεῖ, every man toils for himself , 
φθόνος μέγιστον κακὸν τοῖς ἔχουσιν αὐτόν, envy ἐδ the great- 
est evil to them that have τέ. 


32. ὁ) the possessor with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, and similar 
verbs: πολλοί μοι φίλοι εἰσίν, 7 have many friends. 


Obvs.—The possessive Dative is sometimes, like the Genitive, joined 
with a Substantive: Herod., οἱ σφι βόες, their oxen. 


ὃ 433. 6) the sym pathizing person (ethical Dative): poet. 
ὦ τέκνον, ἦ pé ἔβηκεν ἢ ἥμιν 6 ξένος ; O child, has the stranger 
left us? τί yap Tarip μοι πρέσβυς ἐ ἐν ΡΘΕ ὁρᾳ; ᾽ Sor what 
is my aged father doing in the house ? 


§ 434. d) the acting person with passive verbs (common- 
ly ὑπό with the Genitive), which is then to be viewed as 
one interested in the action: Hom. πολέες δάμεν Ἕκτορι 
δίῳ, many were overcome by godlike Hector , τί πέπρακται 
τοῖς ἄλλοις 3 what has been done by the rest? This Da- 
tive is regularly joined with the Verbal Adj. in -τέος : ἐμοὶ 
πολεμητέον ἐστίν, mihi pugnandum est. 


§ 435. 6) the person remotely connected with an action: 
- τέθνηχ᾽ ὑμῖν πάλαι, he died to you long ago; Hom. πᾶσίν 


252 THE DATIVE. § 436. 


kev Τρώεσσι κῦδος apoio, thou mightest get thee fume with 
all Trojans y Hom. τοΐσιν ἀνέστη, among them arose ; ὑπο- 
λαμβάνειν δεῖ τῷ τοιούτῳ ὅτι εὐήθης ἐστίν, in regard to such 
ὦ one we must suppose hin svmple. 


0}3,—In this manner participles are most frequently used, partly 
with, partly without, an accompanying noun: Hom. ἡμῖν εἴνατός 
ἐστι περιτροπέων ἐνιαυτὸς ἐνθάδε μιμνόντεσσιν, it is the ninth year 
Sor us lingering here; ἡ διαβάντι τὸν ποταμὸν πρὸς ἑσπέραν ὁδός, 
the road westward when you have crossed the river ; γίγνεταί τι ἐμοὲ 
βουλομένῳ, something happens to me as I wish; συνελόντι OY ὡς 
συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, to speak briefly. 


§ 436. 3. Dative of community. 


᾿ς With verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, which denote com- 
munity, agreement, friendly or hostile meeting, the person 
or thing with which such a community, agreement, or such 
a mceting takes place,is in the Dative. 


a) Verbs of this kind are: κοινωνέω, L share (τινί τινος, 
something with one); συμφωνέω, ὁμολογέω, συνάδω, ὃμο- 
νοέω, 7 agree; ὁμοιόομαι, L resemble; ὁμιλέω, L associate 
with ; διαλέγομαι, 7 CONVEPSE ὁ διαφέρομαι, 7 de er, μάχο- 
μαι, 7 fight; ἐρίζω, L dispute; τὰ ἔργα οὐ συμφωνεῖ τοῖς 
λόγοις, the deeds do not harmonize with the words; poet. 
κακοῖσιν μὴ προςομίλει ἀνδράσιν, ἀλλ᾽ αἰεὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο, 
with bad men do not associate, but always hold to the 
good. 

ὦ) Adjectives: ἴσος, like; ὅμοιος, παραπλήσιος, simi- 
lar; 6 αὐτός, the same; οἰκεῖος, ἴδιος, peculiar; κοινός, 
common (compare 414, 1); ὁμώνυμος, of like name; συν- 
wvupoc, of like meaning, διάφορος, different; ἐναντίος, 
opposite: ὡπλισμένοι ἦσαν τοῖς αὐτοῖς Κύρῳ ὅπλοις, they 
were armed with the same weapons as Cyrus. 


c) Adverbs: besides those derived from the adjectives 
just mentioned, especially dua, at the same time; ὁμοῦ, 
together: ἅμα τῷ ἑταίρῳ, at the same time with his friend. 


§ 437. The Dative is used with many verbs which, com- 


: ἢ 
4 
3 


§ 440. THE DATIVE. 253 


pounded with prepositions, denote a contact or union, es- 
pecially with such as are compounded with ἐν, σύν, ἐπί, 
yet also with those compounded with πρός, παρά, περί, 
ὑπό, AS: ἐπιστήμην ἐμποιεῖν τῇ ψυχῇ, to bring knowledge 
into the soul; ἐπικείσθαί τινι, to press wpon, to urge, one; 
ἐπιτιμᾶν τινί τι, to reproach one with something ; προςιέναι 
τῷ δήμῳ, to come before the people; παρίστασθαι, παρεῖναί 
τινι, to support One; περιπίπτειν τινί, tO Meet ONE. 


ὃ 438. 4. The Znstrumental Dative, answering to the 
Latin Ablative, denotes that by or by means of which an 
action is brought about: hence 


a) the means or instrument (compare διά, ὃ 458): Hom. 
τὸν μὲν κατὰ στῆθος ars δουρί, the one he struck on the 
breast with the spear, ὁρῶμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, we 866 with 
the eyes; οὐδεὶς ἔπαινον ἡδοναῖς ἐκτήσατο, nO one gained 
praise by pleasures; ζημιοῦν τινα θανάτῳ, to punish one 
with death; Hom. τίσειαν Δαναοὶ tua δάκρυα σοῖσι βέλεσ- 
ow, may the Danwi pay for my tears by thy darts. 


Obs.—Hence the Dative is used with χρῆσθαι, to make use of ; as the 
Ablative with uti in Latin. A second predicative Dative is often 
added (ὃ 361,10): τούτων τισὶ φύλαξιν ἐχρῆτο, some of them he used 
as guards. 


§ 439. 2) the operating power or cause from which an 
action proceeds: ἄνθρωπος φύσει πολιτικόν, man (15) by 
, > , ¢ / 
nature fitted for the state; πολλάκις ἀγνοίᾳ ἁμαρτάνομεν, 
we often err from ignorance ; φόβῳ, from fear. 


Obs.—With verbs of emotion, the Dative expresses the ground or 
occasion of the emotion: ἥδομαι, χαίρω τῇ μουσικῇ, 1 delight in 
music ; λυποῦμαι, 1 am grieved ; χαλεπαίνω, 1 am angry ; στέργω, 
ἀγαπῶ, I am satisfied (with something); αἰσχύνομαι, Iam ashamed 
(about something). 


§ 440. 6) the measure, by which a thing is measured, 
by which one thing surpasses another, by which it is dis- 
tinguished: τὰ μέλλοντα κρίνομεν τοῖς γεγενημένοις, the fu- 


254 THE DATIVE. § 441. 


ture we judge of by the past; δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλα- 
μῖνι μάχης οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν Μαραθῶνι ἐνίκησαν, ten years 
before the battle of Salamis the Athenians conquered at 
Marathon; πολλῷ μείζων, multo major (also πολύ, ὃ 404, 
Obs.) ; διαφέρειν τινὸς φρονήσει, to differ from any one tir 
ensight. 


§ 441. 5. The freer use of the Dative expresses: 


a) the way and manner, or an accompanying circum- 
stance: τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ, in this way; Bia, by force; 
~ ° ~ : Ψ A ” ty Ρ ~ 
σπουδῇ, with zeal; σιγῇ, in silence; ἔργῳ, Mm fact; τῷ 
ὄντι, in truth; ἰδίᾳ, privatim ; δημοσίᾳ, publice ; Hom. 
νηπιέῃσι, in his folly (ὃ 362, Obs.). 


Obs.—The Dative with αὐτός should be particularly noticed: ὁ 
Φίλιππος πεντακοσίους ἱππέας ἔλαβεν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ὕπλοις, Philip took 
Jive hundred horse together with their armor. (Compare the Dative 
of community, § 436.) 


§ 442. b) The place where something happens is ex- 
pressed by the Dative more rarely in prose than in poetry: 
Μαραθῶνι, at Marathon; Hom. Ἑλλάδι οἰκία ναίων, in- 
habiting his house in Hellas; Hom. 762 @potow ἔχων, 
having the bow on his shoulders ; poet. ὁδοῖς, on the way. 


ὃ 443. 6) Time is expressed by the Dative as definitely 
limited in answer to the question when: τῇδε τῇ νυκτί, hac 
nocté ; τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, on the following day ; τετάρτῳ Ere, ir 
the fourth year ; Ὀλυμπίοις, at the Olympic games ; poet. 
χειμερίῳ νότῳ, in ὦ stormy south wind. 

Obs.—Notice the difference between the Accusative (§ 405) and the 

Genitive (§ 426), in their application to relations of time. 


N 447, THE PREPOSITIONS. 255 


CHAP. X VIL—TuHE PREPOSITIONS. 


ὃ 444. Prepositions have a double use. Either they are 
combined with a verb, to define the direction which the 
action of the verb takes, or they are used independently, 
and serve, in connection with different cases, to point out 
the relation of single words in a sentence to one another 
more distinctly than could be done by the cases alone. 


§ 445. Obs. 1.—As the name prapositio (πρόθεσις) points to the first 
of these uses, those prepositions which are not combined with verbs, 
such as: ἄνευ, without (poet. δίχα, χωρίς) ; ἄχρι, μέχρι, Cll; μεταξύ, be- 
tween ; ἕνεκα, on account of ; πλήν, besides, are called spurious. They 
are all used with the Genitive (compare § 415), except we, to, which 
has the Accusative. 


§ 446. Obs. 2.—All Prepositions were originally adverbs ; many of 
them are still used as such in poetry, and a few even in prose: περί, 
beyond, very ; μετά, later ; πρός, in addition. On account of this ori- 
gin, their position in Homer is very free; they may be separated 
from their verb as well as from their substantive: Hom. ἐν δ᾽ αὐτὸς 
ἐδύσετο νώροπα- χαλκόν, and he himself put on the glittering brass ; ἀμφὶ 
δὲ χαῖται ὦμοις ἀΐσσονται, and the manes wave around the shoulders, On 
the anastrophe in placing the Prepositions behind, see ὃ 90. In prose 
only περί is sometimes thus used. 


§ 447. With regard to the cases joined with Prepositions, 
the following general rules are to be noticed: 


1. The Accusative with Prepositions expresses the object 
wpon which, over which, toward which an action extends 
(88 395,405), and with many Prepositions the goa/ of an 
action itself (ὃ 406). 

2. The Genitive frequently denotes the place from which 
an action proceeds (ὃ 425), often also a moral relation 
(ὃ 408, etc.), while it depends on other Prepositions in the 
same way. as on the adverbs mentioned in § 415. 


~ 


3. The Dative denotes a more external connection (δῷ 435, 
442), 


256 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE ACCUSATIVE. § 448. 


GENERAL VIEW OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
§ 448. I. Prepositions which can have only one case: 
A) the Accusative: εἰς, we. 
B) the Genetive: ἀντί, ἀπό, ἐκ (ἐξ), πρό---ἄνευ, ἄχρι!» 
μέχρι, μεταξύ, ἕνεκα, πλήν. 


C) the Dative: ἐν, σύν (ξύν). 


ΤΠ, Prepositions which can have two cases: 
A) the Genitwe and Accusative: διά, κατά, ὑπέρ. 
B) the Dative and Accusative: ava. 


ΠῚ, Prepositions which can have all the three oblique 
cases: ἀμφί, ἐπί, μετά, Tapa, περί, πρός, ὑπό. 


J. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE ONLY ONE CASE. 
§ 449. A) Prepositions with the Accusative. 

1. εἰς or ἐς (Lat. in, c. Accus., and znter), to, into, points 
out the goal toward which the action is directed. The 
opposite is ἐξ, out. εἰς is used: 

a) of place: οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι sigéBadov εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικῆήν, 


the Lacedemonians invaded Attica; εἰς δικαστήριον tic 


ιέναι, to come into court; λέγειν εἰς τὸ πλῆθος, to speak to 


the multitude, εἰς ἄνδρας ἐγγράφειν, to enroll among men. 


Compare ἐν, ὃ 456, a. 

ὦ) of tumes εἰς τὴν ὑστεραίαν, in diem proximum, for 
the next day; εἰς ἑσπέραν, toward evening; poet. ἔτος εἰς 
ἔτος, year by year, εἰς καιρόν, for the right time. 

6) of measure and number: sic διακοσίους, up to two 
hundred; εἰς δύναμιν, up to ones power, as much as is in 
one’s power. 

εἰ) of purpose: χρήσιμον εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, useful for the 
war; εἰς τόδε ἥκομεν, For that we have come. 

In compounds it is to be translated by znfo, zn, to. 


§ 450. 2. we (compare § 631), fo, only of persons: Hom, 


᾿ 


§ 453. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE. 257 


αἰεὶ τὸν ὁμοῖον aye θεὸς we τὸν ὁμοῖον, God always brings 
like to like. 


§ 451. B) Prepositions with the Genitwe. 


1. ἀντί (compare Hom. ἄντα, ἄντην, ἀντικρύ), originally 
opposite to (compare év-avri-oc), then enstead of, for: 
Hom. ἀντὶ κασιγνήτου ξεῖνός θ᾽ ἱκέτης τε τέτυκται, ὦ stranger 
and a suppliant ἐ8 instead of a brother (like a brother); 
ἀντὶ θνητοῦ σώματος ἀθάνατον δόξαν ἀλλάξασθαι. tO 6ζ- 
change a mortal body for immortal glory. 

In compounds it signifies against. 


§ 452. 2. ἀπό (Lat. αὖ, a, Engl. of), from, in the sense 
of separation, severance, and origin ¢ 

a) of piace: Hom. ἀφ᾽ ἵππων ἄλτο χαμᾶζε, he sprang 
off the chariot to the ground. 

b) of time Srom, since: aw ἐκείνης τῆς ἡμέρας, frome 
that day. 

c) of cause: by, from, through « αὐτόνομος ἀπὸ τῆς εἰρή- 
νης, tndependent through the peace. 

Phrases: ἀπὸ σκοποῦ, far from the goal; ἀπὸ γνώμης, 
contrary to expectation ; ἀπὸ στόματος λέγειν, to speak 
jrom memory ; οἱ ἀπὸ σκηνῆς, those of the stage, the act- 
ors. 

In compounds it signifies from, off, away. 


ὃ 453. 3. ἐκ, before vowels ἐξ (Lat. ex, 6), out of (op- 
posed to εἰς), denotes removal from within or from among: 

a) of place: ἐκ Σπάρτης φεύγει, he ts banished out of 
Sparta. 

ὦ) of tumes ἐκ παίδων, from boyhood (a pueris). 

c) of origin : ἐκ πατρὸς χρηστοῦ ἐγένετο, he sprang from 
a brave father; seldom with a Passive verb: τιμᾶσθαι ἕκ 
τινος, to be honored by any one. 

d) close connection and conformity with: after, secun- 
dum : Néyov ἐκ λόγου λέγειν, to deliver speech after speech ; 


258 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE. § 454. 


ἐκ τῶν ὁμολογουμένων, according to the agreement (Lat. 
secundum). | 

Phrases: ἐκ δεξιᾶς, on the right ; ἐξ ἴσου, equally; δῆσαι, 
κρεμάσαι τι Ex τινος, to fusten, to hang one thing to another 
(Lat. pendére ex, ab aliqua re). 

In compounds: owt, away. 

§ 454. 4. πρό (Lat. pro), for, before, instead. 

a) of place, before: πρὸ θυρῶν, before the door. 

b) of tune: πρὸ τῆς μάχης, before the battle. 

c) of preference: πρὸ τούτων τεθνάναι μᾶλλον ἂν ἕλοιτο, 
he would choose death before this, ὃ. 6., rather than this. 

d) for, a rare use: πρὸ παίδων μάχεσθαι, to fight for the 
children. 

Phrase: πρὸ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι (c), to prefer greatly. 

In compounds: before, forth, beforehand, forward. 


§ 455. The spurious Prepositions : 


1S) 


ἄνευ, Without (poet. χωρίς, δίχα, ἄτερ). 
ἄχρι, μέχρι, wntel. 
. μεταξύ, between. 
. ἕνεκα, also ἕνεκεν; εἵνεκα (poet. οὕνεκα), for the sake of 
an object to be’ attained (Lat. caust) : : τῆς ὑγιείας ἕνεκα 
χρώμεθα τῷ ἰατρῷ: we envploy a physician for the sake of 
health. (Compare διά with Acc., ὃ 458, B.) 

9. πλήν, besides ( preter). 


ou 


Obs.—7Ajv is often used quite adverbially without governing a 
case: poet. οὐκ dp’ ᾿Αχαιοῖς ἄνδρες εἰσὶ πλὴν ὅδε; have then the 
Acheans no men but this? It might be πλὴν τοῦδε, besides this ὃ 


§ 456. C) Prepositions with the Dative. 
1. ἐν (Hom. évé, ἐν, Lat. an, c. Ablat., and énter), mm, an- 
swers to the question where ? 
a) of place: ἐν ᾿Αθήναις, in Athens ; also among (inter): 
ἐν τούτοις, among them ; ἐν δήμῳ λέγειν, to speak before the 
people (compare § 449, @). 


§ 458. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. 259 


ὁ) of tumes ἐν τούτῳ τῷ ἔτει, en that year. 

c) a moral relation: with: ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τῆς μάχης τέλος, 
the result of the battle rests with God. 

Phrases: ἡ ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχη, the battle at Marathon ; 
ἐν τοῖς πρῶτος, first by fur; ἐν καιρῷ, at the right time; 
ἐν προςθήκης μέρει, in addition; ἐν χερσὶ τιθέναι, to put 
into the hands (compare Lat. 7.) mensa ponere). 

In compounds: zn, ento, on. The accented ἔνι -Ξ ἔνεστι 
signifies ὁζ 28 in, ἐξ exists, it vs possible. 


§ 457. 2. σύν or ξύν (Lat. cum), with, denotes compan- 
ionship (opposed to ἄνευ, compare μετά with Gen., ὃ 464, 
B); σὺν ᾿Αθήνῃ ἐνίκησεν, he conquered (with the help of) 
Athene; σὺν νόμῳ, in accordance with the law (opposed 
to παρά with Acc., § 465, C, ὁ). 

In compounds: wth, together. 


II. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE TWO CASES. 


The Genitive and Accusative. 


Obs.—Here, as every where in what follows, that use of a Preposi- 
tion is placed first in which its original meaning is most mani- 
fest. 


§ 458. 1. διά (akin to δύο, as between is to two [twain]), 
originally between, then through. 

A) with the Genitive: 

a) of space: most frequently through (Lat. per): Hom. 
διὰ μὲν ἀσπίδος ἦλθε φαεινῆς ὄβριμον ἔγχος, through the 
glittering shield pierced the mighty lance. 

b) instrumental : by or with: διὰ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν ὁρῶμεν, 
by (by means of) the eyes we see (compare ὃ 438). 

c) of space and time: among (inter), during, in: διὰ 
χειρῶν ἔχειν, to have in hand, διὰ νυκτός, during night ; 
διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι, to be on friendly terms. 

Phrases: διὰ στόματος ἔχειν, to have in the mouth, to 


é 7" ἢ 


260 PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GEN. AND ACC. § 459. 


be talking about; δι᾿ οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι, to deem as nothing ; 


διὰ μακροῦ, after a long interval, interruption. 


B) with the Accusative : 

a) of space and time, almost exclusively in the poets: 
through, during: Hom. διὰ δώματα, through the rooms ; 
διὰ νύκτα, during night. 

ὦ) usually causal: on account of (the operating cause) 
(compare ἕνεκα, ὃ 455, 8): διὰ τὴν νόσον χρώμεθα τῷ ἰατρῷ, 
we employ the physician on account of the ἐἰέγι688. 

Phrases: αὐτὸς δι᾿’ ἑαυτόν, by himself; διὰ τί ; why? 

In compounds, διά is through, or denotes separation, like 
Lat. dis-: dSuapinw=adifferre, διαιρέω, 2 sever. 


§ 459. 2. κατά (compare Ady. κάτω, down), originally 
downward, down (the opposite to ava). 


A) with the Genztive : 

a) of space: down from: Hom. βῆ δὲ κατ᾽ Οὐλύμποιο 
καρήνων, he came down from the heights of Olympus ; 
below (sub): τὰ κατὰ γῆς, things below the earth. 

ὁ) tropically : about, against : λέγειν κατά τινος, to speak 
about, against one. 

Phrases: πόλιν κατ᾽ ἄκρας ἑλεῖν, to capture a city com- 
pletely; κατὰ νώτου, behind. 

B) with the Accusative it denotes in its most general 
sense extension over, relation to, direction toward some- 
thing : 

a) of place: κατὰ ῥόον, down ὦ stream; κατὰ γὴν καὶ 
θάλασσαν, by land and sea; Hom. Ζεὺς ἔβη κατὰ δαῖτα, 
Zeus went to the feast. 

ὁ) of time: κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον, at that time; οἱ 
καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, our contemporaries. 

¢) of other relations: κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον, in this 
wey; κατὰ πάντα, in every respect ; κατὰ δύναμιν, accord- 
ang to ability, as much as possible; κατὰ τοὺς νόμους, in 
accordance with the laws; κατ᾽ ἐμέ, as regards me; κατὰ 
Πίνδαρον ἄριστον ὕδωρ, according to Pindar, water is best. 


v 


το ΟΝ 
τ er ‘9 


ὃ 461. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DAT. AND ACC. 261 


ad) distributive in divisions: Hom. κατὰ φῦλα, by tribes ; 
kata τρεῖς, by threes; καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, dadly. 

In compounds: down, downward, against, toward, very 
often untranslatable. 


ἃ. 460. 3. ὑπέρ, Hom. also ὑπείρ (Lat. super), radical mean- 
ing over. 

A) with the Genitive: 

@) of space: ὃ ἥλιος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πορεύεται, the sun passes 
over US. 

b) tropically, jor Z μάχεσθαι ὑπέρ τινος, tO jight for any 
one (originally over, 6. g., over a corpse): ὁ ὑπὲρ τῆς πα- 
τρίδος κίνδυνος, the danger for one’s country; imstead of: 
ἐγὼ ὑπὲρ σοῦ ἀποκρινοῦμαι, L will answer instead of you. 

B) with the Accusative : 
over, beyond—of space and measure: Hom. trip οὐδὸν 
ἐβήσετο, he went over ot beyond the threshold ; ὑπὲρ δύνα- 
puv, beyond (his) power. 

In compounds: over, away over, excessively, for. 


With the Dative and Accusative. 

§ 461. 4. ava (compare adv. ἄνω, above), originally wpon, 
up (opposed to κατά). 

A) with the Dative only poet., on the top of, upon: 
Hom. χρυσέῳ ava σκήπτρῳ, on the top of a golden staff. 

B) with the Accusatiwe ava denotes the direction wp- 
ward, up toward something, then spreading out over some- 
thing (compare κατά). 

a) of space: ava ῥόον, up the stream, ava πᾶσαν τὴν 
γῆν, over the whole earth, over the whole country. 

ὦ) of time: ava πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν, per totum diem. 

6) tropically : ava λόγον, tr accordance with. 

ad) distribute: ἀνὰ τέτταρας, by fours (four men deep, 
compare κατά, ὃ 459, @). 

Phrase: ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχειν, to have in the mouth, to be talk- 
ing about (compare διά). 

In compounds: wp, upward, again, back. 


262 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 462. 


11. PREPOSITIONS WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 


Obs.—The original meaning is usually most manifest in connection 
with the Dative. 


§ 462. 1. ἀμφί (Lat. amb-, German wm, akin to ἄμφω, 
both), radical meaning around (2. 6.. on both sides, compare 
περί). 

A) with the Dative : 
only poet.: Hom. ἱδρώσει τελαμὼν ἀμφὶ στήθεσσι, the belt 
around the breast will sweat; ἀμφὶ φόβῳ, from fear. 

B) with the Genitive: 

Hom. ἀμφὶ φιλότητος ἀείδειν, to sing about love. 

C) with the Accusative : 
of place, time, measure, occupation: ἀμφὶ τὰ ὅρια, about 
the boundaries ; ἀμφὶ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον, about this time ; 
ἀμφὶ τὰ ἑξήκοντα, circiter sexaginta ; ἀμφὶ δεῖπνον πονεῖν, 
to be occupied about a meal. 

Phrase: of ἀμφί τινα, any one with his attendants ; 
hence even: of ἀμφὶ Πλάτωνα, Plato and lis followers. 

In compounds: about, around, on two sides, doubly. 


§ 463. 2. ἐπί, radical meaning upon, on, on the surfiee, 
by. 

A) with the Dative : 

a) of space: Hom. ἐπὶ χθονὶ σῖτον ἔδοντες, eating bread 
on earth, ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ οἰκεῖν, to dwell by the sea. 

ὁ) of tume: ἐπὶ τούτοις, thereupon. 

c) of an ethical relation: ἐπὶ τοῖς πράγμασιν εἶναι, to 
preside over the business , ἐπὶ τοῖς πολεμίοις εἶναι, C0 be in 
the power of the enemy; ἐπὶ τινι χαίρειν, to rejoice at ὦ 
thing; especially also of purpose: ἐπὶ παιδείᾳ τοῦτο ἔμαθες, 
you learned this for education; and of condition: ἐπὶ 
τόκοις δανείζειν, to lend on imterest ; ἐπὶ τούτῳ, on this 
condition. 

B) with the Genitive : 

a) of space, in answer to the question where: Kieae 


§ 465. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 263 


προὐφαίνετο ἐφ᾽ ἅρματος, Cyrus appeared on a chariot ; 
and to the question whither: ἐπὶ Σάμου πλεῖν, to sail te 
Samos. (Compare ὃ 419, 6.) 

ὁ) of time: ἐπὶ Κροίσου ἄρχοντος, in the reign of Cresus ; 
also in many connections: near, by. 

C) with the Accusative : 
on, on-to: ἀναβαίνειν ἐφ᾽ ἵππον, to mount (on-to) a horse ; 
ἐπὶ δεξιά, on the right. 

Phrases: we ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, for the most part; τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ, 
jor my part. 

In compounds: on, at, by, ὧν addition, be-, very often 
untranslatable. 


§ 464. 3. μετά (German mit), radical meaning tn the 


midst. 


A) with the Dative: 
in poet. only: amid, among (enter): Hom. Ἕκτορα, ὃς θεὸς 
ἔσκε per ἀνδράσι, Llector, who was a god among men. 

B) with the Genztive: 
wiih, in the sense of participation with (compare σύν,. 
§ 457): μετὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων κινδυνεύειν, to fight with Gn 
alliance with) the allies; μετὰ δακρύων, with tears. 

C) with the Accusative : 

a) into the nudst, among: poet.: Hom. ἰὼν pera ἔθνος 
ἑταίρων, going among the crowd of companions. 

ὦ) usually after: Hom. οἴχονται pera δεῖπνον, they go 
after (for) ὦ meal; pera τὸν Πελοποννησιακὸν πόλεμον, 
after the Peloponnesian War. 

ce) seldom 7m (as with the Dative): μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν, to 
have in hand (compare διά): μεθ᾽ ἡμέραν, interdiu. 

In compounds: with, after, trans- (μετατιθέναι, trans- 
pose). 

§ 465. 4. παρά (Hom. πάρ, wapat), radical meaning be- 
side, near. | 

A) with the Dative: 
at or near: Hom. παρὰ νηυσὶ κορωνίσι μιμνάζειν, to linger 


264 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 466. 


near the curved ships; καὶ παρ᾽ ἐμοί τις ἐμπειρία ἐστίν, L 
also have some experrence (with me also is, ete. ). 

B) with the Genitive: 

a) from, with verbs of motion, and such as denote re- 
ceiving either bodily or mentally: Hom. ἀπονοστεῖν παρὰ 

- i ? 7 ’ 
νηῶν, to return from the ships; λαμβάνειν, μανθάνειν παρά 
τινος, to receive, learn from some one. 

ὦ) by, very rare, and only poet.: vaterov παρ᾽ Ισμήνου 
ῥείθρων, dwelling by the waters of the Ismenus. 

C) with the Accusative : 

a) to: σου. τὼ δ᾽ αὗτις ἴτην παρὰ νῆας, they went again 
to the ships. 

ὁ) along, near by: 

of place : Hom. παρὰ θῖνα θαλάσσης, along the sea beach. 

of teme: during: παρ᾽ ὅλον τὸν βίον, per totam vitam, 
during the whole of life ; 


compared with: δεῖ τὰς πράξεις παρ᾽ ἀλλήλας τιθέναι," 


you must put the acts by the side of (or compare with) 
one another ; with the comparative: μεῖζόν τι παρὰ τοῦτο, 
something greater than this ; 

on account of (compare propter, near, and on account 
of): mapa τὴν ἡμετέραν ἀμέλειαν Φίλιππος αὔξεται, On Ac- 
count of our neglect Philip becomes great. 

Taken negatively ; besides: ἔχομέν τι παρὰ ταῦτα ἄλλο 
λέγειν, We have something else to say besides this ; 

contrary to (opposed to κατά with the Acc.: παρὰ τὸν 
νόμον, contrary to the law, properly past the law, by evad- 
ing the law. | 

Phrases: παρὰ μικρόν, nearly; παρ᾽ οὐδὲν ποιεῖσθαι, to 
deem as nothing. : 

In compounds: near, at, past, beyond, over (παραβαίνειν, 
overstep). 


§ 466. 5. περί (Hom. ady. περί, very= Lat. per in per- 
magnus), radical meaning arownd (from above), compare 
ἀμφί. 


πα τὸ ν᾿ 
ss aaa 


§ 467. PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. 2605 


A) with the Dative: 
round, around, near, for: Hom. περὶ Σκαιῇσι. πύλῃσι, 
round the Skean gate; περὶ τοῖς φιλτάτοις κυβεύειν, to 
gamble for what is dearest. 

Hom. περὶ κῆρι, at heart; περὶ φόβῳ, from fear. 

B) with the Genitive: 

a) mostly in a figurative sense, about, Lat. de: τίνα 
δόξαν ἔχεις περὶ τούτων ; what opinion have you about 
ἐλ βουλεύονται περὶ τοῦ πολέμου, they consult about the 
War. : | 

ὁ) in Hom. over, above: περὶ πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, to 
be above all others ; hence the prose phrases: περὶ πολλοῦ 
ποιεῖσθαι, to place above much, ὁ. ὁ., estumate highly ; περὶ 
οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθα, place above nothing, ὁ. 6.. estimate at 
nothing at all. 

C) with the Accusative : 
almost the same as ἀμφί (ὃ 462): περὶ Αἴγυπτον (around, 
7. 6.. every where in Egypt), about the country of Agypt; 
figuratively: in regard to, about, concerning : περὶ φιλο- 
σοφίαν σπουδάζειν, to be zealous about philosophy. 

In compounds (with adjectives = Latin per-): round, 
round about, besides, over. 


§ 467. 6. πρός (Hom. προτί, wort), akin to πρό, 

radical meaning at, to (toward the front), compare παρά, 

._ A) with the Dative: 

 @) at, near: & Κῦρος ἦν πρὸς Βαβυλῶνι, Cyrus was near 
Babylon. 

ὦ) on, to: Tom. ποτὶ δὲ σκῆπτρον βάλε γαίῃ, he threw 
the staff on the ground ; τὸν νοῦν TPOCEXETE πρὸς τούτῳ, 
gue your mind to this. 

¢) besides, in addition to: πρὸς τούτοις, besides this ; 
πρὸς τοῖς ἄλλοις, besides the rest. | 

B) with the Genitive: 

a) with, in the sense of community: Hom. πρὸς yap 
Διός εἰσιν ἅπαντες ξεῖνοί τε πτωχοί τε, with (protected by) 


Μ 


=. 
—_ ae 
ὴ . ps =e 

»" 


266 PREPOSIT. WHICH CAN HAVE THREE CASES. ὃ 468. 


Zeus are all strangers and the poor; mpoc τινος εἶναι, to 
be with (on the side of) any one; πρὸς ἰατροῦ ἐστιν, tt és 
with (belongs to) ὦ physician, medic est; πρός τινος λέ- 
yew, to speak for (in behalf of) any one; πρὸς Bear, with 
(in presence of, by) the gods, per deos, form of an oath. 

ὁ) toward (versus): πρὸς μεσημβρίας, toward the south, 
compare πρός with Acc. 

c) from, by (compare παρά with Gen.): ὄλβος πρὸς θεῶν, 
blessing from the gods; sometimes with Passive verbs: 
πρός τινος φιλεῖσθαι, to be loved by some one. 


C) with the Accusative : 


a) to: ἔρχονται πρὸς ἡμᾶς πρέσβεις, embassadors come 
to US; πρὸς τὸν δῆμον ἀγορεύειν, to speak to the people. 

6) toward, against (versus, adversus, erga): πρὸς βοῤ- 
Pe ’ τ ’ 
pav, toward the north (compare πρός with Gen.); δικάζε- 
σθαι πρός τινα, to enter an action against any one; πιστῶς 
διακεῖσθαι πρός τινα, to be faithfully disposed toward some 
one; πρὸς βασιλέα σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι, to make a treaty to- 
ward (with) the kong. 

c) in regard to, according to: διαφέρειν πρὸς ἀρετήν, to 
differ in regard to virtue; πρὸς τὰ κάλλιστα τῶν ὑπαρ- 
χόντων δεῖ τὰ λοιπὰ πράττειν, We Ought to arrange the 
Suture according to the best of the present Means ; πρὺς 
ταῦτα, accordin g to thes. 

Ρ hr ases: πρὸς ἡδονήν, according to pleasure πρὸς Xa- 
pw, tn favor of; πρὸς βίαν, by force; οὐδὲν πρὸς ἐμέ, 
nothing to me. 

In compounds: #0, tn addition, near, together with. 

§ 468. 7. ὑπό (Hom. also trai, Lat. sw), 


radical meaning under, below. 


A) with the Dative : 
under: Hom. τῶν ὑπὸ ποσσὶ μέγα στεναχίζετο yata, UN- 
der their feet the earth loudly groaned ; ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίοις 
εἶναι, to be under (subject to) the Athenians ; poet. χερσὶν 


§ 470. THE PRONOUNS. 267 


ὑφ᾽ ἡμετέρῃσιν ἁλοῦσα, (Troy) conquered under (by) our 


hands. 

B) with the Genztive: 

a) under, in space: ὑπὸ γῆς, under the carth,; in the 
sense of dependency: tm αὐλητῶν χορεύειν, to dance un- 
der (the guidance of) flute-players ; hence 

ὁ) by, with Passives and verbs of Passive meaning: ἡ 
πόλις ἑάλω ὑπὸ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, the city was taken by the 
HHellenes ; πολλοὶ ἀπέθανον ὑπὸ τῶν BapBapwr, many were 
killed by the barbarians. 

6) from, because of : ὑπὸ γήρως ἀσθενὴς ἦν, he was weak 
jrom old age. 

C) with the Accusative : 

a) under; Hom. ὥς εἰπὼν ὑπὸ πόντον ἐδύσετο κυμαίνοντα, 
having thus spoken, he dived under the billowy sea; ὑπὸ 
τὸ ὄρος ηὐλίζοντο, they spent the night under (at the foot 
of ) the mountain. 

ὁ) of time ; toward (Lat. sub): ὑπὸ νύκτα, toward night ; 
ὑπὸ τὴν νύκτα, during the night. 

In compounds: under, down under, gradually, secretly, 
often untranslatable. 


ὕπαρ. XVITI.—TueE Pronouns. 
§ 469. 1. The Nominative of the Personal Pronouns is 


used, as in Latin, only when the person is to be mentioned 


with special emphasis: καὶ σὺ ὄψει αὐτόν, tu quogue eum 
videbis, ἡ. €., οὐ μόνον ἐγώ (not merely 7). 


ὃ 470. 2. The place of the Possessive Pronoun is fre- 
quently supplied by the article (ὃ 373). On the article 
with the Possessive Pronoun, § 388. 

a) Instead of the Possessive Pronoun, the Greek likes to 
use the Genitive of the corresponding Personal Pronoun. 
Such a Genitive, when the substantive to which it belongs 
has the article, usually stands either before the article or 


268 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN. § 471. 


ς 


after the substantive: σοῦ 6 υἱός or 6 υἱός σου, thy son, 
not ὃ σοῦ υἱός. 

ὁ) As the Possessive Pronoun approaches very near to a 
possessive Genitive (ὃ 408, 2), it may be qualified by a 
Genitive: τἀμὰ δυστήνου κακά, my dls, the unfortunate 
one’s |mea misert mala]. 


ἢ 471. 3. The Leflexwe Pronoun refers either to the 
subject of the clause in which it occurs: ὦ ἀγαθέ, μὴ ayvde 
σεαυτόν, good friend, be not cqnorant of thyself; or, im de- 
pendent clauses, it refers back to the subject of the leading 
clause: εἰςιέναι ἐκέλευσεν, εἰ μέλλοις σὺν ἑαυτῷ ἐκπλεῖν, he 
bade you enter, ἐγ you were going to sail away with him 
(secum). 


Obs. a)—Instead of the Reflexive Pronoun, the usual Personal Pro- 
nouns also may be employed: δοκῶ μοι οὐκ ἀπαράσκευος εἶναι, [ 
think myself not to be unprepared. . 

Obs. b)—The simple Pronoun of the third person, οὗ, oi, ἕ, etc., is 


commonly used reflexively by the Attic writers, but in Hom. it 


is exactly like the English, of him, to him, him, etc. (like the 
Attic αὐτοῦ, αὐτῷ, αὐτόν, etc., according to ὃ 474): λέγεται ᾿Απόλ- 
λων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν ἐρίζοντά οἱ περὶ σοφίας, dicitur Apollo Marsye 
cutem detraxisse de arte secum certanti ; Hom. αὐτόματος δὲ οἱ ἦλθε 
---Μενέλαος, sponte sua ad eum venit Menelaus. 

Obs. c)\—The Reflexive of the third person sometimes supplies the 
place of that of the first and second : δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἀνερέσθαι ἑαυτούς; 
we must ask ourselves ; in like manner, the Possessive ὅς some- 
times stands for the Possessive of the first two persons: Hom. 
οὐ γὰρ ἔγωγε ἧς γαίης δύναμαι γλυκερώτερον ἄλλο ἰδέσθαι, for 1 can 
see nothing sweeter than my own country. 


§ 472. The following are used as Possessives of the Lve- 
Jlexive Pronouns : 


a) the Genitives of the Reflexive Pronouns, especially in 


the Singular: ἐμαυτοῦ, σεαυτοῦ, ἑαυτοῦ. When the sub- 
stantive to which they are joined has the article, the Gen- 
itives stand between the article and the substantive: Ζεὺς 
τὴν ᾿Αθηνᾶν ἔφυσεν ἐκ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ κεφαλῆς, Zeus produced 
Athene out of his own head. 

b) the Possessives of the Personal Pronouns, especially 


wee 


gta 


ὃ 475. DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROG. PRONOUNS. 269 


in the plural: ἡμέτερος, ὑμέτερος : σφέτερος is exclusively 
Reflexive. 

c) The Possessives in connection with the Genitives of 
αὐτός: ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν, ete. 


ἢ 473. The Leeflexive Pronoun in the Plural is also used 
instead of the /2ectprocal Pronoun ἀλλήλων : διελεγόμεθα 
ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς, we conversed with one another (among our- 
selves). 

§ 474. On αὐτός, self, and ὁ αὐτός, the same, see ὃ 389. 

αὐτός in the oblique cases, like the Lat. 2s, ea, id, is used 
as a Personal Pronoun referring to some person or thing 
mentioned before: ἐδέοντο αὐτοῦ παραμεῖναι, they wanted 
him to remain. 

The Genitive αὐτοῦ, ἧς, ὧν, like the Lat. ejus, eorwm, is 
the Enel. his, her, thewr, when it does not refer to the sub- 
ject. Its position is that pointed out in 470, ὦ. ὁ υἱὸς 
αὐτοῦ Or αὐτοῦ 6 υἱός, filius ejus. Still the Genitive of 
αὐτός often spophes the place of the Reflexive of the third 
wee 


᾿ ἃ 475. Of the Demonstrative Pronouns, οὗτος points 
more to what precedes and is already known; ὅδε to what 
follows and has not yet been named; so likewise are dis- 
tinguished τοιοῦτος, of such quality; τοσοῦτος, so great; 
ΟΠ οῦτος, so old—from τοιόςδε, τοσόςδε, τηλικόςδε. Oa 
the article with these Pronouns, ὃ 389. 

On the demonstrative uses of ὅς, ὃ 213, Obs. 


ὃ 4756. The Interrogative Pronouns mentioned in ὃ 216: 
τίς, πότερος, ποῖος, etc., are used exclusively in direct ques- 
tions. In indirect ones the compound Relatives ὕστις, ὃπό- 
τερος, OTotoc, etc., are employed. The former, however, 
are often used in indirect questions, though the latter never 
in a direct one: τίς ei; who are you? εἰπέ pol, ὅστις ci, OY 
τίς si, tell me who you are. 

On the Attraction with Relative Pronouns, $§ 597-603. 


270 THE ACTIVE VOICE, ὃ; 476. 


Cuap. XIX.—THE VOICES OF THE VERB. 
§ 476. 1. The Active Voice. 


1. The Active voice not unfrequently has an intransitive 
as well as a transitive meaning. Thus ἐλαύνειν means to 
drive and to ride; ἔχειν, to have, hold, and to be ir ὦ con- 
dition (καλῶς ἔχει, bene se habet); πράττειν, to do and to 
be (εὖ πράττω, 7 ain doing well); δηλοῦν, to make and to 
become manifest. 


In some verbs different tenses are assigned to the different mean- 
ings. See above, δὲ 329, 330. 


2. Simple verbs which are transitive often become intran- 
sitive when compounded: βάλλειν, to ἐδ οιο---μεταβάλλειν, 
to change; ἐςβάλλειν and ἐμβάλλειν, to fall ento, issue (of 
rivers); διδόναι, to give—evd.wdvar, to give in; ἐπιδιδόναι, 
to grow ; κόπτειν, to cut; προκύπτειν, proficere, make prog- 
ress; φέρειν, to bear; διαφέρειν, differre, to differ or be dis- 
tinguished. 

3. The Active often denotes an action which the subject 
accomplishes not emmediately, but mediately, that is, causes 
or allows to be done by others: 6 Κῦρος κατέκαυσε τὰ βα- 
σίλεια, Cyrus had the royal castle burned down. ‘This 15 
called the Causative use. 


§ 477. 2. The Middle Voice. 

Its primary meaning is reflexive, ὁ. e., the action of the 
verb in the Middle refers back to the subject from which 
it issues. 7 | 

The Middle, in the first place, may be either transitive 
or intransitive ; it is transitive when it can have an object 
in the Accusative: πράττομαι χρήματα, L gain for myself 
money , intransitive when it is incapable of having such an 
object: ἀπέχομαι, L restrain myself. 

The Middle, farther, can vary much in its mode of refer- 
ring back. to the subject. We distinguish : 


a 


δ΄ 480. _ THE MIDDLE VOICE. 271 


§ 478. 1. The Direct Middle, 
in which the subject is at the same time the direct object 
of the verb: λούομαι, [wash myself; τρέπομαι, L turn my- 
self ; ἐπιδείκνυμαι, L show myself; ἵσταμαι, 1 place myself ; 
καλύπτομαι, L hide myself. This kind of Middle is the 
rarest. The Active with the reflexive pronoun in the Ac- 
cusative is more generally used to express direct Reflexion. 


Obs.—Through the direct Middle, several middle verbs have be- 
come intransitive or passive: παύω, I cause to stop; παύομαι, I 
stop myself, cease ; gaivw,I show ; φαίνομαι, I show myself, appear ; 
typ, I send , tepar, I send myself, hurry. 


§ 479. 2. The Lndirect, or Datiwve-like Middle (ὃ 431), 
in which the subject is but indirectly affected by the ac- 
tion. Here the action takes place for or in the interest 
of the subject, so that in other languages the Dative may 
generally be used to denote the reflex influence: πορίζω, 
L provide; πορίζομαι, 7 provide for myself, 6. 9., χρήματα, 
money ; ἄγομαι γυναῖκα, [ take a wife to myself; μισθοῦ- 
μαι στρατιώτας, 1 hire soldiers for myself (but μισθοῦν, 
hire out, μισθοῦν ἑαυτόν, to hire one’s self out); μεταπέμ- 
πομαί τινα, 7 send for some one; Hom. αὐτὸς ἐφέλκεται 
ἄνδρα σίδηρος, the iron itself draws a man to tt. Hence 
the Athenian says: ὁ νομοθέτης τίθησι νόμους, the lawgiver 
gives laws, but ὁ δῆμος τίθεται νόμους, the people gives laws 
to wtself. 


Obs.—The interest of the subject sometimes consists in an object 
being removed from its reach: ἀμύνομαι κίνδυνον, I ward off dan- 
ger from me; προΐεμαί τινα, I send some one away from me ; ἀπο- 
δόσθαι ναῦν (to give away for one’s interest), to sell a ship. (Com- 
pare § 324, 7). 


§ 480. 3. The Swdjective or ethical Middle. 

This denotes that an action originates not only external- 
ly, but also internally from the subject, ὁ, e., from its means, 
power, or disposition: παρέχειν, to furnish; παρέχεσθαι, to 
Surnish from ones own means; ποιεῖν εἰρήνην, to make 
peace; ποιεῖσθαι εἰρήνην, to strive to make peace; λαμ- 


272 THE MIDDLE VOICE. ἢ 481. 


Bavew τι, to take something; λαμ[βάνεσθαί τινος, to lay 
hold of something ; σκοπεῖν, to look at; σκοπεῖσθαι, to re- 


ject. 


Obs.—The subjective Middle is formed also from intransitive verbs ; 
it then expresses a state more intensively than the active: πολι- 
τεύειν, to be ὦ citizen ; πολιτεύεσθαι, to act as a citizen ; βουλεύειν, to 
give advice ; βουλεύεσθαι, to deliberate with one’s self. 


§ 481. 4. The Causative Middle. 

As the Causative Active (ὃ 476, 3) expresses an ac- 
tion only occasioned by the subject, so the Middle is often 
used to denote that the subject as an action done for 
or on itself: 6 πατὴρ διδάσκεται τὸν υἱόν, the father has 
his son instructed; παρατίθεμαι δεῖπνον, I have a meal 


placed before ine; δικάζομαι, [have judgment pronounced 


Sor me; ἀποτέμνομαι τὰς χεῖρας, 1 have my hands cut 
of 

ὃ 4814. As examples, the following more important verbs 
may be adduced, whose meaning in the Middle essentially 
differs in various ways from that of the Active: ἄρχω, 7 
am first, ἄρχομαι, 1 begin; ὃ ῥήτωρ γράφει νόμον, the ora- 
tor proposes (writes down) @ law, 6 κατήγορος γράφεται 
τὸν ἀδικήσαντα, the accuser prosecutes (has the name writ- 
ten down) the wrong doer; τιμωρῶ τινι, 7 help one; τιμω- 
ροῦμαί τινα, L avenge myself on one, αἱρῶ, 7 take, αἱροῦμαι, 
7 choose; δανείζω, 7 put out to interest ; δανείζομαι, 7 
borrow at interest; πείθω, 1 persuade, πείθομαι, 1 allow 
myself to be persuaded, I obey. 


One and the same Middle may occur in different senses: διδάσκομαι 
(4), I cause to teach, or (1) I teach myself, learn ; τρέπομαι (1), I 
turn myself, or (2) I turn to myself; τρέπονται τὰς γνώμας, they 
change their opinion ; τρέπονται τοὺς πολεμίους, they turn away (put 
to flight) the enemy (ἢ 479, Obs.). 


§ 482. Obs.— The deponents are distributed among the different 
kinds of Middle verbs, and differ from the verbs mentioned only by 
having no active form. Thus ὑπισχνοῦμαι, 10 pledge myself, is a direct 
Middle; but δέχομαι, I receive ; κτάομαι, I acquire, are indirect; ἀγω- 


USE OF THE TENSES. 273 


νίζομαι, I contend ; οἶμαι, I think, are subjective: ἀναβιώσασθϑαι, to revive, 
is causative. On the Passive Deponcnts, ὃ 828. 


§ 483. 3. The Passive Vorce 
has a freer use in Greek than in Latin, viz. : 


1. even such verbs as in the Active take a different case 
from the Accusative, form a Passive: καταφρονῶ τινος 
(δ 424), 7 despise one; καταφρονεῖταί τις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ; πιστεύ- 
ovat τῷ βασιλεῖ, they trust the king; 6 βασιλεὺς πιστεύεται 
vr αὐτῶν ; ἐπιβουλεύει τῷ πολεμίῳ, he plots against the 
enemy ; ὃ πολέμιος ἐπιβουλεύεται ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὦ plot 1s made 
against the enemy by him. 

2. Neuters of Passive participles may be formed even 
from intransitive verbs: τὰ στρατευύμενα, the warlike meas- 
ures; τὰ σοὶ πεπολιτευμένα, YOuUr political course, your 
policy. 

3. The exclusively Passive forms even of Deponents are 
sometimes used in a Passive sense; βιάζομαι, 7 force, ἐβιι- 
ἄσθην, 1 was forced; in like manner a Passive may be 
formed from a Middle: aipéw, Z take, aipgoua, Pass., fam 
chosen; μετεπέμφθη, he was sent for, μεταπέμπομαι, 7 send 


Jor (§ 479). 


ὕπαρ. XX.—UseE or THE TENSES. 
§ 484. In marking the time, the Greeks distinguished: 


1. The ORDER of time. The three Orders of time being 
the Present, the Past, and the Muture. 


2. The Kinp of time. In regard to the Kind of time, 
an action is either 
@) going on, 6. g., γιγνώσκειν (gradually), to learn to 
know ; or, 
δ) momentary, 6. g., γνῶναι, to perceive, know ; or, 
: 1 9 


~ 


214 USE OF THE TENSES. ὃ 485. 


c) completed, 6. 5.5 ἐγνωκέναι, to have learned, to know 
(Lat. nosse). 


Obs.—The momentary action may be compared to a point, the ac- 
tion going on to a line, and the completed action to a surface. 


An action going on is indicated by the forms of the 
Present-Stem. 

A momentary action is indicated by the forms of the 
Aorist-Stems. 

A completed action is indicated by the forms of the 
Perfect-Stem. 

The /uture denotes the future Order of time of an ac- 
tion going on, as well as of a momentary action: γνώσομαι; 
L shall (gradually) get to know,and I shall perceive; the 
Third Future (futurwm exactwm) that of a completed 
action: ἐγνωκὼς ἔσομαι, L shall have learned (Latin no- 
vero). 

In the Present, Aorist, and Perfect, only the [Indicative 
indicates a definite Order of time; the other Moods, the 
Infinitive and the Participle, resemble the corresponding 
Indicative only in regard to the Kind, not in regard to the 
Order of time. 

The following table presents a general view of these 
relations : 


Present. | Past. | Future. 
Going on. | Ind. Pres. | Imperf. 
Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., ef the Present. Ὁ ἕ 
Momentary. | | Aor, Ind. S 
Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., of the Aorist. 
Completed. | Perf. Ind. Pluperf. Futurum exact. 


Subj., Opt., Imperat., Inf., Part., of the Perfect. 


ἢ 485. Obs—As the English as well as the Latin language gener- 
ally neglects the distinction between an action going on and a Mo- 
mentary action, it is difficult to comprehend it. A similar distine- 


—. 


§ 488. THE PRESENT INDICATIVE. 275 


tion, however, may be perceived in some English verbs, as flee (φεύ- 
yew) and escape (φυγεῖν); flicker and flash; fear (φοβεῖσθαι) and be 
Frightened (φοβηθῆναι, δεῖσαι) ; wonder (θαυμάζειν) and to be surprised 
(θαυμάσαι) ; to be busy about (πράσσειν) and to accomplish (πρᾶξαι) ; 
γελᾶν, to be laughing, and γελάσαι, to burst out laughing. 


1. ForMS OF AN ACTION IN PROGRESS. 
a) The Present Indicative. 


ἢ 486. The Present Indicative denotes, as in English 
and Latin, an action going on or in progress at the present 
tame: ἱκετεύομέν σε πάντες, we all emplore thee. Hence 
by the Present are expressed general assertions, valid for 
all times, and therefore also for the Present: ἔστι Θεός, 
there is a God. 

Obs.—Actions whose commencement indeed belongs to the Past, 
but whose effects extend to the Present, are sometimes expressed 
by this tense: ἀκούω, I hear, also in the sense, I have heard and 
still bear in mind; νικάω, J conquer, ἡ. 6..1 am victorious ; φεύγω, 
Lam banished ; ἀδικέω, 1 am wrong (have done wrong); θνήσκει, 
he is dead. In this sense alone are used ἥκω, 1 am come; οἴχομαι, 
I am gone. 

§ 487. By a lively apprehension a past action may be 
represented as present, hence the use, very frequent in 
Greek, of the //¢storzcal Present, which frequently alter- 
nates with past tenses: poet. καὶ πῶς ὁρᾶται καὶ npéOn; 
and how ἐδ she seen, and was she captured? ἐπεὶ ἡγεῖτο 
᾿Αρχίδαμος καὶ ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀντιπάλους, ἐνταῦθα οὗτοι 
οὐκ ἐδέξαντο τοὺς περὶ τὸν ᾿Αρχίδαμον, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγκλίνουσιν, as 
Archidamus took the lead and marched against the eneny, 
the latter did not wart for the troops of Archidamus, but 
retreat. 

§ 488. ὁ) The Imperfect 
is the Preterite of an action in progress, like the Latin 
Imperfect. 

The Greek therefore uses the Imperfect where he wishes 
to describe past states or past actions in their progress, in 
their continuance along with others, or in their frequent, 


210 THE IMPERFECT. 8 489, 


continued repetition: Hom. of μὲν ἄρ᾽ οἶνον ἔμισγον ἐνὶ 
κρητῆρσι καὶ ὕδωρ, οἱ δ᾽ αὖτε σπόγγοισι πολυτρήτοισι τραπέζας 
νίζον καὶ ττροτίθεν, τοὶ δὲ κρέα πολλὰ δατεῦντο, SOME Were 
mingling wine and water in mixing-bowls, others cleaning 
tables with porous sponges, and placing them, the rest were 
carving much meat; τοὺς piv οὖν πελταστὰς ἐδέξαντο ot 
βάρβαροι Kat ἐμάχοντο, the barbarians met the peltasts, 
and then were fighting,—Hom. ὄφρα piv ἠὼς ἦν καὶ ἀέξετο 
ς Q ¥ ΄ eee 5 , , > e o , 

ἱερὸν LAD, τόφρα μάλ αμφοτέρων βέλε NTTETO, WITTE TE 
λαός, as long as it was morning, and holy day mcreasing, 
so long the darts of both were striking and people falling. 

» - b ’ὔ c , Ἐν € ig 

——OUTOTE [MELOV ἀπεστρατοπεδεύοντο Ol βάρβαροι των Ελλή- 
νων ἑξήκοντα σταδίων, the barbarians (did not encamp) used 
never to encamp less than siaty stadia from the L[Hellenes. 


§ 489. Obs. 1—The Imperfect frequently expresses a merely at- 
tempted but not accomplished action: πρῶτος Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ 
στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι, ot δὲ αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον, ὕστερον δὲ ἐπεὶ ἔγνω ὅτι OU 
δυνήσεται βιάσασθαι, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλησίαν, first Clearchus tried to force 
his soldiers to go, but they shot at him ; afterward, however, as he perceived 
he would not be able to force them, he summoned a meeting. So ἐδίδου 
sometimes means he offered to give, to distinguish it from ἔδωκεν, he 
gave. 


§ 490. Obs. 2.—The Imperfects of the verbs which denote should 
and must are used, just as in Latin, to denote what should be done 
in opposition to what was done: ἔδει τοὺς λέγοντας μήτε πρὸς ἔχθραν 


ποιεῖσθαι τὸν λόγον μήτε πρὸς χάριν, the speakers ought to have made their 


speeches neither from fear nor from favor (Lat. oportebat); so χρῆν, it 
ought ; εἰκὸς ἦν, tt would be fair. 
On the Imperf. with ἄν, ὃ 494, Obs. 1, and § 537, ete. 


§ 491. οἡ The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, Infinitive, 
and Participle Present 


simply express an action in progress, whether it lie in the 


present, past, or future : μαινόμεθα πάντες, ὁπόταν ὁργιζώ- 
μεθα, we are all mad when we are angry; ἔλεγον τῷ 
Εὐθυδήμῳ, ὅτι πάντες ἕτοιμοι εἶεν μανθάνειν, they told Hu- 
thydemus that they were all ready to learn; οὕτω ποιήσω, 


YY <* 


Ε. 


§ 492. THE AORIST INDICATIVE. 277 


ὅπως ἂν σὺ κελεύῃς, 7 will do as you may bid me (sic 
agam, ut tu me agere jubebis); ταῦτα λέγων θορύ[ϑου ἤκουσε, 
διὰ τῶν τάξεων ἰόντος Kal ἤρετο, Tic ὁ θόρυβος εἴη, saying 
this, he heard a noise pass through the ranks, and asked. 
what the noise was. 


Obs.—These Present forms sometimes, like the Imperfect (§ 489), 
express a mere attempt: τὸ ἀποδιδράσκοντα μὴ δύνασθαι ἀποδρᾶναι 
πολλὴ μωρία, for a man not to be able to run away when he tries to 
run away is great stupidity. 


ὃ 492. 2. Forms oF A MoMENTARY ACTION. 
a) The Aorist [Indicative 
is the Preterite of a Momentary action, and therefore de- 
notes the actual beginning of an action in the past, similar 
to the Historical Perfect of the Latins. 

The Greeks employ the Aorist Indicative when they 
wish to narrate past facts, to state past actions simply as 
having happened, or to represent them as individual facts 
without reference to other actions: μετὰ τὴν ἐν Κορωνείᾳ 
μάχην ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐξέλιπον τὴν Βοιωτίαν πᾶσαν, after the 
batile αὐ Coronea the Athenians left all Beotia ,---Παυ- 
σανίας ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος στρατηγὸς ὑπὸ “Ελλήνων ἐξεπέμφθη 
μετὰ εἴκοσι νεῶν ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου, ξυνέπλεον δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι τριάκοντα ναυσὶ καὶ ἐστράτευσαν ἐς Κύπρον καὶ αὐτῆς τὰ 
πολλὰ κατεστρέψαντο, Pausanias was sent out from Lace- 
demon as general by the [Tellenes, with twenty ships from 
the Peloponnese, but Athenians also accompanied him 
(accompanying circumstance) wth thirty ships, and they 
proceeded to Cyprus and subdued the greater part of i; 
τοξικὴν καὶ ἰατρικὴν καὶ μαντικὴν ᾿Απόλλων ἀνεῦρεν, Apollo 
invented the arts of archery, medicine, and prophecy ;— 
Hom. τὴν δὲ πολὺ πρῶτος ἴδε Τηλέμαχος θεοειδής, βῆ δ᾽ 
ἰθὺς προθύροιο, νεμεσσήθη δ᾽ ἐνὶ θυμῷ ξεῖνον δηθὰ θύρῃσιν 
ἐφεστάμεν, ἐγγύθι δὲ στὰς χεῖρ᾽ ἕλε δεξιτερὴν καὶ ἐδέξατο 
χάλκεον ἔγχος, but her first Telemachus of form divine 
beheld, and he went straight to the porch, and was grieved 


278 THE AORIST INDICATIVE. ὃ 493. 


at heart that a stranger stood a long time at the door, and 
going near he took him by the right hand and eased him 
of his brazen spear. 


§ 493. As the Aorist Indicative simply expresses an ac- 
tion as having taken place in the past, it answers to all the 
different Preterites in other languages, especially often in 
subordinate sentences to the Latin and English pluperfect : 
Δαρεῖος Κῦρον μεταπέμπεται (ὃ 487) ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν 
σατράπην ἐποίησεν, Darius has Cyrus sent for from the 
province, over which he had made him satrap ( fecerat). 
Thus the Aorist is used with the Conjunctions of time, 
ἐπεί, we, Ore, as, when, like the Latin Perfect with post- 


quam, οὐδὲ, ut: we ὃ Κῦρος ἤσθετο κραυγῆς, ἀνεπήδησεν. 


ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον ὥσπερ ἐνθουσιῶν, when Cyrus perceived (ut 


audivit) a cry, he sprang upon his horse like one inspired. 


ὃ 494. The Aorist Indicative is used in statements of experience im- 


plying that a thing once happened, but admitting an application to 
all times: poet. τῷ χρόνῳ ἡ δίκη πάντως ἦλθ᾽ ἀποτισαμένη, with time 
avenging justice always came (and hence always comes); καὶ βραδὺς 
εὔβουλος εἷλεν ταχὺν ἄνδρα διώκων, even a slow man, when well advised, 
overtook (overtakes) by pursuit a quick man. In English we employ 
the Present in such general assertions, and often add such adverbs 
as usually, commonly, always, etc.: τὰς τῶν φαύλων συνουσίας ὀλίγος 
χρόνος διέλυσεν, ὦ short time usually dissolves the associations of the bad. 


This Aorist is called the gnomic Aorist, because it is often used in - 


gnomes, proverbs, or maxims. In Hom. it is often also used in com- 
parisons. 


Obs. 1.—In expressing what usually happens, the Aorist sometimes 
has ἄν in order to express the case as one that may have occurred, 
and therefore may occur oftener: ἔλεξεν ἄν, he may have said. In 
the same way the Imperfect is used, but referring to an action 
in progress: ἀναλαμβάνων αὐτῶν τὰ ποιήματα διηρώτων ἄν, Ti λέ- 
γοιεν, taking up their poems I would ask what they meant. 


Obs. 2.—The Aorist Indicative, especially in the 1 Pers. Sing., is 
frequently used to express actions and states beginning only at 
the moment of speaking: ἐγέλασα, I burst out laughing; poet. 
imyves ἔργον Kai πρόνοιαν ἣν ἔθου, I praise the deed and the pru- 
dence which you have exercised, 

On the Hypothetical Aorist, ὃ 537, ete. 


oe ἄν Σ᾿ 
se vs eye 


§ 496. THE AOR. SUBJ., OPT., IMPERAT., AND INFIN. 279 


§ 495. b) The Aorist Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, 
and Infinitive 


denote a Momentary action s¢mply, whether of the present, 
past, or future: of τριάκοντα προςέταξαν ἀπαγαγεῖν Λέοντα, 
ty ἀποθάνοι, the Thirty commanded to take Leon away to 
die; ἀπορῶ, τί πρῶτον μνησθῶ, Lam wm doubt what first 
to mention; μὴ θαυμάσητε, ἐὰν παράδοξον εἴπω τι, be not 
surprised if I say something strange; ob μοι ἀπόκριναι, 
ὦ Tal, give me an answer, boy ; μέγα οἶμαι ἔργον τὸ ἀρχὴν 
καταπρᾶξαι, πολὺ δ᾽ ἔτι μεῖζον τὸ λαβόντα διασώσασθαι, 7 
deem it a great thing to found a government, but a stile 
greater to maintain it after acquiring tt. 


Obs.—The Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and Infinitive Aorist, 
therefore, differ from the corresponding forms of the Present, 
just as the Aorist Indicative differs from the Imperfect; the 
Aorist forms express a single fact, conceived as a point, the 
Present, as a state or condition, sometimes of long duration: 
"χαλεπὸν τὸ ποιεῖν, τὸ δὲ κελεῦσαι ῥᾷάδιον, tt is difficult to do, easy to 
command ; εἴ πῃ ἔχεις ἀντιλέγειν, ayrireye* εἰ δὲ μή, παῦσαι πολλάκις 
λέγων τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον, if you have any thing to say in reply, reply 
(even in a long speech), 7f not, cease (at once) frequently repeating 
the same statement. 


§ 496. The Aorist Participle regularly expresses some- 
thing which too# place earlier or before the act of the prin- 
cipal verb: Κροῖσος Αλυν διαβὰς μεγάλην ἀρχὴν καταλύσει, 
Crasus, after crossing the Halys, will overthrow a great 
empire; παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω (ὃ 494), after suffering 
(by suffering) even a fool becomes knowing. 


Obs.—As the Aorist generally indicates the moment at which an 
action actually begins (§ 485), so the Aorist Participle also only 
expresses that the beginning of an action took place before an- 
other action, while its progress may continue simultaneously with 
that other: γελάσας εἶπε, he began to laugh and said (laughing) 
[visu oborto dizit]. Hom. ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν ἰδὼν ἐς πλησίον ἄλλον, 
thus would say many a one while looking at his neighbor ; χάρισαί 
μοι ἀποκρινάμενος, answer and oblige me, inasmuch as the χαρίσασθαι 
follows immediately after the beginning of the answer. 


280 THE FUTURE. § 497. 


§ 497. As the Aorist Indicative may frequently be translated by the 
Pluperfect (δ 493), so also the Aorist Optative and Infinitive in asser- 
tions generally denotes something which took place before: ot ᾿Ινδοὶ 
ἔλεξαν ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ ᾿Ινδῶν βασιλεύς (Ind. ὅτι ἔπεμψε), the Indians 
said that the king of the Indians had sent them ; Κύκλωπες λέγονται ἐν 
Σικελίᾳ οἰκῆσαι, the Cyclops are said to have dwelt in Sicily. 


§ 498. Many verbs whose Present-Stem expresses a state, 
denote in all the Aorist forms the entrance into this state: 
ἄρχειν, to rule, ἄρξαι, to obtain dominion; βασιλεύειν, to 
be king, βασιλεῦσαι, to become king; ἰσχύειν, to be strong, 
ἰσχῦσαι, to become strong, σιγᾶν, to be silent, σιγῆσαι, to 
become silent; ἔχειν, to have, σχεῖν, to obtain; φαίνεσθαι, 
to appear, φανῆναι, to become apparent ; νοσεῖν, to be id, 
νοσῆσαι, to become il; πολεμεῖν, to be at war (bellum ge- 
rere), πολεμῆσαι, to begin war (bellum imferre). (Compare 
§ 485.) 


Obs.—This meaning, however, is not always attazhed to these forms ; 
and ἐπολέμησαν may also signify simply bellum gesserunt (δ 492). 


§ 499. 3. THe FUTURE 


expresses the futurity both of an action in progress and of 
a Momentary action: ἄρξω, L shall become ruler, and I 
shalt rule. 


Obs. 2.—The 2 Person Future with οὐ nearly resembles the negative 
Imperative: οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις, thou wilt (shalt) not swear falsely. 


§ 500. The Future Indicative in relative clauses, and in clauses 
with ὕπως, that, is worthy of notice, for there the Future denotes — 
what may or should happen: οὐκ ἔχομεν ὕτου σῖτον ὠνησόμεθα, we have 
nothing with which we can buy food (non habemus, quo cibum emamus) ; 
δεῖ ἅπαντα ἄνδρα τοῦτο παρασκευάζεσθαι, ὅπως ὡς σοφώτατος ἔσται, ELEPY 
man should take care to be (that he shall be) as wise as possible (compare 
ὃ 553). The Participle is similarly used: ἡ χώρα πολλὴ καὶ ἀγαθὴ ἣν 
καὶ ἐνῆσαν οἱ ἐργασόμενοι, the land was large and good, and there were 
people to (who could) cultivate it ; τίς ἔσται ὁ ἡγησόμενος ; who will be 
there to (who can) guide us? (compare δὲ 380, 578). 


Οὐ.---ὠᾶν (Hom. κέ) is sometimes added to the Future Indicative 
to denote that a case may possibly occur: εὖ οἵδ᾽ ὅτι ἄσμενος ἂν 


od! A tn  Υ. 
~ — δ 


§ 503. THE PERFEUT INDICATIVE. 281 


πρὸς ἄνδρα οἷος σὺ εἶ ἀπαλλαγήσεται, I well know that he witl be glad 
to be reconciled to a man such as you are; Hom. 6 δέ κεν κεχολώ- 
σεται Oy κεν ἵκωμαι, and he will doubtless be in wrath whom LI come 
upon. 

δ 501. The verb μέλλω is used with the Present, Future, 
or, though more rarely, the Aorist Infinitive, to express 
an immediately approaching, or, at least, intended action: 
μέλλω ὑμᾶς ἄγειν εἰς ᾿Ασίαν, 1 am going to lead you to 
Asia (in Asiam vos ducturus sum). This is called the 
periphrastic future. 

Obs. 1.--μέλλω May also be used in other tenses than the Present 
with an Infinitive, like esse in Latin, with the Part. Fut.: πλησίον 
ἤδη ἦν ὁ σταθμὸς ἔνθα ἔμελλον καταλύσειν, jam prope aderat statio 
ubi deversuri erant, where they wished to rest. 

Obs. 2.--πῶς or τί οὐ μέλλω, is elliptical in the sense of Why should 
L not ὃ 


4. Forms oF A COMPLETED ACTION. 

δ 502. a) The Perfect Indicative 
is the Present of a completed action, ἡ. e., by the Perfect 
the Greeks denote an action completed for and with ref- 
erence to the Present : poet. λόγος λέλεκται πᾶς, the whole 
speech has been spoken |dixi|; εὕρηκα, L have found, I 
have it ; Hom. ἤδη yap τετέλεσται ἅ μοι φίλος ἤθελε θυμός, 
Sor now has been finished what my dear soul desired ; 
ἡ πόλις ἔκτισται παρὰ τῶν Κορινθίων, the city has been 
Sounded by the Corinthians (of a still existing city); τὰ 
χρήματα τοῖς πλουσίοις ἡ τύχη OV δεδώρηται ἀλλὰ δεδάνεικεν, 
“ογένηθ has not given, but lent (at interest) their money 
to the rich. 

§ 503. Obs.—Several Perfects have an entirely Present meaning, 
inasmuch as they present in a completed state the action of which 
the gradual accomplishment is expressed by the present : μιμνήσκομαι, 
Lremind myself ; μέμνημαι, [ bear in mind, remember (memint) ; καλέομαι, 
Lam named ; κέκλημαι, my name is; πείθομαι, I follow ; πέποιθα, I con- 
Jide in; ὄλλυμι, L am perishing; ὄλωλα, 1 am lost ; κτάομαι, 1 acquire ; 
κέκτημαι, I possess. torapat, 1 place myself ; ἕστηκα, I stand ; Baivw, 1 go; 
βέβηκα, [am gone. 


282 THE FUTURE PERFECT. § 504. 


§ 504. ὁ) The Pluperfect 


is the Preterite of a completed action, ὁ. ¢., by the Pluper- 
fect the Greeks express an action completed for and with 
reference to @ past time: Hom. δὴ τότε γ᾽ ἀτρέμας εὖδε 
λελασμένος bao’ ἐπεπόνθει, then truly he slept queetly, 75 
getting what he had suffered; ἐν τοῖς Δράκοντος νόμοις 
μία ἅπασιν ὥριστο τοῖς ἁμαρτάνουσι ζημία θάνατος, mM Dra- 
co’s laws death had been appointed for all criminals as 
the only punishment — says an Athenian after the laws 
were abolished. (As long as they were in force: ὥρισται.) 

Obs.—The Pluperfects of the Perfects enumerated in ὃ 503 are to 


be translated by Imperfects. 
On the Aorist in the sense of the Latin Pluperfect, ὃ 493. 


ὃ 505. 6) THE Future Perrect (Futurum Exactum) 


is the /uture of a completed action, ὁ. 4.,ὄ it denotes an 
action which will be completed in the future. It is only 
in the Middle that the Greeks have a special form for this 
Third Future, which has generally a Passive meaning. In 
the Active, the circumlocution by means of the Perfect 
Participle and the Future of εἶναι must be used (§ 291): 
av ταῦτ᾽ εἰδῶμεν, τὰ δεόντα ἐσόμεθα ἐγνωκότες, when Wwe 
know this, we shall (thence) have got to know our duty; 
Hom. ἐμοὶ δὲ λελείψεται ἄλγεα λυγρά, but L shall have 
gloomy woes left me. 


Obs.—The Future Perfect of the Perfects mentioned in § 503 serves 
as a common Future: μεμνήσομαι, meminero, etc, 


§ 506. d) The Perfect of all the Moods, of the Infinitive, 
and of the Participle, 


expresses a completed action generally, and may refer to 
any of the three Orders of time: ov βουλεύεσθαι ὥρα ἀλλὰ 
βεβουλεῦσθαι, now as not the time to consult, but to have 
consulted (to be resolved); Ξέρξης we ἐπύθετο τὸν “EXAho- 
ποντὸν ἐζεῦχθαι, προῆγεν ἐκ τῶν Σάρδεων, when Xerxes 


§ 611. USE OF THE MOODS. 283 


learned that the Hellespont had been bridged over (and 
was still provided with a bridge, ὅτι ἔζευκτο), he marched 
forward from Sardis; ταῦτα piv οὖν προειρήσθω, thus 
much be sud beforehand (now to something else); Hom. 
ἔσσεται ἦμαρ Or ἄν ποτ᾽ ὀλώλῃ Ἴλιος iph, ὦ day will come 
when holy Llios will be lost (has been lost); χρήσιμόν τι 
ἐσκεμμένος ἥκω, 7 an come after having devised something 
useful. 


Cuarp. X XI.—UsE or THE Moons. 


A) Tur Moops ΙΝ SIMPLE SENTENCES. 
ὃ 507. 1. The Indicative. 


The Indicative, in accordance with the usage of other 
languages, is employed simply to state something positively 
or negatively, or simply and directly to ask a question: 
poet. τῆς ἀρετῆς ἱδρῶτα θεοὶ προπάροιθεν ἔθηκαν, the gods 
placed sweat before virtue ; Hom. πόθεν εἷς ἀνδρῶν ; from 
what class of men are you ? 

Obs.—On the Indicative in hypothetical sentences with or without 


ἄν, ὃ 536, etc.; in sentences expressing a wish, ὃ 515. On the 
Aorist Ind. with ἄν, to express what usually happens, see ὃ 494. 


2. The Subjunctive. 


ὃ 508. The Subjunctive expresses what ought to take 
place; it always refers to the present, to reality. Hence 
it is used in the following cases: 

§ 509. 1. 45 ὦ challenge in the first person: ἴωμεν, let us 
go | eamus|; φέρε δή, τὰς μαρτυρίας ὑμῖν ἀναγνῶ, well, come ! 
let me read you the testimonies | recitem |. 

§ 510. 2. with the negative μή in prohibitions and in 
negative admonitions (compare § 518): μὴ τοῦτο ποιήσῃς, 
ne hoc feceris, you ought not to do thas. 


§ 511. 3. In hesitating questions, where it is asked what 


284 THE OPTATIVE MOOD. § 512, 


should be done: τί φῶ; what am I to say? Hom. πῶς 
τίς τοι πρόφρων ἔπεσιν πείθηται ᾿Αχαιῶν ; how shall any of 
the Acheans willingly trust thy words? δέξεσθε ἡμᾶς ἢ 
ἀπίωμεν ; well you receive us, or are we to depart ? 


ὃ 512. 4. with μή ἴῃ sentences expressing fear or anaety + 
μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ TO ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, Uf ut be not rather rude 
to say the truth. If the anxiety is to be negatively ex- 
pressed, μὴ οὐ is used: Hom. μή νύ τοι οὐ χραίσμῃ σκῆπτρον 
καὶ στέμμα θεοῖο, lest the staff and wreath of the god should 
not help thee, ὁ. ¢., it will certainly be of little help to thee 
| Lat. vercor ne non or ut te guvet|. Compare δὲ 533, 616, 
Obs. 3, § 621, a. 


§ 513. Obs —The Homeric language employs the Subjunctive of 
future events, quite like the Fut. Ind., to express a thing that is to 
be expected (ὃ 545): οὐ γάρ πω τοίους ἴδον ἀνέρας οὐδὲ ἴδωμαι, for never 
yet did I see such men nor may (shall) I see them. ἄν is sometimes 
added in Hom. to this Subjunctive: οὐκ ἄν τοι χραίσμῃ κίθαρις τά τε 
δῶρ᾽ ᾿Αφροδίτης, the lyre and Aphrodite’s gifts would not help thee. Com- 
pare ὃ 500, Obs, 


3. The Optative. 


§ 514. 1. The Optative alone (without the particle ἄν) 
is used to express a wish that something may take place: 
poet. ὦ παῖ, γένοιο πατρὸς εὐτυχέστερος, O boy! may you 
be happrer than your father | Lat. Pres. or Perf. Subj. ]. 

The particles used (like Latin wtinam) to introduce a 
wish are: εἰ (Hom. ai), εἴθε (Hom. αἴθε), εἰ γάρ, ὡς. 


§ 515. Obs.—If it is to be intimated that a wish is not to be realized, 
it is referred to the past, and expressed by the Imperfect or Aorist 
Indicative: εἴθ᾽ ἦσθα δυνατὸς δρᾶν ὅσον πρόθυμος εἴ, would that you were 
able to do what you wish; εἴθε σοὶ τέτε συγεγενόμην, would that I then 
had met you. The same kind of wish is expressed by the Aorist 
ὥφελον (properly “TI owed”) and the Infinitive: ὀλέσθαι ὥφελο:" 190 
ἡμέρᾳ, would that I had perished on that day [Lat. Imperf. and Plup. 
Subj.]. Compare § 587. 


ὃ 516. 2. The Optative with the particle ἄν (Hom. κέ or 


“Ἢ 


re”) la 
>, 


Teer, 


§ 519. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 285 


κέν) expresses possibility: τοῦτο γένοιτ᾽ av, that (could) 
might be; τί yap γένοιτ᾽ ἂν ἕλκος μεῖζον ἢ φίλος κακός 5 
what greater evil could there be than a bad friend; ποῦ 
δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἶεν οἱ ξένοι; why! where can the strangers be? 
[Latin Pres. and Perf. Subj.].. The Optative with ἄν is 
therefore called the potential Optative. . 


ὃ 517. Obs. 1.—Hence the Optative with ἄν is used in modestly ex- 


. pressed assertions: οὐκ ἂν λέγοιμι, [ would not say [non dixerim]; ὥρα 


ἂν συσκευάζεσθαι εἴη, it is perhaps time to break up; οὐκ ἂν δύναιο μὴ 
καμὼν εὐδαιμονεῖν, you could not, without taking trouble, be happy. 

Obs. 2.—In the poets the Optative in a potential sense is also used 
without dv: Hom. ῥεῖα θεός γ᾽ ἐθέλων καὶ τηλόθεν ἄνδρα σαώσαι, ὦ god 
who is willing can easily save a man even afar off. But this use of the 
Optative to denote a possible and merely imaginary case is originally 
peculiar to this mood, and hence is preserved in dependent clauses, 
§§ 528, 529, 532, Obs., 546, 552, Obs. 


§ 518. 4. The Lmperative. 


The Imperative is the mood of command, and, with neg- 
atives, of prohibition. 

A prohibition in the second person can be expressed only 
in two ways, viz., e¢ther with μὴ and the Present Lmpera- 
tive : μὴ πρᾶττε, of a continued action, or with μή and the 
Aorist Subjunctive: μὴ πράξῃς, of a Momentary action, 
do not do; ταῦτά μοι πρᾶξον, τέκνον, καὶ μὴ Ppadvve uno 
exiuvnaOnc ἔτι Τροίας, do me this, child, and delay not nor 
think farther of Troy. 

In the third person also μή with the Aorist Imperative 
is admissible: μηδεὶς ὑμῶν προςδοκησάτω ἄλλως, let none 
of you expect otherwise. 

On the Infinitive instead of the Imperative, see § 577. 
On the Imperative as a substitute for a hypothetical clause, 
§ 545, Obs. 3. 


B) THe Moops 1n ComMpouND SENTENCES. 


§ 519. Preliminary remarks on the connection of sen- 
tences with one another. 3 


286 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. § 519. 


1. Two simple sentences (§ 361, 2) may be combined in 
two ways, viz., either 


a) so that the one may be quite independent of the other 
—this combination is called Co-ordination, or Parataxis 
(παράταξις). 

ὁ) so that they mutually are referred to each other, and 
express a complete thought only in their combination — 
this combination is called Subordination, or Hypotaxis 
(ὑπόταξις). 

2. Of two Co-ordinate sentences each is a principal sen- 
tence, and in every respect independent of the other: κοινὴ 
ἡ τύχη Kal τὸ μέλλον ἀόρατον, fortune ts common, and the 
future invisible; τοῦτο ἐγὼ οὔτ᾽ εἴρηκα, οὔτε λέγοιμι ἄν, 
LT have neither suid that, nor could I say γέ. 

On the manner in which co-ordinate sentences may be 
combined, § 624, a. 


3. By Subordination two sentences are combined in such 
a way that one expresses the principal idea, the other a 
secondary one. ‘The former is called the leading sentence, 
the latter the secondary, dependent or Subordinate. One 
leading sentence often has several subordinate ones de- 
pendent on it. The moods of subordinate sentences are 
in many ways determined by the leading sentence: Τισ- 
σαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, ὡς ἐπι- 
BovAsbor αὐτῷ, Tissaphernes brings a calumny against Cy- 
rus before his brother, (saying) that he was plotting against 
him; Hom. cot aw ἑσπόμεθ᾽, ὄφρα od χαίρῃς, we have fol- 
lowed thee that thou mayst rejoice. 

4. The Correlative connection of sentences is a special 
kind of subordination. Of two correlative sentences, one 
always refers to the other. The one is called the Prota- 
sis, and the other the Apodosis. The Protasis, which re- 
quires to be completed by another sentence, is subordinate 
(3). The Apodosis is a leading sentence, which furnishes 
the necessary completion: Hom. we ἴδεν, ὥς μιν ἔδυ χόλος, 


§ 520. THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. 287 


as he saw τέ wrath seized him; Hom. ὁπποῖόν κ᾽ εἴπησθα 
ἔπος τοῖόν κ᾽ ἐπακούσαις, the kind of word you speak, such 
you will hear. 


Obs. 1.—This correlation is frequently expressed by two Pronouns 
or Particles referring to each other (δὲ 216, 217), as in the exam- 
ples just quoted, but not always: εἴ πῃ ἔχεις ἀντιλέγειν, ἀντίλεγε, 
if you can in any way reply, reply. 

Obs. 2.—The Apodosis often precedes the Protasis: οὗτος βέλτιστος 
ἂν εἴη ὅστις κοσμιώτατα τὰς συμφορὰς φέρειν δύναται, he would be the 
best who can bear calamities with most dignity. 


5. From the subordination of one clause to another there 
arises a compound sentence. 


Obs. 1.—The same thought may often be as well expressed in two 
Co-ordinate sentences as in one Compound sentence: μηδενὶ συμ- 
φορὰν ὀνειδίσῃς, κοινὴ yao ἡ τύχη, reproach no one with a calamity, 
Sor fortune is common ; or ἐπεὶ ἡ τύχη κοινή ἐστι, μηδενὲ συμφορὰν 
ὀνειδίσῃς, since fortune is common, reproach no one with a calamity. 
The Homeric language abounds in series of Co-ordinate sentences 
(the paratactic arrangement). . 


Obs, 2.—Frequently a word belonging to the Dependent sentence 
is drawn into the Principal sentence, where it may appear in 
different cases. If the Principal sentence stands first, the ar- 
rangement is called prolepsis (πρόληψις, taking beforehand): καί 
μοι τὸν υἱὸν εἰπέ, εἰ μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην = καί μοι εἰπέ, εἰ ὁ υἱὸς 
μεμάθηκε τὴν τέχνην (§ 397). Hom. Τυδείδην δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν γνοίης, πο- 
τέροισι μετείη, YOU could scarce perceive on which side Tydides stood ; 
καὶ τῶν βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο, ὡς πολεμεῖν ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν, he also took 
care that the barbarians should be capable of carrying on war. On 
the other hand, a substantive may pass from the Principal to 
the Subordinate sentence: Hom. μετὰ δ᾽ ἔσσεται ἣν τότ᾽ ἀπηύρων 
κούρην Βρισῆος, among them also will be the daughter of Brises, whom 
I then took away (compare § 602). 


6. On the different kinds of sentences according to their 


substance, § 624, ete. Only those kinds will here be no- 
ticed which are most important in regard to the use of the 


Moods. 


§ 520. The use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
subject to the following generad rules: 
1. The /ndicative in Greek is very extensively used 


288 THE MOODS IN COMPOUND SENTENCES. ὃ 521. 


even in Dependent sentences, the Greeks merely annexing 
or inserting many sentences without any mark of depend- 
ence where the Latin language marks the dependence by 
the Subjunctive or Infinitive: μή μ᾽ avépn, τίς εἰμι, ask me 
not who 7 am [ne me interroges, quis sim). 


§ 521. 2. The Subjunctive in Dependent sentences also 
denotes always that which ought to take place, and can 
generally be employed only when the leading sentence 
contains a principal tense. 

Every verbal form is regarded as a Principal tense which 
connects the action with the present ; hence the Present 
(except the Historical Present, § 487), the Perfect, and 
the L’uture Indicative, and all tenses of the Subjunctive 
and Linperatove. 


§ 522. 3. The Optative (without av) denotes something 
merely conceived or supposed (ὃ 517, Obs. 2), and generally 
can be employed only when the Principal sentence contains ~ 
an [listorical tense. 

IXvery verbal form, however, is regarded as an Historical 
tense which connects the action with the past, hence the 
Historical Present (δ 487), the Indicative of the Aorist, 
the Zinperfect and Pluperfect. 

A Dependent clause, moreover, frequently has the Op- 
tative when this mood occurs in the Principal sentence. 


§ 523. 4. In indirect speech (oratio obliqua) the Opta- 
tive (without av), but only after an L/estorical tense, is 
used to denote something which 15 to be stated, not as the 
opinion of the speaker, but of another person: οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
Περικλέα ἐκάκιζον, ὅτι στρατηγὸς ὧν οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι ἐπὶ τοὺς 

4 y ° ᾿ 
πολεμίους, the Athenians reproached Pericles because, be- 
ing ὦ general, he did not lead them out against the enemy 
[quod non duceret|; εὔξαντο σωτήρια θύσειν ἔνθα πρῶτον 
εἰς φιλίαν γῆν ἀφίκοιντο, they vowed to offer thank-offerings 
whenever they should first come to a friendly land; εἴ τις 
πόλις ἐπὶ πόλιν στρατεύσοι, ἐπὶ ταύτην ἔφη ἰέναι, δὲ JUG Clv- 


§ 526. MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. 289 


atas contra | aliam | civitatem pugnatura esset, contra hance 
se diait cturum. 

In this case, however, the Indicative also is admissible 
according to § 520, but never the Subjunctive, even after a 
Principal tense, its employment being limited to the case 
mentioned in § 527. 


§ 524. 5. The Potential Optative (with av) may occur in 
Dependent, in the same sense as in Independent, sentences 
(ὃ 516), to denote something as merely possible: λέγω, ὅτι 
τοῦτο οὐκ ἂν γένοιτο, L say that this probably could not 
happen. ι 

The farther use of the Moods in Dependent sentences is 
treated of specially in what follows, according to the differ- 
ent kinds of Dependent sentences. 


I. Moops IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS AND IN DE- 
PENDENT INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 


§ 525. Sentences containing Dependent assertions are 
those which annex the substance of a speech or opinion to 
a Principal sentence by means of the conjunctions, ὅτι, we, 
that ; Dependent or indirect Interrogative sentences are 
connected with the Principal sentence by means of εἰ, ¢f; 
πότερον... ἢ [utrum...an]|, whether...or (in double ques- 
tions), or Interrogative Pronouns (ὃ 214) or Adverbs. 


§ 526. 1. The /ndicative 
is used in those sentences which, when conceived independ- 
ently, would have the Indicative, and thus, 


a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense, the 
Indicative must be used (ὃ 521): εἰπέ μοι, τίνα γνώμην 
ἔχεις, tell me, what opinion you have (direct: τίνα γνώμην 
ἔχεις) [ Lat. dic mihi, quam sententiam habeas] ; 

b) when the leading sentence has an Historical tense 
the Indicative may be used (ὃ 522): εἶπον, ἥντινα γνώμην 
εἶχον, dint quam sententiam haberem ; ἧκεν ἀγγέλλων τις, 


Ν 


290 MOODS IN DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS, ETC. § 527 


we ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται, some one came bringing the news 
that Elatea was taken (direct: ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται). 

Besides the Indicative, the Optative also is in this case 
admissible, § 528, a. 


§ 527. 2. The Subjunctive 
can not occur at all in Dependent assertions, and in De- 
pendent Interrogative sentences oniy if, when conceived as_ 
independent, they would necessarily have the Subjunctive, 
and thus 


a) when the leading sentence has a Principal tense the 
Subjunctive must remain: βουλεύομαι, πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ, 
I am planning how to escape from you (direct accord- 
ing to ὃ 511: πῶς σε gible [delibero, quo modo te effu- 
giam]: 

δὴ) when the leading sentence has an Historical ina 
the Subjunctive may ‘sometimes occur: ἐβουλευόμην, πῶς 
σε ἀποδρῶ ; but the Optative is more frequent in this case 
than the Subjunctive (ὃ 528, 6). The Subjunctive in De- 
pendent Interrogative sentences accordingly is to be trans- 
lated by may or shall. 


§ 528. 3. The Optatwe (without ay) 
may occur in such sentences: 


a) as ὦ substitute for the Indicative (δ 526, 6), testi 
when there is an Historical tense in the leading sen-. 
tence, in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived inde- 
pendently, ought to have the Indicative: εἶπον, ἥντινα 
γνώμην ἔχοιμι (direct: εἶχον) | Lat. dixt, quam sententiam 
haberem]|; ἔγνωσαν ὅτι κενὸς ὃ φόβος εἴη, they knew that 
the fear was groundless (direct: ὃ φόβος κενὸς iy), com- 
Sale § 523. . 


6) as ὦ substitute for the Subjunctive (ὃ 527, ὃ), ᾧ. Gry 
when an Historical tense occurs in the leading pentenioe, 
in case the Dependent sentence, if conceived independent- 
ly, ought to have the Subjunctive: ἐβουλευόμην, πῶς σε 
ἀποδραίην (direct: πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ) [ Lat. deliberaban, quo 


πο - 


§ 530. MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 291 


modo te effugerem],I was reflecting how 7 should escape 
you. ‘ 
In the second case the Optative is to be translated by 


should. 


0bs.— Which of the two meanings belongs to the Optative is gen- 
erally perceived from the connection quite as easily as in the 
Latin nesciebat quid faceret, he knew not what he did or what he 
should do. 


§ 529. The Optative as a substitute for the Indicative is found also 
without a Conjunction in the continuation of a direct speech: ἔλεγον 
πολλοί, ὅτι παντὸς ἄξια λέγει (ὃ 526, ὁ), χειμὼν yap εἴη καὶ οἴκαδε ἀπο- 
πλεῖν οὐ δυνατὸν εἴη, many said that he says what is worthy of the ut- 
most regard, for that it was winter, and that it was impossible to sail 
home. 

On the Infinitive in assertions, § 560. On the Participle in asser- 
tions, ὃ 593. 

Mixed examples: 

Πυθαγόρας ὃ Σάμιος πρῶτος ἐν τοῖς “EAAnow ἐτόλμησεν εἰ- 
πεῖν, ὅτι τὸ μὲν σῶμα τεθνήξεται (ὃ 291), ἡ δὲ ψυχὴ ἀναπτᾶσα 
(ὃ 8516, 5) οἰχήσεται ἀθάνατος καὶ ἀγήρως, Pythagoras the 
Samian was the first among the Greeks who ventured to 
maintain that the body will be dead, but the soul, flying 
upward, will depart invmortal and ever young ; O«ucro- 
κλῆς νέος ἔτι ὧν ἔλεγεν, ὡς καθεύδειν αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐῴη TO TOU 
Μιλτιάδου τρόπαιον, Themistocles, when still young, used to 
say that the trophy of Miltiades would not let him sleep ; 
᾿Απορῶ, τοῦ (ὃ 214,05. 1) πρῶτον μνησθῶ, 7 am at ὦ loss 
what to mention first ; οἱ ᾿Επιδάμνιοι τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο, εἰ 
παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν, the Lpidamnians asked the 
god whether they should giwe up their city to the Corinth- 
A708. 


II. Moops IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE, OR FINAL 
SENTENCES. 

§ 530. Sentences which express an object or a purpose 
are introduced by the Conjunction ἵνα (Hom. ὄφρα), we, 
ὅπως, in order that, that,in order to, wh, or ὅπως ph, ἵνα 
μή, i order that not. 


292 MOODS IN SENTENCES OF PURPOSE. 8 531. 


As such sentences express something which ἐδ expected 
to happen, they take: 


§ 531. 1. The Subjunctive 

a) necessarily when the leading sentence has a Principal 
tense: εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς, you have 
come at the right time to hear the trial |in tempore ades, 
ut causam audias |. 

b) more rarely when the leading sentence has an Histor- 
ical tense: εἰς καιρὸν ἧκες, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς | aderas 
ut audires|; ἐπίτηδές σε οὐκ ἤγειρον, ἵνα we ἥδιστα διάγῃς, 
L purposely did not wake you, that you might pass your 
tume as pleasantly as possible. 

Obs.—The Conjunctions we, ὕπως, sometimes have ἄν (Hom. κέ, κέν) 

added to them in this sense: τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ νῦν didacy’, ὅπως ἂν ἐκ- 
μάθω, explain that very thing now that I may learn it, The pur- 


pose is thereby represented as one whose attainment depends on 
conditions (as here, if you explain it). Compare ὃ 554. 


§ 532. 2. The Optative 
as a regular substitute for the Subjunctive (ὃ 531, ὁ). when 


the leading sentence has an Historical tense: ἐπίτηδές σε 
οὐκ ἤγειρον, ἵνα ὡς ἥδιστα διάγοις ; Hom. Τυδείδῃ Διομήδεϊ 


Παλλὰς ᾿Αθήνη δῶκε μένος καὶ θάρσος ἵν᾽ ἔκδηλος μετὰ πᾶσιν 


᾿Αργείοισι γένοιτο, to Tydides Diomedes Pallas Athene 
gave strength and courage that he might be distinguished 
among all the Argives | Diomedi Minerva animos dedit, 
ut insignis fieret inter cunctos Argwos|. 


Obs.—The distinction between the Subjunctive and Optative in 
sentences of purpose after an Historical tense consists in the 
rarer Subjunctive expressing the sentence more as an object or 
demand that may be attained, the Optative more as the thought 
or conception of the acting person (compare §§ 521, 522). 

On the Future Indicative with ὅπως, §§ 500,553. On the hypo- 
thetical Indicative in Sentences of Purpose, § 500. On the non- 
intended consequence (ὥστε), ὃ 565. 


§ 583. Sentences expressive of fear, introduced by μὴ (Lat. ne) or 
μὴ οὐ (Lat. wt), follow the construction of sentences of purpose (com- 
pare ὃ 512). They have the Subjunctive necessarily when dependent 


ὃ 536. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 293 


on a Principal tense: οὐ φοβεῖ, μὴ ἤδη πρεσβύτερος yo; do you not fear 
to be already too old {nonne times, ne etate provectior 818] ὁ The Optative 
is commonly used after an Historical tense: ἐφοβοῦντο, μὴ τι πάθοι, 
they feared he might suffer somewhat |verebantur ne quid illi accideret| ; 
but not unfrequently also the Subjunctive: οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι rode ξυμμάχους 
ἐδεδίεσαν, μὴ ἀποστῶσιν, the Athenians were alarmed lest the allies should 
revolt (compare ὃ 519, 5, Obs. 2). 
Obs.— ph and ὅπως ph after verbs of fearing seldom have the Fu- 
ture Indicative, oftener the Perfect Indicative when the fear refers 
to a completed action: φοβούμεθα, μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμαρτήκαμεν, 106 
Sear we have failed in both. 


Mixed examples: 

~ > , λέ er Ν (fey hans 3 θά Ἴ: 
τουτὸ οὐ T POYONUAaL EVELV, tva τισὶν VUUWV QTEX aAVWUAL, 
have not chosen to say this in order to be hateful to some 
of you; Κῦρος φίλων wero δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι, Cy- 
rus thought friends necessary that he might have helpers ; 
Δέδοικα, μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, 2 am afracd lest 
we should forget the way home; Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ ἦν, 
μὴ ἐκφύγοι τὰ πράγματα αὐτόν, Philip was in fear lest the 
affairs might escape him. 


Ill. THe Moops in ConpITIONAL SENTENCES. 


§ 534. Conditional or hypothetical sentences belong to 
the Correlative sentences (ὃ 519, 4). The Protasis states 
a condition under which something is to occur; the Apod- 
osis states that something happens under a certain con- 


dition. Both sentences together form a [ypothetical Pe- 


riod. 


§ 535. In the Protasis, εἰ (Hom. ai), ἐάν (ἰ. 6., εἰ-ἀν), 
contracted to ἤν or av (Hom. εἴ xe-v), 7% are employed; in 
the Apodosis the particle av is sometimes used to show that 
it is true only under certain conditions. 

In Greek there are fowr principal forms of the Hypo- 
thetical Period: 


§ 536. 1. in the Protasis εἰ with the Zndicative, in the 
Apodosis the Zndicative without av, or the Imperative. 


294 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. ὃ 537. 


This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed when 
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
represented as one absolutely necessary, actual, without any 
opinion being expressed by the speaker as to the probabil- 
ity or improbability of the case: εἰ θεοὶ εἰσίν, ἔστι καὶ ἔργα 
θεῶν, if there are gods, there are also works of gods; σοὶ 
εἴ πῃ ἄλλῃ δέδοκται, λέγε καὶ δίδασκε, 7f you have any dif- 
Jerent opinion, speak and explain. 


_ Obs.—All tenses may be used in this form, consequently also His- 
torical tenses. If these latter occur, care must be taken not to 
confound this first principal form with the second: ἐξῆν σοι 
ἀπιέναι ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, εἰ μὴ ἤρεσκόν σοι ot νόμοι, you were free to 
leave the city if its laws did not please you (in the present: ἔξεστι 
—ei μὴ ἀρέσκοῦσι) ; εἴ τι τῶν δεόντων ἐπράχθη, τὸν καιρόν, οὐκ ἐμέ 
φησιν αἴτιον γεγενῆσθαι, if any thing right was done, he says that the 
occasion, not I, was the cause. A sure sign of the second principal 
form is the particle dy in the apodosis. 


§ 537. 2.in the Protasis, εἰ with the Indicative of an [/és- 


torical tense; in the Apodosis, ἄν with the Indicative of 
an [7istoricad tense. 

This form of the Hypothetical Period is applied when 
the relation between the Protasis and Apodosis is to be 
represented indeed as one guzte necessary, but at the same 
time neither of them as real. The Indicative in such con- 
ditional sentences is called the Hypothetical Indicative, 
which, therefore, always denotes the opposite to reality 
(compare § 515). | 

In such Conditional Sentences, a sentence contradictory 
of the Protasis may always be supplied in thought. . 

Hence the Protasis may have the following forms: 


§ 538. a) The J/mperfect is used when a condition is 
stated as not existing at present: ei τὸν Φίλιππον τὰ δίκαια 
, ce? , wn A ς , > ’ τ 
πράττοντα ἑεωρων, σφόδρα αν θαυμαστὸν ἡγουμὴν αὐτόν, if 
I saw (were to see) Philip acting justly, 1 should deem 
him very admirable. Were we may oppose to the Protasis 
the thought νῦν δὲ οὐχ ὁρῶ τὰ δίκαια πράττοντα, but now 


§ δ41. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 295 


I see him not act justly. The verb of this contradiction 


to be supplied is in the Present. 
To this form corresponds in Latin the Imperfect Sub- 
junctive: sz viderem, putarem. 


§ 539. ὁ) The Aorist Indicative is used when a condi- 
tion is stated which did not take place in the past: ἀπέ- 
θανον ἄν, εἰ μὴ ἡ τῶν τριάκοντα ἀρχὴ κατελύθη, 7 should 
have died ἐγ the government of the thirty had not been 
overthrown. | 

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought κατ- 
ελύθη δέ, but ἐξ was overthrown. The verb of this contra- 
diction to be supplied is in the Aorésé. 

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
junctive: periissem, nisi dominatio eversa esset. 


§ 540. c) The Pluperfect is used when a non-completed 
condition is stated: εἰ τοῦτο ὡμολόγητο ἡμῖν, ῥᾳδίως ἂν 
διεμαχόμεθα, 17 ὧν this we had been agrecd, we should eas- 
aly carry the contest through. 

Here we may oppose to the Protasis the thought ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐχ ὡμολόγηται, but we have not been agreed. The verb 
of this contradiction to be supplied is in the Perfect. 

To this form corresponds in Latin the Pluperfect Sub- 
junctive : : sv inter nos convenisset. 


§ 541. The Apodosis to'a Hypothetical Protasis of this 


_ kind may have either the Lmper, fect or the Aorist LIndica- 


tive, or the Pluperfect with av [ Hom. xé-v], and that quite 
Ba scndently as to which of the three tenses occurs in 
the Protasis. In this case, also, the Imperfect corresponds 
to the Latin Imperfect Subjunctive; the Aorist and Plu- 
perfect, to the Latin Pluperfect Subjunctive: εἰ τότε ἐβο- 
ηθήσαμεν, οὐκ ἂν ἠνώχλει νῦν 6 Φίλιππος, if We then had 
rendered help, Philip would not now be troublesome; εἰ 
αὐτάρκη τὰ ψηφίσματα ἦν, Φίλιππος πάλαι ἂν ἐδεδώκει δίκην, 
si plebiscita per se sufficerent, Philippus dudum panam 
dedisset. 


296 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. ὃ 542. 


§ 542. Obs. 1.—The particle ἄν is sometimes omitted in the apodo- 
sis: φσχυνόμην, εἰ ὑπὸ πολεμίου ye ὄντος ἐξηπατήθην, L should be ashamed 
if I had been deceived by an enemy. 


§ 548. Obs. 2.—The Imperfect sometimes refers to a past time when 
the continuance of an action is to be made particularly emphatic: 
εἰ τοῦτ᾽ ἐποίει (not ἐποίησεν) ἕκαστος, ἐνίκων ἄν, Uf each had been acting 
so, they would be victorious, On the other hand, the Aorist is sometimes 
used referring to present time, when the rapid commencement of an 
action is to be indicated : εἴ τίς σε ἤρετο, τί ἂν ἀπεκρίνω (NOt ἀπεκρίνου) ; 
if any one asked you, what answer would you give? 


§ 544. Obs. 3.—A Hypothetical Apodosis may stand alone, the Prot- 


asis being supplied in thought or deduced from the context: ἐβου- ᾿ 


λόμην ἄν, I should like (εἰ ἐδυνάμην, if I could, dared); dv ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺς 
πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειτε, you would long since have perished through your- 
selves (i. 6.. if left to yourselves). 


§ 545. 3.in the Protasis, ἐάν (ἤν, ἄν, Hom. εἴ xe-v) with 
the Subjunctive ; in the Apodosis, the Lndicative of a 
Principal tense or the Imperative. 


This form of the Hypothetical Period is used to ex- — 


press or prescribe something in regard to a case that is 
to be taken for granted and expected. It is admissible 
only in connection with present and future tume (ὃ 521), 
and is met with chiefly in maxims or proverbs: δεῖ τὰ βέλ- 
Taba ~ «ὧν Ἃ \ ΄ 55“ ΄ ‘ 
TiOTA AVTL Τῶν ἡδέων, αν μη συναμφότερα ἐξῇ, λαμβάνειν, 
you must choose what ἐδ best rather than what ἐδ agree- 
able, when both together are not allowed ; ἂν τὰ παρεληλυ- 
θότα μνημονεύῃς, ἄμεινον περὶ τῶν μελλόντων βουλεύσει, ὁ 
μνημονεύῃς, ἄμ ρὶ τῶν μὲ 
you remember the past, you will judge better about the 
future. 


Obs. 1.—The Aorist Subjunctive in such conditional sentences often 
comes very near to the Latin Future Perfect: νέος ἂν πονήσῃς, 
γῆρας ἕξεις εὐθαλές, si juvenis laboraveris, senectutem habebis gucun- 
dam. 

Obs. 2.—We find εἰ with the Subjunctive in Homer, and occasion- 
ally also in Attic writers, in the same sense as ἐάν, εἰ ἄν, and εἴ 
κε-ν : Soph. ἄνδρα, κεῖ τις ἢ σοφός, τὸ μανθάνειν πόλλ᾽, αἰσχρὸν ob- 
δέν, for a man, even if he is wise, to learn much, is no disgrace. 


Obs. 3.—The Subjunctive in Conditional sentences is akin to the 


a 


§ 548. MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 297 


Subjunctive of Challenging (δ 509). The speaker thereby puts 
or demands an assertion, to which, for the present, he requires 
the hearer’s assent: τοῦτο ἐὰν σκοπῆτε, εὑρήσετε, OTe πάντων ἄριστα 
ἔχει, if you consider this you will find that it is the best of all ; 
which is almost identical with the challenge: consider this, ete. 
[compare Lat. Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret|. In 
a similar way the Jimperative sometimes takes the place of a 
Hypothetical Protasis: Ῥοοῦ, πλούτει re γὰρ κατ᾽ οἶκον, εἰ βούλει, 
μέγα καὶ ζῆ τύραννον σχῆμ᾽ ἔχων, ἐὰν δ᾽ ἀπῇ τούτων τὸ χαίρειν, 
τἄλλ᾽ ἐγὼ καπνοῦ σκιᾶς οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην, for be rich, if you will, at 
home, and live in the splendor of a great ruler ; but if joy be wanting 
to it, I would not give the shadow of smoke for the rest. (Compare 
§ 549.) 

§ 546. 4. in the Protasis, εἰ with the Optative ; in the 
Apodosis, ἄν (ké-v) with the Optative. 

This form of the Hypothetical Period is employed. in- 
tentionally to represent what is said as quite uncertain, as 
merely possible, as a merely conceived case: εἴ τὶς κεκτὴ- 
μένος εἴη πλοῦτον, χρῷτο δὲ αὐτῷ μή, ap ἂν εὐδαιμονοΐ 5 
should any one possess wealth and not make use of ἐξ 
(suppose any one possessed), would he be happy? Com- 
pare §§ 516, 517, Obs. 2. The Present or Perfect Sub- 
junctive in Latin corresponds to this form: sz possedeat 
(or possederit), nwm beatus sit ? 

Obs.—In Homer the Protasis of such a period also sometimes has 
κέ-ν OY ἄν: εἰ τούτω κε λάβοιμεν, ἀροίμεθά κεν κλέος ἐσθλόν, Uf We 
should get these two, we should get glorious fame. The Attic writers 
very rarely use dy in the Protasis. 


΄ 


§ 547. Since εἰ with the Optative intimates that a thing 
is merely possible, it expresses in reference to the past 
what possibly might have been, 7. 6., ἃ repeated case (com- 
pare § 494, Ods.1); the Apodosis then usually has the In- 
dicative: εἴ που ἐξελαύνοι ᾿Αστυάγης, ἐφ᾽ ἵππου χρυσοχαλίνου 
περιῆγε τὸν Κῦρον, 17 ever Astyages rode out (might ride 
out), he took Cyrus with him on a horse with a golden 
bridle. 

§ 548. εἰ with the Optative in the oratio obliqua takes 
the place, according to § 523, of εἰ with the Ind. (1), or 

N 2 


- ie ΤΣ ἽΝ τ 


298 MOODS IN CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. ὃ 549. 


ἐάν with the Subjunctive (3), when a Hypothetical sen- 
tence depends on a L/istorical tense: da Κῦρος, ὅτι εἴ τι 
μάχης ποτὲ δεήσοι, ἐκ τῶν φίλων αὐτῷ παραστάτας ληπτέον 
εἴη, Cyrus knew that, if ever any battle should be necessary, 
he would have to take his supporters from his own friends. 
In direct language, Cyrus would say, ἤν ποτε δεήσῃ or εἴ 
ποτε δεήσει---ληπτέον ἐστί. If, in its relation to the time of 
the governing verb, the condition lies in the Future, the 
Future Optative is used. We seldom, in this case, find ἐάν 
with the Subjunctive. 


The following general remarks also are to be observed 
in regard to Conditional sentences. 


§ 549. 1. The two members of a Hypothetical Period are 
not so dependent on each other as that the one necessarily 
requires a special form in the other. A Protasis of one 
form may, on the contrary, be joined with the Apodosis of 
another form. It occurs very frequently that a Protasis is. 
in the first or third form, and the Apodosis in the fourth, 
in order to represent the Assertion which it contains as 
merely possible: εἰ τοῦτο λέγεις, ἁμαρτάνοις ἄν, Uf YOu mean 
this, you would be in errors ἐὰν ἐθελήσητε πράττειν ἀξίως 
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν, ἴσως av μέγα τι κτήσαισθε ἀγαθόν, tf you should 
be disposed to act in a manner worthy of yourselves, you 
would perhaps gain great good. The connection of a 
Protasis of the second form with an Apodosis of the fourth 
is rare: Hom. καί νύ κεν ἔνθ᾽ ἀπόλοιτο ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ai- 

είας, εἰ μὴ ἄρ᾽ ὀξὺ νόησε Διὸς θυγάτηρ ᾿Αφροδίτη, and now 
assuredly Aineas, ruler of men, would there have perished, 
if LZeus's daughter Aphrodite had not kept ὦ sharp look- 


out. 


§ 550. 2. A Hypothetical Period may partly or entirely be inserted 
in anothcr sentence. The most peculiar in this respect are sentences 
xpressing a purpose, when connected with Conditional sentences: 
εἰ yap ὥφελον oioire εἶναι ot πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐξεργάζεσθαι, ἵνα oloire 
ἦσαν αὖ καὶ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μέγιστα, I would that the many were capable of 
doing (to a man) the greatest evil, in order that they might also, on the 


8 552. © MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 299 


other hand, be capable of (effecting) the greatest good (instead of: for if 


they were capable, they would also be capable). The Hypothetical 
Indicative here denotes the impracticable purpose (δὲ 515, 537). 
On the Hypothetical Participle, §§ 583,595. On the Hypothetical 
Infinitive, § 575, etc. 


Mixed examples : 


Εἰ ὑπὸ φίλων ἐθέλεις ἀγαπᾶσθαι, τοὺς φίλους EVEPYETNTE ἕον, 
if you wish to be loved by your friends, you must benefit 
your friends; Εἰ τὸ ἔχειν οὕτως ὥσπερ τὸ λαμβάνειν ἡδὺ 
ἦν, πολὺ ἂν διέφερον εὐδαιμονίᾳ οἱ πλούσιοι τῶν πενήτων, 
if having were as sweet as getting, the rich would be 
greatly distinguished above the poor in blessedness ; Poet. 
Ei πᾶσι ταὐτὸ καλὸν ἔφυ σοφόν M ἅμα, οὐκ ἦν ἂν ἀμφίλεκτος 
ἀνθρώποις ἔρις, if the same things were to all beautiful 
and wise, people would have no bitter disputes; UWAarwv 
πρός τινα τῶν παίδων, μεμαστίγωσο ἄν, ἔφη, εἰ μὴ ὠργιζόμην, 
Plato said to one of his servants, you would have been 
jlogged if I were not angry; Kav μέν τι ὑμῖν δοκῶ ἀληθὲς 
λέγειν, ξυνομολογήσατε, 7f you think I utter any truth, 
agree with me; Ei πόλις ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν γένοιτο, περιμά- 
χῆτον ἂν εἴη τὸ μὴ ἄρχειν, ὥςπερ νυνὶ τὸ ἄρχειν, if there 
were a state (consisting) of good men, it would be an object 
of contention to avoid ruling (how one might not rule), 
as now to rule; Ἦν τῶν στρατιωτῶν δόγμα, εἴ τις, ὁπότε 
ἡ στρατιὰ ἐξίοι, ἰδίᾳ ληίζοιτο, δημόσια εἶναι τὰ ληφθέντα, ἐέ 
was ὦ decision of the soldiers, uf, when the arnvy went out, 
any one took boot y by hime? what he took was common 
property (direct 2 ἐὰν Anton αι---δημόσια ἔ ἐστ w). 


IV. Tot Moops 1n RELATIVE SENTENCES. 


ὃ 551. Relative sentences are those which are connected 
with others by means of Relative pronouns (S§ 213, 214, 
216) or Relative adverbs (δ 217). 


- § 552. In Relative sentences all moods are possible ia 
the same meanings as in independent or hypothetical sen- 


900 MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 553. 


tences: οὐκ ἔχω 6 τι πρῶτον λάβω, 7 have (know) not what 
I shall take first (ὃ 511, compare ὃ 527); ὁρῶ σε διώκοντα 
ὧν μὴ τύχοις, L see you pursuing what,L pray, you may 
not attain (ὃ 514); ὑμεῖς ἐστε παρ᾽ ὧν ἂν κάλλιστά τις 
τοῦτο μάθοι, you are they from whom any one might best 
learn this (ὃ 516); οὐκ ἤθελον λέγειν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοιαῦτα 
ot ἂν ὑμῖν ἥδιστ᾽ ἦν ἀκούειν, 7 did not wish to say to you 
such things as might be pleasantest to you to hear. Com- 
pare § 544. 
Obs.—Sometimes, especially in the Poets, Relative sentences have 
the Optative without ἄν in an indefinite assertion, very much 
like the potential Optative with ἄν : ὃν πόλις στήσειε, τοῦδε χρὴ 


κλύειν, whom the state may appoint, him we must listen to Geman 
§ 517, Obs, 2). 


§ 553. On the Huture Indicative in Relative sentences 
expressive of purpose, see ὃ 500. ὅπως, how, that, in or- 
der that, very frequently has the Future Indicative (yet, 
according to ὃ 531, also the Subjunctive of other tenses) — 
after verbs which denote looking after, caring for, striving, 
avoiding: σκόπει, ὕτπως τὰ πράγματα σωθήσεται, see that 
the affairs (the state) shall be safe; δεῖ ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου 
ἅπαντα ἄνδρα τοῦτο παρασκευάζεσθαι, ὕπως ὡς σοφώτατος 
ἔσται, every one ought to take care in every way to (that 
he shall) become as wise as possible. 


- Obs. —vzwe is often used in challenges and warnings in such a 
manner that the governing sentence has to be supplied : ὕπως 
παρέσει εἰς τὴν ἑσπέραν, that you shall be here for the evening (more 
completely somewhat like: σκόπει ὕπως, see that you, etc.) ; ὕπως. 
περὶ τοῦ πολέμου μηδὲν ἐρεῖς, that you shall say nothing about the 
war (supply something like: φυλάττου, take care). 


ὃ 554. The particle ἄν (Hom. κέ-ν) is added to the Rel- 
ative when the Relative sentence expresses something mere- 
ly conceived, so that the assertion contained in the leading 
sentence is true only when what is asserted in the Relative 
sentence really occurs. Such a Relative is called a Hypo- 
theiical Relative. The Hypothetical Relative with ἄν in 


§ 555. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 901 


general 15 used only where the verb in the leading sentence 
is in a principal tense, and is then accompanied by the Sud- 
junctive. Such a Relative sentence may easily be changed 
to a Hypothetical sentence of the third form (ὃ 545); πᾶν 
& τι av μέλλῃς ἐρεΐν πρότερον ἐπισκόπει TH γνώμῃ, Whatever 
you may be about to say (Ξξ ἐάν τι ἐρεῖν μέλλῃς), examine 
it first in your mind; in which it is left quite undecided 
whether one wishes to say any thing; ἕπεσθε ὅπῃ av τις 
ἡγῆται, follow wherever any one may lead you (ΞΞ ἐάν τίς 
πῃ ἡγῆται). Where you must first wait to know whether any 
one leads. 


Obs. 1.—As the Relative is generalized by the addition of ἄν, it 
may often in English be translated by ever (Lat. ewnque): ὃς ἂν 
τούτων τι δρᾷ τεθνάτω, guicunque horum aliquid fecerit, perito ; 
λέγε ὕσ᾽ ἂν θέλῃς, say whatever you wish (compare ἐάν τι θέλῃς 
λέγε). 

Obs. 2.—In the same sense the Poets use the Subjunctive with a 
Relative without ἄν (or ké-v)}: τῶν δὲ πημονῶν μάλιστα λυποῦσ᾽ αἱ 
φανῶσ᾽ αὐθαίρετοι, the sufferings afflict most which appear self-caused 
(compare εἰ with the Subj., § 545, Obs. 2). Homer has also the 
Fut. Ind. with κέ and the Relative (δ 500, Ods.). 


ἃ 555. If the verb in the leading sentence is an //¢s- 
torical tense or an Optative, the Relative without av with 
the Optative is used, quite in the same sense, as a sub- 
stitute for the Subjunctive ($$ 522,523). These Relative 
sentences take the place of those mentioned in ὃ 554, in 
the same way as the fourth kind of Conditional sentences 
takes the place of the third (ὃ 548): ἐκέλευσεν αὐτοῖς ἕπε- 
σθαι, ὅποι τις ἡγοῖτο, he bade them follow wherever any 
one might lead. Thus we read in Homer: ὅν δέ κ᾽ ἐγὼν 
ἀπάνευθε μάχης ἐθέλοντα νοήσω μιμνάζειν, ov οἱ ἔπειτα ap- 
κιον ἐσσεῖται φυγέειν κύνας ἠδ᾽ οἰωνούς, but whomsoever I 
may see inclined to remain away from the battle, to him 
there shall be no security of escaping dogs and birds (4. é., 
death), but: ὅντινα piv βασιλῆα καὶ ἔξοχον ἄνδρα κιχείη, 
τὸν δ᾽ ἀγανοῖς ἐπέεσσιν ἐρητύσασκε, but whatever (where a) 
king or prominent man he might meet with, him he 


802 MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. ᾧ 556. 


soothed with gentle words.. Hom. ὡς ἀπόλοιτο καὶ ἄλλος 
ὕ τις τοιαῦτά γε ῥέζοι, so may any other perish who shall 


do such things (but ὃς ἂν ῥέζῃ---ἀπολέσθω). 


Obs. 1.—This Optative often implies repetition: Gyrwa κιχείη, as 
often as he might find one (δ 547). 


Obs. 2.—The Subjunctive and the Relative with ἄν occur only ex- 
ceptionally after an Historical tense, and the Optative with the 
Relative and ἄν, in the same case (compare ὃ 546, Obds.). 


V. Ture Moops 1n TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 


ὃ 556. Temporal Sentences, 2. ¢., those which indicate | 


time, are properly only a particular kind of Relative sen- 
tences, and follow them almost entirely in the use of the 
Moods. ‘The particles of time employed in such sentences 
are: ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὡς (when, after, as); ὅτε, ὁπότε, ἡνίκα, 
when, as; ἕως, ἔςτε, μέχρι-ς, till; πρίν, before; in Hom. 


ὄφρα, as long as, till; ἦμος, when, and besides the Rela- . 


tive expressions: ἀφ᾽ ov, ἐξ ov, since; ἐν w, whilst; ἄχρι 
ov, εἰς 0, wntil. 

In these sentences the /ndicatwe is used when any 
thing actual is stated; the Optative may supply the place 
of the Indicative in indirect speech after an Historical tense 


(8 522). 


§ 557. When a Temporal sentence states something mere- 
ly conceived, occurring only conditionally, the particle of 
time, like the Relative, has ἄν (xé-v) joied to it (δ 554). 
This occurs usually only when the leading sentence has 
a principal tense, and the Subjunctive must then follow. 
By combination with ἄν are formed the Hypothetical par- 
ticles of time: ὅταν, ὁπόταν, ἐπεάν OY ἐπήν, ἐπειδάν : ἐπει- 
day πάντα ἀκούσητε, κρίνατε, when ye have heard all, judge ; 
Ewe ἂν σώζηται TO σκάφος, τότε χρὴ Kal ναύτην Kal κυβερνή- 
THY καὶ πάντ᾽ ἄνδρα προθύμους εἶναι, as long as the vessel is 
867, the sailor, the pilot, and every one ought to be zealous. 


0bs.—Here also ἄν is sometimes wanting (δ 554, Obs. 2). 


§ 558. MOODS IN TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 303 


§ 558. If the leading verb is in an Historical tense, the 
particle of time with the Optative without av occurs in the 
same sense: ἔλεγεν ὅτι, ἐπειδὴ πάντα ἀκούσειαν, κρίνειαν. 

Obs. 1.—Here, too, the Optative often implies repetition (compare 

§ 554, Obs., and ὃ 547), so that Gre, ὁπότε, ἐπεί, with the Optative, 

may be translated by “‘as often as,” “whenever :” ὁπότε οἱ “EX- 

Ayveg τοῖς πολεμίοις ἐπίοιεν, Padiwe ἀπέφευγον, as often as the Hel- 

lenes went up to the enemy, the latter readily fled. 

bs. 2.—Here, too, exceptionally, ἄν and the Subjunctive sometimes 
Οὐδ. 2.—Here, too, ptionally, 1 the Subjunct t 


occur after an Historical tense (§ 555, Οὐδ. 2). 
On πρίν with the Infinitive, ὃ 565. 


Mixed Examples of LRelutive and Temporal Sentences. 

€ ~ 7 Me ~ - 2)» Ὁ nN cw 

Ὑμεῖς TAaAVTaA λογισάμενοι ταυτα χειροτονεῖθ᾽, O τι GY υμιν 
δοκῇ μάλιστα συμφέρειν τῇ πόλει, after having weighed all 
this, vote for what you think will most benefit the state ; 
Oi τῶν βαρβάρων ἱππεῖς, ᾧτινι ἐντυγχάνοιεν Ἕλληνι, πάντας 
v , 7 . 
ἔκτεινον, the cavalry of the barbarians, whatever Greek they 
met, killed them all; Μέχρις ἂν ἐγὼ ἥκω, at σπονδαὶ μενόν- 
των, tell 7 come, let the treaty remain; Poet. Μήποτ᾽ ἐπαι- 

Fd é Ν Ἃ “ΕΒ οὐ OF ~ > Ν Ν ς Ν Ν 
νήῆσῃς, πρὶν ἂν εἰδῇς ἄνδρα σαφηνῶς, opynv και ῥυθμὸν καὶ 
τρύπον ὅστις ἂν 4, never praise a man before you clearly 
know his temper, and bearing, and character ; ᾿Ἐπειδή τι 
ἐμφάγοιεν, ἀνίσταντο καὶ ἐπορεύοντο, after having eaten 
something, they rose and proceeded; Ὃ Σωκράτης τοὺς 
συνόντας ἐποίει, ov μόνον ὑπότε ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ὁρῷντο, 
ἀπίέ 4 on AOL ἂν ἃς > co AAAG Pn ΚΑ cane, | > , 

χεσ αἱ των αοἰκῶν καὶ αισχρων, a α και OTTOTE EV ἐρημίᾳ 

τ . , . . 
εἶεν, Socrates caused his disciples to abstain from what 
was unjust and shameful, not only when they were seen by 
men, but also when they were in solitude. 


904 THE INFINITIVE. g 559. 


Cuap, XXII.—Tue INFInivive. 
A) The use of the Infinite generally. 
§ 559. 1. The Infinitive is a verdal noun (§ 225, 5) which, 


as such, has certain properties in common with a verb, oth- 
ers with a noun. 

With a nown the Infinitive agrees 

@) in expressing the action of a verb in general, like the 
nomina actionis (ὃ 342): ποιεῖν, πράττειν, doing ; compare 
ποίησις, πρᾶξις. 

6) in the fact that it may have the article like nouns: τὸ 
ποιεῖν, TO πράττειν, the doing ; compare ἡ ποίησις, ἡ πρᾶξις. 
With the verb, on the other hand, the Infinitive agrees 

a) in its power of denoting different tzmes + ποιεῖν, ποι- 
jioat, πεποιηκέναι, and of being formed from the Active, the 
Middle, and the Passive: ποιῆσαι: ποιήσασθαι, ποιηθῆναι. 

6) in being occasionally joined with ἄν, and thereby shar- 
ing the functions of mood (ὃ 575, ete.). 

6) ἴῃ goveraing the same case as the verb to which it 
belongs: ποιεῖν τὰ δέοντα, doing your duty; χρῆσθαι τοῖς 
ὅπλοις, making use of arms. 

αἰ τὰ being qualified, like the finite verb, by adverbs, 
never by adjectives: καλῶς πράττειν, doing nobly, but καλὴ 
πρᾶξις, a noble action. | 

2.The Infinitive is used very extensively in Greek. 
Very often, besides the more definite mode of expression, 
by means of a Conjunction with a finite verb, the less def- 
inite, by means of the Infinitive, is admissible. 


§ 560. The Infinitive serves to complete and qualify dif- 
ferent sorts of verbs, viz. : 


1. those which express the occasion, capability, modality 
of an action: δύνανται ἀπελθεῖν, they can go away; μεῖζόν 


§ 562. THE INFINITIVE. 305 


τι ἔγχει εἰπεῖν, he has something greater to say (can say); 
Poet. οὔτοι συνέχθειν ἀλλὰ συμφιλεῖν ἔφυν, 7 am born not 
to join in hating but im loving; ἄρχομαι λέγειν, 7 begin 
to speak ; ἐπιτρέπω σοι ποιεῖν ὃ τι ἂν βούλῃ, L leave you to 
do whatever you wish ; 

2. such verbs as denote appearance, perception, opinion: 
δοκεῖς ἁμαρτεῖν, you scem to have erred ; 

8. such verbs as denote striving after something, impel- 
ling toward, or frightening, deterring, preventing some- 
thing: μὴ σπεῦδε πλουτεῖν, do not hasten to be rich ; Hom. 
κέλεαί pe μυθήσασθαι, you bid me to speak ; πάντες at- 
τοῦνται τοὺς θεοὺς τὰ φαῦλα ἀποτρέπειν, omnes homines 
precantur deos, ut mala avertant ; φοβοῦμαι διελέγχειν σε, 
Lam afraid of refuting you; ἔλεγόν σοι μὴ γαμεῖν, dixd 
tibi, ne uxorem duceres ; τίς αὐτὸν κωλύσει δεῦρο βαδίζειν 3 
quis eum impediet, quominus huc veniat? avefsadrer6 μοι 
διαλεχθῆναι, he put off conversing with me. 


§ 561. Even the purpose of an action may be expressed 
by the mere Infinitive, as in English by the Infinitive with 
to or in order to: Ξενοφῶν τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ στρατεύματος 
κατέλιπε φυλάττειν τὸ στρατόπεδον, Aenophon left half the 
army behind to quard the camp ; wapéyw ἐμαυτὸν τῷ ἰατρῷ 
τέμνειν καὶ καίειν, 7 give myself up to the physician to cut 
and burn (me); πιεῖν διδόναι τινί, to give any one (some- 
# thing) to drink. 


Obs.—Not only with verbs of this kind, but also with those men- 
tioned in ὃ 560, this Infinitive has a much wider application in — 
Homer: ἀριστεύεσκε μάχεσθαι, he used to be the first in fighting ; εἰσὶ 
καὶ οἵδε τάδ᾽ εἰπέμεν, these too, then, are (able) to say this; βὴ ἰέναι, 
he started to go; ξυνξηκε μάχεσθαι, he urged (them) to fight. 


§ 562. The Infinitive serves to complete or qualify ad- 
jectives of different kinds, partly in the sense of the En- 
glish Infinitive with to, partly corresponding to the Latin 
supine in τ“ χαλεπὸν εὑρεῖν, difficult to find | difficile in- 
ventu|; οἰκία ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι, a house very pleasant to 


ἄν <2 


« 


πὰ! ὙΦ ΣΟ ΤΙ χὰ 


806 THE INFINITIVE. § 563. 


live in; ἄξιός ἐστι πληγὰς λαβεῖν, he deserves to get blows ; 
ὀξύτατοί ἐστε γνῶναι τὰ ῥηθέντα, you are very keen in per 
ceiving what is said; δεινὸς λέγειν, powerful in speak- 
ings ὃ χρόνος βραχὺς ἀξίως διηγήσασθαι τὰ πραχθέντα, 
the time is short for worthily narrating what has hap- 
pened. 

O0vs.—In Homer such Infinitives are particularly frequent: μέγα rai 
ἐσσομένοισι πυθέσθαι, great also for posterity to learn; θείειν ἀνέμοι- 
ow boro, like the winds in running ; so with some substantives : 
θαῦμα ἰδέσθαι, a wonder to 866. 

On οἷος, oidcre, and ὅσος, With the Inf, ὃ 601. 

§ 563. The Infinitive, as in English and Latin, is used 
as the Suwdject of a sentence to which the predicate is a 
neuter adjective, a substantive, or an intransitive verb: 
πᾶσιν ἁδεῖν χαλεπόν, to please all ἐδ difficult; κίνδυνός 
ἐστιν ἡττᾶσθαι, there is danger of being worsted ; σὸν ἔργον 
λέγειν, speaking 7s your business. 


§ 564. The Infinitive is used in a freer way, without depending on 


a particular word, with and without the particle ὡς, in several phrases 
almost like a free Accusatiyse (ὃ 404): we εἰπεῖν, so to speak ; ἐμοὶ do- 
κεῖν͵ a8 seems to me; ὀλίγου δεῖν, almost ; τὸ νῦν εἶναι, for the present ; 
κατὰ τοῦτο εἶναι, in this respect. 

On ἑκὼν εἶναι, § 570, Obs. 

§ 565. The Conjunctions ὥστε, so that; πρίν, before, and 
its Homeric synonym πάρος, are joined with the Infinitive: 
Φιλομαθέστατος ἦν 6 Κῦρος, ὥστε πάντα πόνον ἀνατλῆναι τοῦ 
ἐπαινεῖσθαι ἕνεκα, Cyrus was very fond of learning, so as to 
endure any trouble for the sake of being praised , πρὶν τὴν 
ἀρχὴν ὀρθῶς ὑποθέσθαι, μάταιον ἡγοῦμαι περὶ τῆς τελευτῆς 
ὁντινοῦν ποιεῖσθαι λόγον, before properly establishing the 
Joundation, [ deen it useless to make any words whatever 
about the end. 

Obs. 1.—These conjunctions may also be joined with the finite yerb 
‘(compare ὃ 556); ὥστε with the indicative represents a sentence 
as an actual consequence more independent and by itself, and 
may accordingly be often translated by therefore, hence: εἰς τὴν 
ὑστεραίαν οὐχ ἧκεν, ὥςθ᾽ οἱ Ἕλληνες ἐφρόντιζον, he came not on the 
following day, therefore the Hellenes became anxious, 


§ 567. THE INFINITIVE. 507 


Obs. 2.—For πρίν we also find πρὶν ἤ, prius-quam; properly πρίν, 
when it means sooner than, is always to be regarded as an abbre- 
viation for πρὶν ἤ, πρίν originally answering entirely to the Latin 
prius. On the Infinitive after 7}, than, see the following ἃ. 


On ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, on condition that, with the Infin., ὃ 601. 


ὃ 566. After a comparative, the Infinitive is preceded by ἢ ὥστε or 
# alone in the sense of than that: φοβοῦμαι μή τι μεῖζον ἢ ὥςτε φέρειν 
δύνασθαι κακὸν τῇ πόλει συμβῇ, I fear lest too great an evil should befall 
the state for it to be able to bear (greater than that it should be able). 


On the Genitive of the Infinitive with the Article, which also is 
possible here, ὃ 574, 3, Obs. 


B) The case of the Subject and Predicate with the 
Infinitive. 

§ 567. The Subject of the Infinitive is that word from 
which the action of the verb in the Infinitive proceeds. 
When the Subject is to be expressed with the Infinitive, it 
appears: 

1. mosé generally, as in Latin, in the Accusative, which 
gives rise to the construction of the Accusative with the 
Infinitive: ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον νικῆσαι, nuntiabant Cy- 
rum vicisse. ‘The use of the Accusative with the Infin- 
itive, like that of the Infinitive alone (ὃ 559, etc.), is more 
common in Greek than in Latin. Not only can the sub- 
stance of a statement or perception—which, however, may 
be also expressed in one of the forms discussed, § 525, 
etc.—be given in this construction, but also the effect and 
consequence of an action. Hence the Accusative with 
the Infinitive also occurs after verbs of happening, and is 
admissible after verbs of commanding, demanding, forbid- 
ding: πάντες ὁμολογοῦσι τὴν ὁμόνοιαν μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν si- 
ναι, all agree that concord is ὦ very great good, συνέβη 
μηδένα tay στρατηγῶν παρεῖναι, ἐξ happened that none of 
the generals was present; ἔγραψα ἀποπλεῖν τὴν ταχίστην 
τοὺς πρέσβεις, proposur ut quam cclerrime legati proficis- 
cerentur. 


308 THE INFINITIVE. § 568. 


The Accusative with the Infinitive is properly dependent on the 
verb of the leading sentence (compare the English: I hear you 
sing, I bid you go), and is explained by the prolepsis mentioned 
in ὃ 519, 5, Obs. 2. Instead of ἤγγειλαν ὅτι ὁ Κῦρος ἐνίκησεν, we 
might have: ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον bre ἐνίκησεν ; and for ὅτι ἐνίκησεν, 
γικῆσαι, according to ὃ 560, 2; thus we obtain ἤγγειλαν τὸν Κῦρον 
νικῆσαι. If the governing verb is intransitive or passive, the Ac- 
cusative is of a freer kind (ὃ 404): ἐλπίς ἐστι πάντα καλῶς ἔχειν, 
there is hope that all is well. 

Obs. 1.—The impersonal verbs δεῖ and χρή, it is necessary, are joined 
with the Accusative and Infinitive like the Latin oportet: χρὴ 
τολμᾶν χαλεποῖσιν ἐν ἄλγεσι κείμενον ἄνδρα, the man that lies in 
painful sufferings ought to be courageous, 

Obs. 2.—As a continuation of an Accusative with the Infinitive, 
the same construction may be employed in indirect speech in 
Relative sentences and after Conjunctions, denoting time and 
circumstances: τοιαῦτ᾽ ἄττα σφᾶς ἔφη διαλεχθέντας ἰέναι" ἐπεὶ δὲ 
γενέσθαι ἐπὶ τῇ οἰκίᾳ τῇ ᾿Αγάθωνος, ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβάνειν τὴν 
θύραν, he said that after such conversation they went ; but that, when 
they reached Agathon’s house, they found the door open. 


§ 568. 2. A Predicate referring to such a Subject must 
necessarily be in the Accusative: τὸν ἄδικον καὶ πονηρὸν 
ἄνδρα φημὶ ἄθλιον εἶναι, 1 maintain that the unjust and 
bad man is meserable. 

Not unfrequently a Predicative expression requires an 
indefinite Subject (τινά) to be supplied: τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔξεστι 
(τινα) μετρήσαντα καὶ ἀριθμήσαντα εἰδέναι, one may know 
such things by measuring and counting. 


§ 569. 3. When the Subject of an Infinitive is tha same 
as that of the leading sentence, it is usually not expressed 
at all: νομίζω νενικηκέναι, puto me vicisse, L think I have 
conquered , ἐλπίζεις τεύξεσθαι ὧν ἂν δέῃ, you hope to obtain 
what you need; ὑπέσχετο παρέσεσθαι εἰς τὴν ἑσπέραν, »70- 
γγυϊδὲέ se affuturum ad vesperam. 

Obs.—For greater emphasis, especially when opposition to some- 
thing else is to be expressed, the subject may be added, and that 
either in the Accusative or Nominative: Herod. οἱ Αἰγύπτιοι ἐνό- 
μιζον ἑωυτοὺς πρώτους γενέσθαι ἀνθρώπων, the Egyptians thought 
that they jirst of all men came into caxistence; εἰ οἴεσθε Χαλκιδέας 
ἢ Μεγαρέας τὴν Ἑλλάδα σώσειν, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἀποδράσεσθαι τὰ πράγματα, 


’ A 
ae 


§ 571. THE INFINITIVE. 309 


οὐκ ὀρθῶς οἴεσθε, if you think the Chaleidians and Megarians will 
save Greece, but you escape from trouble, you are mistaken. 


§ 570. 4. Predicative qualifications referring to the Prin- 
cipal Subject are in the Wominative: ὃ ᾿Αλέξανδρος ἔφα- 
Ξ- Ν ἘΠ 9 . . 
σκεν εἶναι Διὸς vide, Alexander dicebat se esse Jovis filium ; 

5) Ν > ¢ , ” e 2 ws ¢ \ ~ x , 
εγὼ οὐκ ὁμολογήσω ἄκλητος ἥκειν, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ σοῦ KEK ημένος, 
7 will not acknowledge that [ am come uninvited, but in- 
vited by you; οἱ δοκοῦντες σοφοὶ εἶναι, they who seem to be 
WISE. 


- Obs.—From the Predicate, ἑκών, joining the freer Infinitive, εἶναι 
(ὃ 564), arises the combination ἑκὼν εἶναι: τοῦτο ἑκὼν εἶναι ov 
ποιήσω, this (if I am) to be of free will I will not do. 


§ 571. 5. In many cases a personal instead of an wn- 
personal form of expression is used in Greek, the Subject 
of the Infinitive being made the Subject of the leading 
sentence; so, instead of the English “it was announced 
that Cyrus had conquered” (ἠγγέλθη τὸν Κῦρον νικῆσαι), 
we have, 6 Κῦρος ἠγγέλθη νικῆσαι, Cyrus was announced 
to have conquered. This form of expression occurs not 
only—as in Latin with dicitur, videtur—with δοκεῖ, ἔοικε, 
it seems λέγεται | dicitur, traditur]; ἀγγέλλεται, Ut ts an- 
nounced ; ὁμολογεῖται, τέ is agreed, but also with συμβαί- 
νει, it happens, and with several adjectives with εἰμί, as: 
δίκαιος, just ; ἐπιτήδειος, ἐπικαίριος, fitting ; ἐπίδοξος, prob- 
able; avaykaioc, necessary ; αὐτός μοι δοκῶ ἐνθάδε κατα- 
μενεῖν, tt appears to me that I myself shall remain here ; 
δίκαιος εἶ ἄγειν ἀνθρώπους, tt ts just that you should lead 
men (you are justified in leading men); ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι τὸ 
αὐτὸ πείσεσθαι, zt 18. to be expected that they will suffer the 
same; Poet. πρέπων ἔφυς πρὸ τῶνδε φωνεῖν, ἐξ becomes you 
to speak in their presence. 

The personal construction is explained, like that of the 
Accusative with the Infinitive (δ 567), by prolepsis (ὃ 519, 
5, Obs. 2). For ἠγγέλθη ὅτι ὃ Κῦρος ἐνίκησε there might 
be ἠγγέλθη ὁ Κῦρος ὅτι ἐνίκησε, and for this again ἠγγέλθη 


4 EA ΡΟ a 
* Ν "ἘΜῈ ὦ» 
τὴς 


910 THE INFINITIVE. § 572. 


~ ’ / 4 ’ A 
6 Κῦρος νικῆσαι; for ἐπίδοξόν ἐστιν ὅτι τὸ αὐτὸ πείσονται--- 
ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι ὅτι τὸ αὐτὸ πείσονται, and hence ἐπίδοξοί εἰσι 
5 Ν 
τὸ αὐτὸ πείσεσθαι. 
Obs.—The Accusative construction, however, is almost every where 
applicable: λέγεται τὸν Κῦρον νικῆσαι, dicunt Cyrum vicisse. 


§ 572. 6. Predicative qualifications referring to a Gen- 
ative or Dative may be in these cases: ἦλθον ἐπί τινα 
τῶν δοκούντων σοφῶν εἶναι, L came to one of those who 
scem to be wise; ἔλεγον τοῖς δοκοῦσι σοφοῖς εἶναι, L said 
to those, etc.; Κύρου ἐδέοντο we προθυμοτάτου γενέσθαι, 
they begged Cyrus to be as ready as possible; παντὶ ap- 
χοντι mpochKer φρονίμῳ εἶναι, 7 becomes every ruler to be 
Judicvous. 

Still the Predicate is often in the Accusative: συμφέρει αὐτοῖς φίλους 


εἶναι μᾶλλον ἢ πολεμίους, it is to their advantage rather to be friends 
than enemies, | 


C) The Infinitive with the Article. 


§ 573. The Substantive nature of the Infinitive is made 
more manifest by prefixing the Article. Yet the Infinitive 
with the Article must nevertheless have a noun in the case 
required by the verb to which the Infinitive belongs: τὸ 
τὰς ἡδονὰς φεύγειν, the shunning of pleasures; the Infin- 
itive in this case also is qualified by adverbs: τὸ καλῶς ζῆν, 
living rightly. 

The rules given δὲ 567-572 for the case of the Subject 
and Predicate are applicable also to the Infinitive with 
the Article. . Thus the Accusative with the Infinitive is 
often preceded by the Article: τὸ προειδέναι τὸν θεὸν τὸ 
μέλλον καὶ τὸ προσημαίνειν ᾧ βούλεται, καὶ τοῦτο πάντες 
καὶ λέγουσι καὶ νομίζουσι, God’s foreknowing the future 
and pointing it out beforehand to whom he will, all assert 
and belveve. | 


§ 574. By having the Article prefixed the Infinitive be- 
comes declinadle, and thus answers to the Latin Gerund. 


§ 574. THE INFINITIVE. 911 


1. Nominative: 3 | 
Poet. τὸ φρονεῖν εὐδαιμονίας πρῶτον ὑπάρχει, to be thought- 
Jul ἐδ the first step to happiness ; τὸ ἁμαρτάνειν ἀνθρώπους 
ὄντας οὐδὲν θαυμαστόν, that those should commit errors who 
are human is nothing surprising. 


2. Accusative : 

αὐτὸ τὸ ἀποθνήσκειν οὐδεὶς φοβεῖται, dying itself no one 
dreads. Especially to be noticed is the Accusative with 
the Prepositions εἰς, κατά, in reference to; διά, on accouns 
of, because; πρός, ἐπί, besides: Κῦρος dia τὸ φιλομαθὴς 
(Nominative according to § 570) εἶναι πολλὰ τοὺς παρόντας 
ἀνηρώτα, Cyrus, through being eager for knowledge, asked 
those present about many things; πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσθαι 
καλῶς πεπαίδευμαι, [have been well trained to require what 
as moderate. 

Obs.—This Accusative of the Infinitive with the Article has some- 
times a freer connection with a verb or adjective after the man- 
ner of the freer Accusative (ὃ 404): οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι ἀνέλπιστοί 
εἶσι τὸ ἐς τὴν γῆν ἡμῶν ἐσβάλλειν, the Peloponnesians have no hope in 
regard to invading our country. 

3. Genitive: 7 

ἐπιθυμία τοῦ πιεῖν, desiderium bibendi ; τὸ εὖ πράττειν παρὰ 
τὴν ἀξίαν ἀφορμὴ τοῦ κακῶς φρονεῖν τοῖς ἀνοήτοις γίγνεται, 
prosperity without merit 1s an occasion to fools of base 
sentiments ; ἐμοὶ οὐδὲν πρεσ[ϑύτερον τοῦ ὅτι βέλτιστον ἐμὲ 
γενέσθαι (ὃ 416), nothing 7s more important to me than 
my becoming as good as possible. Especially to be noticed 
is the Genitive with the prepositions ἐκ, from, πρό, be- 
fore; ἕνεκα, because, on account of; ὑπέρ, for, for the sake 
of, in order to; διά, by, through; ἄνευ, without; ot av- 
θρωποι πάντα ποιοῦσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ δοῦναι δίκην, people do 
every thing in order not to suffer punishment. 
Obs.—Purpose is often expressed by the Genitive of the Infinitive 
eyen withcut a preposition: τοῦ μὴ διαφεύγειν τὸν λαγὼν ἐκ τῶν 
δικτύων σκοποὺς καθίσταμεν, we place scouts that the hare may not 


escape from the nets.. (Compare the rare use of the Lat. Genitive 
of the Gerundive: arma cepit opprimunde libertatis.) 


512 THE INFINITIVE. § 575. 


4. Dative. ) 
The Dative is especially frequent to express enstrumen- 
tality (§ 438); it is then, like the Latin Ablative of the 
Gerund, to be translated, by: Φίλιππος κεκράτηκε τῷ πρό- 
τερος (ὃ 570) πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους ἰέναι, Philip has gained 
the victory by going jirst against the enemy | compare the 
Latin docendo discumus|, also with the prepositions ἐν, 
in; ἐπί, on, on condition that; πρός, besides, and others: 
πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας λαβεῖν Tove αἰχμαλώτους 
ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων ἐλυσάμην, besides gaining nothing from the 
embassy, I set free the captives at my own expense. 


D) The Infinitive with av. 


§ 575. By the addition of av the Infinitive acquires a 
potential or hypothetical meaning, and denotes therefore 
either that something only mzght happen, or that under 
certain circumstances something would happen or would — 
have happened. ere two cases are possible: 

1. the Infinitive with ἄν can be replaced by the Optative 
with av: μάλιστα οἶμαι ἂν cov πυθέσθαι (πυθοίμην av), 7 
think I could learn wt best from you; δοκεῖτέ μοι πολὺ 
βέλτιον ἢ αν πὲ ερὶ τοῦ πολέμου βουλεύσασθαι (βᾶτιον ἃ av Pov-_ 
λεύσαισθε), εἰ τὸν τόπον τῆς χώρας πρὸς ἣν τολεμεῖτε ἐ εἐν- 
θυμηθείητε, ἐξ seems to me you would much better setile 
about the war, if you took into account the localities of 
the country against which you are making war. 


This Infinitive with ἄν therefore answers either to the Potential 
Optative (§ 516), or to the apodosis of a Hypothetical Period of 
the fourth form (ὃ 546). 


ὃ 576. 2. The place of an Infinitive with ἄν can be sup- 
plied by the Hypothetical Indicative with av: Κῦρος εἰ 
ἐβίωσεν, ἄριστος ἂν δοκεῖ ἄρχων γενέσθαι (ἄριστος ἂν ἐγέ- 
veto), af Cyrus had lived, ἐξ seems he would have become 
One of the best ofr ulers τ τοὺς ταῦτα ἀγνοοῦντας Σωκράτης 
ἀνδραποδώδε ot a ἂν κεκλῆσθαι ἡγεῖτο (ct TLVEC ταῦτα ἢ γνόουν, 


8 578. THE PARTICIPLES. 313 


ἐκέκληντο ἂν ἀνδραποδώδεις). Socrates thought that, if any 
did not know this, they would be called slavish. 
This Infinitive with ἄν thus answers to the apodosis of a Hypo- 
thetical Period of the second form (§ 537, etc.). 


Obs.—The context must show into which of the two forms the 
Infinitive with dy is to be resolved. 


E) The Infinitive instead of the Imperative, 

§ 577, belongs almost entirely to poetry; it is used for 
the second, and rarely for the third person. The Sulject 
and Predicate are in the Vominative: Hom. θαρσῶν νῦν, 
Διόμηδες, ἐπὶ Τρώεσσι μάχεσθαι, courageously now, Dio- 
mede » Ju ght agaist the Trojans; παῖδα δ᾽ ἐμοὶ λῦσαί τε 
φίλην τά τ᾽ ἄποινα δέχεσθαι, deliver up to me my Reid 


and accept the ransom. af 
ye 


a ES 
"pm Leemark. Hie 


A Participle, like the Infinitive (ὃ 559, 1), on , “ἢ 
noun (§ 220, 5). It has the same things in page \ A 
the verb as the Infinitive, the same points also in common 
with the noun; but it is distinguished from the Infinitive 
inasmuch as the latter resembles a nomen actionis, whereas 
the Participle has the nature of an adjective. 


A) Their Attributive Use. 

§ 578. A Participle, corresponding to an adjective or to 
a relative sentence, is joined to a substantive, to ascribe to 
it a permanent quality: πόλις εὐρείας ἀγυιὰς ἔχουσα, 2. ὁ. 
Hom. εὐρυάγυια or ἣ εὐρείας ἀγυιὰς ἔχει, @ city having 
broad streets; ai καλούμεναι Αἰόλου νῆσοι, the so-called 
islands of olus; ὃ παρὼν καιρός, the present opportu- 
nity (compare § 361, 11). 

O 


* “ἦν rs ΗΝ 


314 THE PARTICIPLES, § 579. 


Obs.—Like an adjective, the Participle also becomes a substantive 
by having the article prefixed: οἱ παρόντες, those present (com- 
pare ὃ 379): ὁ τυχών, the first comer. Such participles may often 
be translated by substantives: ὁ δράσας, the doer; οἱ λέγοντες, the 
speakers ; τὸ συμφέρον, the advantage; ra δέοντα, the duty ; πρὸς τὸ 
τελευταῖον (δ 361, 8) ἐκβὰν ἕκαστον τῶν πρὶν ὑπαρξάντων κρίνεται, 
every thing that happened before is judged of in accordance with its 
Jinal result. 


On the peculiar use of the Fut. Part. with the Article, § 500. 


B) Ther Appositive Use. 
§ 579. The Participle serves to ascribe to a substantive 
a merely transient quality or activity. In this case the 
Participle is a shorter and less definite mode of expression 
for what is otherwise expressed by subordinate clauses with 
conjunctions of the most different kinds (compare § 583, 
Obs.). 


A Participle used in this way is: 


ἢ 580. 1. Temporal, 

with the distinctions of time mentioned in Chap. XX. (esp. 
δ 496): προςέχετε τούτοις ἀναγιγνωσκομένοις τὸν νοῦν, GWE 
attention to this while being read ; Hom. ὡς ἄρα φωνῆσας 
ἀπεβήσετο-- ἐπεὶ ὃς ἐφώνησε, after having thus spoken he 
went away. Observe especially ἔχων and φέρων in deserip- 
tions, which may frequently be translated by the English 
with + rac vave ἀπέστειλαν ἔχοντα ᾿Αλκίδαν, they sent away 
Alcidas with (having) the ships; χρώμενος, im a similar 
sense: πολλῇ τέχνῃ χρώμενος, with (using) much skill. 
So, also, ἀρχόμενος, at first , τελευτῶν, at last; διαλιπὼν 
χρόνον, after a time; εὖ ποιῶν, fortunately ; καλῶς ποιῶν, 
Justl y.' The Participle ὦ ὧν can not be omitted when being 
is to be ascribed to a substantive: ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἔτι παῖς ὧν 
ἐθαυμάζετο, while yet a boy (Lat., merely pwer) Alcibiades 
was admired (§ 428, Obs.). 


§ 581. 2. Causal and final, 
where the Participle is to be resolved by since, by or by 


OS eel? i 
ati ers 


§ 583. THE PARTICIPLES. 315 


the fuct that, when referring to the present or past, and by 
that, in order that, when referring to the future: οὐκ ἔστιν 
ἀδύλοθύτ τα δύναμιν βεβαίαν κτήσασθαι, γην power ἐδ not 
to be gained by acting unjustly; τὸν ἀδικοῦντα παρὰ τοὺς 
δικαστὰς ἄγειν δεῖ δίκην δώσοντα, he who acts unjustly ought 
to be brought before the judges in order that he may suffer 
punishment. 


§ 582. 3. Concessive, 


a somewhat rarer use: τὸ ὕδωρ εὐωνότατον ἄριστον ὦν, water is the 
cheapest though it is the best ; ὑμεῖς ὑφορώμενοι τὰ πεπραγμένα Kai 
δυσχεραίνοντες ἤγετε τὴν εἰρήνην ὅμως, though suspicious of what had 
been done, and indignant, you still maintained the peace. 


§ 583. 4. Hypothetical, 

a very frequent use, where the Participle is to be resolved 
by 7 and corresponds to one of the forms of the Hypo- 
thetical Protaseis mentioned in ὃ 534, etc.: τοὺς φίλους 
εὐεργετοῦντες καὶ τοὺς ἐχθροὺς δυνήσεσθε κολάζειν, tf you 
benefit your friends you will be able also to punish your 
enemies (24v); also with the article: ὃ μὴ δαρεὶς ἄνθρωπος 
ov παιδεύεται, ὦ person is not educated if he has not been 
beaten. Such a Participle with μή may often be translated 
by without : οὐκ ἔστιν ἄρχειν μὴ διδόντα μισθόν, @ man can 
not rule without guimg pay. 


Obs.—With the varied use of the Appositive Participles, it must 
not be overlooked that such a Participle of itself does not clear- 
ly express any of the meanings developed in §§ 580-583, but 
that we make use of the one or the other turn in translating 
only in order to express in a more precise way what is simply 
suggested by the Participle. Hence there are many transitions 
between these meanings, especially between the Temporal and 
Causal, but also between the Temporal and Hypothetical mean- 
ings, just as in Latin sentences introduced by quum: πάντα ταῦτα 
συνιδόντας ἅπαντας (ὑμᾶς) δεῖ βοηθεῖν, it becomes every one of you, 
when you have considered all these things, to render help; νομίζω 
ἄμεινον ἂν ὑμᾶς oe ὧν νῦν ἐρῶ κρῖναι, μικρὰ τῶν πρότερόν ποτε 
ῥηθέντων Ἷ μνημονεύσαντας, I think you would better judge about what 
Tam now going to say, when you remember a little what was said 
before. 


316 THE PARTICIPLES. § 584, 


C) The Participle with an Absolute Case. 


§ 584. The Participle with a noun or pronoun in the Absolute 
Genitive (§ 428) or Accusative serves to point out the circumstances 
mentioned in §§ 579-583. The noun or pronoun to which the Par- 
ticiple refers may be regarded as its subject, since from it proceeds 
the action expressed by the Participle. This construction, therefore, 
may be resolved by a separate clause, beginning with a conjunction, 
in which the word in the Genitive or Accusative must appear in the 
Nominative: τούτων ἀναγιγνωσκομένων τὸν νοῦν προςέχετε, attend while 
this is being read (compare § 580). 

1. The Absolute Genitive (compare § 428), 
for which may be substituted clauses with temporal, causal, 
concessive, or hypothetical conjunctions: Περικλέους ἡγου- 
μένου πολλὰ καὶ καλὰ ἔργα ἀπεδείξαντο οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, as long 
as Pericles led them (Pericle duce), the Athenians pro- 
duced many and splendid works ; ναυμαχίας γενομένης 
τέτταρας τριήρεις λαμβάνει Γοργώπας, navalt pugna facta 
Gorgopas quattuor triremes capit; ὅλης τῆς πόλεως ἐν 
τοῖς πολεμικοῖς κινδύνοις ἐπιτρεπομένης τῷ στρατηγῷ, μεγάλα 
τά τ᾿ ἀγαθὰ κατορθοῦντος αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ κακὰ διαμαρτάνοντος 
εἰκὸς γενέσθαι, as the whole state in the dangers of war is 
committed to the care of the general, it is natural both that 
great good should happen when he is successful, and great 
evil when he fails. Poet. γένοιτ᾽ ἂν πᾶν θεοῦ τεχνωμένου, 
all may be done if a God contrives Ut (εἰ τεχνῷτο). 

§ 585. The Absolute Genitive differs from the corresponding Latin 
construction of the Ablative Absolute in the following points : 

a) The subject of the Participle is more frequently omitted in Greek 
when it is either easily understood from what precedes, or from the 
meaning of the verb, or when it remains indefinite (compare § 361, 3, 
Obs. 2): προϊόντων, as (they) went forward ; ὕοντος, when he (Zeus) rains ; 
ἐξαγγελθέντων, when it had been announced. 

ὁ) On the necessity of the Participle of εἶναι----σοῦ παιδὸς ὄντος | Lat. 
te puero|, see §§ 580, 482, Obs. An exception occurs in the case of the 
adjectives ἑκών and ἄκων, which very much resemble Participles: ἐμοῦ 
ἑκόντος, With my will; ἐμοῦ ἄκοντος, me invito. The Poets take other 
licenses. 

c) As the Greeks have two active Participles to express a past ac- 
tion, they use the Absolute Genitive of a Passive Participle less fre- 


* ee 
y 
io 


§ 587. THE PARTICIPLES. 317 


quently than the Romans do their Absolute Ablative: ὁ Κῦρος, τὸν 
Κροῖσον νικήσας, κατεστρέψατο τοὺς Λυδούς, Cyrus, Creso victo, Lydos sibi 
subjecit, 

d) The Absolute Genitive is employed even where the subject of 
the Participle is mentioned also in the leading sentence: ταῦτ᾽ εἰπόν- 
roc αὐτοῦ ἔδοξέ τι λέγειν τῷ ᾿Αστυάγει, after thus speaking he secmed to 
Astyages to say something (of importance). [Lat. ita locutus—visus est. ] 


§ 586. 2. The Absolute Accusative 

is usual in the case of some impersonal verbs, especially 
δέον, it being a duty; ἐξόν, παρόν, it being allowed, fea- 
sible; προςῆκον, it being befitting; δόξαν, ἐξ having been 
decided ; οὐδεὶς ἐξὸν εἰρήνην ἄγειν πόλεμον αἱρήσεται, 20 
one, being allowed to be at peace, will choose war; πολ- 
λάκις ὑμῖν ἐξὸν πλεονεκτῆσαι οὐκ ἠθελήσατε, though it was 
often easy for you to gain more, you were unwilling ; oi 
Συρακούσιοι κραυγῇ οὐκ ὀλίγῃ ἐχρῶντο, ἀδύνατον ὄν ἐν νυκτὶ 
ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι, the Syracusans raised no small shout, it 
being impossible to make a signal during the night by any 
thing else. 


D) Supplements to Participles. 


§ 587. For the sake of greater clearness, certain particles 
are added to Appositive Participles, as well as to Participles 
joined with an absolute case; they give more distinct 
prominence to the idea expressed by the Participle. Such 


Supplements to Participles are: 


1. ἅμα, at the same time, denoting contemporaneousness ; ot Ἕλληνες 
ἐμάχοντο ἅμα πορευόμενοι, the Hellenes fought while marching. 


2. μεταξύ, between, amidst, with pretty nearly the same meaning: 
ἐπέσχε με λέγοντα μεταξύ, he checked me in the midst of my speech. 


3. αὐτίκα and εὐθύς, to express immediate succession: τῷ δεξιῷ κέρᾳ 
εὐθὺς ἀποβεβηκότι ἐπέκειντο, they pressed upon the right wing immediately 
after its landing. 


4. τότε, εἶτα (κάτα), ἔπειτα, οὕτως, are added to the principal verb to 
indicate that the action of the Participle was past before, and take 
up the substance of it with various accessory ideas: καταλιπὼν φρου- 
pav οὕτως ἐπ᾽ οἴκου ἀνεχώρησεν, after having left a garrison, he thus went 


i" aS 
τὰ ᾿ 
; 


"διὰ" 


818 THE PARTICIPLES. _ § 588. 


away home; Poet. μὴ viv φυγόντες εἶθ᾽ ἁλῶμεν ὕστερον, lest eee now 
escaping Wwe should afterward be caught. 


5. καίπερ (more rarely καί alone), with a Participle, to be translated 
though, renders prominent the concessive meaning: καίπερ οὕτω σοφὸς 
ὧν βελτίων ἂν γένοιο, though so wise, you might perhaps become better ; 
Homer often separates καί from wep: οἱ δὲ καὶ ἀχνύμενοί περ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ 
ἡδὺ γέλασσαν, and though vexed they heartily laughed at him; ὅμως, in 
the same sense though or yet, is used with the principal verb: Herod. 
ὕστερον ἀπικόμενοι THC συμβολῆς ἱμείροντο ὕμως θεήσασθαι τοὺς Μήδους, 
though they did not come till after the engagement, yet they desired to see 
the Medes. 

6. ἅτε, With a Participle (like οἷον, οἷα δή), answers to the English 
in as far as, since, and brings into prominence its causal meaning: 
κατέδαρθε πάνυ πολὺ ἅτε μακρῶν τῶν νυκτῶν οὐσῶν, he slept a great while 
since the nights were long. [Compare Lat. quippe quum, quippe qui.| — 

§ 588. 7. ὡς and ὥςπερ added to a Participle suggest 
that what is expressed in the participle is swhjective, ὁ. ¢., 
is the opinion, the conception, the view of the principal. 
subject. Both particles are joined to the Appositive Par- 
ticiple as well as to a Participle connected with an abso- 
lute case, either the absolute Genitive or the absolute Ac- 
cusative. The latter case in this connection is far more 
extensively used than without those particles (ὃ 586). If 
the opinion expressed in the Participial construction is to 
be characterized at once as false, ὡς and ὥςπερ may be 
translated by as if: δεδίασι τὸν θάνατον we εὖ εἰδότες ὅτι 
μέγιστον τῶν κακῶν ἐστιν, they fear death as ἐγ they well 
knew that it was the greatest of evils; but by ὧν the be- 
licf that, since, in the feeling that, etc., if the correctness 
of the opinion is to be left undecided: ἡμεῖς πάντες ἐβλέπ- 
ομὲεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ὡς αὐτίκα μάλα ἀκουσόμενοι θαυμασίους 
τινὰς λόγους, we all looked at him, expecting immediately 
to hear some wonderful statements; Poet. ἔξεστι φωνεῖν 
ὡς ἐμοῦ μόνης πέλας, you may speak out since (in the con- 
viction that) J alone am near; λέγει ὡς διδακτοῦ οὔσης τῆς 
ἀρετῆς, he speaks thinking that virtue 7s capable of being 
taught; ἀπεβλέψατε πρὸς ἀλλήλους we αὐτὸς piv ἕκαστος 
οὐ ποιήσων τὸ δόξαν, τὸν δὲ πλησίον πράξοντα (absolute 


§ 590. THE PARTICIPLES. 319 


Accusative), you looked at one another thinking that each 
one of you would not do what was decided upon, but that 
his neighbor would. 


E) The Predicative Participle. 

§ 589. The Participle, like the Infinitive (§ 560), serves 
to complete a verb, by attributing to a word contained in 
the sentence something which is not a mere addition, but 
an essential part of the statement. The Supplementary or 
Predicative Participle may refer either 


1. to the subject of the sentence (ὃ 361, 5,7,8): παύεσθε 
ἀεὶ περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν βουλευόμενοι, Cease always consulting 
about the same things; ἴσθι λυπηρὸς ὦν, know that you 
wre troublesome, or 

2. to a dependent word in the sentence (compare § 361, 
10, and ὃ 403): 6 πόλεμος ἔπαυσε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀεὶ περὶ 
τῶν αὐτῶν βουλευομένους, the war caused the Athenrans to 
cease from always consulting about the same things ; οἶδα 
αὐτὸν λυπηρὸν ὄντα, L know him to be troublesome. 

In English such Predicative Participles are mostly ex- 
pressed by the Infinitive with Zo, or by sentences with that, 
sometimes also in other ways. In some cases, however, 
the English language also makes use of a Participle in a 
similar way: J feel myself affected by it, he found him 
armed (compare § 361, 10, Ods.). 

The verbs which admit of a Supplementary Participle 
may be classified as follows: 


§ 590. 1. Verbs which express @ condition, 
as: ἔχω, 7 am in ὦ condition; τυγχάνω, 17 chance to be 
(Poet. kupéw); λανθάνω, 7 escape notice; φαίνομαι, δηλόω, 
φανερός, δῆλός εἰμι, Ll am manifest ; ἔοικα, 7 seem; δια- 
τελέω, διάγω, yA continue ; ἀνέχομαι, KapTEpew, LT hold out, 
endure; κάμνω, 7 grow weary; ἀπαγορεύω, 7 despair; as 
well as the verbs which denote the beginning, interrupt- 
ing, or ending of a condition; ἄρχομαι, 7 begin; φθάνω, 


920 THE PARTICIPLES. § 591. 


I am beforehand ; οἴχομαι, 1 depart, I am off; ἐπι-, δια- 
λείπω, L break off, 1 suspend; παύω, 7 make to cease (παύ- 
ομαι, [ cease). In translating we frequently change the 
Participle into the principal verb, and render the principal 
Greek verb by an adverb. LExamples: κηρύξας ἔχω (more 
emphatic than ἐκήρυξα, compare Latin nunteatum habeo), 
L have announced; τίς ἔτυχε παραγενόμενος ; who hap- 
pened to be present ? διατελῶ εὔνοιαν ἔχων πᾶσιν ὑμῖν, 1 
continue cherishing a kindly feeling for you all ; μὴ καμῇς 
φίλον ἄνδρα εὐεργετῶν, don't grow weary of benefiting a 
Sreend; ἄλλα μυρία ἐπιλεΐπω λέγων, 2 refrain from say- 
ing innumerable other things; Hom. yer ἀποπτάμενος, 
he was gone flying away. 


Obs.—Even the verb εἰμί may be joined with a Participle: ἢ τοῦτο 
οὐκ ἔστι γιγνόμενον παρ᾽ ἡμῖν ; is this not happening (usual) among 
us? A Participle is necessarily so used with εἰμί to complete 
certain verbal forms (compare §§ 287, 291), especially the Par- 
ticiple of the Perfect or Aorist with εἰμί instead of the Future 
Perfect : δεδωκὼς or δοὺς ἔσει = dederis. 


§ 591. 2. Verbs of perceiving, ; 

as: ὁράω, 7 see (περιοράω, Lf overlook, endure); ἀκούω, 7 
hear; οἶδα, 7 know; μανθάνω, L learn; γιγνώσκω, 7 get to 
know ; αἰσθάνομαι, 7 perceive ; εὑρίσκω, 7 find; μέμνημαι, 
I remember. In several of these the object is in the Gen- 
itive, according to ὃ 420. Examples: ὡς εἶδον αὐτοὺς πε- 
λάζοντας, οἱ λεηλατοῦντες εὐθὺς ἀφέντες τὰ χρήματα ἔφευγον, 
cum eos appropinquantes vidissent, predantes preda sta- 
tim relicta fugam capessiverunt ; ἤκουσά ποτε Σωκράτους 

ερὶ φίλων διαλεγομένου, 7 once heard Socrates discoursing 
about friends |audiwe Socratem disputantem]|; Xeppdovn- 
cov κατέμαθε πόλεις ἕνδεκα ἢ δώδεκα ἔχουσαν, he learned 
that the Chersonese had eleven or twelve cities , ἄνθρωποι 
καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι (compare ὃ 483, 
1), οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας, When good men perceive. 
that they are distrusted, they do not like those who distrust 
them. εἴμ 


. ee ἜΣ © 


§ 595. THE PARTICIPLES, 321 


Obs.—With σύνοιδά μοι, I am conscious, the Participle may be con- 
nected with the Nominative of the Subject or the Dative (μοῦ : 
ἐμαυτῷ συνῴδειν οὐδὲν ἐπιστάμενος OY ἐπισταμένῳ, [ was conscious of 
knowing nothing. In the sense of “to be aware” it may also have 
the Accusative with the Participle. 


ἢ 592. 3. Verbs of emotion, 
aS: χαίρω, ἧδομαι, τέρπομαι, 7 rejoice; ἀγαπάω, 7 am sat- 
agied ; χαλεπῶς φέρω, egre fero; ἄχθομαι, Lam dissatis- 
jied ; ἀγανακτέω, Lam vexed; αἰσχύνομαι, [am ashamed ; 
, , Χ ς 
μεταμέλομαι or μεταμέλει μοι, 7 repent. Examples: Hom. ὁ 
δὲ φρεσὶ τέρπετ᾽ ἀκούων, but he rejoiced in heart at hear- 
ing (it); μεταμίλει αὐτῷ ψευσαμένῳ, he repents having told 
ὦ lve. 


ὃ 593. 4. Verbs of pointing out and asserting, 
as: δείκνυμι, ἀποφαίνω, 7 show, ἐξελέγχω, 1 prove, con- 
° > ς 
wuts ἀγγέλλω, 7 announce; δμολογέω, L assent. Vixam- 
ples: Φίλιππος πάντα ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ ποιῶν ἐξελήλεγκται, tt 
has been proved that Philip does every thing for his own 
sake; ἀποφαίνουσι τοὺς φεύγοντας πάλαι πονηροὺς ὄντας, 
they make manifest that the banished had long been base. 
ὃ 594. Ods.—The Infinitive, according to ὃ 560, may be used as well 
as the Participle with many of the verbs enumerated in §§ 590- 
593, but in a somewhat different sense: ἄρχομαι διδάσκων, L begin 
to be a teacher; ἄρχομαι διδάσκειν, 1 begin to teach (my teaching) ; 
αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, 1 am ashamed though 1 say tt ; αἰσχύνομαι λέγειν, 
shame prevents me from saying. 


FE) The Participle with av. 

§ 595. By the addition of the Particle ἄν the Participle, 
in every case like the Infinitive (δὴ 575 and 576), acquires 
the meaning of possibility or that of an Apodosis in a 
ITypothetical Sentence, and may therefore be resolved in 
two ways: 

1. by the Optative with av (§§ 516 and 546): 
ἐγώ εἰμι τῶν ἡδέως μὲν ἂν ἐλεγχθέντων, ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἐλεγ- 
ξάντων, J am one of those who would gladly be refuted 
(ot ἂν ἐλεγχθεῖεν), and would gladly refute (ot ἂν ἐλέγ- 

O 2 


B22 THE PARTICIPLES. ὃ 596. 


Esav); εὑρίσκω ταύτην av μόνην γενομένην τῶν μελλόντων 
κινδύνων ἀποτροπήν, L find this would be the only pre- 
vention of the coming dangers (ὅτι ἂν γένοιτο) ; ἴσμεν Kat 
ὑμᾶς ἂν καὶ ἄλλους, ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ δυνάμει ἡμῖν γενομένους, 
δρῶντας ἂν αὐτό, we know that you as well as others in 
the same position would do the same thing, 2. é., ὅτι εἰ 
γένοισθε Spwre ἄν. 

2. By the hypothetical Indicative with ἄν (§ 536, etc.) 
Φίλιππος Ποτίδαιαν ἑλὼν καὶ δυνηθεὶς ἂν αὐτὸς ἔχειν, ε 
ἐβουλήθη, ᾿Ολυνθίοις ἀπέδωκεν, When Philip had taken Po- 
tideea, and might have (ὅτε ἐδυνήθη av) kept τέ himself, of 
he had wished, he gave it back to the Olynthvans. 


> 
t 


G) The Verbal Adjectives. 
ὃ 596. Verbal Adjectives are, like Participles, verbal 


nouns of an adjective kind, but differ from participles by ~ 


a usage much more restricted, and referring to no special 
time, which has been treated of generally in § 300. 

The Verbal Adjectives in -τέος, implying necessity, are 
worthy of notice. A double construction is here possible: 

1. The object of a necessary action becomes the szwbject, 
and the Verbal Adjective agrees with it: ὁ πατήρ σοι τιμη- 
τέος ἐστίν, pater tibi venerandus est ; ἡ πόλις τοῖς πολίταις 
ὠφελητέα, the state must be assisted by its citizens. In 
this construction the subject 1s emphatic. 

2, The Neutral or impersonal construction, where the 
necessity of the action is made specially prominent; the 
object of the action is in each instance in the case required 
by the verb: διωκτέον τὴν ἀρετήν, We must pursue virtue ; 
εἰρήνην ἀκτέον ἐστίν, pax agenda est; ἁπτέον τοῦ πολέμου, 
you must try war; [βοηθητέον ἡμῖν ἐστι τοῖς πράγμασιν, We 
must help the state. 

The person who is to, or must do something, is in both 
cases in the Dative: in the second, according to the anal- 
ogy of δεῖ (ὃ 567, Obs. 1), sometimes in the Accusative: 


Νὰ νυ... 


§ 597. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 323 


οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ ἑκόντας ἀδικητέον, 72 NO Way must You Will- 
engly do injustice. 


Obs. 1.—The Verbal Adjective sometimes has the meaning of a 
Middle: πειστέον ἐστίν, we must obey (πείθομαι, NOt πείθω). 


Obs. 2.—In the Neuter construction we often find the Plural: zo- 
λεμητέα ἐστίν, we must fight (compare ὃ 364). 


CHar. X XIV.—SomeE PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE 
CLAUSES. 


A) Attraction. 


ὃ 597. 1. The Relative Pronoun in general follows the 
rule that it agrees in Gender and Number with its ante- 
cedent, that is, with the word to which it refers, but in Case 
with what follows; that is, it accommodates itself to the 
sentence in which it stands: μέμνησθε τοῦ ὅρκου ὃν ὀμω- 
μόκατε, be mindful of the oath which you have sworn. 


2. An exception from this rule is the Attractzon, or the 
process by which the Relative is attracted in Case also by 
the word to which it refers, so as to take its case: μέμνησθε 
τοῦ ὅρκου οὗ ὀμωμόκατε. 

3. With Attraction another process is frequently com- 
bined, viz., shortening. This consists in the Article or 
the Demonstrative Pronoun being left out, and the Rela- 
tive, with the word to which it refers, being drawn together 
into a single clause: μέμνησθε οὗ ὀμωμόκατε ὅρκου. 

4. If the word referred to by the Relative is a mere pro- 
noun, the Relative remains quite alone, but stands in the 
ease which the Demonstrative would have had: μέμνησθε 
οὗ ὀμωμόκατε--: μέμνησθε τούτου ὃ ὀμωμόκατε, remember that 
which you have sworn; ἀμελῶ ὧν με δεῖ πράττειν -- ἀμελῶ 
τούτων & με δεῖ πράττειν, 7 neglect what 7 should do. 


324 PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. § 598. 


§ 598. Attraction, however, can occur only under the 
following conditions : 


1. The /?elatiwve clause must be closely connected with 
the word to which it refers, must be an essentzal part of 
it. Attraction 15 inadmissible in a Relative clause, which 
only loosely adds a remark to a substantive, which might 
quite as well be wanting, or be annexed by means of καί 
and a demonstrative pronoun. 


2. The sentence must be such as would have the Rela- 
tive pronoun in the Accusative, but its antecedent in the 
Genitive or Dative: τίς ἡ ὠφέλεια τοῖς θεοῖς τυγχάνει οὖσα 
ἀπὸ τῶν δώρων ὧν παρ᾽ ὑμῶν λαμβάνουσιν, What advan- 
tage have the gods from the presents which they receive 
Srom you ? εἰςφέρετε ἀφ᾽ ὅσων ἕκαστος ἔχει, contribute 
From what each has (ἀπὸ τοσούτων ὅσα); λέγεις οὐ σύμ- 


φωνα οἷς τὸ πρῶτον ἔλεγες, You do not say what harmon- 


izes with what you first said (τούτοις ἃ): τῷ ἡγεμόνι πισ- 
τεύσομεν ᾧ av Κῦρος δῷ, we shall trust the commander 
whonr Cyrus gives (us) (τούτῳ ὅν). 

Obs.-—Attraction very seldom takes place with other cases: ὧν ἐν- 


τυγχάνω μάλιστα ἄγαμαι oi, 1. €., τούτων οἷς, [ admire you most of alt 
1 mect. 


§ 599. All clauses subordinate to a Relative Sentence, 
so far as they consist of words referring to the Relative, 
and are capable of inflexion, must likewise be modified in 
the Attraction: οἷς οὖσιν ὑμετέροις ἔχει, τούτοις πάντα TAA- 
λα ἀσφαλῶς κέκτηται, ὁ. 6.. ἃ ὄντα ὑμέτερα ἔχει, τούτοις, he 


keeps all the rest in safety by means of what he has of yours. 


§ 600. οἷος, and sometimes ὕσος and ἡλίκος, have quite a peculiar 
attraction ; viz., εἶναι is often omitted when it would stand with οἷος 
in the nominative, and the latter is put in the same case as its ante- 
cedent: οἵῳ ye ἐμοὶ παντάπασιν ἄπορον τοῦτο, t. €., τοσούτῳ οἷος ἐγώ εἰμι, 
that is quite impossible to such a man as Iam. Sometimes the article 
is prefixed at the same time: τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν, to such as we. By the 
same cllipsis d¢ricovy acquires the fixed meaning, whoever, 7. 6.. any 
whatever: οὐκ ἔστι δικαίου ἀνδρὸς βλάπτειν ὁντινοῦν ἀνθρώπων, it 18. not 
a just man’s nature to injure any person whatever (i. 6.. any one, Who- 


πω ὃν ΚΣ. 


§ 603. PECULIARITIES OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. 325 


ever he may be). [Compare Lat. cuicunque homini nocere.| So bere 
βούλει Means the same as οὗτος ὃν βούλει, like quivis, 

§ 601. Other Relative expressions, all involving either 
Shortening or Attraction, are: 

ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, because, t. €., ἀντὶ τούτων a, or ἀντὶ τούτων ὅτι: 
σὺ εὖ ἐποίησας ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἔπαθες, you did good because you 
received good (for that which you received). 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ wre (Herod. ἐπὶ τούτῳ, ἐπ᾽ ᾧτε), for the pur- 
pose of, on condition that, ἡ. ¢., ἐπὶ τούτῳ ὥςτε, often with 
the Infinitive: of τριάκοντα ἡρέθησαν ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε συγγράψαι 
νόμους, the thirty were chosen for the purpose of drawing 
up laws. 

ἐξ οὗ, ἀφ᾽ οὔ, EL Guo, since, ὁ. 6.. since the time that. On 
ἐν Ws εἰς 6, ἄχρι ov, § 556. 

οἷος, more complete τοιοῦτος οἷος, with the Infinitive, of 
the kind that, of the kind to, and οἵόςτε, with the Infinitive, 
able, possible: οὐκ ἢν ὥρα ola ἄρδειν τὸ πεδίον, ἐξ was not 
the season to water the field; οὐχ οἵοίτε ἦσαν (βοηθῆσαι, 
they were not able to render help (compare ὃ 562). ὅσον, 
for τοσοῦτο ὕσον, enough to, with the Infinitive: ἔχομεν 
ὕσον ἀποζῆν, we have enough to live on. 


§ 602. An znverted Attraction takes place when a noun 
or pronoun is put in the same case as the Relative which 
refers to it: τὴν οὐσίαν ἣν κατέλιπε τῷ υἱεῖ οὐ πλείονος ἀξία 
ἐστίν, the property which he left his son ἐ8 not worth more, 
instead of ἡ οὐσία hv; Poet. τάςδε δ᾽ ἅςπερ ticopag ἥκουσι 
πρὸς σέ. those whom you see (the girls) have come to you 
(aids ἅς). So οὐδείς, μηδείς, become one word, as it were, 
with ὅςτις οὐ : οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται, properly οὐδείς 
ἐστιν ὅτῳ οὐκ, Nobody whom he does not answer. Observe 
also such expressions as: θαυμαστὸς ὅσος, 2. 6., θαυμαστόν 
ἐστιν ὅσος, wonderfully great; θαυμαστῶς we, 1. ¢., θαυ- 
μαστόν ἐστιν we, it is wonderful how. Compare ὃ 519, 5, 


Obs. 2. 


§ 603. A singular anomaly is presented by Relative sentences. after 
tort, in the sense of “ there is.” ἔστι is in ingular eyen when the 
tort, in the St] er the Singul hen tl 


826 COMBINATION OF RELATIVE SENTENCES. ὃ θ04. 


relative is in the Plural: ἔστιν oi, there are those who, i. e., some; ἔστιν 
οἷς οὐχ οὕτως ἔδοξεν, there are some to whom it did not appear so. So 
ἔστιν bre (=éviore), sometimes ; ἔστιν οὗ, in some vlaces ; ἔστιν ἡ, in some 
ways. 

B) Complication. 

§ 604. In translating Greek Relative clauses into En- 
elish, difficulties sometimes arise through the particular re- 
lations of the sentences: 

1. When the Relative as an Accusative of the Subject 
belongs to an Infinitive: of πολέμιοι, ove ᾧοντο ἀποφυγεῖν, 
ἐξαίφνης παρῆσαν, hostes, guos aufugisse putabant, subito 
aderant, the enemy, whom they thought to have fled, were 
suddenly there. 

2. When the Relative depends on a participle: κατα- 
λαμβάνουσι τεῖχος ὃ τειχισάμενοί ποτε ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες κοινῷ 
δικαστηρίῳ ἐχρῶντο (Ξεᾧ ἐχρῶντο τειχισάμενοι αὐτό), they 
take possession of the fort which the Acarnanians, after 
building it, used as a common judgment hall. 

3. When the Relative is in the Genztive dependent on a 
comparative : ἀρετή, ἧς οὐδὲν κτῆμα σεμνότερον, virtue, than 
which no possession is more venerable (ὃ 416). 

4, When the Relative depends on the verb of an inserted 
clause: αἱρούμεθα αὐτομόλους, οἷς ὁπόταν τις πλείονα μισθὰν 
διδῷ, μετ᾽ ἐκείνων ἀκολουθήσουσιν (duces) eligimus trans- 
Sugas, quibus si quis plus stipendii prebuerit clos se- 
guentur (2. é., ot, ὁπόταν τις ---- διδῷ, ἀκολουθήσουσιν, Gut, δὲ 
dis—prebuerri, sequentur), we choose deserters, who, if any 
one gives them more pay, will follow him. 

Obs.—In the cases enumerated under 2 and 4, as well as those dis- 

cussed in § 605, and others besides, the Greek language satisfies 


itself with putting only once a word which has to be supplied in 
different cases for several clauses belonging to one another. 


§ 605. C) Combination of several Relative Clauses. 
When several Relative clauses follow one another, the Relative pro- 


noun need be expressed only once, even when, the second time, it 
would require to be in a different case: Hom. ἄνωχθι δέ μὲν γαμέεσθαι 


.» 


ere 


§ 606. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES, 327 


τῷ ὕτεῳ TE πατὴρ κέλεται Kal ἁνδάνει αὐτῇ, bid her marry whomsoever her 
Sather urges and (who) pleases herself; ᾿Αριαῖος, ὃν ἡμεῖς ἠθέλομεν Ba- 
σιλέα καθιστάναι καὶ [ᾧ] ἐδώκαμεν καὶ [ἀφ᾽ οὗ] ἐλάβομεν πίστα, οὗτος ἡμᾶς 
κακῶς ποιεῖν πειρᾶται, Ariwus, whom we wished to make hing, and (to 
whom we) gave and (from whom we) received pledges of fidelity, at- 
tempts to ill use us. 


᾿ Obs.— Sometimes, instead of the repeated Relative, αὐτός is substi- 
tuted in the case required by the construction of the sentence. 
So likewise μίν in Homer: οἱ πρόγονοι, οἷς οὐκ ἐχαρίζονθ᾽ οἱ λέγον- 
τες οὐδ᾽ ἐφίλουν αὐτούς, ὥςπερ ὑμᾶς οὗτοι νῦν, πέντε καὶ τετταράκοντα 
ἔτη τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἧρξαν ἑκόντων, your ancestors, whom the speakers 
did not gratify, nor did they flatter them, as these now do you, ruled 
Sorty-five years over the readily submitting Hellenes, Hom.: ἀντί- 
θεον Πολύφημον, dov κράτος ἐστὶ μέγιστον πᾶσιν Κυκλώπεσσι, Θόωσα 
δέ μιν τέκε νύμφη, godlike Polyphemus, whose power is the greatest 
among all the Cyclops, and him (whom) the nyinph Thodsa bore. 


παρ. XX V.—INTERROGATIVE. SENTENCES. 


ὃ 606. 1. The simple direct question may be introduced 
by the Interrogative pronouns or adverbs mentioned § 214, 
etc. In Greek several different questions may be included 
in one interrogative sentence: Hom. τίς πόθεν εἷς ἀνδρῶν ; 
what man, whence are you? ἀπὸ τούτων φανερὸν γενήσεται, 
τίς τίνος αἴτιός ἐστιν, from this it will be clear who ἐ8 
chargeable with what (who is chargeable and with what). 


Obs. 1.—An Interrogative pronoun may be joined with a demon- 
strative: ἀγγελίαν φέρω βαρεῖαν τίνα ταύτην, I bring heavy tid- 
ings ; what (is) that? (τίς αὕτη ἐστίν ;) 


Obs, 2.—A question may also be expressed in a subordinate clause 
and by a participle: πότε ἃ χρὴ πράξετε; ἐπειδὰν τί γένηται; when 
will you do your duty? when what shall happen? τί ἰδὼν τὸν Κρι- 
τόβουλον ποιοῦντα ταῦτα κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ; what have you seen 
Critobulus doing that you have charged him with this? οἱ πάλαι 
᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐ διελογίσαντο, ὑπὲρ οἷα πεποιηκότων ἀνθρώπων κινδυνεύ- 
σουσιν, the old Athenians did not caleulate how much people have 


928 INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. § 607. 


done for whom they were going to incur risk, Of this kind also are 
the phrases: ri παθών; what have you passed through, that? ri 
μαθών; what have you got to know, that? τί παθὼν ἀδικεῖς τὴν πα- 
τρίδα ; what have you passed through to make you act unjustly to- 
ward your country ? 


§ 607. 2. When the question refers not to a single word, 
but to a whole sentence, it may be indicated 

a) merely by the tone of voice: οὐ φοβεῖ μὴ ἤδη πρεσ- 
βύτερος ἧς ; do you not fear that you are already too old? 

ὁ) by Lnterrogative particles, which, in translating into 
English, can not always be expressed by separate words, 
but often may be rendered by the position of the words 
and the tone of pronunciation. ‘The most important Inter- 
rogative particles are apa and 7, both comparable to the 
Latin affix -ne. Which answer is expected is indicated by 
neither of these particles: ap’ εἰμὶ μάντις ; am La prophet ? 
ἢ οὗτοι πολέμιοί εἰσιν , are those enemies ? 

Obs.—If an affirmative answer is to be specially indicated οὐ is add- 


ed; if a negative, μή is added to dpa. Hence dpa od corresponds 
to the Latin nonne. ἄρα μὴ to the English surely not. 


§ 608. Of other Interrogative expressions the following may be no- 
ticed: ἢ yap; isn’t it? ἢ που; surely? ἄλλο τι %, properly ἄλλο τι ἔστιν 
7; does any thing else happen than? hence, also with ἤ omitted (com- 
pare § 626, Obs.), like the Lat. nonne, where an affirmative answer is 
expected: ἄλλο τι ἢ ἀδικοῦμεν ; are we not doing wrong? ἄλλο τι οὖν 
πάντα ταῦτα ἂν εἴη μία ἐπιστήμη ; would not this, then, be all one science ? 
ov put in a question also anticipates an affirmative answer, and may 
be compared with nonne and the English not. The opposite to it is 
μή, Which may often be translated by swrely, as μῶν, formed from μὴ 
οὖν, surely not, always points to a negative answer. μὴ ᾿Αχιλλέα οἴει 
φροντίσαι θανάτου καὶ κινδύνου ; surely you do not think Achilles cared 
about death and danger ? 


ὃ 609. 3. The indirect question in Greek, according to 
§ 520, is by no means clearly distinguished in regard to 
Mood from the direct. So likewise the direct Interroga- 
tives, pronouns and adverbs, are often used instead of the 
indirect ones: ai γυναῖκες ἠρώτων αὐτούς, τίνες εἶεν, the 
women asked them who they were (ὃ 475, b). 


§ 612. THE NEGATIVES. 329 


§ 610. 4. The English indirect Interrogative for whether 
is represented by εἰ (ὃ 525, etc.), more rarely by ἐάν (with 
the Subj.), sometimes by ἄρα, and in Homer by ἤ (ἠῶ. 
Whether or not or whether perhaps may be rendered by 
μή : σκοπεῖτε, εἰ δικαίως χρήσομαι τῷ λόγῳ, sce whether I 
speak justly ; dpa, μὴ παίζων ἔλεγεν, see whether or not he 
spoke in jest. 

On the subject of the Interrogative Sentence being drawn prolep- 

tically into the principal sentence, see δὲ 397, 519, 5, Obs. 2. 


§ 611. The direct double question (disjunctive question) 
is most generally introduced by πότερον (πότερα)---ἤ, Lat. 
utrum—an : πότερον δέδρακεν ἢ οὐ ; πότερον ἄκων ἢ ἑκών 5 
has he done it or not? willingly or unwillingly? In an 
indirect double question the same Interrogatives may be 
used, but also ci—n, whether—or, and εἴτε----εἴτε : ἀποροῦ- 
μεν, εἴτε ἄκων εἴτε ἑκὼν δέδρακεν, We are in doubt whether 
he did ἐξ willingly or unwillingly. 

Obs.—The Homeric language has for the direct, but more frequent- 
ly for the indirect double question, the conjunctions ἤ (ἠέ), ἢ 
(je): ἢ ὕμμ᾽ ἐν νήεσσι Ποσειδάων ἐδάμασσεν, ἢ που ἀνάρσιοι ἄνδρες 
ἐδηλήσαντ᾽ ἐπὶ χέρσου ; did Poseidon overpower you in your ships, or 
have hostile men injured you on land? εἰπὲ δὲ μοι μνηστῆς ἀλόχου 
βουλήν τε νόον τε, ἠὲ μένει παρὰ παιδὶ Kai ἔμπεδα πάντα φυλάσσει, 
ἢ ἤδη μιν ἔγημεν ᾿Αχαιῶν ὅςτις ἄριστος, tell me the purpose and in- 
clination of the wooed wife, whether she remains with the son and 
guards all carefully, or whether he who is the best of the Achwans has 
already married her. ἤ (42) 1s also used for ἢ (je) in the second 
member. 


Cuap. XX VI.—TuHE NEGATIVES. 
A) Simple Negatives. 


§ 612. The Greeks have two different negatives, ob and 


’ 


μή. Numerous compounds and derivatives are formed 


990 THE NEGATIVES. § 613. 


from each, as: οὔτε, μήτε, οὐδείς, μηδείς, οὐδαμῶς, μηδαμῶς. 
The principal distinction between ov and μή is that οὐ 
denies, but μή declines. Hence arise the following special 
rules: 

§ 613. 1. ov is used in all direct statements, whether 
the reality of something is denied by the Jndicative, or 
the possibility or probability of something by the Opta- 
tive with av: Φίλιππος οὐκ ἄγει εἰρήνην, Philip does not 
maintain peace; οὐκ av ἄγοι εἰρήνην, he would not (will 
hardly) maintain peace; οὐκ av δύναιο μὴ καμὼν εὐδαι- 
μονεῖν, you could not be happy without laboring (§ 516). 

Obs.—ov is also used in the peculiar Subjunctive of the Homeric 

language mentioned § 513. . 

2. ov is used in direct questions to which an affirmative 
answer is expected (ὃ 608), but μή when a negative an- 
swer 1s expected (ὃ 608). 


ὃ 614. 3. In independent sentences μή is used with the 
Subjunctive (δὲ 510, 512), with the Optative of wishing 


(ὃ 514), with the Lndicative of wishing (ὃ 515), and with 
the Lmperative : μὴ θορυβήσητε, do not make a disturb- 
ance; μὴ γένοιτο, may tt not happen ; Hom. we μὴ ὥφελλε 
γενέσθαι, would it never happened! μήποτ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἀπρήκτοισι 
νόον ἔχε, never devote your thoughts to what is imprac- 
ticable. 

Obs.—In these cases μή generally corresponds to the Latin ne. It 


is often used in negative oaths with the Indicative, in so far as 
the swearer declines something (ἢ 612): Hom. ἴστω νῦν τόδε Tata 


. μὴ δι’ ἐμὴν ἰότητα Ποσειδάων... .. πημαίνει Τρῶας, let Goa 
now know this... . not with my consent does Poseidon afflict the 
Trojans. 


§ 615. 4. οὐ in general is used in all those dependent 
sentences which do not express a negative purpose or 
a condition : ἠδειν, ὅτι οὐ ῥάδιον εἴη, 17 knew tt was not 
casy s ἃ οὐκ ἐᾶτε τοὺς παῖδας ποιεῖν, ταῦτα αὐτοὶ ποιεῖτε, 
what you do not allow your children to do you do your- 
selves. 


OOO a. 


§ 616. THE NEGATIVES. 331 


Obs. 1.—In indirect questions οὐ as well as μή may be used with 
ei in the sense of whether: σκοπῶμεν, εἰ πρέπει ἢ οὐ, let us consider 
whether it is becoming or not ; πειράσομαι μαθεῖν, εἰ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, L 
will try to learn whether it is true or not. : 

Obs. 2.—In such Relative Sentences as contain quite a general idea, 
μή May be used: ἃ μὴ οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι, what I do not know, 
1 do not think I know. 

ὃ 616. 5. μή in general is used in all those dependent 
sentences in which a negative purpose or a condition 15 
expressed; hence μή is the negative in sentences denot- 
ing entention or purpose (ὃ 530), in those indirect Inter- 
rogative and Relative sentences where a purpose of hzn- 
dering is implied, in all the Protasets of Hypothetical 
Periods (ὃ 534, etc.), and lastly in Hypothetical Rela- 
tive (ὃ 554) clauses, as well as in Hypothetical Temporal 
clauses (§§ 556, 557): ἐάν rie κάμῃ, παρακαλεῖς ἰατρόν, 
ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ, when any one ts ul, you send for a 
physician, that he may not die; ψηφίσασθε τοιαῦτα ἐξ ὧν 
μηδέποτε ὑμῖν μεταμελήσει, vote for such things as will 
never cause you to repent lea quorum numquam vos 
peniteat|, dpa, ὅπως μή σοι ἀποστήσονται, see that they 
do not abandon you, ἐξῆν σοι ἀπιέναι ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, εἰ 
μὴ ἤρεσκόν σοι οἱ νόμοι, ἐξ was at your choice to leave the 
state, uf its laws did not please you; θεάσασθε, we σα- 
θρόν ἐστι πᾶν, 6 τι ἂν μὴ δικαίως 7 πεπραγμένον, 866, how 
rotten every thing is, which is not justly done; μεγίστη 
γίγνεται σωτηρία, ὅταν γυνὴ πρὸς ἄνδρα μὴ διχοστατῇ, τέ 8 
the greatest safety when a wife is not at variance with 
her husband. 

Obs. 1.—In sentences of this kind, sometimes οὐ is used to negative 

a single word: πάντως οὕτως ἔχει, ἐάν τε οὐ φῆτε ἐάν TE Hire, it is 
entirely so whether you deny or assert it. 

Obs. 2.—The Optative expressing repetition likewise has μή (ἢ 547). 

Obs. 3.—With vetbs of fearing, μή, like the Latin ne, signifies lest or 
that: δέδοικα. μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, I fear lest we forget 
the way home (compare ὃ 533). Even without a governing verb 


the fear that something may happen is introduced by μή, which 
in this case is to be translated if only not, or if but not: μὴ ἐπι- 


992 THE NEGATIVES. δ 617. 


λαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ, 17) only we do not forget the way home 
(compare δὲ 620, 621, and 512). 

§ 617. 6. The “/nfinitive generally has μή, particularly 
when the Infinitive has the article: τὰς ὁμοίας χάριτας μὴ 
ἀντιδιδόναι αἰσχρόν, not to return equal thanks ts base; 
σοὶ TO μὴ σιγῆσαι λοιπὸν ἦν, wt remained for you not to be 
sdlent. 

Obs, 1.—od may be put with the Infinitive after verbs of declaring 

and conceiving : ὁμολογῶ οὐ κατὰ τούτους εἶναι ῥήτωρ, [ acknowledge 
LI am not an orator in their sense. 

Obs. 2.—écre, so that, when joined with the Infinitive generally has 
py, more rarely od. 

Obs. 3.— After verbs of hindering, forbidding, refusing, denying, and 
others which contain the idea of declining (δ 612), μή is usually 
added to the Infinitive, and is rendered in English by from, or 

.not expressed at all: κωλυόμεθα μὴ μαθεῖν, we are hindered from 
learning ; ἠρνοῦντο μὴ πεπτωκέναι, they denied having fallen. 

§ 618. 7. With Participles μή is used when they are to. 
be understood hypothetically, ὁ. ¢.,in the sense of a Hypo- 
thetical Protasts (§ 583): οὐκ ἂν δύναιο μὴ καμὼν εὐδαι- 
μονεῖν, 2. 6.. εἰ μὴ κάμοις (ὃ 613); so, likewise, when the 
Participle has the article, if it can be resolved into a hypo- 
thetical or a hypothetical relative clause: 6 μὴ δαρεὶς ἄν- 
θρωπος οὐ παιδεύεται, %. 6., ἐάν τις μὴ δαρῇ, or ὃς ἂν δ ἡ. 
δαρῇ (§ 583). 

Obs. 1.—When μή is added as a Negative to single words, they are 

likewise to be taken hypothetically: τὸ μὴ ἀγαθόν, the not good, 
4. 6., ὃ ἂν μὴ ἀγαθὸν ἡ. 

Obs. 2.—With Participles as well as with other words μή often oc- 
curs as a Negative on account of the prohibitive, declining, or 
hypothetical nature of the whole sentence: ψηφίσασθε τὸν πόλεμον 


μὴ φοβηθέντες τὸ αὐτίκα δεινόν, determine upon the war without fear- 
ing the immediate danger. 


B) Several Negatives combined. 


8. 619. 1. A Negative is not neutralized by a subsequent 
compound Negative of the same kind, but only continued. 
In translating, the Negative is employed only once in En- 


Νὰ os 


ls a Se 


§ 621. THE NEGATIVES. 333. 


glish, and the place of the other Negative is supplied by 
an indefinite: Poet. οὐκ ἔστιν οὐδὲν κρεῖσσον ἢ νόμοι πόλει, 
there is not any thing better for a state than laws ; οὐδεὶς 
πώποτε Σωκράτους οὐδὲν ἀσεβὲς οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον οὔτε πράτ- 
τοντοὸς εἶδεν, οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσεν, NO One ever either saw 
Socrates doing or heard him saying any thing impious or 
unholy. 

Obs.—A Negative is neutralized by a subsequent simple Negative 
of the same kind: οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων ἀδικῶν τίσιν οὐκ ἀποδώσει, no 
one who does wrong will not (i. €., every one will) pay the penalty. 

§ 620. 2. ov followed by μή with the Subjunctive or Fu- 

ture Indicative is an emphatic negative. This mode of 
speaking is to be explained by the idea of fear being sup- 
plied after ov (compare ὃ 616, Obs. 3): οὐ μὴ. ποιήσω, 
about the same as ov ¢of3nréov μὴ ποιήσω, there vs no fear 
that I shall do it, ὦ. e., 1 shall certainly not do it: οὐδεὶς 
μήποτε εὑρήσει TO κατ᾽ ἐμὲ οὐδὲν ἐλλειφθέν, nO One Will ever 
jind that any thing, as far as depends on me, is neg- 
lected ; ob μήποτε ἔξαρνος γένωμαι, 7 shall certainly never 


deny. 


§ 621. 3. μή followed by οὐ is used in very different 
ways: 

a) After verbs of fearing, μὴ ov corresponds to the Lat. 
ne non or ut, and is to be translated by that not: δέδοικα; 
μὴ ov θεμιτὸν 4, vereor, ne non justum sit, 1 fear that ἐξ is 
not just (compare ὃ 616, Obs. 3); also without a governing 
verb, μὴ ov θεμιτὸν ἢ, if it be but not not right, ἡ. ¢., if 
it be only not wrong (compare ὃ 512, and ὃ 616, Obs. 8): 
Hom. μή νύ τοι οὐ Xpatoun σκῆπτρον καὶ στὲ έμμα θεοῖο, the 
god’s staff and garland will surely not help you. 

ὁ) In indirect questions where μή would mean 7f per- 
haps (ὃ 610), μὴ οὐ means 4 if or whether perhaps not: ἄθρει 
μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ἢ τὸ ἀγαθόν, look whether perhaps this ts not 
the good. 


Obs.—In the cases adduced under ὦ and }, μή is a Negative Con- 
junction, and οὐ the Negative to a special word: 


994 THE NEGATIVES. ὃ 6022, 


0) μὴ οὐ is used with the Infinitive after Wegative ex- 
pressions, in the sense of so as not, or not tos οὐδεὶς οἵόςτε 
ἄλλως λέγων μὴ οὐ καταγέλαστος εἶναι, NO One speaking 
otherwise is able not to be ridiculous. 

d@) μὴ ov is farther used with the Infinitive after nega- 
tive verbs, or questions containing verbs of hindering, for- 
bidding, denying, refusing (ὃ 617, Obs. 3). The Infinitive 
in this case is often preceded by the Article. In English 
the negative is not expressed: ov κωλυόμεθα μὴ οὐ μαθεῖν, 
we are not hindered from learning ; μὴ παρῇς τὸ μὴ οὐ 
φράσαι, do not omit saying it; τίνα οἴει ἀπαρνήσεσθαι μὴ 
οὐχὶ ἐπίστασθαι τὰ δίκαια ; who do you think will deny 
at all understanding what 5 gust ? 

Obs.—od is here only a repetition of the Negatass contained in the 

principel sentence. 


C) Some Negatwe Phrases. 
§ 622. 1. οὐδέν, μηδέν, and οὔτι, μήτι, nothing, are often 
_ used as free Accusatives, like the Latin nzAd/, meaning 
not, not at all; compare § 404, Obs. 

2. οὔπω, μήπω, not yet, are to be carefully distinguished 
from οὐκέτι, μηκέτι, no longer: οὔπω πεποίηκα, nondwum 
fect; οὐκέτι ποιήσω, non amplius faciam. 

3. οὐχ ὅτι stands for οὐ λέγω ὅτι, 7 do not say that, not 
to mention; καὶ οὐχ ὅτι ὁ Κρίτων ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ ἦν, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ, and not to mention (i. e., not only) Crito 
was quiet, but his friends also were. 

; 4 
4. μὴ ὅτι for μὴ εἴπω ὅτι (μὴ ὅπως) means dont SUPPOSE, 
nedum, by which the mention of something is declined 
as unnecessary, and hence may sometimes be translated in 

Negative sentences by not only not: μὴ ὅτι θεός, ἀλλὰ 

” ~ ~ 

καὶ ἄνθρωποι ov φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας, dowt suppose 
that only God, but men also do not love the faithless {non 
homines infidos amant; nedum deus]. In like manner 
οὐχ ὅπως, properly not that, don’t suppose, may frequent- 


Se ee ἡ δ. ὁ... α. 


ὦ. el i ae ἀν... ψἱ 


— «ὦλδ.. 


§ 624. a. THE PARTICLES. 335 


ly be rendered in connection with Negatives by not only 
not. 

5. μόνον ov, μόνον οὐχί, only not, is equivalent to al- 
most, nearly; ὅσον ov, temporal [tantum non], nearly, 
almost ¢ καταγελᾷ ὑπ᾽ ἀνδρῶν οὺς σὺ μόνον οὐ προςκυνεῖς, 
you are ridiculed by men whom you almost worship. 

6. ov μήν or ov μέντοι ἀλλά, however, notwithstanding, 
is to be explained by an ellipsis: 6 ἵππος μικροῦ ἐκεῖνον 
ἐξετραχήλισεν ". οὐ μὴν (viz., ἐξετραχήλισεν) ἀλλὰ ἐπέμεινεν 
6 Κῦρος, the horse nearly threw him off, (did) not, however, 
but Cyrus kept his seat. 

On οὔτε, μήτε, οὐδέ, μηδέ, ὃ 625. 


Cuar. XX VII.—TuHE ῬΑΞΒΤΙΟΘΙΏΒ, 


§ 623. Particles are also indeclinable words which serve 
partly to connect sentences, partly to give emphasis to 
particular parts of a sentence, and to enliven language. 
The Particles which serve to connect sentences are called 
Conjunctions ; those which give prominence to particular 
parts of a sentence, or impart animation by making entire 
sentences prominent, are called emphatic particles. 

In regard to position, they are either prepositive, ὁ. ¢., 
take the first place in a sentence, or postpositive, ὃ. ὁ... al- 
ways stand after at least one other word in a sentence. 

Obs.—The Conjunctions are divided into various classes according 

to their meaning. Several Conjunctions, however, belong equal- 


ly to different classes. They will be arranged according to their 
original or primitive signification. 


A) Conjunctions. 
Preliminary Remark. 
§ 624. a. The Conjunctions are here enumerated without 


regard to the formal relation of sentences to one another 
(8. 519). But 


336 THE PARTICLES. εν § 624, 


1. Co-ordination is implied in all Copulative and Dis- 
junctive Conjunctions, the Adversative Conjunctions with 
the exception of ὅμως, which is used principally in the 
Apodosis, among the Causal Conjunctions yap, and all Illa- 
tive Conjunctions except ὥςτε; 


2. Subordination is implied in all the rest. 


Obs.—Much more rarely than in modern languages, more rarely 
also than in Latin, is one word or one sentence added to another 
in Greek without some Conjunction. The Asyndeton (ἀσύνδετον, 
want of connection) takes place more frequently only in an Hpez- 
egesis (ἐπεξήγησιο), 2. €., a Subsequent explanatory addition to some- 
thing already alluded to in the previous sentence: εἰμί τις γελοῖος 
ἰατρός ᾿ ἰώμενος μεῖζον τὸ νόσημα ποιῶ, 1 am an odd physician ; by 
curing the disease I make it worse. Wherever the Asyndeton oc- 
curs in other cases, the speaker generally intends to produce a 
special effect by it. . 


I. Copulative Conjunctions. 


ἢ 624. 6.1. The two Copulative Conjunctions are καί, 


which in general corresponds to the Latin e¢, and the post- 
positive enclitic τέ, which in general corresponds to the 
Latin gue. The language of poetry has besides ἠδέ and 
᾿δέ, With the meaning and [compare atque]. 


2. The Greeks, like the Romans, are fond of expressing 
the idea of addition in two connected parts of a sentence, 
either by καί---καί or ré—xal, or τέ---τέ: καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ 
κατὰ θάλασσαν, both by land and by water ; Hom. ᾿Ατρεϊδαί 
τε καὶ ἄλλοι ἐὐκνήμιδες ᾿Αχαιοί, ye Atride as well as ye 
other well-greaved Achwans ; Hom. αἰεὶ yap τοι ἔρις τε 
φίλη πόλεμοί τε μάχαι τε, for strife is always pleasant to 
you, and wars and battles. We may farther add the Epic 
ἠμέν---ἠδέ, a8 well—as also. 


Obs.—In single instances we also find 7i—é, where the second 
member is made more prominent by contrast. 
3. καί has, moreover, the meaning also : Hom. παρ᾽ ἔμοιγε 
kat ἄλλοι, οἵ κέ με τιμήσουσι, With me are also others, who 
will honov me. 


§ 625. THE PARTICLES. 337 


In this sense, also, καί is frequently used in both the 
connected parts of a sentence: καὶ ἡμῖν ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ἅπερ 
καὶ βασιλεῖ, we also approve the same thing as the king 
(does also). ‘The meaning also by intensification becomes 
even: καὶ λίαν, even very much; and in the opposite case 
even but: καὶ βραχὺν χρόνον, even but a short time. καὶ 
δέ answers to the English and also: δίκαιον καὶ πρέπον δὲ 
ἅμα, just and at the same time also becoming. 

After words of resemblance or likeness καί means as ὦ 
ὁμοίως Kal, gue ac. 

4. ἄλλως τε καί properly means “ both in other respects, and also ;” 
it serves to give prominence to the subsequent word or words, and 


_may be translated by especially: χαλεπόν ἐστι διαβαίνειν τὸν ποταμὸν 


ἄλλως τε Kai πολεμίων πολλῶν ἐγγὺς ὄντων, it is difficult to cross the river, 
especially as many of the enemy are near. καὶ δὴ καί is used to make 
the last part of a series emphatic: Herod. Κροίσου βασιλεύοντος ἀπι- 
κνέονται ἐς Σάρδις ἄλλοι τε ot πάντες ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος σοφισταί, καὶ δὴ Kai 
Σόλων, during the reign of Cresus there came from Hellas both all the 
other wise men and especially Solon {Lat. ceum—tum). 

5. In the Epic Dialect τέ is frequently employed to indicate the 
agreement not only of separate parts of a sentence, but of whole sen- 
tences, often, too, in connection with other Particles, such as καί, μέν, 
δέ, ἀλλά, and with relatives (cre, bcocre). In these cases τέ must gen- 
erally be left untranslated or rendered by an unaccented also: Hom. 
ὕς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ, whoever obeys the gods they 
greatly listen to him also. 

Obs.—The re in Were, οἵόςτε, Which occurs also in prose, is of the 

same origin. | 

6. The rising climax is also expressed by ov μόνον--- 
ἀλλὰ καί, not only—but also. On οὐχ ὅτι, μὴ ὅτι, ody 
ὅπως, see § 622. 

§ 625.1. The Particles οὐδέ, μηδέ and οὔτε, μήτε, serve 
to form a negative series. Two different meanings belong 
to οὐδέ and μηδέ, viz. : 

a) nor either, and not ; in this sense they are used to 
connect a single member of a sentence with a preceding 
one negatively: Hom. βρώμης οὐχ ἅπτεαι οὐδὲ ποτῆτος, 
you touch not meat nor drink either , πρὸς σοῦ οὐδ᾽ ἐμοῦ 
φράσω, to your advantage and not to mine 7 will speak. 

P 


338 THE PARTICLES. § 626. 


ὁ) also not, not even: tdrifw οὐδὲ τοὺς πολεμίους μενεῖν 
ἔτι, 7 hope that the enemy also will not longer stay; οὐδὲ 
τοῦτο ἐξῆν, not even this was allowed |ne hoc quidem lice- 
bat |. 

2. οὔτε---οὔτε, μήτε---μήτε, are used with mutual refer- 
ence to each other, and may be translated nezther—nor : 
Hom. οὔτε ποτ᾽ ἐς πόλεμον πωλέσκετο, οὔτε TOT εἰς ἀγορήν,, 
he neither went to war nor to the assembly. Sometimes‘ 
a negative member of a sentence is brought into relation 
with a positive one by means of οὔτε or μήτε---τέ | Latin 
neque —et|: ὥμοσαν μήτε προδώσειν ἀλλήλους σύμμαχοί 
τε ἔσεσθαι, they swore not to betray one another and to be 
allies. . 

Obs.—If something else be added to two members connected by 
οὔτε---οὔτε, OY μήτε---μήτε, 1t may be done by οὐδέ, μηδέ. When, 
on the contrary, οὐδὲ or μηδὲ corresponds to a preceding οὔτε or 
μήτε, it must be called an irregularity (compare ré—dé, ὃ 624, 2, 
Obs.), and the member thus added is emphatic: ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὔτε 
τούτων οὐδέν ἐστιν ἀληθές, οὐδὲ γ᾽ εἴ τινος ἀκηκόατε, ὡς ἐγὼ παιδεύειν 
ἐπιχειρῶ ἀνθρώπους, but neither is any of these things true, nor even 
of you have heard from any one that I undertake to train men. 


LI. Disjunctive Conjunctions. 

ὃ 626. 1. ἤ, carefully to be distinguished from ἢ (88 643, 
607), means 

@) or, and in this sense is often doubled: #—i, ecther— 
or, for which ἤτοι---ἢ is used when greater emphasis is to 
be given to the first member of a sentence: ἢ ἀστός τις ἢ 
ξένος, eether some citizen or a stranger. 

6) than, after comparatives and comparative adjectives 
like ἄλλος, aleus ; ἕτερος, alter; διάφορος, different ; ἐν- 
αντίος, opposed to, etc.: τίνι ἂν μᾶλλον πιστεύσαιμι ἢ σοί; 
whom should I trust more than you? οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐπιτη- 
δεύουσιν ἢ ἀποθνήσκειν, they think upon nothing else than 
dying. 

Obs.—After πλέον (πλεῖον, contracted πλεῖν), more, and ἔλαττον, μεῖον; 

less, ἤ 18. sometimes omitted with numerals, just as guam is after 


»τ. 


§ 629. THE PARTICLES. 339 


plus: ἔτη γεγονὼς πλεῖον ἑβδομήκοντα, more than seventy years old 
[ plus septuaginta annos natus|. The same is the case also after 
ἄλλο τι in questions (ὃ 608). 

§ 627. 2. εἴτε---εἴτε, ἐάντε---ἐάντε, are used like the Latin 
sive—sive, when it is to be left undecided which of two 
sides is to be chosen: εἴτε ἀληθὲς εἴτε ψεῦδος, οὐ καλόν μοι 
δοκεῖ τοῦτο τοὔνομα ἔχειν, Whether true or false, it seems to 
me not fair to have this name. 


Ill. Adversative Conjunctions. 

§ 628. 1. &2 expresses so slight a contrast or opposition 
that, though it is generally rendered by dut,it may also, 
and especially in Hom., be translated by and. ‘The Greeks, 
however, also like to indicate the first of two sentences 
which are contrasted to one another, and this they do by 
μέν, in truth, truly, indeed; but it may often be left un- 
translated: Hom. ἄλλοι μέν pa θεοί τε καὶ ἀνέρες ἱππο- 
κορυσταὶ εὗδον παννύχιοι, Δία δ᾽ οὐκ ἔχε νήδυμος ὕπνος, the 


other gods, indeed, and the horse-hair crested men slept 


through the night, but sweet sleep did not hold Zeus. As 
here, μέν---- δὲ express a contrast, so elsewhere they indicate 
only a difference: Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες 
δύο, πρεσ[θύτερος μὲν ᾿Αρταξέρξης, νεώτερος δὲ Κῦρος, Darius 
and Parysatis had two children, the elder Artaxeraes, the 
younger Cyrus; Hom. περὶ piv βουλῇ Δαναῶν περὶ δ᾽ ἔστε 
μάχεσθαι, in council on the one hand, and in battle on the 
other, you are distinguished among the Dana. 

Obs.—In Homer an Apodosis also may be opposed to its Protasis 
by means of δέ, especially when the Protasis is introduced by a 
temporal conjunction: ἕως ὁ ταῦθ᾽ ὥρμαινε κατὰ φρένα καὶ κατὰ 
θυμόν, ἦλθε δ᾽ ᾿Αθήνη, while he pored on this in his mind and spirit 
Athene came. This is founded on a combination of co-ordination 
and subordination. Compare ὃ 519, 1 and 5, Obs. 

- ὃ 629. 2. ἀλλά, yet, but (originally Acc. Plur. Neut. of 
ἄλλος), denotes a stronger contrast than δέ: Hom. ἔνθ᾽ 
ἄλλοι μὲν πάντες ἐπευφήμησαν ᾿Αχαιοί ----ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ᾿Ατρείδῃ 
᾿Αγαμέμνονι ἥνδανε θυμῷ, ἀλλὰ κακῶς ἀφίει, then all the 


340 THE PARTICLES. ὃ 630. 


other Achwans assented, yet it did not meet the feelings 
of Atrides Agamemnon, but he harshly dismissed him. 


Obs. 1.—After a hypothetical sentence either expressed, or under- 
stood, ἀλλά, sometimes with a strengthening γέ added to it, may 
frequently be rendered by but or yet at least: εἰ μὴ προ ἀλλὰ 
πολλά γ᾽ ἴστε, if not all, yet you know at least much ; Poet. ὦ θεοὶ 
πατρῷοι δ ὐῥῥὲνέσϑι γ᾽ ἀλλὰ νῦν, oh gods of my Fathers be with me at 
least now [if not before]. 


Obs. 2.—adda frequently serves to break off a long discussion and 
emphatically to introduce a request: Hom. ἀλλὰ πίθεσθε καὶ tupec, 
but do you also follow me. 


Obs. 3.—After negatives ἀλλ᾽ 7} or ἀλλά alone means eacept : ἀργύριον 
μὲν οὐκ ἔχω ἀλλ᾽ ἢ μικρόν τι, 1 have no money except a little. On οὐ 
"μὴν ἀλλά, § 622, 6. Ἶ 

§ 630. Other Conjunctions which point out a contrast or — 

a transition to something different are: 

3. av, αὖτε, properly again, then on the other hand, yet. 

4. Hom. αὐτάρ, and ἀτάρ, but, on the contrary, yet. 

5, μέντοι, certainly, however, see ὃ 643, 13, 

6. καίτοι, and yet, still. 

7. ὅμως, nevertheless, yet, denotes a strong contrast | Lat. 

tamen, nihilonunus |. On ὅμως as a supplement to a par- 
ticiple, § 587, 5. 


IV. Conjunctions of Comparison. 

. ὃ 631. 1. we, as (Lat. ut), 
is properly the adverb of ὅς, 7, 6. It differs in accent from 
ὥς, 80 or thus (ὃ 99), except when in poets and the Homeric 
Dialect it is placed after the word compared (ὃ 98, a), in 
which case it is oxytone: πατὴρ ὡς ἤπιος ἧεν, he was gen- 
tle as a father. Like the Lat. wt, it is employed in very 
different ways: ; ) 

a) In its original comparative sense ὡς means as or how, 
and is used in comparisons ¢ we βούλει, as you wish ; μα- 
Kpov we γέροντι, far for me an old man (Lat. tanquamy) ; 
Hom. ὥς μοι δέχεται κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ αἰεί (how with me one 
evil always follows another, Lat. quam); with superlatives 


§ 652. THE PARTICLES. 341 


like the Lat. guam : we τάχιστα, quam celerrime, as quich- 
ly as possible (compare ὅτι). In statements of number and 
measure it means about, nearly: we δέκα, about ten; we 
ἐπὶ τὸ πολύ, for the most part; with verbs of motion or 
action it indicates what is merely intended, apparent: amy 
we εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους, he went away in the direction of the 
enemy (as if he went against the enemy); hence it occurs 
with participles in the manner described § 588. On its 
use with the Infinitive, § er and on we as a preposition, 
8 450. 


ὁ) In a temporal sense we means when, as soon as (com- 
pare Lat. wt): Hom. we cid’, ὥς μιν μᾶλλον ἔδυ χόλος, when 
he saw him, anger pierced him the more; we τάχιστα ἕως 
ὑπέφαινεν, ἐθύοντο, as soon as dawn appeared, they sacri- 
jiced | Lat. ut primum). 


c) In a causal sense we means as (Latin quuim), since, 
and with subsequent statement of the reason, for: ἕέομαι 
σοῦ παραμεῖναι, ὡς ἐγὼ ἧδιστα ἀκούσαιμι σοῦ, 7 beg you to 
stay here, as I should hear you with the greatest pleas- 
ure. 


d) After verbs of saying and declaring ὡς means that : 
ἧκεν ἀγγέλλων τις, ὡς ᾿Ελάτεια κατείληπται, some One Came 
announcing that Hlatwa has been taken. ὃ 526, ὁ. 


6) we is rarely used in a consecutive sense, so that (ὥςτε). 


J) In a final sense we means in order that : ὡς μὴ πάντες 
ὄλωνται, in order that all may not perish. Compare § 530, 
etc. 


g) On ὡς expressing a wish (Lat. wtinam), see ὃ 514. 


. § 632. 2. ὥςπερ, as, 
is only a strengthened we (compare § 641, 3), and is used 
only in a comparative sense. 


3. ὅπως, how, that, in order that, 
is principally used as a final Conjunction, and may then 


ee! aM ee ὁ 
th ον te ee 
- . Ὁ 


942 THE PARTICLES. § 633. 


be translated by that, or in order that, compare § 530, ete. 
On οὐχ ὅπως, ὃ 622, 4. 


4. ὥστε, as, 80 that, 
has rarely the comparative meaning as, generally the con- 
secutive so that, when it is followed either by an Infinitive 
or a finite verb. Compare § 565. 


5. Hom. jure, as, just as, like, only in comparisons. 


§ 633. V. Declarative Conjunctions. 


1. ὅτι, that, because | Lat. quod}, 
is originally nothing but the Neuter of the pronoun ὅςτις, 
ὅ 7,0n the distinction of which from ὅτι, compare ὃ 214, 
Obs. 2. Like the Latin guod, ὅτι has two principal mean- 
ings, the declarative that and the causal because. 


a) ὅτι means that after verbs of saying and declaring 
(compare ἃ 525): Ἡράκλειτος λέγει, ὅτι πάντα χωρεῖ καὶ 
οὐδὲν μένει, Heraclitus says that every thing moves, and 
nothing is stationary. Hence the phrase δῆλον ὅτι (also 
written δηλονότι), it ἐδ clear that, manifestly. 


Obs.—Sometimes, also, a direct speech is introduced by ὅτι, so that 
the Conjunction is, as it were, a mere sign of quotation: ἐδήλου 
ἡ γραφή, ὅτι Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω παρὰ σέ, the letter stated (that) I The- 
mistocles am come to you. 


ὦ) because, that |Lat. guod|: Hom. χωόμενος, ὅτ᾽ ἄρι- 
στον ᾿Αχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας, angry that you have not hon- 
ored the best of the Achwans. 

The use of ὅτι (or 6 τι) with a superlative deserves at- 
tention: ὅτι τάχιστα like ὥς τάχιστα, as quickly as possi- 
ble; and ὅτι μή, except, besides: οὐκ ἦν κρήνη ὅτι μὴ μία, 
there was no fountain except one. 

2. ὡς, that, § 631, d. 

3. διότι, that, § 636, 2. 


4. οὕνεκα, that, ὃ 636, 3. 


§ 635. THE PARTICLES. 343 


VI. Lemporal Conjunctions. 

§ 634. (Respecting the Moods, see ὃ 556, etc.) 

1. ὅτε, ὁπότε, when, as [quando, cum]: ὅταν, ὁπόταν, 
when, if: ἦν ποτε χρόνος, ὅτε θεοὶ μὲν ἦσαν, θνητὰ δὲ γένη 
οὐκ ἦν, there once was a time when gods existed, but mor- 
tal races did not exist; Hom. οἱ δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ λιμένος πολυ- 
βενθέος ἐντὸς ἵκοντο, ἱστία μὲν στείλαντο, but when they got 
within the deep harbor they furled the sails. ὅτε and 
ὁπότε with the Optative, according to ὃ 558, Ods. 1, mean 
whenever, as often as: Hom. ἔνθα πάρος coma? ὅτε μιν 
γλυκὺς ὕπνος ἱκάνοι, where formerly he used to lie down 
whenever sweet sleep came upon him. Sometimes ὅτε has 
the causal meaning s7nce. 


2. Hom. εὖὗτε-- ὅτε. 


3. ἡνίκα, ὁπηνίκα, When, at the time when (ὃ 217), de- 
notes rather a point of time: ἡνίκα ἦν δείλη, ἐξαπίνης ἐπι- 
φαίνονται οἱ πολέμιοι, when tt was evening the enemy sud- 


denly appeared. 
4. ἦμος, poet. when : 


Hom. ἦμος δ᾽ ἠέλιος μέσον οὐρανὸν ἀμφιβεβήκει, καὶ τότε δὴ χρύσεια 
πατὴρ ἐτίταινε τάλαντα, when (at the moment) the sun had entered 
mid heaven, just then the father raised the golden scales. 


§ 635. 5. ἐπεί, after, when, as: ἐπεάν, ἐπήν, ἐπάν, when ; 
Hom. αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ πόσιος καὶ ἐδητύος ἐξ ἔρον ἕντο, but when 
they had quenched the desire for food and drink; Κῦρος 
ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὰν 
εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἧκωσιν, Cyrus promised to give each man 
Jive silver mine when they should come to Babylon. ἐπεί 
frequently introduces a reason, and then is to be translated 
by because or for: Hom. ἀλλὰ πίθεσθε καὶ ὕμμες, ἐπεὶ 
πείθεσθαι ἄμεινον, but do you also obey me, for ἐξ rs better 
to obey. ὁ 


6. ἐπειδή, NOW Since, since: ἐπειδάν, When, is ἐπεί strength- 
ened by δή (§ 642), and points more strongly to the reason 


344 THE PARTICLES. § 636. 


assigned than ἐπεί : ἐπειδὴ ἀνεῴχθη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, εἰς- 
ἤλθομεν, now since the prison was opened we entered. 

7. ἕως, as long as, till [quamdiu, dum, donec|: ἕως ἔτι 
ἐλπίς, as long as there is still hope; περιεμένομεν ἕως avor- 
χθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, we waited till the prison should be 
opened. 

8. ἔστε ; ag | 

9. μέχρι, ἄχρι (compare ὃ 455 ue 

10. poet. ὄφρα, as long as, till : 

Hom. ὄφρα μὲν ἠὼς ἦν, as long as it was morning ; Hom. ἔχει κότον, 

ὄφρα τελέσσῃ, he nurses wrath till he fulfills it. ὄφρα is very often 
a Particle of purpose or intention, and then to be translated by 
that, in order that: Hom. ὄφρα μὴ οἷος ἀγέραστος éw, in order that 
I may not be alone unhonored. 

11. πρίν, before, sooner | priusquam| (compare ὃ 565), 
is joined sometimes with the Infinitive, sometimes with a 
finite verb. Its original adverbial meaning, previously, 
earlier, has been preserved, especially in τὸ πρίν, formerly. - 
In Hom. the Conjunction zpiv may refer back to the ad- 
verb πρίν : οὐδ᾽ ὅγε πρὶν Δαναοῖσιν ἀεικέα λοιγὸν ἀπώσει, 
πρίν γ᾽ ἀπὸ πατρὶ φίλῳ δόμεναι ἑλικώπιδα κούρην, and he 
will not avert the dreadful suffering from the Danazi be- 
fore they have given back the quick-eyed maiden to her 
Sather. 


12. πάρος, Hom. = piv. 


VII. Causal Conjunctions. 

§ 636. 1. ὅτι, ἃ 633,60. 

2. διότι, because, properly διὰ τοῦτο ort, for this reason 
that, or that. 

3. οὕνεκα, because, poet., from ov ἕνεκα, for τούτου ἕνεκα 
ὅτι, for this reason that; because, also declarative that. 
So likewise ὁθούνεκα from ὅτου (οὗτινος) ἕνεκα. 

4. ἐπεί, § 635, 5. 

5, ors, § 634, 1. 

6. yap (always postpositive), for, namely, to wit. Spe- 
cial peculiarities in the use of yap are: 


§ 637. THE PARTICLES. 345 


a@) In animated discourse the sentence containing a rea- 
son is often put before the one for which the reason is 
given, especially after a Vocative: Hom. ᾿Ατρείδη, πολλοὶ 
yap τεθνᾶσι καρηκομόωντες ᾿Αχαιοί ---τῷ oe χρὴ πόλεμον 
παῦσαι, Atrides, for many rich-haired Acheans have died, 
therefore you ought to put an end to the war. 

ὁ) By namely, yap may be translated when it introduces 
the substance of a speech or opinion before announced, so 
especially after τεκμήριον δέ, μαρτύριον δέ (supply ἔστι), for 
that there is a proof, a testimony. 

c) In answers yap may often be rendered by yes, cer- 
tainly, but must in reality be explained by an ellipsis: 
ἀγωνιστέον piv ἄρα ἡμῖν πρὸς τοὺς ἄνδρας ; ἀνάγκη γάρ, 
ἔφη, must we then contend with the men? yes, it is nec- 
essary, said he—the complete answer would be, we must 
contend, for it vs necessary. ; 

d@) In animated questions γάρ serves to give emphasis 
like the Lat.nam.: τί γάρ; quidnam? how so? ἦ yap; 
ov γάρ; 18 it not so? πῶς yap ov; how could tt be other- 
wise? si yap is the Lat. wtinam. adda yap [at enim] 
corresponds to the English but surely ; οὐ yap ἀλλά prop- 
erly: for it is not so, but, hence however. 


VILL. Inferential Conjunctions. 


§ 637. 1. dpa (Ep. ap and enclitic pa, poet. also dpa, 
postpositive), then, therefore, accordingly, always refers to 
something known or resulting from what has gone before. 
It is most frequently used in Homer to connect sentences 
slightly: ὡς ap’ ἔφη, thus then he spoke; ᾽Ατρείδης δ᾽ apa 
νῆα θοὴν ἅλαδε προέρυσσεν, and Atrides accordingly drew 
the fleet ship to the sea (as was to be expected). οὐκ apa 
often means not forsooth, εἰ apa vf then or if perhaps, and 
in indirect questions whether perhaps. 

On the Interrogative dpa, ὃ 607, ὁ. 

2. οὖν (New Ion. ὧν, postpositive), then, consequently, is 

2 : 


346 THE PARTICLES. § 638. 


more emphatic than ἄρα: Hom. ἤτοι νόστος ἀπώλετο πα- 
τρὸς ἐμοῖο" οὔτ᾽ οὖν ἀγγελίῃ ἔτι πείθομαι, εἴ ποθεν ἔλθοι, 
οὔτε θεοπροπίης ἐμπάζομαι, surely my fathers return ts 
lost, therefore I no longer believe a message, uf one comes 
Srom any where, nor concern myself about prophecy. μὲν 
οὖν (compare ὃ 643, 12), no doubt, certainly, well then ; 
δ᾽ οὖν, certainly; ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, but certainly; yap οὖν, yet 
surely. When joined to relatives, οὖν has the generalizing 
meaning of the Lat. cunque: ὁςτιςοῦν, whoever, quicunque 
($$ 218, 600). 

By combination with οὖν we obtain the WVegative ovk- 
ουν, not then, to be carefully distinguished from οὐκοῦν, 
which is properly an Interrogative, not then? but as an 
aijirmative answer is expected after an interrogative with 
ov (ὃ 608), it has acquired the positive meaning, therefore, 
accordingly, NOW : οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, hence ΤΣ not think 
so; Poet. οὐκοῦν ὅταν δὴ μὴ σθένω, πεπαύσομαι, well, then, 
L will cease when I really have no strength. 


3. viv (enclitic, postpositive), a weakened νῦν, corre- 
sponds to the unaccented English now. 

4. τοίνυν, hence, therefore, surely, is a νύν strengthened 
by the assuring τοί (ὃ 643, 10). | 

5. rotyap, so then, therefore, yet ; more emphatic τοιγάρ- 
τοι, TOLyYapOUV. 


6. ὥςτε, 80 that, ὃ 632, 4. 


IX. Final Conjunctions. 
(Respecting the Moods, § 530, etc.) 


§ 638. 1. ἵνα, that, in order that,in order to | Lat. ut], 
as an adverb also signifies where in a relative sense and in 
indirect questions: οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἵν᾽ εἶ κἀκόθᾳ do you not see 
in what (position of ) ev 2 you are? ‘va as a Particle of 
purpose is elliptical in ἵνα ri; where γένηται must be sup- 
plied, 2. ¢., that what may happen? why? 


8. 639. THE PARTICLES. 347 


On 2. ὡς and 
3. ὅπως, see §§ 631, 632, 3. 
4. ὄφρα, § 635, 10. 
5. w= Lat. ne, that not, in order that not, δὲ 530, 
etc.,614; after verbs of fearing, ὃ 616, Obs. 3. 


X. [Typothetical Conjunctions. 
(Respecting the Moods, § 535, etc.) 

§ 639. 1. ci, 2f, 
in indirect questions whether, § 610; in wishes (where εἴθε» 
εἰ yap are also used), 2f only, ἐγ) but, § 514. Observe also 
εἰ μή in the sense of except, like the Lat. nist: ἡμῖν οὐδέν 
ἐστιν ἀγαθὸν ἄλλο εἰ μὴ ὅπλα καὶ ἀρετή, we have no other 
good except weapons and valor; εἰ μὴ εἰ, nist si, unless ; 
εἴπερ, Siquidem, if indeed, certainly vf, contains an em- 
phatic assurance: Poet. ἦ καὶ γεγηθὼς ταῦτ᾽ ἀεὶ λέξειν do- 
κεῖς ; εἴπερ τί γ᾽ ἔστι τῆς ἀληθείας σθένος, do you really 
think you will always speak thus joyously? (answer) if 
indeed (certainly if) there ts any force in truth. 

2. ἐάν, 1. 6.. εἰ ἄν (ἄν, ἢν). af; 
in indirect questions, whether, § 610. 

3. av, 7 suppose, perhaps (postpositive), 
always denotes that something may happen only under 
certain conditions, and hence is often untranslatable. 


On av with the (potential) Optative, ὃ 516. 


zal «« (hypothetical) Indicative, ὃ 537. 

τ «« Indicative, denoting repetition, ὃ 494. 

ἐξ « Future Indicative, ὃ 500, Obs. 

rs «© Subjunctive with relatives, § 554. 

“ sl $s with particles of time, § 557. 
εξ ‘© Infinitive, ὃ8. 575, 576. , 
ss > Participles, § 595. 


Obs.—day is often used twice in the same clause: οὐκ ἂν ὀρθῶς οὐδ᾽ 
ὑγιῶς ὁ τοῦτο ποιήσας περὶ οὐδενὸς ἂν λογίσαιτο, he who did this would 
not, I suppose, judge correctly or soundly about any thing. 


348. THE PARTICLES. τς ὃ 640. 


4, Hom. κέ, κέν (enclitic and postpositive) is used almost entirely 
like ἄν. 


XI. Concessive Conjunctions. 


§ 640. 1. εἰ καί (ἐὰν καί), 2f even, although, 
denotes a simple concession: poet. πόλιν, εἰ καὶ μὴ βλέ- 
πεις, φρονεῖς δ᾽ ὅμως, ola νόσῳ ξύνεστιν, though you have 
not sight, yet you are aware in what misery the city rs 
involved. 


2. καὶ εἰ (καὶ ἐάν, kav), even vf, even though, 
denotes an emphatic concession, like etiamst: ἡγεῖτο av- 
δρὸς εἶναι ἀγαθοῦ ὠφελεῖν τοὺς φίλους, καὶ εἰ μηδεὶς μέλλοι 
εἴσεσθαι, he deemed it to belong to a good man to benefit 
his friends, even if no one should know tt. 


Obs.—The distinction between εἰ cai and καὶ εἰ consists mainly in 
the former giving the emphasis of the καί to the Protasis, the 
latter to the Apodosis. Hence the meaning is in many cases al- - 
most the same. 


3. καίπερ With the participle, ὃ 587, 5 


In the Apodosis, the Concessive Conjunctions are often followed 
by opwe, notwithstanding, § 630, 7. 


B) Particles of Emphasis. 


ὃ 641. 1. γέ (enclitic and postpositive), a¢ least | Latin: 
quidem |, gives the word before it greater weight, and is 
often represented in other languages merely by a more 
emphatic accent on the word to which ye is attached: 
Hom. εἴπερ yap “Ἕκτωρ ye κακὸν καὶ ἀνάλκιδα φήσει, ἀλλ᾽ 
οὐ πείσονται Τρῶες, for if Hector shall call (you) base 
and effeminate, yet the Trojans will not belreve (it); 
Hom. ἀλλὰ σύ, εἰ δύνασαί γε, περίσχεο παιδός, but do you, 
if you can, protect your son; τοῦτό γε οἶμαι ὑμᾶς ἅπαντας 
ἠσθῆσθαι, this at least 7 CEA you all have perceived ; 
Hom. ὅτις τοιαῦτά ye ῥέζοι, whoever should do such things. 
γε is very frequently affixed to pronouns: ἔγωγε, ego gut- 


§ 642. THE PARTICLES. 349 


dem, oye (Hom. he, he specially); ὅςγε strengthened ὅς, 
gue quidem. | 

2. γοῦν (postpositive), αὐ least | Lat. certe], is compound- 
ed of γέ and οὖν, and hence more emphatic than γε alone. 

3. πέρ (enclitic and postpositive), 7ust, exactly, very, 
shortened from the adverb περί, very (δ 466), serves to give 
precision to the relative: oc¢mep (ὃ 218), the very one who ; 
ὥςπερ, Just as. In Homer it is added to participles in a 
sense similar to that of καίπερ (ὃ 587, 5): und οὕτως aya- 
θός περ ἐὼν θεοείκελ᾽ ᾿Α χιλλεῦ κλέπτε νόῳ, be not so stealthy 
in purpose, divine Achilles, ae you are so very noble 
(ironical). 


§ 642. 4. δή _icertarnls y, to be sure, well then, therefore), 
points to what is obvious in a περ idea or in a whole 
sentence. δή is used principally in three ways: 

a) to emphasize single words: ποῖά ἐστιν ἃ ἡμᾶς ὠφελεῖ ; 
ὑγίεια καὶ ἰσχὺς Kat κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή, What kind of 
things are those which .benefit us? health, and strength, 
and beauty, and, certainly, wealth; δῆλα δή, to be sure tt 
as clear ; νῦν ὁρᾶτε δή, now you surely see; ἄγε δή, well! 
come; ri δή ; what then? μάλιστα δή, very much so, at the 
beginning ofan apodosis; καὶ τότε δή, now, just then. On 
καὶ δὴ καί, ὃ 624, 4. 

ὦ) to confirm a sentence by referring to what precedes : 
τὸν piv δὴ πέμπει, him, then, he sends; Poet. οἱ τηλικοίδε 
καὶ διδαξόμεσθα δὴ φρονεῖν πρὸς ἀνδρὺς τηλικοῦδε ; WE Even 
at such an age are, then (according to the preceding 
speeches), to be taught wisdom by a man of such an 
age? we ἕν τινι φρουρᾷ ἐσμεν of ἄνθρωποι, καὶ οὐ δεῖ δὴ 
ἑαυτὸν ἐκ ταύτης λύειν, We men are, as ἐξ were, placed 
at some post, and ut ἐδ therefore not proper to aban- 
don it. 

¢) referring to time, very much like the aie of time, 
ἤδη, Lat. jams cat πολλὰ δὴ ἄλλα λέξας εἶπεν, and after 
having already stated many other things, he said; νῦν δή, 


350 THE PARTICLES. ὃ 643. 


just now. Hom. τὰ δὴ νῦν πάντα τελεῖται, Gll that 4s gust 
now being done. 
5. δήπου, surely, I suppose, also δήπουθεν, 
is often used ironically in assertions which admit of no reply: 
τρέφεται δὲ ψυχὴ τίνι; μαθήμασι δήπου, the soul is nourished by what? - 
(answer) surely by learning. τί δήπου, well, then, what do you sup- 
pose ? 
6. δῆτα, certainly, 
negative οὐ δῆτα, certainly not ; ri δῆτα, well! what then ὃ 
- ἢ, δῆθεν, clearly, evidently. 
8. dai, 
another form of δή, but only used in questions: τί dai; well! 
what? how so? 
§ 643. 9. ἢ, verely, truly 
(to be distinguished from ἤ, 07, than, § 626), strengthens 
an assurance. ἢ μήν (Hom. 4 μέν) ji is the common form 
of an oath: ὥμοσαν ὅρκους ἦ μὴν μὴ μνησικακήσειν, they 
swore that ther y would truly not cherish revenge. On the - 
Interrogative 7, $$ 607, 608. 
In Homer ἢ is appended to ἐπεί and τί, to add strength 
to them: ἐπεὶ ἦ, τί 7), for which also ἐπειή, τιή is written. 
10. rot (enclitic and postpositive), 1 assure you, let me tell you. 
οὔτοι, truly not; strengthened forms: roiyap, τοιγαροῦν, rovydpro 
(ἢ 687, 5). 
11. ἤτοι, verily, faith (ἢ and roi), 
serves as a naive assurance in Epic poetry: ἤτοι by ὼς εἰπὼν Kar 
ἄρ᾽ ἕζετο, now when he had so spoken he sat down. 
On the disjunctive ἤτοι----ἤ, either, or, see ὃ 626, a. 
12. μήν (Hom. μάν, μέν), verily, truly [Latin verwm, 
vero |, 
Hom. ὧδε yap ἐξερέω, καὶ μὴν τετελεσμένον ἔσται, for 80 
will I speak out, and truly it will be fulfilled; τί μήν; 
why! what? why not? (compare ὃ 404, Ods.). 
13. μέντοι, yet, however, certainly, Lat. vero, 
from μέν, the weaker form of μήν : ἐς Οἰνιάδας ἐστράτευσαν 
καὶ ἐπολιόρκουν, οὐ μέντοι εἷλόν γε, ἀλλ᾽ ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ 
οἴκου, they made an expedition against Eniade, and be~. 


§ 643. THE PARTICLES. 351 


sieged it; yet they did not conquer it, but returned 
home. 


14. ναί, yed, in fact. 


15. vn, truly, 
followed by the names of gods in the Accusative, who are 
invoked as witnesses in an oath: νὴ Δία, by Zeus. 


16. μά, truly, 
in negative oaths: ov μὰ Δία, no, by Zeus ; also in positive 
ones, when vai precedes: vai μὰ Ala, truly by Zeus (ὃ 399, 


Obs.). 


17. Hom. θήν (enclitic), truly, surely, 
similar to the Attic δήπου (ὃ 642, 5), often with an ironical mean- 
ing: οὔ θήν μιν πάλιν αὖτις ἀνήσει θυμὸς ἀγήνωρ νεικείειν βασιλῆας, 
his courageous heart will surely not again incite him to taunt kings. 


APPENDIX. 


VERSIFICATION. 


§ 644. In poetry, regard is had in the selection and ar- 
rangement of words to the quantity of syllables. The reg- 
ular recurrence of long and short syllables creates rhythm, 
or measure, by which each verse has a regular movement 
and flow of its own. 

1. Verse.—Each single line is a verse. 

2. Frer.—A verse is composed of arrangements of syl- 
lables by twos, threes, etc., called fee?. 


3. Merre.—The arrangement of feet by which a verse is 
constituted is called metre, and the kind of metre is named 
from the prevailing foot. Thus iambic metre signifies a 
metre of which the iambus is the fundamental foot. 


Obs.—In the terms monometer, dimeter, etc., “‘meter” signifies the 
number of times a foot or a group of feet is used in the verse; 
6. g.,in dactylic, Ionic, and bacchic metres one foot forms a 
“meter ;” and a dactylic, Ionic, or bacchic dimeter, trimeter, 
tetrameter, hexameter, is a metre of two, three, four, and six feet 
respectively. In all other verse two feet form a “ meter;” and 
an iambic dimeter, for example, or trimeter, tetrameter, or hex- 
ameter, is a metre of four, six, eight, and twelve feet respectively. 

For rules of quantity, compare §§ 74-78. 


ἃ 645. Kinps or FEET. 


1. Four Dissyllabic: 
— — Spondee (two long syllables). 
— ~ 'Trochee (one long and one short syllable). 
~ - Jambus. 


cae b vrrhic. 


964 APPENDIX. § 646 


59 


. Hight Trisyllabic: 
— — — Molossus. 

— Bacchius. 

~ Antibacchius. 

τ ΟΘΒΟΟΣΝ 

~ ~ — Anapest. 

— ~ — Creticus. 

~ — ~ Amphibrach. 


~ ~~ ‘Tribrach. 


3. Sixteen Tetrasyllabic : 
~ ~~~ Proceleusmatic. 
ποῦ ας nat oN HE yep reid Go: τ εἰ 
~ — ~~ Second Peon. 
ee Phird Peon: 
~ ~-~- = Fourth ‘Peon: 
Tonicus a Majore. 
— Jonicus a Minore. 
— Choriambus. 
~ — — ~ Antispast. 
τ Duiambus. 
Boe δι τοοῆθο. 
γπ-π- First Epitritus. 
—~-—-— Second Epitritus. 
——~- Third Epitritus. 
—— — ~ Fourth Epitritus. 
~ Dispondee. 


§ 646. RESOLUTION AND ConTRACTION.—A long syl- 
lable is considered equal in time to two short ones. Hence 
a long quantity may be resolved into two short ones, or two 
short ones may be contracted into a long one. Thus a 
dactyl by contraction may be replaced by a spondee, or a 
spondee by resolution by a dactyl; and a dactyl, first by 
contraction, then by resolution, may pass over into an ana- 
pest. . 

§ 647. 1. Arsis AND TueEsis.—One syllable of every 


§ 647. APPENDIX. 355 — 


foot receives a stronger emphasis—ictus—than the others. 
This emphasis is called the arsis (ἄρσις, raising). The 
thesis (ϑέσις, laying down) is the lowering of the voice 
which occurs in the pronunciation of the other syllables. 


a. The syllable upon which the arsis occurs is said to stand in ar- 
sis, and those upon which the thesis, in thesis. Less properly 
the syllables themselves are called arsis and thesis. 

ὃ. Each foot properly has its own arsis, but when a foot stands for 
another (§ 646) it takes the arsis of that foot. Thus, in ana- 
pestic metre,a dactyl taking the place of an anapest will re- 
ceive the arsis upon the second syllable instead of the first. 


2. CasurA.—The regular arrangement of syllables in 
feet has the effect, in most kinds of verse, of dividing each 
verse into two rhythmical parts. The pause between the. 
two is called a cesura, a cutting (cedo, to cut). It, of 
course, always occurs at the end of a word, never in a 
word; while it may occur either in a foot, separating one 
part from another, or at the end of a foot. 


a. The ending of a word at any time before the ending of a foot is 
a cesura of the foot. When the cesura falls between the arsis 
and thesis of a foot, it is a cesura also of the rhythm. The 
principal cesura, which divides a verse into two equal or nearly 
equal parts, is called the ceesura of the verse. There are, there- 
fore, three cesure : 

1. Cesura of the foot. 
2. Cesura, of the rhythm. 
3. Casura of the verse. 


3. CATALECTIC, ACATALECTIC, AND HYPERCATALEC- 
T1c.—If the last foot of a verse is not complete, the verse: 
is called catalectic (καταληκτικός, leaving off, stopping). A 
complete verse is acatalectic, and one more than complete 
is hypercatalectic. 


4. SYNCOPE. — Sometimes one or more theses will be 
omitted, and thus a modification of ets occurs; this is 
called syncope. 


5. ANACRUSIS.—An_ unaccented Pietle prefixed to a 


306 APPENDIX. § 648, 


verse beginning with an accented syllable is called an ana- 
crusts. It sometimes consists of two short syllables. 


6. Basis AND Ecsasis.—A trochee, iambus, tribrach, or 
spondee may be used to introduce a verse in the same way 
as the anacrusis, and is then called a daszs (step). The 
same placed at the end of a verse is called echasis. 


Note—Anacrusis, basis, and ecbasis are extra rhythmic, 7. 6., count 
as no part of the metre. 


§ 648. ARRANGEMENT OF VERSES.—Verses may be 
arranged— 

1. by the line, ὃ. 6., by the continued repetition of one 
kind of verse, as in dactylic hexameter or iambic trimeter ; 


2. by distichs (δίστιχος, double row), 2. é., by couplets of 
verses, the one differing from the other in length or in 
kind, or both, as in elegiac verse (difference in length), and 
in lyric verse when an iambic verse will alternate with 8 a 
trochaic ; 


3. by systenvs, ὦ. é., a number of verses in connected series, 
concluding with a verse either catalectic or of particuiar 
rhythm, and thus forming a whole; for example, an ana- 
peestic system is a succession of anapzstic dimeters acata- 
lectic, with sometimes a monometer, and always ending 
with the dimeter catalectic (parcemiac) ; 


4. by strophe and antistrophe. A strophe (στροφή; a 
turning) is a combination of several verses, either like or 
different, into a rhythmical whole. It may be repeated. 
When repeated once only, the second is called an ant- 
strophe. 

The strophe was sung by the chorus in tragedy or com- 
edy when making an evolution from right to left of the 
orchestra, and the antistrophe in making the return move- 
ment. 


a.'To a strophe and antistrophe a third strophe differing in form 
may be added as a conclusion, and is called an epode ; or it may 


§ 649. APPENDIX. 357 


precede, and is then called a proode; or it may come between, 
and is then called a mesode. 


DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 

ὃ 649. Dactytic Verse.—The fundamental foot is the 
dactyl. By contraction of the last two quantities into one, 
a long syllable may take the place of the two short ones, 
and so a spondee replace a dactyl. The long quantity, 
however, as a rule, can not be resolved into two short ones, 
so that only in rare cases does a proceleusmatic (~ ~ ~ ~) 
replace a dactyl. The arses falls upon the first syllable. 
The rhythms commonly used are the following: 


1. Dimeter (compare ὃ 644, 3, Obs.) : 


tEaviceic χρέος, τ , soph. (Βα. Tyr., 157. 
ὦ μεγάλα φάτις, ὦ,-- ~ ~ — ~ ~ — (hypercatalectic or penthemi- 
meris), Soph. Ajax, 173. 


ὧδε πρόκειμαι, — ~~ — ~ (catalectic), Soph. Ajax, 427. 
2. Trimeter : 
> , ἢ aan . 
μᾳ κράτος ἀντίπαλον Ζεὺς, - ~ ~ -- © τ - ΔΒ Bra Vanets 
537. 


εἴτ᾽ ἐπὶ τὰς avidpove,— ~ π΄ ~ ~ — (catalectic or penthemime- 
ris; same as dimeter hypercatalectic), Eur. Alc., 115. 


3. Tetrameter: 


ἡ pa σε Ταυροπόλα Διὸς ἤλρτεμις, — ~ ~ — © ey na eee 
Ajax, 172. 

καρποφόρου Λιβύας, ἱερὰν, - “- ~~ ~ -- τὺ — (catalectic), Pind. 
Pyth. IV., 6. 

τῶν μεγάλων Δαναῶν ὕπο KAylopévay, —~ ~ ~~~ -~ yen é ρας 


(hypercatalectic), Soph. Ajax, 225. 
4. Pentameter (the pentameter acatalectic does not oc- 


cur): 
minor, AIALvOY εἶπε, TO ὃ eu vicar, ~~ Se 
(catalectic in dissyllabam), Asch. Agam., 121. 
(The catalectic in syllabam = tetrameter hypercatalectic.) 


5. Hexameter : 
τῷ ἴκελος πολέεσσιν ὀχήσατο κύμασιν Ἑρμῆς, 
ath βη δι τς φῦ ἐν. εὐ ν ἐπ, ἢ , Odyss., ὅ ; 54. 


358 APPENDIX. ὃ 650. 


6. Elegiac distich consists of a dactylic hexameter and 
a dactylic pentameter (so called, really two catalectic tri- 
meters): 
ᾧχετο μὲν Πίστις, thet θεός, ῴχετο δ᾽ ἀνδρῶν 
Σωφροσύνη, Peete τ᾽, ὦ φίλε, γῆν ἔλιπον. 


— ὐ,͵, aes ll ta ee ie ee ee ee 


ὃ 650. HexamMETER.—This is the metre of Epic poetry, 
6. 5.. of the Iliad and Odyssey of Homer. It is therefore 
called Epic or Heroic hexameter. A spondee may stand 
in any place, or in all the places at once. It always stands 
in the last place. A dactyl regularly occupies the fifth 
place, but sometimes a spondee, and then the verse is called 
spondaic. The cesura regularly occurs after the arsis of 
the third foot, but sometimes in the thesis of the third foot 
or after the arsis of the fourth. A cesura after the fourth 
foot is called the bucolic, from its frequent use in pastoral 
poetry. 

§ 651. TrRocHatc Versr.—The fundamental foot 15 the 
trochee. By protraction of the short quantity, a spondee 
may replace the trochee, or, by resolution of the long, a 
tribrach may replace the trochee. The arsis falls on the 
first syllable. ‘The rhythms used are the following: 


1. Monometer, not used alone, but always with other 
rhythms. Compare Logacedic Verse. 

2. Tripody (ithyphallicus) : 

ἦν ὁ ταῦτα Tpdoowy, — - ~~ — > τὶ Soph. El., 200. 

3. Dimeter : 
παῖδες ἐν τιμαῖς ἔμιχθεν, — ~ — > — τ΄ — -, Pind. Isth., 2, 29. 
κλίνατ᾽, οὐ σθένω ποσίν, “π΄ — ~ — (catalectic), Eur. Alc., 266. 
4. Trimeter: 


θεύμοροι νίσσοντ᾽ ix’ ἀνθρώπους ἀοιδαί, Ὅσας, τς ἘΣ 
Pind. OL., 3, 10. 
ζῶν κακῶς, ΠΡΌΣ αἰαχῦναι: θέλει, τ ~— “> Y= =e (catalec- 


tic), Soph. El., 1082. 


§ 652. APPENDIX. 359 


5. Tetrameter: 


τίς νιν ἀνθρώπων τέκεν ; ποίας δ᾽ ἀποσπασθεῖσα φύτλας, 
ee ’- τ τυς- Ρ᾽πῆϊ Pythag., 9, 33. 
κλεινὸς Αἰακοῦ λόγος, κλεινὰ δὲ καὶ vavaudurde, 


--. --. --- -- --.---.--.- Ξ , Pind. Frag. Isth. v4, 1. 


§ 652. Logaapic VERSE.— Dactyls and trochees to- 
gether formed a simple rhythm, which, from its similarity 
to the rhythm of common speech, was called logacedic 
(λογαοιδικός). The same was true of anapests and iambi. 
Hence there are two kinds of logacedic verse, 


a. the dactylic logacedic ; 
ὁ. the anapestic logacedic. 


1. Dactylic Logawdic Verse. 

This may consist of only two feet, but never more than 
six. In case of more than one dactyl, the dactyls are never 
separated. The trochees may be arranged together before 
or after the dactyls, or separated, and stand part before and 
part after, but never between them. 


1. One dactyl and one trochee—ADONIC VERSE: 


πλησίον “Awac,— ~ ~ — ~, Eur. Alc., 268. 
τοῦτον, στόμα, pipoy’,— |— ~ ~ — ~ (same with anacrusis), Pind. 
Ol., 9, 36. 


2. One dactyl and two trochees—PHERECRATEAN : 


εὐπατριδᾶν τ᾽ apwyai, — ~ ~ — ~ — ~ (1st form), Soph. El., 859. 

δαρὸν οὐκ andvynrot, — ~ — ~ ~ -- ~ (2d form), Soph. ἘΠ., 1065. 

ἢ πόλις ἢ φίλων, -- ~ ~ — ~ — (1st form catalectic), Eur. Med., 847. 

ἐντὶ τραυματίαι͵ — ~ — ~ ~ — (2d form catalectic), Pind. Frag., 141 
(208). 

κακά νιν ἕλοιτο μοῖρα, ~ [Ree Se (1st form with anacrusis, 
paremiac), Soph. Ad. Tyr., 887. 

καὶ τὸ πρὶν ἐπαρκέσει, —|—- π- ~ — (ist form catalectic with 
anacrusis), Soph. Antig., 612. 


3. One dactyl and trochaic penthemim—Guycontc : 


ἥμενος ὃν φρόνημά πως, ~ ~- — ~ ~~ - (1st form), isch. Sup., 94. 
δώσουσ᾽ ἀντιφόνους δόκας, — ~ ~ ~ ~ — ~ — (Qd form), Soph. EL, 


248. 


860 APPENDIX. § 652. 


φῶτα βάντα πανσαγίᾳ, ~~ —~ —~ ~ — (83d form), Soph. Antig., 
107. | 
ξυμμάρτυρας tap ἐπικτῶμαι, — |------<s- (1st form with 
anacrusis), Soph. Antig., 846. 
4. One dactyl and three trochees: 


καὶ παραμειβόμεσθ᾽ adépxrwo, ~~ ~ — ~ ~~ — ©, Soph. did. Col., 
130. 
στέγειν ; ἢ Ti λέγειν πρὸς ἄνδρ᾽ ὑπόπταν ; ~ — | πο Fae 
(same with basis), PHALACEAN, Soph. Phil., 136. 
5. One dactyl and four trochees—Sappuic (hendeca- 
syllable) : 
παῖ Aioc, δολόπλοκε, λίσσομαί oe, — ~ — ~ — ~~ ~~ ~~, Sappho, 
1, 2. | } 
“τὸ δηὖτε κῦμα τῶν προτέρων byw, ~ | — ~~ Se 
catalectic with anacrusis), ALCAIc (hendecasyllable), Alc., 19. 


6. Two dactyls and one trochee=dactylic trimeter cata- 
lectic. 
7. Two dactyls and two trochees—ALcaic (decasylla-— 
ble): 
vat φορήμεθα σὺν μελαίνᾳ, Πρ τ %, Alc., 18. 
8. Two dactyls and three trochees : | 
ὦ πόλις, ὦ γενεὰ τάλαινα, νῦν os, — - ~~ re 
El, 1413. 
9. Three dactyls and two trochees—PRAXILLEAN : 


ἀντιτύπᾳ δ᾽ ἐπὶ γᾷ πέσε Tavradwitic, — ~~ — - ~ ~ = eee 


Soph. Antig., 134. 


’ 


SYNCOPATED FORMS. 


10, PHERECRATEAN CATALECTIC is sometimes repeated, 
the two making one verse. - 

11. PHERECRATEAN CATALECTIC, second form followed 
by first form, constitutes the ASCLEPIADEAN VERSE. 

12. The GREATER ASCLEPIADEAN is the same two phe- 
recratean verses with a choriambus between. 

13. The PRIAPEAN is the glyconic and pherecratean 
joined. 


ὃ ods APPENDIX. 361 


14. The EUPOLIDEAN is a glyconic and a trochaic di- 
meter catalectic. 


2. Anapestic Logawdic Verse. 

Like the dactylic logacedic, it can never have more than 
six feet. The arsis of both anapzst and iambus is on the 
long syllable. 

1. One anapest and one iambus: 

Borava τέ νιν, ~ ~ — ~ —, Pind. Nem., VL, 48. 
2. One anapest and two iambi: 

πόλιν ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάσχου, ~ ~ — ~ — ~ (catalectic), Eur. Heracl., 880. 
3. One anapest and three iambi: 


τό 7 ἔπειτα καὶ τὸ μέλλον, ~ ~ — ~ - τ — τ (catalectic), Soph. An- 
tig., 611. 


4. One anapest and four iambi: 


διάπειρά τοι βροτῶν. eXeyxoc, “΄ ~ ~~ — ~ ~ ~ — ~ (catalectic), 
Pind. O1., IV., 18. 


5. Two anapests and one iambus: 
πρὶν ᾿Ολύμπιος ayspwv,~ ~ — ~ ~ — ~~, Pind. O1., TX., 57. 


6. Two anapests and two iambi: 


φόνιόν τ᾽ ἀπόπαυσον “Aiday,~ ~ — ~ ~ —~—— (catalectic), Eur. 
Alc., 225. 
7. Two anapests and three iambi: 
τὸν ἀνάλιον οἶκον οἰκετεύοις, ~~ - — ~ “ ~~ — ~ — — (catalectic), 
Eur. Alc., 437. 


8. Two anapests and four iambi: 


eee OTN I a eee ae se eee 


τίς ἐφαμερίων ἄρηξις ; οὐδ᾽ ἐδέρχθης, 
(catalectic), Aasch. Prom. Vinc., 556. 


9. Three anapests and one iambus: 
doeBove, ἀδικοῦσι re τὴν πόλιν, ~. -.- < ΠΥ τον τ Arist. 
Thesm., 367. 


10. Three anapests and two iambi: 


ee A A νῷ, a Ae) 


ποτὲ μὲν κακὸν, ἄλλοτ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἐσθλὸν ἕρπει, 


(catalectic), Soph. Antig., 367. 


362 APPENDIX. ὃ 653. 


11, Four anapests and one iambus: 
μεγάλων προσορῶσα δόμοισι βλάβαν νέων, 
Se οτος ἀν τσ Ὁ 
12. Four anapests and two iambi: 


ἀτελέστατα yap Kai ἀμάχανᾳ τοὺς θανόντας, 


§ 653. Jampic Verse.— The fundamental foot is the 
iambus. ‘The arsis falls upon the long syllable. By pro- 
traction the short may become lone? and accordingly a 
spondee often replaces an iambus, but only in the odd 
places (first, third, ete.). By resolution (ὃ 646) the tri- 
brach may appear, and by both protraction and resolution 
the dactyl, and by protraction and then resolution the an- 
apest. When these feet replace iambi, the anapest has 
its usual arsis; the others receive it upon the second syl- 
lable, as follows: the tribrach ~ 
spondee — 

dactyl Ὁ - a 

anapest ~ ~ -, 
The “ meter” is two feet. A dimeter therefore is a verse 
of four feet, and a trimeter of six feet, and so on. ‘This 
measure 1s very common, and easily recognized. 

1. Monometer, ~ ~ ~ ~, occurs mostly in connection with 
systems or other rhythms. 

2. Dimeter,~ ~~ ~— ~ — ~ ~, occurs frequently “5 5 δι- 
gle verse, and also in systems. 

ὅμοιον ὥστε wovriac,~ — ~“ — ~ — ~ —, Soph. Antig., 586. 

3. Trimeter, known also by the Latin name senarius, 
--~-~-~—~—~-—~-—,is most common, being the metre 
of the dialogue in tragedy and comedy; e.g. ¢ 

φέρ᾽ εἰπὲ δὴ τὸ δεινόν. εἰ γὰρ τῶνδέ μοι 
μεῖζόν τι λέξεις, οὐκ ἂν ἀντείποιμ᾽ ér.—Soph. ἘΠ., 376, 877. 
καλῶς δὲ σῷσαι παῖδα κεὐκλεῶς δανεῖν. 


μόνος γὰρ αὐτοῖς ἦσθα, κοὔτις ἐλπὶς ἣν 


σοῦ κατθανόντος ἄλλα φιτύσειν rixva.—Eur. Alc., 292, 293, 294, 


§ 657. APPENDIX. 363 


ὀρῶ, Προμηθεῦ, καὶ παραινέσαι γέ σοι 

θέλω τὰ λῷστα, καίπερ ὄντι ποικίλῳ.---- ΒΟ ἢ, Prom. Vinc., 315, 316. 
The cesura is commonly in the third foot, sometimes in 
the fourth, rarely at the end of the third, and sometimes is 
wanting. 


ὃ 654. Scazon.—The satirists often substituted a spondee 
for the last iambus ‘of the trimeter. The rhythmical break 
had a humorous effect. The verse was then called claudus, 
lame, or scazon, hobbling. — 

§ 655. Lschiorrhogie (limping) verse was iambic tripody 
in which spondees occurred irregularly in the second or 


third place. 


§ 656. Syncopated forms in each kind of iambic verse 
also occur. 


ὃ 657. ANAPa&STIC VERSE.—The fundamental foot is the 
anapest, which is the reverse of the dactyl, as the iambus 
is of the trochee. The arsis falls on the long syllable. 
By contraction of the two shorts into one long, a spondee 
may replace an anapest, and by contraction of the two 
shorts and resolution of the long a dactyl often occurs. 
Sometimes, also, by the resolution of the long, a proce- 
leusmatic may be used. ‘The arsis in such case fails 

on the last syllable of the spondee, - 

on the second syllable of the dactyl, — ~ ~ 

- on the third of the proceleusmatic, ~ ~ Y υ-. 

The “‘ meter” consists of two feet. Monometers and tripo- 

dies are used, also the tetrameter (catalectic in Aristopha- 
nes), but the most common are the following. 


,ὔ 
3 


7 
ww 


1. Dimeter, the principal element in anapestic systems: 


Toes 


Ti σὺ πρὸς μελάθροις: τί σὺ τῇδε Toric, ~- - ~~ ~~ ~ 
Φοῖβ᾽; ἀδικεῖς αὖ τιμὰς ἐνέρων, ~- “ — ~~ ~~ ~ —, Eur. Alc., 29, 30. 


2. Dimeter catalectic, Par@M1Ac, which always forms 
the close of an anapzstic system: 


αὑτὴ προθανεῖν Πελίου παῖς, - — ~ ~ — ~ ~ — ~. Eur. Alc., 87. 


864 APPENDIX. § 658. 


§ 658. Anapestic systems are classed as strict and free. 


a. The strict system consists of dimeters, sometimes interrupted by 
monometers, with a parcemiac (which is often preceded imme- 
diately by a monometer) for a close. The verse itself also is so 
far restricted as never to allow a proceleusmatic, or even a dac- 
tyl followed by an anapeest. 


b. The free system consists of dimeters concluded not only by a 
pareemiac, but having a parcemiac at the beginning and middle, 
and sometimes repeated. The verse also will often consist of 

_ spondees only, or of dactyls only. 


§ 659. CHorrtAMBIC VERSE.—The choriambus occurs 
only by syncope (ὃ 647, 4) in dactylic, logacedic, and ana- 
pestic verses. There are thus formed, however, a chori- 
ambic dimeter, trimeter, and tetrameter. 


1. Dimeter : 
οὔτε βαθειᾶν Kudixwv, — ~ ~ — — ~ ~ —, Soph. Ajax, 1200. 


veimev ἐμοὶ τέρψιν ὀμιλεῖν, ~~ ~~ <-> - (hypercatalectic), 
Soph. Ajax, 1201. 


2. Trimeter: 


ei δὲ κυρεῖ τις πέλας olwvoTOAwY, — ~ “ — ~~ ~ ~~ ~~ —, Asch. 


Sup., 56. 


3. Tetrameter : 
δεινὰ μὲν οὖν, δεινὰ ταράσσει σοφὸς οἰωνοθέτας, 
Der BOD n, ΚΟ 
ἄλλα δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἄλλοις ἐπενώμα στυφελίζων μέγας “Apne, 
Sverre eo του πε τ ΠΥ ΘΙ ΘΘ 
Antig., 139. 


§ 660. CreTIc VERSE.—Syncopation (ὃ 647, 4) in tro- 
chaic, iambic, and logacedic rhythms gives rise to cretic 
rhythms. There are cretic rhythms proper, in which the 
creticus is the fundamental foot. By resolution a first or 
fourth peon (— ~ ~ ~,~ ~ ~~) may replace a ereticus. 
The arsis occurs upon the first syllable, with a slighter 
ictus on the third. The following are the common forms : 


ὃς 


§ 661. APPENDIX. 365 


1. Dimeter (occurs singly and in connection with other 
rhythms) : 
ὦ κτανόντας τε καὶ ~ — ~~ — , Soph. Antig., 1263. 


τί δῆτ᾽ ἐμοὺ βλεπτὺν, },~ | — ~ — — ~ - (with anacrusis), Soph. 
(id. Tyr., 1837. 


2. Trimeter: 


φράζε τᾷ δυσπλάνῳ παρθένῳ, -- ~ — — ~ — ~ ~ —, Aisch, Prom. 
Vinc., 626. 


3. Tetrameter (often used by comic poets): 


αὐτόματα πάντ᾽ ἀγαθὰ τῷδε ye πορίζεται, 


ΝΠ π΄: π--- ἘΣ AristuAch.: 9.1: 
4, Pentameter: 


οἵ ἔχει σπεισάμενος ἐμπορικὰ χρήματα ὃ διεμπολᾶν, 
πος 


τσ τ a SH eS OS .-: ~ —; Arist: Ach: 972: 


§ 661. Ionic Verse.—The fundamental foot is the Ionic 
a minore (~ ~ — ~), with the arsis on the first long. It 
gives the verse a “character of discord and wild enthusi- 
asm” (Munk), and is used in erotic poetry, and Dionysiac 
hymns, and songs to Cybele; also in the choruses of dram- 
atists. 


1. Dimeter : 


μέτα μὲν πλείονα τίκτει, eee Sei ea QRS 

σφετέρᾳ ὃ εἰκότα γέννᾳ, ~ ~ — ~~~ ~~ ἘΠ form, pure), Asch. 
Agam,, 734, 735. 

τί με φεύγεις τὸν γέροντα: ~~ — —~—~ — ~ (2d form, polyschema- 
tist), Anacr., 64. 

δότε μοι λύρην Ὁμήρου, ~ ~ — ~ — ~ — = (8d form, with anacla- 
sis), ANACREONTIC, Anacr., 48. 


ὦ. In the polyschematist (many-formed) the quantities are preserved, 
but assume the trochaic form in the second foot. 


b. Anaclasis (ἀνάκλασις, ἃ breaking) occurs by an interchange of 
the last long of the first foot with the first short of the second 
foot. The form thus produced is the most common of the three. 
It is chiefly the form of the Anacreontic verse. ; 


966 APPENDIX. ὃ 662. 


2. Trimeter : 
ἀπό μοι θανεῖν γένοιτ᾽, οὐ yap ἂν ἄλλη, 
Στ - ~~ => (anaclasis) Andere 
3. Tetrameter : 


παρακλίνασ᾽ ἐπέκρανεν δὲ γάμου πικρὰς τελευτὰς, 


ἐπε Narn vile, fee om oes -Ὁπ-πω--- , Esch, Agam., 721. 


a. The tetrameter catalectic is the Galliambic verse, the verse of 
the songs of the priests of Cybele. 


§ 662. Documiac Ruytums.—A dochmius consists of 
a bacchius and an iambus,~—~ ~~~. ‘The arsis falls upon 
the first long, with a secondary ictus upon the last long. 
By production of the shorts and resolution of the longs, a 
great variety of forms was produced, which were freely 
used. 


1. Monometer : 
ἄφυκτοι κύνες,“ — — ~ =, Soph. EL., 1888. 
iw δυσπότμων, ~ — — ~ —, Soph. Antig., 869. 
στερεὰ θανατόεντ᾽, ~ Phe tee 2 —, Soph. Antig., 1262. 
Ἑλλάνων ἄναξ, -- — — ~ —, Soph. EL., 483. 
εἴδομεν ἃ Opnvetc, - ~ - — — —, Soph. EL., 853. 
τοὺς ἐμὸς ἴδε πατὴρ, — is ae —, Soph. El., 205. 
2. Dimeter : 
τὸ δυσέριστον αἷμα φυσῶν Aone, ~ ~ ~ — ~ — ~ ~ ~ ~ ~, Soph, 
El., 1385. 
3. Trimeter : 
ὦμοι ἐμᾶς ἄτας, οἷος ἄρ᾽ αἱμάχθης, ἄφαρκτος φίλων, 
Fao Τὺ - Hee Se , Soph. Ajax, 910. 
§ 663. Baccuic Ruytrums.—The bacchius, as the fun- 


damental foot of a verse, was not freely used. The fol- 
lowing are examples : 


1. Monometer: 


ζυναινεῖς, ~ — 


’ 
τί μὴν οὔ; ~ -- —, Soph. El., 1279, 1280. 


a 


8 663. 


2. Dimeter: 


πεπρᾶσθαι πεπρᾶσθαι, 


3. Tetrameter : 


APPENDIX. 


-e- = wf}! 


367 


— —, Aristoph. Ach., 735. 


τίς ἀχὼ, τίς ὀδμὰ προσέπτα μ᾽ ἀφεγγὴς, 


-- ὠἠἀ«--..-ττοὖὦὺὦΆἀἁἑ .- .τ᾿ -  -.-- .-τττν΄Ὁ΄' - - 


, isch. Prom. Vinc., 115. 


ALPHABETICAL LIST OF VERBS. 


aaw, Aor. Pass. 
§ 298. 

ἄγαμαι, ὃ 312, 8; ὃ 328, 2. 

ἀγγέλλω, ὃ 252; pp. 122, 123. 

aysiow, ὃ 253; ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

ἀγήοχα, § 279. 

aywiw, ὃ 323, D. 39. 

ἄγνυμι, § 319, 13+ ὃ 275, 2; ὃ 330, 1. 

ἄγω, 2d Aor., 

§ 268, D.—Pert. ὃ 279. 

ἁδήσω, § 322, Ὁ. 23. 

gow, ὃ 266. 

ἀέξω, ὃ 322, D. 13. 

ἄεσα, § 827, D.17. 

dnp, § 313, D. ὃ. 

αἰδέομαι, ὃ 301,1; ὃ 326,10, and D. | 
—Fut. Hom., § 261, D. 

aivéw, § 301, 3. 

aivupat, § 319, D. 27. 

 aipéw, ὃ 827,1; § 275, Ὁ. 1. 

αἴρω, ὃ 262; ὃ 270, Obs. 

αἰσθάνομαι, ὃ 322, yt 

αἴσθομαι, § 322,11 

αἰσχύνω, ὃ 286, D. 

ἀκάχημαι, § 319, D. 80. 

ἀκαχίζω, § 319, Ὁ. 80. 

ἀκαχμένος, § 41,1) 

ἀκέομαι, ὃ 301, Be 

ἀκήκοα, ὃ 275,13; § 280, Obs. 

ἀκηχέδατο, ὃ 287, D. 


(Hom.) ἀάσθην, 


ἀλαπάζω, ὃ 251, D.—Fut., ὃ 261, D, 
ἀλδαίνω, ἀλδήσκω, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 30. 
ἀλέασθαι, ἀλεύασθαι, ὃ 269, D. 
ἀλείφω, § 275, 1, p. 120. 

ἄλεν, ἀλήμεναι, ὃ 325, Ὁ. d. 

ἀλέξω, § 326, 11. 

ἀλέω, ὃ 301, 1. 

ἄλθομαι, ὃ 326, D. 39. 


§ 257 — Ist Aor., ἁλίσκομαι, ὃ 324, 17—Perf., ὃ 278, 2 


—2d Aor., ὃ 316, 12. 
ἀλιταίνω, § 323, D. 37. 
icoch. Perf., § 279, Obs. 2—2a 
Aor.,§ 294, Obs. 
ἄλλομαι, ὃ 252—1st Aor., ὃ 270, Obs. 
—2d Aor., § 316, D. 32. 


| ἄλμενος, ὃ 816, Ὁ. 32. 


| ἀλύσκω, § 324, 'O7. 
dddcves, § 323, D. 38. 
ἁλῶναι, ὃ 324, ‘17: § 316, 12. 
ἁμαρτάνω, ὃ 322, 12, and D. 
ἀμβλίσκω, ὃ 324, 18. 
ἄμεναι, § 312, Ὁ. 13. 
ἁμιλλάομαι, ἃ 328, 2. 
ἀμπέχομαι, ἀμπισχνοῦμαι, ὃ 323, 36. 
ἀμπλακίσκω, ὃ os 23. 
ἀμπνύνθη, ὃ 298, D 
ἄμπνυτο, ὃ 316, D. 29. 
st ACH §319,5 yand D.— —Augm., 
240. 


ἀμφιῶ, § 819, 5. 


ἀκούω, Perf. Act., § 275, 1; ὃ 280, ἀναβιώσκομ ὃ 324, 11. 


Obs.—Perf. Mid., § 288. 
ἀκροάομαι, Fut., § 261. 
᾿ἀλάλημαι, ὃ 275, Ὁ. 1. 
ἄλαλκον, ὃ 326, Ὁ. 11. 
ἀλάομαι, ὃ 898, 2; § 275, D.1. 


ἀναγιγνώσκω, § 329, Ὁ. 

ἀναλίσκω, ἀναλώσω, ὃ 324, 19. 

ἁνδάνω, ὃ 322, 23, and D.—Imp., 
§ 237, D. 

ἀνέχομαι, Augm., ὃ 240. 


368 


aviwya, ὃ 279, Obs. 1. 
ἀνέῳχα, ὃ 275, 2; § 279, Obs. 1. 
avnvober, ὃ 275, Ὁ. 2. 


ἀνοίγνυμι, Perf., ὃ 275, 2; ὃ 275, 
Obs. 1. 


ἀνοίγω, Augm., ὃ 237. 
ἀνορθόω, Augm., ὃ 240. 
ἀντιβολέω, Augm., ὃ 239. 
ἄνυμι, § 319, D. 28. 


ἄνωγα, § 317, D.11—Perf., § 283, D. 


aravraw, Fut., ὃ 266. 

araupaw, § 316, D. 18. 

ἀπαφίσκω, ὃ 324, D. 33. 

ἀπεῖπον, ὃ 327, 138, Obs. 
ἀπεχθάνομαι, ὃ 322, 16. 

ἀπόερσα, § 270, D. 1. 

ἀπολαύω, Fut. Mid., ὃ 266. 
ἀπούρας, § 316, D. 18. 

ἀραίρηκα, ὃ 275, D.1; ὃ 327, D.1. 


apapioxw, § 324, D. 34—Pertf., § 275, 
D.1 


ἀραρυῖα, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 34; ὃ 280, Ὁ. 
ἀρέσκω, ὃ 324, 10. 

dpnpa, § 275, D. 1; ὃ 324, Ὁ. 84. 
ἀρήροται, § 275, D ᾿; 

ἀρηρώς, ὃ 280, Ῥ. 

ἀρκέω, ὃ 301, andD. # 
appevoc, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 34. 


apport, ὃ 250, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 


ἀρνέομαι, ὃ 328, 2. 

dpvupat, ὃ 319, D. 29. 

ἀρόω, ἡ 801, 1—Perf. Pass. νὃ 275, 
D.1 


ἀρύω, § 301, 1. 

ἄρχω, p. 116. 

ἄσμενος, ὃ 316, Ὁ. at end. 

αὐξάνω,͵ αὔξω, § 322, 13, and D.. 
ἀφάσσω, § 250, Ὁ. 

ἀφίημι, § 313, Ἰ. 

ἀφύσσω, Fut. ‘and 1st Aor. , § 269, D. | 
ἄχθομαι, § 326,12; § 328, 2. 
ἄχνυμαι, § 319, D. 80: § 287, Ὁ. 


βαδίζω, Fut. Mid., § 266. 


APPENDIX. 


§ 316, D. 19 — Perfect, § 282; 
§ 287, D. 

Barro, § 249. 

βέβληκα, ὃ 282; § 285. 

βέβουλα, § 326, Ὁ. 14. 

βεβρώϑω, § 324, Ὁ. 18. 

βεβρώς, § 317, D. 16. 

βείομαϊ, βέομαι, ὃ 265, D 

Beiw, § 316, D. 1. 

Bny, ὃ 316, D. 1. 

βιβάς, ὃ 312, Ὁ. 14. 

| βιβρώσκω, ὃ 324, 13, and D.—Aor., 
§ 316, Ὁ. 23—Perf. Part., ὃ 317, 
D. 16. 

βιόω, ὃ 316, 18. 

βιώσκομαι, ὃ 324,11. 

βλάβεται, ὃ 249, D. 

βλάπτω, § 249—Perf., § 279, 1--- 
Aor. Pass., § 299. 

βλαστάνω. ὃ 322, 14. 

βλεῖο, ὃ 316, Ὁ. 19. 

βλῆσϑαι, ὃ 810, Ὁ. 19. 

βλίττω, § 250, Obs. 

βλώσκω, § 324; § 51, Ὁ. 

Bodw, Fut. Mid. , § 266. 

βόλεται, § 826, D. 14. 

βόσκω, ὃ 326, 13. 

βούλομαι, ὃ 826, 14—Augm., ὃ 234, 
Obs. ; -'§ 233, Ὁ. 5, 6; § 328, 2. 

Bpdaow: § 250, Obs. 

βυνῶ, § 323, 32, and D. 

βώσας, § 35, D. 1. 


yapéw, § 325, 1, and D. 

γάνυμαι, § 319, D. 31. 

γέγαμεν, ὃ 917, 2, and ἢ. 

yéyova, § 327, 14. 

γεγωνέω, ὃ 325, D. a. 

γεγώς, ὃ 317, 2, and D.; ὃ 327, 
D. 14. 

Lyeiwopiec, § 329, 8. 

γελάω, ὃ 801, 1—Aor. Pass., ὃ 298— 
Fut. Mid., ὃ 266. 

γενέσθαι, § 327, 14. 


Baivo, ὃ 321, 1, and D.—2d Aor., γενήσομαι, ὃ 327, 14, 
§ 316, 1, and D.—Perf., § 317, 1, | γέντο, ὃ 316, Ὁ. 33. 


and D.—1st Aor. Mid., § 268, Ὁ. 
—Signif., § 329, 2. 
βάλλω, ὃ 254; ὃ 255, 2, and D.; 


γηθέω,͵ § 325, 2. 
γηράσκω ὃ 324, 1—Inf. Aor. Ss 316, 
2,and D. 


APPENDIX. 


369 


γίγνομαι (γίνομαι), ὃ 327, 14—Perf., δίδωμι, ὃ 305, and D.; § 807; ὃ 808 


§ 317, 9. and D. 
γιγνώσκω, ὃ 324,14—Aor., ὃ 316, 14. 
γνῶναι, § 316, 14. 
γνώω, ὃ 316, 14, Ὁ. 
yoaw, ὃ 325, D. n. 
γράφω, Perf., § 278. 


δαήσομαι, ὃ 326, Ὁ. 40. 

δαΐζω, § 251, D. 

δαίνυμι, § 319, Ὁ. 32. 

δαινῦτο, ὃ 318, D.; ὃ 319, Ὁ. 82. 

daiw, § 253, D.—Perf., § 330, D. 9. 

δάκνω, ὃ 321, 8. 

dapeiw, ὃ 293, Ὁ. 

δάμνημι, ὃ 312, Ὁ. a — Subj. Aor. 
Pass., § 293, D. 

δαρθάνω, ὃ 322,15, and D. 

δατέομαι, ὃ 325, D. b—1st Aor. Inf., 
§ 269, D. 

déaro, § 312, 14 ὁ. 

δέγμαι, ὃ 273, Ὁ. 

δέδαον, § 324, D. 28; ὃ 326, Ὁ. 40. 

δεδάηκα, ὃ 326, Ὁ. 40. 

δέδεγμαι, § 318, D. 

dédnya, ὃ 321, 8. 

δέδια, § 817, 5, and D. 

δέδμημαι, § 312, Ὁ. a. 

δέδοικα, ὃ 317, 5, and Ὁ. 

δέδρομα, ὃ 327, D. 11. 

δειδέχαται, ὃ 318, Ὁ. 

δείκνυμι, ὃ 318, 2 and 4, and D. 

δεῖσαι, ὃ 317, 5—Auem., § 234, D.; 
§ 77, D. 

δέξω͵ ὃ 318, Ὁ. 

δέρκομαι, ὃ 257,D.; ὃ 59,D.; § 328, 2. 

δεύομαι (δέομαι), § 326, D.15 ; § 328,2. 

δέχθαι, ὃ 316, D. 34. 

δέχομαι, Perfect, § 273, D.—Aorist, 
§ 316, Ὁ. 34; § 328, 4. 

δέω, ὃ 301, 2; ὃ 244, Obs. 1. 

δέω, δέομαι, ὃ 826, 15. 

δήξομαι, ὃ 321, 8. 

διαιτάω, Augm., ὃ 240. 

διαλέγομαι, Perfect, ὃ 274, Exc. ; 
§ 328, 2. . 

διδάσκω, ὃ 324, 28, and D.—Aor., 
§ 326, D. 40. 

δίδημι, § 313, 2. 


Ω 


—Aor., § 310—Fut., § 310, Ὁ. 

διδράσκω, ὃ 324, 2—Aor., ὃ 316, 3, 
and D. 

δίεσαν, ὃ 313, Ὁ. 4. 

δίζημαι, δίζω, ὃ 313, Ὁ. ὅ. 

διψάω, § 244, 2. 

διώκω, § 338, Ὁ. 

δοάσσατο, § 312, D. 14 ὃ. 

δοκέω, § 325, ὃ. 

δουπέω, § 325, D. 6. 

δραμοῦμαι, ὃ 327,11. 

δρατός, ὃ 800, D. 

dpaw, Aor. Pass., § 298. 

δύναμαι, ὃ 312, J—Augm., ὃ 234, 
Obs.—Accent of Subj. and Opt., 
§ 309; ὃ 828, 2. 

δύω, δυνω, § 321, re and De § 301, 
4—1st Aor. Mid., ὃ 268, D.—2d 
Aor,, ὃ 316, 16, and D.—Signif., 
§ 329, 4. 


ἔαγα, § 275, 2; § 319, 13. 

éada, § 322, D. 23. 

ἑάλων, ὃ 316,12; ὃ 324,17. 

ἑάνδανον, § 237, Ὁ. 

ἔαξα, § 319, 13. 

éarat, εἵαται, ὃ 315, Ὁ. 2. 

éaw, Augm., § 236. 

ἔβρων, § 324, D. 13. 

ἐγδούπησα, ὃ 325, Ὁ. 6. 

ἐγείρω, 94 Aor., § 257, D.—Perfect, 
δ 275,1; ὃ 317, D.12; ὃ 890, 2. 

ἔγοον, ὃ 825, D. n. 

éypero, § 257, D. 

éypnyopa, ὃ 275,1; ὃ 817, D.12. 

ἐγρηγόρθασι, ὃ 317, D. 12. 

ἔδδεισα, ὃ 234, D. 

ἔδηδα, ἐδήδοται, § 327, Ὁ. 4. 

ἔδμεναι, ὃ 315, D. 3; § 827, Ὁ. 4. 

ἔδομαι, ὃ 2653; ὃ 827, 4. 

ἔδραθον, § 322, Ὁ. 15. 

ἔδρακον, ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

ἔδραμον, § 327,11. 

ἐείσατο, ὃ 814,D.1; ὃ 327, Ὁ. 8. 

ἐέρχατο, § 287, Ὁ. 

ἑέσσατο, ὃ 209, D.; ὃ 519, D. 5. 

ἕζομαι, ὃ 201 ὃ, § 826, 21. 

ἑήνδανον, § 237, Ὁ. 

Z 


370 


ἐθέλω. See θέλω. 

ἐθίζω, Augm., ὃ 236—Perf., § 278. 

ἔθρεξα, § 327, D. 11. 

εἶδον, § 827, 8, and Ὁ. 

εἰκάθω, § 888, Ὁ. 

εἶκε, ἐΐκτον, § 317, D. 7. 

εἰλέω, ὃ 325, D. d. 

εἰλήλουθα, ὃ 40, D.; ὃ 317, D. 13; 
§ 327, D. 2. 

εἴληφα, ὃ 274, Exc.; ὃ 822, 25. 

εἴληχα, § 274, Exc. ; ὃ 322, 27. 

ethoxa, ὃ 274, Exc.; ὃ 279. 

εἷλον, ὃ 327, 1. 

εἴλω, ὃ 2538, D.— 1st Aor., § 270, 
1.1: 

εἶμαι, ὃ 319, D. ὅ. 

εἵμαρται, ὃ 274, Exe. 

εἰμί, § 81δ, 1, and Ὁ. 

εἶμι, ὃ 314,1,and D.; ὃ 327, 2. 

eivuoy, ὃ 319, D. 5. 

εἴξασι, § 317, 7. 

εἶπον, § 327, 13; Imper. Accent, 
§ 333, 12. 

εἴργνυμι, εἵργω, ὃ 319, 15, and Ὁ. 

eioyw, Perf. and Pluperf., § 287, D.; 
§ 338, D. 

εἴρηκα, ὃ 274, Exc.; ὃ 327, 13. 

εἴρομαι, ὃ 826, D. 16. 

εἰρύαται, § 314, D. 2. 

ciow, {st Aor., § 270, D. 3—Perf. and 
Pluperf. Mid., § 275, D. 2; § 327, 
D. 13. 

εἶσα, § 269, Ὁ. 

εἰσάμην, § 314, D. 1. 

ἐΐσκω, § 324, D. 35. 

εἴσομαι, § 314, D.1. 

εἴωθα, ὃ 275, 2; ὃ 278. 

ἐκέκλετο, ὃ 61, D.; ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

éxcov, § 319, D. 84. 

ἐκκλησιάζω, Augm., ὃ 239, Exc. 

ἐκληθάνω, § 322, D. 26. 

éxpnoa, § 319, D.1. 

ἔκταν, ὃ 316, Ὁ. 4. 

ἐλάμφθην, § 322, D. 25. 

ἐλαυνω, ὃ 321, 2, and D.—Perfect, 
§ 275, 1—Pluperf., § 287, D.— 
Fut., ὃ 263. 

ἐλέγχω, Perf. Mid., § 275,1; § 286, 
Obs. 


. | ἐναντιοῦμαι, Augm., 


APPENDIX. 


ἑλεῖν, ὃ 327, 1. 

ἐλεύσομαι, ὃ 327, 2. 

ἔλησα, § 322, D. 26. 

ἐληλάδατο, ὃ 287, D.; ὃ 321, Ὁ. 2. 

ἐλήλυθα, ὃ 327, 2. 

ἐλθεῖν, ὃ 827, 2; § 333, 12. 

ἑλίσσω, Augm., ὃ 236; ὃ 250 a. 

ἑλκύω, ἕλκω, Augm., ὃ 236; ὃ 301, 1. 

ἔλπω, Perf., ὃ 275, Ὁ. 2. 

ἔλσα, ὃ 270, D.1; ὃ 825, Ὁ. ἃ. 

ἐμέμηκον, ὃ 283, D. 

ἐμέω, ὃ 801,1. 

ἔμμεναι, ὃ 315, . 1, 

ἔμμορα, § 274, D. 

ἐμνήμυκα, ὃ 275, D. 1. 

ἔμολον, ὃ 324, 12. 

évaiow, Augm., ὃ 239, Exc. 

§ 239, Exc. ; 

§ 328, 2. 

ἔνασσα, ὃ 329, D. ; 

évduvéw, δ᾽ 321, D. 7. 

éveixat (ἐνείκοι), § 327, Ὁ. 12. 

ἐνένιπον, ὃ 257, D. 

ἐνέπω, ὃ 327, Ὁ. 19. 

ἐνήνοθεν, ὃ 275, D. 2. 

ἐνήνοχα, ὃ 327, 12. 

ἐνήνεγμαι, ὃ 327, 12. 

ἐνίπτω, ὃ 250, D.; ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

ἐνίσπω, § 327, 1). 18. 

ἐνίσσω, § 250, D. 

ἔννεπε, § 327, Ὁ. 18. 

ἕννυμι, § 819, ὅ, and 1), 

ἐνοχλέω, Augm., ὃ 240. 

ἔοικα, ὃ 817, 7. and D. 

ἔολπα, § 275, D. 2. 

éopya, ὃ 275, D. 2; ὃ 327, Ὁ. 3. 

ἑορτάζω, Augm., ὃ 237. 

ἐπαυρίσκομαι, ὃ 324, 24, and Ὁ. 

ἐπηῦρον, ὃ 824, D. 24. 

ἐπιέσασθαι, ὃ 319, 5. 

ἐπίσταμαι, ὃ 312, 10— Accent of 
Subj. and Opt., § 309; § 328, 2. 

ἔπλητο, ὃ 819,0. αὶ 

ἕπομαι, ὃ 997, ὅ, and D.—Augm., 
§ 236. 

ἔπορον, ὃ 285, Ὁ. 

ἔπραθον, § 257, Ὁ. 

ἔπτην, § 316, 5. 

ixwyxaro, ὃ 327, Ὁ. 6. 


APPENDIX. 


ἔραμαι, ὃ 312,11. 

ἐράω, Aor. Mid., § 301, Ὁ. 

ἐργάζομαι, Augm., ὃ 236. 

ἔργαθον, ὃ 319, D. 15. 

ἔρδω, § 327, 3, and Ὁ. 

ἐρεΐπω, ὃ 329, Ὁ. 

ἐρέσσω, § 250, Obs.—F ut., § 260, 3. 

ἐρεύγομαι, § 323, Ὁ. 40. 

ἐρηρέδαται, § 287, Ὁ. 

ἑρπύζω,͵ ἕρπω, Augm., ὃ 236. 

ἐῤῥάδαται, § 287, D. 

épow, ὃ 326, 17. 

ἔῤῥωγα, ὃ 278; ὃ 319, 24. 

ἐρυγγάνω, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 40. 

ἐρύκω, 2d Aor., § 257, Ὁ. 

ἔρυσθαι, § 314, D. 2. 

ἐρύω, Aor., § 301, D. 

tpxarat, § 319, D. 15. 

ἔρχομαι, ὃ 327, 2. 

ἐρῶ, § 327,138. 

ere ἔσθω, ὃ 327,4, and D.; § 315, 
. ὃ. 


ἔσκλην, § 316, 10. 

ἔσκον, § 337, Ὁ. 

ἔσπεισμαι, ὃ 286, 1, Obs. 

ἑσπόμην, § 327, 5. 

ἔσπον, ὃ 327, Ὁ. 13. 

ἕσπωμαι, ὃ 327, Ὁ. ὅ. 

ἕσσαι, ἕσσας, ὃ 269, Ὁ. 

ἔσσυμαι, ὃ 914, Ὁ. 

ἕσταμεν, ὃ 517,4. 

ἑστεώς, ὃ 317, Ὁ. 4. 

ἑστήξω, ὃ 291; ὃ 311. 

ἑστιάω, Augm., ὃ 236. 

ἐτάθην, ὃ 298. 

ἐτάφην. See θάπτω. 

ἔτορον, ὃ 326, D. 44. 

εὔαδον, ὃ 322, D. 23. 

evdw, ὃ 326, 18. 

ἐὐκτίμενος, ὃ 316, D. 25. 

εὑρίσκω, ὃ 324, 25; § 338, 12. 

ἔχεα, ὃ 269. 

ἔχευα, ὃ 209, 1). 

ἔχω, ὃ 327,6, and D.—Augm., ὃ 236 
—Aor. Imper., ὃ 316, 11. 

ἕψω, ὃ 326,19, and D. 

ἔωθα, ὃ 275, Ὁ. 2. 

ἔωμεν, ὃ 312, D. 19. 

ἐῳνοχόει, ὃ 237, Ὁ. 


371 


ἔῳξα, § 319, 19. 
ἑώρων, ὃ 237, 


Caw, ὃ 244, 2. 
ζεύγνυμι, ὃ 319, 16. 
Zéw, § 301, 1. 
ζώννυμι, ὃ 319, 9. 


ἦ, § 312, 1. 

ἡβάσκω, ὃ 324, 3. 
ἤγαγον, ὃ 257, 
ἠγερέθοντο, § 338, D. 
ya, pe, ὃ 814. 
ἠείδης, § 317, Ὁ. 6. 
ἤειρα, ὃ 270, Ὁ. 3. 
ἠερέθονται, ὃ 898, D. 


᾿ἤϊκτο, § 317, D. 7. 


na, § 313, 1. 

ἤκαχον, ὃ 319, D. 30. 
ἤλιτον, § 323, D. 37. 
ἠλλάγην, § 294, Obs. 
ἤλυθον, ὃ 327, D. 2. 
ἥλων, § 316,12; ὃ 324,17. 
ἧμαι, ὃ 315, 2, and Ὁ. 
ἤμβλωσα, ἤμβλωκα, ὃ 324, 18. 
ἤμβροτον, ὃ 322, D. 12. 
ni, ὃ 312, 1. 

ἤμπισχον, ὃ 323, 36. 
ἤμπλακον, ὃ 324, 23. 
ἠμύναθον, ὃ 338, Ὁ. 
ἠμύω, Perf., ὃ 275, Ὁ. 1. 
ἠμφίεσα, ὃ 319, ὅ. 

ἦν. See εἰμί and ἡμί. 
ἤναρον, ὃ 239, Exc. 
ἤνεγκ-ον, -a, ὃ 327, 12. 
ἤνεικα, ὃ 327, 12, Ὁ. 
ἠνειχόμην, ὃ 240. 
ἠνίπαπον, ὃ 257, D. 


Ἴήνυτο, ὃ 319, D. 28. 


ἤνωγον, ὃ 283, D. 
ἠνώρθουν, ὃ 240. 
ἠνώχλουν, ὃ 240. 
nea, ὃ 319, D. 18. 
ἤπαφον, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 33. 
ἤρατο, § 319, D. 29. 
ἤραρον, ὃ 324, 1). 34. 
ἤριπον, § 329, D. 
ἠρόμην, § 326, 16. 
ἤῤῥηκα, ὃ 326,17, 


372 


ἠρύκακον, ὃ 257, Ὁ. 
ἠφίει, § 818,1. 
ἦχα, ὃ 279, 1. 


θάλλω, Perf., § 277, D. 

θανεῖν, ὃ 324, 4. 

θάπτω, ὃ δά ὁ, ὃ 249; ὃ 298, 

θέλω (ἐθέλω), § 326, 20. 

θέρομαι, Fut., § 262, D. 

θέω, ὃ 248—Fut., § 260, 2. 

θιγγάνω, ὃ 322, 24. 

θλάω, ὃ 301, 1. 

θνήσκω, ὃ 324, 4—Perf., ὃ 317, 3— 
Perf. Part., § 276, D.—Fut. Perf., 
§ 291. 

Odprupat, ὃ 894, D. 15. 

θρεκτέον, ὃ 327, 11. 

θρύπτω, § 54 c. 

θρώσκω, ὃ 324,15, and D.; ὃ 59, 1. 

θύω, ὃ 301, 2; Aor. Pass., ὃ 53 ὁ. 


ἰάομαι, ὃ 328, 4. 

iabw, ὃ 327, D.17. 

ἰδέ, ὃ 327, 8; ὃ 333, 12. 

ἴδμεν, ὃ 317, Ὁ. 6. 

ἱδρύω, Aor. Pass. , § 298, D. 

idvia, § 317, D. 6. 

Lave, ἵζω, ὃ 322, 17. 

ἵζομαι, § 326, 21. 

inpe, ὃ 818,1, and D.—Perf., § 311. 

ἱκάνω, ὃ 323, 33. 

ixpevoc, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 33. 

ἱκνέομαι, ὃ 323, 33, and D.—Aor., 
§ 268, D. 

ἱλάσκομαι, ὃ 324,5—Imperat.,§ 312, 
D. 15. 

ἱμάσσω, ὃ 250, Ὁ. 

ov, ὃ 208, D.; ὃ 829, D. 33. 

ἴσκε, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 36. 

ἵστημι, ὃ 305, and D.—Perf.,§ 817,4. 


καθεδοῦμαι, § 326, 21. 

καθεύδω, ὃ 326 ,18—Auem., § 240. 

κάθημαι, § 315, 2—Augm. ᾿ξ 240. 

καθίζω, ὃ 326, 21—Augm.. § 240. 

καθίστημι, ὃ 329, π Obs. 

καίνυμαι, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 33. 

καίω, § 35, Obs. ; . ἃ 253, Obs.—Fut., 
§ 260, 21st Aor. § 269, D. 


APPENDIX. 


καλέω, ὃ 301, 3. 

καλύπτω, ὃ 249; p. 120. 

κάμνω, ὃ 321, 9, and D,—Perfect, 
§ 282. 

κάμπτω, Perf. Mid., ὃ 286, 1, Obs. 

κατηγορέω, Augm., ὃ 239. 

καύσω, § 260, 2 

kaw, See καίω. 

κεῖαι, § 269, Ὁ, 

κεῖμαι, ὃ 314, 2, and D., Obs. 

κείρω, Fut., ὃ 262, D. 

κεκαδήσω, κέκαδον, ὃ 326, Ὁ, 41. 

κέκασμαι, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 33. 

κέκμηκα, ὃ 282. 

κεκορηώς, ὃ 319, D. 6. 

κεκοτηώς, ὃ 277, D. 

κέκτημαι, ὃ 274, Exc.; ὃ 289. 

κελαδέω, ὃ 325, Ὁ. 6. j 

κελεύω, Perf. Mid., ὃ 288 — Aorist 
Pass., ὃ 298. . 

κέλλω, Fut. ὃ 262, Exc. 

cihopas Aor. ὃ 257, Ώ. 

κεντέω, ὃ 325, Df. 

κεράννυμι, ὃ 319, 1, and D.—Subj. 
Mid., § 312, D. 16. 

κερδαίνω, Perf., ὃ 322, Obs. 1—Aor., 
§ 270, Obs. 

κέσκετο, ὃ 337, Ὁ. 

κέχανδα, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 41. 

κεχαρήσω, ὃ 326, D. 88, 

κεχάροντο, § 326, D. 98, 

κέχυκα, ὃ 281. 

κῆαι, § 269, Ὁ. 

κήδω, ὃ 896, Ὁ. 41. 

κηρύσσω, § 250—Perf., § 279. 

κικλήσκω, ὃ 324, Ὁ. 31. 

κίνυμαι (κινέω), § 319, Ὁ. 84. 

κίρνημι, ὃ 312, D: 16 ὁ. 

κιχάνω, ὃ 322,18. 

κίχημι, § 313, D. 6. 

κιών, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 84. 

κλάζω, § 251, Obs.—Perf., § 276, Ὁ. 

κλαίω, ὃ 326,22; ὃ 253, Obs —Fut., 
§ 260, 2. 

κλάω, § 301, 1, 

κλείω, κλύω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 

Abas, Perfect, § 279-—Aor, Pass., 
§ 295. 

κλίνω, Perf., § 282. 


APPENDIX. 


κλύω, Aor., ὃ 316, Ὁ. 27. 

κνάω, ὃ 244, 2. 

κομίζω, Fut., § 263; p. 118. 

κόπτω, § 249—Perf.,§ 279; § 277, D. 

κορέννυμι, ὃ 319, 6, and Ὁ. 

κορέω, Aor., ὃ 301, D. 

κορύσσω, ὃ 250, D.—Perfect Pass. 
Part., ὃ 286, D. 

κοτέω, ὃ 301, D. — Perfect Part., 
§ 277, D. 

κράζω, ὃ 251—Perf.,§ 278; § 317, 8. 

κρέμαμαι, ὃ 319, 2; ὃ 312, 12—Ac- 
cent of Subj. and Opt., § 309. 

κρεμάννυμι, ὃ 319, 2. 

κρεμόω, § 319, D. 2. 

κρήμναμαι, § 312, D.16 «. 

κρίνω, ὃ 253, Obs.—Perf., ὃ 282; 
§ 286, Obs. 

κρούω, Perf. Mid.,§ 288. 

κρύπτω, § 249. 

κτάομαι, Perf., § 274, Exc.; ὃ 289. 

κτείνω, Aor., ὃ 316,4, and D. 

κτέωμεν, ὃ 316, Ὁ. 4. 

κτίζω, § 316, 1). 25. 

κτίννυμι, ὃ 319, 17. 

κτυπέω. ὃ 325, D. 8 g. 

κυίσκω, ὃ 324, 21. 

κυνέω, § 323, 34, and D. 

κυρέω, κύρω, ὃ 325, 4—Fut., § 262, 
Exc. 

κύσσα, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 34. 


λαγχάνω, ὃ 322, 27, and D.—Perf., 
§ 274, Exc. 

λαμβάνω, § 322, 25, and D.—Perf., 
§ 274, Exc, 

λάμψομαι, ὃ 322, D. 25. 

λανθάνω, ὃ 322, 26, and Ὁ. 

λάξομαι, § 322, D. 27. 

Adoxw, ὃ 324, 29, and D. 

λέγω, Perf., § 274, Exc.; ὃ 279—2d 
Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 35. 

λείπω, ὃ 248; ὃ 254—Perf., ὃ 278; 

190. 


λέκτο, ὃ 316, D. 35. 

λέκτο, Aéypevoc, ὃ 316, D. 36. 
λελαβέσθαι, § 322, D. 25. 
λελακυῖα, ὃ 324, D. 29. 
λέλασμαι, § 322, D. 26. 


373 


λέλαχον, ὃ 322, Ὁ. 27. 

λέληκα, § 324, 29. 

λέλογχα, ὃ 322, Ὁ. 27. 

λελῦτο, § 289, D. 

λέξεο, § 268, D. 3. 

λεύω, ὃ 288. 

λήθω, ὃ 322, 26. 

ληκέω, ὃ 324, 1). 29. 

λήξομαι, § 322, 27. 

λήψομαι, ὃ 322, 25. 

λίσσομαι, ὃ 250, D. — Augm., ὃ 
234, D. . 

λόε, § 244, D. 4. 

λόεσσα, ὃ 269, Ὁ. 

λούω, ὃ 244,4—1st Aor., § 269, Ὁ. 

λύω, pp. 1038-109; § 2381; ὃ 301, 2 
—Opt. Perf. Mid., § 289, D.— 
Aor. Mid., § 316, D. 28. 


μαθεῖν. See μανθάνω. 

μαίομαι, ὃ 258, Ὁ. 

μανθάνω, § 322, 28. 

papvapat, ὃ 312, D.16 ὦ, 

μαρτυρέω, § 325, 5. 

μαστίζω, § 251, Obs.—Fut. accord- 
ing to ὃ 260, 3. 

μάχομαι, § 326, 23, and Ὁ. 

μέδω, § 826, D. 42. 

μεθύσκω, ὃ 324, 22. 

μείρομαι, Perf., § 274, Ὁ. 

μέλει, ὃ 326, 24, and D.—Augm., 
§ 234, Obs. 

μέλλω, § 326, 25—Augm., ὃ 234, 
Obs. 

μέλομαι, ὃ 326, 24. 

μέματον, μέμαμεν, § 817, D.9; ὃ 326, 
D. 26. 


μέμβλεται, § 326, Ὁ. 24. 
μέμβλωκα, § 51,D.; ὃ 282, D.; ὃ 324, 
D. 12. 


μεμετιμένος, ὃ 313, Ὁ. 2. 

μέμνημαι, § 274, Exc.; ὃ 284, D.— 
Subj. and Opt., § 289, D. 

μένω, ὃ 326, 26, and D. 

μερμηρίζω, § 251, D. 

μηκάομαι, § 325, Ὁ. ο. 

μίγνυμι, ὃ 819,18, and D.; ὃ 897, 7. 

μιαίνω, pp. 122,123. 

μῖκτο, § 316, D, 87. 


374 


μιμέομαι, Aor. Pass., § 828, 4. 

μιμνήσκω, ὃ 824, 6; ὃ 274, Exc.; 
§ 289, D. 

μίσγω, ὃ 327, 7—Aor. Mid., ὃ 316, 
D. 37. 


μνάομαι, ὃ 243, Ὁ. 3 ὃ. 
μολεῖν, μολοῦμαι, ὃ 324, 12. 
μύζω, ὃ 826, 27. 

μυκάομαι, ὃ 825, D. p. 


γαιετάω, Contract., ὃ 243, D. 1. 
vaiw, ὃ 253, D.; ὃ 829, D. 
γέμω, ὃ 326, 28. 

viw, ὃ 248. 

vigw, ὃ 251, Obs. 


ἕξω, ὃ 901, 1. 
Evpéw, ξύρομαι, ὃ 325, 6. 
ξύω, Perf. Mid., ὃ 288. 


ὄδωδα, ὃ 275, D.1; ὃ 326, 29. 
ὄζω, ¥ 251 ; § 326, 29—Perf., ὃ 275, 
1.1 


ἘΝ ΕΝ οἴγω, § 319,19, and 1). 

οἶδα, ὃ 317, 6, and D. 

Le bide, § 322, 19. 

οἶμαι, ὃ 244, 4. 

οἰμώζω, ὃ 251, Obs.—Future Mid., 
§ 266. 

οἰνοχοέω, Augm., ὃ 237, Ὁ. 

οἴομαι, § 326, 80, and D.—2d Sing. 
Pres., § 238, 3. 

oice, § 268, D. 

οἴσω, ὃ 327, 12. 

οἰχνέω, ὃ 326, Ὁ. 31. 

οἴχομαι, § 326, 81, and D. 

ὀλέκω, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 20. 

ὀλέσκετο, ὃ 337, Ὁ 

ὀλισθάνω, ὀλισθαίνω, ὃ 322, 20. 

ὄλλυμι, ὃ 319, 20, and D.—Iterat., 
§ 337, D. 

ὄμνυμι, ὃ 319,21, and D. 

ὀμόργνυμι, ὃ 319, 22. 

ὀνίνημι, ὃ 312, 2—Accent of Subj. 
and Opt. Aor. Mid., ὃ 309—Re- 
dupl., § 308. 

évopat, ὃ 314, D. 2. 

ὀξύνω, Perf. Mid., § 286, Obs. 

ὀπτός, § 327, 8. 


APPENDIX. 


ὕπωπα, ὃ 275, D.1. | 

ὁράω, § O27, 8. and Ὁ. --- Ae 
§ 237—Perf,, ὁ 275, D. 1. 

ὀργαίνω, 1st Aor. ὃ 270, Obs. 

ὀρέγνυμι, ὀρέγω, Ἢ 319, Ὁ. 36. 

ὀρέοντο, § 319, 1). 37. 

ὄρμενος, ὃ 316, Ὁ. 38. 

ὄρνυμι, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 87---Ο Ὑα Aor. Mid., 
§ 316, D. 88—Imperat., § 268, Ὁ. 

dpovro, ὃ 327, Ὁ. 8. 

ὁρόω, etc., ὃ 243, Ὁ. A 3 a. 

ὔρσο, ὄρσεο, § 268, D.; ὃ 316, Ὁ. 38. 

ὀρύσσω, ὃ 250—Perf.,§ 275, 1; ὃ 278. 

ὄρωρα, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 37. 

ὀρωρέχαται, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 36. 

ὀρώρυχα, ὃ Φ1ὅ,1: ὃ 278. 

ὀσφραίνομαι, § 322, 21, and D. 

οὐλόμενος, § 319, 1). 20. 

οὐρέω, Augm., ὃ 287. 

οὐτάω, ὃ 316, D. 20. 

ὀφείλω, § 326,82; ὃ 253, Obs. 

ὀφέλλω, Ist Aor., § 270, Ὁ. 2; ὃ 909, 
Obs. and D. 

ὀφλισκάνω, ὃ 322, 22. 

ὄχωκα, ὃ 327, D. 6. 

ὄψομαι, § 327, 8. 


παθεῖν. See πάσχω. 

πάλλω, Aor., ὃ 257, D.—Aor. Mid., 
§ 316, D. 40. 

παράκειμαι, ὃ 314, 2. 

παρανομέω, AugM., ὃ 239. 

παροινέω, Augm., ὃ 240. 

παῤῥησιάζομαι, Augm., ὃ 239. 

πάσσω, ὃ 250, Obs.—Fut. according 
to § 260, 3. 

πάσχω, ὃ 327, 9, and D.—Perfect, 
§ 317, D. 14. 

πατέομαι, ὃ 325, 7. 

παύω, Aor. Pass., ὃ 298. 

πείθω, Aor., ὃ 257, D.—Perf., ὃ 317, 
D. 15; § 330— Fut. and Aor, 
Part., § 8326, D.43; p. 118. 

πεινάω, ὃ 244, 2. 

πείσομαι, ὃ 327, 9. 

πελάζω, ὃ 316, D. ἔπ of 
1st Aor., § 268, D 

πέμπω, Perf. “δ 279: 

πεπαλών, ὃ 257, Ὁ. 


Ῥ. 120. 


APPENDIX, 


πέπιθον, ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

πέποιθα, ὃ 917, Ὁ. 15. 

πέπομαι, ὃ 327,10. 

᾿ πέπονθα, ὃ 317, D. 14. 

πέποσθε, § 827,D.9; § 817,.14. 
πέπρωται, § 285, Ὁ. 


πέπταμαι; § 274, Exc.; ὃ 319, 3. 
πεπτεώς, § 317, D.17. 

πεπτηώς, ὃ 810, 1). 91. 

πέπτωκα, § 274, Ἔχο.; ὃ 9817, .17; 


§ 327,15. 

πέπωκα, ἢ 327,10. 

πέρδομαι, § 326, 33. 

πέρθω, 2d Aor., ὃ 257,D.; ὃ 59, Ὁ. 
—Inf. Aor. Mid. " 910, 0.41: 

πέρνημι, ὃ 312 

πεσεῖν, § 327, pb 

πεσοῦμαι, ὃ 327,15. 

πέσσω, § 250, Obs. 

πετάννυμι, § 319, 3. 


πέτομαι, ὃ 326, 34—2d Aor.,§ 61¢; 


§ 257, D.; ον 316, 5, and D. 
πετῶ, ὃ 819,8 
πεύθομαι, ὃ 322, 29. 
πεφήσομαι, ὃ 321, D.10. 
πεφιδέσθαι, ὃ 257. Ὁ. 
πεφιδήσομαι, ὃ 257, D. 
πέφνον, ὃ 257, D 
πέφραδον, ὃ 257, D. 
πεφύασι, § 277, 10. 
πεφυζότες, ὃ 277, D. 


πήγνυμι, δ 319, 23—Aor. Mid., § 316, 


D. 39; § 330, 4. 
πιέζω, πιεζέω, § 325, Ὁ. ἡ. 
πῖθι, § 316, 15. 
πίλναμαι, ὃ 312, D.16 καὶ 
πίμπλημι, ὃ 808; ὃ 312, 3. 
πίμπρημι, § 808 ; § 812,4. 
πίνω, ὃ 321,4; ὃ 927,10---α Aor., 
§ 316,15, and D. 
πίομαι, ὃ 265; § 327, 10. 
πιπίσκω, ὃ 324,20; § 329, 7. 
πιπράσκω, § 824, ἢ. - 


πίπτω, § 327,15—Perf.,§ 317, D. 17. 


πίσω, ὃ 324, 20. 

πιτνέω, πίτνω, § 323, 35. 
πίτνημι, § 312, Ὁ. g. 
πιφαύσκω, ὃ 324, D. 32. 
πλάζω, ὃ 251, Obs. 


375 


πλάσσω, § 250, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 

πλέκω, Pp. 116—Aor. Pass., ὃ 295. 

πλέω, ὃ 248—Fut., ὃ 260, 2; § 264 
Perf. Mid., § 288. 

πλήθω, § 312, 3. 

πλήσσω, 20d Aor. and Fut. Pass., 
ὃ 295—Perf., ὃ 278 

πλῆτο (πελάζω), § 316, 1). 22 

πλῆτο (πίμπλημι), § 312, D. ὃ. 

πλώω, § 816, D. 24. 

πνέω, ὃ 248—Fut., ὃ 260, 2; § 264 
— Perf. Mid., ὃ 285, D.—Aor., 
§ 316, D. 29. 

ποθέω, ὃ 301, 4. 

πολεμίζω, ὃ 251, D.—Fut., § 261, D. 

πονέω, ὃ 801, 4 

πορεῖν, § 285, D. 

ποτάομαι, Plup. Mid., ὃ 287, Ὁ. 

πράττω, § 250—Perf., § 279, Obs. 1. 

πρήθω, § 312, 4. 

πρίασθαι, § 816, 8—Accent of Sulsj. 
and Opt., § 309. 

moiw, Pert., § 288. 

προθέουσιν, § 305, D. 

arac, ὃ 316, 5. 

πτέσθαι, ὃ 967), D. 

πτήσσω, § 816, 1). 91. 

πτίσσω, ξ 250, Obs.—F ut., § 260, 3. 

πτύω, § 301, 1. 

πυθέσθαι, ὃ 322, 29. 

πυνθάνομαι, ὃ 322, 29, and D. 


ῥαίνω, Perf. Mid., § 287, D. 
ῥέζω, ὃ 327, 3, and ἢ. 
ῥερυπωμένος, ὃ 274, D. 

pew, § 248; § 326, 85. 
ῥήγνυμι, § 319, 24; § 330, 5. 
ῥηθήσομαι, § 327, 8. 

ῥιγέω, ὁ 82 55D, 4. 

ῥιγόω, ῥιγῶν, § 244, 8, 
ῥιπτέω, ῥίπτω, § 325, 8, and D. 
ῥυήσομαι, § 326, 35. 

ῥῦσθαι, etc., ὃ 314, D. 2 
ῥώννυμι, ὃ 319, 10. 


σαλπίζω, ὃ 251, Obs. 

σβέννυμι, § 319, 7—2d Aor., ὃ 316, 
9; αὶ 318, 5. 

σέβομαι, Aor. Pass., § 328, 2. 


376 


σείω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 

σεύω, ὃ 248, D.—1st Aor., § 269, Ὁ. 
—Perf. Mid.,§ 274, D.; § 285, D. 
—2d Aor. Mid.,§ 316, D. 30. 

σημαίνω, Aor., § 270, Obs. 

σήπω, ὃ 330, 6—Aor. Pass., § 295. 

σιγάω, Fut. Mid., § 266. 

σιωπάω, Fut. Mid.,.§ 266. 

σκεδάννυμι, ὃ 319, 4. 

σκεδῶ, § 319, 4. 

σκέλλω, Aor., ὃ 316,10; ὃ 329, 6. 

σκίδνημι, ὃ 8612, Ὁ. 10 2, ὃ 319, 4. 

σκλῆναι, § 316, 10. 

σμάω, § 244, 2. 

σπάω, ὃ 801, 1—Perf. Mid., ὃ 288. 

σπείρω, § 953: p. 122. 

oreiow, ὃ 260, 1. 

oxévow, Fut., § 260, 1—Perf. Mid., 
§ 286, 1, Obs. 

σπέσθαι. ὃ 327, 5. 

σπουδάζω, Fut. Mid., ὃ 266. 

σπών, § 327, 5. 

στάζω, ὃ 251, Obs.—Fut. according 
to § 260, 3. 

στείβω, § 326, 36. 

στέλλω, Perfect, ὃ 282—Aor. Pass., 
§ 295. 

στενάζω, ὃ 251, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 

στερίσκω, στερῶ, ὃ 324,26, and Ὁ. 

στέρομαι, ὃ 324, 26. 

στίζω, § 251, Obs.—Fut., § 260, 3. 

στορέννυμι, § 319, 8. 

στόρνυμι, ὃ 319, 25. 

στρέφω, Perf. Mid., ὃ 285 — Perf., 
ὃ 278—Aor. Pass., ὃ 328, 3. 

στρώννυμι, ὃ 319, 11. 

στυγέω, § 325, D. 8 &. 

στυφελίζω, § 251, D.—Fut., § 261, Ὁ. 

otro, § 316, D. 80. 

σφάλλω, ὃ 252. 

σφάττω, § 250. 

σχεθέειν, § 338, D. 

σχεῖν, etc., § 327, 6. 

σχές, § 316,11; ὃ 327,6 

σχίζω, § 251. 

σώζω, 1st Aor. Pass., ὃ 298. 


τάνυμαι, τανύω, ὃ 319, Ὁ. 88. 
ταράσσω, § 250—Perf., § 277, Ὁ 


APPENDIX. 


τάσσω, ὃ 250—Perf., ὃ 287; p.116. 

τεθηλώς, ὃ 277,.D. 

τέθναμεν, § 817, 8 

τεθνεῶτος, § 817, Ὁ. 8. 

τεθνήξω, ὃ 291; ὃ 524,4. 

τείνω, Perf., § 282—1st Aor. Pass., 
§ 298. 

redéw, ὃ 801, 1—Perf. Mid., ὃ 288— 
1st Aor. Pass., § 298. 

τέμει (τέμνω), ὃ 321, D. 10. 

τέμνω, ὃ 321,10, and D. 

τέξομαι. See τίκτω. 

τέρπω, Aor. Pass., ὃ ὅ9, D.; § 295, 
D.— Aor. Mid., ὃ 257, Ὁ. ᾿ 

τεταγών, ὃ 257, D 

τέτακα, ὃ 282. 

τετάρπετο, ὃ 257, D. 

τετεύχαται, ὃ 322, D. 90. 

τέτλαμεν, § 817, D. 10. 

τέτληκα, ὃ 3817, D. 10. 

τέτμηκα, ὃ 321, 10. 

τέτμον, ὃ 257, D..2. 

τετορήσω, ὃ 326, Ὁ. 44. 

τετραίνω, Aor., § 270, Obs. 

τέτρηχα, ὃ 277, D. 

τετυκεῖν, § 322, D. 30. 

τεύχω, ὃ 822, 30—Perf. Mid., ὃ 285, 
D.; § 322, D. 30. 

τήκω, § 330, 7—Aor. Pass., ὃ 295. 

τίθημι, p.124; ὃ 805, and D.; ὃ 307 
—Aor. Pass., ὃ 53 6—Aor., ὃ 310 
—Perf., § 311. 

τίκτω, ὃ 249. 

τίνυμι, § 319, Ὁ. 35. 

rivw, ὃ 591. ὅ, and D. 

τιτράω, ὃ 827, 16. 

τιτρώσκω, § 324,16, and D. 

τιτύσκομαι, ὃ 322, Ὁ. 30; ὃ 324, D. 37. 

τλῆναι, § 316, 6, and Ὁ). 

τμήγω, § 321, D.10. 

τραπέω, τραπείομεν, ὃ 295, Ὁ. 

τρέπω, Aor., ὃ 257; ὃ 294—Perf., 
§ 279—Perf. Mid., § 285. 

τρέφω, ὃ 54 c—Perf.,§ 285—2d Aor. 
Pass., § 295—Aor., § 329, D. 

τρέχω, § 54 ες; § 327,11, and Ὁ. 

τρήσω, § 327, 16. 

τρίβω, p. 120. 

τρώγω, 2d Aor., ὃ 257. 


APPENDIX. 


τρώω, § 324, D. 16. 

τυγχάνω, ὃ 822,30, and Ὁ. 
τύπτω, § 990, 97, and D.; ὃ 249. 
τύφω, § δ4 ¢, 

τυχεῖν, § 322, 80. 


ὑπισχνοῦμαι, § 323, 36. 
ὑποπτεύω, Augm., ὃ 239, Exc. 


φαάνθην, ὃ 321, D. 10. 

φαγεῖν, § 327, 4. 

pae(v), § 821, D. 10. 

φαείνω, § 321, D. 10. 

φαίνω, § 253; ὃ 821,D.10; § 258; 
§ 267; ὃ 273; ὃ 292—Perf., ὃ 
282; ὃ 278—Aor. Pass., ὃ 298, 
D.; ὃ 828, 3. 

φάσκω, § 324, 8. 

φείδομαι, Aor., ὃ 257, D.; ὃ 3826, D. 
45 


φέρτε, ὃ 815, Ὁ. 4; ὃ 3827, Ὁ. 12. 

φέρω, § 327, 12, and D.—Imperat. 
1st Aor., ὃ 268, Ὁ. 

φεύγω, ὃ 322, 31—Fut. Mid., § 264 
—Perf. Act., § 278—Perf. Mid., 
§ 285, D. 

φημί͵ § 312, 5; § 92, 3. 

φθάνω, ὃ 321, 3, and D.—2d Aor., 
§ 316, 7, and Ὁ. 

φθείρω, Perf., § 282; § 330, D.11. 

φθίνω, ὃ 321,6, and D.—Aor. Mid., 
§ 316, D. 26. 

φιλέω, ὃ 325, Ὁ. ὦ. 

φιλοτιμέομαι, Aor. Pass., § 328, 2. 

φράγνυμι, φάργνυμι, § 319, 26. 

φράζω, 2d Aor., ὃ 257, Ὁ. 

φράσσω, § 319, 26. 


377 


φυγγάνω, ὃ 322, 31. 

φυλάσσω, ὃ 250. 

φύρω, Fut., ἢ 262, D. 

gow, Aor., § 316,17, and D.; § 329, 3. 


χαίρω, ὃ 326, 38, and D. 

χαλάω, § 301, 1. 

χανδάνω, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 41. 

χανοῦμαι, ὃ 324, 9. 

χάσκω, ὃ 324, 9. 

χείσομαι, ὃ 323, Ὁ. 41, 

χέω, ὃ 948 — Fut., ὃ 265 --- Perf., ὃ 
281—1st Aor., ὃ 269—Aor. Mid., 
§ 316, D. 31. . 

χραισμέω͵ ὃ 825, D. 8. m. 

χράω, χράομαι, ὃ 244,2—Fut., § 261. 

χρεών, ὃ 312, 6. 

χρή; § 812, 6. 

χρίω, Perf. Mid., § 288. 

χρώννυμι, § 319, 12. 


Paw, ὃ 244, 2. 
ψεύδω, Mid. and Pass., p. 118. 


wypat, ὃ 827, D. 6. 

ὠθέω, ὃ 825, 9—Augm., ὃ 237. 

ὦμμαι, ὃ 327, 8. 

wovapny, etc., § 314, 2, D. 

ὠνέομαι, Augm., ὃ 237 — Perfect, 
§ 275, 2. 

wEvppar, § 286, 1, Obs. 

ὥρορον, ὦρσα, ὃ 319, D, 37. 

ὠσφρόμην, ὃ 322, 21. 

ὠφείλω, ὃ 326,32. 

ὦὥφελλα, ὃ 270, D. 2. 

ὦφθην, ὃ 327, 8. 

ὦφλον, ὃ 322, 22. 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


(Tie numbers indicate the §, not the pages.) 


ABODE, 


** 4 bode,” to be supplied, 411. 
Absolute Genit., 428; 584— 
Acc., 586. 

Abstracts in the Plur., 362, 
Obs.—mostly Fem., 103. 
Accent, 17, etc. — General 
rules, 79, etc. — of Nouns, 
107, etc.; 118; 128; 149 --- 
of Comparatives, i71—of 
Pron., 207 —Irregularities 
in the declensions, i21 ; 
12337 131; 133 ; 142; 163; 
166; 181; 183—in Adverbs, 
201; 165 —in Verbs, 229; 
331, etc.—in the Strong 
Aor., 255 —in the Perf., 
276; 284—in the Strong 
Pass. Stem, 293 —irreg. 
332, etc. —in derivation, 

340, Obs. 4, ete. 

Accusative, orig. ending, 173, 
Obs. — meaning, 395 — of | 
the outer obj., 396, etc.—of 
the inner obj., 400, etc. — 
of double obj., 402, ete.—of 
the predicate, 403 — free 
Acc., 404, etc.—Adverbial, 
201 ; "203 : with Prep., 447, ἿΪ 
—with the Inf., 567, etc. 

“Accustomed to,’ expressed 
by Aor. and Imperf. Ind., 
with ἄν, 494, Obs. 1. 

“Acquainted with,” or ‘‘ig- 
norant of,” with Genit., 
414, 3. 

Action, Suffixes for, 342. 

Active, 476—Act., Mid., Pass. 
meaning, 328. 

Acute Accent, 17; 80, ete.— 


87, 2. 

“Adapted for” Suffix, 351. 

Adjectives, declens., 114; 126; 
154; 164, etc. —Compar., 
197-Genders, 180, etc.—of 
3 ΤΉ gg 185, etc. —of 2 
Endings, 182; 189—of 1 
Ending, 190—Derived, 350 
—Contr., 183—Subs. fem. ἢ 
127, 4—with Art., 379—fol- 
low the Genit. , 412, Obs. 

Adverbs, 201, etc. — Gorrela- 
tive, 217, etc. —Num., Adv., 


ATTRIBUTE, 


223—with the Art., 379— 
as Adject., 382. 

“Aim,” expressed by Acc., 
406. 

Alphabet, 3. 

Anastrophe, 90. 

Aorist, weak, with transitive 
meaning, 329— with x, 310 
—strong with intransitive 
meaning, 329—of proverbs 
and gnomes, 494—Ind., 492, 
etc.—in Condit. sentences, 
543—in Condit. sentences, 
539 ; 541—Moods, 495, etc. 
—Subj. in cond. sent., 545, 
Obs. 1— Opt. and Inf. 497 
—Part., 496. 


, Apocope, 64, D. 


A postrophe, 15; 64; 65, D. 
Apposition, 861,12; 385—Ap- 
positive Partic., 579; 583. 
Article, 106—Crasis, 65— 
without Accent, 97, 1—as 
Demonstr. Pron., 212, D.— 
for the Relative, 213, D.— 
Origin in Homer, 808; 370, 
Obs.—omitted, 876, ete.— 
Meaning, 369, ete. —Neut., 
with Genit., 381 ; 410—Po- 

sition, 383- 390. 

Aspirates, 32; 52, etc.—at the 
begin. of two successive 
syll., 53; 274, 1—Redupli- 
cated by Tenues, 62. 

Aspiration dropped or re- 
moved, 32, D.—thrown 
back, 54—omitted, 52, D.— 
in the strong Pert, 279. 

Assimilation, “45: 47, ete. 
50 ὃ» 51; 56. 

Asyndeton, 624 a, Obs. 

Atona, 97—before Enclit., 93 
e; 98. 

“Attempting an action,” ex- 
pressed by the Imperf., 489. 

Attic Decl., 132—Ending, 157 
—Future, 263—Reduplic., 
275,13; 278. 

Attraction, 597, etc.—invert- 
ed, 604. 

Attribute, 361, 11— Attribu- 


tive Adjective Art., 384—! 


COMPLETED. 


Attrib. compounds, 359, 2, 
and Obs. (Comp. 860)—At- 
tributive additions, 883- 
8386 — Attrib. Partic., 578. 

Augment, 234, etc.--Omitted, 
234, D. ; 235—Double, 237; 
240 —in Compounds, 238, 
etc. —irreg., 270, D. 


Barytones, 19. 

ete ee othe “make,” 
ete., 417; 361, 7. 

“Begin, «interrupt, Send, 7 
verbs with Part. ,590—with 
Genit., 419 b. 

ee Benefiting,” Verbs of, 396. 

Say ” Verbs with Genit., 


“Capability,” etc., Verbs with 
Inf., 560, 1. 

Cardinal Num., 220. 

Case, 100—Use of, 392, ete.— 
Endings, 100 — Acc., 142; 
153—in Comps., 354, Obs. 

“* Cause,” in the Genit., 408, 
7 —422; 426—Dat., 439— 
Part., 581. 

Challenge or Command—in 
the Subjunc.,509—by ὅπως, 
553, Obs. 

Characteristic, 249. 

Circumflex, 21; 80; 88, etc. ; 
81 a. 

Classes of Verbs in o, 247- 
250; 320-327; of Verbs in 
μι, 806-819. 

Collective Sing., 362. 


3 Common Gend., 127, 5; 140. 


“Community,” “expressed by 
Dat. 436. 

Comparative, 192, etc. —de- 
clens., 170, etc. ὁ irreg., 199 
—Ady., 203—with Genit., 
416—A dj. and Verbs with 
Genit., 416, Obs, 3; 423. 

Compensation by lengthen- 
ing, 42—for v, 49, Obs. 3; 
147, 1; 233, 2—for vt, v0, vd, 
50; 147, 1; 187—for σ, 270. 

Completed Action in Verbs, 
484: 435; 502-506. 


[2] 


vw 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


COMPOUNDS. 


Compounds, Divis. of Syll., 18 
— Accent, 85; 131; 165; 
183; 889. - Adj., 182, ete. ; 
199, 8 3— Augm. in Comp. 
Verbs, 238, etc.—treated as 
simple Ver bs, 402— with 
Genitive, 424— with Dat., 
437. 

Concessive Participle, 582. 

Conditional Sentences, 534, 
549—negat., 616. 

Conjunctions, 623, etc. 

Connecting Vowels, 233, 1, 2, 
5; 262, etc. ; 275. 

Consonants, Divis. of, 30, etc., 
44—in dividing Syll., 71, 
etc. 

Contraction, 36, etc.—in De- 
clens., 118; 122; 128; 130, 
etc. ; 163, D.; 166; 16S— 
Double, 167—Omitted, 35, 
D. 1; 165; 166, D.; 233, 
D. 4; 243, D.; 263, D.—of 
the Pres. Stem, 243, etc.— 
of Adv., 201—Contr. Syll. 
long, 75, Obs.—Accent, $7; 


163; 831—Contr. Fut., 259; 
262, etc. 

Co-ordination, 519, 1 a, 2 

Coronis, 16; 65. 

Correlation, 519, 4— Correl. 
Pron. 216; 218—Adv., 217, 
etc. 

ae 16; €5— Accent in, 

9. 


Dative, Perispome, 109—Oxy- 
tone, 153, 2—in Monosyll., 
142 —in σι(ν), 68; 165, D. 
—represented by’ φιν, 178, 
D. — Meaning, 429, ete. — 
with Prepos., 447, 3—of ad- 

vant. anc disadv., 431—of 
interest, 431, etc.—ethical, 
433 οἵ community, 436, 
etc.—of instrument, 438, 
etc. —of measure, 440 — 
free, 441-443. 


“ὁ Declaration,” Verbs of — 
with Acc. and Inf., 567 — 
with Inf, 560, 2—with 
Part., 593 — with ov, 617, 
Obs. 1—Sentences of, 525. 

ESS Augment in, 

39 

Defectives in Compar., 200. 

aged Object, 400 c—Inf., 


μας Article, 369— 
Pron., 212; 216; 475—fol- 
lows the predicate, 367 — 
Art. with, 389. 

Denominati ves, 339. 

Dental Cons., 30—dissim. 46 
—-become σ, 47; 67—mutes 
erepned before o, 49: 147, 


1; 149; 260—in Perf., 281 
ἐς ὁ Charact. in Verbs, "250, 
Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 


GENDER. 


| 
Deponents,482—Pass.,328, 2— 


Pass. Mean., 328, 4; 483, 3. 
Derivative Ending in Com- 
paratives, 357. 
Descr dear ad gee by the 
Imperf., 4 
Postrace: 353, Obs. 2 
Determinative Comps., 359, 1, 
and Obs. (Comp. 360). 
Dieresis, 9; 22, Obs. 
Digamma, 3. D. ; 34, D.; 35, 
D. 2; 63, D.; 75, D.; 160; 
237 ; 238, Obs. ; 360, Obs. 
Diminutives, 347; 104. 
Diphthongs, Pronunciation, 
8 — Origin, 26; 35, 2—De- 
fore Vowels, 35, Obs.; 160; 
248, Obs. —without Au egm., 
235—spurious, 20. 
Disjunctive questions. 
Double question.) 
Dissimilation, 46. 
Distributives, 293, 
Dorie Fut., 204. 
Doubling of Conson., 62; 34. 
Double questions, 611 — οὐ 
and μή, 615, Obs. 1. 
Dual represented by P1., 365. 


(See 


Effect and Consequence ex- 
Ὡς τῶι by Acc. and Inf., 
56 


Elision, 64—Accents, 88—be- 
fore Enclit., 96, 3. 

Enclitics, 92, ete. '—retaining 
the Accent, 96, 

Ending, 100 —changed in 
Comps. 355—of the “Ist De- 
clens., 134—of 2d, 172. 

Enjoying, verbs of, with Gen- 
itive, 419 d. 

Epexegesis, 624 a, Obs. 

Ethical Dative, 433. 

Kaclamations, 393—in Acc., 
399, Obs.—in Genit., 427. 

Extent, exp. by Acc., 405. 


Fear and Anxiety, 533; 512; 
616, Obs. 3. 

Feeling, verbs of, with Acc., 
8399—with Dat., 439, Obs.— 
with Genitive, 422, Obs.— 
with Part., 592. 

Ber tine 103; 127; 188; 

163. 

Final letters, 67, etc. —Syll. 
long—bef. vow ‘els short, 75, 
D. 2—Contr. Accent, ST: 
183. 

Future, 499, etc., 484 — Act. 
with trans. Meaning, 329 
—periphrastic, 501— Fut. 
Perf., 505— Ind. with κέ, 
554, Obs. 2—Particip. with 
Art., 500. 


Gender, known by general 
rules, 101, ete. ; 127—by 
ending of Stem, 125; 137, 


INTERROGATIVE. 


etc.—by Declens., 105; 122 
—in A Declens., 122—in O 
Declens., 127—in Conson. 
Declens., 137, etc. 

Generic Article, 575. 

Genitive Perispome, 100; 118 
—Oxytone,133 ,2—Paroxy- 
tone, 181—in Monosyll., 142 
—represented by dev and 
φ'ν, 178, D.; 118—Meaning, 
407 —with Prepos. -, 447, 9. 
with Subst., 408, etc.—with 
Adj. and Ady., 414, ete. — 
with Verbs, 417, etc.—free 
Genit., 425, etc. 

Gentile Names, 349 ; 350. 

Grave accent, 19, etc. ; 86 

Gutturals, 30—with o form &, 
48; 260—before μ, become 
7, 47 — with «, become ao, 
57—Charact. of Pres., 2&0; 
261, Ὁ. 


Heteroclites, 114. 

Hiatus, 63—apparent, 63, Ὁ. 4. 

Hypothetical Sent. (See Con- 
ditional Sent.). 


Imperative, 228—1 Aor., 53— 
268, D.; 518—inCond.Sent., 
545, Obs. 3—exp. by 2 Pers. 
Fut. with ov, 499, Obs. 
supplied by Inf., 577. 

Imperfect, 488, etc.—in Cond. 
Sent., 548—in Prot. and 
Apod., 588 ; 541. 

Inclination, 91, etc. 

Incomplete ‘Action, 484, ete. 

Indefinite Subject, 361, 3, Obs. 
2—in Neut., 864 

Indefinite Pronouns,214, ete. ; 
216—Adv., 92, 4. 

Indicative, 507 —in Depend. 
Sent.,520; 5283—in depend., 
declar.,and interrog. Sent., 
526—in Condit. Sent., 536, 
etc., 545—in temp. Sent., 
556—hypoth. Ind. in Cond. 
Sent., Mths Sent. of pur- 
pose, 5 

Indirect Object, 430 a. 

Individualizing Article, 811, 
etc. 

Infinitive Act., in μεναι, μεν, 
233, D. 3; 25D, D.—in vac 
Aor. and Perf. Accent, 333, 
1-5; 268, Obs. 1—Use, 559 
—with Art., 379—as Sub- 
ject, 563; 574, 1—Acce., 2— 
Gen. μι 3—Dat., 4—with μή, 
and οὐ, 617 — with μὴ οὐ, 
621 c, d—for Imper., ὅ11. 

“ Injure,” Verbs—with Ace. ἘΝ 
890. 

Instrument, suffix, 844 ---- Da- 
tive of, 43S; 574, 4. 

Interest or Advantage, Dat. 
of, 431; etc.—Middle of, 479. 

Interrogative Pron., 214; 216 


— 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


381 


IRREGULAR, 


—direct and indirect, 475 b; 
609—in depend. Sent., 525 
—joined with Demonstr., 
606, Obs. 1. 

Irregular Nouns, 177—Verbs, 
320, Obs. 

Iterative form, 334, D., etc. 
in Imperf. and Aor., 335, Ὁ. 


Judicial Proceedings, Verbs 
of—with Genit., 422. 


Kinds of Verbs, 225, 2. 


Labials, 30—before up 47 — 
before σ, 48; 260 —verbal} 
stem, 249, 

Lengthening, 40, ete.; 147; 
155, 165; 173, Obs. — in 
Pres., 24S—in the Fut., 260, 
2; 261 —in Redupl., 275 
(Comp., 273, D. ; 278)—of 
Vowels, 243, D. 3; 263, D. 

Liquids, 33—in divis. of SylL., 
is 


Locative, 179. 
Long by Nature, 75. 


Manner, exp. by Dat., 441. 

Masculines, 102; 137—disting. 
from Fem., 113; 122; 134 
—for Fem., 362, Obs. 2. 

Material, suftix, 352, 3, 4 — 
Genit., 408, 3; 414,2; 418. 

Measure, in Dat., 440. 

Medic, 32. 

Metaplasm, 175. 

Metathesis, 59; with strong 
Aor. Act. and Mid., 257 ; 
D., 282, 285; with strong 
Aor. Pass., 295, D. 

Middle, 477, etc. —direct, 478 
— indirect, 479 — Subject- 
ive, 480 — Causative, 481 --- 
Aor. with Mid. meaning, 
255, 2; 271—Fut. with Act. 
meaning, 264; 266; 325, 1 
—with Pass. meaning, 266. 

Modesty of Assertion, exp. in 
Opt., with av, 517, Obs. 1. 

Momentary Action, 484; 492- 


498, 

Monosyllabie Stems, length- 
ened, 142 b—in A.v,p,Perf., 
282—AccentofMon.words, 
142—with Enclit., 94. 

Moods, 225, 4. 

Multiplicatives, 223. 

** Must” and ‘* Should,” Verbs 
of, in Imperf., 490. 

Mutes,31,etc.—Assimilation, 
49, 1). ; 52—before Liquids 
and Nasals, 7S—Stems of 
Verbs, 248. 


Name in Genit., 408, 9 — of 
Animals, Gender, 140. 

“Name,”*‘Select,’’etc., Verbs 
of, 361, 7,10; 292; 463. 


Narrative in Aor. Ind., 492. 
Nasals, 33—in divis. of Syll., 


Necessity, expressed by Ver- 
Negatives, 619, and Obs. 


Negative Pron. and Adv., 219. 
Neuters, 104; 139 — Dental 


Nominal, Predicate, 361, 4, 


Nominative Dual oxytone, 


PASSIVE, 


(pals 
bal Adj., 800. 


Stems, 147 b; — Liquid 
Stems, 151—Sigma Stems, 
165—Marks of, 105,83; 125; 
136— Accent, 340, Obs. 4— 
as Adv., 201; 203; 401 — 
Plu. with Sing. Verbs, 363 
—Adj. as Predic., 366. 


etc. 


131, 1—for Voe., 129 ; 898--- 
meaning, 392. 

Nouns from Verbal Stems, 
245. 

Numbers, 100, 1; 2295, 1— 
**two” in the P1., 365. 

Numerals, 220, Obs. — with 
Art., 814. 


Objective Inf., 561 — Genit., 
574, 3, Obs.— Part., 581; 861, 
9: 395. 

Objective Com} s., 359, 8, and 
Obs.—Genit., αὐ, δ b; 418. 

“Opinion to be of,” Verb, 
with Inf., 560, 2; 567. 

Optative, 228—Pres., 2 Pers. 
Sing. in ofa, 233, D. 1 — 
Perf. Mid., 289-514 — po- 
tential with ἄν, 517, Obs. 2; 
552, Obs.—in dep. sent., 524 
—Opt.in dep. Sent. ,522, etc. 
—in indir. Speech, 523—in 
depend., declar., and inter. 
Sent., 528—in Sent. of pur- 
pose, 532—in Sent. of fear, 
533—in Condit. Sent., 546, 
ete.—in Relat. Sent., 655— 
in tempor. Sent., 556; 55S 
—exp. Interest, 490, 

Ordinal Numbers, 220 —in 
Acc., 405, Obs. 1. 

Oxytones, 17—before Enxclit., 
93 a. 


Paroxytones, 17 —in Crasis, 
89—hbefore Enclit., 03 ὁ. 

Participles, Declens., 187 — 
Voc. Sing., 148—Perf. Act., 
276, D. —Fem., 188; 277, 
D.—Pres., Aor., and Perf. 
Mid., 333, 6-10—with Art., 
379, etc. ; 578, Obs. — in 
Dat., 435, Obs. — hypoth. 
with μή, 583, 618. 

Particles, 92,5; 623, etc. 

Partitive Genitive, 408, 4; 
412; 419. 

Passive, 483 — with Dative, 


PRESENT. 

Patronymics, 348. 

Peculiar Charact. Suffix, 351 
—Genit., 408, 8. 

** Perceive,” Verbs of, with 
Genit., 420; 417, Obs. — 
with Infin., 560, 2— with 
Part., 591. 

Perfect, weak, 277, D.; 280, 
eic.—strong, 277, ete.—in- 
trans. meaning, 330—trans. 
and intrans. meaning, 329 
—use of the Ind., δ09 --- 
Moods, Inf., Part., 506 — 
Perfects with Pres. mean- 
ing, 503. 

Period, hypoth., 534 —inter- 
posed, 550—Negative, 616. 

Perispomes, 21—before In- 
clit., 93 ὃ. 

Personal End:ngs, 226—Pro- 
noun, 250, etc. ; 92, 2— 
Meaning, 469—Genit., 470 a 
—for reflec. pron., 471, Obs. 
a, b—Personal Constr., 571. 

Place, Suffix of, 345—Genit. 
of, 412; 415; 425—Dative, 
442—Adyvy. with Genit., 415 
— Desig. of, 82,2; 179; 412. 

Plenty and Want, Adject. of, 
414, 2—Verbs, 418. 

Plural, 3 Pers. Pl. Mid. in 
-atat, -ato, 226, D.; 233, D. 
6—1 Mid. in μεσθα, 233, Ὁ. 
5; 362, ete. 

Position, 71, ete. ; 198. 

Possessive Article, 873 — 
Pron., 20S—with Art., 388 ; 
470 — of the reflective, 472 
b, c—Poss. exp. by Genit., 

- 408, 2; 414, 1—by Dat., 422. 

Possibility,exp.by Verb Adj., 
300—by Opt. with ἄν, 516, 
etc. ; 546—by Part. with 
av, 595. 

Predicate, 361, 8, etc. —de- 
pendent, 861, 10; 589, 2— 
without Art., 378, 387. 

Predicative Acc.,408—Genit., 
417—Acc. with Inf., 570 — 
Gen. or Acc., 572 — Part., 
589, 

Prepositions, lose their Ac- 
cent, 88—Elision in dissyl., 
64; 90; 28385—Anastrophe, 
90—Augm. aft. Prep., 228, 
etc.—Use, 444 Adverbial, 
446 — with Acc., 449 f— 
Genit., 451, etc.—Dat., 456, 
etc.—Genit. and Acc., 45s— 
with three cases, 462, etc.— 
spurious, 445, 

Present Ind., 486, ete. — 
Moods, Inf. Part., 491 — 
hist., 487 — exp. by Ina. 
Aor., 494, Obs. 2—enlarge- 
ment of, 246—Stem, 231— 
like the Verb Stem, 247— 


454—Aor. in Active verbs 
with Mid. meaning, 328, 8.) 


with lengthened Stem 
Vowel, 248 —from Verb 


PRIMITIVE. 


Stem with τ, 249— with ε, 
250, etc. 

Primitive words, 339. 

Principal Conjugations, 230 
—first, 231, etc. ; 320, etc. — 
second, 802 --819 --- Declen- 
sions, 111—first, 112-134— 
second, 135. 

Proclitics (see Atona). 

“ὁ Prohibition,” 518; 510; 499 
—Prohibit, Hinder, Deny, 
etc.—have the Infin. with 
py, 617, Obs. 3—with μὴ οὐ, 
621 d. 

Prolepsis, 519, 5, Observ. 2 
(Comp., 567; 571). 

Pronunciation, 4, etc. 

Proparoxytones, 17 — before 
Encl., 93 d. 

Pr operispomes, 21—.Dbefore 
Encl., 93 ἃ. 

Proper Names in -a, 115, D. 2 
—ns, 114--- κλῆς, 167 — with 
Art., 371, Obs. ; 375, Obs. ; 
887, Obs. 

& Proper ty,” Suffix of, 346; 
343, Obs. 


Quantity, in Cre asis, 65--in 
Monosyll., 142 —doubtful, 
75, D., 15: eversing quant., 
37, D.,2; 161, Obs. 

Quantitative Adj j. ἘΠ Adv., 
224—with Art., 

Questions, ἀρ αν, in the 
Subj., 511. i 

Reciprocal Pron., 211. 

Reduplication, 58, 10 a—in 
the Perf., 273, etc.—in the 
2 Aor., 257 d—in Verbs in 
μι, 808. 

Ttejlective Pron., 210 —Mean- 
ing, 471—3d for 1st and 2d 


ENGLISH INDEX. 


SUBJUNOTIVE. 


Result of an Act, 843—in the 
Acc., 400 d. 
Root, 245, 


‘* Scare,” **Obstruct,” a ὦ 
other Verbs, with the Inf,, 
560, 3. 

Semivowels, 31. 

Sentences, Compound, 519, 3, 
5—Principal, Subordinate, 
519, 4—Moods of, 525, etc. 
—Condit., 584; 549, etc.— 
Negat., 616—of Experience 
in Aor. Ind., 494—Interr., 
525—of Purpose, 530-533— 
Negat., 616. 

Shortening, at the beginn., 
74, D. —of the final “syll., 
7, D. 2—in the Perf., 285, 
D.—in the Subj., 228, 1). ; 
233, D. 2—in Rel. Sent., 
BOT, 3. 

“ Should, ” exp. in depend. 
Sent. by the Subj., 527 ὃ, 
Opt., 528 ὃ. 

‘* Show,” Verbs of with Part., 
593 ; 550. 

Sigma, future, 259; 260, etc. 
—Aor., 269. 

Singular, 3 Pers. in ε (v), 68, 
4— Accent on Imp. Mid., 
268, 2— Accent on 2 Aor. 
Imper. Act. and Mid., 833, 
11, 12, 362. 

“Space,” exp. by the Accus., 
899 ὃ. : 


we 


Spiritus, position, 12; 22— 
with p and pp, 13 — Spir. 
Asper, 60 b—in Augment, 
235, Obs.—Spir. Lenis, 11. 

Stem, 100—St. Vowel length- 
ened, 147, 2; 248; 253, Obs. ; 
261, 270, changed to e, 157. 

“Strive,” ‘*Aim at,” Verbs 


Pers., Obs. c—to denote 
possession, 472—for Re- 
ciprocal, 473. 

Relative Adj., 414. 

Relative Pron., 213; 216 — 
Crasis,65—Compound,214, 
Obs. 2—Hypoth., 554—fo)- 
lows the Predic. Subst., 367 
—used once only, 605. 

RelativeSentences,551—with 
Future Ind., 500—with μή, 
615, Obs, 2— “complication, 
604—Connection, 605. 

** Reference to,” exp. by the 
Acc., 404. 

Rejection of letters, 61—of a 
Vowel at begin., see Syn- 
cope—of a vowel at end, 
see Elision. 

Repetition, exp. by the Opt., 


with Genitive, 419 c—with 
Inf., 560, 3. 

Subject, 361, 3—Omitted, Obs. 
2—with Genit. Abs., 585 a 
—of a Subordinate Sent. 
as Object of the Principal 
Sent., 397; 519, 5—Obs. 2— 
Subj. of Prin. Sent. in the 
Subord. Sent., 602; 519, 5, 
Obs. 2. 

Subjective Genit., 408, 5 a. 

Subjunctive, 228—Shortened, 
233, D.2; 255, D.1; 302, Ὁ. 
—of the Perf. Mid., 299 --- 
of verbs in με, accent, 309— 
Meaning, 508, ete.—similar 
to Fut., 5183—in dep. sent., 


521—in depend. assert. and . 


interrog., 527—in sent. of 
purpose, 531, 532, Obs. — 


547 (Negative, 616, Obs. 2) 
555, Obs. 1; 558. Obs. 1. 


exp. fear, 5833—in condit. 
sent., 545, 554, 555, Obs. 2 


_—e——_e 


WORTH. 


Paton tempor. sent., 557, 558, 

bs 

ἔμετον tee 519, 3. 

Substantive, degrees of, 199, 
D.—joined to ὙΠῸ Dat., 430, 
Obs., 432, Obs. 

Suffixes, 340; 178. 

Superlatives, Adv., 203—with 
Genit., 416, Obs. 2—with ὡς, 
631 a—with ὅτε, 633, 1 ὃ. 

Supplements to the Part., 
361, 8. 

Supplementary Aorist, 270, 
etc. 

Syllabie Augm., 234— with 
jue {vowel, 237 — omit- 
ted, 2 

Si Mabie of both quantities, 
τὸ 


'Synizesis, 393 66; 243, D., 3. 


Syncope, 61 ¢; Q5T, D. 


‘Taking part in,” with Gen- 
itive, 414,5; 419 a. 

Temporal Adj., 352, 4, Obs.— 
Augm., 234 ὃ; 235. 

Tenses, 225; 3 Prin. Tenses, 
521—Subord., 522— Tense 
Stems, 227. 

Tenis 32—for Asp/rates, 52, 


Time, in Acc., 399 b; 405 — 


in Genit., 4z6—in Dat., 443 
Adv. of with Genit., 415— 
kinds, degrees of, 434, Ly ὃ. 

Transitive ‘and Intransitive 
Meaning, 329, etc.; 476— 
Mid., 477. 

“Touch, ” and other Verbs 
with Genitive, 419 ὃ. 


Uncontracted Syll., 35, D., 1. 


Verba Contracta among Iter- 
atives, 336 d—Y. pura, im- 
pura, 247. 

Verbal Pred. , 361, 4—Nouns, 
225, 5—Stem, 245, etc. — 
Pres. Stem, 246; 260, 8 

Vocal Stems, 1 Perf. 280. 

Vowels, 24, etc.—in divis. of 
SylL, 470 — before others, 
74—long without Augm., 
235—Changes, 40, etc.—in 
2 Perf., 27S_—in derivation, 
540, Obs. 8; 


Weakening of Conson., 60. 
OW yogic expressed by Dat., 


Wi Whither,” expressed by Ac- 

cusative, 405. 

‘“‘Wish,” expressed in the 
Opt., 514, ete. 

Worth and Price, in the Gen- 
itive, 408, 6; 421. 


GREEK INDEX. 


a. 
ἃ for n, 24, D. 2; 41, D.; 115, 
D.1; 121, D.2; 235 D.; 270, 
Obs 


a for n, 277, D. 

« bec. ὦ, 268; 278—bec. 0,268. 
a bec. n, 40; 115, 1, c; 116, ἃ; 
2353; 270; 2685 278; 303. 
a bee. ε, 81, D.2; 169 D.; 243, 

2 


ib ees 

a bec. az, 24, D. 3. 

a from ao, aw, See ao. 

a after e, ε, p, 41; 115, 1, a; 
116, c; 121; 180; 261; 270;| 
273. 

a before vowels, 235. 

a, connecting vowel, 276; 
336, D.; 338, D.—in the ὃ 
Plur., 302, 3. 

a, characteristic of the First 
or Weak Aorist, 268. 

a,pivative, 360—in Adj. with 
the Genit. 414, Obs. 5. 

-a, ending of the Accus., 141; 
156: 173, Obs.; 181; 276. 
τα, quantity of, 117; 121; 161; 

169; 181, 1. 

-a, Plur. ending of Neuters, 
125, 2; 186; 141; 173. 

-a, Adverbs in, 202. 

-a, Nom. of Substant. in, 172. 

κα, from ao in the Geuit., 


ἀκούω. 

ἀδικέω, With the Accus., 396 
—Signif., 486, Obs. 

ae (an) into a, 38; into n, 243, 
D. 2—into aa, 336, D. 

aec into a, 38—into a, 243, 
Obs.—into az, 38, Obs. 

ἀέξω, 322, Ὁ. 18. 

ἄεσα, 327, D. 11. 

-atw, Verbs in, 353, 6—F nt. 
263. 

ἀηδών, Gen. Sing., 163. 

ane, 818, Ὁ. 3. 

arp, Masc., 140. 

az, in the Compar. for o or w, 
195—into 7, 235. 

-at, Elided, 64, D.—Short in 
regard to the Accent, 83, 
Obs.2; 108; 229; 268,Obs.1. 

αἱ, αἴθε, 866 ει, εἴθε. 

αἰδέομαι, αἴδομαι, 801, 1 : 326, 
10—Pass. Depon., 328, 2— 
with the Accus., 399. 

*Atdns, 177, Ὁ). 19 --- ἐν, εἰς, 
“Acéou, 411. 

αἰδώς, 163. 

-acv, in the Dual, 118, 4. 

ταινα, Fem. ending, 115, 1 ὃ. 

aivéw, 301, 3. 

αἴνυμαι, 319, Ὁ. 27. 

-atvw, Verbs in, 353, 7. 

αἴξ, of both genders, 140. 


122, Obs. 

ἀγαθὸς, Comparison, 199, 1. 

ἄγαμαι (ἀγάομαι), 312, S— 
Pass. Depon., 328, 2. 

ayavaktéw, With the Particip., 
592. : 

ἀγαπῶ, With the Dative, 439, 
Obs.—with the Partic. 592. 

ἀγγέλλομαι, CONStrued per- 
sonally,571—ayyéAAw, with 
a Partic., 593, 

ἄγε δή, 642,4 a. 

ἀγείρω, 2 Aor., 257, D.—Perf., 
275, 1. 

aynoxa, 279. 

ἀγινέω, 323, Ὁ. 39. 


aipéw, 327, 1—Perf., 275, Ὁ. 1 
—Distinct. between Act. 
and Mid., 481 b—Passive 
meaning, 483, 3. 

αἴρω, Aor., 270, Obs. 

-acs, Subst. in, 172. 

ταις, in the Dat. Pl., 119. 

αἰσθάνομαι, 322, 11—with the 
Gen.,420—with the Partic., 
591. 

αἰσχρός, Comparison of, 198. 

αἰσχύνομαι, With Acc., 399— 
with Dat., 439, Obs.—with 
Partic., 592—with the Inf., 
594—aicxivw, Perf., 286, 1). 

aitéw, With double Acc., 402. 


ἄγνυμι, 319, 13—Perf., 275, 2 ἀκαχίζω, 319, D. 30. 


—Signif. 330; 1. 


ἄγχει, 
—with the Genit., 415. 


ἀκέομαιε, 801, 1. 


omparison of, 203, Ὦ. ἀκήκοα, 275, 1; 280, Ob 


ἀκηχέδατο, 287, D. 


ἄμεναι. 


Gen., 420, and Obs.—with 
Partic., 591. 

ἄκρατος, Comparison of,196 b. 

ἀκροάομαι, Fut., 261 — with 
Gen., 420. 

ἄκων, Gen. Abs., 585 ὃ. 

ἄλαλκον, 326, 1). 11. 

ἀλάλημαιε, 275, Ὁ. 

ἀλάομαι, Pass. Depon., 32S, 2 
—Perf., 275, 1). 1. 

ἀλγεινός, Comparative of, 


hits): 

ἀλδήσκω, 824, D. 80. 

ἀλέασθαι, 269, Ὁ. 

ἄλειφαρ, 176. 

ἀλείφω, Perf., 275, 1. 

ἀλεκτρυών, Of both genders, 
140. : 

ἄλεν, dAnpevac, 325, D. ἃ, 

ἀλέξω, 326, 11. 

ἀλέω, 801, 1. 

ἄληθες, 165. 

ἄλθομαι, 326, Ὁ, 39. 

ἅλες, With Gen., 414, 2. 

ἁλίσκομαι, 327, 17—Perf., 275, 
2—Aor., 316, 12—with the 
Genit., 422. 

ἀλιεταίνω, 323, D. 37. 

ἀλκή, Dat. Sing., 175, Ὁ. 

ἀλλά, 629—cdAAa yap, 636, 6, 
d; ἀλλ᾽ ἡ, 629, Obs. 8---ἀλλ᾽ 
οὖν, 637, 2. 

ἀλλάσσω, 1 Aor. Pass., 294, 
Obs. 

ἀλλήλοιν, ete., 211. 

ἅλλομαι, 1 Aor., 270, Obs.— 
2 Aor., 316, D. 32. 

ἄλλος, 211—GAXo τι H3 ἄλλο 
τι; 608. 

ἄλλως τε καί, 624, 4. 

ἅλς, 150. 

ἀλύσκω, 824, 27, Obs. 

ἀλφάνω, 323, D. 88. 

ἁλῶναι, 324, 11. 

adorn né,irr’g. Nom.Sing.,145. 

ἅμα, With Dat., 436 c—with 
Part., 587, 1. 

ἁμαρτάνω, 322,12—with Gen., 
419 ὁ. 

ἀμβλίσκω, 324, 18. 

ἀμείβομαι, With Acc., 898, 


ἄγω, 2 Aor., 25T—Imper. Οὗ ἀκούω, Perf. Act., 275, 1—ldaueivwr, Signif., 109, 1, Obs. 


Aor., 268, D. 
ἀδελφός, Voc. Sing., 129, 


Perf. Mid., 288—with the 
Nom., 392, Obs.—with 


ἀμελέω, With Genit., 429, 
ἄμεναι, 312, Ὁ. 18. 


384 


GREEK INDEX. 


---. “se 


ἁμιλλάομαι. 
ἁμιλλάομαι, Depon. Pass., 
328, 2. 

αμνήμων, With Genit., 414, 3. 

ἄμοιρος, With Genit., 414, 5. 

apos, ἀμύς, 208, 1). 

ἀμπέχω, 53, d. 

ἀμπισχ. οὔμαι, 323, 26. 

ἀμπλακίσκω, 324, 23. 

ἀμπνύνθη, 298, )ὴ.---ἄμπνυτο͵ 
316, 1). 29. 

ἀμφί, 462 — without 
strophe, 90. 

ἀμφιέννυμι, 319, 5— Augm., 
240—with double Acc. “402. 

ἄμφω, ἀμφύτεροι, ΠΣ ΣΝ 
221 --- ἀμφοτέρωθεν, with 
Genit., 415. 

-av-, affixed to form the Pres-|. 
ent Stem, 322. 

av-, privative, 369. 

᾽ἄν, 566 ἐάν. 

*av, 639, 3—with particles of 
time, 557—in the Apodosis 
of Conditional Sentences, 
535; 5387; 541; Comp. 542 : 
546--with Aor. . 494, Obs. 1 
—with Subj., 513 — with 
Fut. Ind., 500, Obs.—with 
Imperf., 494, Obs. 1—with 
Ind., 536, ete.—with Inf. 
575, ‘ete.—with Opt., 516: 
546—with Part Cs, 595—with 
Relatives, 554; 555, Obs. 2. 

-av, Nom. Mase. and Neut., 
172. 

τᾶν for ων, Gen. Plur. of 
a-Decl., 118, D. 

ἄνα, 866 ἄναξ. 

ἀνά, 461—Apocope, 64, D.— 
without Anastr ophe, 90. 

ἀναβάλλομαι,νν ἢ Inf. ,560, 3. 

ἀναβιώσκομαι, ξ 924,11. 

ἀναγκαῖός εἰμι, construed per- 
sonally, 571. 

ἀναλίσκω, ἀναλώσω, 324, 19. 

iyapipvieka, with double|< 
Acc., 402. 

ἄναξ, Voc. Sing., 148, D. 

ἀνάξιος, With Genit., 414, 4. 

ἁνδάνω, 322, 23— Angm., 237. 

a ye Ps Dat. Pl., 175, D. 

ἀνέγνων, ἀνέγνωσα, Diff. of 
Signif., 329. D. 

ἄνευ, 445; 455, 5. 

ἀνέχομαι, double Augm., 240 
—with Part., 590. 

ἀνέῳγα, ἀνέῳχα, 319, 19—Dis-| ’ 
tinction, 279. 

ἀνήνοθεν, OTB, D. 

avrp, 153; 177, 1—Genit., 51, 
Obs. 2 

ἁνήρ, 65, “Obs. 1. 

ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, 601. 

ἀνοίγω, Augm., 237 — Perf., 
275, 2; 279. 

ἀνορθόω, double Augm., 240. 

ἄντα, : ἄντην, ἀντικρύ, 866 
ἀντε, 


ἀντέχομαι, With Genit., 419 ὃ. 


Ana- 


ἀρχήν. 

ἀντί, 451 -- without Ana- 
strophe, 90. 

ἄνω, Compar., 204 — with 
Genit., 415. 

ἄνωγα, 517, D. 11—Pluperf., 
283, D. 

ἄξιος, With Genit., 
with Inf., 562. 

ἀξιόχρεως, 184, 

ao into a, 37, D. 33; 122, D. 2 


414, 4— 


—into w, 37: 122, D. ry ees 
into ew, 81, D. a 122, D. 3 
b; 132; 243, D.3 


-a0, Genit. Sing. Ἔ 122, Obs., 
etc., D. 3 b. 

aol, into ῳ, 31. 

aov, inte ew, 243, D. 3 ὃ. 

aTayopew, W ith Part., 590.” 

uravtTaw, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
meaning, 266. 

ἀπαφίσκω, 324, 1). 33. 

ἀπεῖπων, 327, 12 

ἄπειρος, With Genit., 419 e. 

ἀπεχθάνομαι, 322, 16. 

:ἰἀπέχομαι, with Genit., 414, 3. 

ἀπό, 452—Apocope, 64, D.; 
Compar., 204. 

ἀποδίδομαι, With Genit., 421. 

ἀποδιδράσκω, with Acc., 398. 

οηἱἀάπόερσα, 270), Ὁ. 

:ἰἀπολαύω, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
meaning, 266—with Genit., 
419 ἃ. 

᾿Απόλλων, Acc., 171; Voce. 
148, Cbs 

ἀποστερέω, With Doub. Acc., 
402. 

ἀποτυγχάνω, With Genitive, 
419 6. 

ἀπούρας, 810, D. 18. 

ἀποφαίνω, with Part., 523. 

ἀπόχρη, 312, 6. 

ἅπτομαι, With Genit., 419 ὃ. 

ταρ, Subst. in, 172. 

ἄρα and dpa, Distinction, 99. 

ἄρα (ἄρ᾽ ἧς Apocope, 64, D.; 

1. 


apa, ἴῃ questions, 607 b—in- 
direct, 610; dp’ οὐ, dpa μή͵ 
607, Obs. 

ἀραρίσκω, 324, D, 34—Perf., 
205, D.1. 

ἀρείων, ἄριστος, 109, 1, 

s. 

ἀρέσκω, 824, 10. 

ἀρηρώς, 280, D. 

Ἄρης, LTT, 2. 


and 


βασιλεύς. 

ἄρχομαι and ἄρχω, Distinc- 
tion, 481 ὃ. 

ἄρχομαι, With Genit., 419 ὃ 
—with Inf., 560, 1—with 
Part., 590—with Inf. and 
Part., 594. 

ἄρχω, With Genit., 423—Diff. 
of Pres. and Aor., 498. 

τας, Ending of the Acc. Pl., 
141. 


-as, Fem. ins 138. 

-as, Neut. in, 139. 

-as, Subst. in, 172. 

ἄσμενος, 319, D. — Compar., 
196 b. 

ἄσσον, ἀσσοτέρω, 208, D. 

ἀστήρ, Dat. Pl., 153. 

ἄστυ, 168—Gend., 139. 

-atat, -ato,3 Pl. Mid., 226, D.: 

99, D. 6 ; 251, and D. 

ἀτάρ, αὐτάρ, 630, 4. 

ἅτε, With Patrt., 'SST, 6. 

ἄτερ, 455, 5. 

ἅττα, ἄττα, 214. 

av, αὖτε, 680, 3. 

slavéaro, alte 322, 13. 

~aus, Fem. in, 172. 

αὐτίκα, with Part., 587, 3. 

αὐτός, 200—position with the 
Art., 389—with Dat., 441, 
Obs.—in the Genit. with 
Possess., 474—for the Rel., 
605, Obs. — 6 αὐτός, With 
Dat., 480 ὃ. 

τ τ Ὁ with doub. Acc., 

402. 


apace, 250, D. 

ἀφίημι, 313, 1-Augm. 240. 

ἀφ᾽ ov, 556; 001. 

ἀφύσσω, 1 Aor. , 269, D. 

ἄχαρις, COMpRT. 193, D. 

ἄχθομαι, 326, 12 — Depon. 
Pass., 228, 2—with Patt., 
592. 

ἄχνυμαι, 319, D. 20 —Plup. 
287, D. 

Spiel, 69, Obs. 3; 445: 455 
b; without Elision, 64,Obs. 
1 Se οὗ, 556. 

-aw, Verbs in, 253, 2, and 
Obs. 2— lengthening, 240, 


-aw, “Pat. in, 263, D. 
β. inserted between μ and p, 


51, Obs. 2, and D.; β' for μ, 
sec 


μ. 
τάριον, Neutersin, 347, Obs.1. βαδιζω, Ἐπί. Mid. with Act. 


apkéw, Aor., 301, 1. 
ἁρμόττω, 250, Obs. — Fut., 
260, 3. 


apvéopat, Depon. Pass., 528, 2. 
apvos, etc.; 111, 8: 
ἄρνυμαι, Aor., 319, D. 29. 


meaning, 266. 
age? 321, 1, and D—Perf., 
ee "Aor., 316, 11} 
wes Mid., 268 D.—mean- 
ing, 329, ὁ οὐ the Perf., 
503. 


apow, 301, 1—Perf. Pass., 2τῦ, βάλλω, Aor., 316, Ὁ). 19 -- 
1.1. 


ἄῤῥην, 189, 3. 
ἀρύω, 801,1. 


ἀρχήν, 405, Obs. 2 


Perf., 282 —'signif., 476, 2. 
βάρδιστος, 198, D. 
βασίλεια and wa iy 7. 
βασιλεύς, 161, 


βασιλεύω. 


βασιλεύω, With Genit., 499--- 
Diff. of hae Aor., 498. 

Δεβρώθω, 324, 10. 13. 

βείομαι, δέσμαι! 265, Ὁ. 

βείω, βήῃ, etc., 316, D. 1. 

βελτίων, βέλτιστος, 199, 1. 


βιάζομαι, Pass. meaning, 
483, 3. 

βιβάς, 312, Ὁ. 14. 

βέβλος, Fem., 127, 5. 


βιβρώσκω, 324, 13—Aor., 316, 
ἐν 23—Perf. Part., 317, D. 
6. 
βιόω, Aor., 316, 13. 
PX, Redup., 274, Ex. 


GREEK INDEX. 


δεύτερος. 
2—with Genit., 417—with 
Dat., 432, 
γιγνώσκω, 324, 14—Aor., 316, 
14—with Part., 591. 
1h yv, Redupl. with, 274, 
X. 


yodw, 325, D. n. 

youu, LTT, 4. 

γοῦν, 641, 2. 

γραῦς, 159. 

γράφομαι, With Genit., 422. 
Be po uae and γράφω, Diff., 


γυνή, 177, ὅ. 


385 


ὁρατός, 

'δέχομαι, Perf., 273, D—2 Aor., 
316, 1). 34—Aor. Pass. Sig- 
nif., 328, 4. 

δέω (1 bind), 361, 2—Contrac- 
tion, 244, 1. 

δέω, δέομαι (Lam in want of), 
326, 15—with Genit., 418. 

δή, 642, 4—A flix, 218, 

δῆθεν, 642, 7. 

δῆλον ὅτε, 633, 1 a. 

δηλόω, Meanine, 476, 1—dn- 
λόω and δῆλός € we, With 
Part., 590. 

Δημήτηρ, 153. 

δήν, makes position, 77, D. 


βλάβεται, Hom. Pres., 249, Ὁ. ὃ inserted betw. v and p, 51, δήποτε, Aflix, 218. 
fdanro,Aor. Pass. ,299—with| Obs.2; 287, D.; 612—Char-|dy7ov, δήπουθεν, 642, 5. 


Acc., 396. acter, 251. See Dentals. 
βλαστάνω, 322, 14. dat, 642, 8. 
βλῆσθαι, etc., 316, 19. δαίμων, of two Genders, 140. 
βλίττω, 250, Obs. δαίνυμι, 319, Ὁ. 32 — Opt., 


βλώσκω, 324,12; 51, D. 

Boaw, Fut. Mid. with Act. 
meaning, 236. 

βόλεται, 366, 1). 14. 

βοῤῥᾶς, Genit. Sing., 12 


5. 

βόσκω, 326, 13. 

βότρυς, Masc., 140. 

βούλομαι, 326, 14— Augm., 
234,-Obs.—2 Sing. Pres. 
Mid. , 233,3—Depon. Pass., 
328, 2. 

βοῦς, 159; 160; 35, Obs.—of 
two Genders, 140. 

βράσσω, 250, Obs. 

βράσσων, 198, 1). 

βραχύς, with Inf., 562. 

βροτός, 51, Ὁ. 

Buve, 323, 32. 

βώσας, 35, 1). 1. 


19) 


sed | 


318, D. 

daiw, Meaning, 880, Ὁ. 9. 

δάκνω, 821, 8. 

δάκρυον, 175. 

δάμαρ, 147, 1, Ex. 

dauvnue, 312, 1). a—Aor. Subj. 
Pass., 298, Ὁ. 

δανείζω, Diff. of Act. and 
Mid., 481 ὃ. 

δαρθάνω, 322, 15. 

‘das, Accent. of Genit. Pl. and 
Dual, 142, 3. 

'δατέομαι, 325, D. b—1 Aor. 

Inf., 269, Ὁ. 
-de, affixed, 94; 212; 216— 


Enclitic, 92,5—Local Suf-| 


fix, 178. 
δέ, 628—S’ οὖν, 637, 2. 
δίατο, 269, Ὁ. 
δέγμαι, 312, 1). 14, ὃ. 
δέδαον, 824, 1). 28; 825, D. 40. 


vy, Pronunt., 4—Character of |d<deypuar, δέξω, etc., $18, Ὁ. 
Verbs, 251, Obs. — their|déd:a, δέδοικα, 31T, 5, and Ὁ. 


Fut., 260, 3—Perf., 279. 
γαμέω, 325, 1. 
γάνυμαι, 319, D. 31. 
yap, 636, 6—ycdp οὖν, 637, 2. 
yaotrp, 153—Fem., 149. 
vy, Char. of Verbal Stems, 
251, Obs. 
γέ, 641, 1— Affix, ibid. 
γέγονα, 327, 14. 
γεγωνέω, 325, D. a. 
γείνομαι, Signif., 329, 8. 


det (see δέω), With Acc. and} 


Inf., 567, Obs. 1—édec, 490. 
δείδω, forms Position,7T, D.— 
doubling of the ὃ, 234, Ὁ. 
δείκνυμι, 318—with Partic., 

593. 
deiva, Indef. Pronoun, 215. 
δεινός, With Inf., 662. 
decpn, 115. 
devdpoy, 175. 
δέομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2, 


7eXaw, 301, 1—Aor. Pass., 298] See δέω. 


—Fut. Mid. 

meaning, 266. 
γέλως, 169, D. 
yéuw, With Genit., 418. 
γενέσθαι, γενήσομαι, etc., 327, 


4, 
ἡέντο, 316, D. 33.. 
γεραιός, Compar., 194. 
γεύω, With Genit., 419, Ὁ. 
γηθέω, 325, 2. 
ynpacka, 324, 1—Aor., 316, 2. 
ει into ¢, 58; 251. 
γίγνομαι, 327, 14—Perf., 317, 


With 


Act. δέον, 586. 


δέπας, Dat. P]., 169, Ὁ. 
δέρκομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2 
—2 Aor., 257, D.; 59, D 
with Acc., 400 ὁ. 
δεσμός, Nom. and Acc. Pl, 
175, D. 
δεσπότης, Voc. Sing.121—Acce. 
Sing. 174, D. 
δεύομαι, 326, 1). 15. 
δεύτατος, 199, 1). (Defectives). 
δεύτερος, With Genitive, 410, 
bs. 3, 
L 


» 
ν 


-dns, Masc. in, 348. 

d7-ca, 326, Ὁ. 15. 

δῆτα, 642, 6. 

δὲ into €,5S83 251. 

dca, 448; 458—without Ana- 

- strophe, 90—with Inf. and 
Article, 574, 2, 3. 

dta, 181, Ὁ). 

διάγω, διαλείπω, 
with Part., 520. 

diacta, 115. 

δεαιτάω, With double Augm., 
240 


διατελέω, 


δεακονέίω, With doub. Augm., 
240. 

διαλ youa, Depon.Pass.,328, 
2—Redupl., 274, Ex.— with 
Dat., 486 a. 

διάλεκτος, Fem., 127, 5. 

διαφέρομαι, 436 a. 

δεαφέρω, 423; 440, 

διάφορος, 480 ὃ. ᾿ 

διδάσκω, 324, 28, Obs.—Aar., 
820, Ὁ. 40 -- ἢ double 
Acc., 402.--διδάσκομαι, 481. 

δίδημι, 818, 2, 

'Ιδέδωμε, Compounds — Mean- 

ing, 476, 2—with Inf., 561. 

'δειδράσκω, 324, 2—Aor., 316, 3. 

diecay, etc., 818, 1). 4. 

διζημαι, διζω, 318, 1). δ. 

δικάζομαι, Meaning, 481. 

δικαιός εἰμι, COLSUTEd per- 
sonally, 571. 

δίκην, free Acc., 404, Obs. 

1d ότε, 636, 2. 

διπλάσιος, δισσός, etc., 223— 
with Genit., 416, Obs. 3. 

dé a, 445. 

δὲψ άω, Contr., 244, 2. 

δεώκω, With Genit., 422. 

duws,Gen. Pl. and Dual,142, 3. 

δοίω, etc., 220, 1). 

δοκέω, 325, 3—with Inf., 560, 2 
—cunstr. personally, 571i. 

δοκός, Fem., 127, 5. 

δόξαν, Acc. Abs., 586, 

δόρυ, 177, 6. 

δουπέω, 325, D. 6. 

Ppaueds, δραμοῦμαι, etc., 927, 

I 


Ιδρατός, 300, Ὁ, 


386 


paw. 

dpaw, Aor. Pass., 298. 

ὁρόσος, Fem., 127, 5. 

δύναμαι, 312, "*9—Augm., 234, 
Obs.—Subj., Opt., Accent, 
309—Depon. Pass., 328, 9." 
with Inf., 560, 1. 

dis, Compounds with, 360, 
Obs.—Augm., 241. 

δύω, δύνω, 891, 1: 801, 4—1 Aor. 

Mid., 268, D.—2 "Aor., 316, 
16—Meanin g, 329, 4. 


for a, 268, D.—bec. a, 257 ; 

282; 285; 295; 298, 

e bec. n, 40; 147, 2; 151; 161, 
D.; 233, 4; 235; 293. 

e bec. εἰ, 24, Ὁ. 3; 42; 147,1; 
236: 243, Ὁ. B.; 270; 293, Ὁ. 

e bec. 0,165; 278; 340, Obs. 3 

—bec. w, 278. 

for digamma, 34, D. 4; 

237, D. 

e inserted, 264; 269, D. 

e rejected, 153; 243, Ὁ. B.; 

257, D.—in Synizesis, 59, D. 

contr. with preceding vow- 

el, 166, D. 

aftixed to the Stem, 322, 

Obs. ; 324, Obs. ; 325, ete. — 

considered as Stem- vowel, 

43. 

in the Augm., 236; 275. 

See Syllabic Augm. 

ein Redupl. ,275—as Redupl., 
274, 3, 4. 

€ connecting vowel, 233, 1, 
and Ὁ. 3, 6; 262; 336, D.: 
338, D. 

-e in Nom. Acc. and Vocative 
Dual, 1-41. 

ea bec. ἃ, 130—bec. n, 38. 

-ea for ea, 185, D.—for vy in 


m 


ε 


€ 


€ 


ε 


Acc. Sing., 185—in ι and! 


v Stems, 157—in Diphth. 
Stems, 161—bec. n and a, 
ibid.—bec. n in the Ace. 
Pl., ibid.—bec. a or n in 
Fem. of Adj., 188—Ending} 
of the Plup., 283, D. 

ξαγα, 275,23 319, 13. 

ea bec. y, 38—bec. ει, tbid., 
Obs. 

ἐάν, 639, 2—in Condit. Sent., 
535; 545; 54S— whether,” 
610—Comp. εἰς 

ἐάντε-ἐάντε, 627, 

ἔαξα, 319, 13. 

~eas bec. -εἰς in Acc. Pl., 157 
—from nas, 161, Obs. 

ἕαται, etc., 315, D. 2. 

ἘΠ τ 210—used as ἃ pos- 
Sessive, 472 a. 

ξάω, Augm., 236. 

ἐγγύς, Compar., 204 — with 
Genit., 415. 

ἐγδούπησα, 895; ἢὉ.. 6. 

ἐγείρω, 2 Aor. , 275, D.—Perf. 
275, 1; 317, D. 12—Mean- 
ing, 330, 2. 


GREEK INDEX. 


εἶπον. 
ἐγρήγορα, 275. 
ἔγχελυς, 158. 
ἐγώ, Synizesis, 66 --- ἔγωγε; 


Soave! 815, D.3; 327, Ὁ. 4. 

ἔδομαι, Fut., 265. See ἐσθέω. 

'ee DEC. εἰ, 36—bec. ec and n, 
243, D. B. — bec. n in the 
Dual. See - -n. 

éépxato, 281, Ὁ. 

-ees bec. εἰς in Nom. Ρ]., 157 
—bec. εἰς and ns, 161 a. 

-en for -era, 185, 1). 

éns, 213, D, 

ἐθίζω, Augm., 236. 

ec for ε, 24, 1). 3—for az, 267 
etc.—from e, ¢, See ε, ¢. 

ει, Redupl., 274, etc.—in the 
Plup., 283. 

-ec in the Dat. Sing., 157; 
161 b—connecting vowel, 
233, 1—3 Sing. Ind. Act., 
233, 2—2 Sing. Ind. Mid., 
933, 3. 

εἴ, 639, 1—Atonon, 97, 3—in 
Cond. Sent., 535 — wiih é 
Ind., 586—with Opt., 2 
etc.—for ἐών, 545, Obs. 2 

εἰ, εἴθε, εἰ yap, in a wish, Bid 

- whether” in Depend. 
Interr, Sent., 525; 610. 

εἰ-ἥ, 01 --- εἴ iby gee ἐάν ---- 

εἰ ἄρα, 681, Lice γάρ, 637, 


? 


117; 341, Obs. ; 
εἵατο, "315, D. 2. 
εἶδον, ’39T, 8. 

-ε' ἡ, Fem, in, 115, D. 2. 
εἰκε, EcKTOV, 817, D. T. 
εἴκοσι(ν), 68, 3; 220. 

etka, with Genit., 419 ὁ. 
εἰκών, Genit., 163. 

ΕΙΣ 025, D. d. 

εἰλήλουθα, 40, D.; 811, Ὁ. 18. 
εἴληφα, ΧΗΣ 274, Ex. 
etAoxa, 274, Ex.; 279, 

εἷλον, etc., 827, ἢ: 

εἴλω, 253, D3 Aor., 270, D. 
εἶμαι, 810, Ὁ. 5. 
εἵμαρται, "O74, Ex. 
εἰμί, 315, 1—Enclit., 


842, Obs. 


92, 3; 


OST’ 289; 291; 505; 
with Dat., 432—Accent of 
compounds of εἰμί, 315, 
Obs. 8-ὧν, 428, Obs. : 580; 
_585 b—1@ ὄντι, 441. 

wae 314, 1 — Meaning, 314, 


εἵνεκα, see ἕνεκα. 

εἴνυον, 319, 1). 5. 

εἴξασι, 811,1. 

-ecov, Neuters in, 345, 2. 

» εἴπερ, 639, 1. 

εἰπον, 327, 13—Aor. 
Accent, 333, 12. 


Imper. 


ἔμπειρος. 


τειρ, Subs. in, 172. 

εἵργνυμε, 319, 15. 

cipyw, Perf. and Pinp. , 287, D.. 
—with Genit., 419 e. 

εἴρηκα, 274, Ex.; 921, 18. 

ee 326, D. 16. 

εἴρω, 1 Aor. ., 210, D.—Perf. 
‘and Plup., 275, D. 2. 

εἷς, 2 Sing. of εἰμί, 92, Ὁ. 

εἰς, ἐς, 448. 449-Atonon, Of: 
2—with ‘Inf. and Art., 574, 
2-- εἰς 6, 556. 

“ELS, Nom: Pl. , 157; 161 d. 

-ers, Mase. and Fem. in, 172. 

-ecs, 2 Sing. Ind. Act., 233, 2. 


ἡ τείςτεσσα-εν, Adj. in, 352, 5: 


187—Dat. Plur., 50, Obs. 1 
149. 2 

εἶσα, def. Aor., 269, D. 

“ἐέσκω, 324, 1). 85. 

εἴσομαι, etc., 314, D. 1. 

εἴσω, With Genit., 415. 

seta, with Part., BST, 4, 

εἴτε, 94—eite- ΠΕΡῚ 611; 627. 

εἴωθα, 275,2; 278. 

ἐκ, aE. 69, Obs. 2; 448; 453— 
with Augm., 238—Atonon, 
97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
574, 8—unaltered, 45, Obs. ; 
47, Ex.—2& οὗ, 556; (01. 

ἑκάς, Compar., 203, Ὁ. 

ἐκεῖνος, 212. 


ἐκέκλετο, 257, D.; 61, D. 


6 d—ei καί, 640, 1- εἰ μή, [ἐκεχειρία, 53, 10 ἃ. 
639, 1. 


ἐκκλησιάζω, ‘Augm. «9 239. 


'πεία, Fem. in, 185—Quantity, ἐκλείπω, with Ace., 398. 


bcd nOcved, 822, D. 26. 

ἐκπλήττομαι, with Acc., 399, 

ἑκτός, 821, 6. 

ἐκτός, with Genit., 415. 

ἑκών, Genit. Abs, 585 b— 
ἑκὼν εἶναι, 510, Obs. 

ἐλάσσων, ἐχάχι σὲ: 199, 4 
πλάνος without ἢ, 626, 

8. 

ἐλαύνω, 821, 2—Fut., 263 — 
Perf., 275, 1—Plup., 287, D. 
—Meaning, 476, Ἧ 

ἐλέγχω, Perf. Mid., 275, 1; 
286, Obs. 

ἑλεῖν, 827, 1. 

ἐλευθερόω, with Genit., 419 e. 

ἐλθεῖν, ἐλεύσομαι, 327, 2, 


315, Obs. 2—with Partic. ΤᾺ PY ΤΣ 287, D. 
590,  ἑλίσσω, 236. 
Obs. — with Genit., 417 — ἑλκύω, ἕλκω, 801, 1—Augm., 


236. 
ἕλμινς, 50, Obs. 2. 
ἐλπιζε, with Ταῖς 569. 
ἔλπω, Perf., 275, D. 2—Mean- 
ing, 330, D. 10. 
ἔλσα, 270, D.; 325, D. d. 
ἐμαυτοῦ, 210—-Poss., 472 a. 
ἐμέμηκον, 283, Ὁ. 
ἐμέω, 801,1. 
ἔμμεναι, 315, D.1. 
ἕμμορα, 274, D. 
ἐμνήμυκα, 275, D. 1. 
ἔμπειρος, with Genit., 414, 3. 


ἔμπλεως. 


ἕμπλεως, With Genit., 414, 2. 

ἔμπροσθεν, with Genit., 415. 

ἐν (ἐν), 448; 456—unaltered 
in compounds, 49, Obs. 1— 
bef. p, 51, Obs. 2—Atonon, 
97, 2—with Inf. and Art., 
574, 4—év ᾧ, 556. 

-e(v), 3 Sing. uf 68, 4, 

-ev, Nom. of Neuters, 272. 

-ev,3 Pl. Aor. Pass., 293, Ὁ. 

τέναι, Inf., 276. 

ἐναίρω, Augm., 239. 

Ee τὐδα εν Depon. 
328, 2—Augn., 239. 

ἐναντίος, with Dat., 486 ὃ. 

ἔνασσα, Meaning, 329, D. 

ἐνδεής, With Genit., 414, 2. 

ἐνδύω, With double Act., 402 
—Meaning, 329, 4. 

éveikac (veixar), 327, D. 12. 

ἕνεκα, 445; 448; 445, S—with 
Inf. and Art, 574, 3. 

ἐνέπω, ἔννεπε, ἐνίσπω, etc., 
8.2.1.) 513. 

EePprepor; 199, D. (Defect.). 

ἐνήνοθεν, 275, D.2. 

ἐνήνοχα, 821, 12. 

Eve, 90. 

ἐνίπτω, 2 Aor., 257, Ὁ. 

ἐνίσσω, 250, D. 

ἕννυμι, 319, Ὄ. 

ἐνοχλέω, double Augm., 240. 

ἐντός, with Genit., 415. 

ἐντρέπομαι; with Genit., 420, 

ἐξελέγχω, with Part., 593. 

ἐξικνοῦμαι, with Genit., 419 c. 

ἐξόν, 586. 

ἔξω, Comparative, 204—with 
Genit., 415. 

eo bec. ov, 37—hec. ev, 37, Ὁ. 
π᾿ 1060: 1): >.233,D, 4: 243, 

_B. Cc. 

to, ev, tio, etc., 205, Ὁ. 

€a bec. οι, 87. 

ἔοικα, 317, 7; 275, 2—con- 
strued ‘personally, 571 — 
with Part., 590. 

ἔολπα, 275, D. 2. 

€opya, 327, D.3. 

ἑορτάζω, Augm., 237. 

ἑός, 208, Ὁ. 

-εος, Genit. in, 161, D. 

-eos, Adj. in, 352, 4; 183—for|é 
-ews, 184, D. 

εου bec. ov, 3T—bec. ev, 37, Ὁ. 
1; 243, D. B. 

ἐπαυρίσκομαι, 324, 24. 

ἐπεί, ὅ50---ἐπεάν, ἐπήν, ἐπάν, 
557; 635, 5—in Synizesis, 
66—with Aor. Ind., 493— 
*«whenever,” 558, Obs. 1. 

ἐπειδή, 556; 635, 6. 

ἔπειτα, With Part., 587, 4. 

ἐπί, 448; 463—with Inf. and|é 
Art., 514, 2, 4, 

ἐπίδοξος, ἐπικαίριός εἰμι, CON- 
strued eeeahy: 571. 

ἐπιέσασθαι, 319, 5 


ἐπιθυμέω, With Genit,, 420. 


Pass., 


GREEK INDEX. 


ἐτάθην. 
ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, 
pac, With Genit., 419 b; 420. 
ἐπελείπω, With Part., 590. 
bxapeNouat, Depon. Pass. 3928, 
2—with Genit., 420. 


émiotapat, 312, 10-—Accent. of 
Subj. andOpt.,309—Depon. ev, 202 — Augm. 


Pass., 328, 2. 
ἐπ ierviniov With Genit., 414, 3. 


387 


ζώννυμι. 


ἐπιλανθανο- ἐτάφην, Β66 θάπτω. 


etepos, With Genit.,416,Obs.3, 
ὀτησιαι, Genit. PI., 198. 
étopov, 326, 1). 44. 
ev bec. ef, 85, Ὁ. 2; 248, Obs. 
—from εο, cov, 566 €0, εου- 
in Com- 
pounds, 241. εὖ ποιέω, With 
Acc., 396. 


ἐπιτήδειός εἰμι, construed per-|evadov, 322, D. 23. 


sonally, 571. 
ἐπιτρέπω, with Tnf., 560, 1. 
ἔπλητο, 312, Ὁ. f. 
ἕπομαι, 327, 5—Augm., 236. 
ἔραζε, 118, D. 
ἔραμαι, 312, 11. 
épaw, AOY. Mid. 901, D.—with 
Genit., 420. 
ἐργάζομαι, Augm., 236. 
ἔργαθον, 319, 1). 15. 
ἔρδω, 821, 3. 
ἐρέσσω, 250,0bs.—Fut., 200,8. 
ἐρεύγομαι, 399, Ὁ. 40. 
ὀρηρέδαται, 287, D. 
ἐρίζω, with Dat., 436 a. 
ἐρέηρος, Nom. Pl., 175, D. 
ἕρπω, ἑρπύζω, Auem., "36. 
ἐῤῥάδαται, 287, 
éppw, 326, 11. 
ἔῤῥωγα, 218: 519, 24. 
ἐῤῥωμένος, Compar. , 196 b. 
Epon, 115. 
ἔρσην, 189, Ὁ. 
ἐρυγγάνω, 323, D. 40. 
ἐρύκω, 2 Aor., 257, Ὁ. 
‘puabat, etc., 314, D. 
ἐρύω, Aor. , 801, D. 
ἔρχαται, etc., 219, D. 15. 
ἔρχομαι, 821, 2. 
ἐρῶ, 327, 13, ‘and Obs. 
ἔρως, 177, D. 20. 
ἐρωτάω, With doub. Acc., 402. 
-es, Nom. of Neuters, 172. 
τες, Ending of Nom. ΡῚ., 141; 


73, 8 8, 2 Le 


εὔδιος, Compar., 195, 

εὐεργετέω, with "Acc., 396. 

εὐθύ, with Genit., 415: εὐθύς, 
with Part., 587, "3. 

ἐὐκτίμενος, 816, D. 25. 

ἐυλαβέομαι, Depon. Pass. ,328, 
2—with Acc., 399. 

εὔνους, Accent, 183—Compar., 
196 6. 

εὑρίσκω, 324, 25—with Part., 
591. 

εὐρύς, Ace. Sing., 161, Ὁ. 

τ-ευς, Genit. in, 161, D.; 165, Ὁ. 

-evs, Nom. Sins. oF 841, 1: 349, 
1; 1851; 

εὖτε, see ὅτε. 

εὐφαίνω, Meaning of the Aor, 
Pass., 228, 3 

-ευω, Verbs in, 358, 4. 

ἔφαγον, ὃ 821, 4. 

ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε, 001. 

ἔχεα, 209. 

ἐχθρός, Compar., 198, 

ἔχω, 327, 6 — Augm., 236 — 
Meaning, 476, 1— Diff. of 
Pres. and Aor. -» 49S—with 
Inf., 560, 1—with Part., 590 
— ἔχων, BQO By once! with 
Genit., 419 ὃ. 

ἕψω, 326, "19. 

ew for ao, see ao—in the At- 
tic Declens. -, 132, etc.—in 
Contracted Verbs, 243, D., 
Herod.—as one Syll., 401; 
Ὥ.53.Ὁ. 158. 12. ΤῸ. 


ἐσθίω, 315, Ὁ. 8 (ἔσθων : 821, 4 εὠ, Genit. Sing. 121, D. 3 b; 


—with Genit., 419 α. 

ἔσκον, 891, Ὁ. 

ἔσπεισμαι, 286, 1, Obs. 

ἑσπόμην, etc., 397, 5. 

ἔσπον, 327, Τ᾽. 18, 

τεσσα, Fem. of Adj., 187. 

ἕσσαι ,ϑίς, 269, 

-eaatv), D at. Pl., 141, D.; 153, 
D.; 158, D.; 165, D. 

Eeounas, 214, : 

ἕσσων, 199, 1). 2. 

ἔστε, * until,” 556. 

τεστερος, -εστατος, Compar. 
Ending, 196. 

ἑστήξω, 311, 291. 

ἐστί, Accented, , 96; 315, Obs. 
2 ἔστιν οἵ, ov, etc., 603. 


177, 11— Verbs in, 248 ; 
O53, 3— Fut., 260, 2; 264 ; 
263. 

ἕωθα, 275, D. 2. 

éwpev, etc., 312, D. 12. 

Bete: Genit. of’ d= -Declens., 


118, D 
ἕως (811), 556; 635, 7. 
ews, Decl., 163. 
-ews, Genit., 161, Obs. 


¢, Pronunt., 5—Pres. 

in, 251, Obs. 
ζάω, Contract., 244, 2. 
-Ce, Local Suffix, 178. 
ζεύγνυμε, 319, 16. 
“Ζεύς, 117,1. 


Stems 


ἑστιάω, Atlgm., 236 — with Céw, 801, ἐν 
Acc., 400 e—with Genit.,|@nAdw, with Acc., 398. 


419 d. 
ἔσχατος, 200; 391. 
ἔσω. Compar., 204. 
ἐτιίθην, 298. 


See εἴσω. 


-Cw, Char. of Verbs, 251, Obs. 
and D.—Fut.,260,3, Comp. 
263. 

ζώννυμι, 319, 9. 


988 


GREEK INDEX. 


n for a, 24, Ὁ hee Dea 25 
180, D.; 244, 2; 161, 

270, Obs. See e. 
ἡ after 0,180, Ex.—bec. w, 43. 

n Syll. Augm., 234, Obs. 

-n, Voc. Sing., 12i—in Ace. 
igh 157—in the Dual, 158 ; 
166—in the Acc. Sing. ᾿ 101, 
D.; 166—Conn. Vowel, 933° 
1—Ending of 1and8 Plur. 
Plup. , 283. 

-n,2 ae Ind. and Subj.Mid., 
* 238, 

ἢ and x Synizesis, 66—Diff., 
99; 643, 9 

ἤ (ie) τὴ (ie), 611, Obs. 

ἤ, in inttir. questions, 610— 
n and n-n, 626 a, and Obs. 
—i and ἢ ὥστε, With Inf., 

_ 566. 

ἡ), Interr., 607 b— really? se 


643, 9—) “γάρ, ἡ που, 608; 
. B86, 6 ἀ---ἡ μήν, 648, 9. 
“he spoke,” 312, 1, 
an rev, 914, 3 
ἡ βάσκω, 324, 3. 
ἤγαγον, 251. 
7,0€, 624 ὃ. 1. 


ι. 


ἥσσων, 199, 2. 

3 ἥσυχος, Compar. -, 195. 

ἥτοι, 94; 643, 11 --- ἥτοι- 7, 
626 a. 

ἦτορ, Gender, 139. 

ἡττάομαι, with Genit., 423. 

ἥττων, 199, 2. 

nite, 632, 5. 

γφίει, φάυ: 813, 1. 

ἦχα, 279. 

NXL, 21T, Dy 

WS, 168, D. 


1, Pronunt., 7—in the Perf,, 


286, 4—in the Weuk Pass.|c, Verbs in the Pres. 


Stem, 298—Nom. Sing. of 
tems in, 147, Obs. Ὁ" Af- 

fixed to Pres, and 2 Aor. 
Stems, 338, D.—bec. a, 307. 
See also Dentals. 

θανεῖν, 324, 4. 

Gantw, 54.c; 298. 

θαῤῥέω, With Acc., 809, 

θᾶσσον, See ταχύς. 

θάτερον, 65, Obs. 1. 

θαυμάζω, with Genit., 417, 
Obs. ; 422, Obs. 

Oavuacros ὅσος, ete., . 602. 


ἥδομαι, Depon. Pass., 328, 2— θεά, 115, D. 2; {1τ. 
with Dat., 489, Obs.—with θέλω, ἐθέλω, 326, 20. 


Part., 592. 
ἡ δύς, Fem., 185, D. 
ἤειρα, 270, D. 
ἧκα, 818. 
ἥκιστα, 199, 2. 
ἥκω, Meaning, 486, Obs. 
ἡλίκος, Attr, in, 600. 
ἤλιτον, 328, D. 37. 
ἤλυ θον, 397, 2 
ἥμαι, 315, 2. 
ἤμβροτον, 822, D. 12. 
ἡμέν-»»δέ, 094 b, 2 2. 
ἡμέ, ἦν, ἢ, 812, 1. 
nos, 506; 634, 4. 
ΠΣ 823, 36. 
ἤμπλακον, 324, 23. 
rugieca, 319, 5. 
τὴν, Nom., 172. 
ἤν, see ἐάν. 
ἤνεγκον, ἤνεικα, 327, 12. 
ἡνίκα, 556; 634, 3. 
iveTTaTOV, ODT, D. 
ἤνυτο, 810, D. 2s. 
no bec. w, 37 — -nos, na, nas, 
161, Obs. —nov bec. w, 37. 
ἧπαρ, 176. 
ἤπαφον, 324, D. 33. 
τηρ, Nom. 172. 
ἦρ, 142, 4, 
Ἡρακλῆς, 167, Ὁ. 
ἤραρον, 994, 1D. 34, 
ἤριπον, Meaning, 329, D. 
1 ponv, 326, 16. 
-ns, Nom. Pl., 161 d. 
-ns, Nom. Sing., 17 172; 174, D. 
-ns, Prop. Names in, 174. 
-ns, ἘΡᾺ in, 355—Comp., 197. 
εησι(ν), Dat. Plur. of a- Decl., 


3 


Bemus, 177, D. 21. 

-Ve(v), Suffix, 178, 2; 68, D.— 
for the Genitive, 205, D.; 
178, D. 

θεός, Voc. Sing., 129, D. 

θέρειος, 350. 

θέρομαι, Fut., 262, D. 

θέω, 248—Fut. , 260, 2. 

δ, λύε: as Fem. , 185, Obs. 

θην, Enclit., 92, 5; 643, 17. 

θηράω, with Accus., 29s. 

θι bec. oo, 57. 

-, Loe. Suff., 178, 1—Ending|¢. 
of 2P. Imper. , 2283; 302, 5; 
801. 

θιγγάνω, 322, 24, 

θλάω, 801, i. 

θνήσκω, 824, 4—Perf., 317, 3— 
Perf, Part., 276, D. _3 Fut., 
291— Signif, 486, Obs. 

θοϊμάτιον, “65, Obs. 1. 

θόρνυμαι, 324, D. 15. 

Op, 54a; 145. 

θρύπτω, 54 ¢. 

θρώσκω, 59; 324, 15. 

θυγάτηρ, 153. 

év- mpo- θυμέομαι, Depon. 
Pass., 328, 2. 

ἜΠΟΣ 119. 

θύω, 801, 2—Aor. Pass., 53, 


10 b. 
6ws,Genit., Pl. and Du.,142, 3. 
«, Pronunt.,4—Long by Nat., 


83, Obs. 1 — Lengthened, 
953, Obs.—i bec. 7, ex, o1, 


ἴσος. 

το, Locative Ending, 179 — 
Demonst., 212—Nenut. in, 
139; 172. 

“6, Nom. Ending in the PI, 
ee 9 — Dat. Sing., 141; 
πὲ sien ‘of the Opt., 228—Re- 
dupl., 308; 327, D. 17—Con- 
nect. Vowel, 348 ; 351—Af- 
fixed to the Stem in the 

Dat. Pl., 119; 134, 8. 

L, Subscribed, 8 : 12; 275 65, 
Obs. 2—Dat. dines 184, 8: 
169; 173, 2. 

with, 

50, etc.; 322, Obs. — their 
Put, , 260, Se 962. 

ca for ea 348, 

-ca, Fem. in, 346, 3; 
etc. 

ἴα, ins, tH, tw, 220, Ὁ. 1. 

ἰάομαι, feaning of the Aor. 
Pass., 328, 4. 

ἰαύω, 891, Ὁ). 47. 

-1aw Verbs i in, 353, Cbs. 2. 

ἰδέ (Conj. ), 624, 1—(Imper. » 
521,8; 888 

-cdzov, Neut. tin "54, 1, Obs. 

idcos, With Genit. 414, L-with 
Dat., 436 ὃ. 

ἴδρις, 158 ; 189, 3. 

ἱὸρύω, Aor. Pass., 298, D. 

ἱδρώς, 169, Ὁ), 

ἱερός, With Genit., 414, 1. 

ἱζάνω, 322, 

iCopat, 326, 21. 

τω, Verbs in, 353, 5— Γαΐ.» 

in, Char. of the Opt 298: 
802, 4. 

inp, 318, 1. 

ius, Super]., 193, Ὁ, 

ἴκμενος, 810, D.; 323, ΠΕ ΤῊΝ 

ἱκνέομαι, ἱκνοῦμαι, 828, 88--- 
1 Aor., 268, Ὁ. 

-(KOS, Adj. in, £51 — with 
Genit., 414, 6. 

iAdexopiat, 824, ὃ — Imper., 
312, D. 15 

tAcws, 184, 

ἱμάσσω, 250, Ὁ. 

τιν, Subs. in, 172— -εν, Dual 
Ending in Genit. and Dat., 
184, 6; 173, 4. 

iva, 638, 1—in Sentences of 
Purpose, 530. 

-cvos, Adj. in, 352, 3, 4, Obs. 

-co, Genit. Ending, 128, Db. 

-cov, Neut. in, 847, 1. 

-cos, Adj. in, 350. 

iEov, 323, D. 88. 

ipos, 85, D. 1. 

-ἰς, Nom. of Fem. in, 138; 172 
ioe ee in Acc. Sing., 
56 


ἴσκε, 824, D. 36. 


185, 


40; 27S—. of the Stem bec. τισκος, “10K, Subs. in, 347, 2. 
é; 157— Changes, 55; 108: ἴσος, ih be ,195—withDat., 


250, ete. 


36 


τς i 


GREEK INDEX. 


389 


~LOTEPOS. 
-tatepos, -ἰστατος, Compar., 


[é 

totnuct, Perf., 317, 4—Mean- 
ing, 329,1—of the Perf. 503. 

ἰσχύω, Diff. of Pres. and Aor., 
498. : 

ἰχθύς, Dat. Sing., 158, D.— 
Acc. Pl., 15S—Masce., 140. 

ἰχώρ, Acc. Sing., 175, D. 

-cwv, Nom. of Masc. in, 348, 
Obs. 

-1#v, τίστος, Compar., 198, 


κ, in οὐκ, 69, Obs. 1— New- 
Ton. for 7, 216, D—Asp. in 
the Perfect, 279. Sce also 
Gutturals. 

-xa, 1 Aor. in,,310. 

καθεδοῦμαι, 326, 21. 

καθεύδω, 820, 1S—Atigm., 240. 

κάθημαι, 315, 2—Atuym., 240. 

καθιζω, Fut., etc., 820, 21-- 
Augm., 240. 

kai, 624 b—Crasis, 65—with 
Numbers, 222—with Part., 
587, 5—xal ὅς, καὶ τόν, 369, 
2—kai δέ, 624, ---καί-καί, 
624, 2, 8-- καὶ δὴ καί, 624, 4 
—kat εἰ, 640, 2—kas τότε δή, 

. 682,4a. 

καίνυμαι, 319, D. 33. 

καίπερ, With Part., 5ST, 5. 

καίτοι, 630, 6; 94. 

καίω, 35, Obs.; 253, Obs.— 

. Future, 260, 2—1 Aorist, 
269, D. 

κακὸν λέγω, κακῶς ποιέω, With 
Acc., 402; 890. 

κακός, Compar., 199, 2. 

καλέω, 301, 3. 

καλός, Compar., 199, 6. 

κάμνω, 321, 9—Perfect, 282— 
with Acc., 400 6 — with 
Part., 590. 

κάνεον, κανοῦν, 131, 3. 

Kapa, LTT, D. 22. 

kaptepéw, With Part., 590. 

κατά, 448; 459—A pocope, 64, 
D. — with Inf. and Art., 
574, 2. 


κυνέω. 


312, 1). 16. 

κερδαίνω, Aor., 270, Obs.— 
Perf., 322, Obs. 

κέσκετο, 891, D. 

κῆαι, etc., 269, Ὁ. 

κήδω, 326, D. 41. 

κτρυξ, 88, Obs. 1; 145. 

κικλήσκω, 324, D. 31. 

κίνυμαι, 319, 1). 84. 

κίρνημι, 312, 10. ὃ. 

κιχάνω, 321, 18. 

κίχημι, 818, D.6; 322,18, 

κίχρημι, 812,1. 

κιών, etc., 319, Ὁ. 84, 

κλάζω, 251, Obs. — Meaning 
of the Perf. Act., 276, D. 

κλαίω, 253, Obs.; 326, 22— 
Fut., 260, 2. 

κλάω, 801, 1. 

κλείς, Acc., 156. 

κλείω, κλήω, Perf, Mid., 258. 

κλέπτης, Compar., 197. 

κλέπτω, Perfect, 279—Aorist 
Pass., 295. 

-κλ᾽ ς, Proper Names in, 167; 
174. 

κλίνω, Perf., 282. 

κλύω, Aor., 316, Ὁ. 27. 

κνάω, Contr., 244, 2. 

κνίσση, 115, 1). 2. 

κοινός, κοινωνέω, With Genit., 
414, 1; 419 a—with Dat., 
436 a, b. 

Kotos, κόσος, etc., 216, D. 

koAakevw, With Acc., 396. 

κόπτω and compounds, Mean- 
ing, 476, 2. 

κορέννυμι, 319, 0. 

κορέω, Aor., 801, D. 

κόρη, Koppn, 11. 

κορύσσω, 250, D. — Perfect, 

286, D. 

-xos, Adj. in, 351. 

kotéw, Aor., 801, Ὁ. — Perf. 
Part., 277, D. 

κράζω, 251—Perf., 317, 8. 

kpatéw, With Genit., 423. 

κρατός, etc., See Kapa. 

kpatus, Positive, 199, Ὁ. 1. 


καταπλήττομαι, With Acc., 
399. 


katnyopéw, Augm., 239. 
κάτω, Compar., 204, 
κεῖαι, etc., 209, D. 
κεῖμαι, 814,2. 
κεῖνος, Se ἐκεῖνος. 
κείρω, Fut., 262, D. 
κέκασμαι, 320, D. 33. 
κέκλημαι, Meaning, 503. 
κέκτημαι, 274, Ex. — Moods, 
289—Meaning, 503. 
κελαδέω. 325, Doc. 
κελεύω, Perf., 288. 
κέλλω, Fut., 266, Ex. 


κρείσσων, κράτιστος, 199, 1, 
bs. 


κρεμάννυμι, κρέμαμαι. 819, 2; 
812, 12—Acc. of Sub. and 
Opt., 309. 

κρεμόω, 319, D. 2. 

κρέσσων, 199, 1). 1. 

κρήμναμαι, 812, D. 6. 

κρίνω, 253, Obs.—Perf., 2582: 
286, Obs. 


'κρούω, Perf. Mid., 288. 


κρύπτω, With double Acc.,462. 
κτείνω, Aor., 316, 4. 

κτίννυμι, 319, 17. 

κτυπέω, 325, D. σ. 


κέλομαι. Aor., 257, Ὁ. 

κείν), 68, D.—Enclit., 92, 5. 
ee ἄν. 

κεντέω, 325, D. f. 


κυίσκω, 324, 21. 
κυκεών, Acc. Sing., 171, Ὁ, 
κυλίω, Perf. Mid., 288 


9 HO 
κυνέω, 323, 34. 


μακρών. 


κεράννυμε, 319, 1—Sub. ΜΙᾺ, κύντερος, 199, D. 


κυρέω, κύρω, 82, 4—Future, 
262, Ex.—with Part., 590. 

κύσαι, κίσσα, 323, 1), 84. 

κύων, LTT, 8. 

κωλύω, With Inf., 560, 3. 


Χ doubled after the Syll. 
Augm., 284, D.— Charac- 
ter, 252. 

A, μ, v, ρ, Metathesis, 59 — 
Position, 77, 7. and D.— 
Redupl., 274, 2—Fut. of 
Stems in, 262—<Aor., 270— 
Perf., 280. 

d,v,p,Monos. Stems in, Perf., 
¥S2—Aor. Pass., 298. 

λαγχάνω 322,27T—with Genit. 
and Acc., 419, Obs. 

λαγώς, 174. 

λάθρα, With Genit., 415. 

λάλος, Compar., 197. 

λαμβάνω, 322, 25—Perf., 274, 

x.—with Genit., 419 b— 
Meaning, 480. 

λάμψομαι, 822, Ὁ. 25. 

AavOdvw, 322, 26—with Acc., 
89S—with Part., 500. 

Aas, 177, 9. 

λάσκω, 324, 29, and Obs. 

Aéyouar, construed person- 
ally, 571. 

Aéyw (collect), Perf., 279—2 
Aor. M., 316, D. 35. 

λείπομαι, With Genit., 423. 

λέκτο, λέγμενος, etc., 316, D. 
36; 268, D. 

λέληκα, 324, 29. 

λέλογχα, 822, D. 21. 

λεύω, Perf. Mid., 288. 

λήθω, 829, 26. 

ληκέω, 824, D. 29. 

λύξομαι, 822, 21. 

λήψομαι, 322, 25. 

Ae bec. AA, 56; 252. 

λίσσομαι, 250, 1). 

AA, Pres. Stems in, £52. 

Ade, 244, Ὁ. 4. 

λόεσσα, 269, Ὁ. 

τὸ λοιπόν, 405, Obs. 2. 

λοῖσθος, λοίσθιος, 199, Ὁ. 

-λος, Adj. in, 852, Obs. 

λούω, Constr., 244, 4—1 Aor., 

D 


λυποῦμαι, With Dat., 439,Obs, 

λύω, 801, 2—Perf. Opt. Mid., 
289, D.—Aor., 316, 1), 28— 
with Genit., 419 e. 

Awiwv, Apatos, 199, 1. 


wu bef. p,51,Obs. 2—bef. ἃ bec. 
β, 51, D.—Change of pre- 
ceding Cons., 47; 286, 1— 


doubled after the Syll. 
Augm., 234, D. 
μά, 643, 16. 


-μα, Nom. cf Newiers, 343, 1; 


9. 
ἱμακράν, 405, Obs, 2. 


399 


GREEK INDEX. 


μάλα. 

μάλα, μᾶλλον, μάλιστα, 202-- 
μάλιστα δή, 042 α. 

μάν, See μήν. 

μανθάνω, 822, 2S—with Part., 
591. 

μάντις, Of both Genders, 140. 

μάρναμαι, Imper., 312, Ὁ. d. 

μαρτυρέω, 325, 5 

μάρτυς, 177, 10. 

μάσσων, μήκιστος, 198, D. 

μαστιζω, 251, Obs.—Future, 
260, 3. 

μάστιξ, 177, 1). 23. 

᾿ μάχομαι, μαχέομαι, 326, 23, 
and D.—with Dat. , 436 a. 

μέγας, 191 — Compar. -, 198 — 
μέγα, 401. 

μέδομαι, 820, D. 42. 

μεθύσκω, 224, 22. 

μείρομαι, Perf., 274, D. 

mets, 177, 1). 24, 

μείων, 8668 μικρός--- μεῖον With- 
out ἡ, 626, Obs. 

μέλας, 186 

μέλει, 326, 24—with Genit., 
420, 

μέλλω, 326, 25—Angm , 234, 
Obs. —as Fut., 801---πῶς, 7. 
οὐ μέλλω, 5U1, ‘Obs. 2. 

μέματον, etc., 317, D. 9. 

μέμβλεται, etc., 326, 1). 24. 

pin gee δ D.'58282,2Di5 
324, D.1 

ee das 313, D. 1. 

μέμνημαι,214, Ex.—Sub. Opt., 
289, D. — Meaning, 503 — 
with Part., 591. 


νέατος. 
Verbs of fearing, 512 ; 588 ; 


616, Obs. 3—with Future 
and Perf. Ind., 533, Obs.— 
583— 
in questions, 668—‘‘wheth- 
er perchance,” 610—p1 οὐ, 
ὅτι, 


with Hypoth. Part., 


621; 512; 
622, 4. 

μηδείς, μήπω, etc., 
οὕπω, etc. 

μηκάομαι, 325, Ὁ. ο. 

μήν, 643, 12. 

μήτηρ, 150, 153. 

-μι, 1 Pers. Sing. Act., 226; 


588 — μὴ 


302, 1 --- Subj., 233, D. 1; 


255, D. 
μίγνυμι, 319, 18. 
μικρός, Compar., 199, 3. 


μιμέομαι, Meaning, 928, 4— 
324, 6— 


with Acc., 888, 

μ'μνήσκω, 274, Ex. ; 
μιμνήσκομαι, with Genit., 
420. 


piv, 205. Ὁ. 


Mivas, Acc. Sing., 163, D.; 
114, Ὁ. 
μέσγω, 327, T—Aor. Mid., 816, 


D. 37. 
pv, in divis. of Syll., 72, 1. 
uva, Genit. Sing., 116 ὁ. 
μνήμων, With Genit., 414, 3. 
μολοῦμαι, 324, 12. 
μόνον ov, οὐχί, 622, δ, 
povopeyos, comp , 197. 
τμος, Mase. in, 342, 2—Adj. 
in, 352, Obs. 
μύζω, 326, 27. 


μέν, comp. bipcapivs δέ, 628— μυκάομαι, 825, D. p. 


μὲν οὖν, 081, 

-μεν,Ἱ Pers. Dual and Plural 
Act., 226. 

-wevac, -μεν, Inf. Act., 288, 
D. 3; 255, D.—Aor, Pass., 
2938, D.—in Verbs in με, 
302, D. 

μέντοι, 630, 5. 

μένω, 326, 26. 

μεσημβρία, 51, Obs. 2. 

μέσος, Compar., 195—Mean- 
ing, 301. 

μεστος, With Genit., 414, 2. 

μετά, 448; 464—Adverb, 446. 

μεταδιδωμε, petaAkup pave, 
with Genit., 419 a. 

perauéronac, Dep. Pass., 328, 
2—with Part., 592. 


μῦς, Masc., 140. 


v, before o (and Ὁ dropped, 
49: 147,13; 149; 187—bef. 


other Conson. Be 51—bee. Ὶ; 
51; 262—Present Stems ἴῃ, 
253 — dropped in Perfect 
Stems, 282; 286, 1, Obs.— 


inserted in 1 Aor. Pass., 


298, D. 


318, 3—movable, 68. 
-v,in the Acc. Sing., 134, 4; 
141; 155, etc. ; 


μεταξύ, 4453 448; 455, T— with Ue, in Hist. Tenses, 226; 


Part., 587, 2. 

τς ΤΙΣ Pass. mean., 
483, 3—Indir. Mid., 479. 

ΠΤ ΣῊ pétoxos, with Genit., 
419 a, and Obs.; 414, 5. 

ufxpr(s), 69, Observ. 3; 445; 
448; 455, 6; 556—without 
Elision, 64, Obs, 1. 

un, Synizesis, 66—Neg., 612, 
etc.—in sentences of pur- 
pose, 5830—with Verbs of 


) 
-va, affixed to Verb.-Siems, 
312, D. 
-vat, Inf, ate 63. 333, 1. 
ναί, 643, 1 
ναιετάω, ore » 24d, dts de 
ναῦς, 177, 5 la 


vd, vO, vr, dropped before σ. 


b0—1 41,1: 149. 


“ve, affixed to Verb.-Stems, 


323. 


prohibiting,518; 510—with|véaros, 200. 


see οὐδείς, 


—aflixed to Verb.- 
Stem, 321—dounbled after}. 
the Syll. Angm., 234, D.— 
doubled in the Pres. Stem, 


173, 8—in|é 
Neuters, 125—1 Pers. Sing. 
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226— 


οἴκαδε. 

νέμω, 326, 28. 

νέω, 2443—Fut., 260, 2. 

νή, 648, 15. i 

νέζω, 251, Obs. 

ikaw ᾽Ολύμπια, 400 e—Mean- 
ing, 486, Obs. 

viv, 205, D. 

ἀπο-, Sigurd €v-, προ- νοέομαι, 
Dep. Pass., 328, 2. 

νομίζω, with Genitiv 6, 417— 
with Inf., 569. 

-VOS, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 

vooéw, Diff. of Pres. and Aor., 
498, 

νόσος, Kem., 127, 5. 

-vt, 3 Plur. of Prine. Tenses 
Act., 226. 

yee Pl. Imper. Act., 228. 

-vv affixed to Verb.- -Stems, 
804, 2; 318, 1 

νύμφα, Voe. Sine., 117, D. 3. 

vi(v), 68, Ὁ. —Enclit., 92, 5— 
Diff. of νύν and viv, 99; "637, 
ὃ---νῦν δή, 642, 4 ο. 

νωΐτερος, 208, D. 


ἔ, 84: 48: 260. 

-&, Mase. ‘and Fem. in, 172. 
ξέω, 801,1. 

ξυρέω, 885, 6. ἢ 

ξύω, Perf. ᾿'Μ1ἃ., 288. 


o, bec. ov, 24, ig 3; 42; 147,1; 
"bec. οι, "24, D . 8—bee. @, 40: 
147, 2; 151; 193; 233, “i 
bec. ε, 243, D. e— drop ed 
after az, 194—for a, 268 SF 
354—Conn.Vow el, 178; "938, 
1; 354. 

-o, Genit. Ending, 122, Obs. ; 
128; 131, Ὁ. 

ὅ, for ὃς, 213, D.—Neut. for 
ὅτε, 633, 1—Crasis, 65. 

ὁ μέν---ὁ δέ.809,1----τὸν καὶ τόν, 
809,2, See τὸ. 

oa bec. w, 37—bec. a, 183. 

ode, 212; 475. See also De- 
monst. Pron. 

“d¢pecbar, With Acc., 400 6. 

ὄδωδα, 275, D.1. 

oe bec. ov, 37. 

oe: Dec. oc OF ov, 375 243, Obs. 

τοείδης, Adj. in, 359, 2, Obs. 

ὄζω, 326, 29—Perf. 275, D.1. 

on bec. , 37. 

θι, πόθι, τόθι, 217, D. 

ὀθούδεκαι 636, 3. 

ot from ε, 40—bee. ῳ, 235. 

τοι, dropped, 64, D. Short in 
regard to ‘Acc., 83, Obs. 2; 
108—Voe. ending, 163. 

οἴγνυμι, 319, 19. 

οἶδα, 317, 6—with Part., 501. 

οιδάνω, οἱδέω, 822, 19. 

0. Siar ove, 174, 'D. 

-oon, ending for -ova, 115, D. 2, 

Be Genit. and Dat. Dual, 

128, D.; 141, Ὁ. 

inode, Of: 178. 


GREEK INDEX. 


391 


οἰκεῖος. 

οἰκεῖος, With Genit., 414, 1— 
with Dat., 486 ὃ. 

οἴκοι, 179. 

ο κτρὸς, , Compar., 108, 

οἶμαι, 244. 

οιμώζω, 251, Obs.—Fut., 260, 30 
—Mean. of Fut. Mid. "266. 

-orv, ending of Genitive and 
Dative Dual, 141; 173, 4. 

οἰνοχοέω, Auem. ἂν 237, D. 

-oro, in the Genit., 
2 Pers. Sing. Opt. Mid., 
933, 5. 

οἷο, 213, D. 

οἴομαι, viowat, 326, 30—2 Pers. 
Sing. Pres., 233, 3— Dep. 
_Pass., 328, 2. 


ope. 
‘ros pr, With Verbs οἵ ὁ 
Fearing, 583, Obs. 
opaw, 327, 8—Double Augm. τ 
237—Perf., 821,8: 275, D.1 
—with Part., 591. 
ὀργαίνω, Aor, 270, Obs. 
ὀρῴγνυμε, 319, D. 36. 
opéyopat, wiih Gen! t., 419 ¢. 
opéovto, 820, D. 37. 
ὄρνις, 177, 12—Ace. 8} ng., 156.! 


128, D.—|6pvupie, 319, D. 37—2 ‘Avrist 


Mid., 316, D. 38. 
ὄρονται, 807, 1). 8. 
ορόω, 243, D.3a. 
ὄρσεο, 208, D. 
ὀρύσσω, Ῥογῇ,, ἐξ ale 
ὄρωρα, 320, D.3 


οἷος, Attr. and Article, 600—|-os, Neuters ee "943, 2, and 


with Inf, 691 —o'éorte, 94 
—o'ov, οἷα δή, With Part., 
_oST, 6. 
οἷς, 160. 
oice, 268, D.—o" cer, 327, 12. 
apiai(y), Dat. Pl., 128, D. 
οἴσω, etc., 327, 12. 


Obs. ; 139; 172—Ending of 
Genit., 141; 157, D.; ave? 
8,1 


és, Relative, 213—Demonst., 
212, D.; 213, Obs., and D.— 
for the Possess. of 1 and 2 
Pers., 471, Obs. ¢.; 208, Ὁ. 


οἴχομαι, οἱχνέω, 326, 31, Δ) ἔἕσος, Attr., 600—i cov, 601—'¢ 


D.—Meaning, 486, Obs.— 
with Part., 590. 
ὀλέκω, 319, D. 20. 
ὀλίγος, Compar., 199, 4. 
ὀλεγωρέω, With Genit., 420. 
ὀλισθάνω, 322, 20. 


ὄλλυμι, 819, 20—Meanine of |< 


Perf., 329, 9; 503 — Itera- 
tive, 337, D. 

ὅλος, Position, 390. 

᾽οΟλύμπια, 400 6. 

ὁμιλέω, With Dat., 480 a. 

ὄμνυμι, 319, 21— with the 
Acc., 399. 

ὅμοιος, ὁμοιόομαι, ὁμολογέω 
ὑμοῦ, etc., With Dat., 480 a, 
Lc 

Εν Ἰοτέσμαι, constr. person- 
ally, 57 

Bais, "319, 22. 

ὁμώνυμος, with Dat., 436 ὃ. 

ὅμως, 630, T—afler Participle, 
587, 5. 

-ov, Nom. of Neuters, 172. 

ὄνειρος, 175. 

ὀνίνημε, 312, 2—Acc. of Aor. 
Sub. and’ Opt. Mid., 3¢9— 
with Accus., 396. 

ὄνομαι, 314, Ὁ. 

ὀξύνω, Perf, Mid., 286, Obs. 

00 bec. ov, 36; 130. 

-oos, Adj. in, 183. 

Gov, 213, D. 

ὁπηνίκα, 634, 3. 

ὄπισθεν, with Genit., 415. 

ὁπότε, ὁπόταν, 556; 634, 1— 
‘fas often as,” 5 BES, Obs. 1. 

ὄπωπα, 275, D. 1. 

ὅπως, 632, 3—in sentences of 
purpose, 530—with ἄν, 531 

, Obs.—with Future Ind., 

B00; 653 — in Challenges 
and Warnings, 553, Obs.— 


ὅσον οὐ, 622, 5. 

ὁσσάτιος, 216, 1). 

ὥσσε, 177, D. 25. 

cots, 94—214, Obs. 2—Catis 
and ὁστιςοῦν, Mean., 600. 

bog ραίνομαι, 322, 21, and Obs. 

ὅτε, ὅταν, 5563 634, 1—with 
Aor. Ind., 403—* as ofien 
as,” 558, Obs. 1. 

ἐπραθὰ 8 τι, 214, Obs. 2. 

ὅτι, 633, 1—withont Elision, 
64, Obs. 1—in Dependent 
Declarative Sentences, £25 
—ore μή, 088,1 ὃ. 

ὁτίη, 218. 


'ὅτες, 214, D. 


ov from ο. See ο. 

του, Genitive ending, 122, 2; 
128; 134, 2—Conn. Vowel, 
233, 4 ee 2 Pers. Sing. Tmper. 
and Imperf. Mid. τ 288, 5 E 

οὐ, οὐκ, οὐχ, 69, Obs. Ἴ: 52, Ὄ. 
ὁ Atonous, 97, 4; 612, ete, 
—with Prohibitiv es, 499, 
Obs. —in questions, 608—oo 
γάρ, οὐ γὰρ ἀλλά, 636, 6 d. 
---οὐ 6,,7a, 6 2, Boia tl ἄρα, 
637, 1—od μή, 020---οὐ μήν 
Chevron ἀλλά, 622, 6— οὐ 
«μόνον-ἀλλὰ καί, 624, 6. 

ov, ol, ἕ, ete, Meaning, 471, 
Obs. ὃ. 

οὐδέ, 625, 1. 

obdecs, °21—Attr., Οθ2---οὐδέν 
622, 1. 


οὐκέτι, 622, 2. 


τους, Adj. 


πάσχω. 

οὔπω, 622, 2. 

οὐρέω, Augment, 281. 

in, 183; 802, 4— 
_Nom. of Subs. es 172. 

οὖς, 177, 18; 142, 3—Neut., 
140, 

οὐτάω, Aor., 316, 20, D. 

οὔτε, 94 dees ποῦτε jobre—obde, 
625, 2, and Obs. 

οὔτι, 622, 1. 

οὔτοι, 648, 10. 

οὗτος, 219; 475 ;—in address- 
ing, 898 τ σὺ τόν τι 212. 

otras): 69,Obs. 2—withPart., 
5ST, 4, 

οὐχί, οἵ, Obs. 

οὐχ ὅτι, οὐχ ἕπως, 622, 3, 

ὀφείλω ‘and opiddAw, D.fi., 253, 
Obs. 

ὀφείλω, 326, 82. 

ὀφέλλω,1 Aor., 270, Ὁ. 

ὀφλισκάνω, 322, 22. 

ὄφρα, 556; 635, 10.—fee ἵνα, 

og pts, Acc. Pl., 158, 

ὄχος, Pl., 174, D. 

ὄχωκα, 397, D. 6. 

ὄψιος, Comp., 195. 

ὄψομαι, 827, 9 ; 

ὀψοφάγος, Compar., 107, 

-ow, Length. in Contr. Verb, 
243, Dy A. ,3—- Attic Fut., 


2 3, D. 353, ry 
and Obs. 1. 
ma, doubled, 217, Ὁ. (62, D.)\— 


Aspir. in Perf., 279. 

παῖς, Genit., Plur. and Dual, 
142, 83—Voe. Sing. , 148—cf 
two Genders, 140. 

maiw, Perf. Mid., 288 

ἜΣΥΡΕ Compar., 194, 

πάλιν, in Compovs. before σ, 
49, Obs. 1. 

πάλλω, Aor. 257, 
Mid., 316, D. 40. 


D.=2eA or. 


πᾶν, 142, b—in Compcs. be- 
fore o, 49, Obs. 1. 

παντάπασι(ι , 68, ὃ ὃ. 

mapa, παραι, πάρ, 445, 1Π,.; 
465—Apoc., 64, D. 

mapa, 90. 

παρανομέω, irreg. Augm.,239. 

παραπλίσιος, With Dat., 436 
b—Compar., 195. 

παρατίθεμα:, 481. 

παραχωρέω, withGenit.,419 6. 

παρέχω and παρέχομαι, 480, 

παρέχω, with Inf., 561. 

παροινέω, double Aug., 240. 

παρόν, 586. 

mapos, 565; 635, 12. 

παῤῥησιάζομαϊ. "Augm. 65239: 


οὐκοῦν and οὔκουν, Diff. 99 :|ras,Genit. and Dat. Accent., 


οὐλόμενος, 319, D. 20. 
οὖν, 637, 2—Atfixed, 218, 
-ovv, Acc. Sing., 163, D. 
οὕνεκα, 636, 3. 

οὗξ, 65, Ὁ, 


14, 2—meaning with and 
without Art., 390, and Obs. 
πάσσω, 250, Obs. —Fut. 260, 3. 
πα ΒΔ 198, D. 
ere 327, 9—Ferf., 817, Ὁ. 
4, 


/ 


992 


, 
πατέομαι. 


πατέομαι, 325, be 

πατήρ, 153. 

παύομαι, Aorist, 298 — with 
Genit., 419 6. with Part. 
mean., 590. 

πείθω, Aorist, 257, D.—Perf., 
317, D. 15—Fut. and Aor. 


Part., 326, D. 43 — Mean- 


ing, 330, ἧς 503. 

πεινάω, Contr. 3 244, 2. 

πείσομαι, 327, 9. 

πελάζω, 1 Aor. Imper., 268, Ὁ. 

méhexus, Masc., 140; 157. 

πέμπω, Perf., 279. 

πένης, Compar., 192 — with 
Genit., 414, 2. 

πέποιθα, 317, D. 15. 

πέπονθα, 317, 1). 14. 

πέπραγα and πέπραχα, Diff., 
330. 

πέπρωται, 285, D. 

πέπταμαι, 274, Ex. 

πέπτωκα, 274, Ex.; 327, 15. 

πέπωκα, 327, 10. 

πέπων, Compar., 196 a. 

πέρ, 641, 8 —Enclit., 92, 5— 
Affix, 218. 

πέρα, With Genit., 415—Com- 
par., 200 

πέρδω, 326, 33. 

πέρθω, 2 Aor. , 257, D.; 59, D. 
—Aor. Inf. Mid., 316, D.41. 

περί, 448, III. ; 466—without 
Elision,64,Obs.1—Anastr., 
446— Adverb, ibid. — with 
Augm., 238. 

περιβάλλομαι, with double 
Acc., 4 

Die circ: περίειμι, With 
Genit., 423. 

πέρνημι, Part., 312, Ὁ. 6. 

πέρυσι(ν), 68,3 

πεσεῖν, 827, 15. 

πέσσω, 250, toe 

πετάννυμι, 819, 8 

Πετεώς, Genit. Sing., 131, D. 

πέτομαι, 326, 34—2 ‘Aor. ,6L Cs 
257, D.; 810, 5. 

πεύθομαι, 322, 29. 

πέφνον, 251, D. 

πεφυζότες, 211, Ὦ. 

mn, Enclit., 92, 4. 

πήγνυμι, 819, 23—2 Aorist 
Mid., 316, D. 39—Meaning, 
390, 4. 

πηνίκα, With Genit., 415. 

πῆχυς, Masc., 140; 154. 

πιεζέω, πιέζω, 325, 1). h. 

πῖθι, 316, 15. 

πίλναμαι, Aor., 312, D. f. 

πίμπλημι, 312, 3—with Gen- 
itive, 418. 

πίμπρημι, 312, 4. 

πίνω, 321, 4; 327, 10—Fnuture, 
265—Aor., 321, 4; 316, 15— 
.Me aning,329, 7—with Gen- 
itive, 419 d, and Obs. 

πίομαι, 265; 327, 10. 

mimiakw, 324, 20. 


GREEK INDEX. 


πράττω. 

πιπράσκω, 324, Ms 

πίπτω, 327, 15 — Pert. Part., 
817, D. 11. 

ridepes 220, D. 4. 

πιτνέω, 323, 35. 

πίτνημι, 312, D. g. 

mipavokw, 324, 1). 32. 

πίων, Compar., 196 a. 

πλάζω, 251, Obs. 

πλάσσω, 250, Obs. — 
260, 3. 

πλείων, πλεῖστος, 199, 5 — 
πλέον, Without ἡ, 626, Obs. 
---πλεῦν, 199, Ὁ). 5. 

πλέκω, Aor. Pass., 295. 

πλέω, 248—Fut., 260, 2; 264 
—Perf. Mid., 288. 

πλέως, 184 — with Genitive, 
414, 2, 

1A? ες 812, 8 --- with Genit., 
418. 

πλήν, 445; 455,9. 

πλήρ ns τὸ πότ with Genit., 
414,2; 418. 

ἈΡΞΈ Compar., 195—with 
Genit., 415. 

πλήσσω, > Aorist and Future}; 
Pass., 295. 

πλῆτο, 316, Ὁ. 22. 

-πλοῦς, in Multiplicat., 223. 

πλούσιος, With Genit., 414, 2. 

πλύνω, Perf., 282. 

πλώω, Aor., 316, Ὁ. ae 

mvéw, 248 —Ent., 260, 2; 264 
—Perf.,285, Ὁ. rath hee. be 
490 ec. 

Πνύξ, 177, 14. 

ποδός, see πούς. 

ποθέν, Encl., 92, 4. 

ποθέω, 801, 4. 

ποθί, Β66 πού. 

moi, Encl., 92, 4. 

ποιέω ANd ποιέομαι, 480 — 


with Genit., 417. 


Future, 


—Compos., 189, 3. 


480, Obs. 
πολλάκιζῶ, BO: Obs. 33 224. 


with Comp. , 440. 
Tovew, 801, 4 
πόῤῥω, ἐμὴ Ἂς Genit., 415. 
Voc., 148, Obs. 
ποτέ, Encl., 92, 4. 


Interr. Sentences, 525. 
ποτί, SC@ πρός. 
ποῦ, With Genitive, 415. 
πού (rox), Encl., 92, 4. 
πουλύς, Fem., 185, D. 
πούς, 142 ὃ; 147, 1, Ex. — 
Dat. Plur., 49, D.; 141, D.; 
149, D. —in Compos., 160. 
Masc., 140. 
πρᾷος, 191. 
πράττω, Meaning, 


476; 4. 


σ. 

πράττομαι, With double 

Acc., 402. 

πρέσβυς, 1TT, 15. 

πρήθω, 912, 4. 

πρίαμαι, 2 Aorist, 316, S§ — 
Accent. of Aor. Sub. Opt., 
309. 

πρίν, 556 ; 635, 11—with Inf, 
565, and Obs. 1, 2. 

πρίω, ’Perf. Mid., 288. 

πρό, 448, B; 454 — Crasis, 65 
—withAugm., in Compos. a 
238—with Inf. and Art., 
574, 3—mpo τοῦ, 369, 3. 

πρός ποτα apoti), 448, TLE 
467 — Adv., 446—with Inf. 
and Art., B14, 2,4. 

πρόσθεν, πο ΕΝ with Genit., 

™posi,Kov, 586. 

mposwrov, Nom. Act. Plur., 
175, D 

πρότερος, πρῶτος, 200. 

προὔργου, Compar., 195, 

πρώιος, Compar., 199. 

πτήσσω, 810, Ὁ. 21. 

πτίσσω, 250, Obs. — Future, 
260, 3. 

πτύω, 801, 1. 

πτωχός, Compar., 197. 

πυθέσθαι, 322, 29. 

Πυκνός, 177, 14. 

πύματος, 190, Ὁ. (Defect.). 


πυνθάνομαι, 822, 29 — with 
Genit., 420. 

mvp, 142 b; 151; 175; Neut., 
140. 


πώ, ww(s), Encl., 92, 4. 
πῶς, With Genit., 415 — πῶς 
yap οὐ, 686, 6d. 


p, doubled, 62 — after the 
Augm. ,284—afier Redupl., 
274, 4—-Metathesis, 59—in 


πόλις, 157, D.— Gender, 188 ὃ 2 ‘Aor. , 257, D.—p, be, 13. 


pa, Encl., 92, ’5.—See ὁ ἄρα. 


πολιτεύω and woXstetopins, ῥάβδος, Fem., 127, 5. 


ῥᾷδιος, Compar., 199, 7 
ῥαίνω, Ἂν 287, D. 


πολύς, 191 — Compar., 199, 5 pelo, 327, 3 
-πολύ, 404, Obs. - πολλῷ, ῥερυπωμένος, 274, D. 


pew, 248 ; 326, 35—Fut., 
ῥήγνυμι, 819, 245 


ing, 0,5. 


260, 2. 
278—_M ean- 


Ποσειδῶν, Acc. Sing., 171 — ῥηθήσομαι, etc., 327, 13. 


ῥιγέω, 325, D. 7. 
ῥίγιον, 199, D. 


πότερον ἤ, 11: - ἴῃ Depend. ῥιγόω, Contr. 7 244, 3. 


ῥιπτέω, ῥίπτω, 325, 8, 
ῥῦσθαι, etc., 314, D. 
pwvvupe, 319, 10. 


o,2; 33 c—effect on preced- 
ing Vowel and Cons., 46, 
etc.; 260, etc. ; 286— Com- 
bin., 48—Assim. to p, ὃ0 ὃ 
—to r »b, v, p. 270, D.——bec. 
Spir. Asp., οὐ ὃ; "3083 397, 
5 Obs.—from τ ’see τι 


GREEK INDEX. 


σ 


σφέ. 


σ, dropped, 61 a, b—in Sigma|-ora, -σις, Fem. in, 342, 1. 
Stems,166—in Pres.Stems,|ovryaw, Diff. of Pres. and 


233, 3, 4, 5—in the Future, 
262, Obs., etc. —in the 1 


Aor., 498 — Mean. of Fut. 
Mid., 266. 


Aor., 268; 269, D.; 270 —|-o:uos, Adj. in, 352, Obs. 


in the 2 Aor. Mid., 307—in 
the Perl. and Plup. Mid., 
984, Ὁ... 

c, inserted in the Perf., 288 
—in the Weak Pass. Stem, 


σιωπάω, Meaning of Fut. 
Mid., 266. 

ok, in forming Inchoatives, 
324—Iteratives, 834, D.,etc. 

σκεδάννυμει, 319, 4. 


298—in the Verb. Adj., 300|cxéAAw, Aor., 316, 10—Mean- 


—in Deriv., 340, Obs. 2—in 
Compos., 358, 2. 

o, doubled in the Dat. Plur., 
158, D.—in the Fut., 261, 
D.—in the 1 Aor., 269, D.— 
after Syl. Augm., 234, D. 

s, dropped, 69, Obsery. 3—in 
Compar., 204. 

ς, ending of Nom. Sing., 173, 
15 113; 122, 1; 134,13 141; 
145; 147, 1; 155; 169 — 
wanting, 122, D.1; 147, 2; 
151; 163. 

s, ending of Dat. Plur., 119; 
134, S—of Acc. Pl., 134, 10; 
173, T—of 2 Person Sing. 
in Hist. Tenses Act., 226 
—Nom. of Fem., 348; 349, 


bs. 

-σα, Fem. ending, 187. 

σαλπίζω, 251, Obs. 

-σαν, 3 Pl. in Preter., 302, 7. 

Σαρπηδών, 114, D. 

σβυνυμι, 319, T—2 Aor., 316, 
9; 318, 5—Meaning, 329, 5. 

-ce, Local Suffix, 178. 

σεαυτοῦ, 210—Poss., 472 a. 

σέβομαι, Dep. Pass., 328, 2. 

-ceiw, Verbs in, 353, Obs. 2. 

ceiw, Perf. Mid., 288. 

σεύω, 248, D.—1 Aor., 269, D. 
—Perf. Mid., 274, D., 285, 
D.—2 Aor., 316, D. 30. 

σήπω, Mean. of Perf., 330, 6. 

ons, Gen., P]. and Du., 142, 3. 

of, after Cons., 61a; 286, 4. 

-σθα, in the 2 Pers. Sing. Sub. 
and Opt., 233, D. 1: 255, 
D. 1—Ind., 302, D.—in the 
1 Person Plur. Pres. Mid., 
233, D. 5. 

-σθε, 2 Pers. Plural, Imper. 
Mid., 228. 

-cfov, 1 Pers. Du. Pres. Mid., 
233, D. --- 8 Person Dual 
Imperf., 233, D. T—2 Pers. 
Du. Imper. Mid., 228. 

-cbm, -σθων, -σθωσαν, 3 Pers. 
Sing. Du. Pl. Imper. Mid., 
228. 

-σι, 2 Pers. Sing. of Princ. 
Tenses Act., 226; 302, 2. 

-or(v), Dat. Plur., 68,1; 119; 


ing, 329, 6. 

σκίδνημει, 312, Ὁ. ἢ; 319, 4. 

σκοπέω and έομαι, 480. 

σκότος, 174. 

Σκύλλη, 115, D. 2. 

σκώρ, 110. 

σμαω, Contr., 244, 2. 

-co, 2 Person Sing. Imper. 
Mid., 228. 

σπάω, 301, 1—Perf. Mid., 288. 

σπένδω, Fut., 260, 1 — Perf. 
Mid., 286, Obs. 

σπέος, 166, 1). 

σπέσθαι, etc., 327, 5. 

σπεύδω, With Inf., 560, 3. 

σπουδάζω, Meaning of Fut. 
Mid., 266. 

oo, 57; 250. 

-cow, Verbs in, 250—Future, 
260, 3. 

-στα, 307. 

στάζω, 251,Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 

στόχυς, Masc., 140. 

στειβω, 326, 80. 

στελλω, Perf., 282 --- Aorist 
Pagss., 295. 

στενάζω, 251, Obs.—Future, 
260, 3. 

στενωπός, Masc., 127, 2. 

στέργω, With Dat., 459, Obs. 

στερισκω, 324, 26—-with Gen- 
itive, 419 6. 

στίζω, 251,Obs.—Fut., 260, 3. 

atoa, 115 (Ex.). 

στορέννυμ', 319, 8. 

στόρνυμι, 319, 25. 

στοχάζομαι, With Genitive, 

6. 


στρέφω, Perf., 285—Meaning 
of Aor. Pass., 328, 3. 

στρώννυμι, 319, 11. 

στυγέω, 325, D. k. 

συμ βαίνω, Constr. personal- 
ly, 571. 

συμφωνέω, συνάδω, With Dat., 
436 a. 


σύν, ξύν, in Compos. bef. σ 
and ¢, 49, Obs. 1—in Dis- 
tributives, 223. 

-συνη, Hem., 346, 2. 

σύνοιδά μοι, With Part., 591, 
Obs 


suinsyupos; with Dat., 436 b. 


134, 8; 141; 160; 173, 0 ---ἰσῦς, 142 b—of two Genders, 


3 Pers. Sing. Pres. Subj., 


140. 


233, D.1; 255, D. 1—Local|opadAona, with Gen., 419, 6. 
ending, 179; 68, 2—3 Pers. [σφέ, 205, D.—opétepos, 472 bite bec. oo, 5T— inserted in 


Plur. and Sing., 68, 5. 


-σφός, 208, Ὁ. 


τι. 


σφηξ, Masc., 140. 
σχεθέειν, 338, D. 

oxés, etc., 316, 11; 327, 6. 
σχολαῖος, Compar., 194. 
awCw, 1 Aor. Pass., 298. 
Σωκράτης, 114. 

σῶς, 184. 

owtrp, Voc. Sing., 152. 


τ, Pronunt., 4—bec. 6, 54 — 
becomes o, 60 a; 67; 1ST— 
dropped, 147, 2; 169 — in 
the Perfect, 2S1—changes 
before, 286, 3 — affixed to 
Verb. Stem, 249—movabie, 
169, D. 

τάν, Defect., 177, 16. 

τάνυμαι, 319, D. 38. 

τάχα, 212---τὴν ταχίστην, 4C5, 
Obs. 2. 

ταχύς, Compar. θάσσων, 54 ὃ; 
198 


-te, 2 Pers. Plur. Act., 226— 
2 Plur. Imper. Act., 228. 
-τέ, 624 b — Enclit., 92, 5 — 
Affix, 94; 624, 5 — τε-καί, 
τέ-δέ, 624, 2, and Obs. 

τεθνήξω, 291. 

τεΐν, 205, D. 

τείνω, Perfect, 282—1 Aorist 
Pass., 298. 

-τειρα, Kem., 341, 2. 

τεκμήριον δέ, 636, 6 ὃ. 

τελέω, 301, 1—Perf. Mid., 288. 

τέμει, 321, D. 10. 

τέμνω, 321,10. 

τέο, τεῦ, τέω, CtC., 214, Ὁ. 

τεὸς, 208, D. 

-reos, Verb. Adj., 300; 596— 
with Dat., 484. 

-tepos, Compar., 182; 208, 
Obs.; 216. 

τέρπομαι, Aorist, 59, Ὁ. ; 257, 
ΠΝ 295, D.—with Partic., 
592. 

τεταγών, 257, D. 

tétaka, 282. 

tézAnka, 317, D. 10. 

τέτμον, 257, ἢ). 

τετραίνω, Aor., 270, Obs. 

tétpnxa, 277, D. 

τετυκεῖν, 322, 1). 30. 

τεύχω, 322, 30 — Perf. Mid., 
285, D 


, Ὁ, 

ti ko, Meaning, 330, 7. 

τηλικοῦτος, τηλικόςδε, 
475. 

-rnv, Ending of the 3 Person 
Dual of the Hist. Tenses, 
Act., 226—of the 2 Person 
Dual, 233, D. 7. 

-tnp, Mase. in, 341, 2; 137. 

-tnpcov, Neut. in, 345, 1. 

-rns, Nom. of Masc. in, 341, 
2; 349, 2—Voc. Sing., 121 
pis ἀντ of Fem. in, 346,1; 

38. 


212; 


Derivation, 351. 


994 


“Tl. 


«τι, 3 Pers. Bing. Act. in the 
Princip. Tenses, 226. 

ai; Why? 404, Obs.—7i γάρ; 
636, 6d — τε δή; 642,44 
- τί δήπου; 642, ὅ --- τί 
δῆτα; 642, ὑ---τί μαθων ; τί 
παθών ; 606, Obs. 2---τε μήν; 
6438, 12. 

τίη, 218. 

τίθημι, Aor. Pass., 53 ὃ. 

τίκτω, 249. 

τιμάω, With Genit., 421. 

τιμωρέομαι and -¢w, 451 b— 
-έομαι, With Acc., 890. 

τίνυμε, 819, Ὁ. 35. 

τίνω, 321, ὅ. 

τίπτε, 61, 1). 

Tipuvs, 50 ὃ, Obs. 2. 

-τις, Nom. Fem., 941,2: 549,1. 

τίς, τί, 214—for ὅςτις, θ09. 

τὶς, τὲ, 214—Hncl., 92, 1--- τινά, 
to be supplied, 563. 

τιτράω, 521. 16. 

τιτρώσκω, 824, 16. 

τιτύσκομαι, 322, 1). 30; 324, 
7. 37. 

τλῆναι, etc., 316, 6. 

τμήγω, 821, Ὁ. 10. 

τό, 819, Obs.; 104; 559 ὃ---τὸ 
μέν, τὸ δέ, 369, Obs. — τὸ 
πρίν, 635, 11. 

7601, τόθεν, τώς, 217, Ὁ. 

τοὶ, 643, 10—Encl., 92, 5. 


; am ; 
τοίγαρ, τοιγαροῦν, τοιγάρτοι, 


643, 10; 637, ὅ --- τοίνυν, 
081, 4. 
τοῖο, etc., 212, D. 


τοιοῦτος, τοιόςδε, 212; 475. 

τοῖςδεσι, 212, Ὁ. 

τόλμα, 115 (EX.). 

-τον. 2 and 8 Pers. Du. Act., 
2296—3 Pers. Dual Imperf., 
233, Ὁ. T—2 Pers. Du. Im- 
perf., 228. 

-τός, Verbal Adj. in, 300. 

τοσοῦτος, τοσόςδε, 2123 475. 

τότε, With Part., 587, 4. 

τοῦ, τῷ, 214, Obs. 1. 

-rtpa for-tep in the Dat.Plur., 
153. 

-zpa, Fem. in, 344, Obs. 

τρέπω, 2 Aorist Act., 257— 
2 Aorist Pass., 294—Perf.,, 
279; 285. 

ztpégpw,d4c—Perf., 279 ; 285— 
Aor. Pass., 295—Aor. Act. 
Meaning, 329, D. 

τρέχω, 54 ¢; 327, 11. 

τρήσω, 327, 16. 

-tpia, Fem. in, 341, 2—Quan- 
tity, 111. 

τριΐρης, Genit. Pl., 166. 

-τρις, Fem. in, 341, 2. 

τριχός, See θρίξ, 

-tpov, Neut. in, 344. 

τρώγω, 2 Aor. Act., 257. 

Tpws, Gen. Pl. and Du., 142, 3. 

τρώω, 324, D. 16. 


TT, -TTW, SEC Oo, -σσω. 


GREEK INDEX. 


φείδομαι. 

τυγχάνω, 322, 30, etc. — with 
the Genitive, 419 c— with 
Part., 590. 

τύνη, 205, Ὁ. 

τύπτω, 326, 51. 

τύφω, 54 6. 

τυχεῖν, 322, 80. 
Du. Imper. Act., 228. 

-τωρ, Nom. Mase. in, 241, 2; 
191. 

-τωσαν, 3 Pers. Plur. Imper. 
Act., 228. 


υ bec. F; 35, Ὁ. 2; 160; 248,} 


Obs.—bec. καὶ, 40 — bec. ev, 
40; 27S — bec. ov, 40, D.— 
of the Stem bec. ε, 157— 
Long by nature, 83, Obs. 1 
—lengthened, 252, Obs.— 
dropped, 253 —not drop- 
ped, 64. 

τυ, Neut. in, 1393 172. 

ὑβρίζω, with Acc., 396. 

ὑβριστής, Compar., 197. 

-vdp.ov, Neut. in, 847, Obs. 1. 

ὕδωρ, 17/6—Neut., 140. 

ve bec. ᾧ, 158. 

ve, Diphth., 28. 

-v.a, Fem. of Ferf. Partic., 
188, 

υἱός, 177, 17. 

ὕμιν, ὕμιν, etc., 207 — ὑμός, 
208, D. 

-vv, Nom. of Mase. and Nent. 
in, 172. 

τυνω, Verbs in, 353, 8. 

ὑπαί, 566 ὑπό, 

ὕπατος, 200. 

ὑπέρ (ὑπειρ), 448, IT., A. ; 460 
—with Inf. and Art., 574, 3. 

ὑπισχνοῦμαι, 323, 36 — with 
Tnf., 559. 

ὑπό, 448, 111.:; 468 —Apoc., 
64, 1). 

ὑποπτεύω, AUgM., 239. 

-us, Nom. Mase. and Fem., 
172 — Barytones in Acc. 
Sing., 156. 

ὑσμίνη, Dat. Sing., 118, Ὁ. 

ὕστερος, ὕστατος, ὑστάτιος, 
200; 199, Ὁ. 

ὕστερος, ἱστερέω. With Gen., 
410, Obs. ὃ: 423. 


φ, Pronunt., 6. 

φαάνθην, 321, D. 

φαεινός, Superl., 193, Ὁ. 

φαίνω, φαεινω, 321, V.—Perf., 
282—Meaning, 5380,8—Aor. 
Pass., 298, D. — Meaning, 
898, 3 — Diff. of Pres. and 
Aor., 498. 

φαίνομαι, φανερός εἶμι, With 

| Part., 590. 

i\packw, 324, 8. 

'φείδομαι, 326, D.45—Aor. and 
Fut., 257, D.—with Genit., 

419 e. ; ' 


ττω, ττων, 3 Pers. Sing. and| 


χρίω. 
φέρτε, 815, 1). 4. 


'φέρτερος, φέρτατος, φίριστος, 


199, ΠΤ 

φέρω, 327, 12—Imperat. of 1 
Aor. Act., 268, D.— Mean- 
ing, 476, 2--- φέρων, 5SO. 

φεύγω, 322, 31—Fut. Mid., 264 
—Perf. Mid., 285: D.—with 
Acc., 398—with Genit., 422 
— Meaning, 486, Obs. 


pans , 312, 5—Pres. Ind.Encl., 


By 8. 

φθάνω, 821, 8-- Aor., 316, 7 

—with Acc., 398 — with 

Part., 590. 

φθείρω, Perf., 282—Meaning, 
880, D. 11. 

¢ ix, 321, 6—Aor. Mid., 216, 
D. 26 


ΠΣ 805, Dis 
φίλος, Compar., 195. 
φιλοτιμέομαι, Dep. Pass., 


9 Be 

-pc(v), 178, D. 

φοβοῦμαι, Meaning of Aor., 
828, 83—with Inf., 560, 3. 

φοῖνιξ, 88, Obs. 13 145. 

goprvat, 886 φέρω. 

φράγνυμι, φάρηνυμε, 319, 26. 

φράζω, Aor., 257, D. 

φρέαρ, 176. 

φρήν, Fem., 140. 

φύγαδε, 118, 7. 

φυγγάνω, 322, 31, and Obs. 

-φυής, Adj. in, Acc. Sing., 166. 

φυλάττομαι, With Acc., 399. 

pipe, Fut., 262, Ὁ. 

φίω, Aor., 316, 17—Meaning, 
329, 3. 

φώς, φῴῷς, Genit. Plur. and 
Dual, 142, 3. 


χαίρω, 326, 38—with Dat ,439, 
Obs.—with Part., 592. 

xarkaw, 301, 1. 

xareraivo,withDat..439,Obs. 


'χαλεπός, With Inf., 562. 


t 


χαλεπῶς φέρω With αν, δρῶ, 

χανδάνω, 323, 1). 41. 

χανοῦμαι, 324, 9. 

χάριν, 404, Obs. 

χάρις, Compar. of compounds 
with, 197. 

χάσκω, 324, 9. 

χείρ, 177, 18S—Fem., 140. 

χείρων, χείριστος, 199, 2. 

χείσομαι, 323, D. 41 

xépns, etc., 199, D. 2. 

χέω, 248 — Fut., 265 — Perf., 
281—1 Aor., 269—2 Aor., 
316, D. 31. 

χραισμέω, 325, Ὁ). m. 

χράομαι, χράω, Contr., 244, 2 
—Future, 261—with Dat., 
438, Obs. 

χρή, 812, 6—xpFv, 490—with 
Acc. and Inf., 567, Obs, 1. 

χρήστης, Genit. Pl., 123. 

χρίω, Perf. Mid., 258. 


χρόα. 

χρόα, 115 (Ex.). 

χρώννυμε, 319, 12. 

χρώς, 169, 1). 

χωρίζω, With Genit., 419 6. 
χωρίς, 455, 5. 


Ww, 84; 48; 260. 

-, Subs. in, 172. 

wate, Perf. Mid., 288—with 
Genit., 419 b. 

Waw, Contr., 244, 2. 

ψεύδομαι, With Geuit., 419 ὁ. 


ὦ, for o, 276, D.—See Att. 
Decie :s.—from o, see o— 
from 4, see n. 

τω, Hem. in, 188—Nom., 172 
— Ady. in, 204— Proper 
Namesin Acc. Sing. ,163,D. 
—in the Genit., 122, D.3 ὁ 
—Conn. Vowel, 233, 1—1 

_ Pers. Sing. Ind. Act., 233,2. 

ὠγμαι, 821, D. 6. 

ewdns, Adj. in, 359, 2 Obs. 


GREEK INDEX. 395 


« 


ως 


ὠθέω, 825, 9 9—Syll. Augm 
237 


ὥφελον. 


.|as, Atonon, 97, 8: $S—with 
Compar., 631 a—with Inf, 
ὡς εἰπεῖν, WS TO νῦν Elvat, 
etc. ,564—‘‘as hough,” etc., 
with Part., 588—“ when,” 
‘fas, 556—with Aor. Ind., 
493— “that,” in Dependent 
Declarative Sentences, 525 
—‘‘in order that,” in Seu- 
tences of Purpose, 530— 
with ἄν, 631 ὃ, Obs. —in 
expressing a wish, 514. 

ὡς, Preposit., 445; 448, A.; 


@AXoz, 65, D. 

ὠμμαῖι, 327, 8. 

-wv, Nom. of Mase. and Fem., 
172; 845, 3—Genit., 118: 
134,1: 141: 173, 5. 

ὠνάμην, etc., 3 4, D. 

"ὦναξ, 65, D. 

ὠνέομαι, Syll. Augm., 237— 
Perf., 275, 2—with Genit.. 
421. 

ὥξυμ͵ και, 286, 1, Obs. 

τωρ, Subs. in, 172. 450. 

@paat(v), 179. ὥςπερ, 6832—with Part., 588. 

-we, Nom. 172— Adj., 184 ---ἰ ὥςτε, 94; 5665 632, 4—with 
Perf. Part.,276; 188S—Fem.,} Inf., 566—joined with μή, 
13S8—Adv., 201; 2083—End-| 617, Obs. 2. 
ing of Genit. Sing. in, 161) ὦτός, see ots. 

| —with ἐ- and v- Stems, 157}v, Diphth., 26, D. 

—in -ev Stems, 161 a. ωὗὑτός, etc., 209, 1). 

‘@s and és, 911. ὠφελέω, With Acc., 800. 

lac and ὥς, Diff., $9; 217, Ὁ. :[ὥφελον, 890. 82—-in express: 

631. ing a Wich, 515. 


4 ao ww, 

Vet CB. 
SS. Ὁ τ ΞΖ, 
SNE “- 
ἄμ, ἢ . tam 
τ, τοῖς fe Ἢ Ss 
ae — 

a apie νει at Sa 

=: THE END ex 
ny ae * 2 Ets 

Ww 


“BOSTON COLLEGE LI BRARY 


UNIVERSITY HEIGHTS 
CHESTNUT HILL, MASS. 


᾿ 


Books may be kept for two weeks and may be - 


renewed for the same period, unless reserved. 


Two cents a day is charged for each book kept 


overtime. 


he ie’ Tf you cannot find what you want, ask the 


Librarian who will be glad to help you. 


The borrower is responsible for books drawn 


on his card and for all fines accruing on the same. 


ah an Ἄνα Wine ee 


=m ap Fr ag eS ae 


Se NS, 
nn eons 


nat 
ae 
Prayers 
SPI ΟΝ 
πὸ : 
cs 


=) 


; one Os 


a ᾿ Ψ ν in Ἢ 

eee . : > - ων tation Ee . eee bin SoH tate Write Ne, = ν My ν ς ἣ 

δ ὃ n - wear x : ae San τα ΟΣ my Ν . mare 
33 =). 

vey 

besten 


ean ht 
woe 


“ τὶ 
ΤΥ, 


atta Nn 
Α At ose 
BN ate Ctrl δος ον] 2 Ἢ ν - ert οὶ . 
ee ie = “ ἡ SHAS Aap oe > Ἂς δι 
“4 ett Ψ' οἱ 3 ~ 5 ὡς 2 τῆ ἃ ῃ Ἢ ζ + areas 
Che ΝΟΣ Ν vara : SS . sone) < ᾿ ᾿ Ὗ i - - τως 


+) 


γῇ 


Ter νον 


339% 


᾿ oe 
ἈΚ te Siete 


os 


oY 
τί 


iatsicrrecteraervecenmerae 
a 


τὰς Ei Speen Shee SUAR ONS ὁ κα υδν ee mac - Kan συν . : 
a Atte none Ve NC eae τὰ Ss = as : 
ge Sek pn ma Saath eat hn eS a Seay hn Riacceoars 
Se Wa as SES SoS eater Noten ee 


EN aa νὰ τις ee RT ee mettle Tein salgh Thee t Ponce Soa oh ee ὡς 


sa. 


yah 


ἐνλέγνον 


oy yep. 
is 


ΠΥ} 


pratt 


ie 
t 


